diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
860 files changed, 22893 insertions, 6192 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-typec b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-typec new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..32623514ee87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-typec @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +These files are deprecated and will be removed. The same files are available +under /sys/bus/typec (see Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-typec). + +What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/svid +Date: April 2017 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + The SVID (Standard or Vendor ID) assigned by USB-IF for this + alternate mode. + +What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/mode<index>/ +Date: April 2017 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Every supported mode will have its own directory. The name of + a mode will be "mode<index>" (for example mode1), where <index> + is the actual index to the mode VDO returned by Discover Modes + USB power delivery command. + +What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/mode<index>/description +Date: April 2017 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows description of the mode. The description is optional for + the drivers, just like with the Billboard Devices. + +What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/mode<index>/vdo +Date: April 2017 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows the VDO in hexadecimal returned by Discover Modes command + for this mode. + +What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/mode<index>/active +Date: April 2017 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows if the mode is active or not. The attribute can be used + for entering/exiting the mode with partners and cable plugs, and + with the port alternate modes it can be used for disabling + support for specific alternate modes. Entering/exiting modes is + supported as synchronous operation so write(2) to the attribute + does not return until the enter/exit mode operation has + finished. The attribute is notified when the mode is + entered/exited so poll(2) on the attribute wakes up. + Entering/exiting a mode will also generate uevent KOBJ_CHANGE. + + Valid values: yes, no diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus index 3eaffbb2d468..3fed8fdb873d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-vmbus @@ -42,6 +42,13 @@ Contact: K. Y. Srinivasan <kys@microsoft.com> Description: The 16 bit vendor ID of the device Users: tools/hv/lsvmbus and user level RDMA libraries +What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/numa_node +Date: Jul 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Stephen Hemminger <sthemmin@microsoft.com> +Description: This NUMA node to which the VMBUS device is + attached, or -1 if the node is unknown. + What: /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/<UUID>/channels/<N> Date: September. 2017 KernelVersion: 4.14 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill index e1ba4a104753..80151a409d67 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ KernelVersion: v2.6.22 Contact: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org, Description: The rfkill class subsystem folder. Each registered rfkill driver is represented by an rfkillX - subfolder (X being an integer > 0). + subfolder (X being an integer >= 0). What: /sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/name @@ -48,8 +48,8 @@ Contact: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org Description: Current state of the transmitter. This file was scheduled to be removed in 2014, but due to its large number of users it will be sticking around for a bit - longer. Despite it being marked as stabe, the newer "hard" and - "soft" interfaces should be preffered, since it is not possible + longer. Despite it being marked as stable, the newer "hard" and + "soft" interfaces should be preferred, since it is not possible to express the 'soft and hard block' state of the rfkill driver through this interface. There will likely be another attempt to remove it in the future. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d9d117d457e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/ + asic_health + +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: This file shows ASIC health status. The possible values are: + 0 - health failed, 2 - health OK, 3 - ASIC in booting state. + + The files are read only. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/ + cpld1_version + cpld2_version + +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: These files show with which CPLD versions have been burned + on carrier and switch boards. + + The files are read only. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/select_iio +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: This file allows iio devices selection. + + Attribute select_iio can be written with 0 or with 1. It + selects which one of iio devices can be accessed. + + The file is read/write. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/psu1_on + /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/psu2_on + /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/pwr_cycle + /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/pwr_down +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: These files allow asserting system power cycling, switching + power supply units on and off and system's main power domain + shutdown. + Expected behavior: + When pwr_cycle is written 1: auxiliary power domain will go + down and after short period (about 1 second) up. + When psu1_on or psu2_on is written 1, related unit will be + disconnected from the power source, when written 0 - connected. + If both are written 1 - power supplies main power domain will + go down. + When pwr_down is written 1, system's main power domain will go + down. + + The files are write only. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/ + reset_aux_pwr_or_ref + reset_asic_thermal + reset_hotswap_or_halt + reset_hotswap_or_wd + reset_fw_reset + reset_long_pb + reset_main_pwr_fail + reset_short_pb + reset_sw_reset +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: These files show the system reset cause, as following: power + auxiliary outage or power refresh, ASIC thermal shutdown, halt, + hotswap, watchdog, firmware reset, long press power button, + short press power button, software reset. Value 1 in file means + this is reset cause, 0 - otherwise. Only one of the above + causes could be 1 at the same time, representing only last + reset cause. + + The files are read only. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-uvc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-uvc index 1ba0d0fda9c0..9281e2aa38df 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-uvc +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget-uvc @@ -263,3 +263,8 @@ Description: Specific streaming header descriptors is connected bmInfo - capabilities of this video streaming interface + +What: /sys/class/udc/udc.name/device/gadget/video4linux/video.name/function_name +Date: May 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Description: UVC configfs function instance name diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/ppc-memtrace b/Documentation/ABI/testing/ppc-memtrace index 2e8b93741270..9606aed33137 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/ppc-memtrace +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/ppc-memtrace @@ -13,10 +13,11 @@ Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org Description: Write an integer containing the size in bytes of the memory you want removed from each NUMA node to this file - it must be aligned to the memblock size. This amount of RAM will be removed - from the kernel mappings and the following debugfs files will be - created. This can only be successfully done once per boot. Once - memory is successfully removed from each node, the following - files are created. + from each NUMA node in the kernel mappings and the following + debugfs files will be created. Once memory is successfully + removed from each node, the following files are created. To + re-add memory to the kernel, echo 0 into this file (it will be + automatically onlined). What: /sys/kernel/debug/powerpc/memtrace/<node-id> Date: Aug 2017 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/procfs-diskstats b/Documentation/ABI/testing/procfs-diskstats index f91a973a37fe..abac31d216de 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/procfs-diskstats +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/procfs-diskstats @@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ Description: The /proc/diskstats file displays the I/O statistics of block devices. Each line contains the following 14 fields: + 1 - major number 2 - minor mumber 3 - device name @@ -19,4 +20,13 @@ Description: 12 - I/Os currently in progress 13 - time spent doing I/Os (ms) 14 - weighted time spent doing I/Os (ms) + + Kernel 4.18+ appends four more fields for discard + tracking putting the total at 18: + + 15 - discards completed successfully + 16 - discards merged + 17 - sectors discarded + 18 - time spent discarding + For more details refer to Documentation/iostats.txt diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-coresight-devices-tmc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-coresight-devices-tmc index 4fe677ed1305..ab49b9ac3bcb 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-coresight-devices-tmc +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-coresight-devices-tmc @@ -83,3 +83,11 @@ KernelVersion: 4.7 Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> Description: (R) Indicates the capabilities of the Coresight TMC. The value is read directly from the DEVID register, 0xFC8, + +What: /sys/bus/coresight/devices/<memory_map>.tmc/buffer_size +Date: December 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Mathieu Poirier <mathieu.poirier@linaro.org> +Description: (RW) Size of the trace buffer for TMC-ETR when used in SYSFS + mode. Writable only for TMC-ETR configurations. The value + should be aligned to the kernel pagesize. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio index 731146c3b138..a5b4f223641d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio @@ -197,6 +197,18 @@ Description: Angle of rotation. Units after application of scale and offset are radians. +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_positionrelative_x_raw +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_positionrelative_y_raw +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Relative position in direction x or y on a pad (may be + arbitrarily assigned but should match other such assignments on + device). + Units after application of scale and offset are milli percents + from the pad's size in both directions. Should be calibrated by + the consumer. + What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_x_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_y_raw What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_anglvel_z_raw @@ -1295,13 +1307,16 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensityY_raw What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensityY_ir_raw What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensityY_both_raw What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensityY_uv_raw +What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_intensityY_duv_raw KernelVersion: 3.4 Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: Unit-less light intensity. Modifiers both and ir indicate that measurements contain visible and infrared light - components or just infrared light, respectively. Modifier uv indicates - that measurements contain ultraviolet light components. + components or just infrared light, respectively. Modifier + uv indicates that measurements contain ultraviolet light + components. Modifier duv indicates that measurements + contain deep ultraviolet light components. What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_uvindex_input KernelVersion: 4.6 @@ -1663,3 +1678,10 @@ KernelVersion: 4.12 Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: Raw counter device counters direction for channel Y. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_phaseY_raw +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Raw (unscaled) phase difference reading from channel Y + that can be processed to radians.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-isl29501 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-isl29501 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d009cfbbd72b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-isl29501 @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_agc_gain +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_agc_gain_bias +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + This sensor has an automatic gain control (agc) loop + which sets the analog signal levels at an optimum + level by controlling programmable gain amplifiers. The + criteria for optimal gain is determined by the sensor. + + Return the actual gain value as an integer in [0; 65536] + range when read from. + + The agc gain read when measuring crosstalk shall be + written into in_proximity0_agc_gain_bias. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_calib_phase_temp_a +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_calib_phase_temp_b +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_calib_phase_light_a +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_calib_phase_light_b +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + The sensor is able to perform correction of distance + measurements due to changing temperature and ambient + light conditions. It can be programmed to correct for + a second order error polynomial. + + Phase data has to be collected when temperature and + ambient light are modulated independently. + + Then a least squares curve fit to a second order + polynomial has to be generated from the data. The + resultant curves have the form ax^2 + bx + c. + + From those two curves, a and b coefficients shall be + stored in in_proximity0_calib_phase_temp_a and + in_proximity0_calib_phase_temp_b for temperature and + in in_proximity0_calib_phase_light_a and + in_proximity0_calib_phase_light_b for ambient light. + + Those values must be integer in [0; 8355840] range. + + Finally, the c constant is set by the sensor + internally. + + The value stored in sensor is displayed when read from. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-light-si1133 b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-light-si1133 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6f130cdb26a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-light-si1133 @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_intensity_ir_small_raw +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Unit-less infrared intensity. The intensity is measured from 1 + dark photodiode. "small" indicate the surface area capturing + infrared. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_intensity_ir_large_raw +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Unit-less infrared intensity. The intensity is measured from 4 + dark photodiodes. "large" indicate the surface area capturing + infrared. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_intensity_large_raw +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Unit-less light intensity with more diodes. + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-aer_stats b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-aer_stats new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4b0318c99507 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-aer_stats @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +========================== +PCIe Device AER statistics +========================== +These attributes show up under all the devices that are AER capable. These +statistical counters indicate the errors "as seen/reported by the device". +Note that this may mean that if an endpoint is causing problems, the AER +counters may increment at its link partner (e.g. root port) because the +errors may be "seen" / reported by the link partner and not the +problematic endpoint itself (which may report all counters as 0 as it never +saw any problems). + +Where: /sys/bus/pci/devices/<dev>/aer_dev_correctable +Date: July 2018 +Kernel Version: 4.19.0 +Contact: linux-pci@vger.kernel.org, rajatja@google.com +Description: List of correctable errors seen and reported by this + PCI device using ERR_COR. Note that since multiple errors may + be reported using a single ERR_COR message, thus + TOTAL_ERR_COR at the end of the file may not match the actual + total of all the errors in the file. Sample output: +------------------------------------------------------------------------- +localhost /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1c.0 # cat aer_dev_correctable +Receiver Error 2 +Bad TLP 0 +Bad DLLP 0 +RELAY_NUM Rollover 0 +Replay Timer Timeout 0 +Advisory Non-Fatal 0 +Corrected Internal Error 0 +Header Log Overflow 0 +TOTAL_ERR_COR 2 +------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Where: /sys/bus/pci/devices/<dev>/aer_dev_fatal +Date: July 2018 +Kernel Version: 4.19.0 +Contact: linux-pci@vger.kernel.org, rajatja@google.com +Description: List of uncorrectable fatal errors seen and reported by this + PCI device using ERR_FATAL. Note that since multiple errors may + be reported using a single ERR_FATAL message, thus + TOTAL_ERR_FATAL at the end of the file may not match the actual + total of all the errors in the file. Sample output: +------------------------------------------------------------------------- +localhost /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1c.0 # cat aer_dev_fatal +Undefined 0 +Data Link Protocol 0 +Surprise Down Error 0 +Poisoned TLP 0 +Flow Control Protocol 0 +Completion Timeout 0 +Completer Abort 0 +Unexpected Completion 0 +Receiver Overflow 0 +Malformed TLP 0 +ECRC 0 +Unsupported Request 0 +ACS Violation 0 +Uncorrectable Internal Error 0 +MC Blocked TLP 0 +AtomicOp Egress Blocked 0 +TLP Prefix Blocked Error 0 +TOTAL_ERR_FATAL 0 +------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Where: /sys/bus/pci/devices/<dev>/aer_dev_nonfatal +Date: July 2018 +Kernel Version: 4.19.0 +Contact: linux-pci@vger.kernel.org, rajatja@google.com +Description: List of uncorrectable nonfatal errors seen and reported by this + PCI device using ERR_NONFATAL. Note that since multiple errors + may be reported using a single ERR_FATAL message, thus + TOTAL_ERR_NONFATAL at the end of the file may not match the + actual total of all the errors in the file. Sample output: +------------------------------------------------------------------------- +localhost /sys/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1c.0 # cat aer_dev_nonfatal +Undefined 0 +Data Link Protocol 0 +Surprise Down Error 0 +Poisoned TLP 0 +Flow Control Protocol 0 +Completion Timeout 0 +Completer Abort 0 +Unexpected Completion 0 +Receiver Overflow 0 +Malformed TLP 0 +ECRC 0 +Unsupported Request 0 +ACS Violation 0 +Uncorrectable Internal Error 0 +MC Blocked TLP 0 +AtomicOp Egress Blocked 0 +TLP Prefix Blocked Error 0 +TOTAL_ERR_NONFATAL 0 +------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +============================ +PCIe Rootport AER statistics +============================ +These attributes show up under only the rootports (or root complex event +collectors) that are AER capable. These indicate the number of error messages as +"reported to" the rootport. Please note that the rootports also transmit +(internally) the ERR_* messages for errors seen by the internal rootport PCI +device, so these counters include them and are thus cumulative of all the error +messages on the PCI hierarchy originating at that root port. + +Where: /sys/bus/pci/devices/<dev>/aer_stats/aer_rootport_total_err_cor +Date: July 2018 +Kernel Version: 4.19.0 +Contact: linux-pci@vger.kernel.org, rajatja@google.com +Description: Total number of ERR_COR messages reported to rootport. + +Where: /sys/bus/pci/devices/<dev>/aer_stats/aer_rootport_total_err_fatal +Date: July 2018 +Kernel Version: 4.19.0 +Contact: linux-pci@vger.kernel.org, rajatja@google.com +Description: Total number of ERR_FATAL messages reported to rootport. + +Where: /sys/bus/pci/devices/<dev>/aer_stats/aer_rootport_total_err_nonfatal +Date: July 2018 +Kernel Version: 4.19.0 +Contact: linux-pci@vger.kernel.org, rajatja@google.com +Description: Total number of ERR_NONFATAL messages reported to rootport. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-typec b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-typec new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..205d9c91e2e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-typec @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +What: /sys/bus/typec/devices/.../active +Date: July 2018 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows if the mode is active or not. The attribute can be used + for entering/exiting the mode. Entering/exiting modes is + supported as synchronous operation so write(2) to the attribute + does not return until the enter/exit mode operation has + finished. The attribute is notified when the mode is + entered/exited so poll(2) on the attribute wakes up. + Entering/exiting a mode will also generate uevent KOBJ_CHANGE. + + Valid values are boolean. + +What: /sys/bus/typec/devices/.../description +Date: July 2018 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows description of the mode. The description is optional for + the drivers, just like with the Billboard Devices. + +What: /sys/bus/typec/devices/.../mode +Date: July 2018 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + The index number of the mode returned by Discover Modes USB + Power Delivery command. Depending on the alternate mode, the + mode index may be significant. + + With some alternate modes (SVIDs), the mode index is assigned + for specific functionality in the specification for that + alternate mode. + + With other alternate modes, the mode index values are not + assigned, and can not be therefore used for identification. When + the mode index is not assigned, identifying the alternate mode + must be done with either mode VDO or the description. + +What: /sys/bus/typec/devices/.../svid +Date: July 2018 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + The Standard or Vendor ID (SVID) assigned by USB-IF for this + alternate mode. + +What: /sys/bus/typec/devices/.../vdo +Date: July 2018 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows the VDO in hexadecimal returned by Discover Modes command + for this mode. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-manager b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-manager index 23056c532fdd..5284fa33d4c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-manager +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-manager @@ -35,3 +35,27 @@ Description: Read fpga manager state as a string. * write complete = Doing post programming steps * write complete error = Error while doing post programming * operating = FPGA is programmed and operating + +What: /sys/class/fpga_manager/<fpga>/status +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Wu Hao <hao.wu@intel.com> +Description: Read fpga manager status as a string. + If FPGA programming operation fails, it could be caused by crc + error or incompatible bitstream image. The intent of this + interface is to provide more detailed information for FPGA + programming errors to userspace. This is a list of strings for + the supported status. + + * reconfig operation error - invalid operations detected by + reconfiguration hardware. + e.g. start reconfiguration + with errors not cleared + * reconfig CRC error - CRC error detected by + reconfiguration hardware. + * reconfig incompatible image - reconfiguration image is + incompatible with hardware + * reconfig IP protocol error - protocol errors detected by + reconfiguration hardware + * reconfig fifo overflow error - FIFO overflow detected by + reconfiguration hardware diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-region b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-region new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bc7ec644acc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-region @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +What: /sys/class/fpga_region/<region>/compat_id +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Wu Hao <hao.wu@intel.com> +Description: FPGA region id for compatibility check, e.g. compatibility + of the FPGA reconfiguration hardware and image. This value + is defined or calculated by the layer that is creating the + FPGA region. This interface returns the compat_id value or + just error code -ENOENT in case compat_id is not used. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-gnss b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-gnss new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2467b6900eae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-gnss @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +What: /sys/class/gnss/gnssN/type +Date: May 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: Johan Hovold <johan@kernel.org> +Description: + The GNSS receiver type. The currently identified types reflect + the protocol(s) supported by the receiver: + + "NMEA" NMEA 0183 + "SiRF" SiRF Binary + "UBX" UBX + + Note that also non-"NMEA" type receivers typically support a + subset of NMEA 0183 with vendor extensions (e.g. to allow + switching to a vendor protocol). diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei index 81ff6abf9673..17d7444a2397 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei @@ -54,3 +54,14 @@ Description: Configure tx queue limit Set maximal number of pending writes per opened session. + +What: /sys/class/mei/meiN/fw_ver +Date: May 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.18 +Contact: Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com> +Description: Display the ME firmware version. + + The version of the platform ME firmware is in format: + <platform>:<major>.<minor>.<milestone>.<build_no>. + There can be up to three such blocks for different + FW components. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-queues b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-queues index 0c0df91b1516..978b76358661 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-queues +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-queues @@ -42,6 +42,17 @@ Description: network device transmit queue. Possible vaules depend on the number of available CPU(s) in the system. +What: /sys/class/<iface>/queues/tx-<queue>/xps_rxqs +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.18.0 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Mask of the receive queue(s) currently enabled to participate + into the Transmit Packet Steering packet processing flow for this + network device transmit queue. Possible values depend on the + number of available receive queue(s) in the network device. + Default is disabled. + What: /sys/class/<iface>/queues/tx-<queue>/byte_queue_limits/hold_time Date: November 2011 KernelVersion: 3.3 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-typec b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-typec index 5be552e255e9..d7647b258c3c 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-typec +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-typec @@ -222,70 +222,12 @@ Description: available. The value can be polled. -Alternate Mode devices. +USB Type-C port alternate mode devices. -The alternate modes will have Standard or Vendor ID (SVID) assigned by USB-IF. -The ports, partners and cable plugs can have alternate modes. A supported SVID -will consist of a set of modes. Every SVID a port/partner/plug supports will -have a device created for it, and every supported mode for a supported SVID will -have its own directory under that device. Below <dev> refers to the device for -the alternate mode. - -What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/svid -Date: April 2017 -Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> -Description: - The SVID (Standard or Vendor ID) assigned by USB-IF for this - alternate mode. - -What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/mode<index>/ -Date: April 2017 -Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> -Description: - Every supported mode will have its own directory. The name of - a mode will be "mode<index>" (for example mode1), where <index> - is the actual index to the mode VDO returned by Discover Modes - USB power delivery command. - -What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/mode<index>/description -Date: April 2017 -Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> -Description: - Shows description of the mode. The description is optional for - the drivers, just like with the Billboard Devices. - -What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/mode<index>/vdo -Date: April 2017 -Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> -Description: - Shows the VDO in hexadecimal returned by Discover Modes command - for this mode. - -What: /sys/class/typec/<port|partner|cable>/<dev>/mode<index>/active -Date: April 2017 -Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> -Description: - Shows if the mode is active or not. The attribute can be used - for entering/exiting the mode with partners and cable plugs, and - with the port alternate modes it can be used for disabling - support for specific alternate modes. Entering/exiting modes is - supported as synchronous operation so write(2) to the attribute - does not return until the enter/exit mode operation has - finished. The attribute is notified when the mode is - entered/exited so poll(2) on the attribute wakes up. - Entering/exiting a mode will also generate uevent KOBJ_CHANGE. - - Valid values: yes, no - -What: /sys/class/typec/<port>/<dev>/mode<index>/supported_roles +What: /sys/class/typec/<port>/<alt mode>/supported_roles Date: April 2017 Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> Description: Space separated list of the supported roles. - This attribute is available for the devices describing the - alternate modes a port supports, and it will not be exposed with - the devices presenting the alternate modes the partners or cable - plugs support. - Valid values: source, sink diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu index 9c5e7732d249..73318225a368 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu @@ -476,6 +476,7 @@ What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities /sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/spectre_v1 /sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/spectre_v2 /sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/spec_store_bypass + /sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/l1tf Date: January 2018 Contact: Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org> Description: Information about CPU vulnerabilities @@ -487,3 +488,26 @@ Description: Information about CPU vulnerabilities "Not affected" CPU is not affected by the vulnerability "Vulnerable" CPU is affected and no mitigation in effect "Mitigation: $M" CPU is affected and mitigation $M is in effect + + Details about the l1tf file can be found in + Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst + +What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/smt + /sys/devices/system/cpu/smt/active + /sys/devices/system/cpu/smt/control +Date: June 2018 +Contact: Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org> +Description: Control Symetric Multi Threading (SMT) + + active: Tells whether SMT is active (enabled and siblings online) + + control: Read/write interface to control SMT. Possible + values: + + "on" SMT is enabled + "off" SMT is disabled + "forceoff" SMT is force disabled. Cannot be changed. + "notsupported" SMT is not supported by the CPU + + If control status is "forceoff" or "notsupported" writes + are rejected. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-bd9571mwv-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-bd9571mwv-regulator new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4d63a7904b94 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-bd9571mwv-regulator @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +What: /sys/bus/i2c/devices/.../bd9571mwv-regulator.*.auto/backup_mode +Date: Jul 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Geert Uytterhoeven <geert+renesas@glider.be> +Description: Read/write the current state of DDR Backup Mode, which controls + if DDR power rails will be kept powered during system suspend. + ("on"/"1" = enabled, "off"/"0" = disabled). + Two types of power switches (or control signals) can be used: + A. With a momentary power switch (or pulse signal), DDR + Backup Mode is enabled by default when available, as the + PMIC will be configured only during system suspend. + B. With a toggle power switch (or level signal), the + following steps must be followed exactly: + 1. Configure PMIC for backup mode, to change the role of + the accessory power switch from a power switch to a + wake-up switch, + 2. Switch accessory power switch off, to prepare for + system suspend, which is a manual step not controlled + by software, + 3. Suspend system, + 4. Switch accessory power switch on, to resume the + system. + DDR Backup Mode must be explicitly enabled by the user, + to invoke step 1. + See also Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bd9571mwv.txt. +Users: User space applications for embedded boards equipped with a + BD9571MWV PMIC. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-typec-displayport b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-typec-displayport new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..231471ad0d4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-typec-displayport @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +What: /sys/bus/typec/devices/.../displayport/configuration +Date: July 2018 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + Shows the current DisplayPort configuration for the connector. + Valid values are USB, source and sink. Source means DisplayPort + source, and sink means DisplayPort sink. + + All supported configurations are listed as space separated list + with the active one wrapped in square brackets. + + Source example: + + USB [source] sink + + The configuration can be changed by writing to the file + + Note. USB configuration does not equal to Exit Mode. It is + separate configuration defined in VESA DisplayPort Alt Mode on + USB Type-C Standard. Functionally it equals to the situation + where the mode has been exited (to exit the mode, see + Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-typec, and use file + /sys/bus/typec/devices/.../active). + +What: /sys/bus/typec/devices/.../displayport/pin_assignment +Date: July 2018 +Contact: Heikki Krogerus <heikki.krogerus@linux.intel.com> +Description: + VESA DisplayPort Alt Mode on USB Type-C Standard defines six + different pin assignments for USB Type-C connector that are + labeled A, B, C, D, E, and F. The supported pin assignments are + listed as space separated list with the active one wrapped in + square brackets. + + Example: + + C [D] + + Pin assignment can be changed by writing to the file. It is + possible to set pin assignment before configuration has been + set, but the assignment will not be active before the + connector is actually configured. + + Note. As of VESA DisplayPort Alt Mode on USB Type-C Standard + version 1.0b, pin assignments A, B, and F are deprecated. Only + pin assignment D can now carry simultaneously one channel of + USB SuperSpeed protocol. From user perspective pin assignments C + and E are equal, where all channels on the connector are used + for carrying DisplayPort protocol (allowing higher resolutions). diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs index 9b0123388f18..94a24aedcdb2 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-f2fs @@ -51,6 +51,14 @@ Description: Controls the dirty page count condition for the in-place-update policies. +What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/min_seq_blocks +Date: August 2018 +Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org> +Description: + Controls the dirty page count condition for batched sequential + writes in ->writepages. + + What: /sys/fs/f2fs/<disk>/min_hot_blocks Date: March 2017 Contact: "Jaegeuk Kim" <jaegeuk@kernel.org> diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-dfl-fme b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-dfl-fme new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8fa4febfa4b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-dfl-fme @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/dfl-fme.0/ports_num +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Wu Hao <hao.wu@intel.com> +Description: Read-only. One DFL FPGA device may have more than 1 + port/Accelerator Function Unit (AFU). It returns the + number of ports on the FPGA device when read it. + +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/dfl-fme.0/bitstream_id +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Wu Hao <hao.wu@intel.com> +Description: Read-only. It returns Bitstream (static FPGA region) + identifier number, which includes the detailed version + and other information of this static FPGA region. + +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/dfl-fme.0/bitstream_metadata +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Wu Hao <hao.wu@intel.com> +Description: Read-only. It returns Bitstream (static FPGA region) meta + data, which includes the synthesis date, seed and other + information of this static FPGA region. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-dfl-port b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-dfl-port new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6a92dda517b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-dfl-port @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/dfl-port.0/id +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Wu Hao <hao.wu@intel.com> +Description: Read-only. It returns id of this port. One DFL FPGA device + may have more than one port. Userspace could use this id to + distinguish different ports under same FPGA device. + +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/dfl-port.0/afu_id +Date: June 2018 +KernelVersion: 4.19 +Contact: Wu Hao <hao.wu@intel.com> +Description: Read-only. User can program different PR bitstreams to FPGA + Accelerator Function Unit (AFU) for different functions. It + returns uuid which could be used to identify which PR bitstream + is programmed in this AFU. diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX b/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX index 00c9a90b6f38..206b1d5c1e71 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/PCI/00-INDEX @@ -1,5 +1,7 @@ 00-INDEX - this file +acpi-info.txt + - info on how PCI host bridges are represented in ACPI MSI-HOWTO.txt - the Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI) Driver Guide HOWTO and FAQ. PCIEBUS-HOWTO.txt diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/acpi-info.txt b/Documentation/PCI/acpi-info.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3ffa3b03970e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/PCI/acpi-info.txt @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + ACPI considerations for PCI host bridges + +The general rule is that the ACPI namespace should describe everything the +OS might use unless there's another way for the OS to find it [1, 2]. + +For example, there's no standard hardware mechanism for enumerating PCI +host bridges, so the ACPI namespace must describe each host bridge, the +method for accessing PCI config space below it, the address space windows +the host bridge forwards to PCI (using _CRS), and the routing of legacy +INTx interrupts (using _PRT). + +PCI devices, which are below the host bridge, generally do not need to be +described via ACPI. The OS can discover them via the standard PCI +enumeration mechanism, using config accesses to discover and identify +devices and read and size their BARs. However, ACPI may describe PCI +devices if it provides power management or hotplug functionality for them +or if the device has INTx interrupts connected by platform interrupt +controllers and a _PRT is needed to describe those connections. + +ACPI resource description is done via _CRS objects of devices in the ACPI +namespace [2]. The _CRS is like a generalized PCI BAR: the OS can read +_CRS and figure out what resource is being consumed even if it doesn't have +a driver for the device [3]. That's important because it means an old OS +can work correctly even on a system with new devices unknown to the OS. +The new devices might not do anything, but the OS can at least make sure no +resources conflict with them. + +Static tables like MCFG, HPET, ECDT, etc., are *not* mechanisms for +reserving address space. The static tables are for things the OS needs to +know early in boot, before it can parse the ACPI namespace. If a new table +is defined, an old OS needs to operate correctly even though it ignores the +table. _CRS allows that because it is generic and understood by the old +OS; a static table does not. + +If the OS is expected to manage a non-discoverable device described via +ACPI, that device will have a specific _HID/_CID that tells the OS what +driver to bind to it, and the _CRS tells the OS and the driver where the +device's registers are. + +PCI host bridges are PNP0A03 or PNP0A08 devices. Their _CRS should +describe all the address space they consume. This includes all the windows +they forward down to the PCI bus, as well as registers of the host bridge +itself that are not forwarded to PCI. The host bridge registers include +things like secondary/subordinate bus registers that determine the bus +range below the bridge, window registers that describe the apertures, etc. +These are all device-specific, non-architected things, so the only way a +PNP0A03/PNP0A08 driver can manage them is via _PRS/_CRS/_SRS, which contain +the device-specific details. The host bridge registers also include ECAM +space, since it is consumed by the host bridge. + +ACPI defines a Consumer/Producer bit to distinguish the bridge registers +("Consumer") from the bridge apertures ("Producer") [4, 5], but early +BIOSes didn't use that bit correctly. The result is that the current ACPI +spec defines Consumer/Producer only for the Extended Address Space +descriptors; the bit should be ignored in the older QWord/DWord/Word +Address Space descriptors. Consequently, OSes have to assume all +QWord/DWord/Word descriptors are windows. + +Prior to the addition of Extended Address Space descriptors, the failure of +Consumer/Producer meant there was no way to describe bridge registers in +the PNP0A03/PNP0A08 device itself. The workaround was to describe the +bridge registers (including ECAM space) in PNP0C02 catch-all devices [6]. +With the exception of ECAM, the bridge register space is device-specific +anyway, so the generic PNP0A03/PNP0A08 driver (pci_root.c) has no need to +know about it. + +New architectures should be able to use "Consumer" Extended Address Space +descriptors in the PNP0A03 device for bridge registers, including ECAM, +although a strict interpretation of [6] might prohibit this. Old x86 and +ia64 kernels assume all address space descriptors, including "Consumer" +Extended Address Space ones, are windows, so it would not be safe to +describe bridge registers this way on those architectures. + +PNP0C02 "motherboard" devices are basically a catch-all. There's no +programming model for them other than "don't use these resources for +anything else." So a PNP0C02 _CRS should claim any address space that is +(1) not claimed by _CRS under any other device object in the ACPI namespace +and (2) should not be assigned by the OS to something else. + +The PCIe spec requires the Enhanced Configuration Access Method (ECAM) +unless there's a standard firmware interface for config access, e.g., the +ia64 SAL interface [7]. A host bridge consumes ECAM memory address space +and converts memory accesses into PCI configuration accesses. The spec +defines the ECAM address space layout and functionality; only the base of +the address space is device-specific. An ACPI OS learns the base address +from either the static MCFG table or a _CBA method in the PNP0A03 device. + +The MCFG table must describe the ECAM space of non-hot pluggable host +bridges [8]. Since MCFG is a static table and can't be updated by hotplug, +a _CBA method in the PNP0A03 device describes the ECAM space of a +hot-pluggable host bridge [9]. Note that for both MCFG and _CBA, the base +address always corresponds to bus 0, even if the bus range below the bridge +(which is reported via _CRS) doesn't start at 0. + + +[1] ACPI 6.2, sec 6.1: + For any device that is on a non-enumerable type of bus (for example, an + ISA bus), OSPM enumerates the devices' identifier(s) and the ACPI + system firmware must supply an _HID object ... for each device to + enable OSPM to do that. + +[2] ACPI 6.2, sec 3.7: + The OS enumerates motherboard devices simply by reading through the + ACPI Namespace looking for devices with hardware IDs. + + Each device enumerated by ACPI includes ACPI-defined objects in the + ACPI Namespace that report the hardware resources the device could + occupy [_PRS], an object that reports the resources that are currently + used by the device [_CRS], and objects for configuring those resources + [_SRS]. The information is used by the Plug and Play OS (OSPM) to + configure the devices. + +[3] ACPI 6.2, sec 6.2: + OSPM uses device configuration objects to configure hardware resources + for devices enumerated via ACPI. Device configuration objects provide + information about current and possible resource requirements, the + relationship between shared resources, and methods for configuring + hardware resources. + + When OSPM enumerates a device, it calls _PRS to determine the resource + requirements of the device. It may also call _CRS to find the current + resource settings for the device. Using this information, the Plug and + Play system determines what resources the device should consume and + sets those resources by calling the device’s _SRS control method. + + In ACPI, devices can consume resources (for example, legacy keyboards), + provide resources (for example, a proprietary PCI bridge), or do both. + Unless otherwise specified, resources for a device are assumed to be + taken from the nearest matching resource above the device in the device + hierarchy. + +[4] ACPI 6.2, sec 6.4.3.5.1, 2, 3, 4: + QWord/DWord/Word Address Space Descriptor (.1, .2, .3) + General Flags: Bit [0] Ignored + + Extended Address Space Descriptor (.4) + General Flags: Bit [0] Consumer/Producer: + 1–This device consumes this resource + 0–This device produces and consumes this resource + +[5] ACPI 6.2, sec 19.6.43: + ResourceUsage specifies whether the Memory range is consumed by + this device (ResourceConsumer) or passed on to child devices + (ResourceProducer). If nothing is specified, then + ResourceConsumer is assumed. + +[6] PCI Firmware 3.2, sec 4.1.2: + If the operating system does not natively comprehend reserving the + MMCFG region, the MMCFG region must be reserved by firmware. The + address range reported in the MCFG table or by _CBA method (see Section + 4.1.3) must be reserved by declaring a motherboard resource. For most + systems, the motherboard resource would appear at the root of the ACPI + namespace (under \_SB) in a node with a _HID of EISAID (PNP0C02), and + the resources in this case should not be claimed in the root PCI bus’s + _CRS. The resources can optionally be returned in Int15 E820 or + EFIGetMemoryMap as reserved memory but must always be reported through + ACPI as a motherboard resource. + +[7] PCI Express 4.0, sec 7.2.2: + For systems that are PC-compatible, or that do not implement a + processor-architecture-specific firmware interface standard that allows + access to the Configuration Space, the ECAM is required as defined in + this section. + +[8] PCI Firmware 3.2, sec 4.1.2: + The MCFG table is an ACPI table that is used to communicate the base + addresses corresponding to the non-hot removable PCI Segment Groups + range within a PCI Segment Group available to the operating system at + boot. This is required for the PC-compatible systems. + + The MCFG table is only used to communicate the base addresses + corresponding to the PCI Segment Groups available to the system at + boot. + +[9] PCI Firmware 3.2, sec 4.1.3: + The _CBA (Memory mapped Configuration Base Address) control method is + an optional ACPI object that returns the 64-bit memory mapped + configuration base address for the hot plug capable host bridge. The + base address returned by _CBA is processor-relative address. The _CBA + control method evaluates to an Integer. + + This control method appears under a host bridge object. When the _CBA + method appears under an active host bridge object, the operating system + evaluates this structure to identify the memory mapped configuration + base address corresponding to the PCI Segment Group for the bus number + range specified in _CRS method. An ACPI name space object that contains + the _CBA method must also contain a corresponding _SEG method. diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/function/binding/pci-test.txt b/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/function/binding/pci-test.txt index 3b68b955fb50..cd76ba47394b 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/function/binding/pci-test.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/function/binding/pci-test.txt @@ -15,3 +15,5 @@ subsys_id : don't care interrupt_pin : Should be 1 - INTA, 2 - INTB, 3 - INTC, 4 -INTD msi_interrupts : Should be 1 to 32 depending on the number of MSI interrupts to test +msix_interrupts : Should be 1 to 2048 depending on the number of MSI-X + interrupts to test diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-endpoint.txt b/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-endpoint.txt index 9b1d66829290..e86a96b66a6a 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-endpoint.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-endpoint.txt @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ by the PCI controller driver. * clear_bar: ops to reset the BAR * alloc_addr_space: ops to allocate in PCI controller address space * free_addr_space: ops to free the allocated address space - * raise_irq: ops to raise a legacy or MSI interrupt + * raise_irq: ops to raise a legacy, MSI or MSI-X interrupt * start: ops to start the PCI link * stop: ops to stop the PCI link @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ by the PCI endpoint function driver. *) pci_epc_raise_irq() The PCI endpoint function driver should use pci_epc_raise_irq() to raise - Legacy Interrupt or MSI Interrupt. + Legacy Interrupt, MSI or MSI-X Interrupt. *) pci_epc_mem_alloc_addr() diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-test-function.txt b/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-test-function.txt index 0c519c9bf94a..5916f1f592bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-test-function.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-test-function.txt @@ -20,6 +20,8 @@ The PCI endpoint test device has the following registers: 5) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_DST_ADDR 6) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_SIZE 7) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_CHECKSUM + 8) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_IRQ_TYPE + 9) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_IRQ_NUMBER *) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_MAGIC @@ -34,10 +36,10 @@ that the endpoint device must perform. Bitfield Description: Bit 0 : raise legacy IRQ Bit 1 : raise MSI IRQ - Bit 2 - 7 : MSI interrupt number - Bit 8 : read command (read data from RC buffer) - Bit 9 : write command (write data to RC buffer) - Bit 10 : copy command (copy data from one RC buffer to another + Bit 2 : raise MSI-X IRQ + Bit 3 : read command (read data from RC buffer) + Bit 4 : write command (write data to RC buffer) + Bit 5 : copy command (copy data from one RC buffer to another RC buffer) *) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_STATUS @@ -64,3 +66,22 @@ COPY/READ command. This register contains the destination address (RC buffer address) for the COPY/WRITE command. + +*) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_IRQ_TYPE + +This register contains the interrupt type (Legacy/MSI) triggered +for the READ/WRITE/COPY and raise IRQ (Legacy/MSI) commands. + +Possible types: + - Legacy : 0 + - MSI : 1 + - MSI-X : 2 + +*) PCI_ENDPOINT_TEST_IRQ_NUMBER + +This register contains the triggered ID interrupt. + +Admissible values: + - Legacy : 0 + - MSI : [1 .. 32] + - MSI-X : [1 .. 2048] diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-test-howto.txt b/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-test-howto.txt index 75f48c3bb191..e40cf0fb58d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-test-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/endpoint/pci-test-howto.txt @@ -45,9 +45,9 @@ The PCI endpoint framework populates the directory with the following configurable fields. # ls functions/pci_epf_test/func1 - baseclass_code interrupt_pin revid subsys_vendor_id - cache_line_size msi_interrupts subclass_code vendorid - deviceid progif_code subsys_id + baseclass_code interrupt_pin progif_code subsys_id + cache_line_size msi_interrupts revid subsys_vendorid + deviceid msix_interrupts subclass_code vendorid The PCI endpoint function driver populates these entries with default values when the device is bound to the driver. The pci-epf-test driver populates @@ -67,6 +67,7 @@ device, the following commands can be used. # echo 0x104c > functions/pci_epf_test/func1/vendorid # echo 0xb500 > functions/pci_epf_test/func1/deviceid # echo 16 > functions/pci_epf_test/func1/msi_interrupts + # echo 8 > functions/pci_epf_test/func1/msix_interrupts 1.5 Binding pci-epf-test Device to EP Controller @@ -120,7 +121,9 @@ following commands. Interrupt tests + SET IRQ TYPE TO LEGACY: OKAY LEGACY IRQ: NOT OKAY + SET IRQ TYPE TO MSI: OKAY MSI1: OKAY MSI2: OKAY MSI3: OKAY @@ -153,9 +156,30 @@ following commands. MSI30: NOT OKAY MSI31: NOT OKAY MSI32: NOT OKAY + SET IRQ TYPE TO MSI-X: OKAY + MSI-X1: OKAY + MSI-X2: OKAY + MSI-X3: OKAY + MSI-X4: OKAY + MSI-X5: OKAY + MSI-X6: OKAY + MSI-X7: OKAY + MSI-X8: OKAY + MSI-X9: NOT OKAY + MSI-X10: NOT OKAY + MSI-X11: NOT OKAY + MSI-X12: NOT OKAY + MSI-X13: NOT OKAY + MSI-X14: NOT OKAY + MSI-X15: NOT OKAY + MSI-X16: NOT OKAY + [...] + MSI-X2047: NOT OKAY + MSI-X2048: NOT OKAY Read Tests + SET IRQ TYPE TO MSI: OKAY READ ( 1 bytes): OKAY READ ( 1024 bytes): OKAY READ ( 1025 bytes): OKAY diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt index acd0dddd6bb8..48ce7903e3c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt @@ -73,6 +73,11 @@ In the example, 'Requester ID' means the ID of the device who sends the error message to root port. Pls. refer to pci express specs for other fields. +2.4 AER Statistics / Counters + +When PCIe AER errors are captured, the counters / statistics are also exposed +in the form of sysfs attributes which are documented at +Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-aer_stats 3. Developer Guide diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Data-Structures/Data-Structures.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Data-Structures/Data-Structures.html index 6c06e10bd04b..f5120a00f511 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Data-Structures/Data-Structures.html +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Data-Structures/Data-Structures.html @@ -380,31 +380,26 @@ and therefore need no protection. as follows: <pre> - 1 unsigned long gpnum; - 2 unsigned long completed; + 1 unsigned long gp_seq; </pre> <p>RCU grace periods are numbered, and -the <tt>->gpnum</tt> field contains the number of the grace -period that started most recently. -The <tt>->completed</tt> field contains the number of the -grace period that completed most recently. -If the two fields are equal, the RCU grace period that most recently -started has already completed, and therefore the corresponding -flavor of RCU is idle. -If <tt>->gpnum</tt> is one greater than <tt>->completed</tt>, -then <tt>->gpnum</tt> gives the number of the current RCU -grace period, which has not yet completed. -Any other combination of values indicates that something is broken. -These two fields are protected by the root <tt>rcu_node</tt>'s +the <tt>->gp_seq</tt> field contains the current grace-period +sequence number. +The bottom two bits are the state of the current grace period, +which can be zero for not yet started or one for in progress. +In other words, if the bottom two bits of <tt>->gp_seq</tt> are +zero, the corresponding flavor of RCU is idle. +Any other value in the bottom two bits indicates that something is broken. +This field is protected by the root <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure's <tt>->lock</tt> field. -</p><p>There are <tt>->gpnum</tt> and <tt>->completed</tt> fields +</p><p>There are <tt>->gp_seq</tt> fields in the <tt>rcu_node</tt> and <tt>rcu_data</tt> structures as well. The fields in the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure represent the -most current values, and those of the other structures are compared -in order to detect the start of a new grace period in a distributed +most current value, and those of the other structures are compared +in order to detect the beginnings and ends of grace periods in a distributed fashion. The values flow from <tt>rcu_state</tt> to <tt>rcu_node</tt> (down the tree from the root to the leaves) to <tt>rcu_data</tt>. @@ -512,27 +507,47 @@ than to be heisenbugged out of existence. as follows: <pre> - 1 unsigned long gpnum; - 2 unsigned long completed; + 1 unsigned long gp_seq; + 2 unsigned long gp_seq_needed; </pre> -<p>These fields are the counterparts of the fields of the same name in -the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure. -They each may lag up to one behind their <tt>rcu_state</tt> -counterparts. -If a given <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure's <tt>->gpnum</tt> and -<tt>->complete</tt> fields are equal, then this <tt>rcu_node</tt> +<p>The <tt>rcu_node</tt> structures' <tt>->gp_seq</tt> fields are +the counterparts of the field of the same name in the <tt>rcu_state</tt> +structure. +They each may lag up to one step behind their <tt>rcu_state</tt> +counterpart. +If the bottom two bits of a given <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure's +<tt>->gp_seq</tt> field is zero, then this <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure believes that RCU is idle. -Otherwise, as with the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure, -the <tt>->gpnum</tt> field will be one greater than the -<tt>->complete</tt> fields, with <tt>->gpnum</tt> -indicating which grace period this <tt>rcu_node</tt> believes -is still being waited for. +</p><p>The <tt>>gp_seq</tt> field of each <tt>rcu_node</tt> +structure is updated at the beginning and the end +of each grace period. + +<p>The <tt>->gp_seq_needed</tt> fields record the +furthest-in-the-future grace period request seen by the corresponding +<tt>rcu_node</tt> structure. The request is considered fulfilled when +the value of the <tt>->gp_seq</tt> field equals or exceeds that of +the <tt>->gp_seq_needed</tt> field. -</p><p>The <tt>>gpnum</tt> field of each <tt>rcu_node</tt> -structure is updated at the beginning -of each grace period, and the <tt>->completed</tt> fields are -updated at the end of each grace period. +<table> +<tr><th> </th></tr> +<tr><th align="left">Quick Quiz:</th></tr> +<tr><td> + Suppose that this <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure doesn't see + a request for a very long time. + Won't wrapping of the <tt>->gp_seq</tt> field cause + problems? +</td></tr> +<tr><th align="left">Answer:</th></tr> +<tr><td bgcolor="#ffffff"><font color="ffffff"> + No, because if the <tt>->gp_seq_needed</tt> field lags behind the + <tt>->gp_seq</tt> field, the <tt>->gp_seq_needed</tt> field + will be updated at the end of the grace period. + Modulo-arithmetic comparisons therefore will always get the + correct answer, even with wrapping. +</font></td></tr> +<tr><td> </td></tr> +</table> <h5>Quiescent-State Tracking</h5> @@ -626,9 +641,8 @@ normal and expedited grace periods, respectively. </ol> <p><font color="ffffff">So the locking is absolutely required in - order to coordinate - clearing of the bits with the grace-period numbers in - <tt>->gpnum</tt> and <tt>->completed</tt>. + order to coordinate clearing of the bits with updating of the + grace-period sequence number in <tt>->gp_seq</tt>. </font></td></tr> <tr><td> </td></tr> </table> @@ -1038,15 +1052,15 @@ out any <tt>rcu_data</tt> structure for which this flag is not set. as follows: <pre> - 1 unsigned long completed; - 2 unsigned long gpnum; + 1 unsigned long gp_seq; + 2 unsigned long gp_seq_needed; 3 bool cpu_no_qs; 4 bool core_needs_qs; 5 bool gpwrap; 6 unsigned long rcu_qs_ctr_snap; </pre> -<p>The <tt>completed</tt> and <tt>gpnum</tt> +<p>The <tt>->gp_seq</tt> and <tt>->gp_seq_needed</tt> fields are the counterparts of the fields of the same name in the <tt>rcu_state</tt> and <tt>rcu_node</tt> structures. They may each lag up to one behind their <tt>rcu_node</tt> @@ -1054,15 +1068,9 @@ counterparts, but in <tt>CONFIG_NO_HZ_IDLE</tt> and <tt>CONFIG_NO_HZ_FULL</tt> kernels can lag arbitrarily far behind for CPUs in dyntick-idle mode (but these counters will catch up upon exit from dyntick-idle mode). -If a given <tt>rcu_data</tt> structure's <tt>->gpnum</tt> and -<tt>->complete</tt> fields are equal, then this <tt>rcu_data</tt> +If the lower two bits of a given <tt>rcu_data</tt> structure's +<tt>->gp_seq</tt> are zero, then this <tt>rcu_data</tt> structure believes that RCU is idle. -Otherwise, as with the <tt>rcu_state</tt> and <tt>rcu_node</tt> -structure, -the <tt>->gpnum</tt> field will be one greater than the -<tt>->complete</tt> fields, with <tt>->gpnum</tt> -indicating which grace period this <tt>rcu_data</tt> believes -is still being waited for. <table> <tr><th> </th></tr> @@ -1070,13 +1078,13 @@ is still being waited for. <tr><td> All this replication of the grace period numbers can only cause massive confusion. - Why not just keep a global pair of counters and be done with it??? + Why not just keep a global sequence number and be done with it??? </td></tr> <tr><th align="left">Answer:</th></tr> <tr><td bgcolor="#ffffff"><font color="ffffff"> - Because if there was only a single global pair of grace-period + Because if there was only a single global sequence numbers, there would need to be a single global lock to allow - safely accessing and updating them. + safely accessing and updating it. And if we are not going to have a single global lock, we need to carefully manage the numbers on a per-node basis. Recall from the answer to a previous Quick Quiz that the consequences @@ -1091,8 +1099,8 @@ CPU has not yet passed through a quiescent state, while the <tt>->core_needs_qs</tt> flag indicates that the RCU core needs a quiescent state from the corresponding CPU. The <tt>->gpwrap</tt> field indicates that the corresponding -CPU has remained idle for so long that the <tt>completed</tt> -and <tt>gpnum</tt> counters are in danger of overflow, which +CPU has remained idle for so long that the +<tt>gp_seq</tt> counter is in danger of overflow, which will cause the CPU to disregard the values of its counters on its next exit from idle. Finally, the <tt>rcu_qs_ctr_snap</tt> field is used to detect @@ -1130,10 +1138,10 @@ The CPU advances the callbacks in its <tt>rcu_data</tt> structure whenever it notices that another RCU grace period has completed. The CPU detects the completion of an RCU grace period by noticing that the value of its <tt>rcu_data</tt> structure's -<tt>->completed</tt> field differs from that of its leaf +<tt>->gp_seq</tt> field differs from that of its leaf <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure. Recall that each <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure's -<tt>->completed</tt> field is updated at the end of each +<tt>->gp_seq</tt> field is updated at the beginnings and ends of each grace period. <p> diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html index 8651b0b4fd79..a346ce0116eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering.html @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ parts, starting in this section with the various phases of grace-period initialization. <p>The first ordering-related grace-period initialization action is to -increment the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure's <tt>->gpnum</tt> +advance the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure's <tt>->gp_seq</tt> grace-period-number counter, as shown below: </p><p><img src="TreeRCU-gp-init-1.svg" alt="TreeRCU-gp-init-1.svg" width="75%"> @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ its last CPU and if the next <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure has no online CPUs). <p>The final <tt>rcu_gp_init()</tt> pass through the <tt>rcu_node</tt> tree traverses breadth-first, setting each <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure's -<tt>->gpnum</tt> field to the newly incremented value from the +<tt>->gp_seq</tt> field to the newly advanced value from the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure, as shown in the following diagram. </p><p><img src="TreeRCU-gp-init-3.svg" alt="TreeRCU-gp-init-1.svg" width="75%"> @@ -398,9 +398,9 @@ tree traverses breadth-first, setting each <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure's to notice that a new grace period has started, as described in the next section. But because the grace-period kthread started the grace period at the -root (with the increment of the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure's -<tt>->gpnum</tt> field) before setting each leaf <tt>rcu_node</tt> -structure's <tt>->gpnum</tt> field, each CPU's observation of +root (with the advancing of the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure's +<tt>->gp_seq</tt> field) before setting each leaf <tt>rcu_node</tt> +structure's <tt>->gp_seq</tt> field, each CPU's observation of the start of the grace period will happen after the actual start of the grace period. @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ section that the grace period must wait on. <tr><td> But a RCU read-side critical section might have started after the beginning of the grace period - (the <tt>->gpnum++</tt> from earlier), so why should + (the advancing of <tt>->gp_seq</tt> from earlier), so why should the grace period wait on such a critical section? </td></tr> <tr><th align="left">Answer:</th></tr> @@ -609,10 +609,8 @@ states outstanding from other CPUs. <h4><a name="Grace-Period Cleanup">Grace-Period Cleanup</a></h4> <p>Grace-period cleanup first scans the <tt>rcu_node</tt> tree -breadth-first setting all the <tt>->completed</tt> fields equal -to the number of the newly completed grace period, then it sets -the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure's <tt>->completed</tt> field, -again to the number of the newly completed grace period. +breadth-first advancing all the <tt>->gp_seq</tt> fields, then it +advances the <tt>rcu_state</tt> structure's <tt>->gp_seq</tt> field. The ordering effects are shown below: </p><p><img src="TreeRCU-gp-cleanup.svg" alt="TreeRCU-gp-cleanup.svg" width="75%"> @@ -634,7 +632,7 @@ grace-period cleanup is complete, the next grace period can begin. CPU has reported its quiescent state, but it may be some milliseconds before RCU becomes aware of this. The latest reasonable candidate is once the <tt>rcu_state</tt> - structure's <tt>->completed</tt> field has been updated, + structure's <tt>->gp_seq</tt> field has been updated, but it is quite possible that some CPUs have already completed phase two of their updates by that time. In short, if you are going to work with RCU, you need to @@ -647,7 +645,7 @@ grace-period cleanup is complete, the next grace period can begin. <h4><a name="Callback Invocation">Callback Invocation</a></h4> <p>Once a given CPU's leaf <tt>rcu_node</tt> structure's -<tt>->completed</tt> field has been updated, that CPU can begin +<tt>->gp_seq</tt> field has been updated, that CPU can begin invoking its RCU callbacks that were waiting for this grace period to end. These callbacks are identified by <tt>rcu_advance_cbs()</tt>, diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-cleanup.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-cleanup.svg index 754f426b297a..bf84fbab27ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-cleanup.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-cleanup.svg @@ -384,11 +384,11 @@ inkscape:window-height="1144" id="namedview208" showgrid="true" - inkscape:zoom="0.70710678" - inkscape:cx="617.89017" - inkscape:cy="542.52419" - inkscape:window-x="86" - inkscape:window-y="28" + inkscape:zoom="0.78716603" + inkscape:cx="513.06403" + inkscape:cy="623.1214" + inkscape:window-x="102" + inkscape:window-y="38" inkscape:window-maximized="0" inkscape:current-layer="g3188-3" fit-margin-top="5" @@ -417,13 +417,15 @@ id="g3188"> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="3199.1516" + x="3145.9592" y="13255.592" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3143">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> <g id="g3107" transform="translate(947.90548,11584.029)"> @@ -502,13 +504,15 @@ </g> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="5324.5371" - y="15414.598" + x="5264.4731" + y="15428.84" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-753" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + id="text202-36-7" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-5">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" @@ -547,15 +551,6 @@ sodipodi:linespacing="125%"><tspan style="font-size:159.57754517px;font-style:normal;font-variant:normal;font-weight:normal;font-stretch:normal;text-align:start;line-height:125%;writing-mode:lr-tb;text-anchor:start;font-family:Liberation Sans;-inkscape-font-specification:Liberation Sans" id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0">Leaf</tspan></text> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="7479.5796" - y="17699.943" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-9" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> <path sodipodi:nodetypes="cc" inkscape:connector-curvature="0" @@ -566,15 +561,6 @@ style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" transform="translate(-737.93887,7732.6672)" id="g3188-3"> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="3225.7478" - y="13175.802" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-60" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier">rsp->completed =</text> <g id="g3107-62" transform="translate(947.90548,11584.029)"> @@ -607,15 +593,6 @@ sodipodi:linespacing="125%"><tspan style="font-size:159.57754517px;font-style:normal;font-variant:normal;font-weight:normal;font-stretch:normal;text-align:start;line-height:125%;writing-mode:lr-tb;text-anchor:start;font-family:Liberation Sans;-inkscape-font-specification:Liberation Sans" id="tspan3104-6-5-7">Root</tspan></text> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="3225.7478" - y="13390.038" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-60-3" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"> rnp->completed</text> <flowRoot xml:space="preserve" id="flowRoot3356" @@ -627,7 +604,18 @@ height="63.63961" x="332.34018" y="681.87292" /></flowRegion><flowPara - id="flowPara3362" /></flowRoot> </g> + id="flowPara3362" /></flowRoot> <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="3156.6121" + y="13317.754" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-36-6" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-0">rcu_seq_end(&rsp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> + </g> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" transform="translate(-858.40227,7769.0342)" @@ -859,6 +847,17 @@ id="path3414-8-3-6-6" inkscape:connector-curvature="0" sodipodi:nodetypes="cc" /> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="7418.769" + y="17646.104" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-36-70" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-93">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <g transform="translate(-1642.5377,-11611.245)" @@ -887,13 +886,15 @@ </g> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="5327.3057" + x="5274.1133" y="15428.84" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-36" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <g transform="translate(-151.71746,-11647.612)" @@ -972,13 +973,15 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-92">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7486.4907" - y="17670.119" + x="7408.5918" + y="17619.504" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-6" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + id="text202-36-2" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-9">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <g transform="translate(-6817.1997,-11647.612)" @@ -1019,13 +1022,15 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-1">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7474.1382" - y="17688.926" + x="7416.8003" + y="17619.504" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-5" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + id="text202-36-3" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-56">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <path style="fill:none;stroke:#000000;stroke-width:13.29812908px;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-opacity:1;marker-end:url(#Arrow2Lend)" @@ -1059,15 +1064,6 @@ id="path3414-8-3-6" inkscape:connector-curvature="0" sodipodi:nodetypes="cc" /> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="7318.9653" - y="6031.6353" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-2" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" id="g4504-3-9" @@ -1123,4 +1119,15 @@ id="path3134-9-0-3-5" d="m 6875.6003,15833.906 1595.7755,0" style="fill:none;stroke:#969696;stroke-width:53.19251633;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-miterlimit:4;stroke-opacity:1;stroke-dasharray:none;marker-end:url(#Arrow1Send-36)" /> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="7275.2612" + y="5971.8916" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-36-1" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-2">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </svg> diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-init-1.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-init-1.svg index 0161262904ec..8c207550818f 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-init-1.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-init-1.svg @@ -272,13 +272,13 @@ inkscape:window-height="1144" id="namedview208" showgrid="true" - inkscape:zoom="0.70710678" - inkscape:cx="617.89019" - inkscape:cy="636.57143" - inkscape:window-x="697" + inkscape:zoom="2.6330492" + inkscape:cx="524.82797" + inkscape:cy="519.31194" + inkscape:window-x="79" inkscape:window-y="28" inkscape:window-maximized="0" - inkscape:current-layer="svg2" + inkscape:current-layer="g3188" fit-margin-top="5" fit-margin-right="5" fit-margin-left="5" @@ -305,13 +305,15 @@ id="g3188"> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="3305.5364" + x="3119.363" y="13255.592" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier">rsp->gpnum++</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3071">rcu_seq_start(rsp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> <g id="g3107" transform="translate(947.90548,11584.029)"> diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-init-3.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-init-3.svg index de6ecc51b00e..d24d7d555dbc 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-init-3.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp-init-3.svg @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ id="svg2" version="1.1" inkscape:version="0.48.4 r9939" - sodipodi:docname="TreeRCU-gp-init-2.svg"> + sodipodi:docname="TreeRCU-gp-init-3.svg"> <metadata id="metadata212"> <rdf:RDF> @@ -257,18 +257,22 @@ inkscape:window-width="1087" inkscape:window-height="1144" id="namedview208" - showgrid="false" - inkscape:zoom="0.70710678" + showgrid="true" + inkscape:zoom="0.68224756" inkscape:cx="617.89019" inkscape:cy="625.84293" - inkscape:window-x="697" + inkscape:window-x="54" inkscape:window-y="28" inkscape:window-maximized="0" - inkscape:current-layer="svg2" + inkscape:current-layer="g3153" fit-margin-top="5" fit-margin-right="5" fit-margin-left="5" - fit-margin-bottom="5" /> + fit-margin-bottom="5"> + <inkscape:grid + type="xygrid" + id="grid3090" /> + </sodipodi:namedview> <path sodipodi:nodetypes="cccccccccccccccccccccccc" inkscape:connector-curvature="0" @@ -281,13 +285,13 @@ id="g3188"> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="3305.5364" + x="3145.9592" y="13255.592" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> <g id="g3107" transform="translate(947.90548,11584.029)"> @@ -366,13 +370,13 @@ </g> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="5392.3345" - y="15407.104" + x="5253.6904" + y="15407.032" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-6" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" @@ -413,13 +417,13 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7536.4883" - y="17640.934" + x="7415.4365" + y="17670.572" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-9" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g transform="translate(-1642.5375,-11610.962)" @@ -448,13 +452,13 @@ </g> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="5378.4146" - y="15436.927" + x="5258.0688" + y="15412.313" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-3" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g transform="translate(-151.71726,-11647.329)" @@ -533,13 +537,13 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-92">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7520.1294" - y="17673.639" + x="7405.2607" + y="17670.572" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-35" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g transform="translate(-6817.1998,-11647.329)" @@ -580,13 +584,13 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-1">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7521.4663" - y="17666.062" + x="7413.4688" + y="17670.566" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-75" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <path style="fill:none;stroke:#000000;stroke-width:13.29812908px;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-opacity:1;marker-end:url(#Arrow2Lend)" @@ -622,11 +626,11 @@ sodipodi:nodetypes="cc" /> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7370.856" - y="5997.5972" + x="7271.9297" + y="6023.2412" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-62" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </svg> diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg index b13b7b01bb3a..acd73c7ad0f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-gp.svg @@ -1070,13 +1070,13 @@ inkscape:window-height="1144" id="namedview208" showgrid="true" - inkscape:zoom="0.6004608" - inkscape:cx="826.65969" - inkscape:cy="483.3047" - inkscape:window-x="66" - inkscape:window-y="28" + inkscape:zoom="0.81932583" + inkscape:cx="840.45848" + inkscape:cy="5052.4242" + inkscape:window-x="787" + inkscape:window-y="24" inkscape:window-maximized="0" - inkscape:current-layer="svg2" + inkscape:current-layer="g4" fit-margin-top="5" fit-margin-right="5" fit-margin-left="5" @@ -1543,15 +1543,6 @@ style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" transform="translate(1749.0282,658.72243)" id="g3188"> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="3305.5364" - y="13255.592" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-5" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier">rsp->gpnum++</text> <g id="g3107-62" transform="translate(947.90548,11584.029)"> @@ -1584,6 +1575,17 @@ sodipodi:linespacing="125%"><tspan style="font-size:159.57754517px;font-style:normal;font-variant:normal;font-weight:normal;font-stretch:normal;text-align:start;line-height:125%;writing-mode:lr-tb;text-anchor:start;font-family:Liberation Sans;-inkscape-font-specification:Liberation Sans" id="tspan3104-6-5-7">Root</tspan></text> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="3137.9988" + y="13271.316" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-626" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3071">rcu_seq_start(rsp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <rect ry="0" @@ -2318,15 +2320,6 @@ style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" transform="translate(1739.0986,17188.625)" id="g3188-6"> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="3305.5364" - y="13255.592" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-1" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> <g id="g3107-5" transform="translate(947.90548,11584.029)"> @@ -2359,6 +2352,15 @@ sodipodi:linespacing="125%"><tspan style="font-size:159.57754517px;font-style:normal;font-variant:normal;font-weight:normal;font-stretch:normal;text-align:start;line-height:125%;writing-mode:lr-tb;text-anchor:start;font-family:Liberation Sans;-inkscape-font-specification:Liberation Sans" id="tspan3104-6-5-1">Root</tspan></text> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="3147.9268" + y="13240.524" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-1" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" @@ -2387,13 +2389,13 @@ </g> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="5392.3345" - y="15407.104" + x="5263.1094" + y="15411.646" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-6-7" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + id="text202-92" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" @@ -2434,13 +2436,13 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-94">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7536.4883" - y="17640.934" + x="7417.4053" + y="17655.502" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-9" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + id="text202-759" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g transform="translate(-2353.8462,17224.992)" @@ -2469,13 +2471,13 @@ </g> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="5378.4146" - y="15436.927" + x="5246.1548" + y="15411.648" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-3" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + id="text202-87" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g transform="translate(-863.02613,17188.625)" @@ -2554,13 +2556,13 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-92-6">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7520.1294" - y="17673.639" + x="7433.8257" + y="17682.098" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-35" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + id="text202-2" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <g transform="translate(-7528.5085,17188.625)" @@ -2601,13 +2603,13 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-1-8">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7521.4663" - y="17666.062" + x="7415.4404" + y="17682.098" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-75-1" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> + id="text202-0" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> <path style="fill:none;stroke:#000000;stroke-width:13.29812813px;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-opacity:1;marker-end:url(#Arrow2Lend)" @@ -2641,15 +2643,6 @@ id="path3414-8-3-6-4" inkscape:connector-curvature="0" sodipodi:nodetypes="cc" /> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="6659.5469" - y="34833.551" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-62" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gpnum = rsp->gpnum</text> <path sodipodi:nodetypes="ccc" inkscape:connector-curvature="0" @@ -3844,7 +3837,7 @@ font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-6-6-5" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rdp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rdp->gp_seq</text> <text xml:space="preserve" x="5035.4155" @@ -4284,15 +4277,6 @@ style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" transform="translate(1874.038,53203.538)" id="g3188-7"> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="3199.1516" - y="13255.592" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-82" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> <g id="g3107-53" transform="translate(947.90548,11584.029)"> @@ -4325,6 +4309,17 @@ sodipodi:linespacing="125%"><tspan style="font-size:159.57754517px;font-style:normal;font-variant:normal;font-weight:normal;font-stretch:normal;text-align:start;line-height:125%;writing-mode:lr-tb;text-anchor:start;font-family:Liberation Sans;-inkscape-font-specification:Liberation Sans" id="tspan3104-6-5-19">Root</tspan></text> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="3175.896" + y="13240.11" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-36-3" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <rect ry="0" @@ -4371,13 +4366,15 @@ </g> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="5324.5371" - y="15414.598" + x="5264.4829" + y="15411.231" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-753" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + id="text202-36-7" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-5">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" @@ -4412,30 +4409,12 @@ sodipodi:linespacing="125%"><tspan style="font-size:159.57754517px;font-style:normal;font-variant:normal;font-weight:normal;font-stretch:normal;text-align:start;line-height:125%;writing-mode:lr-tb;text-anchor:start;font-family:Liberation Sans;-inkscape-font-specification:Liberation Sans" id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-4">Leaf</tspan></text> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="10084.225" - y="70903.312" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-9-0" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> <path sodipodi:nodetypes="ccc" inkscape:connector-curvature="0" id="path3134-9-0-3-9" d="m 6315.6122,72629.054 -20.9533,8108.684 1648.968,0" style="fill:none;stroke:#969696;stroke-width:53.19251251;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-miterlimit:4;stroke-opacity:1;stroke-dasharray:none;marker-end:url(#Arrow1Send)" /> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="5092.4683" - y="74111.672" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-60" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rsp->completed =</text> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" id="g3107-62-6" @@ -4469,15 +4448,6 @@ sodipodi:linespacing="125%"><tspan style="font-size:159.57754517px;font-style:normal;font-variant:normal;font-weight:normal;font-stretch:normal;text-align:start;line-height:125%;writing-mode:lr-tb;text-anchor:start;font-family:Liberation Sans;-inkscape-font-specification:Liberation Sans" id="tspan3104-6-5-7-7">Root</tspan></text> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="5092.4683" - y="74325.906" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-60-3" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"> rnp->completed</text> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" transform="translate(1746.2528,60972.572)" @@ -4736,13 +4706,15 @@ </g> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="5327.3057" - y="15428.84" + x="5274.1216" + y="15411.231" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-36" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-6">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <g transform="translate(-728.08545,53203.538)" @@ -4821,13 +4793,15 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-92-5">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7486.4907" - y="17670.119" + x="7435.1987" + y="17708.281" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-6-2" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + id="text202-36-9" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-1">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <g transform="translate(-7393.5687,53203.538)" @@ -4868,13 +4842,15 @@ id="tspan3104-6-5-6-0-1-5">Leaf</tspan></text> <text xml:space="preserve" - x="7474.1382" - y="17688.926" + x="7416.8125" + y="17708.281" font-style="normal" font-weight="bold" font-size="192" - id="text202-5-1" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> + id="text202-36-35" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-62">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> </g> <path style="fill:none;stroke:#000000;stroke-width:13.29812813px;stroke-linecap:butt;stroke-linejoin:miter;stroke-opacity:1;marker-end:url(#Arrow2Lend)" @@ -4908,15 +4884,6 @@ id="path3414-8-3-6-67" inkscape:connector-curvature="0" sodipodi:nodetypes="cc" /> - <text - xml:space="preserve" - x="6742.6001" - y="70882.617" - font-style="normal" - font-weight="bold" - font-size="192" - id="text202-2" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->completed = ->gpnum</text> <g style="fill:none;stroke-width:0.025in" id="g4504-3-9-6" @@ -5131,5 +5098,47 @@ font-size="192" id="text202-7-9-6-6-7" style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rcu_do_batch()</text> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="6698.9019" + y="70885.211" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-36-2" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-7">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="10023.457" + y="70885.234" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-36-0" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-9">rcu_seq_end(&rnp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="5023.3389" + y="74209.773" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-36-36" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier"><tspan + style="font-size:172.87567139px" + id="tspan3166-0">rcu_seq_end(&rsp->gp_seq)</tspan></text> + <text + xml:space="preserve" + x="6562.5884" + y="34870.727" + font-style="normal" + font-weight="bold" + font-size="192" + id="text202-3" + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">->gp_seq = rsp->gp_seq</text> </g> </svg> diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg index de3992f4cbe1..149bec2a4493 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg +++ b/Documentation/RCU/Design/Memory-Ordering/TreeRCU-qs.svg @@ -300,13 +300,13 @@ inkscape:window-height="1144" id="namedview208" showgrid="true" - inkscape:zoom="0.70710678" - inkscape:cx="616.47598" - inkscape:cy="595.41964" - inkscape:window-x="813" + inkscape:zoom="0.96484375" + inkscape:cx="507.0191" + inkscape:cy="885.62207" + inkscape:window-x="47" inkscape:window-y="28" inkscape:window-maximized="0" - inkscape:current-layer="g4405" + inkscape:current-layer="g3115" fit-margin-top="5" fit-margin-right="5" fit-margin-left="5" @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ font-weight="bold" font-size="192" id="text202-6-6" - style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rdp->gpnum</text> + style="font-size:192px;font-style:normal;font-weight:bold;text-anchor:start;fill:#000000;stroke-width:0.025in;font-family:Courier">rdp->gp_seq</text> <text xml:space="preserve" x="5035.4155" diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index 4259f95c3261..f99cf11b314b 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ it will print a message similar to the following: INFO: rcu_sched detected stalls on CPUs/tasks: 2-...: (3 GPs behind) idle=06c/0/0 softirq=1453/1455 fqs=0 16-...: (0 ticks this GP) idle=81c/0/0 softirq=764/764 fqs=0 - (detected by 32, t=2603 jiffies, g=7073, c=7072, q=625) + (detected by 32, t=2603 jiffies, g=7075, q=625) This message indicates that CPU 32 detected that CPUs 2 and 16 were both causing stalls, and that the stall was affecting RCU-sched. This message @@ -215,11 +215,10 @@ CPU since the last time that this CPU noted the beginning of a grace period. The "detected by" line indicates which CPU detected the stall (in this -case, CPU 32), how many jiffies have elapsed since the start of the -grace period (in this case 2603), the number of the last grace period -to start and to complete (7073 and 7072, respectively), and an estimate -of the total number of RCU callbacks queued across all CPUs (625 in -this case). +case, CPU 32), how many jiffies have elapsed since the start of the grace +period (in this case 2603), the grace-period sequence number (7075), and +an estimate of the total number of RCU callbacks queued across all CPUs +(625 in this case). In kernels with CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ, more information is printed for each CPU: @@ -266,15 +265,16 @@ If the relevant grace-period kthread has been unable to run prior to the stall warning, as was the case in the "All QSes seen" line above, the following additional line is printed: - kthread starved for 23807 jiffies! g7073 c7072 f0x0 RCU_GP_WAIT_FQS(3) ->state=0x1 + kthread starved for 23807 jiffies! g7075 f0x0 RCU_GP_WAIT_FQS(3) ->state=0x1 ->cpu=5 Starving the grace-period kthreads of CPU time can of course result in RCU CPU stall warnings even when all CPUs and tasks have passed -through the required quiescent states. The "g" and "c" numbers flag the -number of the last grace period started and completed, respectively, -the "f" precedes the ->gp_flags command to the grace-period kthread, -the "RCU_GP_WAIT_FQS" indicates that the kthread is waiting for a short -timeout, and the "state" precedes value of the task_struct ->state field. +through the required quiescent states. The "g" number shows the current +grace-period sequence number, the "f" precedes the ->gp_flags command +to the grace-period kthread, the "RCU_GP_WAIT_FQS" indicates that the +kthread is waiting for a short timeout, the "state" precedes value of the +task_struct ->state field, and the "cpu" indicates that the grace-period +kthread last ran on CPU 5. Multiple Warnings From One Stall diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index 65eb856526b7..c2a7facf7ff9 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -588,6 +588,7 @@ It is extremely simple: void synchronize_rcu(void) { write_lock(&rcu_gp_mutex); + smp_mb__after_spinlock(); write_unlock(&rcu_gp_mutex); } @@ -609,12 +610,15 @@ don't forget about them when submitting patches making use of RCU!] The rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock() primitive read-acquire and release a global reader-writer lock. The synchronize_rcu() -primitive write-acquires this same lock, then immediately releases -it. This means that once synchronize_rcu() exits, all RCU read-side -critical sections that were in progress before synchronize_rcu() was -called are guaranteed to have completed -- there is no way that -synchronize_rcu() would have been able to write-acquire the lock -otherwise. +primitive write-acquires this same lock, then releases it. This means +that once synchronize_rcu() exits, all RCU read-side critical sections +that were in progress before synchronize_rcu() was called are guaranteed +to have completed -- there is no way that synchronize_rcu() would have +been able to write-acquire the lock otherwise. The smp_mb__after_spinlock() +promotes synchronize_rcu() to a full memory barrier in compliance with +the "Memory-Barrier Guarantees" listed in: + + Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html. It is possible to nest rcu_read_lock(), since reader-writer locks may be recursively acquired. Note also that rcu_read_lock() is immune @@ -816,11 +820,13 @@ RCU list traversal: list_next_rcu list_for_each_entry_rcu list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu + list_for_each_entry_from_rcu hlist_first_rcu hlist_next_rcu hlist_pprev_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_rcu_bh + hlist_for_each_entry_from_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_continue_rcu hlist_for_each_entry_continue_rcu_bh hlist_nulls_first_rcu diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c3871565c8cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/data-node-references.txt @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation +Author: Sakari Ailus <sakari.ailus@linux.intel.com> + + +Referencing hierarchical data nodes +----------------------------------- + +ACPI in general allows referring to device objects in the tree only. +Hierarchical data extension nodes may not be referred to directly, hence this +document defines a scheme to implement such references. + +A reference consist of the device object name followed by one or more +hierarchical data extension [1] keys. Specifically, the hierarchical data +extension node which is referred to by the key shall lie directly under the +parent object i.e. either the device object or another hierarchical data +extension node. + +The keys in the hierarchical data nodes shall consist of the name of the node, +"@" character and the number of the node in hexadecimal notation (without pre- +or postfixes). The same ACPI object shall include the _DSD property extension +with a property "reg" that shall have the same numerical value as the number of +the node. + +In case a hierarchical data extensions node has no numerical value, then the +"reg" property shall be omitted from the ACPI object's _DSD properties and the +"@" character and the number shall be omitted from the hierarchical data +extension key. + + +Example +------- + + In the ASL snippet below, the "reference" _DSD property [2] contains a + device object reference to DEV0 and under that device object, a + hierarchical data extension key "node@1" referring to the NOD1 object + and lastly, a hierarchical data extension key "anothernode" referring to + the ANOD object which is also the final target node of the reference. + + Device (DEV0) + { + Name (_DSD, Package () { + ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"), + Package () { + Package () { "node@0", NOD0 }, + Package () { "node@1", NOD1 }, + } + }) + Name (NOD0, Package() { + ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"), + Package () { + Package () { "random-property", 3 }, + } + }) + Name (NOD1, Package() { + ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"), + Package () { + Package () { "anothernode", ANOD }, + } + }) + Name (ANOD, Package() { + ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"), + Package () { + Package () { "random-property", 0 }, + } + }) + } + + Device (DEV1) + { + Name (_DSD, Package () { + ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"), + Package () { + Package () { "reference", ^DEV0, "node@1", "anothernode" }, + } + }) + } + +Please also see a graph example in graph.txt . + +References +---------- + +[1] Hierarchical Data Extension UUID For _DSD. + <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>, + referenced 2018-07-17. + +[2] Device Properties UUID For _DSD. + <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf>, + referenced 2016-10-04. diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt index ac09e3138b79..b9ce910781dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt +++ b/Documentation/acpi/dsd/graph.txt @@ -36,29 +36,41 @@ The port and endpoint concepts are very similar to those in Devicetree [3]. A port represents an interface in a device, and an endpoint represents a connection to that interface. -All port nodes are located under the device's "_DSD" node in the -hierarchical data extension tree. The property extension related to -each port node must contain the key "port" and an integer value which -is the number of the port. The object it refers to should be called "PRTX", -where "X" is the number of the port. - -Further on, endpoints are located under the individual port nodes. The -first hierarchical data extension package list entry of the endpoint -nodes must begin with "endpoint" and must be followed by the number -of the endpoint. The object it refers to should be called "EPXY", where -"X" is the number of the port and "Y" is the number of the endpoint. - -Each port node contains a property extension key "port", the value of -which is the number of the port node. The each endpoint is similarly numbered -with a property extension key "endpoint". Port numbers must be unique within a -device and endpoint numbers must be unique within a port. +All port nodes are located under the device's "_DSD" node in the hierarchical +data extension tree. The data extension related to each port node must begin +with "port" and must be followed by the "@" character and the number of the port +as its key. The target object it refers to should be called "PRTX", where "X" is +the number of the port. An example of such a package would be: + + Package() { "port@4", PRT4 } + +Further on, endpoints are located under the port nodes. The hierarchical +data extension key of the endpoint nodes must begin with +"endpoint" and must be followed by the "@" character and the number of the +endpoint. The object it refers to should be called "EPXY", where "X" is the +number of the port and "Y" is the number of the endpoint. An example of such a +package would be: + + Package() { "endpoint@0", EP40 } + +Each port node contains a property extension key "port", the value of which is +the number of the port. Each endpoint is similarly numbered with a property +extension key "reg", the value of which is the number of the endpoint. Port +numbers must be unique within a device and endpoint numbers must be unique +within a port. If a device object may only has a single port, then the number +of that port shall be zero. Similarly, if a port may only have a single +endpoint, the number of that endpoint shall be zero. The endpoint reference uses property extension with "remote-endpoint" property name followed by a reference in the same package. Such references consist of the -the remote device reference, number of the port in the device and finally the -number of the endpoint in that port. Individual references thus appear as: +the remote device reference, the first package entry of the port data extension +reference under the device and finally the first package entry of the endpoint +data extension reference under the port. Individual references thus appear as: - Package() { device, port_number, endpoint_number } + Package() { device, "port@X", "endpoint@Y" } + +In the above example, "X" is the number of the port and "Y" is the number of the +endpoint. The references to endpoints must be always done both ways, to the remote endpoint and back from the referred remote endpoint node. @@ -76,24 +88,24 @@ A simple example of this is show below: }, ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"), Package () { - Package () { "port0", "PRT0" }, + Package () { "port@0", PRT0 }, } }) Name (PRT0, Package() { ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"), Package () { - Package () { "port", 0 }, + Package () { "reg", 0 }, }, ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"), Package () { - Package () { "endpoint0", "EP00" }, + Package () { "endpoint@0", EP00 }, } }) Name (EP00, Package() { ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"), Package () { - Package () { "endpoint", 0 }, - Package () { "remote-endpoint", Package() { \_SB.PCI0.ISP, 4, 0 } }, + Package () { "reg", 0 }, + Package () { "remote-endpoint", Package() { \_SB.PCI0.ISP, "port@4", "endpoint@0" } }, } }) } @@ -106,26 +118,26 @@ A simple example of this is show below: Name (_DSD, Package () { ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"), Package () { - Package () { "port4", "PRT4" }, + Package () { "port@4", PRT4 }, } }) Name (PRT4, Package() { ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"), Package () { - Package () { "port", 4 }, /* CSI-2 port number */ + Package () { "reg", 4 }, /* CSI-2 port number */ }, ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"), Package () { - Package () { "endpoint0", "EP40" }, + Package () { "endpoint@0", EP40 }, } }) Name (EP40, Package() { ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"), Package () { - Package () { "endpoint", 0 }, - Package () { "remote-endpoint", Package () { \_SB.PCI0.I2C2.CAM0, 0, 0 } }, + Package () { "reg", 0 }, + Package () { "remote-endpoint", Package () { \_SB.PCI0.I2C2.CAM0, "port@0", "endpoint@0" } }, } }) } @@ -151,7 +163,7 @@ References referenced 2016-10-04. [5] Hierarchical Data Extension UUID For _DSD. - <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.pdf>, + <URL:http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf>, referenced 2016-10-04. [6] Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Specification. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst index 02caa7efd5ef..15ea785b2dfa 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +.. _readme: + Linux kernel release 4.x <http://kernel.org/> ============================================= diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst index 8a2c52d5c53b..184193bcb262 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst @@ -51,6 +51,9 @@ v1 is available under Documentation/cgroup-v1/. 5-3. IO 5-3-1. IO Interface Files 5-3-2. Writeback + 5-3-3. IO Latency + 5-3-3-1. How IO Latency Throttling Works + 5-3-3-2. IO Latency Interface Files 5-4. PID 5-4-1. PID Interface Files 5-5. Device @@ -1069,6 +1072,24 @@ PAGE_SIZE multiple when read back. high limit is used and monitored properly, this limit's utility is limited to providing the final safety net. + memory.oom.group + A read-write single value file which exists on non-root + cgroups. The default value is "0". + + Determines whether the cgroup should be treated as + an indivisible workload by the OOM killer. If set, + all tasks belonging to the cgroup or to its descendants + (if the memory cgroup is not a leaf cgroup) are killed + together or not at all. This can be used to avoid + partial kills to guarantee workload integrity. + + Tasks with the OOM protection (oom_score_adj set to -1000) + are treated as an exception and are never killed. + + If the OOM killer is invoked in a cgroup, it's not going + to kill any tasks outside of this cgroup, regardless + memory.oom.group values of ancestor cgroups. + memory.events A read-only flat-keyed file which exists on non-root cgroups. The following entries are defined. Unless specified @@ -1314,17 +1335,19 @@ IO Interface Files Lines are keyed by $MAJ:$MIN device numbers and not ordered. The following nested keys are defined. - ====== =================== + ====== ===================== rbytes Bytes read wbytes Bytes written rios Number of read IOs wios Number of write IOs - ====== =================== + dbytes Bytes discarded + dios Number of discard IOs + ====== ===================== An example read output follows: - 8:16 rbytes=1459200 wbytes=314773504 rios=192 wios=353 - 8:0 rbytes=90430464 wbytes=299008000 rios=8950 wios=1252 + 8:16 rbytes=1459200 wbytes=314773504 rios=192 wios=353 dbytes=0 dios=0 + 8:0 rbytes=90430464 wbytes=299008000 rios=8950 wios=1252 dbytes=50331648 dios=3021 io.weight A read-write flat-keyed file which exists on non-root cgroups. @@ -1446,6 +1469,85 @@ writeback as follows. vm.dirty[_background]_ratio. +IO Latency +~~~~~~~~~~ + +This is a cgroup v2 controller for IO workload protection. You provide a group +with a latency target, and if the average latency exceeds that target the +controller will throttle any peers that have a lower latency target than the +protected workload. + +The limits are only applied at the peer level in the hierarchy. This means that +in the diagram below, only groups A, B, and C will influence each other, and +groups D and F will influence each other. Group G will influence nobody. + + [root] + / | \ + A B C + / \ | + D F G + + +So the ideal way to configure this is to set io.latency in groups A, B, and C. +Generally you do not want to set a value lower than the latency your device +supports. Experiment to find the value that works best for your workload. +Start at higher than the expected latency for your device and watch the +avg_lat value in io.stat for your workload group to get an idea of the +latency you see during normal operation. Use the avg_lat value as a basis for +your real setting, setting at 10-15% higher than the value in io.stat. + +How IO Latency Throttling Works +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +io.latency is work conserving; so as long as everybody is meeting their latency +target the controller doesn't do anything. Once a group starts missing its +target it begins throttling any peer group that has a higher target than itself. +This throttling takes 2 forms: + +- Queue depth throttling. This is the number of outstanding IO's a group is + allowed to have. We will clamp down relatively quickly, starting at no limit + and going all the way down to 1 IO at a time. + +- Artificial delay induction. There are certain types of IO that cannot be + throttled without possibly adversely affecting higher priority groups. This + includes swapping and metadata IO. These types of IO are allowed to occur + normally, however they are "charged" to the originating group. If the + originating group is being throttled you will see the use_delay and delay + fields in io.stat increase. The delay value is how many microseconds that are + being added to any process that runs in this group. Because this number can + grow quite large if there is a lot of swapping or metadata IO occurring we + limit the individual delay events to 1 second at a time. + +Once the victimized group starts meeting its latency target again it will start +unthrottling any peer groups that were throttled previously. If the victimized +group simply stops doing IO the global counter will unthrottle appropriately. + +IO Latency Interface Files +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + + io.latency + This takes a similar format as the other controllers. + + "MAJOR:MINOR target=<target time in microseconds" + + io.stat + If the controller is enabled you will see extra stats in io.stat in + addition to the normal ones. + + depth + This is the current queue depth for the group. + + avg_lat + This is an exponential moving average with a decay rate of 1/exp + bound by the sampling interval. The decay rate interval can be + calculated by multiplying the win value in io.stat by the + corresponding number of samples based on the win value. + + win + The sampling window size in milliseconds. This is the minimum + duration of time between evaluation events. Windows only elapse + with IO activity. Idle periods extend the most recent window. + PID --- diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt index 4ec843123cc3..1649117e6087 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt @@ -173,14 +173,18 @@ they are redirected through the parport multiplex layer. 7 char Virtual console capture devices - 0 = /dev/vcs Current vc text contents - 1 = /dev/vcs1 tty1 text contents + 0 = /dev/vcs Current vc text (glyph) contents + 1 = /dev/vcs1 tty1 text (glyph) contents ... - 63 = /dev/vcs63 tty63 text contents - 128 = /dev/vcsa Current vc text/attribute contents - 129 = /dev/vcsa1 tty1 text/attribute contents + 63 = /dev/vcs63 tty63 text (glyph) contents + 64 = /dev/vcsu Current vc text (unicode) contents + 65 = /dev/vcsu1 tty1 text (unicode) contents ... - 191 = /dev/vcsa63 tty63 text/attribute contents + 127 = /dev/vcsu63 tty63 text (unicode) contents + 128 = /dev/vcsa Current vc text/attribute (glyph) contents + 129 = /dev/vcsa1 tty1 text/attribute (glyph) contents + ... + 191 = /dev/vcsa63 tty63 text/attribute (glyph) contents NOTE: These devices permit both read and write access. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst index 48d70af11652..0873685bab0f 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst @@ -17,6 +17,15 @@ etc. kernel-parameters devices +This section describes CPU vulnerabilities and provides an overview of the +possible mitigations along with guidance for selecting mitigations if they +are configurable at compile, boot or run time. + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + l1tf + Here is a set of documents aimed at users who are trying to track down problems and bugs in particular. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt index efc7aa7a0670..970d837bd57f 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -748,6 +748,14 @@ debug [KNL] Enable kernel debugging (events log level). + debug_boot_weak_hash + [KNL] Enable printing [hashed] pointers early in the + boot sequence. If enabled, we use a weak hash instead + of siphash to hash pointers. Use this option if you are + seeing instances of '(___ptrval___)') and need to see a + value (hashed pointer) instead. Cryptographically + insecure, please do not use on production kernels. + debug_locks_verbose= [KNL] verbose self-tests Format=<0|1> @@ -804,6 +812,15 @@ Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size if not specified. + deferred_probe_timeout= + [KNL] Debugging option to set a timeout in seconds for + deferred probe to give up waiting on dependencies to + probe. Only specific dependencies (subsystems or + drivers) that have opted in will be ignored. A timeout of 0 + will timeout at the end of initcalls. This option will also + dump out devices still on the deferred probe list after + retrying. + dhash_entries= [KNL] Set number of hash buckets for dentry cache. @@ -816,6 +833,17 @@ disable= [IPV6] See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt. + hardened_usercopy= + [KNL] Under CONFIG_HARDENED_USERCOPY, whether + hardening is enabled for this boot. Hardened + usercopy checking is used to protect the kernel + from reading or writing beyond known memory + allocation boundaries as a proactive defense + against bounds-checking flaws in the kernel's + copy_to_user()/copy_from_user() interface. + on Perform hardened usercopy checks (default). + off Disable hardened usercopy checks. + disable_radix [PPC] Disable RADIX MMU mode on POWER9 @@ -1967,10 +1995,84 @@ (virtualized real and unpaged mode) on capable Intel chips. Default is 1 (enabled) + kvm-intel.vmentry_l1d_flush=[KVM,Intel] Mitigation for L1 Terminal Fault + CVE-2018-3620. + + Valid arguments: never, cond, always + + always: L1D cache flush on every VMENTER. + cond: Flush L1D on VMENTER only when the code between + VMEXIT and VMENTER can leak host memory. + never: Disables the mitigation + + Default is cond (do L1 cache flush in specific instances) + kvm-intel.vpid= [KVM,Intel] Disable Virtual Processor Identification feature (tagged TLBs) on capable Intel chips. Default is 1 (enabled) + l1tf= [X86] Control mitigation of the L1TF vulnerability on + affected CPUs + + The kernel PTE inversion protection is unconditionally + enabled and cannot be disabled. + + full + Provides all available mitigations for the + L1TF vulnerability. Disables SMT and + enables all mitigations in the + hypervisors, i.e. unconditional L1D flush. + + SMT control and L1D flush control via the + sysfs interface is still possible after + boot. Hypervisors will issue a warning + when the first VM is started in a + potentially insecure configuration, + i.e. SMT enabled or L1D flush disabled. + + full,force + Same as 'full', but disables SMT and L1D + flush runtime control. Implies the + 'nosmt=force' command line option. + (i.e. sysfs control of SMT is disabled.) + + flush + Leaves SMT enabled and enables the default + hypervisor mitigation, i.e. conditional + L1D flush. + + SMT control and L1D flush control via the + sysfs interface is still possible after + boot. Hypervisors will issue a warning + when the first VM is started in a + potentially insecure configuration, + i.e. SMT enabled or L1D flush disabled. + + flush,nosmt + + Disables SMT and enables the default + hypervisor mitigation. + + SMT control and L1D flush control via the + sysfs interface is still possible after + boot. Hypervisors will issue a warning + when the first VM is started in a + potentially insecure configuration, + i.e. SMT enabled or L1D flush disabled. + + flush,nowarn + Same as 'flush', but hypervisors will not + warn when a VM is started in a potentially + insecure configuration. + + off + Disables hypervisor mitigations and doesn't + emit any warnings. + + Default is 'flush'. + + For details see: Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst + l2cr= [PPC] l3cr= [PPC] @@ -2687,6 +2789,14 @@ nosmt [KNL,S390] Disable symmetric multithreading (SMT). Equivalent to smt=1. + [KNL,x86] Disable symmetric multithreading (SMT). + nosmt=force: Force disable SMT, cannot be undone + via the sysfs control file. + + nospectre_v1 [PPC] Disable mitigations for Spectre Variant 1 (bounds + check bypass). With this option data leaks are possible + in the system. + nospectre_v2 [X86] Disable all mitigations for the Spectre variant 2 (indirect branch prediction) vulnerability. System may allow data leaks with this option, which is equivalent @@ -2835,8 +2945,6 @@ nosync [HW,M68K] Disables sync negotiation for all devices. - notsc [BUGS=X86-32] Disable Time Stamp Counter - nowatchdog [KNL] Disable both lockup detectors, i.e. soft-lockup and NMI watchdog (hard-lockup). @@ -2933,8 +3041,9 @@ on: enable the feature page_poison= [KNL] Boot-time parameter changing the state of - poisoning on the buddy allocator. - off: turn off poisoning + poisoning on the buddy allocator, available with + CONFIG_PAGE_POISONING=y. + off: turn off poisoning (default) on: turn on poisoning panic= [KNL] Kernel behaviour on panic: delay <timeout> @@ -2994,8 +3103,31 @@ See header of drivers/block/paride/pcd.c. See also Documentation/blockdev/paride.txt. - pci=option[,option...] [PCI] various PCI subsystem options: - earlydump [X86] dump PCI config space before the kernel + pci=option[,option...] [PCI] various PCI subsystem options. + + Some options herein operate on a specific device + or a set of devices (<pci_dev>). These are + specified in one of the following formats: + + [<domain>:]<bus>:<dev>.<func>[/<dev>.<func>]* + pci:<vendor>:<device>[:<subvendor>:<subdevice>] + + Note: the first format specifies a PCI + bus/device/function address which may change + if new hardware is inserted, if motherboard + firmware changes, or due to changes caused + by other kernel parameters. If the + domain is left unspecified, it is + taken to be zero. Optionally, a path + to a device through multiple device/function + addresses can be specified after the base + address (this is more robust against + renumbering issues). The second format + selects devices using IDs from the + configuration space which may match multiple + devices in the system. + + earlydump dump PCI config space before the kernel changes anything off [X86] don't probe for the PCI bus bios [X86-32] force use of PCI BIOS, don't access @@ -3123,11 +3255,10 @@ window. The default value is 64 megabytes. resource_alignment= Format: - [<order of align>@][<domain>:]<bus>:<slot>.<func>[; ...] - [<order of align>@]pci:<vendor>:<device>\ - [:<subvendor>:<subdevice>][; ...] + [<order of align>@]<pci_dev>[; ...] Specifies alignment and device to reassign - aligned memory resources. + aligned memory resources. How to + specify the device is described above. If <order of align> is not specified, PAGE_SIZE is used as alignment. PCI-PCI bridge can be specified, if resource @@ -3170,6 +3301,15 @@ Adding the window is slightly risky (it may conflict with unreported devices), so this taints the kernel. + disable_acs_redir=<pci_dev>[; ...] + Specify one or more PCI devices (in the format + specified above) separated by semicolons. + Each device specified will have the PCI ACS + redirect capabilities forced off which will + allow P2P traffic between devices through + bridges without forcing it upstream. Note: + this removes isolation between devices and + may put more devices in an IOMMU group. pcie_aspm= [PCIE] Forcibly enable or disable PCIe Active State Power Management. @@ -3632,8 +3772,8 @@ Set time (s) after boot for CPU-hotplug testing. rcutorture.onoff_interval= [KNL] - Set time (s) between CPU-hotplug operations, or - zero to disable CPU-hotplug testing. + Set time (jiffies) between CPU-hotplug operations, + or zero to disable CPU-hotplug testing. rcutorture.shuffle_interval= [KNL] Set task-shuffle interval (s). Shuffling tasks @@ -4060,6 +4200,8 @@ This parameter controls whether the Speculative Store Bypass optimization is used. + On x86 the options are: + on - Unconditionally disable Speculative Store Bypass off - Unconditionally enable Speculative Store Bypass auto - Kernel detects whether the CPU model contains an @@ -4075,12 +4217,20 @@ seccomp - Same as "prctl" above, but all seccomp threads will disable SSB unless they explicitly opt out. - Not specifying this option is equivalent to - spec_store_bypass_disable=auto. - Default mitigations: X86: If CONFIG_SECCOMP=y "seccomp", otherwise "prctl" + On powerpc the options are: + + on,auto - On Power8 and Power9 insert a store-forwarding + barrier on kernel entry and exit. On Power7 + perform a software flush on kernel entry and + exit. + off - No action. + + Not specifying this option is equivalent to + spec_store_bypass_disable=auto. + spia_io_base= [HW,MTD] spia_fio_base= spia_pedr= @@ -4846,3 +4996,8 @@ xirc2ps_cs= [NET,PCMCIA] Format: <irq>,<irq_mask>,<io>,<full_duplex>,<do_sound>,<lockup_hack>[,<irq2>[,<irq3>[,<irq4>]]] + + xhci-hcd.quirks [USB,KNL] + A hex value specifying bitmask with supplemental xhci + host controller quirks. Meaning of each bit can be + consulted in header drivers/usb/host/xhci.h. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bae52b845de0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/l1tf.rst @@ -0,0 +1,610 @@ +L1TF - L1 Terminal Fault +======================== + +L1 Terminal Fault is a hardware vulnerability which allows unprivileged +speculative access to data which is available in the Level 1 Data Cache +when the page table entry controlling the virtual address, which is used +for the access, has the Present bit cleared or other reserved bits set. + +Affected processors +------------------- + +This vulnerability affects a wide range of Intel processors. The +vulnerability is not present on: + + - Processors from AMD, Centaur and other non Intel vendors + + - Older processor models, where the CPU family is < 6 + + - A range of Intel ATOM processors (Cedarview, Cloverview, Lincroft, + Penwell, Pineview, Silvermont, Airmont, Merrifield) + + - The Intel XEON PHI family + + - Intel processors which have the ARCH_CAP_RDCL_NO bit set in the + IA32_ARCH_CAPABILITIES MSR. If the bit is set the CPU is not affected + by the Meltdown vulnerability either. These CPUs should become + available by end of 2018. + +Whether a processor is affected or not can be read out from the L1TF +vulnerability file in sysfs. See :ref:`l1tf_sys_info`. + +Related CVEs +------------ + +The following CVE entries are related to the L1TF vulnerability: + + ============= ================= ============================== + CVE-2018-3615 L1 Terminal Fault SGX related aspects + CVE-2018-3620 L1 Terminal Fault OS, SMM related aspects + CVE-2018-3646 L1 Terminal Fault Virtualization related aspects + ============= ================= ============================== + +Problem +------- + +If an instruction accesses a virtual address for which the relevant page +table entry (PTE) has the Present bit cleared or other reserved bits set, +then speculative execution ignores the invalid PTE and loads the referenced +data if it is present in the Level 1 Data Cache, as if the page referenced +by the address bits in the PTE was still present and accessible. + +While this is a purely speculative mechanism and the instruction will raise +a page fault when it is retired eventually, the pure act of loading the +data and making it available to other speculative instructions opens up the +opportunity for side channel attacks to unprivileged malicious code, +similar to the Meltdown attack. + +While Meltdown breaks the user space to kernel space protection, L1TF +allows to attack any physical memory address in the system and the attack +works across all protection domains. It allows an attack of SGX and also +works from inside virtual machines because the speculation bypasses the +extended page table (EPT) protection mechanism. + + +Attack scenarios +---------------- + +1. Malicious user space +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + Operating Systems store arbitrary information in the address bits of a + PTE which is marked non present. This allows a malicious user space + application to attack the physical memory to which these PTEs resolve. + In some cases user-space can maliciously influence the information + encoded in the address bits of the PTE, thus making attacks more + deterministic and more practical. + + The Linux kernel contains a mitigation for this attack vector, PTE + inversion, which is permanently enabled and has no performance + impact. The kernel ensures that the address bits of PTEs, which are not + marked present, never point to cacheable physical memory space. + + A system with an up to date kernel is protected against attacks from + malicious user space applications. + +2. Malicious guest in a virtual machine +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + The fact that L1TF breaks all domain protections allows malicious guest + OSes, which can control the PTEs directly, and malicious guest user + space applications, which run on an unprotected guest kernel lacking the + PTE inversion mitigation for L1TF, to attack physical host memory. + + A special aspect of L1TF in the context of virtualization is symmetric + multi threading (SMT). The Intel implementation of SMT is called + HyperThreading. The fact that Hyperthreads on the affected processors + share the L1 Data Cache (L1D) is important for this. As the flaw allows + only to attack data which is present in L1D, a malicious guest running + on one Hyperthread can attack the data which is brought into the L1D by + the context which runs on the sibling Hyperthread of the same physical + core. This context can be host OS, host user space or a different guest. + + If the processor does not support Extended Page Tables, the attack is + only possible, when the hypervisor does not sanitize the content of the + effective (shadow) page tables. + + While solutions exist to mitigate these attack vectors fully, these + mitigations are not enabled by default in the Linux kernel because they + can affect performance significantly. The kernel provides several + mechanisms which can be utilized to address the problem depending on the + deployment scenario. The mitigations, their protection scope and impact + are described in the next sections. + + The default mitigations and the rationale for choosing them are explained + at the end of this document. See :ref:`default_mitigations`. + +.. _l1tf_sys_info: + +L1TF system information +----------------------- + +The Linux kernel provides a sysfs interface to enumerate the current L1TF +status of the system: whether the system is vulnerable, and which +mitigations are active. The relevant sysfs file is: + +/sys/devices/system/cpu/vulnerabilities/l1tf + +The possible values in this file are: + + =========================== =============================== + 'Not affected' The processor is not vulnerable + 'Mitigation: PTE Inversion' The host protection is active + =========================== =============================== + +If KVM/VMX is enabled and the processor is vulnerable then the following +information is appended to the 'Mitigation: PTE Inversion' part: + + - SMT status: + + ===================== ================ + 'VMX: SMT vulnerable' SMT is enabled + 'VMX: SMT disabled' SMT is disabled + ===================== ================ + + - L1D Flush mode: + + ================================ ==================================== + 'L1D vulnerable' L1D flushing is disabled + + 'L1D conditional cache flushes' L1D flush is conditionally enabled + + 'L1D cache flushes' L1D flush is unconditionally enabled + ================================ ==================================== + +The resulting grade of protection is discussed in the following sections. + + +Host mitigation mechanism +------------------------- + +The kernel is unconditionally protected against L1TF attacks from malicious +user space running on the host. + + +Guest mitigation mechanisms +--------------------------- + +.. _l1d_flush: + +1. L1D flush on VMENTER +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + To make sure that a guest cannot attack data which is present in the L1D + the hypervisor flushes the L1D before entering the guest. + + Flushing the L1D evicts not only the data which should not be accessed + by a potentially malicious guest, it also flushes the guest + data. Flushing the L1D has a performance impact as the processor has to + bring the flushed guest data back into the L1D. Depending on the + frequency of VMEXIT/VMENTER and the type of computations in the guest + performance degradation in the range of 1% to 50% has been observed. For + scenarios where guest VMEXIT/VMENTER are rare the performance impact is + minimal. Virtio and mechanisms like posted interrupts are designed to + confine the VMEXITs to a bare minimum, but specific configurations and + application scenarios might still suffer from a high VMEXIT rate. + + The kernel provides two L1D flush modes: + - conditional ('cond') + - unconditional ('always') + + The conditional mode avoids L1D flushing after VMEXITs which execute + only audited code paths before the corresponding VMENTER. These code + paths have been verified that they cannot expose secrets or other + interesting data to an attacker, but they can leak information about the + address space layout of the hypervisor. + + Unconditional mode flushes L1D on all VMENTER invocations and provides + maximum protection. It has a higher overhead than the conditional + mode. The overhead cannot be quantified correctly as it depends on the + workload scenario and the resulting number of VMEXITs. + + The general recommendation is to enable L1D flush on VMENTER. The kernel + defaults to conditional mode on affected processors. + + **Note**, that L1D flush does not prevent the SMT problem because the + sibling thread will also bring back its data into the L1D which makes it + attackable again. + + L1D flush can be controlled by the administrator via the kernel command + line and sysfs control files. See :ref:`mitigation_control_command_line` + and :ref:`mitigation_control_kvm`. + +.. _guest_confinement: + +2. Guest VCPU confinement to dedicated physical cores +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + To address the SMT problem, it is possible to make a guest or a group of + guests affine to one or more physical cores. The proper mechanism for + that is to utilize exclusive cpusets to ensure that no other guest or + host tasks can run on these cores. + + If only a single guest or related guests run on sibling SMT threads on + the same physical core then they can only attack their own memory and + restricted parts of the host memory. + + Host memory is attackable, when one of the sibling SMT threads runs in + host OS (hypervisor) context and the other in guest context. The amount + of valuable information from the host OS context depends on the context + which the host OS executes, i.e. interrupts, soft interrupts and kernel + threads. The amount of valuable data from these contexts cannot be + declared as non-interesting for an attacker without deep inspection of + the code. + + **Note**, that assigning guests to a fixed set of physical cores affects + the ability of the scheduler to do load balancing and might have + negative effects on CPU utilization depending on the hosting + scenario. Disabling SMT might be a viable alternative for particular + scenarios. + + For further information about confining guests to a single or to a group + of cores consult the cpusets documentation: + + https://www.kernel.org/doc/Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt + +.. _interrupt_isolation: + +3. Interrupt affinity +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + Interrupts can be made affine to logical CPUs. This is not universally + true because there are types of interrupts which are truly per CPU + interrupts, e.g. the local timer interrupt. Aside of that multi queue + devices affine their interrupts to single CPUs or groups of CPUs per + queue without allowing the administrator to control the affinities. + + Moving the interrupts, which can be affinity controlled, away from CPUs + which run untrusted guests, reduces the attack vector space. + + Whether the interrupts with are affine to CPUs, which run untrusted + guests, provide interesting data for an attacker depends on the system + configuration and the scenarios which run on the system. While for some + of the interrupts it can be assumed that they won't expose interesting + information beyond exposing hints about the host OS memory layout, there + is no way to make general assumptions. + + Interrupt affinity can be controlled by the administrator via the + /proc/irq/$NR/smp_affinity[_list] files. Limited documentation is + available at: + + https://www.kernel.org/doc/Documentation/IRQ-affinity.txt + +.. _smt_control: + +4. SMT control +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + To prevent the SMT issues of L1TF it might be necessary to disable SMT + completely. Disabling SMT can have a significant performance impact, but + the impact depends on the hosting scenario and the type of workloads. + The impact of disabling SMT needs also to be weighted against the impact + of other mitigation solutions like confining guests to dedicated cores. + + The kernel provides a sysfs interface to retrieve the status of SMT and + to control it. It also provides a kernel command line interface to + control SMT. + + The kernel command line interface consists of the following options: + + =========== ========================================================== + nosmt Affects the bring up of the secondary CPUs during boot. The + kernel tries to bring all present CPUs online during the + boot process. "nosmt" makes sure that from each physical + core only one - the so called primary (hyper) thread is + activated. Due to a design flaw of Intel processors related + to Machine Check Exceptions the non primary siblings have + to be brought up at least partially and are then shut down + again. "nosmt" can be undone via the sysfs interface. + + nosmt=force Has the same effect as "nosmt" but it does not allow to + undo the SMT disable via the sysfs interface. + =========== ========================================================== + + The sysfs interface provides two files: + + - /sys/devices/system/cpu/smt/control + - /sys/devices/system/cpu/smt/active + + /sys/devices/system/cpu/smt/control: + + This file allows to read out the SMT control state and provides the + ability to disable or (re)enable SMT. The possible states are: + + ============== =================================================== + on SMT is supported by the CPU and enabled. All + logical CPUs can be onlined and offlined without + restrictions. + + off SMT is supported by the CPU and disabled. Only + the so called primary SMT threads can be onlined + and offlined without restrictions. An attempt to + online a non-primary sibling is rejected + + forceoff Same as 'off' but the state cannot be controlled. + Attempts to write to the control file are rejected. + + notsupported The processor does not support SMT. It's therefore + not affected by the SMT implications of L1TF. + Attempts to write to the control file are rejected. + ============== =================================================== + + The possible states which can be written into this file to control SMT + state are: + + - on + - off + - forceoff + + /sys/devices/system/cpu/smt/active: + + This file reports whether SMT is enabled and active, i.e. if on any + physical core two or more sibling threads are online. + + SMT control is also possible at boot time via the l1tf kernel command + line parameter in combination with L1D flush control. See + :ref:`mitigation_control_command_line`. + +5. Disabling EPT +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + Disabling EPT for virtual machines provides full mitigation for L1TF even + with SMT enabled, because the effective page tables for guests are + managed and sanitized by the hypervisor. Though disabling EPT has a + significant performance impact especially when the Meltdown mitigation + KPTI is enabled. + + EPT can be disabled in the hypervisor via the 'kvm-intel.ept' parameter. + +There is ongoing research and development for new mitigation mechanisms to +address the performance impact of disabling SMT or EPT. + +.. _mitigation_control_command_line: + +Mitigation control on the kernel command line +--------------------------------------------- + +The kernel command line allows to control the L1TF mitigations at boot +time with the option "l1tf=". The valid arguments for this option are: + + ============ ============================================================= + full Provides all available mitigations for the L1TF + vulnerability. Disables SMT and enables all mitigations in + the hypervisors, i.e. unconditional L1D flushing + + SMT control and L1D flush control via the sysfs interface + is still possible after boot. Hypervisors will issue a + warning when the first VM is started in a potentially + insecure configuration, i.e. SMT enabled or L1D flush + disabled. + + full,force Same as 'full', but disables SMT and L1D flush runtime + control. Implies the 'nosmt=force' command line option. + (i.e. sysfs control of SMT is disabled.) + + flush Leaves SMT enabled and enables the default hypervisor + mitigation, i.e. conditional L1D flushing + + SMT control and L1D flush control via the sysfs interface + is still possible after boot. Hypervisors will issue a + warning when the first VM is started in a potentially + insecure configuration, i.e. SMT enabled or L1D flush + disabled. + + flush,nosmt Disables SMT and enables the default hypervisor mitigation, + i.e. conditional L1D flushing. + + SMT control and L1D flush control via the sysfs interface + is still possible after boot. Hypervisors will issue a + warning when the first VM is started in a potentially + insecure configuration, i.e. SMT enabled or L1D flush + disabled. + + flush,nowarn Same as 'flush', but hypervisors will not warn when a VM is + started in a potentially insecure configuration. + + off Disables hypervisor mitigations and doesn't emit any + warnings. + ============ ============================================================= + +The default is 'flush'. For details about L1D flushing see :ref:`l1d_flush`. + + +.. _mitigation_control_kvm: + +Mitigation control for KVM - module parameter +------------------------------------------------------------- + +The KVM hypervisor mitigation mechanism, flushing the L1D cache when +entering a guest, can be controlled with a module parameter. + +The option/parameter is "kvm-intel.vmentry_l1d_flush=". It takes the +following arguments: + + ============ ============================================================== + always L1D cache flush on every VMENTER. + + cond Flush L1D on VMENTER only when the code between VMEXIT and + VMENTER can leak host memory which is considered + interesting for an attacker. This still can leak host memory + which allows e.g. to determine the hosts address space layout. + + never Disables the mitigation + ============ ============================================================== + +The parameter can be provided on the kernel command line, as a module +parameter when loading the modules and at runtime modified via the sysfs +file: + +/sys/module/kvm_intel/parameters/vmentry_l1d_flush + +The default is 'cond'. If 'l1tf=full,force' is given on the kernel command +line, then 'always' is enforced and the kvm-intel.vmentry_l1d_flush +module parameter is ignored and writes to the sysfs file are rejected. + + +Mitigation selection guide +-------------------------- + +1. No virtualization in use +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + The system is protected by the kernel unconditionally and no further + action is required. + +2. Virtualization with trusted guests +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + If the guest comes from a trusted source and the guest OS kernel is + guaranteed to have the L1TF mitigations in place the system is fully + protected against L1TF and no further action is required. + + To avoid the overhead of the default L1D flushing on VMENTER the + administrator can disable the flushing via the kernel command line and + sysfs control files. See :ref:`mitigation_control_command_line` and + :ref:`mitigation_control_kvm`. + + +3. Virtualization with untrusted guests +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +3.1. SMT not supported or disabled +"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" + + If SMT is not supported by the processor or disabled in the BIOS or by + the kernel, it's only required to enforce L1D flushing on VMENTER. + + Conditional L1D flushing is the default behaviour and can be tuned. See + :ref:`mitigation_control_command_line` and :ref:`mitigation_control_kvm`. + +3.2. EPT not supported or disabled +"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" + + If EPT is not supported by the processor or disabled in the hypervisor, + the system is fully protected. SMT can stay enabled and L1D flushing on + VMENTER is not required. + + EPT can be disabled in the hypervisor via the 'kvm-intel.ept' parameter. + +3.3. SMT and EPT supported and active +""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" + + If SMT and EPT are supported and active then various degrees of + mitigations can be employed: + + - L1D flushing on VMENTER: + + L1D flushing on VMENTER is the minimal protection requirement, but it + is only potent in combination with other mitigation methods. + + Conditional L1D flushing is the default behaviour and can be tuned. See + :ref:`mitigation_control_command_line` and :ref:`mitigation_control_kvm`. + + - Guest confinement: + + Confinement of guests to a single or a group of physical cores which + are not running any other processes, can reduce the attack surface + significantly, but interrupts, soft interrupts and kernel threads can + still expose valuable data to a potential attacker. See + :ref:`guest_confinement`. + + - Interrupt isolation: + + Isolating the guest CPUs from interrupts can reduce the attack surface + further, but still allows a malicious guest to explore a limited amount + of host physical memory. This can at least be used to gain knowledge + about the host address space layout. The interrupts which have a fixed + affinity to the CPUs which run the untrusted guests can depending on + the scenario still trigger soft interrupts and schedule kernel threads + which might expose valuable information. See + :ref:`interrupt_isolation`. + +The above three mitigation methods combined can provide protection to a +certain degree, but the risk of the remaining attack surface has to be +carefully analyzed. For full protection the following methods are +available: + + - Disabling SMT: + + Disabling SMT and enforcing the L1D flushing provides the maximum + amount of protection. This mitigation is not depending on any of the + above mitigation methods. + + SMT control and L1D flushing can be tuned by the command line + parameters 'nosmt', 'l1tf', 'kvm-intel.vmentry_l1d_flush' and at run + time with the matching sysfs control files. See :ref:`smt_control`, + :ref:`mitigation_control_command_line` and + :ref:`mitigation_control_kvm`. + + - Disabling EPT: + + Disabling EPT provides the maximum amount of protection as well. It is + not depending on any of the above mitigation methods. SMT can stay + enabled and L1D flushing is not required, but the performance impact is + significant. + + EPT can be disabled in the hypervisor via the 'kvm-intel.ept' + parameter. + +3.4. Nested virtual machines +"""""""""""""""""""""""""""" + +When nested virtualization is in use, three operating systems are involved: +the bare metal hypervisor, the nested hypervisor and the nested virtual +machine. VMENTER operations from the nested hypervisor into the nested +guest will always be processed by the bare metal hypervisor. If KVM is the +bare metal hypervisor it wiil: + + - Flush the L1D cache on every switch from the nested hypervisor to the + nested virtual machine, so that the nested hypervisor's secrets are not + exposed to the nested virtual machine; + + - Flush the L1D cache on every switch from the nested virtual machine to + the nested hypervisor; this is a complex operation, and flushing the L1D + cache avoids that the bare metal hypervisor's secrets are exposed to the + nested virtual machine; + + - Instruct the nested hypervisor to not perform any L1D cache flush. This + is an optimization to avoid double L1D flushing. + + +.. _default_mitigations: + +Default mitigations +------------------- + + The kernel default mitigations for vulnerable processors are: + + - PTE inversion to protect against malicious user space. This is done + unconditionally and cannot be controlled. + + - L1D conditional flushing on VMENTER when EPT is enabled for + a guest. + + The kernel does not by default enforce the disabling of SMT, which leaves + SMT systems vulnerable when running untrusted guests with EPT enabled. + + The rationale for this choice is: + + - Force disabling SMT can break existing setups, especially with + unattended updates. + + - If regular users run untrusted guests on their machine, then L1TF is + just an add on to other malware which might be embedded in an untrusted + guest, e.g. spam-bots or attacks on the local network. + + There is no technical way to prevent a user from running untrusted code + on their machines blindly. + + - It's technically extremely unlikely and from today's knowledge even + impossible that L1TF can be exploited via the most popular attack + mechanisms like JavaScript because these mechanisms have no way to + control PTEs. If this would be possible and not other mitigation would + be possible, then the default might be different. + + - The administrators of cloud and hosting setups have to carefully + analyze the risk for their scenarios and make the appropriate + mitigation choices, which might even vary across their deployed + machines and also result in other changes of their overall setup. + There is no way for the kernel to provide a sensible default for this + kind of scenarios. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/idle_page_tracking.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/idle_page_tracking.rst index 6f7b7ca1add3..df9394fb39c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/idle_page_tracking.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/idle_page_tracking.rst @@ -65,6 +65,11 @@ workload one should: are not reclaimable, he or she can filter them out using ``/proc/kpageflags``. +The page-types tool in the tools/vm directory can be used to assist in this. +If the tool is run initially with the appropriate option, it will mark all the +queried pages as idle. Subsequent runs of the tool can then show which pages have +their idle flag cleared in the interim. + See :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst <pagemap>` for more information about ``/proc/pid/pagemap``, ``/proc/kpageflags``, and ``/proc/kpagecgroup``. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst index 577af85beb41..3f7bade2c231 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/mm/pagemap.rst @@ -44,6 +44,9 @@ There are four components to pagemap: * ``/proc/kpagecount``. This file contains a 64-bit count of the number of times each page is mapped, indexed by PFN. +The page-types tool in the tools/vm directory can be used to query the +number of times a page is mapped. + * ``/proc/kpageflags``. This file contains a 64-bit set of flags for each page, indexed by PFN. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst index ab2fe0eda1d7..8f1d3de449b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_pstate.rst @@ -324,8 +324,7 @@ Global Attributes ``intel_pstate`` exposes several global attributes (files) in ``sysfs`` to control its functionality at the system level. They are located in the -``/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpufreq/intel_pstate/`` directory and affect all -CPUs. +``/sys/devices/system/cpu/intel_pstate/`` directory and affect all CPUs. Some of them are not present if the ``intel_pstate=per_cpu_perf_limits`` argument is passed to the kernel in the command line. @@ -379,6 +378,17 @@ argument is passed to the kernel in the command line. but it affects the maximum possible value of per-policy P-state limits (see `Interpretation of Policy Attributes`_ below for details). +``hwp_dynamic_boost`` + This attribute is only present if ``intel_pstate`` works in the + `active mode with the HWP feature enabled <Active Mode With HWP_>`_ in + the processor. If set (equal to 1), it causes the minimum P-state limit + to be increased dynamically for a short time whenever a task previously + waiting on I/O is selected to run on a given logical CPU (the purpose + of this mechanism is to improve performance). + + This setting has no effect on logical CPUs whose minimum P-state limit + is directly set to the highest non-turbo P-state or above it. + .. _status_attr: ``status`` @@ -410,7 +420,7 @@ argument is passed to the kernel in the command line. That only is supported in some configurations, though (for example, if the `HWP feature is enabled in the processor <Active Mode With HWP_>`_, the operation mode of the driver cannot be changed), and if it is not - supported in the current configuration, writes to this attribute with + supported in the current configuration, writes to this attribute will fail with an appropriate error. Interpretation of Policy Attributes diff --git a/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt b/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt index 07f147381f32..ea2dafe49ae8 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/null_blk.txt @@ -85,3 +85,10 @@ shared_tags=[0/1]: Default: 0 0: Tag set is not shared. 1: Tag set shared between devices for blk-mq. Only makes sense with nr_devices > 1, otherwise there's no tag set to share. + +zoned=[0/1]: Default: 0 + 0: Block device is exposed as a random-access block device. + 1: Block device is exposed as a host-managed zoned block device. + +zone_size=[MB]: Default: 256 + Per zone size when exposed as a zoned block device. Must be a power of two. diff --git a/Documentation/block/stat.txt b/Documentation/block/stat.txt index 0dbc946de2ea..0aace9cc536c 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/stat.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/stat.txt @@ -31,28 +31,32 @@ write ticks milliseconds total wait time for write requests in_flight requests number of I/Os currently in flight io_ticks milliseconds total time this block device has been active time_in_queue milliseconds total wait time for all requests +discard I/Os requests number of discard I/Os processed +discard merges requests number of discard I/Os merged with in-queue I/O +discard sectors sectors number of sectors discarded +discard ticks milliseconds total wait time for discard requests -read I/Os, write I/Os -===================== +read I/Os, write I/Os, discard I/0s +=================================== These values increment when an I/O request completes. -read merges, write merges -========================= +read merges, write merges, discard merges +========================================= These values increment when an I/O request is merged with an already-queued I/O request. -read sectors, write sectors -=========================== +read sectors, write sectors, discard_sectors +============================================ -These values count the number of sectors read from or written to this -block device. The "sectors" in question are the standard UNIX 512-byte -sectors, not any device- or filesystem-specific block size. The -counters are incremented when the I/O completes. +These values count the number of sectors read from, written to, or +discarded from this block device. The "sectors" in question are the +standard UNIX 512-byte sectors, not any device- or filesystem-specific +block size. The counters are incremented when the I/O completes. -read ticks, write ticks -======================= +read ticks, write ticks, discard ticks +====================================== These values count the number of milliseconds that I/O requests have waited on this block device. If there are multiple I/O requests waiting, diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/bpf_devel_QA.rst b/Documentation/bpf/bpf_devel_QA.rst index 0e7c1d946e83..c9856b927055 100644 --- a/Documentation/bpf/bpf_devel_QA.rst +++ b/Documentation/bpf/bpf_devel_QA.rst @@ -106,9 +106,9 @@ into the bpf-next tree will make their way into net-next tree. net and net-next are both run by David S. Miller. From there, they will go into the kernel mainline tree run by Linus Torvalds. To read up on the process of net and net-next being merged into the mainline tree, see -the `netdev FAQ`_ under: +the :ref:`netdev-FAQ` + - `Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt`_ Occasionally, to prevent merge conflicts, we might send pull requests to other trees (e.g. tracing) with a small subset of the patches, but @@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ request):: Q: How do I indicate which tree (bpf vs. bpf-next) my patch should be applied to? --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -A: The process is the very same as described in the `netdev FAQ`_, so -please read up on it. The subject line must indicate whether the +A: The process is the very same as described in the :ref:`netdev-FAQ`, +so please read up on it. The subject line must indicate whether the patch is a fix or rather "next-like" content in order to let the maintainers know whether it is targeted at bpf or bpf-next. @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ ii) run extensive BPF test suite and Once the BPF pull request was accepted by David S. Miller, then the patches end up in net or net-next tree, respectively, and make their way from there further into mainline. Again, see the -`netdev FAQ`_ for additional information e.g. on how often they are +:ref:`netdev-FAQ` for additional information e.g. on how often they are merged to mainline. Q: How long do I need to wait for feedback on my BPF patches? @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Q: Are patches applied to bpf-next when the merge window is open? ----------------------------------------------------------------- A: For the time when the merge window is open, bpf-next will not be processed. This is roughly analogous to net-next patch processing, -so feel free to read up on the `netdev FAQ`_ about further details. +so feel free to read up on the :ref:`netdev-FAQ` about further details. During those two weeks of merge window, we might ask you to resend your patch series once bpf-next is open again. Once Linus released @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ netdev kernel mailing list in Cc and ask for the fix to be queued up: netdev@vger.kernel.org The process in general is the same as on netdev itself, see also the -`netdev FAQ`_ document. +:ref:`netdev-FAQ`. Q: Do you also backport to kernels not currently maintained as stable? ---------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -388,9 +388,7 @@ Q: The BPF patch I am about to submit needs to go to stable as well What should I do? A: The same rules apply as with netdev patch submissions in general, see -`netdev FAQ`_ under: - - `Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt`_ +the :ref:`netdev-FAQ`. Never add "``Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org``" to the patch description, but ask the BPF maintainers to queue the patches instead. This can be done @@ -630,8 +628,7 @@ when: .. Links .. _Documentation/process/: https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/process/ .. _MAINTAINERS: ../../MAINTAINERS -.. _Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt: ../networking/netdev-FAQ.txt -.. _netdev FAQ: ../networking/netdev-FAQ.txt +.. _netdev-FAQ: ../networking/netdev-FAQ.rst .. _samples/bpf/: ../../samples/bpf/ .. _selftests: ../../tools/testing/selftests/bpf/ .. _Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst: diff --git a/Documentation/bpf/README.rst b/Documentation/bpf/index.rst index b9a80c9e9392..00a8450a602f 100644 --- a/Documentation/bpf/README.rst +++ b/Documentation/bpf/index.rst @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ ================= -BPF documentation +BPF Documentation ================= This directory contains documentation for the BPF (Berkeley Packet @@ -22,14 +22,14 @@ Frequently asked questions (FAQ) Two sets of Questions and Answers (Q&A) are maintained. -* QA for common questions about BPF see: bpf_design_QA_ +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 -* QA for developers interacting with BPF subsystem: bpf_devel_QA_ + bpf_design_QA + bpf_devel_QA .. Links: -.. _bpf_design_QA: bpf_design_QA.rst -.. _bpf_devel_QA: bpf_devel_QA.rst .. _Documentation/networking/filter.txt: ../networking/filter.txt .. _man-pages: https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/ .. _bpf(2): http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man2/bpf.2.html diff --git a/Documentation/conf.py b/Documentation/conf.py index 62ac5a9f3a9f..b691af4831fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/conf.py +++ b/Documentation/conf.py @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ needs_sphinx = '1.3' # Add any Sphinx extension module names here, as strings. They can be # extensions coming with Sphinx (named 'sphinx.ext.*') or your custom # ones. -extensions = ['kerneldoc', 'rstFlatTable', 'kernel_include', 'cdomain', 'kfigure'] +extensions = ['kerneldoc', 'rstFlatTable', 'kernel_include', 'cdomain', 'kfigure', 'sphinx.ext.ifconfig'] # The name of the math extension changed on Sphinx 1.4 if major == 1 and minor > 3: diff --git a/Documentation/console/console.txt b/Documentation/console/console.txt index f93810d599ad..d73c2ab4beda 100644 --- a/Documentation/console/console.txt +++ b/Documentation/console/console.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Console Drivers =============== -The linux kernel has 2 general types of console drivers. The first type is +The Linux kernel has 2 general types of console drivers. The first type is assigned by the kernel to all the virtual consoles during the boot process. This type will be called 'system driver', and only one system driver is allowed to exist. The system driver is persistent and it can never be unloaded, though @@ -17,10 +17,11 @@ of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is released by the console, the system driver will take over. -Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, has to call: +Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call: do_take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer - give_up_console() - unload driver, it will only work if driver is fully unbond + give_up_console() - unload driver; it will only work if driver + is fully unbound In newer kernels, the following are also available: @@ -56,7 +57,7 @@ What do these files signify? cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name (S) VGA+ - '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, ie, it cannot be directly + '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly commanded to bind or unbind 'VGA+' is the name of the driver @@ -89,7 +90,7 @@ driver, make changes, recompile, reload and rebind the driver without any need for rebooting the kernel. For regular users who may want to switch from framebuffer console to VGA console and vice versa, this feature also makes this possible. (NOTE NOTE NOTE: Please read fbcon.txt under Documentation/fb -for more details). +for more details.) Notes for developers: ===================== @@ -110,8 +111,8 @@ In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work, console drivers must follow these guidelines: 1. All drivers, except system drivers, must call either do_register_con_driver() - or do_take_over_console(). do_register_con_driver() will just add the driver to - the console's internal list. It won't take over the + or do_take_over_console(). do_register_con_driver() will just add the driver + to the console's internal list. It won't take over the console. do_take_over_console(), as it name implies, will also take over (or bind to) the console. diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/atomic_ops.rst b/Documentation/core-api/atomic_ops.rst index 2e7165f86f55..724583453e1f 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/atomic_ops.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/atomic_ops.rst @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ updated by one CPU, local_t is probably more appropriate. Please see local_t. The first operations to implement for atomic_t's are the initializers and -plain reads. :: +plain writes. :: #define ATOMIC_INIT(i) { (i) } #define atomic_set(v, i) ((v)->counter = (i)) diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/boot-time-mm.rst b/Documentation/core-api/boot-time-mm.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..03cb1643f46f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/core-api/boot-time-mm.rst @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +=========================== +Boot time memory management +=========================== + +Early system initialization cannot use "normal" memory management +simply because it is not set up yet. But there is still need to +allocate memory for various data structures, for instance for the +physical page allocator. To address this, a specialized allocator +called the :ref:`Boot Memory Allocator <bootmem>`, or bootmem, was +introduced. Several years later PowerPC developers added a "Logical +Memory Blocks" allocator, which was later adopted by other +architectures and renamed to :ref:`memblock <memblock>`. There is also +a compatibility layer called `nobootmem` that translates bootmem +allocation interfaces to memblock calls. + +The selection of the early allocator is done using +``CONFIG_NO_BOOTMEM`` and ``CONFIG_HAVE_MEMBLOCK`` kernel +configuration options. These options are enabled or disabled +statically by the architectures' Kconfig files. + +* Architectures that rely only on bootmem select + ``CONFIG_NO_BOOTMEM=n && CONFIG_HAVE_MEMBLOCK=n``. +* The users of memblock with the nobootmem compatibility layer set + ``CONFIG_NO_BOOTMEM=y && CONFIG_HAVE_MEMBLOCK=y``. +* And for those that use both memblock and bootmem the configuration + includes ``CONFIG_NO_BOOTMEM=n && CONFIG_HAVE_MEMBLOCK=y``. + +Whichever allocator is used, it is the responsibility of the +architecture specific initialization to set it up in +:c:func:`setup_arch` and tear it down in :c:func:`mem_init` functions. + +Once the early memory management is available it offers a variety of +functions and macros for memory allocations. The allocation request +may be directed to the first (and probably the only) node or to a +particular node in a NUMA system. There are API variants that panic +when an allocation fails and those that don't. And more recent and +advanced memblock even allows controlling its own behaviour. + +.. _bootmem: + +Bootmem +======= + +(mostly stolen from Mel Gorman's "Understanding the Linux Virtual +Memory Manager" `book`_) + +.. _book: https://www.kernel.org/doc/gorman/ + +.. kernel-doc:: mm/bootmem.c + :doc: bootmem overview + +.. _memblock: + +Memblock +======== + +.. kernel-doc:: mm/memblock.c + :doc: memblock overview + + +Functions and structures +======================== + +Common API +---------- + +The functions that are described in this section are available +regardless of what early memory manager is enabled. + +.. kernel-doc:: mm/nobootmem.c + +Bootmem specific API +-------------------- + +These interfaces available only with bootmem, i.e when ``CONFIG_NO_BOOTMEM=n`` + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/bootmem.h +.. kernel-doc:: mm/bootmem.c + :nodocs: + +Memblock specific API +--------------------- + +Here is the description of memblock data structures, functions and +macros. Some of them are actually internal, but since they are +documented it would be silly to omit them. Besides, reading the +descriptions for the internal functions can help to understand what +really happens under the hood. + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/memblock.h +.. kernel-doc:: mm/memblock.c + :nodocs: diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/idr.rst b/Documentation/core-api/idr.rst index 9078a5c3ac95..d351e880a2f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/idr.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/idr.rst @@ -76,4 +76,6 @@ Functions and structures ======================== .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/idr.h + :functions: .. kernel-doc:: lib/idr.c + :functions: diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst index f5a66b72f984..b5379fb740a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst @@ -28,6 +28,8 @@ Core utilities printk-formats circular-buffers gfp_mask-from-fs-io + timekeeping + boot-time-mm Interfaces for kernel debugging =============================== diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst b/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst index 8e44aea366c2..76fe2d0f5e7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/kernel-api.rst @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Resources Management MTRR Handling ------------- -.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/kernel/cpu/mtrr/main.c +.. kernel-doc:: arch/x86/kernel/cpu/mtrr/mtrr.c :export: Security Framework diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/timekeeping.rst b/Documentation/core-api/timekeeping.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..93cbeb9daec0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/core-api/timekeeping.rst @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +ktime accessors +=============== + +Device drivers can read the current time using ktime_get() and the many +related functions declared in linux/timekeeping.h. As a rule of thumb, +using an accessor with a shorter name is preferred over one with a longer +name if both are equally fit for a particular use case. + +Basic ktime_t based interfaces +------------------------------ + +The recommended simplest form returns an opaque ktime_t, with variants +that return time for different clock references: + + +.. c:function:: ktime_t ktime_get( void ) + + CLOCK_MONOTONIC + + Useful for reliable timestamps and measuring short time intervals + accurately. Starts at system boot time but stops during suspend. + +.. c:function:: ktime_t ktime_get_boottime( void ) + + CLOCK_BOOTTIME + + Like ktime_get(), but does not stop when suspended. This can be + used e.g. for key expiration times that need to be synchronized + with other machines across a suspend operation. + +.. c:function:: ktime_t ktime_get_real( void ) + + CLOCK_REALTIME + + Returns the time in relative to the UNIX epoch starting in 1970 + using the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), same as gettimeofday() + user space. This is used for all timestamps that need to + persist across a reboot, like inode times, but should be avoided + for internal uses, since it can jump backwards due to a leap + second update, NTP adjustment settimeofday() operation from user + space. + +.. c:function:: ktime_t ktime_get_clocktai( void ) + + CLOCK_TAI + + Like ktime_get_real(), but uses the International Atomic Time (TAI) + reference instead of UTC to avoid jumping on leap second updates. + This is rarely useful in the kernel. + +.. c:function:: ktime_t ktime_get_raw( void ) + + CLOCK_MONOTONIC_RAW + + Like ktime_get(), but runs at the same rate as the hardware + clocksource without (NTP) adjustments for clock drift. This is + also rarely needed in the kernel. + +nanosecond, timespec64, and second output +----------------------------------------- + +For all of the above, there are variants that return the time in a +different format depending on what is required by the user: + +.. c:function:: u64 ktime_get_ns( void ) + u64 ktime_get_boottime_ns( void ) + u64 ktime_get_real_ns( void ) + u64 ktime_get_tai_ns( void ) + u64 ktime_get_raw_ns( void ) + + Same as the plain ktime_get functions, but returning a u64 number + of nanoseconds in the respective time reference, which may be + more convenient for some callers. + +.. c:function:: void ktime_get_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + void ktime_get_boottime_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + void ktime_get_real_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + void ktime_get_clocktai_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + void ktime_get_raw_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + + Same above, but returns the time in a 'struct timespec64', split + into seconds and nanoseconds. This can avoid an extra division + when printing the time, or when passing it into an external + interface that expects a 'timespec' or 'timeval' structure. + +.. c:function:: time64_t ktime_get_seconds( void ) + time64_t ktime_get_boottime_seconds( void ) + time64_t ktime_get_real_seconds( void ) + time64_t ktime_get_clocktai_seconds( void ) + time64_t ktime_get_raw_seconds( void ) + + Return a coarse-grained version of the time as a scalar + time64_t. This avoids accessing the clock hardware and rounds + down the seconds to the full seconds of the last timer tick + using the respective reference. + +Coarse and fast_ns access +------------------------- + +Some additional variants exist for more specialized cases: + +.. c:function:: ktime_t ktime_get_coarse_boottime( void ) + ktime_t ktime_get_coarse_real( void ) + ktime_t ktime_get_coarse_clocktai( void ) + ktime_t ktime_get_coarse_raw( void ) + +.. c:function:: void ktime_get_coarse_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + void ktime_get_coarse_boottime_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + void ktime_get_coarse_real_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + void ktime_get_coarse_clocktai_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + void ktime_get_coarse_raw_ts64( struct timespec64 * ) + + These are quicker than the non-coarse versions, but less accurate, + corresponding to CLOCK_MONONOTNIC_COARSE and CLOCK_REALTIME_COARSE + in user space, along with the equivalent boottime/tai/raw + timebase not available in user space. + + The time returned here corresponds to the last timer tick, which + may be as much as 10ms in the past (for CONFIG_HZ=100), same as + reading the 'jiffies' variable. These are only useful when called + in a fast path and one still expects better than second accuracy, + but can't easily use 'jiffies', e.g. for inode timestamps. + Skipping the hardware clock access saves around 100 CPU cycles + on most modern machines with a reliable cycle counter, but + up to several microseconds on older hardware with an external + clocksource. + +.. c:function:: u64 ktime_get_mono_fast_ns( void ) + u64 ktime_get_raw_fast_ns( void ) + u64 ktime_get_boot_fast_ns( void ) + u64 ktime_get_real_fast_ns( void ) + + These variants are safe to call from any context, including from + a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) during a timekeeper update, and + while we are entering suspend with the clocksource powered down. + This is useful in some tracing or debugging code as well as + machine check reporting, but most drivers should never call them, + since the time is allowed to jump under certain conditions. + +Deprecated time interfaces +-------------------------- + +Older kernels used some other interfaces that are now being phased out +but may appear in third-party drivers being ported here. In particular, +all interfaces returning a 'struct timeval' or 'struct timespec' have +been replaced because the tv_sec member overflows in year 2038 on 32-bit +architectures. These are the recommended replacements: + +.. c:function:: void ktime_get_ts( struct timespec * ) + + Use ktime_get() or ktime_get_ts64() instead. + +.. c:function:: struct timeval do_gettimeofday( void ) + struct timespec getnstimeofday( void ) + struct timespec64 getnstimeofday64( void ) + void ktime_get_real_ts( struct timespec * ) + + ktime_get_real_ts64() is a direct replacement, but consider using + monotonic time (ktime_get_ts64()) and/or a ktime_t based interface + (ktime_get()/ktime_get_real()). + +.. c:function:: struct timespec current_kernel_time( void ) + struct timespec64 current_kernel_time64( void ) + struct timespec get_monotonic_coarse( void ) + struct timespec64 get_monotonic_coarse64( void ) + + These are replaced by ktime_get_coarse_real_ts64() and + ktime_get_coarse_ts64(). However, A lot of code that wants + coarse-grained times can use the simple 'jiffies' instead, while + some drivers may actually want the higher resolution accessors + these days. + +.. c:function:: struct timespec getrawmonotonic( void ) + struct timespec64 getrawmonotonic64( void ) + struct timespec timekeeping_clocktai( void ) + struct timespec64 timekeeping_clocktai64( void ) + struct timespec get_monotonic_boottime( void ) + struct timespec64 get_monotonic_boottime64( void ) + + These are replaced by ktime_get_raw()/ktime_get_raw_ts64(), + ktime_get_clocktai()/ktime_get_clocktai_ts64() as well + as ktime_get_boottime()/ktime_get_boottime_ts64(). + However, if the particular choice of clock source is not + important for the user, consider converting to + ktime_get()/ktime_get_ts64() instead for consistency. diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst b/Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst index 006827e30d06..0f6ca8b7261e 100644 --- a/Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst +++ b/Documentation/crypto/api-samples.rst @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Code Example For Use of Operational State Memory With SHASH char *hash_alg_name = "sha1-padlock-nano"; int ret; - alg = crypto_alloc_shash(hash_alg_name, CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_SHASH, 0); + alg = crypto_alloc_shash(hash_alg_name, 0, 0); if (IS_ERR(alg)) { pr_info("can't alloc alg %s\n", hash_alg_name); return PTR_ERR(alg); diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst index 3bf371a938d0..6f653acea248 100644 --- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst @@ -156,6 +156,11 @@ Contributing new tests (details) installed by the distro on the system should be the primary focus to be able to find regressions. + * If a test needs specific kernel config options enabled, add a config file in + the test directory to enable them. + + e.g: tools/testing/selftests/android/ion/config + Test Harness ============ diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt index 4b1d22a44ce4..6426c45273cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/delay.txt @@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ Device-Mapper's "delay" target delays reads and/or writes and maps them to different devices. Parameters: - <device> <offset> <delay> [<write_device> <write_offset> <write_delay>] + <device> <offset> <delay> [<write_device> <write_offset> <write_delay> + [<flush_device> <flush_offset> <flush_delay>]] With separate write parameters, the first set is only used for reads. Offsets are specified in sectors. diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt index f33e3ade7a09..297251b0d2d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-integrity.txt @@ -113,6 +113,10 @@ internal_hash:algorithm(:key) (the key is optional) from an upper layer target, such as dm-crypt. The upper layer target should check the validity of the integrity tags. +recalculate + Recalculate the integrity tags automatically. It is only valid + when using internal hash. + journal_crypt:algorithm(:key) (the key is optional) Encrypt the journal using given algorithm to make sure that the attacker can't read the journal. You can use a block cipher here diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt index 3d01948ea061..883e7ca5f745 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/thin-provisioning.txt @@ -28,17 +28,18 @@ administrator some freedom, for example to: Status ====== -These targets are very much still in the EXPERIMENTAL state. Please -do not yet rely on them in production. But do experiment and offer us -feedback. Different use cases will have different performance -characteristics, for example due to fragmentation of the data volume. +These targets are considered safe for production use. But different use +cases will have different performance characteristics, for example due +to fragmentation of the data volume. If you find this software is not performing as expected please mail dm-devel@redhat.com with details and we'll try our best to improve things for you. -Userspace tools for checking and repairing the metadata are under -development. +Userspace tools for checking and repairing the metadata have been fully +developed and are available as 'thin_check' and 'thin_repair'. The name +of the package that provides these utilities varies by distribution (on +a Red Hat distribution it is named 'device-mapper-persistent-data'). Cookbook ======== @@ -280,7 +281,7 @@ ii) Status <transaction id> <used metadata blocks>/<total metadata blocks> <used data blocks>/<total data blocks> <held metadata root> ro|rw|out_of_data_space [no_]discard_passdown [error|queue]_if_no_space - needs_check|- + needs_check|- metadata_low_watermark transaction id: A 64-bit number used by userspace to help synchronise with metadata @@ -327,6 +328,11 @@ ii) Status thin-pool can be made fully operational again. '-' indicates needs_check is not set. + metadata_low_watermark: + Value of metadata low watermark in blocks. The kernel sets this + value internally but userspace needs to know this value to + determine if an event was caused by crossing this threshold. + iii) Messages create_thin <dev id> diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt index 4424fa2c67d7..01532b3008ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/writecache.txt @@ -15,6 +15,8 @@ Constructor parameters: size) 5. the number of optional parameters (the parameters with an argument count as two) + start_sector n (default: 0) + offset from the start of cache device in 512-byte sectors high_watermark n (default: 50) start writeback when the number of used blocks reach this watermark diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/adapteva.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/adapteva.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1d8af9e36065..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/adapteva.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ -Adapteva Platforms Device Tree Bindings ---------------------------------------- - -Parallella board - -Required root node properties: - - compatible = "adapteva,parallella"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt index 69880560c0f0..b5c2b5c35766 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt @@ -41,6 +41,14 @@ Boards with the Amlogic Meson GXL S905D SoC shall have the following properties: Required root node property: compatible: "amlogic,s905d", "amlogic,meson-gxl"; +Boards with the Amlogic Meson GXL S805X SoC shall have the following properties: + Required root node property: + compatible: "amlogic,s805x", "amlogic,meson-gxl"; + +Boards with the Amlogic Meson GXL S905W SoC shall have the following properties: + Required root node property: + compatible: "amlogic,s905w", "amlogic,meson-gxl"; + Boards with the Amlogic Meson GXM S912 SoC shall have the following properties: Required root node property: compatible: "amlogic,s912", "amlogic,meson-gxm"; @@ -79,6 +87,11 @@ Board compatible values (alphabetically, grouped by SoC): - "amlogic,p230" (Meson gxl s905d) - "amlogic,p231" (Meson gxl s905d) + - "amlogic,p241" (Meson gxl s805x) + + - "amlogic,p281" (Meson gxl s905w) + - "oranth,tx3-mini" (Meson gxl s905w) + - "amlogic,q200" (Meson gxm s912) - "amlogic,q201" (Meson gxm s912) - "khadas,vim2" (Meson gxm s912) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-pmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-pmc.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 795cc78543fe..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-pmc.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -* Power Management Controller (PMC) - -Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-pmc". - <chip> can be: at91rm9200, at91sam9260, at91sam9g45, at91sam9n12, - at91sam9x5, sama5d3 - -- reg: Should contain PMC registers location and length - -Examples: - pmc: pmc@fffffc00 { - compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-pmc"; - reg = <0xfffffc00 0x100>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,brcmstb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,brcmstb.txt index c052caad36e8..104cc9b41df4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,brcmstb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,brcmstb.txt @@ -189,7 +189,11 @@ Power-Down (SRPD), among other things. Required properties: - compatible : should contain one of these + "brcm,brcmstb-memc-ddr-rev-b.2.1" "brcm,brcmstb-memc-ddr-rev-b.2.2" + "brcm,brcmstb-memc-ddr-rev-b.2.3" + "brcm,brcmstb-memc-ddr-rev-b.3.0" + "brcm,brcmstb-memc-ddr-rev-b.3.1" "brcm,brcmstb-memc-ddr" - reg : the MEMC DDR register range diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coresight.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coresight.txt index 15ac8e8dcfdf..5d1ad09bafb4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coresight.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/coresight.txt @@ -39,6 +39,8 @@ its hardware characteristcs. - System Trace Macrocell: "arm,coresight-stm", "arm,primecell"; [1] + - Coresight Address Translation Unit (CATU) + "arm,coresight-catu", "arm,primecell"; * reg: physical base address and length of the register set(s) of the component. @@ -84,8 +86,15 @@ its hardware characteristcs. * Optional property for TMC: * arm,buffer-size: size of contiguous buffer space for TMC ETR - (embedded trace router) + (embedded trace router). This property is obsolete. The buffer size + can be configured dynamically via buffer_size property in sysfs. + * arm,scatter-gather: boolean. Indicates that the TMC-ETR can safely + use the SG mode on this system. + +* Optional property for CATU : + * interrupts : Exactly one SPI may be listed for reporting the address + error Example: @@ -118,6 +127,35 @@ Example: }; }; + etr@20070000 { + compatible = "arm,coresight-tmc", "arm,primecell"; + reg = <0 0x20070000 0 0x1000>; + + clocks = <&oscclk6a>; + clock-names = "apb_pclk"; + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + /* input port */ + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + etr_in_port: endpoint { + slave-mode; + remote-endpoint = <&replicator2_out_port0>; + }; + }; + + /* CATU link represented by output port */ + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + etr_out_port: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&catu_in_port>; + }; + }; + }; + }; + 2. Links replicator { /* non-configurable replicators don't show up on the @@ -247,5 +285,23 @@ Example: }; }; +5. CATU + + catu@207e0000 { + compatible = "arm,coresight-catu", "arm,primecell"; + reg = <0 0x207e0000 0 0x1000>; + + clocks = <&oscclk6a>; + clock-names = "apb_pclk"; + + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 4 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + port { + catu_in_port: endpoint { + slave-mode; + remote-endpoint = <&etr_out_port>; + }; + }; + }; + [1]. There is currently two version of STM: STM32 and STM500. Both have the same HW interface and as such don't need an explicit binding name. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt index 29e1dc5d506d..96dfccc0faa8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt @@ -183,6 +183,7 @@ described below. "marvell,sheeva-v5" "nvidia,tegra132-denver" "nvidia,tegra186-denver" + "nvidia,tegra194-carmel" "qcom,krait" "qcom,kryo" "qcom,kryo385" @@ -219,6 +220,7 @@ described below. "qcom,kpss-acc-v1" "qcom,kpss-acc-v2" "renesas,apmu" + "renesas,r9a06g032-smp" "rockchip,rk3036-smp" "rockchip,rk3066-smp" "ste,dbx500-smp" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,vf610-mscm-ir.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,vf610-mscm-ir.txt index 669808b2af49..6dd6f399236d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,vf610-mscm-ir.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/fsl,vf610-mscm-ir.txt @@ -18,9 +18,6 @@ Required properties: assignment of the interrupt router is required. Flags get passed only when using GIC as parent. Flags encoding as documented by the GIC bindings. -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller of - the CPU the device tree is intended to be used on. This - is either the node of the GIC or NVIC controller. Example: mscm_ir: interrupt-controller@40001800 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/m4if.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/m4if.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..93bd7b867a53 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/m4if.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +* Freescale Multi Master Multi Memory Interface (M4IF) module + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "fsl,imx51-m4if" +- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device + +Example: + +m4if: m4if@83fd8000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx51-m4if"; + reg = <0x83fd8000 0x1000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/tigerp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/tigerp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..19e2aad63d6e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/freescale/tigerp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +* Freescale Tigerp platform module + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "fsl,imx51-tigerp" +- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device + +Example: + +tigerp: tigerp@83fa0000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx51-tigerp"; + reg = <0x83fa0000 0x28>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt index cdb9dd705754..8a1baa2b9723 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt @@ -53,6 +53,10 @@ i.MX6 Quad SABRE Automotive Board Required root node properties: - compatible = "fsl,imx6q-sabreauto", "fsl,imx6q"; +i.MX6SLL EVK board +Required root node properties: + - compatible = "fsl,imx6sll-evk", "fsl,imx6sll"; + Generic i.MX boards ------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/insignal-boards.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/insignal-boards.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 524c3dc5d808..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/insignal-boards.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -* Insignal's Exynos4210 based Origen evaluation board - -Origen low-cost evaluation board is based on Samsung's Exynos4210 SoC. - -Required root node properties: - - compatible = should be one or more of the following. - (a) "samsung,smdkv310" - for Samsung's SMDKV310 eval board. - (b) "samsung,exynos4210" - for boards based on Exynos4210 SoC. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/ap806-system-controller.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/ap806-system-controller.txt index 0b887440e08a..3fd21bb7cb37 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/ap806-system-controller.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/ap806-system-controller.txt @@ -2,14 +2,17 @@ Marvell Armada AP806 System Controller ====================================== The AP806 is one of the two core HW blocks of the Marvell Armada 7K/8K -SoCs. It contains a system controller, which provides a number -registers giving access to numerous features: clocks, pin-muxing and -many other SoC configuration items. This DT binding allows to describe -this system controller. +SoCs. It contains system controllers, which provide several registers +giving access to numerous features: clocks, pin-muxing and many other +SoC configuration items. This DT binding allows to describe these +system controllers. For the top level node: - compatible: must be: "syscon", "simple-mfd"; - - reg: register area of the AP806 system controller + - reg: register area of the AP806 system controller + +SYSTEM CONTROLLER 0 +=================== Clocks: ------- @@ -98,3 +101,38 @@ ap_syscon: system-controller@6f4000 { gpio-ranges = <&ap_pinctrl 0 0 19>; }; }; + +SYSTEM CONTROLLER 1 +=================== + +Thermal: +-------- + +For common binding part and usage, refer to +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal.txt + +The thermal IP can probe the temperature all around the processor. It +may feature several channels, each of them wired to one sensor. + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be one of: + * marvell,armada-ap806-thermal +- reg: register range associated with the thermal functions. + +Optional properties: +- #thermal-sensor-cells: shall be <1> when thermal-zones subnodes refer + to this IP and represents the channel ID. There is one sensor per + channel. O refers to the thermal IP internal channel, while positive + IDs refer to each CPU. + +Example: +ap_syscon1: system-controller@6f8000 { + compatible = "syscon", "simple-mfd"; + reg = <0x6f8000 0x1000>; + + ap_thermal: thermal-sensor@80 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-ap806-thermal"; + reg = <0x80 0x10>; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <1>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/armada-37xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/armada-37xx.txt index 35c3c3460d17..eddde4faef01 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/armada-37xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/armada-37xx.txt @@ -33,3 +33,18 @@ nb_pm: syscon@14000 { compatible = "marvell,armada-3700-nb-pm", "syscon"; reg = <0x14000 0x60>; } + +AVS +--- + +For AVS an other component is needed: + +Required properties: +- compatible : should contain "marvell,armada-3700-avs", "syscon"; +- reg : the register start and length for the AVS + +Example: +avs: avs@11500 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-3700-avs", "syscon"; + reg = <0x11500 0x40>; +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/cp110-system-controller0.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/cp110-system-controller.txt index 29cdbae6c5ac..81ce742d2760 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/cp110-system-controller0.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/cp110-system-controller.txt @@ -1,15 +1,18 @@ -Marvell Armada CP110 System Controller 0 -======================================== +Marvell Armada CP110 System Controller +====================================== The CP110 is one of the two core HW blocks of the Marvell Armada 7K/8K -SoCs. It contains two sets of system control registers, System -Controller 0 and System Controller 1. This Device Tree binding allows -to describe the first system controller, which provides registers to -configure various aspects of the SoC. +SoCs. It contains system controllers, which provide several registers +giving access to numerous features: clocks, pin-muxing and many other +SoC configuration items. This DT binding allows to describe these +system controllers. For the top level node: - compatible: must be: "syscon", "simple-mfd"; - - reg: register area of the CP110 system controller 0 + - reg: register area of the CP110 system controller + +SYSTEM CONTROLLER 0 +=================== Clocks: ------- @@ -163,26 +166,60 @@ Required properties: Example: -cpm_syscon0: system-controller@440000 { +CP110_LABEL(syscon0): system-controller@440000 { compatible = "syscon", "simple-mfd"; reg = <0x440000 0x1000>; - cpm_clk: clock { + CP110_LABEL(clk): clock { compatible = "marvell,cp110-clock"; #clock-cells = <2>; }; - cpm_pinctrl: pinctrl { + CP110_LABEL(pinctrl): pinctrl { compatible = "marvell,armada-8k-cpm-pinctrl"; }; - cpm_gpio1: gpio@100 { + CP110_LABEL(gpio1): gpio@100 { compatible = "marvell,armada-8k-gpio"; offset = <0x100>; ngpios = <32>; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; - gpio-ranges = <&cpm_pinctrl 0 0 32>; + gpio-ranges = <&CP110_LABEL(pinctrl) 0 0 32>; }; }; + +SYSTEM CONTROLLER 1 +=================== + +Thermal: +-------- + +The thermal IP can probe the temperature all around the processor. It +may feature several channels, each of them wired to one sensor. + +For common binding part and usage, refer to +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/thermal.txt + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be one of: + * marvell,armada-cp110-thermal +- reg: register range associated with the thermal functions. + +Optional properties: +- #thermal-sensor-cells: shall be <1> when thermal-zones subnodes refer + to this IP and represents the channel ID. There is one sensor per + channel. O refers to the thermal IP internal channel. + +Example: +CP110_LABEL(syscon1): system-controller@6f8000 { + compatible = "syscon", "simple-mfd"; + reg = <0x6f8000 0x1000>; + + CP110_LABEL(thermal): thermal-sensor@70 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-cp110-thermal"; + reg = <0x70 0x10>; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <1>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt index 7d21ab37c19c..8f260e5cfd16 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ compatible: Must contain one of "mediatek,mt6589" "mediatek,mt6592" "mediatek,mt6755" + "mediatek,mt6765" "mediatek,mt6795" "mediatek,mt6797" "mediatek,mt7622" @@ -41,12 +42,18 @@ Supported boards: - Evaluation phone for MT6755(Helio P10): Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt6755-evb", "mediatek,mt6755"; +- Evaluation board for MT6765(Helio P22): + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "mediatek,mt6765-evb", "mediatek,mt6765"; - Evaluation board for MT6795(Helio X10): Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt6795-evb", "mediatek,mt6795"; - Evaluation board for MT6797(Helio X20): Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt6797-evb", "mediatek,mt6797"; +- Mediatek X20 Development Board: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "archermind,mt6797-x20-dev", "mediatek,mt6797"; - Reference board variant 1 for MT7622: Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt7622-rfb1", "mediatek,mt7622"; @@ -59,9 +66,6 @@ Supported boards: - Reference board for MT7623n with eMMC: Required root node properties: - compatible = "mediatek,mt7623n-rfb-emmc", "mediatek,mt7623"; -- Reference board for MT7623n with NAND: - Required root node properties: - - compatible = "mediatek,mt7623n-rfb-nand", "mediatek,mt7623"; - Bananapi BPI-R2 board: - compatible = "bananapi,bpi-r2", "mediatek,mt7623"; - MTK mt8127 tablet moose EVB: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/qcom,llcc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/qcom,llcc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5e85749262ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/msm/qcom,llcc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +== Introduction== + +LLCC (Last Level Cache Controller) provides last level of cache memory in SOC, +that can be shared by multiple clients. Clients here are different cores in the +SOC, the idea is to minimize the local caches at the clients and migrate to +common pool of memory. Cache memory is divided into partitions called slices +which are assigned to clients. Clients can query the slice details, activate +and deactivate them. + +Properties: +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: must be "qcom,sdm845-llcc" + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value Type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Start address and the the size of the register region. + +Example: + + cache-controller@1100000 { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-llcc"; + reg = <0x1100000 0x250000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/crossbar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/crossbar.txt index ecb360ed0e33..4cd5d873fc3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/crossbar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/crossbar.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "ti,irq-crossbar" - reg: Base address and the size of the crossbar registers. - interrupt-controller: indicates that this block is an interrupt controller. -- interrupt-parent: the interrupt controller this block is connected to. - ti,max-irqs: Total number of irqs available at the parent interrupt controller. - ti,max-crossbar-sources: Maximum number of crossbar sources that can be routed. - ti,reg-size: Size of a individual register in bytes. Every individual diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l4.txt index b4f8a16e7e3b..6816adcdc15f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l4.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/l4.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required properties: Should be "ti,omap2-l4-wkup" for OMAP2 family l4 wkup bus Should be "ti,omap3-l4-core" for OMAP3 family l4 core bus Should be "ti,omap4-l4-cfg" for OMAP4 family l4 cfg bus + Should be "ti,omap4-l4-per" for OMAP4 family l4 per bus Should be "ti,omap4-l4-wkup" for OMAP4 family l4 wkup bus Should be "ti,omap5-l4-cfg" for OMAP5 family l4 cfg bus Should be "ti,omap5-l4-wkup" for OMAP5 family l4 wkup bus @@ -15,11 +16,21 @@ Required properties: Should be "ti,am3-l4-wkup" for AM33xx family l4 wkup bus Should be "ti,am4-l4-wkup" for AM43xx family l4 wkup bus - ranges : contains the IO map range for the bus +- reg : registers link agent and interconnect agent and access protection +- reg-names : "la" for link agent, "ia0" to "ia3" for one to three + interconnect agent instances, "ap" for access if it exists Examples: -l4: l4@48000000 { - compatible "ti,omap2-l4", "simple-bus"; +l4: interconnect@48000000 { + compatible "ti,omap4-l4-per", "simple-bus"; + reg = <0x48000000 0x800>, + <0x48000800 0x800>, + <0x48001000 0x400>, + <0x48001400 0x400>, + <0x48001800 0x400>, + <0x48001c00 0x400>; + reg-names = "ap", "la", "ia0", "ia1", "ia2", "ia3"; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; ranges = <0 0x48000000 0x100000>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt index 1c1d62d03c4f..acfd3c773dd0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt @@ -1,5 +1,10 @@ Rockchip platforms device tree bindings --------------------------------------- + +- 96boards RK3399 Ficus (ROCK960 Enterprise Edition) + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "vamrs,ficus", "rockchip,rk3399"; + - Amarula Vyasa RK3288 board Required root node properties: - compatible = "amarula,vyasa-rk3288", "rockchip,rk3288"; @@ -66,6 +71,15 @@ Rockchip platforms device tree bindings Required root node properties: - compatible = "geekbuying,geekbox", "rockchip,rk3368"; +- Google Bob (Asus Chromebook Flip C101PA): + Required root node properties: + compatible = "google,bob-rev13", "google,bob-rev12", + "google,bob-rev11", "google,bob-rev10", + "google,bob-rev9", "google,bob-rev8", + "google,bob-rev7", "google,bob-rev6", + "google,bob-rev5", "google,bob-rev4", + "google,bob", "google,gru", "rockchip,rk3399"; + - Google Brain (dev-board): Required root node properties: - compatible = "google,veyron-brain-rev0", "google,veyron-brain", diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt index 16685787d2bd..433bfd7593ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt @@ -40,9 +40,6 @@ following properties: - #interrupt-cells: must be identical to the that of the parent interrupt controller. -- interrupt-parent: a phandle indicating which interrupt controller - this PMU signals interrupts to. - Optional nodes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/samsung-boards.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/samsung-boards.txt index bdadc3da9556..56021bf2a916 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/samsung-boards.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/samsung-boards.txt @@ -1,7 +1,10 @@ -* Samsung's Exynos SoC based boards +* Samsung's Exynos and S5P SoC based boards Required root node properties: - compatible = should be one or more of the following. + - "samsung,aries" - for S5PV210-based Samsung Aries board. + - "samsung,fascinate4g" - for S5PV210-based Samsung Galaxy S Fascinate 4G (SGH-T959P) board. + - "samsung,galaxys" - for S5PV210-based Samsung Galaxy S (i9000) board. - "samsung,artik5" - for Exynos3250-based Samsung ARTIK5 module. - "samsung,artik5-eval" - for Exynos3250-based Samsung ARTIK5 eval board. - "samsung,monk" - for Exynos3250-based Samsung Simband board. @@ -66,7 +69,7 @@ Required root node properties: - "insignal,arndale-octa" - for Exynos5420-based Insignal Arndale Octa board. - "insignal,origen" - for Exynos4210-based Insignal Origen board. - - "insignal,origen4412 - for Exynos4412-based Insignal Origen board. + - "insignal,origen4412" - for Exynos4412-based Insignal Origen board. Optional nodes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt index d8cf740132c6..89b4a389fbc7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt @@ -51,7 +51,8 @@ SoCs: compatible = "renesas,r8a77990" - R-Car D3 (R8A77995) compatible = "renesas,r8a77995" - + - RZ/N1D (R9A06G032) + compatible = "renesas,r9a06g032" Boards: @@ -112,6 +113,8 @@ Boards: compatible = "renesas,porter", "renesas,r8a7791" - RSKRZA1 (YR0K77210C000BE) compatible = "renesas,rskrza1", "renesas,r7s72100" + - RZN1D-DB (RZ/N1D Demo Board for the RZ/N1D 400 pins package) + compatible = "renesas,rzn1d400-db", "renesas,r9a06g032" - Salvator-X (RTP0RC7795SIPB0010S) compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a7795" - Salvator-X (RTP0RC7796SIPB0011S) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ti/k3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ti/k3.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6a059cabb2da --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ti/k3.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Texas Instruments K3 Multicore SoC architecture device tree bindings +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Platforms based on Texas Instruments K3 Multicore SoC architecture +shall follow the following scheme: + +SoCs +---- + +Each device tree root node must specify which exact SoC in K3 Multicore SoC +architecture it uses, using one of the following compatible values: + +- AM654 + compatible = "ti,am654"; + +Boards +------ + +In addition, each device tree root node must specify which one or more +of the following board-specific compatible values: + +- AM654 EVM + compatible = "ti,am654-evm", "ti,am654"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xilinx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xilinx.txt index b9043bc35c14..26fe5ecc4332 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xilinx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xilinx.txt @@ -8,18 +8,38 @@ Required root node properties: Additional compatible strings: -- Xilinx internal board cc108 +- Adapteva Parallella board + "adapteva,parallella" + +- Avnet MicroZed board + "avnet,zynq-microzed" + "xlnx,zynq-microzed" + +- Avnet ZedBoard board + "avnet,zynq-zed" + "xlnx,zynq-zed" + +- Digilent Zybo board + "digilent,zynq-zybo" + +- Digilent Zybo Z7 board + "digilent,zynq-zybo-z7" + +- Xilinx CC108 internal board "xlnx,zynq-cc108" -- Xilinx internal board zc770 with different FMC cards +- Xilinx ZC702 internal board + "xlnx,zynq-zc702" + +- Xilinx ZC706 internal board + "xlnx,zynq-zc706" + +- Xilinx ZC770 internal board, with different FMC cards "xlnx,zynq-zc770-xm010" "xlnx,zynq-zc770-xm011" "xlnx,zynq-zc770-xm012" "xlnx,zynq-zc770-xm013" -- Digilent Zybo Z7 board - "digilent,zynq-zybo-z7" - --------------------------------------------------------------- Xilinx Zynq UltraScale+ MPSoC Platforms Device Tree Bindings diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt index c760ecb81381..663766685818 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/ahci-platform.txt @@ -17,7 +17,6 @@ Required properties: - "marvell,armada-380-ahci" - "marvell,armada-3700-ahci" - "snps,dwc-ahci" - - "snps,exynos5440-ahci" - "snps,spear-ahci" - "generic-ahci" - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for SATA IRQ> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/fsl-sata.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/fsl-sata.txt index b46bcf46c3d8..fd63bb3becc9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/fsl-sata.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/fsl-sata.txt @@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Required properties: 4 for controller @ 0x1b000 Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping - reg : <registers mapping> Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/pata-arasan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/pata-arasan.txt index 2aff154be84e..872edc105680 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/pata-arasan.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/pata-arasan.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: "arasan,cf-spear1340" - reg: Address range of the CF registers -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupt: Should contain the CF interrupt number - clock-frequency: Interface clock rate, in Hz, one of 25000000 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/board/fsl-board.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/board/fsl-board.txt index fb7b03ec2071..eb52f6b35159 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/board/fsl-board.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/board/fsl-board.txt @@ -29,7 +29,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: should contain the address and the length of the FPGA register set. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: should specify phandle for the interrupt controller. - interrupts: should specify event (wakeup) IRQ. Example (P1022DS): diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt index 8a6c3c2e58fe..729def62f0c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt @@ -9,8 +9,6 @@ Required properties: "brcm,bcm7400-gisb-arb" for older 40nm chips and all 65nm chips "brcm,bcm7038-gisb-arb" for 130nm chips - reg: specifies the base physical address and size of the registers -- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller - this arbiter gets interrupt line from - interrupts: specifies the two interrupts (timeout and TEA) to be used from the parent interrupt controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/sun50i-de2-bus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/sun50i-de2-bus.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..87dfb33fb3be --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/sun50i-de2-bus.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +Device tree bindings for Allwinner A64 DE2 bus + +The Allwinner A64 DE2 is on a special bus, which needs a SRAM region (SRAM C) +to be claimed for enabling the access. + +Required properties: + + - compatible: Should contain "allwinner,sun50i-a64-de2" + - reg: A resource specifier for the register space + - #address-cells: Must be set to 1 + - #size-cells: Must be set to 1 + - ranges: Must be set up to map the address space inside the + DE2, for the sub-blocks of DE2. + - allwinner,sram: the SRAM that needs to be claimed + +Example: + + de2@1000000 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun50i-a64-de2"; + reg = <0x1000000 0x400000>; + allwinner,sram = <&de2_sram 1>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 0x1000000 0x400000>; + + display_clocks: clock@0 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun50i-a64-de2-clk"; + reg = <0x0 0x100000>; + clocks = <&ccu CLK_DE>, + <&ccu CLK_BUS_DE>; + clock-names = "mod", + "bus"; + resets = <&ccu RST_BUS_DE>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + #reset-cells = <1>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-sysc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-sysc.txt index d8ed5b780ed9..91dc2333af01 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-sysc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/ti-sysc.txt @@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ Required standard properties: "ti,sysc-omap-aes" "ti,sysc-mcasp" "ti,sysc-usb-host-fs" + "ti,sysc-dra7-mcan" - reg shall have register areas implemented for the interconnect target module in question such as revision, sysc and syss diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,s900-cmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt index 93e4fb827cd6..d1e60d297387 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,s900-cmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/actions,owl-cmu.txt @@ -1,12 +1,14 @@ -* Actions S900 Clock Management Unit (CMU) +* Actions Semi Owl Clock Management Unit (CMU) -The Actions S900 clock management unit generates and supplies clock to various -controllers within the SoC. The clock binding described here is applicable to -S900 SoC. +The Actions Semi Owl Clock Management Unit generates and supplies clock +to various controllers within the SoC. The clock binding described here is +applicable to S900 and S700 SoC's. Required Properties: -- compatible: should be "actions,s900-cmu" +- compatible: should be one of the following, + "actions,s900-cmu" + "actions,s700-cmu" - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. - clocks: Reference to the parent clocks ("hosc", "losc") @@ -15,16 +17,16 @@ Required Properties: Each clock is assigned an identifier, and client nodes can use this identifier to specify the clock which they consume. -All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in -dt-bindings/clock/actions,s900-cmu.h header and can be used in device -tree sources. +All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in corresponding +dt-bindings/clock/actions,s900-cmu.h or actions,s700-cmu.h header and can be +used in device tree sources. External clocks: The hosc clock used as input for the plls is generated outside the SoC. It is expected that it is defined using standard clock bindings as "hosc". -Actions S900 CMU also requires one more clock: +Actions Semi S900 CMU also requires one more clock: - "losc" - internal low frequency oscillator Example: Clock Management Unit node: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,axg-audio-clkc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,axg-audio-clkc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..61777ad24f61 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,axg-audio-clkc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +* Amlogic AXG Audio Clock Controllers + +The Amlogic AXG audio clock controller generates and supplies clock to the +other elements of the audio subsystem, such as fifos, i2s, spdif and pdm +devices. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible : should be "amlogic,axg-audio-clkc" for the A113X and A113D +- reg : physical base address of the clock controller and length of + memory mapped region. +- clocks : a list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs for the clocks listed + in clock-names. +- clock-names : must contain the following: + * "pclk" - Main peripheral bus clock + may contain the following: + * "mst_in[0-7]" - 8 input plls to generate clock signals + * "slv_sclk[0-9]" - 10 slave bit clocks provided by external + components. + * "slv_lrclk[0-9]" - 10 slave sample clocks provided by external + components. +- resets : phandle of the internal reset line +- #clock-cells : should be 1. + +Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier +to specify the clock which they consume. All available clocks are defined as +preprocessor macros in the dt-bindings/clock/axg-audio-clkc.h header and can be +used in device tree sources. + +Example: + +clkc_audio: clock-controller@0 { + compatible = "amlogic,axg-audio-clkc"; + reg = <0x0 0x0 0x0 0xb4>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + + clocks = <&clkc CLKID_AUDIO>, + <&clkc CLKID_MPLL0>, + <&clkc CLKID_MPLL1>, + <&clkc CLKID_MPLL2>, + <&clkc CLKID_MPLL3>, + <&clkc CLKID_HIFI_PLL>, + <&clkc CLKID_FCLK_DIV3>, + <&clkc CLKID_FCLK_DIV4>, + <&clkc CLKID_GP0_PLL>; + clock-names = "pclk", + "mst_in0", + "mst_in1", + "mst_in2", + "mst_in3", + "mst_in4", + "mst_in5", + "mst_in6", + "mst_in7"; + resets = <&reset RESET_AUDIO>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt index 51c259a92d02..8f8f95056f3d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/at91-clock.txt @@ -17,14 +17,13 @@ Required properties: "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow-rc-osc": at91 internal slow RC oscillator - "atmel,at91rm9200-pmc" or - "atmel,at91sam9g45-pmc" or - "atmel,at91sam9n12-pmc" or - "atmel,at91sam9x5-pmc" or - "atmel,sama5d3-pmc": + "atmel,<chip>-pmc": at91 PMC (Power Management Controller) All at91 specific clocks (clocks defined below) must be child node of the PMC node. + <chip> can be: at91rm9200, at91sam9260, at91sam9261, + at91sam9263, at91sam9g45, at91sam9n12, at91sam9rl, at91sam9x5, + sama5d2, sama5d3 or sama5d4. "atmel,at91sam9x5-clk-slow" (under sckc node) or @@ -91,6 +90,9 @@ Required properties: at91 audio pll output on AUDIOPLLCLK that feeds the PMC and can be used by peripheral clock or generic clock + "atmel,sama5d2-clk-i2s-mux" (under pmc node): + at91 I2S clock source selection + Required properties for SCKC node: - reg : defines the IO memory reserved for the SCKC. - #size-cells : shall be 0 (reg is used to encode clk id). @@ -180,7 +182,6 @@ For example: }; Required properties for main clock internal RC oscillator: -- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. - interrupts : shall be set to "<0>". - clock-frequency : define the internal RC oscillator frequency. @@ -197,7 +198,6 @@ For example: }; Required properties for main clock oscillator: -- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. - interrupts : shall be set to "<0>". - #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. - clocks : shall encode the main osc source clk sources (see atmel datasheet). @@ -218,7 +218,6 @@ For example: }; Required properties for main clock: -- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. - interrupts : shall be set to "<0>". - #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. - clocks : shall encode the main clk sources (see atmel datasheet). @@ -233,7 +232,6 @@ For example: }; Required properties for master clock: -- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. - interrupts : shall be set to "<3>". - #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. - clocks : shall be the master clock sources (see atmel datasheet) phandles. @@ -292,7 +290,6 @@ For example: Required properties for pll clocks: -- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. - interrupts : shall be set to "<1>". - #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. - clocks : shall be the main clock phandle. @@ -348,7 +345,6 @@ For example: }; Required properties for programmable clocks: -- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. - #size-cells : shall be 0 (reg is used to encode clk id). - #address-cells : shall be 1 (reg is used to encode clk id). - clocks : shall be the programmable clock source phandles. @@ -451,7 +447,6 @@ For example: Required properties for utmi clock: -- interrupt-parent : must reference the PMC node. - interrupts : shall be set to "<AT91_PMC_LOCKU IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>". - #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. - clocks : shall be the main clock source phandle. @@ -507,3 +502,35 @@ For example: atmel,clk-output-range = <0 83000000>; }; }; + +Required properties for I2S mux clocks: +- #size-cells : shall be 0 (reg is used to encode I2S bus id). +- #address-cells : shall be 1 (reg is used to encode I2S bus id). +- name: device tree node describing a specific mux clock. + * #clock-cells : from common clock binding; shall be set to 0. + * clocks : shall be the mux clock parent phandles; shall be 2 phandles: + peripheral and generated clock; the first phandle shall belong to the + peripheral clock and the second one shall belong to the generated + clock; "clock-indices" property can be user to specify + the correct order. + * reg: I2S bus id of the corresponding mux clock. + e.g. reg = <0>; for i2s0, reg = <1>; for i2s1 + +For example: + i2s_clkmux { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d2-clk-i2s-mux"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + i2s0muxck: i2s0_muxclk { + clocks = <&i2s0_clk>, <&i2s0_gclk>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + reg = <0>; + }; + + i2s1muxck: i2s1_muxclk { + clocks = <&i2s1_clk>, <&i2s1_gclk>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + reg = <1>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c7d227c31e95..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/exynos5440-clock.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -* Samsung Exynos5440 Clock Controller - -The Exynos5440 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various -controllers within the Exynos5440 SoC. - -Required Properties: - -- compatible: should be "samsung,exynos5440-clock". - -- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped - region. - -- #clock-cells: should be 1. - -Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier -to specify the clock which they consume. - -All available clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in -dt-bindings/clock/exynos5440.h header and can be used in device -tree sources. - -Example: An example of a clock controller node is listed below. - - clock: clock-controller@10010000 { - compatible = "samsung,exynos5440-clock"; - reg = <0x160000 0x10000>; - #clock-cells = <1>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/maxim,max9485.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/maxim,max9485.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..61bec1100a94 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/maxim,max9485.txt @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +Devicetree bindings for Maxim MAX9485 Programmable Audio Clock Generator + +This device exposes 4 clocks in total: + +- MAX9485_MCLKOUT: A gated, buffered output of the input clock of 27 MHz +- MAX9485_CLKOUT: A PLL that can be configured to 16 different discrete + frequencies +- MAX9485_CLKOUT[1,2]: Two gated outputs for MAX9485_CLKOUT + +MAX9485_CLKOUT[1,2] are children of MAX9485_CLKOUT which upchain all rate set +requests. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "maxim,max9485" +- clocks: Input clock, must provice 27.000 MHz +- clock-names: Must be set to "xclk" +- #clock-cells: From common clock binding; shall be set to 1 + +Optional properties: +- reset-gpios: GPIO descriptor connected to the #RESET input pin +- vdd-supply: A regulator node for Vdd +- clock-output-names: Name of output clocks, as defined in common clock + bindings + +If not explicitly set, the output names are "mclkout", "clkout", "clkout1" +and "clkout2". + +Clocks are defined as preprocessor macros in the dt-binding header. + +Example: + + #include <dt-bindings/clock/maxim,max9485.h> + + xo-27mhz: xo-27mhz { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clock-frequency = <27000000>; + }; + + &i2c0 { + max9485: audio-clock@63 { + reg = <0x63>; + compatible = "maxim,max9485"; + clock-names = "xclk"; + clocks = <&xo-27mhz>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + vdd-supply = <&3v3-reg>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + }; + }; + + // Clock consumer node + + foo@0 { + compatible = "bar,foo"; + /* ... */ + clock-names = "foo-input-clk"; + clocks = <&max9485 MAX9485_CLKOUT1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,dispcc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,dispcc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d639e18d0b85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qcom,dispcc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. Display Clock Controller Binding +------------------------------------------------------------ + +Required properties : + +- compatible : shall contain "qcom,sdm845-dispcc" +- reg : shall contain base register location and length. +- #clock-cells : from common clock binding, shall contain 1. +- #reset-cells : from common reset binding, shall contain 1. +- #power-domain-cells : from generic power domain binding, shall contain 1. + +Example: + dispcc: clock-controller@af00000 { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-dispcc"; + reg = <0xaf00000 0x100000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + #reset-cells = <1>; + #power-domain-cells = <1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,r9a06g032-sysctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,r9a06g032-sysctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d60b99756bb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/renesas,r9a06g032-sysctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +* Renesas R9A06G032 SYSCTRL + +Required Properties: + + - compatible: Must be: + - "renesas,r9a06g032-sysctrl" + - reg: Base address and length of the SYSCTRL IO block. + - #clock-cells: Must be 1 + - clocks: References to the parent clocks: + - external 40mhz crystal. + - external (optional) 32.768khz + - external (optional) jtag input + - external (optional) RGMII_REFCLK + - clock-names: Must be: + clock-names = "mclk", "rtc", "jtag", "rgmii_ref_ext"; + +Examples +-------- + + - SYSCTRL node: + + sysctrl: system-controller@4000c000 { + compatible = "renesas,r9a06g032-sysctrl"; + reg = <0x4000c000 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + + clocks = <&ext_mclk>, <&ext_rtc_clk>, + <&ext_jtag_clk>, <&ext_rgmii_ref>; + clock-names = "mclk", "rtc", "jtag", "rgmii_ref_ext"; + }; + + - Other nodes can use the clocks provided by SYSCTRL as in: + + #include <dt-bindings/clock/r9a06g032-sysctrl.h> + uart0: serial@40060000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-apb-uart"; + reg = <0x40060000 0x400>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 6 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + clocks = <&sysctrl R9A06G032_CLK_UART0>; + clock-names = "baudclk"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/rockchip,px30-cru.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/rockchip,px30-cru.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..39f0c1ac84ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/rockchip,px30-cru.txt @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +* Rockchip PX30 Clock and Reset Unit + +The PX30 clock controller generates and supplies clock to various +controllers within the SoC and also implements a reset controller for SoC +peripherals. + +Required Properties: + +- compatible: PMU for CRU should be "rockchip,px30-pmu-cru" +- compatible: CRU should be "rockchip,px30-cru" +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped + region. +- #clock-cells: should be 1. +- #reset-cells: should be 1. + +Optional Properties: + +- rockchip,grf: phandle to the syscon managing the "general register files" + If missing, pll rates are not changeable, due to the missing pll lock status. + +Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier +to specify the clock which they consume. All available clocks are defined as +preprocessor macros in the dt-bindings/clock/px30-cru.h headers and can be +used in device tree sources. Similar macros exist for the reset sources in +these files. + +External clocks: + +There are several clocks that are generated outside the SoC. It is expected +that they are defined using standard clock bindings with following +clock-output-names: + - "xin24m" - crystal input - required, + - "xin32k" - rtc clock - optional, + - "i2sx_clkin" - external I2S clock - optional, + - "gmac_clkin" - external GMAC clock - optional + +Example: Clock controller node: + + pmucru: clock-controller@ff2bc000 { + compatible = "rockchip,px30-pmucru"; + reg = <0x0 0xff2bc000 0x0 0x1000>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + #reset-cells = <1>; + }; + + cru: clock-controller@ff2b0000 { + compatible = "rockchip,px30-cru"; + reg = <0x0 0xff2b0000 0x0 0x1000>; + rockchip,grf = <&grf>; + #clock-cells = <1>; + #reset-cells = <1>; + }; + +Example: UART controller node that consumes the clock generated by the clock + controller: + + uart0: serial@ff030000 { + compatible = "rockchip,px30-uart", "snps,dw-apb-uart"; + reg = <0x0 0xff030000 0x0 0x100>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 15 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&pmucru SCLK_UART0_PMU>, <&pmucru PCLK_UART0_PMU>; + clock-names = "baudclk", "apb_pclk"; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sun8i-de2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sun8i-de2.txt index f2fa87c4765c..e94582e8b8a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sun8i-de2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/sun8i-de2.txt @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Required properties : - "allwinner,sun8i-a83t-de2-clk" - "allwinner,sun8i-h3-de2-clk" - "allwinner,sun8i-v3s-de2-clk" + - "allwinner,sun50i-a64-de2-clk" - "allwinner,sun50i-h5-de2-clk" - reg: Must contain the registers base address and length diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt index e1463f14af38..8855bfcfd778 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt @@ -15,6 +15,33 @@ Optional properties: - type: size of the connector, should be specified in case of USB-A, USB-B non-fullsize connectors: "mini", "micro". +Optional properties for usb-c-connector: +- power-role: should be one of "source", "sink" or "dual"(DRP) if typec + connector has power support. +- try-power-role: preferred power role if "dual"(DRP) can support Try.SNK + or Try.SRC, should be "sink" for Try.SNK or "source" for Try.SRC. +- data-role: should be one of "host", "device", "dual"(DRD) if typec + connector supports USB data. + +Required properties for usb-c-connector with power delivery support: +- source-pdos: An array of u32 with each entry providing supported power + source data object(PDO), the detailed bit definitions of PDO can be found + in "Universal Serial Bus Power Delivery Specification" chapter 6.4.1.2 + Source_Capabilities Message, the order of each entry(PDO) should follow + the PD spec chapter 6.4.1. Required for power source and power dual role. + User can specify the source PDO array via PDO_FIXED/BATT/VAR() defined in + dt-bindings/usb/pd.h. +- sink-pdos: An array of u32 with each entry providing supported power + sink data object(PDO), the detailed bit definitions of PDO can be found + in "Universal Serial Bus Power Delivery Specification" chapter 6.4.1.3 + Sink Capabilities Message, the order of each entry(PDO) should follow + the PD spec chapter 6.4.1. Required for power sink and power dual role. + User can specify the sink PDO array via PDO_FIXED/BATT/VAR() defined in + dt-bindings/usb/pd.h. +- op-sink-microwatt: Sink required operating power in microwatt, if source + can't offer the power, Capability Mismatch is set. Required for power + sink and power dual role. + Required nodes: - any data bus to the connector should be modeled using the OF graph bindings specified in bindings/graph.txt, unless the bus is between parent node and @@ -73,3 +100,20 @@ ccic: s2mm005@33 { }; }; }; + +3. USB-C connector attached to a typec port controller(ptn5110), which has +power delivery support and enables drp. + +typec: ptn5110@50 { + ... + usb_con: connector { + compatible = "usb-c-connector"; + label = "USB-C"; + power-role = "dual"; + try-power-role = "sink"; + source-pdos = <PDO_FIXED(5000, 2000, PDO_FIXED_USB_COMM)>; + sink-pdos = <PDO_FIXED(5000, 2000, PDO_FIXED_USB_COMM) + PDO_VAR(5000, 12000, 2000)>; + op-sink-microwatt = <10000000>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/brcm,stb-avs-cpu-freq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/brcm,stb-avs-cpu-freq.txt index af2385795d78..73470ecd1f12 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/brcm,stb-avs-cpu-freq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/brcm,stb-avs-cpu-freq.txt @@ -29,8 +29,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. - interrupts: The interrupt that the AVS CPU will use to interrupt the host when a command completed. -- interrupt-parent: The interrupt controller the above interrupt is routed - through. - interrupt-names: The name of the interrupt used to interrupt the host. Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-exynos5440.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-exynos5440.txt deleted file mode 100644 index caff1a57436f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/cpufreq/cpufreq-exynos5440.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ - -Exynos5440 cpufreq driver -------------------- - -Exynos5440 SoC cpufreq driver for CPU frequency scaling. - -Required properties: -- interrupts: Interrupt to know the completion of cpu frequency change. -- operating-points: Table of frequencies and voltage CPU could be transitioned into, - in the decreasing order. Frequency should be in KHz units and voltage - should be in microvolts. - -Optional properties: -- clock-latency: Clock monitor latency in microsecond. - -All the required listed above must be defined under node cpufreq. - -Example: --------- - cpufreq@160000 { - compatible = "samsung,exynos5440-cpufreq"; - reg = <0x160000 0x1000>; - interrupts = <0 57 0>; - operating-points = < - 1000000 975000 - 800000 925000>; - clock-latency = <100000>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/amd-ccp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/amd-ccp.txt index 8c61183b41e0..d87579d63da6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/amd-ccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/amd-ccp.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "amd,ccp-seattle-v1a" - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the CCP interrupt Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/arm-cryptocell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/arm-cryptocell.txt index c2598ab27f2e..999fb2a810f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/arm-cryptocell.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/arm-cryptocell.txt @@ -7,8 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: Interrupt number for the device. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that services - interrupts for this device. - clocks: Reference to the crypto engine clock. - dma-coherent: Present if dma operations are coherent. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec2.txt index f0d926bf9f36..125f155d00d0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec2.txt @@ -50,11 +50,6 @@ remaining bits are reserved for future SEC EUs. ..and so on and so forth. -Optional properties: - -- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - Example: /* MPC8548E */ diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt index 3c1f3a229eab..2fe245ca816a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/fsl-sec4.txt @@ -99,13 +99,6 @@ PROPERTIES of the specifier is defined by the binding document describing the node's interrupt parent. - - interrupt-parent - Usage: (required if interrupt property is defined) - Value type: <phandle> - Definition: A single <phandle> value that points - to the interrupt parent to which the child domain - is being mapped. - - clocks Usage: required if SEC 4.0 requires explicit enablement of clocks Value type: <prop_encoded-array> @@ -199,13 +192,6 @@ Job Ring (JR) Node of the specifier is defined by the binding document describing the node's interrupt parent. - - interrupt-parent - Usage: (required if interrupt property is defined) - Value type: <phandle> - Definition: A single <phandle> value that points - to the interrupt parent to which the child domain - is being mapped. - EXAMPLE jr@1000 { compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-job-ring"; @@ -370,13 +356,6 @@ Secure Non-Volatile Storage (SNVS) Node of the specifier is defined by the binding document describing the node's interrupt parent. - - interrupt-parent - Usage: (required if interrupt property is defined) - Value type: <phandle> - Definition: A single <phandle> value that points - to the interrupt parent to which the child domain - is being mapped. - EXAMPLE sec_mon@314000 { compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon", "syscon"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/hisilicon,hip07-sec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/hisilicon,hip07-sec.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..78d2db9d4de5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/hisilicon,hip07-sec.txt @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +* Hisilicon hip07 Security Accelerator (SEC) + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must contain one of + - "hisilicon,hip06-sec" + - "hisilicon,hip07-sec" +- reg: Memory addresses and lengths of the memory regions through which + this device is controlled. + Region 0 has registers to control the backend processing engines. + Region 1 has registers for functionality common to all queues. + Regions 2-18 have registers for the 16 individual queues which are isolated + both in hardware and within the driver. +- interrupts: Interrupt specifiers. + Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client node + bindings. + Interrupt 0 is for the SEC unit error queue. + Interrupt 2N + 1 is the completion interrupt for queue N. + Interrupt 2N + 2 is the error interrupt for queue N. +- dma-coherent: The driver assumes coherent dma is possible. + +Optional properties: +- iommus: The SEC units are behind smmu-v3 iommus. + Refer to iommu/arm,smmu-v3.txt for more information. + +Example: + +p1_sec_a: crypto@400,d2000000 { + compatible = "hisilicon,hip07-sec"; + reg = <0x400 0xd0000000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2000000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2010000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2020000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2030000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2040000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2050000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2060000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2070000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2080000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2090000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd20a0000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd20b0000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd20c0000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd20d0000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd20e0000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd20f0000 0x0 0x10000 + 0x400 0xd2100000 0x0 0x10000>; + interrupt-parent = <&p1_mbigen_sec_a>; + iommus = <&p1_smmu_alg_a 0x600>; + dma-coherent; + interrupts = <576 4>, + <577 1>, <578 4>, + <579 1>, <580 4>, + <581 1>, <582 4>, + <583 1>, <584 4>, + <585 1>, <586 4>, + <587 1>, <588 4>, + <589 1>, <590 4>, + <591 1>, <592 4>, + <593 1>, <594 4>, + <595 1>, <596 4>, + <597 1>, <598 4>, + <599 1>, <600 4>, + <601 1>, <602 4>, + <603 1>, <604 4>, + <605 1>, <606 4>, + <607 1>, <608 4>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/inside-secure-safexcel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/inside-secure-safexcel.txt index 5dba55cdfa63..3bbf144c9988 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/inside-secure-safexcel.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/inside-secure-safexcel.txt @@ -1,8 +1,9 @@ Inside Secure SafeXcel cryptographic engine Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "inside-secure,safexcel-eip197" or - "inside-secure,safexcel-eip97". +- compatible: Should be "inside-secure,safexcel-eip197b", + "inside-secure,safexcel-eip197d" or + "inside-secure,safexcel-eip97ies". - reg: Base physical address of the engine and length of memory mapped region. - interrupts: Interrupt numbers for the rings and engine. - interrupt-names: Should be "ring0", "ring1", "ring2", "ring3", "eip", "mem". @@ -14,10 +15,18 @@ Optional properties: name must be "core" for the first clock and "reg" for the second one. +Backward compatibility: +Two compatibles are kept for backward compatibility, but shouldn't be used for +new submissions: +- "inside-secure,safexcel-eip197" is equivalent to + "inside-secure,safexcel-eip197b". +- "inside-secure,safexcel-eip97" is equivalent to + "inside-secure,safexcel-eip97ies". + Example: crypto: crypto@800000 { - compatible = "inside-secure,safexcel-eip197"; + compatible = "inside-secure,safexcel-eip197b"; reg = <0x800000 0x200000>; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 34 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, <GIC_SPI 54 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt index d8609ece1f4c..df1151f87745 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/picochip-spacc.txt @@ -7,8 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "picochip,spacc-ipsec" for the IPSEC offload engine "picochip,spacc-l2" for the femtocell layer 2 ciphering engine. - reg : Offset and length of the register set for this device - - interrupt-parent : The interrupt controller that controls the SPAcc - interrupt. - interrupts : The interrupt line from the SPAcc. - ref-clock : The input clock that drives the SPAcc. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/qcom,prng.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/qcom,prng.txt index 8e5853c2879b..7ee0e9eac973 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/qcom,prng.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/crypto/qcom,prng.txt @@ -2,7 +2,9 @@ Qualcomm MSM pseudo random number generator. Required properties: -- compatible : should be "qcom,prng" +- compatible : should be "qcom,prng" for 8916 etc + : should be "qcom,prng-ee" for 8996 and later using EE + (Execution Environment) slice of prng - reg : specifies base physical address and size of the registers map - clocks : phandle to clock-controller plus clock-specifier pair - clock-names : "core" clocks all registers, FIFO and circuits in PRNG IP block diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/devfreq/rk3399_dmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/devfreq/rk3399_dmc.txt index fc2bcbe26b1e..0ec68141f85a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/devfreq/rk3399_dmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/devfreq/rk3399_dmc.txt @@ -1,14 +1,10 @@ -* Rockchip rk3399 DMC(Dynamic Memory Controller) device +* Rockchip rk3399 DMC (Dynamic Memory Controller) device Required properties: - compatible: Must be "rockchip,rk3399-dmc". - devfreq-events: Node to get DDR loading, Refer to - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/devfreq/ + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/devfreq/event/ rockchip-dfi.txt -- interrupts: The interrupt number to the CPU. The interrupt - specifier format depends on the interrupt controller. - It should be DCF interrupts, when DDR dvfs finish, - it will happen. - clocks: Phandles for clock specified in "clock-names" property - clock-names : The name of clock used by the DFI, must be "pclk_ddr_mon"; @@ -17,139 +13,148 @@ Required properties: - center-supply: DMC supply node. - status: Marks the node enabled/disabled. -Following properties are ddr timing: - -- rockchip,dram_speed_bin : Value reference include/dt-bindings/clock/ddr.h, - it select ddr3 cl-trp-trcd type, default value - "DDR3_DEFAULT".it must selected according to - "Speed Bin" in ddr3 datasheet, DO NOT use - smaller "Speed Bin" than ddr3 exactly is. - -- rockchip,pd_idle : Config the PD_IDLE value, defined the power-down - idle period, memories are places into power-down - mode if bus is idle for PD_IDLE DFI clocks. - -- rockchip,sr_idle : Configure the SR_IDLE value, defined the - selfrefresh idle period, memories are places - into self-refresh mode if bus is idle for - SR_IDLE*1024 DFI clocks (DFI clocks freq is - half of dram's clocks), defaule value is "0". - -- rockchip,sr_mc_gate_idle : Defined the self-refresh with memory and - controller clock gating idle period, memories - are places into self-refresh mode and memory - controller clock arg gating if bus is idle for - sr_mc_gate_idle*1024 DFI clocks. - -- rockchip,srpd_lite_idle : Defined the self-refresh power down idle - period, memories are places into self-refresh - power down mode if bus is idle for - srpd_lite_idle*1024 DFI clocks. This parameter - is for LPDDR4 only. - -- rockchip,standby_idle : Defined the standby idle period, memories are - places into self-refresh than controller, pi, - phy and dram clock will gating if bus is idle - for standby_idle * DFI clocks. - -- rockchip,dram_dll_disb_freq : It's defined the DDR3 dll bypass frequency in - MHz, when ddr freq less than DRAM_DLL_DISB_FREQ, - ddr3 dll will bypssed note: if dll was bypassed, - the odt also stop working. - -- rockchip,phy_dll_disb_freq : Defined the PHY dll bypass frequency in - MHz (Mega Hz), when ddr freq less than - DRAM_DLL_DISB_FREQ, phy dll will bypssed. - note: phy dll and phy odt are independent. - -- rockchip,ddr3_odt_disb_freq : When dram type is DDR3, this parameter defined - the odt disable frequency in MHz (Mega Hz), - when ddr frequency less then ddr3_odt_disb_freq, - the odt on dram side and controller side are +Optional properties: +- interrupts: The CPU interrupt number. The interrupt specifier + format depends on the interrupt controller. + It should be a DCF interrupt. When DDR DVFS finishes + a DCF interrupt is triggered. + +Following properties relate to DDR timing: + +- rockchip,dram_speed_bin : Value reference include/dt-bindings/clock/rk3399-ddr.h, + it selects the DDR3 cl-trp-trcd type. It must be + set according to "Speed Bin" in DDR3 datasheet, + DO NOT use a smaller "Speed Bin" than specified + for the DDR3 being used. + +- rockchip,pd_idle : Configure the PD_IDLE value. Defines the + power-down idle period in which memories are + placed into power-down mode if bus is idle + for PD_IDLE DFI clock cycles. + +- rockchip,sr_idle : Configure the SR_IDLE value. Defines the + self-refresh idle period in which memories are + placed into self-refresh mode if bus is idle + for SR_IDLE * 1024 DFI clock cycles (DFI + clocks freq is half of DRAM clock), default + value is "0". + +- rockchip,sr_mc_gate_idle : Defines the memory self-refresh and controller + clock gating idle period. Memories are placed + into self-refresh mode and memory controller + clock arg gating started if bus is idle for + sr_mc_gate_idle*1024 DFI clock cycles. + +- rockchip,srpd_lite_idle : Defines the self-refresh power down idle + period in which memories are placed into + self-refresh power down mode if bus is idle + for srpd_lite_idle * 1024 DFI clock cycles. + This parameter is for LPDDR4 only. + +- rockchip,standby_idle : Defines the standby idle period in which + memories are placed into self-refresh mode. + The controller, pi, PHY and DRAM clock will + be gated if bus is idle for standby_idle * DFI + clock cycles. + +- rockchip,dram_dll_dis_freq : Defines the DDR3 DLL bypass frequency in MHz. + When DDR frequency is less than DRAM_DLL_DISB_FREQ, + DDR3 DLL will be bypassed. Note: if DLL was bypassed, + the odt will also stop working. + +- rockchip,phy_dll_dis_freq : Defines the PHY dll bypass frequency in + MHz (Mega Hz). When DDR frequency is less than + DRAM_DLL_DISB_FREQ, PHY DLL will be bypassed. + Note: PHY DLL and PHY ODT are independent. + +- rockchip,ddr3_odt_dis_freq : When the DRAM type is DDR3, this parameter defines + the ODT disable frequency in MHz (Mega Hz). + when the DDR frequency is less then ddr3_odt_dis_freq, + the ODT on the DRAM side and controller side are both disabled. -- rockchip,ddr3_drv : When dram type is DDR3, this parameter define - the dram side driver stength in ohm, default +- rockchip,ddr3_drv : When the DRAM type is DDR3, this parameter defines + the DRAM side driver strength in ohms. Default value is DDR3_DS_40ohm. -- rockchip,ddr3_odt : When dram type is DDR3, this parameter define - the dram side ODT stength in ohm, default value +- rockchip,ddr3_odt : When the DRAM type is DDR3, this parameter defines + the DRAM side ODT strength in ohms. Default value is DDR3_ODT_120ohm. -- rockchip,phy_ddr3_ca_drv : When dram type is DDR3, this parameter define - the phy side CA line(incluing command line, +- rockchip,phy_ddr3_ca_drv : When the DRAM type is DDR3, this parameter defines + the phy side CA line (incluing command line, address line and clock line) driver strength. Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_40. -- rockchip,phy_ddr3_dq_drv : When dram type is DDR3, this parameter define - the phy side DQ line(incluing DQS/DQ/DM line) - driver strength. default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_40. +- rockchip,phy_ddr3_dq_drv : When the DRAM type is DDR3, this parameter defines + the PHY side DQ line (including DQS/DQ/DM line) + driver strength. Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_40. -- rockchip,phy_ddr3_odt : When dram type is DDR3, this parameter define the - phy side odt strength, default value is +- rockchip,phy_ddr3_odt : When the DRAM type is DDR3, this parameter defines + the PHY side ODT strength. Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_240. -- rockchip,lpddr3_odt_disb_freq : When dram type is LPDDR3, this parameter defined - then odt disable frequency in MHz (Mega Hz), - when ddr frequency less then ddr3_odt_disb_freq, - the odt on dram side and controller side are +- rockchip,lpddr3_odt_dis_freq : When the DRAM type is LPDDR3, this parameter defines + then ODT disable frequency in MHz (Mega Hz). + When DDR frequency is less then ddr3_odt_dis_freq, + the ODT on the DRAM side and controller side are both disabled. -- rockchip,lpddr3_drv : When dram type is LPDDR3, this parameter define - the dram side driver stength in ohm, default +- rockchip,lpddr3_drv : When the DRAM type is LPDDR3, this parameter defines + the DRAM side driver strength in ohms. Default value is LP3_DS_34ohm. -- rockchip,lpddr3_odt : When dram type is LPDDR3, this parameter define - the dram side ODT stength in ohm, default value +- rockchip,lpddr3_odt : When the DRAM type is LPDDR3, this parameter defines + the DRAM side ODT strength in ohms. Default value is LP3_ODT_240ohm. -- rockchip,phy_lpddr3_ca_drv : When dram type is LPDDR3, this parameter define - the phy side CA line(incluing command line, +- rockchip,phy_lpddr3_ca_drv : When the DRAM type is LPDDR3, this parameter defines + the PHY side CA line (including command line, address line and clock line) driver strength. - default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_40. + Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_40. -- rockchip,phy_lpddr3_dq_drv : When dram type is LPDDR3, this parameter define - the phy side DQ line(incluing DQS/DQ/DM line) - driver strength. default value is +- rockchip,phy_lpddr3_dq_drv : When the DRAM type is LPDDR3, this parameter defines + the PHY side DQ line (including DQS/DQ/DM line) + driver strength. Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_40. - rockchip,phy_lpddr3_odt : When dram type is LPDDR3, this parameter define the phy side odt strength, default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_240. -- rockchip,lpddr4_odt_disb_freq : When dram type is LPDDR4, this parameter - defined the odt disable frequency in - MHz (Mega Hz), when ddr frequency less then - ddr3_odt_disb_freq, the odt on dram side and +- rockchip,lpddr4_odt_dis_freq : When the DRAM type is LPDDR4, this parameter + defines the ODT disable frequency in + MHz (Mega Hz). When the DDR frequency is less then + ddr3_odt_dis_freq, the ODT on the DRAM side and controller side are both disabled. -- rockchip,lpddr4_drv : When dram type is LPDDR4, this parameter define - the dram side driver stength in ohm, default +- rockchip,lpddr4_drv : When the DRAM type is LPDDR4, this parameter defines + the DRAM side driver strength in ohms. Default value is LP4_PDDS_60ohm. -- rockchip,lpddr4_dq_odt : When dram type is LPDDR4, this parameter define - the dram side ODT on dqs/dq line stength in ohm, - default value is LP4_DQ_ODT_40ohm. +- rockchip,lpddr4_dq_odt : When the DRAM type is LPDDR4, this parameter defines + the DRAM side ODT on DQS/DQ line strength in ohms. + Default value is LP4_DQ_ODT_40ohm. -- rockchip,lpddr4_ca_odt : When dram type is LPDDR4, this parameter define - the dram side ODT on ca line stength in ohm, - default value is LP4_CA_ODT_40ohm. +- rockchip,lpddr4_ca_odt : When the DRAM type is LPDDR4, this parameter defines + the DRAM side ODT on CA line strength in ohms. + Default value is LP4_CA_ODT_40ohm. -- rockchip,phy_lpddr4_ca_drv : When dram type is LPDDR4, this parameter define - the phy side CA line(incluing command address - line) driver strength. default value is +- rockchip,phy_lpddr4_ca_drv : When the DRAM type is LPDDR4, this parameter defines + the PHY side CA line (including command address + line) driver strength. Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_40. -- rockchip,phy_lpddr4_ck_cs_drv : When dram type is LPDDR4, this parameter define - the phy side clock line and cs line driver - strength. default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_80. +- rockchip,phy_lpddr4_ck_cs_drv : When the DRAM type is LPDDR4, this parameter defines + the PHY side clock line and CS line driver + strength. Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_80. -- rockchip,phy_lpddr4_dq_drv : When dram type is LPDDR4, this parameter define - the phy side DQ line(incluing DQS/DQ/DM line) - driver strength. default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_80. +- rockchip,phy_lpddr4_dq_drv : When the DRAM type is LPDDR4, this parameter defines + the PHY side DQ line (including DQS/DQ/DM line) + driver strength. Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_80. -- rockchip,phy_lpddr4_odt : When dram type is LPDDR4, this parameter define - the phy side odt strength, default value is +- rockchip,phy_lpddr4_odt : When the DRAM type is LPDDR4, this parameter defines + the PHY side ODT strength. Default value is PHY_DRV_ODT_60. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/brcm,bcm-vc4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/brcm,bcm-vc4.txt index 284e2b14cfbe..26649b4c4dd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/brcm,bcm-vc4.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/brcm,bcm-vc4.txt @@ -74,6 +74,12 @@ Required properties for DSI: The 3 clocks output from the DSI analog PHY: dsi[01]_byte, dsi[01]_ddr2, and dsi[01]_ddr +Required properties for the TXP (writeback) block: +- compatible: Should be "brcm,bcm2835-txp" +- reg: Physical base address and length of the TXP block's registers +- interrupts: The interrupt number + See bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt + [1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/analogix_dp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/analogix_dp.txt index 0c7473dd0e51..027d76c27a41 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/analogix_dp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/analogix_dp.txt @@ -15,8 +15,6 @@ Required properties for dp-controller: from common clock binding: handle to dp clock. -clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "dp". - -interrupt-parent: - phandle to Interrupt combiner node. -phys: from general PHY binding: the phandle for the PHY device. -phy-names: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/anx7814.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/anx7814.txt index b2a22c28c9b3..dbd7c84ee584 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/anx7814.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/anx7814.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "analogix,anx7814" - reg : I2C address of the device - - interrupt-parent : Should be the phandle of the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts : Should contain the INTP interrupt - hpd-gpios : Which GPIO to use for hpd - pd-gpios : Which GPIO to use for power down diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/megachips-stdpxxxx-ge-b850v3-fw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/megachips-stdpxxxx-ge-b850v3-fw.txt index aacc8b92968c..09e0a21f705e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/megachips-stdpxxxx-ge-b850v3-fw.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/megachips-stdpxxxx-ge-b850v3-fw.txt @@ -19,8 +19,6 @@ hardware are EDID, HPD, and interrupts. stdp4028-ge-b850v3-fw required properties: - compatible : "megachips,stdp4028-ge-b850v3-fw" - reg : I2C bus address - - interrupt-parent : phandle of the interrupt controller that services - interrupts to the device - interrupts : one interrupt should be described here, as in <0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH> - ports : One input port(reg = <0>) and one output port(reg = <1>) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sii902x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sii902x.txt index 56a3e68ccb80..72d2dc6c3e6b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sii902x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sii902x.txt @@ -5,8 +5,8 @@ Required properties: - reg: i2c address of the bridge Optional properties: - - interrupts-extended or interrupt-parent + interrupts: describe - the interrupt line used to inform the host about hotplug events. + - interrupts: describe the interrupt line used to inform the host + about hotplug events. - reset-gpios: OF device-tree gpio specification for RST_N pin. Optional subnodes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sii9234.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sii9234.txt index 88041ba23d56..a55bf77bd960 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sii9234.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sii9234.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Required properties: - iovcc18-supply : I/O Supply Voltage (1.8V) - avcc12-supply : TMDS Analog Supply Voltage (1.2V) - cvcc12-supply : Digital Core Supply Voltage (1.2V) - - interrupts, interrupt-parent: interrupt specifier of INT pin + - interrupts: interrupt specifier of INT pin - reset-gpios: gpio specifier of RESET pin (active low) - video interfaces: Device node can contain two video interface port nodes for HDMI encoder and connector according to [1]. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sil-sii8620.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sil-sii8620.txt index 9409d9c6a260..b05052f7d62f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sil-sii8620.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/bridge/sil-sii8620.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Required properties: - reg: i2c address of the bridge - cvcc10-supply: Digital Core Supply Voltage (1.0V) - iovcc18-supply: I/O Supply Voltage (1.8V) - - interrupts, interrupt-parent: interrupt specifier of INT pin + - interrupts: interrupt specifier of INT pin - reset-gpios: gpio specifier of RESET pin - clocks, clock-names: specification and name of "xtal" clock - video interfaces: Device node can contain video interface port diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/exynos7-decon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/exynos7-decon.txt index 9e2e7f6f7609..53912c99ec38 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/exynos7-decon.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/exynos7-decon.txt @@ -9,9 +9,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: physical base address and length of the DECON registers set. -- interrupt-parent: should be the phandle of the decon controller's - parent interrupt controller. - - interrupts: should contain a list of all DECON IP block interrupts in the order: FIFO Level, VSYNC, LCD_SYSTEM. The interrupt specifier format depends on the interrupt controller used. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/exynos_dp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/exynos_dp.txt index ade5d8eebf85..9b6cba3f82af 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/exynos_dp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/exynos_dp.txt @@ -25,8 +25,6 @@ Required properties for dp-controller: from common clock binding: handle to dp clock. -clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "dp". - -interrupt-parent: - phandle to Interrupt combiner node. -phys: from general PHY binding: the phandle for the PHY device. -phy-names: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/samsung-fimd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/samsung-fimd.txt index 5837402c3ade..b3096421d42b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/samsung-fimd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/exynos/samsung-fimd.txt @@ -16,9 +16,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: physical base address and length of the FIMD registers set. -- interrupt-parent: should be the phandle of the fimd controller's - parent interrupt controller. - - interrupts: should contain a list of all FIMD IP block interrupts in the order: FIFO Level, VSYNC, LCD_SYSTEM. The interrupt specifier format depends on the interrupt controller used. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ht16k33.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ht16k33.txt index 8e5b30b87754..d5a8b070b467 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ht16k33.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ht16k33.txt @@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ Holtek ht16k33 RAM mapping 16*8 LED controller driver with keyscan Required properties: - compatible: "holtek,ht16k33" - reg: I2C slave address of the chip. -- interrupt-parent: A phandle pointing to the interrupt controller - serving the interrupt for this chip. - interrupts: Interrupt specification for the key pressed interrupt. - refresh-rate-hz: Display update interval in HZ. - debounce-delay-ms: Debouncing interval time in milliseconds. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ilitek,ili9341.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ilitek,ili9341.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..169b32e4ee4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/ilitek,ili9341.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Ilitek ILI9341 display panels + +This binding is for display panels using an Ilitek ILI9341 controller in SPI +mode. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "adafruit,yx240qv29", "ilitek,ili9341" +- dc-gpios: D/C pin +- reset-gpios: Reset pin + +The node for this driver must be a child node of a SPI controller, hence +all mandatory properties described in ../spi/spi-bus.txt must be specified. + +Optional properties: +- rotation: panel rotation in degrees counter clockwise (0,90,180,270) +- backlight: phandle of the backlight device attached to the panel + +Example: + display@0{ + compatible = "adafruit,yx240qv29", "ilitek,ili9341"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <32000000>; + dc-gpios = <&gpio0 9 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio0 8 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + rotation = <270>; + backlight = <&backlight>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/marvell,pxa2xx-lcdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/marvell,pxa2xx-lcdc.txt index f79641bd5f18..45ffd6c41748 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/marvell,pxa2xx-lcdc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/marvell,pxa2xx-lcdc.txt @@ -10,6 +10,9 @@ Required properties: - interrupts : framebuffer controller interrupt. - clocks: phandle to input clocks +Optional properties: + - lcd-supply: A phandle to a power regulator that controls the LCD voltage. + Required nodes: - port: connection to the LCD panel (see video-interfaces.txt) This node must have its properties bus-width and remote-endpoint set. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/marvell,pxa300-gcu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/marvell,pxa300-gcu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9cfae5c4e8ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/marvell,pxa300-gcu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +PXA3xx GCU Controller +--------------------- + +Required properties: + - compatible : "marvell,pxa300-gcu" + - reg : should contain the register range (address and length). + - interrupts : Controller interrupt. + - clocks: phandle to the PXA specific input clock. + +Example for PXA300: + + display-controller@54000000 { + compatible = "marvell,pxa300-gcu"; + reg = <0x54000000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <39>; + clocks = <&clks CLK_PXA300_GCU>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/mediatek/mediatek,disp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/mediatek/mediatek,disp.txt index 383183a89164..8469de510001 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/mediatek/mediatek,disp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/mediatek/mediatek,disp.txt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Required properties (all function blocks): "mediatek,<chip>-dpi" - DPI controller, see mediatek,dpi.txt "mediatek,<chip>-disp-mutex" - display mutex "mediatek,<chip>-disp-od" - overdrive - the supported chips are mt2701 and mt8173. + the supported chips are mt2701, mt2712 and mt8173. - reg: Physical base address and length of the function block register space - interrupts: The interrupt signal from the function block (required, except for merge and split function blocks). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/dpu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/dpu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad2e8830324e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/dpu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. DPU KMS + +Description: + +Device tree bindings for MSM Mobile Display Subsytem(MDSS) that encapsulates +sub-blocks like DPU display controller, DSI and DP interfaces etc. +The DPU display controller is found in SDM845 SoC. + +MDSS: +Required properties: +- compatible: "qcom,sdm845-mdss" +- reg: physical base address and length of contoller's registers. +- reg-names: register region names. The following region is required: + * "mdss" +- power-domains: a power domain consumer specifier according to + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt +- clocks: list of clock specifiers for clocks needed by the device. +- clock-names: device clock names, must be in same order as clocks property. + The following clocks are required: + * "iface" + * "bus" + * "core" +- interrupts: interrupt signal from MDSS. +- interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller. +- #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt + source, should be 1. +- iommus: phandle of iommu device node. +- #address-cells: number of address cells for the MDSS children. Should be 1. +- #size-cells: Should be 1. +- ranges: parent bus address space is the same as the child bus address space. + +Optional properties: +- assigned-clocks: list of clock specifiers for clocks needing rate assignment +- assigned-clock-rates: list of clock frequencies sorted in the same order as + the assigned-clocks property. + +MDP: +Required properties: +- compatible: "qcom,sdm845-dpu" +- reg: physical base address and length of controller's registers. +- reg-names : register region names. The following region is required: + * "mdp" + * "vbif" +- clocks: list of clock specifiers for clocks needed by the device. +- clock-names: device clock names, must be in same order as clocks property. + The following clocks are required. + * "bus" + * "iface" + * "core" + * "vsync" +- interrupts: interrupt line from DPU to MDSS. +- ports: contains the list of output ports from DPU device. These ports connect + to interfaces that are external to the DPU hardware, such as DSI, DP etc. + + Each output port contains an endpoint that describes how it is connected to an + external interface. These are described by the standard properties documented + here: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt + + Port 0 -> DPU_INTF1 (DSI1) + Port 1 -> DPU_INTF2 (DSI2) + +Optional properties: +- assigned-clocks: list of clock specifiers for clocks needing rate assignment +- assigned-clock-rates: list of clock frequencies sorted in the same order as + the assigned-clocks property. + +Example: + + mdss: mdss@ae00000 { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-mdss"; + reg = <0xae00000 0x1000>; + reg-names = "mdss"; + + power-domains = <&clock_dispcc 0>; + + clocks = <&gcc GCC_DISP_AHB_CLK>, <&gcc GCC_DISP_AXI_CLK>, + <&clock_dispcc DISP_CC_MDSS_MDP_CLK>; + clock-names = "iface", "bus", "core"; + + assigned-clocks = <&clock_dispcc DISP_CC_MDSS_MDP_CLK>; + assigned-clock-rates = <300000000>; + + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 83 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + + iommus = <&apps_iommu 0>; + + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 0 0xae00000 0xb2008>; + + mdss_mdp: mdp@ae01000 { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-dpu"; + reg = <0 0x1000 0x8f000>, <0 0xb0000 0x2008>; + reg-names = "mdp", "vbif"; + + clocks = <&clock_dispcc DISP_CC_MDSS_AHB_CLK>, + <&clock_dispcc DISP_CC_MDSS_AXI_CLK>, + <&clock_dispcc DISP_CC_MDSS_MDP_CLK>, + <&clock_dispcc DISP_CC_MDSS_VSYNC_CLK>; + clock-names = "iface", "bus", "core", "vsync"; + + assigned-clocks = <&clock_dispcc DISP_CC_MDSS_MDP_CLK>, + <&clock_dispcc DISP_CC_MDSS_VSYNC_CLK>; + assigned-clock-rates = <0 0 300000000 19200000>; + + interrupts = <0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + dpu_intf1_out: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&dsi0_in>; + }; + }; + + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + dpu_intf2_out: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&dsi1_in>; + }; + }; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/dsi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/dsi.txt index 518e9cdf0d4b..dfc743219bd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/dsi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/dsi.txt @@ -43,8 +43,6 @@ Optional properties: the master link of the 2-DSI panel. - qcom,sync-dual-dsi: Boolean value indicating if the DSI controller is driving a 2-DSI panel whose 2 links need receive command simultaneously. -- interrupt-parent: phandle to the MDP block if the interrupt signal is routed - through MDP block - pinctrl-names: the pin control state names; should contain "default" - pinctrl-0: the default pinctrl state (active) - pinctrl-n: the "sleep" pinctrl state @@ -121,6 +119,20 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - qcom,dsi-phy-regulator-ldo-mode: Boolean value indicating if the LDO mode PHY regulator is wanted. +- qcom,mdss-mdp-transfer-time-us: Specifies the dsi transfer time for command mode + panels in microseconds. Driver uses this number to adjust + the clock rate according to the expected transfer time. + Increasing this value would slow down the mdp processing + and can result in slower performance. + Decreasing this value can speed up the mdp processing, + but this can also impact power consumption. + As a rule this time should not be higher than the time + that would be expected with the processing at the + dsi link rate since anyways this would be the maximum + transfer time that could be achieved. + If ping pong split is enabled, this time should not be higher + than two times the dsi link rate time. + If the property is not specified, then the default value is 14000 us. [1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt [2] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt @@ -171,6 +183,8 @@ Example: qcom,master-dsi; qcom,sync-dual-dsi; + qcom,mdss-mdp-transfer-time-us = <12000>; + pinctrl-names = "default", "sleep"; pinctrl-0 = <&dsi_active>; pinctrl-1 = <&dsi_suspend>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/edp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/edp.txt index 95ce19ca7bc5..eff9daff418c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/edp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/edp.txt @@ -25,10 +25,6 @@ Required properties: - panel-hpd-gpios: GPIO pin used for eDP hpd. -Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: phandle to the MDP block if the interrupt signal is routed - through MDP block - Example: mdss_edp: qcom,mdss_edp@fd923400 { compatible = "qcom,mdss-edp"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/mdp5.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/mdp5.txt index 1b31977a68ba..4e11338548aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/mdp5.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/msm/mdp5.txt @@ -41,8 +41,6 @@ Required properties: - reg-names: The names of register regions. The following regions are required: * "mdp_phys" - interrupts: Interrupt line from MDP5 to MDSS interrupt controller. -- interrupt-parent: phandle to the MDSS block - through MDP block - clocks: device clocks. See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. - clock-names: the following clocks are required. - * "bus" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g070vvn01.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g070vvn01.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..49e4105378f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/auo,g070vvn01.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +AU Optronics Corporation 7.0" FHD (800 x 480) TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "auo,g070vvn01" +- backlight: phandle of the backlight device attached to the panel +- power-supply: single regulator to provide the supply voltage + +Required nodes: +- port: Parallel port mapping to connect this display + +This panel needs single power supply voltage. Its backlight is conntrolled +via PWM signal. + +Example: +-------- + +Example device-tree definition when connected to iMX6Q based board + + lcd_panel: lcd-panel { + compatible = "auo,g070vvn01"; + backlight = <&backlight_lcd>; + power-supply = <®_display>; + + port { + lcd_panel_in: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&lcd_display_out>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/boe,hv070wsa-100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/boe,hv070wsa-100.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..55183d360032 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/boe,hv070wsa-100.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +BOE HV070WSA-100 7.01" WSVGA TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "boe,hv070wsa-100" +- power-supply: regulator to provide the VCC supply voltage (3.3 volts) +- enable-gpios: GPIO pin to enable and disable panel (active high) + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. + +The device node can contain one 'port' child node with one child +'endpoint' node, according to the bindings defined in [1]. This +node should describe panel's video bus. + +[1]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt + +Example: + + panel: panel { + compatible = "boe,hv070wsa-100"; + power-supply = <&vcc_3v3_reg>; + enable-gpios = <&gpd1 3 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + port { + panel_ep: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&bridge_out_ep>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/dataimage,scf0700c48ggu18.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/dataimage,scf0700c48ggu18.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..897085ee3cd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/dataimage,scf0700c48ggu18.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +DataImage, Inc. 7" WVGA (800x480) TFT LCD panel with 24-bit parallel interface. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "dataimage,scf0700c48ggu18" +- power-supply: as specified in the base binding + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/dlc,dlc0700yzg-1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/dlc,dlc0700yzg-1.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bf06bb025b08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/dlc,dlc0700yzg-1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +DLC Display Co. DLC0700YZG-1 7.0" WSVGA TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "dlc,dlc0700yzg-1" +- power-supply: See simple-panel.txt + +Optional properties: +- reset-gpios: See panel-common.txt +- enable-gpios: See simple-panel.txt +- backlight: See simple-panel.txt + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,et-series.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,et-series.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f56b99ebd9be --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,et-series.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +Emerging Display Technology Corp. Displays +========================================== + + +Display bindings for EDT Display Technology Corp. Displays which are +compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified in +simple-panel.txt + + +5,7" WVGA TFT Panels +-------------------- + ++-----------------+---------------------+-------------------------------------+ +| Identifier | compatbile | description | ++=================+=====================+=====================================+ +| ET057090DHU | edt,et057090dhu | 5.7" VGA TFT LCD panel | ++-----------------+---------------------+-------------------------------------+ + + +7,0" WVGA TFT Panels +-------------------- + ++-----------------+---------------------+-------------------------------------+ +| Identifier | compatbile | description | ++=================+=====================+=====================================+ +| ETM0700G0DH6 | edt,etm070080dh6 | WVGA TFT Display with capacitive | +| | | Touchscreen | ++-----------------+---------------------+-------------------------------------+ +| ETM0700G0BDH6 | edt,etm070080bdh6 | Same as ETM0700G0DH6 but with | +| | | inverted pixel clock. | ++-----------------+---------------------+-------------------------------------+ +| ETM0700G0EDH6 | edt,etm070080edh6 | Same display as the ETM0700G0BDH6, | +| | | but with changed Hardware for the | +| | | backlight and the touch interface | ++-----------------+---------------------+-------------------------------------+ +| ET070080DH6 | edt,etm070080dh6 | Same timings as the ETM0700G0DH6, | +| | | but with resistive touch. | ++-----------------+---------------------+-------------------------------------+ + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,et070080dh6.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,et070080dh6.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 20cb38e836e4..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,et070080dh6.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -Emerging Display Technology Corp. ET070080DH6 7.0" WVGA TFT LCD panel - -Required properties: -- compatible: should be "edt,et070080dh6" - -This panel is the same as ETM0700G0DH6 except for the touchscreen. -ET070080DH6 is the model with resistive touch. - -This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified -in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,etm0700g0dh6.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,etm0700g0dh6.txt deleted file mode 100644 index ee4b18053e40..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,etm0700g0dh6.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -Emerging Display Technology Corp. ETM0700G0DH6 7.0" WVGA TFT LCD panel - -Required properties: -- compatible: should be "edt,etm0700g0dh6" - -This panel is the same as ET070080DH6 except for the touchscreen. -ETM0700G0DH6 is the model with capacitive multitouch. - -This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified -in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/ilitek,ili9881c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/ilitek,ili9881c.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4a041acb4e18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/ilitek,ili9881c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Ilitek ILI9881c based MIPI-DSI panels + +Required properties: + - compatible: must be "ilitek,ili9881c" and one of: + * "bananapi,lhr050h41" + - reg: DSI virtual channel used by that screen + - power-supply: phandle to the power regulator + - reset-gpios: a GPIO phandle for the reset pin + +Optional properties: + - backlight: phandle to the backlight used + +Example: +panel@0 { + compatible = "bananapi,lhr050h41", "ilitek,ili9881c"; + reg = <0>; + power-supply = <®_display>; + reset-gpios = <&r_pio 0 5 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; /* PL05 */ + backlight = <&pwm_bl>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,g070y2-l01.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,g070y2-l01.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7c234cf68e11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,g070y2-l01.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +Innolux G070Y2-L01 7" WVGA (800x480) TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "innolux,g070y2-l01" +- power-supply: as specified in the base binding + +Optional properties: +- backlight: as specified in the base binding +- enable-gpios: as specified in the base binding + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p097pfg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p097pfg.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..595d9dfeffd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,p097pfg.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Innolux P097PFG 9.7" 1536x2048 TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "innolux,p097pfg" +- reg: DSI virtual channel of the peripheral +- avdd-supply: phandle of the regulator that provides positive voltage +- avee-supply: phandle of the regulator that provides negative voltage +- enable-gpios: panel enable gpio + +Optional properties: +- backlight: phandle of the backlight device attached to the panel + +Example: + + &mipi_dsi { + panel { + compatible = "innolux,p079zca"; + reg = <0>; + avdd-supply = <...>; + avee-supply = <...>; + backlight = <&backlight>; + enable-gpios = <&gpio1 13 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,tv123wam.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,tv123wam.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a9b35265fa13 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/innolux,tv123wam.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +Innolux TV123WAM 12.3 inch eDP 2K display panel + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "innolux,tv123wam" +- power-supply: regulator to provide the supply voltage + +Optional properties: +- enable-gpios: GPIO pin to enable or disable the panel +- backlight: phandle of the backlight device attached to the panel + +Example: + panel_edp: panel-edp { + compatible = "innolux,tv123wam"; + enable-gpios = <&msmgpio 31 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + power-supply = <&pm8916_l2>; + backlight = <&backlight>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/kingdisplay,kd097d04.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/kingdisplay,kd097d04.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..164a5fa236da --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/kingdisplay,kd097d04.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Kingdisplay KD097D04 9.7" 1536x2048 TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "kingdisplay,kd097d04" +- reg: DSI virtual channel of the peripheral +- power-supply: phandle of the regulator that provides the supply voltage +- enable-gpios: panel enable gpio + +Optional properties: +- backlight: phandle of the backlight device attached to the panel + +Example: + + &mipi_dsi { + panel { + compatible = "kingdisplay,kd097d04"; + reg = <0>; + power-supply = <...>; + backlight = <&backlight>; + enable-gpios = <&gpio1 13 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,et057090dhu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/newhaven,nhd-4.3-480272ef-atxl.txt index 4903d7b1d947..e78292b1a131 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/edt,et057090dhu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/newhaven,nhd-4.3-480272ef-atxl.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -Emerging Display Technology Corp. 5.7" VGA TFT LCD panel +Newhaven Display International 480 x 272 TFT LCD panel Required properties: -- compatible: should be "edt,et057090dhu" +- compatible: should be "newhaven,nhd-4.3-480272ef-atxl" This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/rocktech,rk070er9427.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/rocktech,rk070er9427.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eb1fb9f8d1f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/rocktech,rk070er9427.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +Rocktech Display Ltd. RK070ER9427 800(RGB)x480 TFT LCD panel + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "rocktech,rk070er9427" + +Optional properties: +- backlight: phandle of the backlight device attached to the panel + +Optional nodes: +- Video port for LCD panel input. + +Example: + panel { + compatible = "rocktech,rk070er9427"; + backlight = <&backlight_lcd>; + + port { + lcd_panel_in: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&lcd_display_out>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sharp,lq035q7db03.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sharp,lq035q7db03.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0753f6967279 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/panel/sharp,lq035q7db03.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +Sharp LQ035Q7DB03 3.5" QVGA TFT LCD panel + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "sharp,lq035q7db03" +- power-supply: phandle of the regulator that provides the supply voltage + +Optional properties: +- enable-gpios: GPIO pin to enable or disable the panel +- backlight: phandle of the backlight device attached to the panel + +This binding is compatible with the simple-panel binding, which is specified +in simple-panel.txt in this directory. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt index 7c6854bd0a04..ec9d34be2ff7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/renesas,du.txt @@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ Required Properties: - reg: the memory-mapped I/O registers base address and length - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for the DU interrupts. - clocks: A list of phandles + clock-specifier pairs, one for each entry in diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sm501fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sm501fb.txt index 9d9f0098092b..1c79c267a57f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sm501fb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sm501fb.txt @@ -9,8 +9,6 @@ Required properties: - First entry: System Configuration register - Second entry: IO space (Display Controller register) - interrupts : SMI interrupt to the cpu should be described here. -- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Optional properties: - mode : select a video mode: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt index 3346c1e2a7a0..f8773ecb7525 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/sunxi/sun4i-drm.txt @@ -103,6 +103,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: value must be one of: * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-hdmi-phy * allwinner,sun8i-h3-hdmi-phy + * allwinner,sun50i-a64-hdmi-phy - reg: base address and size of memory-mapped region - clocks: phandles to the clocks feeding the HDMI PHY * bus: the HDMI PHY interface clock @@ -111,8 +112,9 @@ Required properties: - resets: phandle to the reset controller driving the PHY - reset-names: must be "phy" -H3 HDMI PHY requires additional clock: +H3 and A64 HDMI PHY require additional clocks: - pll-0: parent of phy clock + - pll-1: second possible phy clock parent (A64 only) TV Encoder ---------- @@ -145,6 +147,7 @@ Required properties: * allwinner,sun8i-a33-tcon * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-tcon-lcd * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-tcon-tv + * allwinner,sun8i-r40-tcon-tv * allwinner,sun8i-v3s-tcon * allwinner,sun9i-a80-tcon-lcd * allwinner,sun9i-a80-tcon-tv @@ -179,7 +182,7 @@ For TCONs with channel 0, there is one more clock required: For TCONs with channel 1, there is one more clock required: - 'tcon-ch1': The clock driving the TCON channel 1 -When TCON support LVDS (all TCONs except TV TCON on A83T and those found +When TCON support LVDS (all TCONs except TV TCONs on A83T, R40 and those found in A13, H3, H5 and V3s SoCs), you need one more reset line: - 'lvds': The reset line driving the LVDS logic @@ -187,6 +190,62 @@ And on the A23, A31, A31s and A33, you need one more clock line: - 'lvds-alt': An alternative clock source, separate from the TCON channel 0 clock, that can be used to drive the LVDS clock +TCON TOP +-------- + +TCON TOPs main purpose is to configure whole display pipeline. It determines +relationships between mixers and TCONs, selects source TCON for HDMI, muxes +LCD and TV encoder GPIO output, selects TV encoder clock source and contains +additional TV TCON and DSI gates. + +It allows display pipeline to be configured in very different ways: + + / LCD0/LVDS0 + / [0] TCON-LCD0 + | \ MIPI DSI + mixer0 | + \ / [1] TCON-LCD1 - LCD1/LVDS1 + TCON-TOP + / \ [2] TCON-TV0 [0] - TVE0/RGB + mixer1 | \ + | TCON-TOP - HDMI + | / + \ [3] TCON-TV1 [1] - TVE1/RGB + +Note that both TCON TOP references same physical unit. Both mixers can be +connected to any TCON. + +Required properties: + - compatible: value must be one of: + * allwinner,sun8i-r40-tcon-top + - reg: base address and size of the memory-mapped region. + - clocks: phandle to the clocks feeding the TCON TOP + * bus: TCON TOP interface clock + * tcon-tv0: TCON TV0 clock + * tve0: TVE0 clock + * tcon-tv1: TCON TV1 clock + * tve1: TVE0 clock + * dsi: MIPI DSI clock + - clock-names: clock name mentioned above + - resets: phandle to the reset line driving the TCON TOP + - #clock-cells : must contain 1 + - clock-output-names: Names of clocks created for TCON TV0 channel clock, + TCON TV1 channel clock and DSI channel clock, in that order. + +- ports: A ports node with endpoint definitions as defined in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt. 6 ports should + be defined: + * port 0 is input for mixer0 mux + * port 1 is output for mixer0 mux + * port 2 is input for mixer1 mux + * port 3 is output for mixer1 mux + * port 4 is input for HDMI mux + * port 5 is output for HDMI mux + All output endpoints for mixer muxes and input endpoints for HDMI mux should + have reg property with the id of the target TCON, as shown in above graph + (0-3 for mixer muxes and 0-1 for HDMI mux). All ports should have only one + endpoint connected to remote endpoint. + DRC --- @@ -341,6 +400,7 @@ Required properties: * allwinner,sun8i-a33-display-engine * allwinner,sun8i-a83t-display-engine * allwinner,sun8i-h3-display-engine + * allwinner,sun8i-r40-display-engine * allwinner,sun8i-v3s-display-engine * allwinner,sun9i-a80-display-engine diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tilcdc/tilcdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tilcdc/tilcdc.txt index 6fddb4f4f71a..7bf1bb444812 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tilcdc/tilcdc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tilcdc/tilcdc.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: base address and size of the LCDC device Recommended properties: - - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the LCDC Optional properties: @@ -36,7 +34,7 @@ Optional nodes: - port/ports: to describe a connection to an external encoder. The binding follows Documentation/devicetree/bindings/graph.txt and - suppors a single port with a single endpoint. + supports a single port with a single endpoint. - See also Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tilcdc/panel.txt and Documentation/devicetree/bindings/display/tilcdc/tfp410.txt for connecting diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/jz4780-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/jz4780-dma.txt index f25feee62b15..03e9cf7b42e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/jz4780-dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/jz4780-dma.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "ingenic,jz4780-dma" - reg: Should contain the DMA controller registers location and length. - interrupts: Should contain the interrupt specifier of the DMA controller. -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle of the interrupt controller that - clocks: Should contain a clock specifier for the JZ4780 PDMA clock. - #dma-cells: Must be <2>. Number of integer cells in the dmas property of DMA clients (see below). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/nvidia,tegra210-adma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/nvidia,tegra210-adma.txt index 1e1dc8f972e4..2f35b047f772 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/nvidia,tegra210-adma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/nvidia,tegra210-adma.txt @@ -8,7 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length. This should be a single entry that includes all of the per-channel registers in one contiguous bank. -- interrupt-parent: Phandle to the interrupt parent controller. - interrupts: Should contain all of the per-channel DMA interrupts in ascending order with respect to the DMA channel index. - clocks: Must contain one entry for the ADMA module clock diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/owl-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/owl-dma.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..03e9bb12b75f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/owl-dma.txt @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +* Actions Semi Owl SoCs DMA controller + +This binding follows the generic DMA bindings defined in dma.txt. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "actions,s900-dma". +- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length. +- interrupts: Should contain 4 interrupts shared by all channel. +- #dma-cells: Must be <1>. Used to represent the number of integer + cells in the dmas property of client device. +- dma-channels: Physical channels supported. +- dma-requests: Number of DMA request signals supported by the controller. + Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt +- clocks: Phandle and Specifier of the clock feeding the DMA controller. + +Example: + +Controller: + dma: dma-controller@e0260000 { + compatible = "actions,s900-dma"; + reg = <0x0 0xe0260000 0x0 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 57 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 58 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 59 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 60 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + #dma-cells = <1>; + dma-channels = <12>; + dma-requests = <46>; + clocks = <&clock CLK_DMAC>; + }; + +Client: + +DMA clients connected to the Actions Semi Owl SoCs DMA controller must +use the format described in the dma.txt file, using a two-cell specifier +for each channel. + +The two cells in order are: +1. A phandle pointing to the DMA controller. +2. The channel id. + +uart5: serial@e012a000 { + ... + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + dmas = <&dma 26>, <&dma 27>; + ... +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/renesas,rcar-dmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/renesas,rcar-dmac.txt index b1ba639554c0..946229c48657 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/renesas,rcar-dmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/renesas,rcar-dmac.txt @@ -29,6 +29,7 @@ Required Properties: - "renesas,dmac-r8a77965" (R-Car M3-N) - "renesas,dmac-r8a77970" (R-Car V3M) - "renesas,dmac-r8a77980" (R-Car V3H) + - "renesas,dmac-r8a77990" (R-Car E3) - "renesas,dmac-r8a77995" (R-Car D3) - reg: base address and length of the registers block for the DMAC diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps,dw-axi-dmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps,dw-axi-dmac.txt index f237b7928283..dbe160400adc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps,dw-axi-dmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps,dw-axi-dmac.txt @@ -5,8 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Address range of the DMAC registers. This should include all of the per-channel registers. - interrupt: Should contain the DMAC interrupt number. -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device. - dma-channels: Number of channels supported by hardware. - snps,dma-masters: Number of AXI masters supported by the hardware. - snps,data-width: Maximum AXI data width supported by hardware. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt index 99acc712f83a..39e2b26be344 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/snps-dma.txt @@ -23,8 +23,6 @@ Deprecated properties: Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - is_private: The device channels should be marked as private and not for by the general purpose DMA channel allocator. False if not passed. - multi-block: Multi block transfers supported by hardware. Array property with diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt index 3f15f6644527..4bbc94d829c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti-edma.txt @@ -201,7 +201,6 @@ Required properties: - #dma-cells: Should be set to <1> Clients should use a single channel number per DMA request. - reg: Memory map for accessing module -- interrupt-parent: Interrupt controller the interrupt is routed through - interrupts: Exactly 3 interrupts need to be specified in the order: 1. Transfer completion interrupt. 2. Memory protection interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt index a2b8bfaec43c..174af2c45e77 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_dma.txt @@ -66,6 +66,8 @@ Optional child node properties: Optional child node properties for VDMA: - xlnx,genlock-mode: Tells Genlock synchronization is enabled/disabled in hardware. +- xlnx,enable-vert-flip: Tells vertical flip is + enabled/disabled in hardware(S2MM path). Optional child node properties for AXI DMA: -dma-channels: Number of dma channels in child node. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/zynqmp_dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/zynqmp_dma.txt index a784cdd94790..07a5a7aa9ea0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/zynqmp_dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/zynqmp_dma.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ control and rate control support for slave/peripheral dma access. Required properties: - compatible : Should be "xlnx,zynqmp-dma-1.0" - reg : Memory map for gdma/adma module access. -- interrupt-parent : Interrupt controller the interrupt is routed through - interrupts : Should contain DMA channel interrupt. - xlnx,bus-width : Axi buswidth in bits. Should contain 128 or 64 - clock-names : List of input clocks "clk_main", "clk_apb" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt index 61d833abafbf..aededdbc262b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/eeprom/at24.txt @@ -72,6 +72,8 @@ Optional properties: - wp-gpios: GPIO to which the write-protect pin of the chip is connected. + - address-width: number of address bits (one of 8, 16). + Example: eeprom@52 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-rt8973a.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-rt8973a.txt index 6dede7d11532..cfcf455ad4de 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-rt8973a.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-rt8973a.txt @@ -11,8 +11,6 @@ for USB D-/D+ switching. Required properties: - compatible: Should be "richtek,rt8973a-muic" - reg: Specifies the I2C slave address of the MUIC block. It should be 0x14 -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the interrupts from rt8973a are delivered to. - interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for detection interrupt sources. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-sm5502.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-sm5502.txt index 4ecda224955f..fc3888e09549 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-sm5502.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/extcon/extcon-sm5502.txt @@ -9,8 +9,6 @@ the host controller using an I2C interface. Required properties: - compatible: Should be "siliconmitus,sm5502-muic" - reg: Specifies the I2C slave address of the MUIC block. It should be 0x25 -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the interrupts from sm5502 are delivered to. - interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for detection interrupt sources. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fsi/fsi-master-ast-cf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fsi/fsi-master-ast-cf.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3dc752db748b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fsi/fsi-master-ast-cf.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +Device-tree bindings for ColdFire offloaded gpio-based FSI master driver +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Required properties: + - compatible = + "aspeed,ast2400-cf-fsi-master" for an AST2400 based system + or + "aspeed,ast2500-cf-fsi-master" for an AST2500 based system + + - clock-gpios = <gpio-descriptor>; : GPIO for FSI clock + - data-gpios = <gpio-descriptor>; : GPIO for FSI data signal + - enable-gpios = <gpio-descriptor>; : GPIO for enable signal + - trans-gpios = <gpio-descriptor>; : GPIO for voltage translator enable + - mux-gpios = <gpio-descriptor>; : GPIO for pin multiplexing with other + functions (eg, external FSI masters) + - memory-region = <phandle>; : Reference to the reserved memory for + the ColdFire. Must be 2M aligned on + AST2400 and 1M aligned on AST2500 + - aspeed,sram = <phandle>; : Reference to the SRAM node. + - aspeed,cvic = <phandle>; : Reference to the CVIC node. + +Examples: + + fsi-master { + compatible = "aspeed,ast2500-cf-fsi-master", "fsi-master"; + + clock-gpios = <&gpio 0>; + data-gpios = <&gpio 1>; + enable-gpios = <&gpio 2>; + trans-gpios = <&gpio 3>; + mux-gpios = <&gpio 4>; + + memory-region = <&coldfire_memory>; + aspeed,sram = <&sram>; + aspeed,cvic = <&cvic>; + } diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fsi/fsi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fsi/fsi.txt index ab516c673a4b..afb4eccab131 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fsi/fsi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fsi/fsi.txt @@ -83,6 +83,10 @@ addresses and sizes in the slave address space: #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; +Optionally, a slave can provide a global unique chip ID which is used to +identify the physical location of the chip in a system specific way + + chip-id = <0>; FSI engines (devices) --------------------- @@ -125,6 +129,7 @@ device tree if no extra platform information is required. reg = <0 0>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; + chip-id = <0>; /* FSI engine at 0xc00, using a single page. In this example, * it's an I2C master controller, so subnodes describe the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f1e4a2ff47c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +GNSS Receiver DT binding + +This documents the binding structure and common properties for GNSS receiver +devices. + +A GNSS receiver node is a node named "gnss" and typically resides on a serial +bus (e.g. UART, I2C or SPI). + +Please refer to the following documents for generic properties: + + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/slave-device.txt + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt + +Required properties: + +- compatible : A string reflecting the vendor and specific device the node + represents + +Optional properties: +- enable-gpios : GPIO used to enable the device +- timepulse-gpios : Time pulse GPIO + +Example: + +serial@1234 { + compatible = "ns16550a"; + + gnss { + compatible = "u-blox,neo-8"; + + vcc-supply = <&gnss_reg>; + timepulse-gpios = <&gpio0 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + + current-speed = <4800>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..648d183cdb77 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/sirfstar.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +SiRFstar-based GNSS Receiver DT binding + +SiRFstar chipsets are used in GNSS-receiver modules produced by several +vendors and can use UART, SPI or I2C interfaces. + +Please see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt for generic +properties. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Must be one of + + "fastrax,uc430" + "linx,r4" + "wi2wi,w2sg0008i" + "wi2wi,w2sg0084i" + +- vcc-supply : Main voltage regulator (pin name: 3V3_IN, VCC, VDD) + +Required properties (I2C): +- reg : I2C slave address + +Required properties (SPI): +- reg : SPI chip select address + +Optional properties: + +- sirf,onoff-gpios : GPIO used to power on and off device (pin name: ON_OFF) +- sirf,wakeup-gpios : GPIO used to determine device power state + (pin name: RFPWRUP, WAKEUP) +- timepulse-gpios : Time pulse GPIO (pin name: 1PPS, TM) + +Example: + +serial@1234 { + compatible = "ns16550a"; + + gnss { + compatible = "wi2wi,w2sg0084i"; + + vcc-supply = <&gnss_reg>; + sirf,onoff-gpios = <&gpio0 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + sirf,wakeup-gpios = <&gpio0 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/u-blox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/u-blox.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e475659cb85f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/u-blox.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +u-blox GNSS Receiver DT binding + +The u-blox GNSS receivers can use UART, DDC (I2C), SPI and USB interfaces. + +Please see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gnss/gnss.txt for generic +properties. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Must be one of + + "u-blox,neo-8" + "u-blox,neo-m8" + +- vcc-supply : Main voltage regulator + +Required properties (DDC): +- reg : DDC (I2C) slave address + +Required properties (SPI): +- reg : SPI chip select address + +Required properties (USB): +- reg : Number of the USB hub port or the USB host-controller port + to which this device is attached + +Optional properties: + +- timepulse-gpios : Time pulse GPIO +- u-blox,extint-gpios : GPIO connected to the "external interrupt" input pin +- v-bckp-supply : Backup voltage regulator + +Example: + +serial@1234 { + compatible = "ns16550a"; + + gnss { + compatible = "u-blox,neo-8"; + + v-bckp-supply = <&gnss_v_bckp_reg>; + vcc-supply = <&gnss_vcc_reg>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt index 798cfc9d3839..973362eb3f1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/8xxx_gpio.txt @@ -25,8 +25,6 @@ Required properties: - #gpio-cells: Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the second cell is used to specify optional parameters (currently unused). -- interrupt-parent: Phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - interrupts: Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. - gpio-controller: Marks the port as GPIO controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/abilis,tb10x-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/abilis,tb10x-gpio.txt index a25c87b650e5..ce19c5660aca 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/abilis,tb10x-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/abilis,tb10x-gpio.txt @@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ Optional Properties: - #interrupt-cells: Should be <1>. Interrupts are triggered on both edges. - interrupts: Defines the interrupt line connecting this GPIO controller to its parent interrupt controller. -- interrupt-parent: Defines the parent interrupt controller. GPIO ranges are specified as described in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/brcm,brcmstb-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/brcm,brcmstb-gpio.txt index b405b4410bfb..5d468ecd1809 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/brcm,brcmstb-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/brcm,brcmstb-gpio.txt @@ -30,9 +30,6 @@ Optional properties: - interrupts: The interrupt shared by all GPIO lines for this controller. -- interrupt-parent: - phandle of the parent interrupt controller - - interrupts-extended: Alternate form of specifying interrupts and parents that allows for multiple parents. This takes precedence over 'interrupts' and diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/fsl-imx-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/fsl-imx-gpio.txt index dbd22e0df21e..b4cd9f906c24 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/fsl-imx-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/fsl-imx-gpio.txt @@ -19,6 +19,9 @@ Required properties: 4 = active high level-sensitive. 8 = active low level-sensitive. +Optional properties: +- clocks: the clock for clocking the GPIO silicon + Example: gpio0: gpio@73f84000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-adnp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-adnp.txt index af66b2724837..a28902a65a62 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-adnp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-adnp.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Avionic Design N-bit GPIO expander bindings Required properties: - compatible: should be "ad,gpio-adnp" - reg: The I2C slave address for this device. -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. - #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The first cell is the GPIO number and the second cell is used to specify optional parameters: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-aspeed.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-aspeed.txt index fc6378c778c5..7e9b586770b0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-aspeed.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-aspeed.txt @@ -17,7 +17,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller, optional if inherited - clocks : A phandle to the clock to use for debounce timings The gpio and interrupt properties are further described in their respective diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-ath79.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-ath79.txt index c522851017ae..cf71f3ec969d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-ath79.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-ath79.txt @@ -12,7 +12,6 @@ Required properties: - ngpios: Should be set to the number of GPIOs available on the SoC. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode interrupt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-davinci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-davinci.txt index 8beb0539b6d8..553b92a7e87b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-davinci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-davinci.txt @@ -15,8 +15,6 @@ Required Properties: - first cell is the pin number - second cell is used to specify optional parameters (unused) -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - - interrupts: Array of GPIO interrupt number. Only banked or unbanked IRQs are supported at a time. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-max732x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-max732x.txt index 5fdc843b4542..b3a9c0c32823 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-max732x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-max732x.txt @@ -30,7 +30,6 @@ Optional properties: - #interrupt-cells: Number of cells to encode an interrupt source, shall be 2. - first cell is the pin number - second cell is used to specify flags - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. Please refer to gpio.txt in this directory for details of the common GPIO diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt index 88f228665507..4e3c550e319a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pca953x.txt @@ -37,6 +37,7 @@ Required properties: - #interrupt-cells: if to be used as interrupt expander. Optional properties: + - interrupts: interrupt specifier for the device's interrupt output. - reset-gpios: GPIO specification for the RESET input. This is an active low signal to the PCA953x. - vcc-supply: power supply regulator. @@ -49,6 +50,8 @@ Example: reg = <0x20>; pinctrl-names = "default"; pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_pca9505>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; interrupt-parent = <&gpio3>; interrupts = <23 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pcf857x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pcf857x.txt index 7d3bd631d011..a482455a205b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pcf857x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-pcf857x.txt @@ -49,7 +49,6 @@ Optional Properties: - interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells: Number of cells to encode an interrupt source, shall be 2. - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-uniphier.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-uniphier.txt index fed9158dd913..f281f12dac18 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-uniphier.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-uniphier.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. - #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The first cell is the pin number and the second cell is used to specify optional parameters. -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the parent interrupt controller. - interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells: Should be 2. The first cell defines the interrupt number. The second cell bits[3:0] is used to specify trigger type as follows: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xgene-sb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xgene-sb.txt index 5490c1d68981..e90fb987e25f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xgene-sb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xgene-sb.txt @@ -26,7 +26,6 @@ Required properties: 1 = active low - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. - interrupts: The EXT_INT_0 parent interrupt resource must be listed first. -- interrupt-parent: Phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupt-cells: Should be two. - first cell is 0-N coresponding for EXT_INT_0 to EXT_INT_N. - second cell is used to specify flags. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xilinx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xilinx.txt index 63bf4becd5f0..08eed2335db0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xilinx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xilinx.txt @@ -14,8 +14,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - interrupts : Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. -- interrupt-parent : Phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - xlnx,all-inputs : if n-th bit is setup, GPIO-n is input - xlnx,dout-default : if n-th bit is 1, GPIO-n default value is 1 - xlnx,gpio-width : gpio width diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xlp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xlp.txt index 28662d83a43e..47fc64922fe0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xlp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-xlp.txt @@ -30,7 +30,6 @@ Required properties: 4 = active high level-sensitive. 8 = active low level-sensitive. - interrupts: Interrupt number for this device. -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-zynq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-zynq.txt index 7b542657f259..4fa4eb5507cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-zynq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio-zynq.txt @@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ Required properties: - gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. - interrupts : Interrupt specifier (see interrupt bindings for details) -- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : Should be 2. The first cell is the GPIO number. The second cell bits[3:0] is used to specify trigger type and level flags: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mediatek,mt7621-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mediatek,mt7621-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ba455589f869 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/mediatek,mt7621-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +Mediatek MT7621 SoC GPIO controller bindings + +The IP core used inside these SoCs has 3 banks of 32 GPIOs each. +The registers of all the banks are interwoven inside one single IO range. +We load one GPIO controller instance per bank. Also the GPIO controller can receive +interrupts on any of the GPIOs, either edge or level. It then interrupts the CPU +using GIC INT12. + +Required properties for the top level node: +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the GPIO pin number and the + second cell specifies GPIO flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h>. + Only the GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH and GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW flags are supported. +- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt. Should be 2. The first cell defines the interrupt number, + the second encodes the triger flags encoded as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +- compatible: + - "mediatek,mt7621-gpio" for Mediatek controllers +- reg : Physical base address and length of the controller's registers +- interrupt-parent : phandle of the parent interrupt controller. +- interrupts : Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. +- interrupt-controller : Mark the device node as an interrupt controller. +- gpio-controller : Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. + +Example: + gpio@600 { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + compatible = "mediatek,mt7621-gpio"; + gpio-controller; + interrupt-controller; + reg = <0x600 0x100>; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <GIC_SHARED 12 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nintendo,hollywood-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nintendo,hollywood-gpio.txt index 20fc72d9e61e..df63da46309c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nintendo,hollywood-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nintendo,hollywood-gpio.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Nintendo Wii (Hollywood) GPIO controller Required properties: -- compatible: "nintendo,hollywood-gpio +- compatible: "nintendo,hollywood-gpio" - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers. - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a GPIO controller. - #gpio-cells: Should be <2>. The first cell is the pin number and the @@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ Optional properties: - #interrupt-cells: Should be two. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controller's Broadway (PowerPC) interrupt. -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nvidia,tegra186-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nvidia,tegra186-gpio.txt index c82a2e221bc1..adff16c71d21 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nvidia,tegra186-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/nvidia,tegra186-gpio.txt @@ -68,6 +68,8 @@ Required properties: One of: - "nvidia,tegra186-gpio". - "nvidia,tegra186-gpio-aon". + - "nvidia,tegra194-gpio". + - "nvidia,tegra194-gpio-aon". - reg-names Array of strings. Contains a list of names for the register spaces described by the reg @@ -91,6 +93,8 @@ Required properties: depending on compatible value: - "nvidia,tegra186-gpio": 6 entries. - "nvidia,tegra186-gpio-aon": 1 entry. + - "nvidia,tegra194-gpio": 6 entries. + - "nvidia,tegra194-gpio-aon": 1 entry. - gpio-controller Boolean. Marks the device node as a GPIO controller/provider. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt index 378f1322211e..4018ee57a6af 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Required Properties: - "renesas,gpio-r8a7796": for R8A7796 (R-Car M3-W) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a77965": for R8A77965 (R-Car M3-N) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a77970": for R8A77970 (R-Car V3M) compatible GPIO controller. + - "renesas,gpio-r8a77980": for R8A77980 (R-Car V3H) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a77990": for R8A77990 (R-Car E3) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a77995": for R8A77995 (R-Car D3) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,rcar-gen1-gpio": for a generic R-Car Gen1 GPIO controller. @@ -31,7 +32,6 @@ Required Properties: - reg: Base address and length of each memory resource used by the GPIO controller hardware module. - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. - gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a gpio controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/rockchip,rk3328-grf-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/rockchip,rk3328-grf-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f9231df17c2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/rockchip,rk3328-grf-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +Rockchip RK3328 GRF (General Register Files) GPIO controller. + +In Rockchip RK3328, the output only GPIO_MUTE pin, originally for codec mute +control, can also be used for general purpose. It is manipulated by the +GRF_SOC_CON10 register in GRF. Aside from the GPIO_MUTE pin, the HDMI pins can +also be set in the same way. + +Currently this GPIO controller only supports the mute pin. If needed in the +future, the HDMI pins support can also be added. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should contain "rockchip,rk3328-grf-gpio". +- gpio-controller: Marks the device node as a gpio controller. +- #gpio-cells: Should be 2. The first cell is the pin number and + the second cell is used to specify the gpio polarity: + 0 = Active high, + 1 = Active low. + +Example: + + grf: syscon@ff100000 { + compatible = "rockchip,rk3328-grf", "syscon", "simple-mfd"; + + grf_gpio: grf-gpio { + compatible = "rockchip,rk3328-grf-gpio"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + }; + +Note: The grf_gpio node should be declared as the child of the GRF (General +Register File) node. The GPIO_MUTE pin is referred to as <&grf_gpio 0>. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/snps-dwapb-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/snps-dwapb-gpio.txt index 3c1118bc67f5..7276b50c3506 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/snps-dwapb-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/snps-dwapb-gpio.txt @@ -25,7 +25,6 @@ controller. interrupt. Shall be set to 2. The first cell defines the interrupt number, the second encodes the triger flags encoded as described in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. - interrupts : The interrupts to the parent controller raised when GPIOs generate the interrupts. If the controller provides one combined interrupt for all GPIOs, specify a single interrupt. If the controller provides one diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/omap-ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/omap-ssi.txt index 955e335e7e56..77a0c3c3036e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/omap-ssi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hsi/omap-ssi.txt @@ -33,7 +33,6 @@ Required Port sub-node properties: - reg-names: Contains the values "tx" and "rx" (in this order). - reg: Contains a matching register specifier for each entry in reg-names. -- interrupt-parent Should be a phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: Should contain interrupt specifiers for mpu interrupts 0 and 1 (in this order). - ti,ssi-cawake-gpio: Defines which GPIO pin is used to signify CAWAKE diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..28f43e929f6d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan.txt @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +Nuvoton NPCM7xx PWM and Fan Tacho controller device + +The Nuvoton BMC NPCM7XX supports 8 Pulse-width modulation (PWM) +controller outputs and 16 Fan tachometer controller inputs. + +Required properties for pwm-fan node +- #address-cells : should be 1. +- #size-cells : should be 0. +- compatible : "nuvoton,npcm750-pwm-fan" for Poleg NPCM7XX. +- reg : specifies physical base address and size of the registers. +- reg-names : must contain: + * "pwm" for the PWM registers. + * "fan" for the Fan registers. +- clocks : phandle of reference clocks. +- clock-names : must contain + * "pwm" for PWM controller operating clock. + * "fan" for Fan controller operating clock. +- interrupts : contain the Fan interrupts with flags for falling edge. +- pinctrl-names : a pinctrl state named "default" must be defined. +- pinctrl-0 : phandle referencing pin configuration of the PWM and Fan + controller ports. + +fan subnode format: +=================== +Under fan subnode can be upto 8 child nodes, each child node representing a fan. +Each fan subnode must have one PWM channel and atleast one Fan tach channel. + +For PWM channel can be configured cooling-levels to create cooling device. +Cooling device could be bound to a thermal zone for the thermal control. + +Required properties for each child node: +- reg : specify the PWM output channel. + integer value in the range 0 through 7, that represent + the PWM channel number that used. + +- fan-tach-ch : specify the Fan tach input channel. + integer value in the range 0 through 15, that represent + the fan tach channel number that used. + + At least one Fan tach input channel is required + +Optional property for each child node: +- cooling-levels: PWM duty cycle values in a range from 0 to 255 + which correspond to thermal cooling states. + +Examples: + +pwm_fan:pwm-fan-controller@103000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "nuvoton,npcm750-pwm-fan"; + reg = <0x103000 0x2000>, + <0x180000 0x8000>; + reg-names = "pwm", "fan"; + clocks = <&clk NPCM7XX_CLK_APB3>, + <&clk NPCM7XX_CLK_APB4>; + clock-names = "pwm","fan"; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 96 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 97 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 98 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 99 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 100 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 101 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 102 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 103 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pwm0_pins &pwm1_pins &pwm2_pins + &fanin0_pins &fanin1_pins &fanin2_pins + &fanin3_pins &fanin4_pins>; + fan@0 { + reg = <0x00>; + fan-tach-ch = /bits/ 8 <0x00 0x01>; + cooling-levels = <127 255>; + }; + fan@1 { + reg = <0x01>; + fan-tach-ch = /bits/ 8 <0x02 0x03>; + }; + fan@2 { + reg = <0x02>; + fan-tach-ch = /bits/ 8 <0x04>; + }; + +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-aspeed.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-aspeed.txt index e7106bfc1f13..8fbd8633a387 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-aspeed.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-aspeed.txt @@ -11,9 +11,6 @@ Required Properties: - resets : phandle to reset controller with the reset number in the second cell - interrupts : interrupt number -- interrupt-parent : interrupt controller for bus, should reference a - aspeed,ast2400-i2c-ic or aspeed,ast2500-i2c-ic - interrupt controller Optional Properties: - bus-frequency : frequency of the bus clock in Hz defaults to 100 kHz when not diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-brcmstb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-brcmstb.txt index aeceaceba3c5..0380609b177a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-brcmstb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-brcmstb.txt @@ -10,8 +10,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties : -- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller - this one is cascaded from - interrupts: specifies the interrupt number, the irq line to be used - interrupt-names: Interrupt name string diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-fsi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-fsi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b1be2ceb7e69 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-fsi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +Device-tree bindings for FSI-attached I2C master and busses +----------------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: + - compatible = "ibm,i2c-fsi"; + - reg = < address size >; : The FSI CFAM address and address + space size. + - #address-cells = <1>; : Number of address cells in child + nodes. + - #size-cells = <0>; : Number of size cells in child nodes. + - child nodes : Nodes to describe busses off the I2C + master. + +Child node required properties: + - reg = < port number > : The port number on the I2C master. + +Child node optional properties: + - child nodes : Nodes to describe devices on the I2C + bus. + +Examples: + + i2c@1800 { + compatible = "ibm,i2c-fsi"; + reg = < 0x1800 0x400 >; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + i2c-bus@0 { + reg = <0>; + }; + + i2c-bus@1 { + reg = <1>; + + eeprom@50 { + compatible = "vendor,dev-name"; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-imx-lpi2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-imx-lpi2c.txt index 60fe90d69f4e..00e4365d7206 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-imx-lpi2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-imx-lpi2c.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - "fsl,imx7ulp-lpi2c" for LPI2C compatible with the one integrated on i.MX7ULP soc - "fsl,imx8dv-lpi2c" for LPI2C compatible with the one integrated on i.MX8DV soc - reg : address and length of the lpi2c master registers -- interrupt-parent : core interrupt controller - interrupts : lpi2c interrupt - clocks : lpi2c clock specifier diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-jz4780.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-jz4780.txt index d4a082acf92f..3738cfbf863f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-jz4780.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-jz4780.txt @@ -11,10 +11,6 @@ Recommended properties: - pinctrl-names: should be "default"; - pinctrl-0: phandle to pinctrl function -Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle of the interrupt controller that - delivers interrupts to the I2C block. - Example / { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mpc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mpc.txt index 1eacd6b20ed5..42a390526957 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mpc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mpc.txt @@ -15,8 +15,6 @@ Recommended properties : information for the interrupt. This should be encoded based on the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt controller you have. - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - fsl,preserve-clocking : boolean; if defined, the clock settings from the bootloader are preserved (not touched). - clock-frequency : desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pca954x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pca954x.txt index 34d91501342e..ccf6c86ed076 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pca954x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-mux-pca954x.txt @@ -28,8 +28,6 @@ Optional Properties: - i2c-mux-idle-disconnect: Boolean; if defined, forces mux to disconnect all children in idle state. This is necessary for example, if there are several multiplexers on the bus and the devices behind them use same I2C addresses. - - interrupt-parent: Phandle for the interrupt controller that services - interrupts for this device. - interrupts: Interrupt mapping for IRQ. - interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : Should be two. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-owl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-owl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b743fe444e9f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-owl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Actions Semiconductor Owl I2C controller + +Required properties: + +- compatible : Should be "actions,s900-i2c". +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. +- #address-cells : Should be 1. +- #size-cells : Should be 0. +- interrupts : A single interrupt specifier. +- clocks : Phandle of the clock feeding the I2C controller. + +Optional properties: + +- clock-frequency : Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. As only Normal and + Fast modes are supported, possible values are 100000 and + 400000. +Examples: + + i2c0: i2c@e0170000 { + compatible = "actions,s900-i2c"; + reg = <0 0xe0170000 0 0x1000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 25 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&clock CLK_I2C0>; + clock-frequency = <100000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pca-platform.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pca-platform.txt index f1f3876bb8e8..73a693d66ef7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pca-platform.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pca-platform.txt @@ -12,8 +12,6 @@ Required properties : Optional properties - interrupts : the interrupt number - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller. - If an interrupt is not specified polling will be used. - reset-gpios : gpio specifier for gpio connected to RESET_N pin. As the line is active low, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW. - clock-frequency : I2C bus frequency. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pnx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pnx.txt index fe98ada33ee4..2a59006cf79e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pnx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pnx.txt @@ -7,8 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: configure one interrupt line - #address-cells: always 1 (for i2c addresses) - #size-cells: always 0 - - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa.txt index d30f0b11d853..c30783c0eca0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-pxa.txt @@ -12,9 +12,6 @@ Required properties : Recommended properties : - interrupts : the interrupt number - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. If the parent is the default - interrupt controller in device tree, it could be ignored. - mrvl,i2c-polling : Disable interrupt of i2c controller. Polling status register of i2c controller instead. - mrvl,i2c-fast-mode : Enable fast mode of i2c controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt index 7ce8fae55537..39cd21d95810 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-rcar.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: "renesas,i2c-r8a7743" if the device is a part of a R8A7743 SoC. "renesas,i2c-r8a7745" if the device is a part of a R8A7745 SoC. + "renesas,i2c-r8a774a1" if the device is a part of a R8A774A1 SoC. "renesas,i2c-r8a7778" if the device is a part of a R8A7778 SoC. "renesas,i2c-r8a7779" if the device is a part of a R8A7779 SoC. "renesas,i2c-r8a7790" if the device is a part of a R8A7790 SoC. @@ -16,11 +17,13 @@ Required properties: "renesas,i2c-r8a77965" if the device is a part of a R8A77965 SoC. "renesas,i2c-r8a77970" if the device is a part of a R8A77970 SoC. "renesas,i2c-r8a77980" if the device is a part of a R8A77980 SoC. + "renesas,i2c-r8a77990" if the device is a part of a R8A77990 SoC. "renesas,i2c-r8a77995" if the device is a part of a R8A77995 SoC. "renesas,rcar-gen1-i2c" for a generic R-Car Gen1 compatible device. "renesas,rcar-gen2-i2c" for a generic R-Car Gen2 or RZ/G1 compatible device. - "renesas,rcar-gen3-i2c" for a generic R-Car Gen3 compatible device. + "renesas,rcar-gen3-i2c" for a generic R-Car Gen3 or RZ/G2 compatible + device. "renesas,i2c-rcar" (deprecated) When compatible with the generic version, nodes must list the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sh_mobile.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sh_mobile.txt index fc7e17802746..872673adff5a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sh_mobile.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-sh_mobile.txt @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,iic-r8a7740" (R-Mobile A1) - "renesas,iic-r8a7743" (RZ/G1M) - "renesas,iic-r8a7745" (RZ/G1E) + - "renesas,iic-r8a774a1" (RZ/G2M) - "renesas,iic-r8a7790" (R-Car H2) - "renesas,iic-r8a7791" (R-Car M2-W) - "renesas,iic-r8a7792" (R-Car V2H) @@ -17,7 +18,8 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,iic-sh73a0" (SH-Mobile AG5) - "renesas,rcar-gen2-iic" (generic R-Car Gen2 or RZ/G1 compatible device) - - "renesas,rcar-gen3-iic" (generic R-Car Gen3 compatible device) + - "renesas,rcar-gen3-iic" (generic R-Car Gen3 or RZ/G2 + compatible device) - "renesas,rmobile-iic" (generic device) When compatible with a generic R-Car version, nodes diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/adxl345.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/adxl345.txt index e7111b02c02c..f9525f6e3d43 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/adxl345.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/adxl345.txt @@ -1,9 +1,12 @@ -Analog Devices ADXL345 3-Axis, +/-(2g/4g/8g/16g) Digital Accelerometer +Analog Devices ADXL345/ADXL375 3-Axis Digital Accelerometers http://www.analog.com/en/products/mems/accelerometers/adxl345.html +http://www.analog.com/en/products/sensors-mems/accelerometers/adxl375.html Required properties: - - compatible : should be "adi,adxl345" + - compatible : should be one of + "adi,adxl345" + "adi,adxl375" - reg : the I2C address or SPI chip select number of the sensor Required properties for SPI bus usage: @@ -11,8 +14,6 @@ Required properties for SPI bus usage: - spi-cpol and spi-cpha : must be defined for adxl345 to enable SPI mode 3 Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent : phandle to the parent interrupt controller as documented - in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ as documented in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt index 4a3679d54457..3b25b4c4d446 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt @@ -10,8 +10,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - - interrupts : interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ, it should by configured with flags IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH | IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING For the bma250 the first interrupt listed must be the one diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt index 45f5c5c5929c..2100e9af379c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/mma8452.txt @@ -15,8 +15,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - - interrupts: interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ - interrupt-names: should contain "INT1" and/or "INT2", the accelerometer's diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt index d1acd5ea2737..54b823f3a453 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/amlogic,meson-saradc.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: depending on the SoC this should be one of: - "amlogic,meson8-saradc" for Meson8 - "amlogic,meson8b-saradc" for Meson8b + - "amlogic,meson8m2-saradc" for Meson8m2 - "amlogic,meson-gxbb-saradc" for GXBB - "amlogic,meson-gxl-saradc" for GXL - "amlogic,meson-gxm-saradc" for GXM diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/at91-sama5d2_adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/at91-sama5d2_adc.txt index 6469a4cd2a6d..4a3c1d496e1a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/at91-sama5d2_adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/at91-sama5d2_adc.txt @@ -21,6 +21,14 @@ Optional properties: - dmas: Phandle to dma channel for the ADC. - dma-names: Must be "rx" when dmas property is being used. See ../../dma/dma.txt for details. + - #io-channel-cells: in case consumer drivers are attached, this must be 1. + See <Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/iio-bindings.txt> for details. + +Properties for consumer drivers: + - Consumer drivers can be connected to this producer device, as specified + in <Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/iio-bindings.txt> + - Channels exposed are specified in: + <dt-bindings/iio/adc/at91-sama5d2_adc.txt> Example: @@ -38,4 +46,5 @@ adc: adc@fc030000 { atmel,trigger-edge-type = <IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>; dmas = <&dma0 (AT91_XDMAC_DT_MEM_IF(0) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PER_IF(1) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PERID(25))>; dma-names = "rx"; + #io-channel-cells = <1>; } diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.txt index b3629405f568..7222328a3d0d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/avia-hx711.txt @@ -8,11 +8,17 @@ Required properties: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt - avdd-supply: Definition of the regulator used as analog supply +Optional properties: + - clock-frequency: Frequency of PD_SCK in Hz + Minimum value allowed is 10 kHz because of maximum + high time of 50 microseconds. + Example: -weight@0 { +weight { compatible = "avia,hx711"; sck-gpios = <&gpio3 10 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; dout-gpios = <&gpio0 7 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; avdd-suppy = <&avdd>; + clock-frequency = <100000>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/cpcap-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/cpcap-adc.txt index 487ea966858e..ec04008e8f4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/cpcap-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/cpcap-adc.txt @@ -2,7 +2,6 @@ Motorola CPCAP PMIC ADC binding Required properties: - compatible: Should be "motorola,cpcap-adc" or "motorola,mapphone-cpcap-adc" -- interrupt-parent: The interrupt controller - interrupts: The interrupt number for the ADC device - interrupt-names: Should be "adcdone" - #io-channel-cells: Number of cells in an IIO specifier diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/fsl,imx25-gcq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/fsl,imx25-gcq.txt index b0866d36a307..eebdcec3dab5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/fsl,imx25-gcq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/fsl,imx25-gcq.txt @@ -8,7 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Should be the register range of the module. - interrupts: Should be the interrupt number of the module. Typically this is <1>. - - interrupt-parent: phandle to the tsadc module of the i.MX25. - #address-cells: Should be <1> (setting for the subnodes) - #size-cells: Should be <0> (setting for the subnodes) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/max1027-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/max1027-adc.txt index a8770cc6bcad..e680c61dfb84 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/max1027-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/max1027-adc.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "maxim,max1027" or "maxim,max1029" or "maxim,max1031" - reg: SPI chip select number for the device - - interrupt-parent: phandle to the parent interrupt controller - see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt - interrupts: IRQ line for the ADC see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.txt index ba24ca7ba95e..59b92cd32552 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Required properties: Example node: - ads1202: adc@0 { + ads1202: adc { compatible = "sd-modulator"; #io-channel-cells = <0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sprd,sc27xx-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sprd,sc27xx-adc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8aad960de50b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sprd,sc27xx-adc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +Spreadtrum SC27XX series PMICs ADC binding + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be one of the following. + "sprd,sc2720-adc" + "sprd,sc2721-adc" + "sprd,sc2723-adc" + "sprd,sc2730-adc" + "sprd,sc2731-adc" +- reg: The address offset of ADC controller. +- interrupt-parent: The interrupt controller. +- interrupts: The interrupt number for the ADC device. +- #io-channel-cells: Number of cells in an IIO specifier. +- hwlocks: Reference to a phandle of a hwlock provider node. + +Example: + + sc2731_pmic: pmic@0 { + compatible = "sprd,sc2731"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <26000000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 31 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + pmic_adc: adc@480 { + compatible = "sprd,sc2731-adc"; + reg = <0x480>; + interrupt-parent = <&sc2731_pmic>; + interrupts = <0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + #io-channel-cells = <1>; + hwlocks = <&hwlock 4>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/st,stm32-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/st,stm32-adc.txt index f1ead43a1a95..8346bcb04ad7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/st,stm32-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/st,stm32-adc.txt @@ -60,7 +60,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Offset of ADC instance in ADC block (e.g. may be 0x0, 0x100, 0x200). - clocks: Input clock private to this ADC instance. It's required only on stm32f4, that has per instance clock input for registers access. -- interrupt-parent: Phandle to the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: IRQ Line for the ADC (e.g. may be 0 for adc@0, 1 for adc@100 or 2 for adc@200). - st,adc-channels: List of single-ended channels muxed for this ADC. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/xilinx-xadc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/xilinx-xadc.txt index d71258e2d456..e0e0755cabd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/xilinx-xadc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/xilinx-xadc.txt @@ -22,7 +22,6 @@ Required properties: clock to the AXI bus interface of the core. Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: phandle to the parent interrupt controller - xlnx,external-mux: * "none": No external multiplexer is used, this is the default if the property is omitted. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,ec-sm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,ec-sm.txt index 2962bd9a2b3d..f4320595b851 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,ec-sm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,ec-sm.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "atlas,ec-sm" - reg: the I2C address of the sensor - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,orp-sm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,orp-sm.txt index 5d8b687d5edc..af1f5a9aa4da 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,orp-sm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,orp-sm.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "atlas,orp-sm" - reg: the I2C address of the sensor - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,ph-sm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,ph-sm.txt index cffa1907463a..79d90f060327 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,ph-sm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/chemical/atlas,ph-sm.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "atlas,ph-sm" - reg: the I2C address of the sensor - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ad5758.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ad5758.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bba01a5cab1b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/dac/ad5758.txt @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +Analog Devices AD5758 DAC device driver + +Required properties for the AD5758: + - compatible: Must be "adi,ad5758" + - reg: SPI chip select number for the device + - spi-max-frequency: Max SPI frequency to use (< 50000000) + - spi-cpha: is the only mode that is supported + +Required properties: + + - adi,dc-dc-mode: Mode of operation of the dc-to-dc converter + Dynamic Power Control (DPC) + In this mode, the AD5758 circuitry senses the output + voltage and dynamically regulates the supply voltage, + VDPC+, to meet compliance requirements plus an optimized + headroom voltage for the output buffer. + + Programmable Power Control (PPC) + In this mode, the VDPC+ voltage is user-programmable to + a fixed level that needs to accommodate the maximum output + load required. + + The output of the DAC core is either converted to a + current or voltage output at the VIOUT pin. Only one mode + can be enabled at any one time. + + The following values are currently supported: + * 1: DPC current mode + * 2: DPC voltage mode + * 3: PPC current mode + + Depending on the selected output mode (voltage or current) one of the + two properties must + be present: + + - adi,range-microvolt: Voltage output range + The array of voltage output ranges must contain two fields: + * <0 5000000>: 0 V to 5 V voltage range + * <0 10000000>: 0 V to 10 V voltage range + * <(-5000000) 5000000>: ±5 V voltage range + * <(-10000000) 10000000>: ±10 V voltage range + - adi,range-microamp: Current output range + The array of current output ranges must contain two fields: + * <0 20000>: 0 mA to 20 mA current range + * <0 24000>: 0 mA to 24 mA current range + * <4 24000>: 4 mA to 20 mA current range + * <(-20000) 20000>: ±20 mA current range + * <(-24000) 24000>: ±24 mA current range + * <(-1000) 22000>: −1 mA to +22 mA current range + +Optional properties: + + - adi,dc-dc-ilim-microamp: The dc-to-dc converter current limit + The following values are currently supported [uA]: + * 150000 + * 200000 + * 250000 + * 300000 + * 350000 + * 400000 + + - adi,slew-time-us: The time it takes for the output to reach the + full scale [uS] + The supported range is between 133us up to 1023984375us + +AD5758 Example: + + dac@0 { + compatible = "adi,ad5758"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <1000000>; + spi-cpha; + + adi,dc-dc-mode = <2>; + adi,range-microvolt = <0 10000000>; + adi,dc-dc-ilim-microamp = <200000>; + adi,slew-time-us = <125000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/invensense,mpu3050.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/invensense,mpu3050.txt index b0d3b59966bc..233fe207aded 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/invensense,mpu3050.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/gyroscope/invensense,mpu3050.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : the I2C address of the sensor Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts : interrupt mapping for the trigger interrupt from the internal oscillator. The following IRQ modes are supported: IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING, IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING, IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH and diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/afe4403.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/afe4403.txt index 2fffd70336ba..8e412054d6d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/afe4403.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/afe4403.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "ti,afe4403". - reg : SPI chip select address of device. - tx-supply : Regulator supply to transmitting LEDs. - - interrupt-parent : Phandle to he parent interrupt controller. - interrupts : The interrupt line the device ADC_RDY pin is connected to. For details refer to, ../../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/afe4404.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/afe4404.txt index de69f203edfa..0b52830a0d9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/afe4404.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/afe4404.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "ti,afe4404". - reg : I2C address of the device. - tx-supply : Regulator supply to transmitting LEDs. - - interrupt-parent : Phandle to he parent interrupt controller. - interrupts : The interrupt line the device ADC_RDY pin is connected to. For details refer to, ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/max30100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/max30100.txt index 8d8176459d09..0054908a6e74 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/max30100.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/max30100.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Maxim MAX30100 heart rate and pulse oximeter sensor Required properties: - compatible: must be "maxim,max30100" - reg: the I2C address of the sensor - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/max30102.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/max30102.txt index ef2ca0a0306f..7ef7ae40ae4f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/max30102.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/health/max30102.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Maxim MAX30105 optical particle-sensing module Required properties: - compatible: must be "maxim,max30102" or "maxim,max30105" - reg: the I2C address of the sensor - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/humidity/hts221.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/humidity/hts221.txt index 10adeb0d703d..84d029372260 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/humidity/hts221.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/humidity/hts221.txt @@ -13,7 +13,6 @@ Optional properties: when it is not active, whereas a pull-up one is needed when interrupt line is configured as IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW or IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING. Refer to pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt for the property description. -- interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ. It should be configured with flags IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH, IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING, IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW or IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt index ae0112c7debc..0c1c105fb503 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/bmi160.txt @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Required properties: - spi-max-frequency : set maximum clock frequency (only for SPI) Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle of the interrupt controller - interrupts : interrupt mapping for IRQ, must be IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW - interrupt-names : set to "INT1" if INT1 pin should be used as interrupt input, set to "INT2" if INT2 pin should be used instead diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt index 5f4777e8cc9e..b2f27da847b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/inv_mpu6050.txt @@ -6,12 +6,12 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should be one of "invensense,mpu6050" "invensense,mpu6500" + "invensense,mpu6515" "invensense,mpu9150" "invensense,mpu9250" "invensense,mpu9255" "invensense,icm20608" - reg : the I2C address of the sensor - - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ. It should be configured with flags IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH, IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING, IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW or IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/st_lsm6dsx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/st_lsm6dsx.txt index ef8a8566c63f..ea2d6e0ae4c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/st_lsm6dsx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/st_lsm6dsx.txt @@ -20,7 +20,6 @@ Optional properties: IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING a pull-down resistor is needed to drive the line when it is not active, whereas a pull-up one is needed when interrupt line is configured as IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW or IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING. -- interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ. It should be configured with flags IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH, IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING, IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW or IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9300.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9300.txt index d6f66c73ddbf..aa199e09a493 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9300.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9300.txt @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts : interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9960.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9960.txt index 174b709f16db..3af325ad194b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9960.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/apds9960.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "avago,apds9960" - reg: the I2c address of the sensor - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts : the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/isl29018.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/isl29018.txt index 425ab459e209..b9bbde3e13ed 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/isl29018.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/isl29018.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/isl29501.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/isl29501.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..46957997fee3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/isl29501.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +* ISL29501 Time-of-flight sensor. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : should be "renesas,isl29501" + - reg : the I2C address of the sensor + +Example: + +isl29501@57 { + compatible = "renesas,isl29501"; + reg = <0x57>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/opt3001.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/opt3001.txt index eac30d508849..47b13eb8f4ec 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/opt3001.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/opt3001.txt @@ -13,7 +13,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: the I2C address of the sensor Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ (configure for falling edge) Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/tsl2583.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/tsl2583.txt index 8e2066c83f70..059dffa1829a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/tsl2583.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/tsl2583.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic interrupt client diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/uvis25.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/uvis25.txt index 3041207e3f3c..043c139d91e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/uvis25.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/light/uvis25.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: i2c address of the sensor / spi cs line Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ. It should be configured with flags IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH, IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING, IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW or IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/bmc150_magn.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/bmc150_magn.txt index 9f263b7df162..fd5fca90fb39 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/bmc150_magn.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/magnetometer/bmc150_magn.txt @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent : phandle to the parent interrupt controller - interrupts : interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.txt index c7198a03c906..61c72e63c584 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/bmp085.txt @@ -8,11 +8,6 @@ Required properties: "bosch,bme280" Optional properties: -- chip-id: configurable chip id for non-default chip revisions -- temp-measurement-period: temperature measurement period (milliseconds) -- default-oversampling: default oversampling value to be used at startup, - value range is 0-3 with rising sensitivity. -- interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ - reset-gpios: a GPIO line handling reset of the sensor: as the line is active low, it should be marked GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW (see gpio/gpio.txt) @@ -24,9 +19,6 @@ Example: pressure@77 { compatible = "bosch,bmp085"; reg = <0x77>; - chip-id = <10>; - temp-measurement-period = <100>; - default-oversampling = <2>; interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>; interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; reset-gpios = <&gpio0 26 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/zpa2326.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/zpa2326.txt index fb85de676e03..a36ab3e0c3f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/zpa2326.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/zpa2326.txt @@ -15,8 +15,6 @@ Optional properties: power to the sensor - vdd-supply: an optional regulator that needs to be on to provide VDD power to the sensor -- interrupt-parent: phandle to the parent interrupt controller as documented in - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt - interrupts: interrupt mapping for IRQ as documented in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/as3935.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/as3935.txt index b6c1afa6f02d..849115585d55 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/as3935.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/as3935.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - spi-max-frequency: specifies maximum SPI clock frequency - spi-cpha: SPI Mode 1. Refer to spi/spi-bus.txt for generic SPI slave node bindings. - - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts : the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/sx9500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/sx9500.txt index b301dd2b35da..c54455db3bec 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/sx9500.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/sx9500.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Semtech's SX9500 capacitive proximity button device driver Required properties: - compatible: must be "semtech,sx9500" - reg: i2c address where to find the device - - interrupt-parent : should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts : the sole interrupt generated by the device Refer to interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for generic diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/sensorhub.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/sensorhub.txt index 8d57571d5c0b..b6ac0457d4ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/sensorhub.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/sensorhub.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ of a virtual sensor device. Required properties: - compatible: "samsung,sensorhub-rinato" or "samsung,sensorhub-thermostat" - spi-max-frequency: max SPI clock frequency -- interrupt-parent: interrupt parent - interrupts: communication interrupt - ap-mcu-gpios: [out] ap to sensorhub line - used during communication - mcu-ap-gpios: [in] sensorhub to ap - used during communication diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/tmp007.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/tmp007.txt index b63aba91ef03..da0af234a357 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/tmp007.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/tmp007.txt @@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - - interrupts: interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ (level active low) Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/infiniband/hisilicon-hns-roce.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/infiniband/hisilicon-hns-roce.txt index d3b273e4336a..84f1a1b505d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/infiniband/hisilicon-hns-roce.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/infiniband/hisilicon-hns-roce.txt @@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ representing a dsaf device. - #size-cells: must be 2 Optional properties: - dma-coherent: Present if DMA operations are coherent. -- interrupt-parent: the interrupt parent of this device. - interrupts: should contain 32 completion event irq,1 async event irq and 1 event overflow irq. - interrupt-names:should be one of 34 irqs for roce device diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,cyapa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,cyapa.txt index 8d91ba9ff2fd..d3db65916a36 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,cyapa.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,cyapa.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Cypress I2C Touchpad Required properties: - compatible: must be "cypress,cyapa". - reg: I2C address of the chip. -- interrupt-parent: a phandle for the interrupt controller (see interrupt - binding[0]). - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected (see interrupt binding[0]). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt index 635f62c756ee..0c252d9306da 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/cypress,tm2-touchkey.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Samsung tm2-touchkey Required properties: - compatible: must be "cypress,tm2-touchkey" - reg: I2C address of the chip. -- interrupt-parent: a phandle for the interrupt controller (see interrupt - binding[0]). - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected (see interrupt binding[0]). - vcc-supply : internal regulator output. 1.8V diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/e3x0-button.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/e3x0-button.txt index 751665e8e47a..907b195f2eaa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/e3x0-button.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/e3x0-button.txt @@ -7,8 +7,6 @@ This module provides a simple power button event via two interrupts. Required properties: - compatible: should be one of the following - "ettus,e3x0-button": For devices such as the NI Ettus Research USRP E3x0 -- interrupt-parent: - - a phandle to the interrupt controller that it is attached to. - interrupts: should be one of the following - <0 30 1>, <0 31 1>: For devices such as the NI Ettus Research USRP E3x0 - interrupt-names: should be one of the following diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/elan_i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/elan_i2c.txt index d80a83583238..797607460735 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/elan_i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/elan_i2c.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Elantech I2C Touchpad Required properties: - compatible: must be "elan,ekth3000". - reg: I2C address of the chip. -- interrupt-parent: a phandle for the interrupt controller (see interrupt - binding[0]). - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected (see interrupt binding[0]). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/elants_i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/elants_i2c.txt index 8a71038f3489..5edac8be0802 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/elants_i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/elants_i2c.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Elantech I2C Touchscreen Required properties: - compatible: must be "elan,ekth3500". - reg: I2C address of the chip. -- interrupt-parent: a phandle for the interrupt controller (see interrupt - binding[0]). - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected (see interrupt binding[0]). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/hid-over-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/hid-over-i2c.txt index 4d3da9d91de4..c76bafaf98d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/hid-over-i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/hid-over-i2c.txt @@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "hid-over-i2c" - reg: i2c slave address - hid-descr-addr: HID descriptor address -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt line Additional optional properties: @@ -26,7 +25,8 @@ device-specific compatible properties, which should be used in addition to the - compatible: * "wacom,w9013" (Wacom W9013 digitizer). Supports: - - vdd-supply + - vdd-supply (3.3V) + - vddl-supply (1.8V) - post-power-on-delay-ms - vdd-supply: phandle of the regulator that provides the supply voltage. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/keys.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/keys.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f5a5ddde53f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/keys.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +General Keys Properties: + +Optional properties for Keys: +- power-off-time-sec: Duration in seconds which the key should be kept + pressed for device to power off automatically. Device with key pressed + shutdown feature can specify this property. +- linux,keycodes: Specifies the numeric keycode values to be used for + reporting key presses. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/qcom,pm8941-pwrkey.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/qcom,pm8941-pwrkey.txt index 07bf55f6e0b9..34ab5763f494 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/qcom,pm8941-pwrkey.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/qcom,pm8941-pwrkey.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ PROPERTIES Value type: <string> Definition: must be one of: "qcom,pm8941-pwrkey" + "qcom,pm8941-resin" - reg: Usage: required @@ -32,6 +33,14 @@ PROPERTIES Definition: presence of this property indicates that the KPDPWR_N pin should be configured for pull up. +- linux,code: + Usage: optional + Value type: <u32> + Definition: The input key-code associated with the power key. + Use the linux event codes defined in + include/dt-bindings/input/linux-event-codes.h + When property is omitted KEY_POWER is assumed. + EXAMPLE pwrkey@800 { @@ -40,4 +49,5 @@ EXAMPLE interrupts = <0x0 0x8 0 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>; debounce = <15625>; bias-pull-up; + linux,code = <KEY_POWER>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/raydium_i2c_ts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/raydium_i2c_ts.txt index 5b6232db7c61..99a4f2ab5557 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/raydium_i2c_ts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/raydium_i2c_ts.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Raydium I2C touchscreen Required properties: - compatible: must be "raydium,rm32380" - reg: The I2C address of the device -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected See ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rmi4/rmi_i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rmi4/rmi_i2c.txt index ec908b91fd90..dcb012f5b3ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rmi4/rmi_i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rmi4/rmi_i2c.txt @@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Required Properties: Optional Properties: - interrupts: interrupt which the rmi device is connected to. -- interrupt-parent: The interrupt controller. See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt - syna,reset-delay-ms: The number of milliseconds to wait after resetting the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rmi4/rmi_spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rmi4/rmi_spi.txt index a4ca7828f21d..632f473db65b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rmi4/rmi_spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/rmi4/rmi_spi.txt @@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Required Properties: Optional Properties: - interrupts: interrupt which the rmi device is connected to. -- interrupt-parent: The interrupt controller. See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt - spi-rx-delay-us: microsecond delay after a read transfer. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/sprd,sc27xx-vibra.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/sprd,sc27xx-vibra.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f2ec0d4f2dff --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/sprd,sc27xx-vibra.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Spreadtrum SC27xx PMIC Vibrator + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "sprd,sc2731-vibrator". +- reg: address of vibrator control register. + +Example : + + sc2731_pmic: pmic@0 { + compatible = "sprd,sc2731"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <26000000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 31 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + vibrator@eb4 { + compatible = "sprd,sc2731-vibrator"; + reg = <0xeb4>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ti,palmas-pwrbutton.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ti,palmas-pwrbutton.txt index a3dde8c30e67..c829e18e1a05 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ti,palmas-pwrbutton.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/ti,palmas-pwrbutton.txt @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ This module provides a simple power button event via an Interrupt. Required properties: - compatible: should be one of the following - "ti,palmas-pwrbutton": For Palmas compatible power on button -- interrupt-parent: Parent interrupt device, must be handle of palmas node. - interrupts: Interrupt number of power button submodule on device. Optional Properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ad7879.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ad7879.txt index 3c8614c451f2..cdd743a1f2d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ad7879.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ad7879.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: for I2C slave, use "adi,ad7879-1" - reg : SPI chipselect/I2C slave address See spi-bus.txt for more SPI slave properties -- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts : touch controller interrupt - touchscreen-max-pressure : maximum reported pressure - adi,resistance-plate-x : total resistance of X-plate (for pressure diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ads7846.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ads7846.txt index 9fc47b006fd1..04413da51391 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ads7846.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ads7846.txt @@ -18,7 +18,6 @@ Additional required properties: "ti,ads7846" "ti,ads7873" - interrupt-parent interrupts An interrupt node describing the IRQ line the chip's !PENIRQ pin is connected to. vcc-supply A regulator node for the supply voltage. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ar1021.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ar1021.txt index e459e8546f34..82019bd6094e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ar1021.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ar1021.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "microchip,ar1021-i2c" - reg : I2C slave address -- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts : touch controller interrupt Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/bu21029.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/bu21029.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8daa0e868a8f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/bu21029.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +* Rohm BU21029 Touch Screen Controller + +Required properties: + - compatible : must be "rohm,bu21029" + - reg : i2c device address of the chip (0x40 or 0x41) + - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the gpio controller + - interrupts : (gpio) interrupt to which the chip is connected + - rohm,x-plate-ohms : x-plate resistance in Ohm + +Optional properties: + - reset-gpios : gpio pin to reset the chip (active low) + - touchscreen-size-x : horizontal resolution of touchscreen (in pixels) + - touchscreen-size-y : vertical resolution of touchscreen (in pixels) + - touchscreen-max-pressure: maximum pressure value + - vdd-supply : power supply for the controller + +Example: + + &i2c1 { + /* ... */ + + bu21029: bu21029@40 { + compatible = "rohm,bu21029"; + reg = <0x40>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <4 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio6 16 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + rohm,x-plate-ohms = <600>; + touchscreen-size-x = <800>; + touchscreen-size-y = <480>; + touchscreen-max-pressure = <4095>; + }; + + /* ... */ + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/chipone_icn8318.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/chipone_icn8318.txt index d11f8d615b5d..38b0603f65f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/chipone_icn8318.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/chipone_icn8318.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "chipone,icn8318" - reg : I2C slave address of the chip (0x40) - - interrupt-parent : a phandle pointing to the interrupt controller - serving the interrupt for this chip - interrupts : interrupt specification for the icn8318 interrupt - wake-gpios : GPIO specification for the WAKE input - touchscreen-size-x : horizontal resolution of touchscreen (in pixels) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/colibri-vf50-ts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/colibri-vf50-ts.txt index df531b5b6a0d..2e1490a8fe74 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/colibri-vf50-ts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/colibri-vf50-ts.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required Properties: - xm-gpios: FET gate driver for input of X- - yp-gpios: FET gate driver for input of Y+ - ym-gpios: FET gate driver for input of Y- -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: pen irq interrupt for touch detection - pinctrl-names: "idle", "default", "gpios" - pinctrl-0: pinctrl node for pen/touch detection state pinmux diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/cyttsp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/cyttsp.txt index b75d4cfd2c36..6ee274aa8b03 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/cyttsp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/cyttsp.txt @@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : must be "cypress,cyttsp-i2c" or "cypress,cyttsp-spi" - reg : Device I2C address or SPI chip select number - spi-max-frequency : Maximum SPI clocking speed of the device (for cyttsp-spi) - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the gpio controller - (see interrupt binding[0]). - interrupts : (gpio) interrupt to which the chip is connected (see interrupt binding[0]). - bootloader-key : the 8-byte bootloader key that is required to switch diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt index 025cf8c9324a..da2dc5d6c98b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/edt-ft5x06.txt @@ -22,8 +22,6 @@ Required properties: or: "focaltech,ft6236" - reg: I2C slave address of the chip (0x38) - - interrupt-parent: a phandle pointing to the interrupt controller - serving the interrupt for this chip - interrupts: interrupt specification for the touchdetect interrupt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/eeti.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/eeti.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..32b3712c916e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/eeti.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +Bindings for EETI touchscreen controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "eeti,exc3000-i2c" +- reg: I2C address of the chip. Should be set to <0xa> +- interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected + +Optional properties: +- attn-gpios: A handle to a GPIO to check whether interrupt is still + latched. This is necessary for platforms that lack + support for level-triggered IRQs. + +The following optional properties described in touchscreen.txt are +also supported: + +- touchscreen-inverted-x +- touchscreen-inverted-y +- touchscreen-swapped-x-y + +Example: + +i2c-master { + touchscreen@a { + compatible = "eeti,exc3000-i2c"; + reg = <0xa>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + interrupts = <123 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + attn-gpios = <&gpio 123 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt index 298e3442f143..92fb2620f5e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/egalax-ts.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "eeti,egalax_ts" - reg: i2c slave address -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: touch controller interrupt - wakeup-gpios: the gpio pin to be used for waking up the controller and also used as irq pin diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ektf2127.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ektf2127.txt index 5a19f4c3e9d7..94c4fc644940 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ektf2127.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/ektf2127.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "elan,ektf2127" - reg : I2C slave address of the chip (0x40) - - interrupt-parent : a phandle pointing to the interrupt controller - serving the interrupt for this chip - interrupts : interrupt specification for the ektf2127 interrupt - power-gpios : GPIO specification for the pin connected to the ektf2127's wake input. This needs to be driven high diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/exc3000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/exc3000.txt index 1dcff4a43eaa..68291b94fec2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/exc3000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/exc3000.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "eeti,exc3000" - reg: i2c slave address -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: touch controller interrupt - touchscreen-size-x: See touchscreen.txt - touchscreen-size-y: See touchscreen.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/fsl-mx25-tcq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/fsl-mx25-tcq.txt index abfcab3edc66..99d6f9d25335 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/fsl-mx25-tcq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/fsl-mx25-tcq.txt @@ -8,7 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Memory range of the device. - interrupts: Should be the interrupt number associated with this module within the tscadc unit (<0>). - - interrupt-parent: Should be a phandle to the tscadc unit. - fsl,wires: Should be '<4>' or '<5>' Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt index 0c369d8ebcab..f7e95c52f3c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/goodix.txt @@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ Required properties: or "goodix,gt928" or "goodix,gt967" - reg : I2C address of the chip. Should be 0x5d or 0x14 - - interrupt-parent : Interrupt controller to which the chip is connected - interrupts : Interrupt to which the chip is connected Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/hideep.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/hideep.txt index 121d9b7c79a2..a47c36190b01 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/hideep.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/hideep.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : must be "hideep,hideep-ts" - reg : I2C slave address, (e.g. 0x6C). -- interrupt-parent : Interrupt controller to which the chip is connected. - interrupts : Interrupt to which the chip is connected. Optional properties: @@ -32,7 +31,7 @@ i2c@00000000 { reg = <0x6c>; interrupt-parent = <&gpx1>; interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; - vdd-supply = <&ldo15_reg>"; + vdd-supply = <&ldo15_reg>; vid-supply = <&ldo18_reg>; reset-gpios = <&gpx1 5 0>; touchscreen-size-x = <1080>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/max11801-ts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/max11801-ts.txt index 40ac0fe94df6..05e982c3454e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/max11801-ts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/max11801-ts.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "maxim,max11801" - reg: i2c slave address -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: touch controller interrupt Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/melfas_mip4.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/melfas_mip4.txt index 7b8944c2cb31..b2ab5498e519 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/melfas_mip4.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/melfas_mip4.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "melfas,mip4_ts" - reg: I2C slave address of the chip (0x48 or 0x34) -- interrupt-parent: interrupt controller to which the chip is connected - interrupts: interrupt to which the chip is connected Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/resistive-adc-touch.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/resistive-adc-touch.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..51456c0e9a27 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/resistive-adc-touch.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +Generic resistive touchscreen ADC + +Required properties: + + - compatible: must be "resistive-adc-touch" +The device must be connected to an ADC device that provides channels for +position measurement and optional pressure. +Refer to ../iio/iio-bindings.txt for details + - iio-channels: must have at least two channels connected to an ADC device. +These should correspond to the channels exposed by the ADC device and should +have the right index as the ADC device registers them. These channels +represent the relative position on the "x" and "y" axes. + - iio-channel-names: must have all the channels' names. Mandatory channels +are "x" and "y". + +Optional properties: + - iio-channels: The third channel named "pressure" is optional and can be +used if the ADC device also measures pressure besides position. +If this channel is missing, pressure will be ignored and the touchscreen +will only report position. + - iio-channel-names: optional channel named "pressure". + +Example: + + resistive_touch: resistive_touch { + compatible = "resistive-adc-touch"; + touchscreen-min-pressure = <50000>; + io-channels = <&adc 24>, <&adc 25>, <&adc 26>; + io-channel-names = "x", "y", "pressure"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/samsung,s6sy761.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/samsung,s6sy761.txt index d9b7c2ff611e..6805d10d226d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/samsung,s6sy761.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/samsung,s6sy761.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : must be "samsung,s6sy761" - reg : I2C slave address, (e.g. 0x48) -- interrupt-parent : the phandle to the interrupt controller which provides - the interrupt - interrupts : interrupt specification - avdd-supply : analogic power supply - vdd-supply : power supply diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/silead_gsl1680.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/silead_gsl1680.txt index 84752de12412..d67e558e5ab5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/silead_gsl1680.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/silead_gsl1680.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: "silead,gsl3675" "silead,gsl3692" - reg : I2C slave address of the chip (0x40) -- interrupt-parent : a phandle pointing to the interrupt controller - serving the interrupt for this chip - interrupts : interrupt specification for the gsl1680 interrupt - power-gpios : Specification for the pin connected to the gsl1680's shutdown input. This needs to be driven high to take the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sis_i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sis_i2c.txt index d87ad14f1efe..8f5322e01024 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sis_i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sis_i2c.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "sis,9200-ts" - reg: i2c slave address -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - (see interrupt binding [0]) - interrupts: touch controller interrupt (see interrupt binding [0]) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/st,stmfts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/st,stmfts.txt index 9683595cd0f5..0a5d0cb4a280 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/st,stmfts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/st,stmfts.txt @@ -10,8 +10,6 @@ coordinates. Required properties: - compatible : must be "st,stmfts" - reg : I2C slave address, (e.g. 0x49) -- interrupt-parent : the phandle to the interrupt controller which provides - the interrupt - interrupts : interrupt specification - avdd-supply : analogic power supply - vdd-supply : power supply diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt index 5aaa6b3aa90c..4886c4aa2906 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/sx8654.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "semtech,sx8654" - reg: i2c slave address -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: touch controller interrupt Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/touchscreen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/touchscreen.txt index 537643e86f61..d092d5d033a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/touchscreen.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/touchscreen.txt @@ -7,6 +7,9 @@ Optional properties for Touchscreens: (in pixels) - touchscreen-max-pressure : maximum reported pressure (arbitrary range dependent on the controller) + - touchscreen-min-pressure : minimum pressure on the touchscreen to be + achieved in order for the touchscreen + driver to report a touch event. - touchscreen-fuzz-x : horizontal noise value of the absolute input device (in pixels) - touchscreen-fuzz-y : vertical noise value of the absolute input diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/tsc2007.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/tsc2007.txt index ec365e172236..ed00f61b8c08 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/tsc2007.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/tsc2007.txt @@ -9,8 +9,6 @@ Optional properties: - gpios: the interrupt gpio the chip is connected to (trough the penirq pin). The penirq pin goes to low when the panel is touched. (see GPIO binding[1] for more details). -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the gpio controller - (see interrupt binding[0]). - interrupts: (gpio) interrupt to which the chip is connected (see interrupt binding[0]). - ti,max-rt: maximum pressure. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/zet6223.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/zet6223.txt index fe6a1feef703..27d55a506f18 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/zet6223.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/input/touchscreen/zet6223.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Zeitec ZET6223 I2C touchscreen controller Required properties: - compatible : "zeitec,zet6223" - reg : I2C slave address of the chip (0x76) -- interrupt-parent : a phandle pointing to the interrupt controller - serving the interrupt for this chip - interrupts : interrupt specification for the zet6223 interrupt Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/abilis,tb10x-ictl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/abilis,tb10x-ictl.txt index 9d52d5afe3e9..5a4dd263fc12 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/abilis,tb10x-ictl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/abilis,tb10x-ictl.txt @@ -13,7 +13,6 @@ Required properties - interrupt-congroller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt cells: Specifies the number of cells used to encode an interrupt source connected to this controller. The value shall be 2. -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Specifies the list of interrupt lines which are handled by the interrupt controller in the parent controller's notation. Interrupts are mapped one-to-one to parent interrupts. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/al,alpine-msix.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/al,alpine-msix.txt index f6f1c14bf99b..5669764f9cc9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/al,alpine-msix.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/al,alpine-msix.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: should be "al,alpine-msix" - reg: physical base address and size of the registers -- interrupt-parent: specifies the parent interrupt controller. - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - msi-controller: identifies the node as an PCI Message Signaled Interrupt controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sunxi-nmi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sunxi-nmi.txt index 4903fb72d883..24beadf7ba83 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sunxi-nmi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/allwinner,sunxi-nmi.txt @@ -13,7 +13,6 @@ Required properties: - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value shall be 2. The first cell is the IRQ number, the second cell the trigger type as defined in interrupt.txt in this directory. -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Specifies the interrupt line (NMI) which is handled by the interrupt controller in the parent controller's notation. This value shall be the NMI. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/amlogic,meson-gpio-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/amlogic,meson-gpio-intc.txt index 89674ad8a097..1502a51548bb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/amlogic,meson-gpio-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/amlogic,meson-gpio-intc.txt @@ -15,9 +15,6 @@ Required properties: "amlogic,meson-gxbb-gpio-intc" for GXBB SoCs (S905) or "amlogic,meson-gxl-gpio-intc" for GXL SoCs (S905X, S912) "amlogic,meson-axg-gpio-intc" for AXG SoCs (A113D, A113X) -- interrupt-parent : a phandle to the GIC the interrupts are routed to. - Usually this is provided at the root level of the device tree as it is - common to most of the SoC. - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/atmel,aic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/atmel,aic.txt index 0e9f09a6a2fe..f4c5d34c4111 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/atmel,aic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/atmel,aic.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-aic" <chip> can be "at91rm9200", "sama5d2", "sama5d3" or "sama5d4" - interrupt-controller: Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. -- interrupt-parent: For single AIC system, it is an empty property. - #interrupt-cells: The number of cells to define the interrupts. It should be 3. The first cell is the IRQ number (aka "Peripheral IDentifier" on datasheet). The second cell is used to specify flags: @@ -27,7 +26,6 @@ Examples: aic: interrupt-controller@fffff000 { compatible = "atmel,at91rm9200-aic"; interrupt-controller; - interrupt-parent; #interrupt-cells = <3>; reg = <0xfffff000 0x200>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt index 6428a6ba9f4a..0f1af5a1c12e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt @@ -26,8 +26,6 @@ Required properties: are 0..7 for bank 0, and 0..31 for bank 1. Additional required properties for brcm,bcm2836-armctrl-ic: -- interrupt-parent : Specifies the parent interrupt controller when this - controller is the second level. - interrupts : Specifies the interrupt on the parent for this interrupt controller to handle. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm3380-l2-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm3380-l2-intc.txt index 8f48aad50868..37aea40d5430 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm3380-l2-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm3380-l2-intc.txt @@ -18,8 +18,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source, should be 1. -- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller - this one is cascaded from - interrupts: specifies the interrupt line in the interrupt-parent controller node, valid values depend on the type of parent interrupt controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm6345-l1-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm6345-l1-intc.txt index 4040905388d9..2bc19b1ac877 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm6345-l1-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm6345-l1-intc.txt @@ -29,8 +29,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source, should be 1. -- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller(s) - this one is cascaded from - interrupts: specifies the interrupt line(s) in the interrupt-parent controller node; valid values depend on the type of parent interrupt controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7038-l1-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7038-l1-intc.txt index cc217b22dccd..2117d4ac1ae5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7038-l1-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7038-l1-intc.txt @@ -28,8 +28,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source, should be 1. -- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller(s) - this one is cascaded from - interrupts: specifies the interrupt line(s) in the interrupt-parent controller node; valid values depend on the type of parent interrupt controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc.txt index 44a9bb15dd56..addd86b6ca2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc.txt @@ -56,8 +56,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source, should be 1. -- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller - this one is cascaded from - interrupts: specifies the interrupt line(s) in the interrupt-parent controller node, valid values depend on the type of parent interrupt controller - brcm,int-map-mask: 32-bits bit mask describing how many and which interrupts diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,l2-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,l2-intc.txt index 36df06c5c567..d514ec060a4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,l2-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,l2-intc.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. Should be 1. -- interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller - this controller is cacaded from - interrupts: specifies the interrupt line in the interrupt-parent irq space to be used for cascading diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,ls-scfg-msi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,ls-scfg-msi.txt index a4ff93d6b7f3..454ce04d6787 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,ls-scfg-msi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,ls-scfg-msi.txt @@ -13,9 +13,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped. - interrupts: an interrupt to the parent interrupt controller. -Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: the phandle to the parent interrupt controller. - This interrupt controller hardware is a second level interrupt controller that is hooked to a parent interrupt controller: e.g: ARM GIC for ARM-based platforms. If interrupt-parent is not provided, the default parent interrupt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/hisilicon,mbigen-v2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/hisilicon,mbigen-v2.txt index 3b2f4c43ad8d..a6813a071f15 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/hisilicon,mbigen-v2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/hisilicon,mbigen-v2.txt @@ -68,8 +68,6 @@ Examples: Devices connect to mbigen required properties: ---------------------------------------------------- --interrupt-parent: Specifies the mbigen device node which device connected. - -interrupts:Specifies the interrupt source. For the specific information of each cell in this property,please refer to the "interrupt-cells" description mentioned above. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ingenic,intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ingenic,intc.txt index 5f89fb635a1b..d4373d0f7121 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ingenic,intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ingenic,intc.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should be "ingenic,<socname>-intc". Valid strings are: ingenic,jz4740-intc + ingenic,jz4725b-intc ingenic,jz4770-intc ingenic,jz4775-intc ingenic,jz4780-intc @@ -11,7 +12,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value shall be 1. -- interrupt-parent : phandle of the CPU interrupt controller. - interrupts : Specifies the CPU interrupt the controller is connected to. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,odmi-controller.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,odmi-controller.txt index 3f6442c7f867..930fb462fd9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,odmi-controller.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/marvell,odmi-controller.txt @@ -26,8 +26,6 @@ Required properties: See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/arm,gic.txt for details about the GIC Device Tree binding. -- interrupt-parent : Reference to the parent interrupt controller. - Example: odmi: odmi@300000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,cirq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,cirq.txt index a7efdbc3de5b..5865f4f2c69d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,cirq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,cirq.txt @@ -16,8 +16,6 @@ Required properties: and "mediatek,cirq" as a fallback. - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : Use the same format as specified by GIC in arm,gic.txt. -- interrupt-parent: phandle of irq parent for cirq. The parent must - use the same interrupt-cells format as GIC. - reg: Physical base address of the cirq registers and length of memory mapped region. - mediatek,ext-irq-range: Identifies external irq number range in different diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt index 07bf0b9a5139..33a98eb44949 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mediatek,sysirq.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required properties: "mediatek,mt7622-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT7622 "mediatek,mt6795-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6795 "mediatek,mt6797-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6797 + "mediatek,mt6765-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6765 "mediatek,mt6755-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6755 "mediatek,mt6592-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6592 "mediatek,mt6589-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT6589 @@ -21,8 +22,6 @@ Required properties: "mediatek,mt2701-sysirq", "mediatek,mt6577-sysirq": for MT2701 - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : Use the same format as specified by GIC in arm,gic.txt. -- interrupt-parent: phandle of irq parent for sysirq. The parent must - use the same interrupt-cells format as GIC. - reg: Physical base address of the intpol registers and length of memory mapped region. Could be multiple bases here. Ex: mt6797 needs 2 reg, others need 1. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mscc,ocelot-icpu-intr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mscc,ocelot-icpu-intr.txt index b47a8a02b17b..f5baeccb689f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mscc,ocelot-icpu-intr.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mscc,ocelot-icpu-intr.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value shall be 1. -- interrupt-parent : phandle of the CPU interrupt controller. - interrupts : Specifies the CPU interrupt the controller is connected to. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/nvidia,tegra20-ictlr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/nvidia,tegra20-ictlr.txt index 1099fe0788fa..2ff356640100 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/nvidia,tegra20-ictlr.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/nvidia,tegra20-ictlr.txt @@ -15,12 +15,10 @@ Required properties: include "nvidia,tegra30-ictlr". - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. Each controller must be described separately (Tegra20 has 4 of them, - whereas Tegra30 and later have 5" + whereas Tegra30 and later have 5). - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value must be 3. -- interrupt-parent : a phandle to the GIC these interrupts are routed - to. Notes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/nxp,lpc3220-mic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/nxp,lpc3220-mic.txt index 38211f344dc8..0bfb3ba55f4c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/nxp,lpc3220-mic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/nxp,lpc3220-mic.txt @@ -14,8 +14,6 @@ Required properties: Reset value is IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: empty for MIC interrupt controller, link to parent - MIC interrupt controller for SIC1 and SIC2 - interrupts: empty for MIC interrupt controller, cascaded MIC hardware interrupts for SIC1 and SIC2 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qca,ath79-misc-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qca,ath79-misc-intc.txt index 475ae9bd562b..ad70006c1848 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qca,ath79-misc-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qca,ath79-misc-intc.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required Properties: - compatible: has to be "qca,<soctype>-cpu-intc", "qca,ar7100-misc-intc" or "qca,<soctype>-cpu-intc", "qca,ar7240-misc-intc" - reg: Base address and size of the controllers memory area -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode interrupt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qcom,pdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qcom,pdc.txt index 0b2c97ddb520..8e0797cb1487 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qcom,pdc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/qcom,pdc.txt @@ -35,12 +35,6 @@ Properties: interrupt. The second element is the trigger type. -- interrupt-parent: - Usage: required - Value type: <phandle> - Definition: Specifies the interrupt parent necessary for hierarchical - domain to operate. - - interrupt-controller: Usage: required Value type: <bool> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt index 20f121daa910..697ca2f26d1b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/renesas,irqc.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,irqc-r8a73a4" (R-Mobile APE6) - "renesas,irqc-r8a7743" (RZ/G1M) - "renesas,irqc-r8a7745" (RZ/G1E) + - "renesas,irqc-r8a77470" (RZ/G1C) - "renesas,irqc-r8a7790" (R-Car H2) - "renesas,irqc-r8a7791" (R-Car M2-W) - "renesas,irqc-r8a7792" (R-Car V2H) @@ -16,6 +17,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a7796" (R-Car M3-W) - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a77965" (R-Car M3-N) - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a77970" (R-Car V3M) + - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a77980" (R-Car V3H) - "renesas,intc-ex-r8a77995" (R-Car D3) - #interrupt-cells: has to be <2>: an interrupt index and flags, as defined in interrupts.txt in this directory diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/riscv,cpu-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/riscv,cpu-intc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b0a8af51c388 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/riscv,cpu-intc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +RISC-V Hart-Level Interrupt Controller (HLIC) +--------------------------------------------- + +RISC-V cores include Control Status Registers (CSRs) which are local to each +CPU core (HART in RISC-V terminology) and can be read or written by software. +Some of these CSRs are used to control local interrupts connected to the core. +Every interrupt is ultimately routed through a hart's HLIC before it +interrupts that hart. + +The RISC-V supervisor ISA manual specifies three interrupt sources that are +attached to every HLIC: software interrupts, the timer interrupt, and external +interrupts. Software interrupts are used to send IPIs between cores. The +timer interrupt comes from an architecturally mandated real-time timer that is +controller via Supervisor Binary Interface (SBI) calls and CSR reads. External +interrupts connect all other device interrupts to the HLIC, which are routed +via the platform-level interrupt controller (PLIC). + +All RISC-V systems that conform to the supervisor ISA specification are +required to have a HLIC with these three interrupt sources present. Since the +interrupt map is defined by the ISA it's not listed in the HLIC's device tree +entry, though external interrupt controllers (like the PLIC, for example) will +need to define how their interrupts map to the relevant HLICs. This means +a PLIC interrupt property will typically list the HLICs for all present HARTs +in the system. + +Required properties: +- compatible : "riscv,cpu-intc" +- #interrupt-cells : should be <1> +- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller + +Furthermore, this interrupt-controller MUST be embedded inside the cpu +definition of the hart whose CSRs control these local interrupts. + +An example device tree entry for a HLIC is show below. + + cpu1: cpu@1 { + compatible = "riscv"; + ... + cpu1-intc: interrupt-controller { + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + compatible = "riscv,cpu-intc", "sifive,fu540-c000-cpu-intc"; + interrupt-controller; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/samsung,exynos4210-combiner.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/samsung,exynos4210-combiner.txt index 9e5f73412cd7..19af687858a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/samsung,exynos4210-combiner.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/samsung,exynos4210-combiner.txt @@ -32,8 +32,6 @@ Optional properties: - samsung,combiner-nr: The number of interrupt combiners supported. If this property is not specified, the default number of combiners is assumed to be 16. -- interrupt-parent: pHandle of the parent interrupt controller, if not - inherited from the parent node. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sifive,plic-1.0.0.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sifive,plic-1.0.0.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6adf7a6e8825 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sifive,plic-1.0.0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +SiFive Platform-Level Interrupt Controller (PLIC) +------------------------------------------------- + +SiFive SOCs include an implementation of the Platform-Level Interrupt Controller +(PLIC) high-level specification in the RISC-V Privileged Architecture +specification. The PLIC connects all external interrupts in the system to all +hart contexts in the system, via the external interrupt source in each hart. + +A hart context is a privilege mode in a hardware execution thread. For example, +in an 4 core system with 2-way SMT, you have 8 harts and probably at least two +privilege modes per hart; machine mode and supervisor mode. + +Each interrupt can be enabled on per-context basis. Any context can claim +a pending enabled interrupt and then release it once it has been handled. + +Each interrupt has a configurable priority. Higher priority interrupts are +serviced first. Each context can specify a priority threshold. Interrupts +with priority below this threshold will not cause the PLIC to raise its +interrupt line leading to the context. + +While the PLIC supports both edge-triggered and level-triggered interrupts, +interrupt handlers are oblivious to this distinction and therefore it is not +specified in the PLIC device-tree binding. + +While the RISC-V ISA doesn't specify a memory layout for the PLIC, the +"sifive,plic-1.0.0" device is a concrete implementation of the PLIC that +contains a specific memory layout, which is documented in chapter 8 of the +SiFive U5 Coreplex Series Manual <https://static.dev.sifive.com/U54-MC-RVCoreIP.pdf>. + +Required properties: +- compatible : "sifive,plic-1.0.0" and a string identifying the actual + detailed implementation in case that specific bugs need to be worked around. +- #address-cells : should be <0> or more. +- #interrupt-cells : should be <1> or more. +- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. +- reg : Should contain 1 register range (address and length). +- interrupts-extended : Specifies which contexts are connected to the PLIC, + with "-1" specifying that a context is not present. Each node pointed + to should be a riscv,cpu-intc node, which has a riscv node as parent. +- riscv,ndev: Specifies how many external interrupts are supported by + this controller. + +Example: + + plic: interrupt-controller@c000000 { + #address-cells = <0>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + compatible = "sifive,plic-1.0.0", "sifive,fu540-c000-plic"; + interrupt-controller; + interrupts-extended = < + &cpu0-intc 11 + &cpu1-intc 11 &cpu1-intc 9 + &cpu2-intc 11 &cpu2-intc 9 + &cpu3-intc 11 &cpu3-intc 9 + &cpu4-intc 11 &cpu4-intc 9>; + reg = <0xc000000 0x4000000>; + riscv,ndev = <10>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sigma,smp8642-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sigma,smp8642-intc.txt index 1f441fa0ad40..355c18a3a4d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sigma,smp8642-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/sigma,smp8642-intc.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: should be "sigma,smp8642-intc" - reg: physical address of MMIO region - ranges: address space mapping of child nodes -- interrupt-parent: phandle of parent interrupt controller - interrupt-controller: boolean - #address-cells: should be <1> - #size-cells: should be <1> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/snps,archs-idu-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/snps,archs-idu-intc.txt index 8b46a34e05f1..09fc02b99845 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/snps,archs-idu-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/snps,archs-idu-intc.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Properties: - compatible: "snps,archs-idu-intc" - interrupt-controller: This is an interrupt controller. -- interrupt-parent: <reference to parent core intc> - #interrupt-cells: Must be <1>. Value of the cell specifies the "common" IRQ from peripheral to IDU. Number N diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/snps,dw-apb-ictl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/snps,dw-apb-ictl.txt index 492911744ca3..086ff08322db 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/snps,dw-apb-ictl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/snps,dw-apb-ictl.txt @@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells: number of cells to encode an interrupt-specifier, shall be 1 - interrupts: interrupt reference to primary interrupt controller -- interrupt-parent: (optional) reference specific primary interrupt controller The interrupt sources map to the corresponding bits in the interrupt registers, i.e. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/socionext,synquacer-exiu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/socionext,synquacer-exiu.txt index 8b2faefe29ca..dac0846fe789 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/socionext,synquacer-exiu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/socionext,synquacer-exiu.txt @@ -12,7 +12,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value must be 3. -- interrupt-parent : phandle of the GIC these interrupts are routed to. - socionext,spi-base : The SPI number of the first SPI of the 32 adjacent ones the EXIU forwards its interrups to. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/st,spear3xx-shirq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/st,spear3xx-shirq.txt index 2ab0ea39867b..a407c499b3cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/st,spear3xx-shirq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/st,spear3xx-shirq.txt @@ -31,10 +31,6 @@ Required properties: parent) is equal to number of groups. The format of the interrupt specifier depends in the interrupt parent controller. - Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: pHandle of the parent interrupt controller, if not - inherited from the parent node. - Example: The following is an example from the SPEAr320 SoC dtsi file. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/st,stm32-exti.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/st,stm32-exti.txt index 136bd612bd83..6a36bf66d932 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/st,stm32-exti.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/st,stm32-exti.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Required properties: specifier, shall be 2 - interrupts: interrupts references to primary interrupt controller (only needed for exti controller with multiple exti under - same parent interrupt: st,stm32-exti and st,stm32h7-exti") + same parent interrupt: st,stm32-exti and st,stm32h7-exti) Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/technologic,ts4800.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/technologic,ts4800.txt index 7f15f1b0325b..341ae5909333 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/technologic,ts4800.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/technologic,ts4800.txt @@ -11,6 +11,4 @@ Required properties: region - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source, should be 1. -- interrupt-parent: phandle to the parent interrupt controller this one is - cascaded from - interrupts: specifies the interrupt line in the interrupt-parent controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,c64x+megamod-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,c64x+megamod-pic.txt index 42bb796cc4ad..ee3f9c351501 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,c64x+megamod-pic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,c64x+megamod-pic.txt @@ -46,7 +46,6 @@ C6X Interrupt Chips - interrupt-controller - #interrupt-cells: <1> - reg: base address and size of register area - - interrupt-parent: must be core interrupt controller - interrupts: This should have four cells; one for each interrupt combiner. The cells contain the core priority interrupt to which the corresponding combiner output is wired. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,omap4-wugen-mpu b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,omap4-wugen-mpu index 18d4f407bf0e..422d6908f8b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,omap4-wugen-mpu +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,omap4-wugen-mpu @@ -12,8 +12,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value must be 3. -- interrupt-parent : a phandle to the GIC these interrupts are routed - to. Notes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/mediatek,iommu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/mediatek,iommu.txt index 53c20cae309f..df5db732138d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/mediatek,iommu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/mediatek,iommu.txt @@ -40,6 +40,7 @@ video decode local arbiter, all these ports are according to the video HW. Required properties: - compatible : must be one of the following string: "mediatek,mt2701-m4u" for mt2701 which uses generation one m4u HW. + "mediatek,mt2712-m4u" for mt2712 which uses generation two m4u HW. "mediatek,mt8173-m4u" for mt8173 which uses generation two m4u HW. - reg : m4u register base and size. - interrupts : the interrupt of m4u. @@ -50,8 +51,9 @@ Required properties: according to the local arbiter index, like larb0, larb1, larb2... - iommu-cells : must be 1. This is the mtk_m4u_id according to the HW. Specifies the mtk_m4u_id as defined in - dt-binding/memory/mt2701-larb-port.h for mt2701 and - dt-binding/memory/mt8173-larb-port.h for mt8173 + dt-binding/memory/mt2701-larb-port.h for mt2701, + dt-binding/memory/mt2712-larb-port.h for mt2712, and + dt-binding/memory/mt8173-larb-port.h for mt8173. Example: iommu: iommu@10205000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/samsung,sysmmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/samsung,sysmmu.txt index b1682c80b490..525ec82615a6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/samsung,sysmmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/samsung,sysmmu.txt @@ -31,7 +31,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "samsung,exynos-sysmmu" - reg: A tuple of base address and size of System MMU registers. - #iommu-cells: Should be <0>. -- interrupt-parent: The phandle of the interrupt controller of System MMU - interrupts: An interrupt specifier for interrupt signal of System MMU, according to the format defined by a particular interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt index 310810906613..64fa2fbd98c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/backlight/pwm-backlight.txt @@ -3,13 +3,6 @@ pwm-backlight bindings Required properties: - compatible: "pwm-backlight" - pwms: OF device-tree PWM specification (see PWM binding[0]) - - brightness-levels: Array of distinct brightness levels. Typically these - are in the range from 0 to 255, but any range starting at 0 will do. - The actual brightness level (PWM duty cycle) will be interpolated - from these values. 0 means a 0% duty cycle (darkest/off), while the - last value in the array represents a 100% duty cycle (brightest). - - default-brightness-level: the default brightness level (index into the - array defined by the "brightness-levels" property) - power-supply: regulator for supply voltage Optional properties: @@ -21,6 +14,19 @@ Optional properties: and enabling the backlight using GPIO. - pwm-off-delay-ms: Delay in ms between disabling the backlight using GPIO and setting PWM value to 0. + - brightness-levels: Array of distinct brightness levels. Typically these + are in the range from 0 to 255, but any range starting at + 0 will do. The actual brightness level (PWM duty cycle) + will be interpolated from these values. 0 means a 0% duty + cycle (darkest/off), while the last value in the array + represents a 100% duty cycle (brightest). + - default-brightness-level: The default brightness level (index into the + array defined by the "brightness-levels" property). + - num-interpolated-steps: Number of interpolated steps between each value + of brightness-levels table. This way a high + resolution pwm duty cycle can be used without + having to list out every possible value in the + brightness-level array. [0]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt [1]: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt @@ -39,3 +45,17 @@ Example: post-pwm-on-delay-ms = <10>; pwm-off-delay-ms = <10>; }; + +Example using num-interpolation-steps: + + backlight { + compatible = "pwm-backlight"; + pwms = <&pwm 0 5000000>; + + brightness-levels = <0 2048 4096 8192 16384 65535>; + num-interpolated-steps = <2048>; + default-brightness-level = <4096>; + + power-supply = <&vdd_bl_reg>; + enable-gpios = <&gpio 58 0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt index 1d4afe9644b6..aa1399814a2a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Optional properties for child nodes: "backlight" - LED will act as a back-light, controlled by the framebuffer system "default-on" - LED will turn on (but for leds-gpio see "default-state" - property in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/led.txt) + property in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-gpio.txt) "heartbeat" - LED "double" flashes at a load average based rate "disk-activity" - LED indicates disk activity "ide-disk" - LED indicates IDE disk activity (deprecated), diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm3692x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm3692x.txt index 6c9074f84a51..08b352840bd7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm3692x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lm3692x.txt @@ -20,7 +20,10 @@ Optional properties: - vled-supply : LED supply Required child properties: - - reg : 0 + - reg : 0 - Will enable all LED sync paths + 1 - Will enable the LED1 sync + 2 - Will enable the LED2 sync + 3 - Will enable the LED3 sync (LM36923 only) Optional child properties: - label : see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lt3593.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lt3593.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6b2cabc36c0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/leds-lt3593.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +Bindings for Linear Technologies LT3593 LED controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "lltc,lt3593". +- lltc,ctrl-gpios: A handle to the GPIO that is connected to the 'CTRL' + pin of the chip. + +The hardware supports only one LED. The properties of this LED are +configured in a sub-node in the device node. + +Optional sub-node properties: +- label: A label for the LED. If none is given, the LED will be + named "lt3595::". +- linux,default-trigger: The default trigger for the LED. + See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt +- default-state: The initial state of the LED. + See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/leds/common.txt + +If multiple chips of this type are found in a design, each one needs to +be handled by its own device node. + +Example: + +led-controller { + compatible = "lltc,lt3593"; + lltc,ctrl-gpios = <&gpio 0 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + + led { + label = "white:backlight"; + default-state = "on"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/altera-mailbox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/altera-mailbox.txt index 49cfc8c337c4..c4dd93f1fed2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/altera-mailbox.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/altera-mailbox.txt @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Required properties: of cells required for the mailbox specifier. Should be 1. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle. - interrupts : interrupt number. The interrupt specifier format depends on the interrupt controller parent. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/fsl,mu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/fsl,mu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f3cf77eb5ab4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/fsl,mu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +NXP i.MX Messaging Unit (MU) +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +The Messaging Unit module enables two processors within the SoC to +communicate and coordinate by passing messages (e.g. data, status +and control) through the MU interface. The MU also provides the ability +for one processor to signal the other processor using interrupts. + +Because the MU manages the messaging between processors, the MU uses +different clocks (from each side of the different peripheral buses). +Therefore, the MU must synchronize the accesses from one side to the +other. The MU accomplishes synchronization using two sets of matching +registers (Processor A-facing, Processor B-facing). + +Messaging Unit Device Node: +============================= + +Required properties: +------------------- +- compatible : should be "fsl,<chip>-mu", the supported chips include + imx6sx, imx7s, imx8qxp, imx8qm. + The "fsl,imx6sx-mu" compatible is seen as generic and should + be included together with SoC specific compatible. +- reg : Should contain the registers location and length +- interrupts : Interrupt number. The interrupt specifier format depends + on the interrupt controller parent. +- #mbox-cells: Must be 2. + <&phandle type channel> + phandle : Label name of controller + type : Channel type + channel : Channel number + + This MU support 4 type of unidirectional channels, each type + has 4 channels. A total of 16 channels. Following types are + supported: + 0 - TX channel with 32bit transmit register and IRQ transmit + acknowledgment support. + 1 - RX channel with 32bit receive register and IRQ support + 2 - TX doorbell channel. Without own register and no ACK support. + 3 - RX doorbell channel. + +Optional properties: +------------------- +- clocks : phandle to the input clock. +- fsl,mu-side-b : Should be set for side B MU. + +Examples: +-------- +lsio_mu0: mailbox@5d1b0000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx8qxp-mu"; + reg = <0x0 0x5d1b0000 0x0 0x10000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 176 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + #mbox-cells = <2>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/mtk-gce.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/mtk-gce.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7d72b21c9e94 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/mtk-gce.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +MediaTek GCE +=============== + +The Global Command Engine (GCE) is used to help read/write registers with +critical time limitation, such as updating display configuration during the +vblank. The GCE can be used to implement the Command Queue (CMDQ) driver. + +CMDQ driver uses mailbox framework for communication. Please refer to +mailbox.txt for generic information about mailbox device-tree bindings. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be "mediatek,mt8173-gce" +- reg: Address range of the GCE unit +- interrupts: The interrupt signal from the GCE block +- clock: Clocks according to the common clock binding +- clock-names: Must be "gce" to stand for GCE clock +- #mbox-cells: Should be 3. + <&phandle channel priority atomic_exec> + phandle: Label name of a gce node. + channel: Channel of mailbox. Be equal to the thread id of GCE. + priority: Priority of GCE thread. + atomic_exec: GCE processing continuous packets of commands in atomic + way. + +Required properties for a client device: +- mboxes: Client use mailbox to communicate with GCE, it should have this + property and list of phandle, mailbox specifiers. +- mediatek,gce-subsys: u32, specify the sub-system id which is corresponding + to the register address. + +Some vaules of properties are defined in 'dt-bindings/gce/mt8173-gce.h'. Such as +sub-system ids, thread priority, event ids. + +Example: + + gce: gce@10212000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-gce"; + reg = <0 0x10212000 0 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 135 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + clocks = <&infracfg CLK_INFRA_GCE>; + clock-names = "gce"; + thread-num = CMDQ_THR_MAX_COUNT; + #mbox-cells = <3>; + }; + +Example for a client device: + + mmsys: clock-controller@14000000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt8173-mmsys"; + mboxes = <&gce 0 CMDQ_THR_PRIO_LOWEST 1>, + <&gce 1 CMDQ_THR_PRIO_LOWEST 1>; + mediatek,gce-subsys = <SUBSYS_1400XXXX>; + mutex-event-eof = <CMDQ_EVENT_MUTEX0_STREAM_EOF + CMDQ_EVENT_MUTEX1_STREAM_EOF>; + + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/ti,secure-proxy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/ti,secure-proxy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6c9c7daf0f5c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/ti,secure-proxy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +Texas Instruments' Secure Proxy +======================================== + +The Texas Instruments' secure proxy is a mailbox controller that has +configurable queues selectable at SoC(System on Chip) integration. The +Message manager is broken up into different address regions that are +called "threads" or "proxies" - each instance is unidirectional and is +instantiated at SoC integration level by system controller to indicate +receive or transmit path. + +Message Manager Device Node: +=========================== +Required properties: +-------------------- +- compatible: Shall be "ti,am654-secure-proxy" +- reg-names target_data - Map the proxy data region + rt - Map the realtime status region + scfg - Map the configuration region +- reg: Contains the register map per reg-names. +- #mbox-cells Shall be 1 and shall refer to the transfer path + called thread. +- interrupt-names: Contains interrupt names matching the rx transfer path + for a given SoC. Receive interrupts shall be of the + format: "rx_<PID>". +- interrupts: Contains the interrupt information corresponding to + interrupt-names property. + +Example(AM654): +------------ + + secure_proxy: mailbox@32c00000 { + compatible = "ti,am654-secure-proxy"; + #mbox-cells = <1>; + reg-names = "target_data", "rt", "scfg"; + reg = <0x0 0x32c00000 0x0 0x100000>, + <0x0 0x32400000 0x0 0x100000>, + <0x0 0x32800000 0x0 0x100000>; + interrupt-names = "rx_011"; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 32 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + }; + + dmsc: dmsc { + [...] + mbox-names = "rx", "tx"; + # RX Thread ID is 11 + # TX Thread ID is 13 + mboxes= <&secure_proxy 11>, + <&secure_proxy 13>; + [...] + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/cec-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/cec-gpio.txt index 12fcd55ed153..47e8d73d32a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/cec-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/cec-gpio.txt @@ -4,8 +4,8 @@ The HDMI CEC GPIO module supports CEC implementations where the CEC line is hooked up to a pull-up GPIO line and - optionally - the HPD line is hooked up to another GPIO line. -Please note: the maximum voltage for the CEC line is 3.63V, for the HPD -line it is 5.3V. So you may need some sort of level conversion circuitry +Please note: the maximum voltage for the CEC line is 3.63V, for the HPD and +5V lines it is 5.3V. So you may need some sort of level conversion circuitry when connecting them to a GPIO line. Required properties: @@ -19,18 +19,24 @@ following property is also required: - hdmi-phandle - phandle to the HDMI controller, see also cec.txt. If the CEC line is not associated with an HDMI receiver/transmitter, then -the following property is optional: +the following property is optional and can be used for debugging HPD changes: - hpd-gpios: gpio that the HPD line is connected to. +This property is optional and can be used for debugging changes on the 5V line: + + - v5-gpios: gpio that the 5V line is connected to. + Example for the Raspberry Pi 3 where the CEC line is connected to -pin 26 aka BCM7 aka CE1 on the GPIO pin header and the HPD line is -connected to pin 11 aka BCM17 (some level shifter is needed for this!): +pin 26 aka BCM7 aka CE1 on the GPIO pin header, the HPD line is +connected to pin 11 aka BCM17 and the 5V line is connected to pin +15 aka BCM22 (some level shifter is needed for the HPD and 5V lines!): #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> cec-gpio { - compatible = "cec-gpio"; - cec-gpios = <&gpio 7 (GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH|GPIO_OPEN_DRAIN)>; - hpd-gpios = <&gpio 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + compatible = "cec-gpio"; + cec-gpios = <&gpio 7 (GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH|GPIO_OPEN_DRAIN)>; + hpd-gpios = <&gpio 17 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + v5-gpios = <&gpio 22 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ak7375.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ak7375.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aa3e24b41241 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ak7375.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +Asahi Kasei Microdevices AK7375 voice coil lens driver + +AK7375 is a camera voice coil lens. + +Mandatory properties: + +- compatible: "asahi-kasei,ak7375" +- reg: I2C slave address diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/aptina,mt9v111.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/aptina,mt9v111.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bd896e9f67d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/aptina,mt9v111.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +* Aptina MT9V111 CMOS sensor +---------------------------- + +The Aptina MT9V111 is a 1/4-Inch VGA-format digital image sensor with a core +based on Aptina MT9V011 sensor and an integrated Image Flow Processor (IFP). + +The sensor has an active pixel array of 640x480 pixels and can output a number +of image resolution and formats controllable through a simple two-wires +interface. + +Required properties: +-------------------- + +- compatible: shall be "aptina,mt9v111". +- clocks: reference to the system clock input provider. + +Optional properties: +-------------------- + +- enable-gpios: output enable signal, pin name "OE#". Active low. +- standby-gpios: low power state control signal, pin name "STANDBY". + Active high. +- reset-gpios: chip reset signal, pin name "RESET#". Active low. + +The device node must contain one 'port' child node with one 'endpoint' child +sub-node for its digital output video port, in accordance with the video +interface bindings defined in: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt + +Example: +-------- + + &i2c1 { + camera@48 { + compatible = "aptina,mt9v111"; + reg = <0x48>; + + clocks = <&camera_clk>; + + port { + mt9v111_out: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&ceu_in>; + }; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/dongwoon,dw9807.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/dongwoon,dw9807.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c4701f1eaaf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/dongwoon,dw9807.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +Dongwoon Anatech DW9807 voice coil lens driver + +DW9807 is a 10-bit DAC with current sink capability. It is intended for +controlling voice coil lenses. + +Mandatory properties: + +- compatible: "dongwoon,dw9807-vcm" +- reg: I2C slave address diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/nokia,smia.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/nokia,smia.txt index 33f10a94c381..8ee7c7972ac7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/nokia,smia.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/nokia,smia.txt @@ -29,6 +29,9 @@ Optional properties - reset-gpios: XSHUTDOWN GPIO - flash-leds: See ../video-interfaces.txt - lens-focus: See ../video-interfaces.txt +- rotation: Integer property; valid values are 0 (sensor mounted upright) + and 180 (sensor mounted upside down). See + ../video-interfaces.txt . Endpoint node mandatory properties diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov2680.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov2680.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..11e925ed9dad --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov2680.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +* Omnivision OV2680 MIPI CSI-2 sensor + +Required Properties: +- compatible: should be "ovti,ov2680". +- clocks: reference to the xvclk input clock. +- clock-names: should be "xvclk". +- DOVDD-supply: Digital I/O voltage supply. +- DVDD-supply: Digital core voltage supply. +- AVDD-supply: Analog voltage supply. + +Optional Properties: +- reset-gpios: reference to the GPIO connected to the powerdown/reset pin, + if any. This is an active low signal to the OV2680. + +The device node must contain one 'port' child node for its digital output +video port, and this port must have a single endpoint in accordance with + the video interface bindings defined in +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt. + +Endpoint node required properties for CSI-2 connection are: +- remote-endpoint: a phandle to the bus receiver's endpoint node. +- clock-lanes: should be set to <0> (clock lane on hardware lane 0). +- data-lanes: should be set to <1> (one CSI-2 lane supported). + +Example: + +&i2c2 { + ov2680: camera-sensor@36 { + compatible = "ovti,ov2680"; + reg = <0x36>; + clocks = <&osc>; + clock-names = "xvclk"; + reset-gpios = <&gpio1 3 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + DOVDD-supply = <&sw2_reg>; + DVDD-supply = <&sw2_reg>; + AVDD-supply = <®_peri_3p15v>; + + port { + ov2680_to_mipi: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&mipi_from_sensor>; + clock-lanes = <0>; + data-lanes = <1>; + }; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5640.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5640.txt index 8e36da0d8406..c97c2f2da12d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5640.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/ov5640.txt @@ -13,6 +13,10 @@ Optional Properties: This is an active low signal to the OV5640. - powerdown-gpios: reference to the GPIO connected to the powerdown pin, if any. This is an active high signal to the OV5640. +- rotation: as defined in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt, + valid values are 0 (sensor mounted upright) and 180 (sensor + mounted upside down). The device node must contain one 'port' child node for its digital output video port, in accordance with the video interface bindings defined in @@ -51,6 +55,7 @@ Examples: DVDD-supply = <&vgen2_reg>; /* 1.5v */ powerdown-gpios = <&gpio1 19 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; reset-gpios = <&gpio1 20 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + rotation = <180>; port { /* MIPI CSI-2 bus endpoint */ diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tc358743.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tc358743.txt index 49f8bcc2ea4d..59102edcf01e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tc358743.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/i2c/tc358743.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ Required Properties: Optional Properties: - reset-gpios: gpio phandle GPIO connected to the reset pin -- interrupts, interrupt-parent: GPIO connected to the interrupt pin +- interrupts: GPIO connected to the interrupt pin - data-lanes: should be <1 2 3 4> for four-lane operation, or <1 2> for two-lane operation - clock-lanes: should be <0> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/nvidia,tegra-vde.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/nvidia,tegra-vde.txt index 470237ed6fe5..7302e949e662 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/nvidia,tegra-vde.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/nvidia,tegra-vde.txt @@ -27,9 +27,15 @@ Required properties: - sxe - clocks : Must include the following entries: - vde -- resets : Must include the following entries: +- resets : Must contain an entry for each entry in reset-names. +- reset-names : Should include the following entries: - vde +Optional properties: +- resets : Must contain an entry for each entry in reset-names. +- reset-names : Must include the following entries: + - mc + Example: video-codec@6001a000 { @@ -51,5 +57,6 @@ video-codec@6001a000 { <GIC_SPI 12 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; /* SXE interrupt */ interrupt-names = "sync-token", "bsev", "sxe"; clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA20_CLK_VDE>; - resets = <&tegra_car 61>; + reset-names = "vde", "mc"; + resets = <&tegra_car 61>, <&mc TEGRA20_MC_RESET_VDE>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/qcom,camss.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/qcom,camss.txt index cadecebc73f7..09eb6ed99114 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/qcom,camss.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/qcom,camss.txt @@ -5,8 +5,9 @@ Qualcomm Camera Subsystem - compatible: Usage: required Value type: <stringlist> - Definition: Should contain: + Definition: Should contain one of: - "qcom,msm8916-camss" + - "qcom,msm8996-camss" - reg: Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> @@ -19,11 +20,16 @@ Qualcomm Camera Subsystem - "csiphy0_clk_mux" - "csiphy1" - "csiphy1_clk_mux" + - "csiphy2" (8996 only) + - "csiphy2_clk_mux" (8996 only) - "csid0" - "csid1" + - "csid2" (8996 only) + - "csid3" (8996 only) - "ispif" - "csi_clk_mux" - "vfe0" + - "vfe1" (8996 only) - interrupts: Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> @@ -34,10 +40,14 @@ Qualcomm Camera Subsystem Definition: Should contain the following entries: - "csiphy0" - "csiphy1" + - "csiphy2" (8996 only) - "csid0" - "csid1" + - "csid2" (8996 only) + - "csid3" (8996 only) - "ispif" - "vfe0" + - "vfe1" (8996 only) - power-domains: Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> @@ -53,25 +63,42 @@ Qualcomm Camera Subsystem Usage: required Value type: <stringlist> Definition: Should contain the following entries: - - "camss_top_ahb" - - "ispif_ahb" - - "csiphy0_timer" - - "csiphy1_timer" - - "csi0_ahb" - - "csi0" - - "csi0_phy" - - "csi0_pix" - - "csi0_rdi" - - "csi1_ahb" - - "csi1" - - "csi1_phy" - - "csi1_pix" - - "csi1_rdi" - - "camss_ahb" - - "camss_vfe_vfe" - - "camss_csi_vfe" - - "iface" - - "bus" + - "top_ahb" + - "ispif_ahb" + - "csiphy0_timer" + - "csiphy1_timer" + - "csiphy2_timer" (8996 only) + - "csi0_ahb" + - "csi0" + - "csi0_phy" + - "csi0_pix" + - "csi0_rdi" + - "csi1_ahb" + - "csi1" + - "csi1_phy" + - "csi1_pix" + - "csi1_rdi" + - "csi2_ahb" (8996 only) + - "csi2" (8996 only) + - "csi2_phy" (8996 only) + - "csi2_pix" (8996 only) + - "csi2_rdi" (8996 only) + - "csi3_ahb" (8996 only) + - "csi3" (8996 only) + - "csi3_phy" (8996 only) + - "csi3_pix" (8996 only) + - "csi3_rdi" (8996 only) + - "ahb" + - "vfe0" + - "csi_vfe0" + - "vfe0_ahb", (8996 only) + - "vfe0_stream", (8996 only) + - "vfe1", (8996 only) + - "csi_vfe1", (8996 only) + - "vfe1_ahb", (8996 only) + - "vfe1_stream", (8996 only) + - "vfe_ahb" + - "vfe_axi" - vdda-supply: Usage: required Value type: <phandle> @@ -90,22 +117,27 @@ Qualcomm Camera Subsystem - reg: Usage: required Value type: <u32> - Definition: Selects CSI2 PHY interface - PHY0 or PHY1. + Definition: Selects CSI2 PHY interface - PHY0, PHY1 + or PHY2 (8996 only) Endpoint node properties: - clock-lanes: Usage: required Value type: <u32> - Definition: The physical clock lane index. The value - must always be <1> as the physical clock - lane is lane 1. + Definition: The physical clock lane index. On 8916 + the value must always be <1> as the physical + clock lane is lane 1. On 8996 the value must + always be <7> as the hardware supports D-PHY + and C-PHY, indexes are in a common set and + D-PHY physical clock lane is labeled as 7. - data-lanes: Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> - Definition: An array of physical data lanes indexes. - Position of an entry determines the logical - lane number, while the value of an entry - indicates physical lane index. Lane swapping - is supported. + Definition: An array of physical data lanes indexes. + Position of an entry determines the logical + lane number, while the value of an entry + indicates physical lane index. Lane swapping + is supported. Physical lane indexes for + 8916: 0, 2, 3, 4; for 8996: 0, 1, 2, 3. * An Example @@ -161,25 +193,25 @@ Qualcomm Camera Subsystem <&gcc GCC_CAMSS_CSI_VFE0_CLK>, <&gcc GCC_CAMSS_VFE_AHB_CLK>, <&gcc GCC_CAMSS_VFE_AXI_CLK>; - clock-names = "camss_top_ahb", - "ispif_ahb", - "csiphy0_timer", - "csiphy1_timer", - "csi0_ahb", - "csi0", - "csi0_phy", - "csi0_pix", - "csi0_rdi", - "csi1_ahb", - "csi1", - "csi1_phy", - "csi1_pix", - "csi1_rdi", - "camss_ahb", - "camss_vfe_vfe", - "camss_csi_vfe", - "iface", - "bus"; + clock-names = "top_ahb", + "ispif_ahb", + "csiphy0_timer", + "csiphy1_timer", + "csi0_ahb", + "csi0", + "csi0_phy", + "csi0_pix", + "csi0_rdi", + "csi1_ahb", + "csi1", + "csi1_phy", + "csi1_pix", + "csi1_rdi", + "ahb", + "vfe0", + "csi_vfe0", + "vfe_ahb", + "vfe_axi"; vdda-supply = <&pm8916_l2>; iommus = <&apps_iommu 3>; ports { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/qcom,venus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/qcom,venus.txt index 2693449daf73..00d0d1bf7647 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/qcom,venus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/qcom,venus.txt @@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Definition: Value should contain one of: - "qcom,msm8916-venus" - "qcom,msm8996-venus" + - "qcom,sdm845-venus" - reg: Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt index a19517e1c669..2f420050d57f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/rcar_vin.txt @@ -21,7 +21,9 @@ on Gen3 platforms to a CSI-2 receiver. - "renesas,vin-r8a7794" for the R8A7794 device - "renesas,vin-r8a7795" for the R8A7795 device - "renesas,vin-r8a7796" for the R8A7796 device + - "renesas,vin-r8a77965" for the R8A77965 device - "renesas,vin-r8a77970" for the R8A77970 device + - "renesas,vin-r8a77995" for the R8A77995 device - "renesas,rcar-gen2-vin" for a generic R-Car Gen2 or RZ/G1 compatible device. @@ -37,30 +39,51 @@ Additionally, an alias named vinX will need to be created to specify which video input device this is. The per-board settings Gen2 platforms: - - port sub-node describing a single endpoint connected to the vin - as described in video-interfaces.txt[1]. Only the first one will - be considered as each vin interface has one input port. + +- port - sub-node describing a single endpoint connected to the VIN + from external SoC pins as described in video-interfaces.txt[1]. + Only the first one will be considered as each vin interface has one + input port. + + - Optional properties for endpoint nodes: + - hsync-active: see [1] for description. Default is active high. + - vsync-active: see [1] for description. Default is active high. + If both HSYNC and VSYNC polarities are not specified, embedded + synchronization is selected. + - field-active-even: see [1] for description. Default is active high. + - bus-width: see [1] for description. The selected bus width depends on + the SoC type and selected input image format. + Valid values are: 8, 10, 12, 16, 24 and 32. + - data-shift: see [1] for description. Valid values are 0 and 8. + - data-enable-active: polarity of CLKENB signal, see [1] for + description. Default is active high. The per-board settings Gen3 platforms: Gen3 platforms can support both a single connected parallel input source -from external SoC pins (port0) and/or multiple parallel input sources -from local SoC CSI-2 receivers (port1) depending on SoC. +from external SoC pins (port@0) and/or multiple parallel input sources +from local SoC CSI-2 receivers (port@1) depending on SoC. - renesas,id - ID number of the VIN, VINx in the documentation. - ports - - port 0 - sub-node describing a single endpoint connected to the VIN - from external SoC pins described in video-interfaces.txt[1]. - Describing more then one endpoint in port 0 is invalid. Only VIN - instances that are connected to external pins should have port 0. - - port 1 - sub-nodes describing one or more endpoints connected to + - port@0 - sub-node describing a single endpoint connected to the VIN + from external SoC pins as described in video-interfaces.txt[1]. + Describing more than one endpoint in port@0 is invalid. Only VIN + instances that are connected to external pins should have port@0. + + Endpoint nodes of port@0 support the optional properties listed in + the Gen2 per-board settings description. + + - port@1 - sub-nodes describing one or more endpoints connected to the VIN from local SoC CSI-2 receivers. The endpoint numbers must use the following schema. - - Endpoint 0 - sub-node describing the endpoint connected to CSI20 - - Endpoint 1 - sub-node describing the endpoint connected to CSI21 - - Endpoint 2 - sub-node describing the endpoint connected to CSI40 - - Endpoint 3 - sub-node describing the endpoint connected to CSI41 + - endpoint@0 - sub-node describing the endpoint connected to CSI20 + - endpoint@1 - sub-node describing the endpoint connected to CSI21 + - endpoint@2 - sub-node describing the endpoint connected to CSI40 + - endpoint@3 - sub-node describing the endpoint connected to CSI41 + + Endpoint nodes of port@1 do not support any optional endpoint property. Device node example for Gen2 platforms -------------------------------------- @@ -107,9 +130,6 @@ Board setup example for Gen2 platforms (vin1 composite video input) status = "okay"; port { - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; - vin1ep0: endpoint { remote-endpoint = <&adv7180>; bus-width = <8>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sh_mobile_ceu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sh_mobile_ceu.txt index 17a8e81ca0cc..cfa4ffada8ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sh_mobile_ceu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/sh_mobile_ceu.txt @@ -2,7 +2,6 @@ Bindings, specific for the sh_mobile_ceu_camera.c driver: - compatible: Should be "renesas,sh-mobile-ceu" - reg: register base and size - interrupts: the interrupt number - - interrupt-parent: the interrupt controller - renesas,max-width: maximum image width, supported on this SoC - renesas,max-height: maximum image height, supported on this SoC diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt index 258b8dfddf48..baf9d9756b3c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/video-interfaces.txt @@ -85,6 +85,10 @@ Optional properties - lens-focus: A phandle to the node of the focus lens controller. +- rotation: The device, typically an image sensor, is not mounted upright, + but a number of degrees counter clockwise. Typical values are 0 and 180 + (upside down). + Optional endpoint properties ---------------------------- @@ -109,6 +113,8 @@ Optional endpoint properties Note, that if HSYNC and VSYNC polarities are not specified, embedded synchronization may be required, where supported. - data-active: similar to HSYNC and VSYNC, specifies data line polarity. +- data-enable-active: similar to HSYNC and VSYNC, specifies the data enable + signal polarity. - field-even-active: field signal level during the even field data transmission. - pclk-sample: sample data on rising (1) or falling (0) edge of the pixel clock signal. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mediatek,smi-common.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mediatek,smi-common.txt index aa614b2d7cab..615abdd0eb0d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mediatek,smi-common.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mediatek,smi-common.txt @@ -2,8 +2,9 @@ SMI (Smart Multimedia Interface) Common The hardware block diagram please check bindings/iommu/mediatek,iommu.txt -Mediatek SMI have two generations of HW architecture, mt8173 uses the second -generation of SMI HW while mt2701 uses the first generation HW of SMI. +Mediatek SMI have two generations of HW architecture, mt2712 and mt8173 use +the second generation of SMI HW while mt2701 uses the first generation HW of +SMI. There's slight differences between the two SMI, for generation 2, the register which control the iommu port is at each larb's register base. But @@ -15,6 +16,7 @@ not needed for SMI generation 2. Required properties: - compatible : must be one of : "mediatek,mt2701-smi-common" + "mediatek,mt2712-smi-common" "mediatek,mt8173-smi-common" - reg : the register and size of the SMI block. - power-domains : a phandle to the power domain of this local arbiter. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mediatek,smi-larb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mediatek,smi-larb.txt index ddf46b8856a5..083155cdc2a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mediatek,smi-larb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mediatek,smi-larb.txt @@ -4,8 +4,9 @@ The hardware block diagram please check bindings/iommu/mediatek,iommu.txt Required properties: - compatible : must be one of : - "mediatek,mt8173-smi-larb" "mediatek,mt2701-smi-larb" + "mediatek,mt2712-smi-larb" + "mediatek,mt8173-smi-larb" - reg : the register and size of this local arbiter. - mediatek,smi : a phandle to the smi_common node. - power-domains : a phandle to the power domain of this local arbiter. @@ -15,7 +16,7 @@ Required properties: the register. - "smi" : It's the clock for transfer data and command. -Required property for mt2701: +Required property for mt2701 and mt2712: - mediatek,larb-id :the hardware id of this larb. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ac100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ac100.txt index b8ef00667599..dff219f07493 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ac100.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/ac100.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: - sub-nodes: - codec - compatible: "x-powers,ac100-codec" - - interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller - interrupts: SoC NMI / GPIO interrupt connected to the IRQ_AUDIO pin - #clock-cells: Shall be 0 @@ -20,9 +19,6 @@ Required properties: - rtc - compatible: "x-powers,ac100-rtc" - - interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller - - interrupts: SoC NMI / GPIO interrupt connected to the - IRQ_RTC pin - clocks: A phandle to the codec's "4M_adda" clock - #clock-cells: Shall be 1 - clock-output-names: "cko1_rtc", "cko2_rtc", "cko3_rtc" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/altera-a10sr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/altera-a10sr.txt index c8a736554b4b..a688520dd87d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/altera-a10sr.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/altera-a10sr.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required parent device properties: - spi-max-frequency : Maximum SPI frequency. - reg : The SPI Chip Select address for the Arria10 System Resource chip -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. - interrupts : The interrupt line the device is connected to. - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : The number of cells to describe an IRQ, should be 2. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt index a014afb07902..9b62831fdf3e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/arizona.txt @@ -22,7 +22,6 @@ Required properties: connected to. - interrupt-controller : Arizona class devices contain interrupt controllers and may provide interrupt services to other devices. - - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells: the number of cells to describe an IRQ, this should be 2. The first cell is the IRQ number. The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt index 5297b2210704..2a665741d7fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/as3722.txt @@ -20,6 +20,8 @@ Optional properties: - ams,enable-internal-i2c-pullup: Boolean property, to enable internal pullup on i2c scl/sda pins. Missing this will disable internal pullup on i2c scl/sda lines. +- ams,enable-ac-ok-power-on: Boolean property, to enable exit out of power off + mode with AC_OK pin (pin enabled in power off mode). Optional submodule and their properties: ======================================= diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt index d1762f3b30af..188f0373d441 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/axp20x.txt @@ -28,7 +28,6 @@ Required properties: * "x-powers,axp809" * "x-powers,axp813" - reg: The I2C slave address or RSB hardware address for the AXP chip -- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller - interrupts: SoC NMI / GPIO interrupt connected to the PMIC's IRQ pin - interrupt-controller: The PMIC has its own internal IRQs - #interrupt-cells: Should be set to 1 @@ -45,8 +44,11 @@ Optional properties: board is driving OTG VBus or not. (axp221 / axp223 / axp803/ axp813 only) -- x-powers,master-mode: Boolean (axp806 only). Set this when the PMIC is - wired for master mode. The default is slave mode. +- x-powers,self-working-mode and + x-powers,master-mode: Boolean (axp806 only). Set either of these when the + PMIC is wired for self-working mode or master mode. + If neither is set then slave mode is assumed. + This corresponds to how the MODESET pin is wired. - <input>-supply: a phandle to the regulator supply node. May be omitted if inputs are unregulated, such as using the IPSOUT output diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bd9571mwv.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bd9571mwv.txt index 25d1f697eb25..8c4678650d1a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bd9571mwv.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bd9571mwv.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "rohm,bd9571mwv". - reg : I2C slave address. - - interrupt-parent : Phandle to the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts : The interrupt line the device is connected to. - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : The number of cells to describe an IRQ, should be 2. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bfticu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bfticu.txt index 65c90776c620..538192fda9ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bfticu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/bfticu.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: the main IRQ line to signal the collected IRQs - #interrupt-cells : is 2 and their usage is compliant to the 2 cells variant of Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt -- interrupt-parent: the parent IRQ ctrl the main IRQ is connected to - reg: access on the parent local bus (chip select, offset in chip select, size) Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9055.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9055.txt index 6dab34d34fce..131a53283e17 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9055.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9055.txt @@ -22,8 +22,6 @@ Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da9055.txt Required properties: - compatible : Should be "dlg,da9055-pmic" - reg: Specifies the I2C slave address (defaults to 0x5a but can be modified) -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the IRQs from da9055 are delivered to. - interrupts: IRQ line info for da9055 chip. - interrupt-controller: da9055 has internal IRQs (has own IRQ domain). - #interrupt-cells: Should be 1, is the local IRQ number for da9055. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9062.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9062.txt index c0a418c27e9d..edca653a5777 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9062.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9062.txt @@ -32,8 +32,6 @@ Required properties: "dlg,da9061" for DA9061 - reg : Specifies the I2C slave address (this defaults to 0x58 but it can be modified to match the chip's OTP settings). -- interrupt-parent : Specifies the reference to the interrupt controller for - the DA9062 or DA9061. - interrupts : IRQ line information. - interrupt-controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9063.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9063.txt index 443e68286957..8da879935c59 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9063.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9063.txt @@ -16,8 +16,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "dlg,da9063" or "dlg,da9063l" - reg : Specifies the I2C slave address (this defaults to 0x58 but it can be modified to match the chip's OTP settings). -- interrupt-parent : Specifies the reference to the interrupt controller for - the DA9063. - interrupts : IRQ line information. - interrupt-controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9150.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9150.txt index fd4dca7f4aba..f09b41fbdf47 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9150.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/da9150.txt @@ -13,8 +13,6 @@ da9150-fg : Battery Fuel-Gauge Required properties: - compatible : Should be "dlg,da9150" - reg: Specifies the I2C slave address -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the IRQs from da9150 are delivered to. - interrupts: IRQ line info for da9150 chip. - interrupt-controller: da9150 has internal IRQs (own IRQ domain). (See ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/madera.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/madera.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..db3266088386 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/madera.txt @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +Cirrus Logic Madera class audio codecs Multi-Functional Device + +These devices are audio SoCs with extensive digital capabilities and a range +of analogue I/O. + +See also the child driver bindings in: +bindings/pinctrl/cirrus,madera-pinctrl.txt +bindings/regulator/arizona-regulator.txt +bindings/sound/madera.txt + +Required properties: + + - compatible : One of the following chip-specific strings: + "cirrus,cs47l35" + "cirrus,cs47l85" + "cirrus,cs47l90" + "cirrus,cs47l91" + "cirrus,wm1840" + + - reg : I2C slave address when connected using I2C, chip select number when + using SPI. + + - DCVDD-supply : Power supply for the device as defined in + bindings/regulator/regulator.txt + Mandatory on CS47L35, CS47L90, CS47L91 + Optional on CS47L85, WM1840 + + - AVDD-supply, DBVDD1-supply, DBVDD2-supply, CPVDD1-supply, CPVDD2-supply : + Power supplies for the device + + - DBVDD3-supply, DBVDD4-supply : Power supplies for the device + (CS47L85, CS47L90, CS47L91, WM1840) + + - SPKVDDL-supply, SPKVDDR-supply : Power supplies for the device + (CS47L85, WM1840) + + - SPKVDD-supply : Power supply for the device + (CS47L35) + + - interrupt-controller : Indicates that this device is an interrupt controller + + - #interrupt-cells: the number of cells to describe an IRQ, must be 2. + The first cell is the IRQ number. + The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from + bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt + + - gpio-controller : Indicates this device is a GPIO controller. + + - #gpio-cells : Must be 2. The first cell is the pin number. The second cell + is reserved for future use and must be zero + + - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. + + - interrupts : The interrupt line the /IRQ signal for the device is + connected to. + +Optional properties: + + - MICVDD-supply : Power supply, only need to be specified if + powered externally + + - reset-gpios : One entry specifying the GPIO controlling /RESET. + As defined in bindings/gpio.txt. + Although optional, it is strongly recommended to use a hardware reset + + - MICBIASx : Initial data for the MICBIAS regulators, as covered in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt. + One for each MICBIAS generator (MICBIAS1, MICBIAS2, ...) + (all codecs) + + One for each output pin (MICBIAS1A, MIBCIAS1B, MICBIAS2A, ...) + (all except CS47L85, WM1840) + + The following following additional property is supported for the generator + nodes: + - cirrus,ext-cap : Set to 1 if the MICBIAS has external decoupling + capacitors attached. + +Optional child nodes: + micvdd : Node containing initialization data for the micvdd regulator + See bindings/regulator/arizona-regulator.txt + + ldo1 : Node containing initialization data for the LDO1 regulator + See bindings/regulator/arizona-regulator.txt + (cs47l85, wm1840) + +Example: + +cs47l85@0 { + compatible = "cirrus,cs47l85"; + reg = <0>; + + reset-gpios = <&gpio 0>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + interrupts = <&host_irq1>; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max14577.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max14577.txt index 236264c10b92..fc6f0f4e8beb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max14577.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max14577.txt @@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Must be "maxim,max14577" or "maxim,max77836". - reg : I2C slave address for the max14577 chip (0x25 for max14577/max77836) - interrupts : IRQ line for the chip. -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. Required nodes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt index 0f2587fa42cb..42968b7144e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt @@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Must be "maxim,max77686"; - reg : Specifies the i2c slave address of PMIC block. - interrupts : This i2c device has an IRQ line connected to the main SoC. -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt index e6754974a745..a3c60a7a3be1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt @@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Must be "maxim,max77693". - reg : Specifies the i2c slave address of PMIC block. - interrupts : This i2c device has an IRQ line connected to the main SoC. -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. Optional properties: - regulators : The regulators of max77693 have to be instantiated under subnode diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77802.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77802.txt index f2f3fe75901c..09decac20d91 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77802.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77802.txt @@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Must be "maxim,max77802" - reg : Specifies the I2C slave address of PMIC block. - interrupts : I2C device IRQ line connected to the main SoC. -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8998.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8998.txt index 23a3650ff2a2..5f2f07c09c90 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8998.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max8998.txt @@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Specifies the i2c slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the interrupts from MAX8998 are routed to. - interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for two interrupt sources. - First interrupt specifier is for main interrupt. - Second interrupt specifier is for power-on/-off interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/motorola-cpcap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/motorola-cpcap.txt index c639705a98ef..5ddcc8f4febc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/motorola-cpcap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/motorola-cpcap.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Motorola CPCAP PMIC device tree binding Required properties: - compatible : One or both of "motorola,cpcap" or "ste,6556002" - reg : SPI chip select -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller - interrupts : The interrupt line the device is connected to - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : The number of cells to describe an IRQ, should be 2 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt index 8ae1a32bfb7e..e736ab3012a6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/palmas.txt @@ -25,7 +25,6 @@ and also the generic series names The first cell is the IRQ number. The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. Optional properties: ti,mux-padX : set the pad register X (1-2) to the correct muxing for the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/retu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/retu.txt index 876242394a16..df3005dd3e3c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/retu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/retu.txt @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: "nokia,retu" or "nokia,tahvo" - reg: Specifies the CBUS slave address of the ASIC chip - interrupts: The interrupt line the device is connected to -- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rk808.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rk808.txt index 91b65227afeb..1683ec3245bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rk808.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rk808.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: "rockchip,rk808" - compatible: "rockchip,rk818" - reg: I2C slave address -- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: the interrupt outputs of the controller. - #clock-cells: from common clock binding; shall be set to 1 (multiple clock outputs). See <dt-bindings/clock/rockchip,rk808.h> for clock IDs. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3ca56fdb5ffe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71837-pmic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +* ROHM BD71837 Power Management Integrated Circuit bindings + +BD71837MWV is a programmable Power Management IC for powering single-core, +dual-core, and quad-core SoCs such as NXP-i.MX 8M. It is optimized for +low BOM cost and compact solution footprint. It integrates 8 Buck +egulators and 7 LDOs to provide all the power rails required by the SoC and +the commonly used peripherals. + +Datasheet for PMIC is available at: +https://www.rohm.com/datasheet/BD71837MWV/bd71837mwv-e + +Required properties: + - compatible : Should be "rohm,bd71837". + - reg : I2C slave address. + - interrupt-parent : Phandle to the parent interrupt controller. + - interrupts : The interrupt line the device is connected to. + - clocks : The parent clock connected to PMIC. If this is missing + 32768 KHz clock is assumed. + - #clock-cells : Should be 0. + - regulators: : List of child nodes that specify the regulators. + Please see ../regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt + +Optional properties: +- clock-output-names : Should contain name for output clock. + +Example: + + /* external oscillator node */ + osc: oscillator { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clock-frequency = <32768>; + clock-output-names = "osc"; + }; + + pmic: pmic@4b { + compatible = "rohm,bd71837"; + reg = <0x4b>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio1>; + interrupts = <29 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + interrupt-names = "irq"; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&osc 0>; + clock-output-names = "bd71837-32k-out"; + + regulators { + buck1: BUCK1 { + regulator-name = "buck1"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1300000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-ramp-delay = <1250>; + }; + }; + }; + + /* Clock consumer node */ + rtc@0 { + compatible = "company,my-rtc"; + clock-names = "my-clock"; + clocks = <&pmic>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/samsung,sec-core.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/samsung,sec-core.txt index cdd079bfc287..c68cdd365153 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/samsung,sec-core.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/samsung,sec-core.txt @@ -31,8 +31,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Specifies the I2C slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66. Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the interrupts from s2mps11 are delivered to. - interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for interrupt sources. - samsung,s2mps11-wrstbi-ground: Indicates that WRSTBI pin of PMIC is pulled down. When the system is suspended it will always go down thus triggerring diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt index f9065a5781a2..c797c05cd3c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/stmpe.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - interrupts : The interrupt outputs from the controller - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller - - interrupt-parent : Specifies which IRQ controller we're connected to - wakeup-source : Marks the input device as wakable - st,autosleep-timeout : Valid entries (ms); 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512 and 1024 - irq-gpio : If present, which GPIO to use for event IRQ diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tc3589x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tc3589x.txt index 23fc2f21f5a4..4f22b2b07dc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tc3589x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tc3589x.txt @@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : must be "toshiba,tc35890", "toshiba,tc35892", "toshiba,tc35893", "toshiba,tc35894", "toshiba,tc35895" or "toshiba,tc35896" - reg : I2C address of the device - - interrupt-parent : specifies which IRQ controller we're connected to - interrupts : the interrupt on the parent the controller is connected to - interrupt-controller : marks the device node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : should be <1>, the first cell is the IRQ offset on this diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65086.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65086.txt index 9cfa886fe99f..67eac0ed32df 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65086.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65086.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "ti,tps65086". - reg : I2C slave address. - - interrupt-parent : Phandle to the parent interrupt controller. - interrupts : The interrupt line the device is connected to. - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : The number of cells to describe an IRQ, should be 2. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt index 8af1202b381d..4f62143afd24 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65910.txt @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Required properties: The valid regulator-compatible values are: tps65910: vrtc, vio, vdd1, vdd2, vdd3, vdig1, vdig2, vpll, vdac, vaux1, vaux2, vaux33, vmmc, vbb - tps65911: vrtc, vio, vdd1, vdd3, vddctrl, ldo1, ldo2, ldo3, ldo4, ldo5, + tps65911: vrtc, vio, vdd1, vdd2, vddctrl, ldo1, ldo2, ldo3, ldo4, ldo5, ldo6, ldo7, ldo8 - xxx-supply: Input voltage supply regulator. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65912.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65912.txt index 717e66d23142..8becb183a48e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65912.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/tps65912.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "ti,tps65912". - reg : Slave address or chip select number (I2C / SPI). - - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. - interrupts : The interrupt line the device is connected to. - interrupt-controller : Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : The number of cells to describe an IRQ, should be 2. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl-familly.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl-familly.txt index a66fcf946759..56f244b5d8a4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl-familly.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl-familly.txt @@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller : Since the twl support several interrupts internally, it is considered as an interrupt controller cascaded to the SoC one. - #interrupt-cells = <1>; -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. Optional node: - Child nodes contain in the twl. The twl family is made of several variants diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt index 9a98ee7c323d..06e9dd7a0d96 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/twl6040.txt @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "ti,twl6040" for twl6040, "ti,twl6041" for twl6041 - reg: must be 0x4b for i2c address - interrupts: twl6040 has one interrupt line connecteded to the main SoC -- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller - gpio-controller: - #gpio-cells = <1>: twl6040 provides GPO lines. - #clock-cells = <0>; twl6040 is a provider of pdmclk which is used by McPDM diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/wm831x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/wm831x.txt index 505709403d3f..6b84b1b0d018 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/wm831x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/wm831x.txt @@ -22,7 +22,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupts : The interrupt line the IRQ signal for the device is connected to. - - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. - interrupt-controller : wm831x devices contain interrupt controllers and may provide interrupt services to other devices. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/soc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/soc.txt index 356c29789cf5..3a66d3c483e1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/soc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/soc.txt @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should contain one of: "brcm,bcm7425-timers" "brcm,bcm7429-timers" - "brcm,bcm7435-timers and + "brcm,bcm7435-timers" and "brcm,brcmstb-timers" - reg : the timers register range - interrupts : the interrupt line for this timer block diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/cib.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/cib.txt index f39a1aa2852b..410efa322254 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/cib.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cavium/cib.txt @@ -13,8 +13,6 @@ Properties: - cavium,max-bits: The index (zero based) of the highest numbered bit in the CIB block. -- interrupt-parent: Always the CIU on the SoC. - - interrupts: The CIU line to which the CIB block is connected. - #interrupt-cells: Must be <2>. The first cell is the bit within the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/aspeed,cvic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/aspeed,cvic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d62c783d1d5e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/aspeed,cvic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +* ASPEED AST2400 and AST2500 coprocessor interrupt controller + +This file describes the bindings for the interrupt controller present +in the AST2400 and AST2500 BMC SoCs which provides interrupt to the +ColdFire coprocessor. + +It is not a normal interrupt controller and it would be rather +inconvenient to create an interrupt tree for it as it somewhat shares +some of the same sources as the main ARM interrupt controller but with +different numbers. + +The AST2500 supports a SW generated interrupt + +Required properties: +- reg: address and length of the register for the device. +- compatible: "aspeed,cvic" and one of: + "aspeed,ast2400-cvic" + or + "aspeed,ast2500-cvic" + +- valid-sources: One cell, bitmap of supported sources for the implementation + +Optional properties; +- copro-sw-interrupts: List of interrupt numbers that can be used as + SW interrupts from the ARM to the coprocessor. + (AST2500 only) + +Example: + + cvic: copro-interrupt-controller@1e6c2000 { + compatible = "aspeed,ast2500-cvic"; + valid-sources = <0xffffffff>; + copro-sw-interrupts = <1>; + reg = <0x1e6c2000 0x80>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/arasan,sdhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/arasan,sdhci.txt index 60481bfc3d31..f6ddba31cb73 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/arasan,sdhci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/arasan,sdhci.txt @@ -19,8 +19,6 @@ Required Properties: - clocks: From clock bindings: Handles to clock inputs. - clock-names: From clock bindings: Tuple including "clk_xin" and "clk_ahb" - interrupts: Interrupt specifier - - interrupt-parent: Phandle for the interrupt controller that services - interrupts for this device. Required Properties for "arasan,sdhci-5.1": - phys: From PHY bindings: Phandle for the Generic PHY for arasan. @@ -39,6 +37,8 @@ Optional Properties: - xlnx,fails-without-test-cd: when present, the controller doesn't work when the CD line is not connected properly, and the line is not connected properly. Test mode can be used to force the controller to function. + - xlnx,int-clock-stable-broken: when present, the controller always reports + that the internal clock is stable even when it is not. Example: sdhci@e0100000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt index a2cf5e1c87d8..99c5cf8507e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-esdhc.txt @@ -21,7 +21,6 @@ Required properties: "fsl,ls1043a-esdhc" "fsl,ls1046a-esdhc" "fsl,ls2080a-esdhc" - - interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle. - clock-frequency : specifies eSDHC base clock frequency. Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt index 0e5e2ec4001d..75486cca8054 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt @@ -13,8 +13,6 @@ Optional properties: - gpios : may specify GPIOs in this order: Card-Detect GPIO, Write-Protect GPIO. Note that this does not follow the binding from mmc.txt, for historical reasons. -- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt index b7025de7dced..5f5c2bec2b8c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/pxa-mmc.txt @@ -8,10 +8,9 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - marvell,detect-delay-ms: sets the detection delay timeout in ms. -- marvell,gpio-power: GPIO spec for the card power enable pin -This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt -and the properties used by the pxa-mmc driver. +In addition to the properties described in this docuent, the details +described in mmc.txt are supported. Examples: @@ -19,6 +18,7 @@ mmc0: mmc@41100000 { compatible = "marvell,pxa-mmc"; reg = <0x41100000 0x1000>; interrupts = <23>; + vmmc-supply = <&mmc_regulator>; cd-gpios = <&gpio 23 0>; wp-gpios = <&gpio 24 0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt index 8ce49b255974..6f629b12bd69 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt @@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ Required Properties: before RK3288 - "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3288 - "rockchip,rv1108-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RV1108 + - "rockchip,px30-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip PX30 - "rockchip,rk3036-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3036 - "rockchip,rk3228-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK322x - "rockchip,rk3328-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3328 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-msm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-msm.txt index bfdcdc4ccdff..502b3b851ebb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-msm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-msm.txt @@ -4,7 +4,12 @@ This file documents differences between the core properties in mmc.txt and the properties used by the sdhci-msm driver. Required properties: -- compatible: Should contain "qcom,sdhci-msm-v4". +- compatible: Should contain: + "qcom,sdhci-msm-v4" for sdcc versions less than 5.0 + "qcom,sdhci-msm-v5" for sdcc versions >= 5.0 + For SDCC version 5.0.0, MCI registers are removed from SDCC + interface and some registers are moved to HC. New compatible + string is added to support this change - "qcom,sdhci-msm-v5". - reg: Base address and length of the register in the following order: - Host controller register map (required) - SD Core register map (required) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-of-dwcmshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-of-dwcmshc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ee4253b33be2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-of-dwcmshc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* Synopsys DesignWare Cores Mobile Storage Host Controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be one of the following: + "snps,dwcmshc-sdhci" +- reg: offset and length of the register set for the device. +- interrupts: a single interrupt specifier. +- clocks: Array of clocks required for SDHCI; requires at least one for + core clock. +- clock-names: Array of names corresponding to clocks property; shall be + "core" for core clock and "bus" for optional bus clock. + +Example: + sdhci2: sdhci@aa0000 { + compatible = "snps,dwcmshc-sdhci"; + reg = <0xaa0000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 21 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&emmcclk>; + bus-width = <8>; + } diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sunxi-mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sunxi-mmc.txt index 132e0007d7d6..e9cb3ec5e502 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sunxi-mmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sunxi-mmc.txt @@ -16,6 +16,8 @@ Required properties: * "allwinner,sun9i-a80-mmc" * "allwinner,sun50i-a64-emmc" * "allwinner,sun50i-a64-mmc" + * "allwinner,sun50i-h6-emmc", "allwinner.sun50i-a64-emmc" + * "allwinner,sun50i-h6-mmc", "allwinner.sun50i-a64-mmc" - reg : mmc controller base registers - clocks : a list with 4 phandle + clock specifier pairs - clock-names : must contain "ahb", "mmc", "output" and "sample" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt index 839f469f4525..c434200d19d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/tmio_mmc.txt @@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ Required properties: "renesas,sdhi-r8a7796" - SDHI IP on R8A7796 SoC "renesas,sdhi-r8a77965" - SDHI IP on R8A77965 SoC "renesas,sdhi-r8a77980" - SDHI IP on R8A77980 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-r8a77990" - SDHI IP on R8A77990 SoC "renesas,sdhi-r8a77995" - SDHI IP on R8A77995 SoC "renesas,sdhi-shmobile" - a generic sh-mobile SDHI controller "renesas,rcar-gen1-sdhi" - a generic R-Car Gen1 SDHI controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/brcm,brcmnand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/brcm,brcmnand.txt index b40f3a492800..bcda1dfc4bac 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/brcm,brcmnand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/brcm,brcmnand.txt @@ -42,7 +42,6 @@ Required properties: May be "nand", if the SoC has the individual NAND interrupts multiplexed behind another custom piece of hardware -- interrupt-parent : See standard interrupt bindings - #address-cells : <1> - subnodes give the chip-select number - #size-cells : <0> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt index 0ee8edb60efc..f33da8782741 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/denali-nand.txt @@ -8,6 +8,9 @@ Required properties: - reg : should contain registers location and length for data and reg. - reg-names: Should contain the reg names "nand_data" and "denali_reg" - interrupts : The interrupt number. + - clocks: should contain phandle of the controller core clock, the bus + interface clock, and the ECC circuit clock. + - clock-names: should contain "nand", "nand_x", "ecc" Optional properties: - nand-ecc-step-size: see nand.txt for details. If present, the value must be @@ -31,5 +34,7 @@ nand: nand@ff900000 { compatible = "altr,socfpga-denali-nand"; reg = <0xff900000 0x20>, <0xffb80000 0x1000>; reg-names = "nand_data", "denali_reg"; + clocks = <&nand_clk>, <&nand_x_clk>, <&nand_ecc_clk>; + clock-names = "nand", "nand_x", "ecc"; interrupts = <0 144 4>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt index dd559045593d..c059ab74ed88 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/gpmc-nand.txt @@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: "ti,omap2-nand" - reg: range id (CS number), base offset and length of the NAND I/O space - - interrupt-parent: must point to gpmc node - interrupts: Two interrupt specifiers, one for fifoevent, one for termcount. Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/jedec,spi-nor.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/jedec,spi-nor.txt index 956bb046e599..f03be904d3c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/jedec,spi-nor.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/jedec,spi-nor.txt @@ -69,6 +69,15 @@ Optional properties: all chips and support for it can not be detected at runtime. Refer to your chips' datasheet to check if this is supported by your chip. +- broken-flash-reset : Some flash devices utilize stateful addressing modes + (e.g., for 32-bit addressing) which need to be managed + carefully by a system. Because these sorts of flash don't + have a standardized software reset command, and because some + systems don't toggle the flash RESET# pin upon system reset + (if the pin even exists at all), there are systems which + cannot reboot properly if the flash is left in the "wrong" + state. This boolean flag can be used on such systems, to + denote the absence of a reliable reset mechanism. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt index 8bb11d809429..e949c778e983 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nand.txt @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Optional NAND chip properties: Deprecated values: "soft_bch": use "soft" and nand-ecc-algo instead - nand-ecc-algo: string, algorithm of NAND ECC. - Supported values are: "hamming", "bch". + Valid values are: "hamming", "bch", "rs". - nand-bus-width : 8 or 16 bus width if not present 8 - nand-on-flash-bbt: boolean to enable on flash bbt option if not present false @@ -43,6 +43,10 @@ Optional NAND chip properties: This is particularly useful when only the in-band area is used by the upper layers, and you want to make your NAND as reliable as possible. +- nand-is-boot-medium: Whether the NAND chip is a boot medium. Drivers might use + this information to select ECC algorithms supported by + the boot ROM or similar restrictions. + - nand-rb: shall contain the native Ready/Busy ids. The ECC strength and ECC step size properties define the correction capability diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nvidia-tegra20-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nvidia-tegra20-nand.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b2f2ca12f9e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/nvidia-tegra20-nand.txt @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra NAND Flash controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be one of: + - "nvidia,tegra20-nand" +- reg: MMIO address range +- interrupts: interrupt output of the NFC controller +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. +- clock-names: Must include the following entries: + - nand +- resets: Must contain an entry for each entry in reset-names. + See ../reset/reset.txt for details. +- reset-names: Must include the following entries: + - nand + +Optional children nodes: +Individual NAND chips are children of the NAND controller node. Currently +only one NAND chip supported. + +Required children node properties: +- reg: An integer ranging from 1 to 6 representing the CS line to use. + +Optional children node properties: +- nand-ecc-mode: String, operation mode of the NAND ecc mode. Currently only + "hw" is supported. +- nand-ecc-algo: string, algorithm of NAND ECC. + Supported values with "hw" ECC mode are: "rs", "bch". +- nand-bus-width : See nand.txt +- nand-on-flash-bbt: See nand.txt +- nand-ecc-strength: integer representing the number of bits to correct + per ECC step (always 512). Supported strength using HW ECC + modes are: + - RS: 4, 6, 8 + - BCH: 4, 8, 14, 16 +- nand-ecc-maximize: See nand.txt +- nand-is-boot-medium: Makes sure only ECC strengths supported by the boot ROM + are chosen. +- wp-gpios: GPIO specifier for the write protect pin. + +Optional child node of NAND chip nodes: +Partitions: see partition.txt + + Example: + nand-controller@70008000 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra20-nand"; + reg = <0x70008000 0x100>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 24 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA20_CLK_NDFLASH>; + clock-names = "nand"; + resets = <&tegra_car 13>; + reset-names = "nand"; + + nand@0 { + reg = <0>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + nand-bus-width = <8>; + nand-on-flash-bbt; + nand-ecc-algo = "bch"; + nand-ecc-strength = <8>; + wp-gpios = <&gpio TEGRA_GPIO(S, 0) GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt index a8f382642ba9..afbbd870496d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partition.txt @@ -14,6 +14,13 @@ method is used for a given flash device. To describe the method there should be a subnode of the flash device that is named 'partitions'. It must have a 'compatible' property, which is used to identify the method to use. +When a single partition is represented with a DT node (it depends on a used +format) it may also be described using above rules ('compatible' and optionally +some extra properties / subnodes). It allows describing more complex, +hierarchical (multi-level) layouts and should be used if there is some +significant relation between partitions or some partition internally uses +another partitioning method. + Available bindings are listed in the "partitions" subdirectory. @@ -109,3 +116,42 @@ flash@2 { }; }; }; + +flash@3 { + partitions { + compatible = "fixed-partitions"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + partition@0 { + label = "bootloader"; + reg = <0x000000 0x100000>; + read-only; + }; + + firmware@100000 { + label = "firmware"; + reg = <0x100000 0xe00000>; + compatible = "brcm,trx"; + }; + + calibration@f00000 { + label = "calibration"; + reg = <0xf00000 0x100000>; + compatible = "fixed-partitions"; + ranges = <0 0xf00000 0x100000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + partition@0 { + label = "wifi0"; + reg = <0x000000 0x080000>; + }; + + partition@80000 { + label = "wifi1"; + reg = <0x080000 0x080000>; + }; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,trx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,trx.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b677147ca4e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/partitions/brcm,trx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +Broadcom TRX Container Partition +================================ + +TRX is Broadcom's official firmware format for the BCM947xx boards. It's used by +most of the vendors building devices based on Broadcom's BCM47xx SoCs and is +supported by the CFE bootloader. + +Design of the TRX format is very minimalistic. Its header contains +identification fields, CRC32 checksum and the locations of embedded partitions. +Its purpose is to store a few partitions in a format that can be distributed as +a standalone file and written in a flash memory. + +Container can hold up to 4 partitions. The first partition has to contain a +device executable binary (e.g. a kernel) as it's what the CFE bootloader starts +executing. Other partitions can be used for operating system purposes. This is +useful for systems that keep kernel and rootfs separated. + +TRX doesn't enforce any strict partition boundaries or size limits. All +partitions have to be less than the 4GiB max size limit. + +There are two existing/known TRX variants: +1) v1 which contains 3 partitions +2) v2 which contains 4 partitions + +There aren't separated compatible bindings for them as version can be trivialy +detected by a software parsing TRX header. + +Required properties: +- compatible : (required) must be "brcm,trx" + +Example: + +flash@0 { + partitions { + compatible = "brcm,trx"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/qcom_nandc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/qcom_nandc.txt index 73d336befa08..1123cc6d56ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/qcom_nandc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/qcom_nandc.txt @@ -45,11 +45,12 @@ Required properties: number (e.g., 0, 1, 2, etc.) - #address-cells: see partition.txt - #size-cells: see partition.txt -- nand-ecc-strength: see nand.txt -- nand-ecc-step-size: must be 512. see nand.txt for more details. Optional properties: - nand-bus-width: see nand.txt +- nand-ecc-strength: see nand.txt. If not specified, then ECC strength will + be used according to chip requirement and available + OOB size. Each nandcs device node may optionally contain a 'partitions' sub-node, which further contains sub-nodes describing the flash partition mapping. See @@ -77,7 +78,6 @@ nand-controller@1ac00000 { reg = <0>; nand-ecc-strength = <4>; - nand-ecc-step-size = <512>; nand-bus-width = <8>; partitions { @@ -117,7 +117,6 @@ nand-controller@79b0000 { nand@0 { reg = <0>; nand-ecc-strength = <4>; - nand-ecc-step-size = <512>; nand-bus-width = <8>; partitions { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spear_smi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spear_smi.txt index 7248aadd89e4..c41873e92d26 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spear_smi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spear_smi.txt @@ -5,8 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : Address range of the mtd chip - #address-cells, #size-cells : Must be present if the device has sub-nodes representing partitions. -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the STMMAC interrupts - clock-rate : Functional clock rate of SMI in Hz diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spi-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spi-nand.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8b51f3b6d55c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/spi-nand.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +SPI NAND flash + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be "spi-nand" +- reg: should encode the chip-select line used to access the NAND chip diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mux/adi,adgs1408.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mux/adi,adgs1408.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..be6947f4d86b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mux/adi,adgs1408.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +Bindings for Analog Devices ADGS1408/1409 8:1/Dual 4:1 Mux + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be one of + * "adi,adgs1408" + * "adi,adgs1409" +* Standard mux-controller bindings as described in mux-controller.txt + +Optional properties for ADGS1408/1409: +- gpio-controller : if present, #gpio-cells is required. +- #gpio-cells : should be <2> + - First cell is the GPO line number, i.e. 0 to 3 + for ADGS1408 and 0 to 4 for ADGS1409 + - Second cell is used to specify active high (0) + or active low (1) + +Optional properties: +- idle-state : if present, the state that the mux controller will have + when idle. The special state MUX_IDLE_AS_IS is the default and + MUX_IDLE_DISCONNECT is also supported. + +States 0 through 7 correspond to signals S1 through S8 in the datasheet. +For ADGS1409 only states 0 to 3 are available. + +Example: + + /* + * One mux controller. + * Mux state set to idle as is (no idle-state declared) + */ + &spi0 { + mux: mux-controller@0 { + compatible = "adi,adgs1408"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <1000000>; + #mux-control-cells = <0>; + }; + } + + adc-mux { + compatible = "io-channel-mux"; + io-channels = <&adc 1>; + io-channel-names = "parent"; + mux-controls = <&mux>; + + channels = "out_a0", "out_a1", "test0", "test1", + "out_b0", "out_b1", "testb0", "testb1"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt index 4bb624a73b54..93dcb79a5f16 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - SerDes Rx/Tx registers - SerDes integration registers (1/2) - SerDes integration registers (2/2) -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the amd-xgbe interrupt(s). The first interrupt listed is required and is the general device interrupt. If the optional amd,per-channel-interrupt property is specified, then one additional diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,mdio-mux-iproc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,mdio-mux-iproc.txt index dfe287a5d6f2..b58843f29591 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,mdio-mux-iproc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/brcm,mdio-mux-iproc.txt @@ -13,14 +13,17 @@ MDIO multiplexer node: Every non-ethernet PHY requires a compatible so that it could be probed based on this compatible string. +Optional properties: +- clocks: phandle of the core clock which drives the mdio block. + Additional information regarding generic multiplexer properties can be found at- Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mdio-mux.txt for example: - mdio_mux_iproc: mdio-mux@6602023c { + mdio_mux_iproc: mdio-mux@66020000 { compatible = "brcm,mdio-mux-iproc"; - reg = <0x6602023c 0x14>; + reg = <0x66020000 0x250>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt index 9c5e663fa1af..37d67926dd6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/btusb.txt @@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-bt-8xxx.txt Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller - interrupt-names: (see below) - interrupts : The interrupt specified by the name "wakeup" is the interrupt that shall be used for out-of-band wake-on-bt. Driver will diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/holt_hi311x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/holt_hi311x.txt index 23aa94eab207..903a78da65be 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/holt_hi311x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/holt_hi311x.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - "holt,hi3110" for HI-3110 - reg: SPI chip select. - clocks: The clock feeding the CAN controller. - - interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Should contain IRQ line for the CAN controller. Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/microchip,mcp251x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/microchip,mcp251x.txt index ee3723beb701..188c8bd4eb67 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/microchip,mcp251x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/microchip,mcp251x.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - "microchip,mcp2515" for MCP2515. - reg: SPI chip select. - clocks: The clock feeding the CAN controller. - - interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: Should contain IRQ line for the CAN controller. Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/xilinx_can.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/xilinx_can.txt index fe38847d8e26..060e2d46bad9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/xilinx_can.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/xilinx_can.txt @@ -2,20 +2,25 @@ Xilinx Axi CAN/Zynq CANPS controller Device Tree Bindings --------------------------------------------------------- Required properties: -- compatible : Should be "xlnx,zynq-can-1.0" for Zynq CAN - controllers and "xlnx,axi-can-1.00.a" for Axi CAN - controllers. -- reg : Physical base address and size of the Axi CAN/Zynq - CANPS registers map. +- compatible : Should be: + - "xlnx,zynq-can-1.0" for Zynq CAN controllers + - "xlnx,axi-can-1.00.a" for Axi CAN controllers + - "xlnx,canfd-1.0" for CAN FD controllers +- reg : Physical base address and size of the controller + registers map. - interrupts : Property with a value describing the interrupt number. -- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller -- clock-names : List of input clock names - "can_clk", "pclk" - (For CANPS), "can_clk" , "s_axi_aclk"(For AXI CAN) +- clock-names : List of input clock names + - "can_clk", "pclk" (For CANPS), + - "can_clk", "s_axi_aclk" (For AXI CAN and CAN FD). (See clock bindings for details). - clocks : Clock phandles (see clock bindings for details). -- tx-fifo-depth : Can Tx fifo depth. -- rx-fifo-depth : Can Rx fifo depth. +- tx-fifo-depth : Can Tx fifo depth (Zynq, Axi CAN). +- rx-fifo-depth : Can Rx fifo depth (Zynq, Axi CAN, CAN FD in + sequential Rx mode). +- tx-mailbox-count : Can Tx mailbox buffer count (CAN FD). +- rx-mailbox-count : Can Rx mailbox buffer count (CAN FD in mailbox Rx + mode). Example: @@ -42,3 +47,14 @@ For Axi CAN Dts file: tx-fifo-depth = <0x40>; rx-fifo-depth = <0x40>; }; +For CAN FD Dts file: + canfd_0: canfd@40000000 { + compatible = "xlnx,canfd-1.0"; + clocks = <&clkc 0>, <&clkc 1>; + clock-names = "can_clk", "s_axi_aclk"; + reg = <0x40000000 0x2000>; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <0 59 1>; + tx-mailbox-count = <0x20>; + rx-fifo-depth = <0x20>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt index 4cb4925a28ab..41089369f891 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/cpsw.txt @@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ Required properties: registers map - interrupts : property with a value describing the interrupt number -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller - cpdma_channels : Specifies number of channels in CPDMA - ale_entries : Specifies No of entries ALE can hold - bd_ram_size : Specifies internal descriptor RAM size diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davicom-dm9000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davicom-dm9000.txt index 5224bf05f6f8..64c159e9cbf7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davicom-dm9000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/davicom-dm9000.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : physical addresses and sizes of registers, must contain 2 entries: first entry : address register, second entry : data register. -- interrupt-parent : interrupt controller to which the device is connected - interrupts : interrupt specifier specific to interrupt controller Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/b53.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/b53.txt index 47a6a7fe0b86..1811e1972a7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/b53.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/b53.txt @@ -24,6 +24,14 @@ Required properties: "brcm,bcm53018-srab" "brcm,bcm53019-srab" and the mandatory "brcm,bcm5301x-srab" string + For the BCM5831X/BCM1140x SoCs with an integrated switch, must be one of: + "brcm,bcm11404-srab" + "brcm,bcm11407-srab" + "brcm,bcm11409-srab" + "brcm,bcm58310-srab" + "brcm,bcm58311-srab" + "brcm,bcm58313-srab" and the mandatory "brcm,omega-srab" string + For the BCM585xx/586XX/88312 SoCs with an integrated switch, must be one of: "brcm,bcm58522-srab" "brcm,bcm58523-srab" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt index a700943218ca..ac145b885e95 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ksz.txt @@ -4,7 +4,9 @@ Microchip KSZ Series Ethernet switches Required properties: - compatible: For external switch chips, compatible string must be exactly one - of: "microchip,ksz9477" + of the following: + - "microchip,ksz9477" + - "microchip,ksz9897" See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt for a list of additional required and optional properties. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/marvell.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/marvell.txt index 60d50a2b0323..feb007af13cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/marvell.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/marvell.txt @@ -30,7 +30,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - reset-gpios : Should be a gpio specifier for a reset line -- interrupt-parent : Parent interrupt controller - interrupts : Interrupt from the switch - interrupt-controller : Indicates the switch is itself an interrupt controller. This is used for the PHY interrupts. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/realtek-smi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/realtek-smi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b6ae8541bd55 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/realtek-smi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ +Realtek SMI-based Switches +========================== + +The SMI "Simple Management Interface" is a two-wire protocol using +bit-banged GPIO that while it reuses the MDIO lines MCK and MDIO does +not use the MDIO protocol. This binding defines how to specify the +SMI-based Realtek devices. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: must be exactly one of: + "realtek,rtl8366" + "realtek,rtl8366rb" (4+1 ports) + "realtek,rtl8366s" (4+1 ports) + "realtek,rtl8367" + "realtek,rtl8367b" + "realtek,rtl8368s" (8 port) + "realtek,rtl8369" + "realtek,rtl8370" (8 port) + +Required properties: +- mdc-gpios: GPIO line for the MDC clock line. +- mdio-gpios: GPIO line for the MDIO data line. +- reset-gpios: GPIO line for the reset signal. + +Optional properties: +- realtek,disable-leds: if the LED drivers are not used in the + hardware design this will disable them so they are not turned on + and wasting power. + +Required subnodes: + +- interrupt-controller + + This defines an interrupt controller with an IRQ line (typically + a GPIO) that will demultiplex and handle the interrupt from the single + interrupt line coming out of one of the SMI-based chips. It most + importantly provides link up/down interrupts to the PHY blocks inside + the ASIC. + +Required properties of interrupt-controller: + +- interrupt: parent interrupt, see interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +- interrupt-controller: see interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +- #address-cells: should be <0> +- #interrupt-cells: should be <1> + +- mdio + + This defines the internal MDIO bus of the SMI device, mostly for the + purpose of being able to hook the interrupts to the right PHY and + the right PHY to the corresponding port. + +Required properties of mdio: + +- compatible: should be set to "realtek,smi-mdio" for all SMI devices + +See net/mdio.txt for additional MDIO bus properties. + +See net/dsa/dsa.txt for a list of additional required and optional properties +and subnodes of DSA switches. + +Examples: + +switch { + compatible = "realtek,rtl8366rb"; + /* 22 = MDIO (has input reads), 21 = MDC (clock, output only) */ + mdc-gpios = <&gpio0 21 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + mdio-gpios = <&gpio0 22 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio0 14 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + + switch_intc: interrupt-controller { + /* GPIO 15 provides the interrupt */ + interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>; + interrupts = <15 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + interrupt-controller; + #address-cells = <0>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + }; + + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <0>; + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + label = "lan0"; + phy-handle = <&phy0>; + }; + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + label = "lan1"; + phy-handle = <&phy1>; + }; + port@2 { + reg = <2>; + label = "lan2"; + phy-handle = <&phy2>; + }; + port@3 { + reg = <3>; + label = "lan3"; + phy-handle = <&phy3>; + }; + port@4 { + reg = <4>; + label = "wan"; + phy-handle = <&phy4>; + }; + port@5 { + reg = <5>; + label = "cpu"; + ethernet = <&gmac0>; + phy-mode = "rgmii"; + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + full-duplex; + }; + }; + }; + + mdio { + compatible = "realtek,smi-mdio", "dsa-mdio"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + phy0: phy@0 { + reg = <0>; + interrupt-parent = <&switch_intc>; + interrupts = <0>; + }; + phy1: phy@1 { + reg = <1>; + interrupt-parent = <&switch_intc>; + interrupts = <1>; + }; + phy2: phy@2 { + reg = <2>; + interrupt-parent = <&switch_intc>; + interrupts = <2>; + }; + phy3: phy@3 { + reg = <3>; + interrupt-parent = <&switch_intc>; + interrupts = <3>; + }; + phy4: phy@4 { + reg = <4>; + interrupt-parent = <&switch_intc>; + interrupts = <12>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/vitesse,vsc73xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/vitesse,vsc73xx.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ed4710c40641 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/vitesse,vsc73xx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +Vitesse VSC73xx Switches +======================== + +This defines device tree bindings for the Vitesse VSC73xx switch chips. +The Vitesse company has been acquired by Microsemi and Microsemi in turn +acquired by Microchip but retains this vendor branding. + +The currently supported switch chips are: +Vitesse VSC7385 SparX-G5 5+1-port Integrated Gigabit Ethernet Switch +Vitesse VSC7388 SparX-G8 8-port Integrated Gigabit Ethernet Switch +Vitesse VSC7395 SparX-G5e 5+1-port Integrated Gigabit Ethernet Switch +Vitesse VSC7398 SparX-G8e 8-port Integrated Gigabit Ethernet Switch + +The device tree node is an SPI device so it must reside inside a SPI bus +device tree node, see spi/spi-bus.txt + +Required properties: + +- compatible: must be exactly one of: + "vitesse,vsc7385" + "vitesse,vsc7388" + "vitesse,vsc7395" + "vitesse,vsc7398" +- gpio-controller: indicates that this switch is also a GPIO controller, + see gpio/gpio.txt +- #gpio-cells: this must be set to <2> and indicates that we are a twocell + GPIO controller, see gpio/gpio.txt + +Optional properties: + +- reset-gpios: a handle to a GPIO line that can issue reset of the chip. + It should be tagged as active low. + +Required subnodes: + +See net/dsa/dsa.txt for a list of additional required and optional properties +and subnodes of DSA switches. + +Examples: + +switch@0 { + compatible = "vitesse,vsc7395"; + reg = <0>; + /* Specified for 2.5 MHz or below */ + spi-max-frequency = <2500000>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + port@0 { + reg = <0>; + label = "lan1"; + }; + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + label = "lan2"; + }; + port@2 { + reg = <2>; + label = "lan3"; + }; + port@3 { + reg = <3>; + label = "lan4"; + }; + vsc: port@6 { + reg = <6>; + label = "cpu"; + ethernet = <&gmac1>; + phy-mode = "rgmii"; + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + full-duplex; + pause; + }; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dwmac-sun8i.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dwmac-sun8i.txt index cfe724398a12..5bb3a18cc38d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dwmac-sun8i.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dwmac-sun8i.txt @@ -19,8 +19,6 @@ Required properties: - reset-names: must be "stmmaceth" - phy-mode: See ethernet.txt - phy-handle: See ethernet.txt -- #address-cells: shall be 1 -- #size-cells: shall be 0 - syscon: A phandle to the device containing the EMAC or GMAC clock register Optional properties: @@ -86,8 +84,6 @@ emac: ethernet@1c0b000 { reset-names = "stmmaceth"; clocks = <&ccu CLK_BUS_EMAC>; clock-names = "stmmaceth"; - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; phy-handle = <&int_mii_phy>; phy-mode = "mii"; @@ -137,8 +133,6 @@ emac: ethernet@1c0b000 { reset-names = "stmmaceth"; clocks = <&ccu CLK_BUS_EMAC>; clock-names = "stmmaceth"; - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; phy-handle = <&ext_rgmii_phy>; phy-mode = "rgmii"; @@ -191,8 +185,6 @@ emac: ethernet@1c0b000 { reset-names = "stmmaceth"; clocks = <&ccu CLK_BUS_EMAC>; clock-names = "stmmaceth"; - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; phy-handle = <&ext_rgmii_phy>; phy-mode = "rgmii"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fman.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fman.txt index df873d1f3b7c..299c0dcd67db 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fman.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fman.txt @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ PROPERTIES Must include one of the following: - "fsl,fman-dtsec" for dTSEC MAC - "fsl,fman-xgec" for XGEC MAC - - "fsl,fman-memac for mEMAC MAC + - "fsl,fman-memac" for mEMAC MAC - cell-index Usage: required @@ -356,30 +356,7 @@ ethernet@e0000 { ============================================================================ FMan IEEE 1588 Node -DESCRIPTION - -The FMan interface to support IEEE 1588 - - -PROPERTIES - -- compatible - Usage: required - Value type: <stringlist> - Definition: A standard property. - Must include "fsl,fman-ptp-timer". - -- reg - Usage: required - Value type: <prop-encoded-array> - Definition: A standard property. - -EXAMPLE - -ptp-timer@fe000 { - compatible = "fsl,fman-ptp-timer"; - reg = <0xfe000 0x1000>; -}; +Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt ============================================================================= FMan MDIO Node diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-dsaf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-dsaf.txt index abfbeecbcf39..8ee4b1cedae8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-dsaf.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/hisilicon-hns-dsaf.txt @@ -9,7 +9,6 @@ Required properties: "6port-16rss", "6port-16vf", "single-port". -- interrupt-parent: the interrupt parent of this device. - interrupts: should contain the DSA Fabric and rcb interrupt. - reg: specifies base physical address(es) and size of the device registers. The first region is external interface control register base and size(optional, diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ibm,emac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ibm,emac.txt index 44b842b6ca15..c0c14aa3f97c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ibm,emac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ibm,emac.txt @@ -18,7 +18,6 @@ "ibm,emac4". For Axon, thus, we have: "ibm,emac-axon", "ibm,emac4" - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for EMAC IRQ and WOL IRQ> - - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping - reg : <registers mapping> - local-mac-address : 6 bytes, MAC address - mal-device : phandle of the associated McMAL node diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-bt-8xxx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-bt-8xxx.txt index 3d27c68613a6..957e5e5c2927 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-bt-8xxx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/marvell-bt-8xxx.txt @@ -22,7 +22,6 @@ Optional properties: - marvell,wakeup-gap-ms: wakeup gap represents wakeup latency of the host platform. The value will be configured to firmware. This is needed to work chip's sleep feature as expected (u16). - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller - interrupt-names: Used only for USB based devices (See below) - interrupts : specifies the interrupt pin number to the cpu. For SDIO, the driver will use the first interrupt specified in the interrupt diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek,mt7620-gsw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek,mt7620-gsw.txt index aa6313024176..358fed2fab43 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek,mt7620-gsw.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek,mt7620-gsw.txt @@ -6,8 +6,6 @@ The mediatek gigabit switch can be found on Mediatek SoCs (mt7620, mt7621). Required properties: - compatible: Should be "mediatek,mt7620-gsw" or "mediatek,mt7621-gsw" - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the gigabit switches interrupt - resets: Should contain the gigabit switches resets - reset-names: Should contain the reset names "gsw" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..14ceb2a5b4e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-bluetooth.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +MediaTek SoC built-in Bluetooth Devices +================================== + +This device is a serial attached device to BTIF device and thus it must be a +child node of the serial node with BTIF. The dt-bindings details for BTIF +device can be known via Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/8250.txt. + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Must be + "mediatek,mt7622-bluetooth": for MT7622 SoC +- clocks: Should be the clock specifiers corresponding to the entry in + clock-names property. +- clock-names: Should contain "ref" entries. +- power-domains: Phandle to the power domain that the device is part of + +Example: + + btif: serial@1100c000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt7622-btif", + "mediatek,mtk-btif"; + reg = <0 0x1100c000 0 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 90 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + clocks = <&pericfg CLK_PERI_BTIF_PD>; + clock-names = "main"; + reg-shift = <2>; + reg-io-width = <4>; + + bluetooth { + compatible = "mediatek,mt7622-bluetooth"; + power-domains = <&scpsys MT7622_POWER_DOMAIN_WB>; + clocks = <&clk25m>; + clock-names = "ref"; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-net.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-net.txt index 53c13ee384a4..503f2b9194e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-net.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-net.txt @@ -30,9 +30,6 @@ Required properties: - mediatek,pctl: phandle to the syscon node that handles the ports slew rate and driver current: only for MT2701 and MT7623 SoC -Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device * Ethernet MAC node Required properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,enc28j60.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,enc28j60.txt index 44dff53d4dda..24626e082b83 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,enc28j60.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/microchip,enc28j60.txt @@ -8,9 +8,6 @@ the SPI master node. Required properties: - compatible: Should be "microchip,enc28j60" - reg: Specify the SPI chip select the ENC28J60 is wired to -- interrupt-parent: Specify the phandle of the source interrupt, see interrupt - binding documentation for details. Usually this is the GPIO bank - the interrupt line is wired to. - interrupts: Specify the interrupt index within the interrupt controller (referred to above in interrupt-parent) and interrupt type. The ENC28J60 natively generates falling edge interrupts, however, additional board logic diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/nxp-nci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/nxp-nci.txt index 92486733df71..cfaf88998918 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/nxp-nci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/nxp-nci.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "nxp,nxp-nci-i2c". - clock-frequency: I²C work frequency. - reg: address on the bus -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - enable-gpios: Output GPIO pin used for enabling/disabling the chip - firmware-gpios: Output GPIO pin used to enter firmware download mode diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/pn533-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/pn533-i2c.txt index 122460e42e3c..2efe3886b95b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/pn533-i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/pn533-i2c.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "nxp,pn532-i2c" or "nxp,pn533-i2c". - clock-frequency: I²C work frequency. - reg: address on the bus -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected Optional SoC Specific Properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/pn544.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/pn544.txt index 538a86f7b2b0..5b937403fed6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/pn544.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/pn544.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "nxp,pn544-i2c". - clock-frequency: IC work frequency. - reg: address on the bus -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - enable-gpios: Output GPIO pin used for enabling/disabling the PN544 - firmware-gpios: Output GPIO pin used to enter firmware download mode diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/s3fwrn5.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/s3fwrn5.txt index ed5b3eaadb39..f02f6fb7f81c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/s3fwrn5.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/s3fwrn5.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "samsung,s3fwrn5-i2c". - reg: address on the bus -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - s3fwrn5,en-gpios: Output GPIO pin used for enabling/disabling the chip - s3fwrn5,fw-gpios: Output GPIO pin used to enter firmware mode and diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-i2c.txt index b46d473be425..baa8f8133d19 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-i2c.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "st,st21nfcb-i2c" or "st,st21nfcc-i2c". - clock-frequency: I²C work frequency. - reg: address on the bus -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - reset-gpios: Output GPIO pin used to reset the ST21NFCB diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-spi.txt index 54ce8e7ac681..d33343330b94 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st-nci-spi.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "st,st21nfcb-spi" - spi-max-frequency: Maximum SPI frequency (<= 4000000). -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - reset-gpios: Output GPIO pin used to reset the ST21NFCB diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st21nfca.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st21nfca.txt index 5ee9440fa9ad..b8bd90f80e12 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st21nfca.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st21nfca.txt @@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "st,st21nfca-i2c". - clock-frequency: I²C work frequency. - reg: address on the bus -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller -- interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - enable-gpios: Output GPIO pin used for enabling/disabling the ST21NFCA Optional SoC Specific Properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st95hf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st95hf.txt index 08a202e00d47..3f373a1e20ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st95hf.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/st95hf.txt @@ -17,9 +17,6 @@ Required properties: - enable-gpio: GPIO line to enable ST95HF transceiver. -- interrupt-parent : Standard way to specify the controller to which - ST95HF transceiver's interrupt is routed. - - interrupts : Standard way to define ST95HF transceiver's out interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/trf7970a.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/trf7970a.txt index 5ca9362ef127..ba1934b950e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/trf7970a.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/nfc/trf7970a.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "ti,trf7970a". - spi-max-frequency: Maximum SPI frequency (<= 2000000). -- interrupt-parent: phandle of parent interrupt handler. - interrupts: A single interrupt specifier. - ti,enable-gpios: One or two GPIO entries used for 'EN' and 'EN2' pins on the TRF7970A. EN2 is optional. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt index d2169a56f5e3..17c1d2bd00f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ PHY nodes Required properties: - interrupts : interrupt specifier for the sole interrupt. - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - reg : The ID number for the phy, usually a small integer Optional Properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qca,qca7000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qca,qca7000.txt index 3987846b3fd3..e4a8a51086df 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qca,qca7000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qca,qca7000.txt @@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ Required properties: - spi-cpol : Must be set Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent : Specify the pHandle of the source interrupt - spi-max-frequency : Maximum frequency of the SPI bus the chip can operate at. Numbers smaller than 1000000 or greater than 16000000 are invalid. Missing the property will set the SPI diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qualcomm-bluetooth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qualcomm-bluetooth.txt index 0ea18a53cc29..824c0e23c544 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qualcomm-bluetooth.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/qualcomm-bluetooth.txt @@ -10,12 +10,25 @@ device the slave device is attached to. Required properties: - compatible: should contain one of the following: * "qcom,qca6174-bt" + * "qcom,wcn3990-bt" + +Optional properties for compatible string qcom,qca6174-bt: -Optional properties: - enable-gpios: gpio specifier used to enable chip - clocks: clock provided to the controller (SUSCLK_32KHZ) -Example: +Required properties for compatible string qcom,wcn3990-bt: + + - vddio-supply: VDD_IO supply regulator handle. + - vddxo-supply: VDD_XO supply regulator handle. + - vddrf-supply: VDD_RF supply regulator handle. + - vddch0-supply: VDD_CH0 supply regulator handle. + +Optional properties for compatible string qcom,wcn3990-bt: + + - max-speed: see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/slave-device.txt + +Examples: serial@7570000 { label = "BT-UART"; @@ -28,3 +41,15 @@ serial@7570000 { clocks = <&divclk4>; }; }; + +serial@898000 { + bluetooth { + compatible = "qcom,wcn3990-bt"; + + vddio-supply = <&vreg_s4a_1p8>; + vddxo-supply = <&vreg_l7a_1p8>; + vddrf-supply = <&vreg_l17a_1p3>; + vddch0-supply = <&vreg_l25a_3p3>; + max-speed = <3200000>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ralink,rt2880-net.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ralink,rt2880-net.txt index 88b095d1f13b..9fe1a0a22e44 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ralink,rt2880-net.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ralink,rt2880-net.txt @@ -14,8 +14,6 @@ Required properties: "ralink,rt3050-eth", "ralink,rt3883-eth", "ralink,rt5350-eth", "mediatek,mt7620-eth", "mediatek,mt7621-eth" - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the frame engines interrupt - resets: Should contain the frame engines resets - reset-names: Should contain the reset names "fe". If a switch is present diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ralink,rt3050-esw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ralink,rt3050-esw.txt index 2e79bd376c56..87e315856efa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ralink,rt3050-esw.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ralink,rt3050-esw.txt @@ -7,8 +7,6 @@ SoCs (RT3x5x, RT5350, MT76x8). Required properties: - compatible: Should be "ralink,rt3050-esw" - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the embedded switches interrupt - resets: Should contain the embedded switches resets - reset-names: Should contain the reset names "esw" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/renesas,ravb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/renesas,ravb.txt index fac897d54423..da249b7c406c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/renesas,ravb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/renesas,ravb.txt @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,etheravb-rcar-gen2" as a fallback for the above R-Car Gen2 and RZ/G1 devices. + - "renesas,etheravb-r8a774a1" for the R8A774A1 SoC. - "renesas,etheravb-r8a7795" for the R8A7795 SoC. - "renesas,etheravb-r8a7796" for the R8A7796 SoC. - "renesas,etheravb-r8a77965" for the R8A77965 SoC. @@ -24,7 +25,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,etheravb-r8a77990" for the R8A77990 SoC. - "renesas,etheravb-r8a77995" for the R8A77995 SoC. - "renesas,etheravb-rcar-gen3" as a fallback for the above - R-Car Gen3 devices. + R-Car Gen3 and RZ/G2 devices. When compatible with the generic version, nodes must list the SoC-specific version corresponding to the platform first followed by @@ -47,8 +48,6 @@ Required properties: - pinctrl-0: phandle, referring to a default pin configuration node. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that services - interrupts for this device. - interrupt-names: A list of interrupt names. For the R-Car Gen 3 SoCs this property is mandatory; it should include one entry per channel, named "ch%u", diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/rockchip-dwmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/rockchip-dwmac.txt index 9c16ee2965a2..3b71da7e8742 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/rockchip-dwmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/rockchip-dwmac.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ The device node has following properties. Required properties: - compatible: should be "rockchip,<name>-gamc" + "rockchip,px30-gmac": found on PX30 SoCs "rockchip,rk3128-gmac": found on RK312x SoCs "rockchip,rk3228-gmac": found on RK322x SoCs "rockchip,rk3288-gmac": found on RK3288 SoCs diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/samsung-sxgbe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/samsung-sxgbe.txt index 888c250197fe..46e591178911 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/samsung-sxgbe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/samsung-sxgbe.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "samsung,sxgbe-v2.0a" - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the SXGBE interrupts These interrupts are ordered by fixed and follows variable trasmit DMA interrupts, receive DMA interrupts and lpi interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sh_eth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sh_eth.txt index 82a4cf2c145d..76db9f13ad96 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sh_eth.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sh_eth.txt @@ -35,8 +35,6 @@ Required properties: - pinctrl-0: phandle, referring to a default pin configuration node. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that services - interrupts for this device. - pinctrl-names: pin configuration state name ("default"). - renesas,no-ether-link: boolean, specify when a board does not provide a proper Ether LINK signal. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwc-qos-ethernet.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwc-qos-ethernet.txt index 21d27aa4c68c..36f1aef585f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwc-qos-ethernet.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwc-qos-ethernet.txt @@ -83,8 +83,6 @@ Required properties: - "snps,dwc-qos-ethernet-4.10" (deprecated): - "phy_ref_clk" - "apb_clk" -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the core's combined interrupt signal - phy-mode: See ethernet.txt file in the same directory - resets: Phandle and reset specifiers for each entry in reset-names, in the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt index 3a28a5d8857d..cb694062afff 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt @@ -1,11 +1,10 @@ -* STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Ethernet driver (GMAC) +* STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000/2500/10000 Ethernet (GMAC/XGMAC) Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "snps,dwmac-<ip_version>", "snps,dwmac" +- compatible: Should be "snps,dwmac-<ip_version>", "snps,dwmac" or + "snps,dwxgmac-<ip_version>", "snps,dwxgmac". For backwards compatibility: "st,spear600-gmac" is also supported. - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the STMMAC interrupts - interrupt-names: Should contain a list of interrupt names corresponding to the interrupts in the interrupts property, if available. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/brcm,bcm43xx-fmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/brcm,bcm43xx-fmac.txt index 86602f264dce..cffb2d6876e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/brcm,bcm43xx-fmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/brcm,bcm43xx-fmac.txt @@ -11,8 +11,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - brcm,drive-strength : drive strength used for SDIO pins on device in mA (default = 6). - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller to which the - device interrupts are connected. - interrupts : specifies attributes for the out-of-band interrupt (host-wake). When not specified the device will use in-band SDIO interrupts. - interrupt-names : name of the out-of-band interrupt, which must be set diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/marvell-8xxx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/marvell-8xxx.txt index 59de8646862d..9bf9bbac16e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/marvell-8xxx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/marvell-8xxx.txt @@ -29,7 +29,6 @@ Optional properties: - marvell,wakeup-pin : a wakeup pin number of wifi chip which will be configured to firmware. Firmware will wakeup the host using this pin during suspend/resume. - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller - interrupts : interrupt pin number to the cpu. driver will request an irq based on this interrupt number. during system suspend, the irq will be enabled so that the wifi chip can wakeup host platform under certain condition. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wl1251.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wl1251.txt index 189ae5cad8f7..bb2fcde6f7ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wl1251.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wl1251.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : Chip select address of device - spi-max-frequency : Maximum SPI clocking speed of device in Hz - interrupts : Should contain interrupt line -- interrupt-parent : Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - vio-supply : phandle to regulator providing VIO - ti,power-gpio : GPIO connected to chip's PMEN pin diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wlcore,spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wlcore,spi.txt index 8f9ced076fe1..cb5c9e1569ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wlcore,spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wlcore,spi.txt @@ -17,9 +17,7 @@ Required properties: * "ti,wl1837" - reg : Chip select address of device - spi-max-frequency : Maximum SPI clocking speed of device in Hz -- interrupt-parent, interrupts : - Should contain parameters for 1 interrupt line. - Interrupt parameters: parent, line number, type. +- interrupts : Should contain parameters for 1 interrupt line. - vwlan-supply : Point the node of the regulator that powers/enable the wl12xx/wl18xx chip diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wlcore.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wlcore.txt index f42f6b0f1bc7..9306c4dadd46 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wlcore.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/ti,wlcore.txt @@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupts : specifies attributes for the out-of-band interrupt. Optional properties: - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller to which the - device interrupts are connected. - ref-clock-frequency : ref clock frequency in Hz - tcxo-clock-frequency : tcxo clock frequency in Hz diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt index 729f6747813b..792bc5fafeb9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Freescale i.MX6 On-Chip OTP Controller (OCOTP) device tree bindings This binding represents the on-chip eFuse OTP controller found on -i.MX6Q/D, i.MX6DL/S, i.MX6SL, i.MX6SX and i.MX6UL SoCs. +i.MX6Q/D, i.MX6DL/S, i.MX6SL, i.MX6SX, i.MX6UL and i.MX6SLL SoCs. Required properties: - compatible: should be one of @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties: "fsl,imx6sx-ocotp" (i.MX6SX), "fsl,imx6ul-ocotp" (i.MX6UL), "fsl,imx7d-ocotp" (i.MX7D/S), + "fsl,imx6sll-ocotp" (i.MX6SLL), followed by "syscon". - #address-cells : Should be 1 - #size-cells : Should be 1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/sc27xx-efuse.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/sc27xx-efuse.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..586c08286aa9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/sc27xx-efuse.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ += Spreadtrum SC27XX PMIC eFuse device tree bindings = + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be one of the following. + "sprd,sc2720-efuse" + "sprd,sc2721-efuse" + "sprd,sc2723-efuse" + "sprd,sc2730-efuse" + "sprd,sc2731-efuse" +- reg: Specify the address offset of efuse controller. +- hwlocks: Reference to a phandle of a hwlock provider node. + += Data cells = +Are child nodes of eFuse, bindings of which as described in +bindings/nvmem/nvmem.txt + +Example: + + sc2731_pmic: pmic@0 { + compatible = "sprd,sc2731"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <26000000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 31 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + efuse@380 { + compatible = "sprd,sc2731-efuse"; + reg = <0x380>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + hwlocks = <&hwlock 12>; + + /* Data cells */ + thermal_calib: calib@10 { + reg = <0x10 0x2>; + }; + }; + }; + += Data consumers = +Are device nodes which consume nvmem data cells. + +Example: + + thermal { + ... + nvmem-cells = <&thermal_calib>; + nvmem-cell-names = "calibration"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie-msi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie-msi.txt index 09cd3bc4d038..9514c327d31b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie-msi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie-msi.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - reg-names: must include the following entries: "csr": CSR registers "vector_slave": vectors slave port region -- interrupt-parent: interrupt source phandle. - interrupts: specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the parent interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt index a1dc9366a8fc..6c396f17c91a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/altera-pcie.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - reg-names: must include the following entries: "Txs": TX slave port region "Cra": Control register access region -- interrupt-parent: interrupt source phandle. - interrupts: specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the parent interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/brcm,iproc-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/brcm,iproc-pcie.txt index b8e48b4762b2..df065aa53a83 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/brcm,iproc-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/brcm,iproc-pcie.txt @@ -65,7 +65,6 @@ When the iProc event queue based MSI is used, one needs to define the following properties in the MSI device node: - compatible: Must be "brcm,iproc-msi" - msi-controller: claims itself as an MSI controller -- interrupt-parent: Link to its parent interrupt device - interrupts: List of interrupt IDs from its parent interrupt device Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/cdns,cdns-pcie-ep.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/cdns,cdns-pcie-ep.txt index 9a305237fa6e..4a0475e2ba7e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/cdns,cdns-pcie-ep.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/cdns,cdns-pcie-ep.txt @@ -9,6 +9,9 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - max-functions: Maximum number of functions that can be configured (default 1). +- phys: From PHY bindings: List of Generic PHY phandles. One per lane if more + than one in the list. If only one PHY listed it must manage all lanes. +- phy-names: List of names to identify the PHY. Example: @@ -19,4 +22,6 @@ pcie@fc000000 { reg-names = "reg", "mem"; cdns,max-outbound-regions = <16>; max-functions = /bits/ 8 <8>; + phys = <&ep_phy0 &ep_phy1>; + phy-names = "pcie-lane0","pcie-lane1"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/cdns,cdns-pcie-host.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/cdns,cdns-pcie-host.txt index 20a33f38f69d..91de69c713a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/cdns,cdns-pcie-host.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/cdns,cdns-pcie-host.txt @@ -24,6 +24,9 @@ Optional properties: translations (default 32) - vendor-id: The PCI vendor ID (16 bits, default is design dependent) - device-id: The PCI device ID (16 bits, default is design dependent) +- phys: From PHY bindings: List of Generic PHY phandles. One per lane if more + than one in the list. If only one PHY listed it must manage all lanes. +- phy-names: List of names to identify the PHY. Example: @@ -57,4 +60,7 @@ pcie@fb000000 { interrupt-map-mask = <0x0 0x0 0x0 0x7>; msi-parent = <&its_pci>; + + phys = <&pcie_phy0>; + phy-names = "pcie-phy"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/faraday,ftpci100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/faraday,ftpci100.txt index 89a84f8aa621..5f8cb4962f8d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/faraday,ftpci100.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/faraday,ftpci100.txt @@ -41,7 +41,6 @@ Mandatory subnodes: - For "faraday,ftpci100" a node representing the interrupt-controller inside the host bridge is mandatory. It has the following mandatory properties: - interrupt: see interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt - - interrupt-parent: see interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt - interrupt-controller: see interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt - #address-cells: set to <0> - #interrupt-cells: set to <1> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mobiveil-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mobiveil-pcie.txt index 65038aa642e5..a618d4787dd7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mobiveil-pcie.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/mobiveil-pcie.txt @@ -26,9 +26,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value must be 1. -- interrupt-parent : phandle to the interrupt controller that - it is attached to, it should be set to gic to point to - ARM's Generic Interrupt Controller node in system DT. - interrupts: The interrupt line of the PCIe controller last cell of this field is set to 4 to denote it as IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH type interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-keystone.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-keystone.txt index 3d4a209b0fd0..4dd17de549a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-keystone.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci-keystone.txt @@ -17,7 +17,6 @@ reg: index 1 is the base address and length of DW application registers. pcie_msi_intc : Interrupt controller device node for MSI IRQ chip interrupt-cells: should be set to 1 - interrupt-parent: Parent interrupt controller phandle interrupts: GIC interrupt lines connected to PCI MSI interrupt lines Example: @@ -37,8 +36,6 @@ pcie_msi_intc : Interrupt controller device node for MSI IRQ chip pcie_intc: Interrupt controller device node for Legacy IRQ chip interrupt-cells: should be set to 1 - interrupt-parent: Parent interrupt controller phandle - interrupts: GIC interrupt lines connected to PCI Legacy interrupt lines Example: pcie_intc: legacy-interrupt-controller { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt index a04ab1b76211..ffba4f63d71f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/ralink,rt3883-pci.txt @@ -41,9 +41,6 @@ - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The value must be 1. - - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - - interrupts: specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the parent interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,sr-pcie-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,sr-pcie-phy.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8d82286beb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,sr-pcie-phy.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +Broadcom Stingray PCIe PHY + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "brcm,sr-pcie-phy" +- reg: base address and length of the PCIe SS register space +- brcm,sr-cdru: phandle to the CDRU syscon node +- brcm,sr-mhb: phandle to the MHB syscon node +- #phy-cells: Must be 1, denotes the PHY index + +For PAXB based root complex, one can have a configuration of up to 8 PHYs +PHY index goes from 0 to 7 + +For the internal PAXC based root complex, PHY index is always 8 + +Example: + mhb: syscon@60401000 { + compatible = "brcm,sr-mhb", "syscon"; + reg = <0 0x60401000 0 0x38c>; + }; + + cdru: syscon@6641d000 { + compatible = "brcm,sr-cdru", "syscon"; + reg = <0 0x6641d000 0 0x400>; + }; + + pcie_phy: phy@40000000 { + compatible = "brcm,sr-pcie-phy"; + reg = <0 0x40000000 0 0x800>; + brcm,sr-cdru = <&cdru>; + brcm,sr-mhb = <&mhb>; + #phy-cells = <1>; + }; + + /* users of the PCIe PHY */ + + pcie0: pcie@48000000 { + ... + ... + phys = <&pcie_phy 0>; + phy-names = "pcie-phy"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-ath79-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-ath79-usb.txt index cafe2197dad9..c3a29c5feea3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-ath79-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-ath79-usb.txt @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: "qca,ar7100-usb-phy" - #phys-cells: should be 0 -- reset-names: "usb-phy"[, "usb-suspend-override"] +- reset-names: "phy"[, "suspend-override"] - resets: references to the reset controllers Example: @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Example: usb-phy { compatible = "qca,ar7100-usb-phy"; - reset-names = "usb-phy", "usb-suspend-override"; + reset-names = "phy", "suspend-override"; resets = <&rst 4>, <&rst 3>; #phy-cells = <0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mtk-tphy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mtk-tphy.txt index 0d34b2b4a6b7..a5f7a4f0dbc1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mtk-tphy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-mtk-tphy.txt @@ -47,6 +47,12 @@ Required properties (port (child) node): - PHY_TYPE_PCIE - PHY_TYPE_SATA +Optional properties (PHY_TYPE_USB2 port (child) node): +- mediatek,eye-src : u32, the value of slew rate calibrate +- mediatek,eye-vrt : u32, the selection of VRT reference voltage +- mediatek,eye-term : u32, the selection of HS_TX TERM reference voltage +- mediatek,bc12 : bool, enable BC12 of u2phy if support it + Example: u3phy: usb-phy@11290000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt index 266a1bb8bb6e..0c7629e88bf3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-qmp-phy.txt @@ -12,7 +12,14 @@ Required properties: "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-phy" for USB3 QMP V3 phy on sdm845, "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-uni-phy" for USB3 QMP V3 UNI phy on sdm845. - - reg: offset and length of register set for PHY's common serdes block. + - reg: + - For "qcom,sdm845-qmp-usb3-phy": + - index 0: address and length of register set for PHY's common serdes + block. + - named register "dp_com" (using reg-names): address and length of the + DP_COM control block. + - For all others: + - offset and length of register set for PHY's common serdes block. - #clock-cells: must be 1 - Phy pll outputs a bunch of clocks for Tx, Rx and Pipe @@ -60,7 +67,10 @@ Required nodes: Required properties for child node: - reg: list of offset and length pairs of register sets for PHY blocks - - tx, rx and pcs. + - index 0: tx + - index 1: rx + - index 2: pcs + - index 3: pcs_misc (optional) - #phy-cells: must be 0 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-pcie.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-pcie.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..63853b35e083 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-pcie.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +* Renesas R-Car generation 3 PCIe PHY + +This file provides information on what the device node for the R-Car +generation 3 PCIe PHY contains. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "renesas,r8a77980-pcie-phy" if the device is a part of the + R8A77980 SoC. +- reg: offset and length of the register block. +- clocks: clock phandle and specifier pair. +- power-domains: power domain phandle and specifier pair. +- resets: reset phandle and specifier pair. +- #phy-cells: see phy-bindings.txt in the same directory, must be <0>. + +Example (R-Car V3H): + + pcie-phy@e65d0000 { + compatible = "renesas,r8a77980-pcie-phy"; + reg = <0 0xe65d0000 0 0x8000>; + #phy-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&cpg CPG_MOD 319>; + power-domains = <&sysc 32>; + resets = <&cpg 319>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt index dbd137c079e2..fb4a204da2bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rcar-gen3-phy-usb2.txt @@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ Required properties: SoC. "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a77965" if the device is a part of an R8A77965 SoC. + "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a77990" if the device is a part of an + R8A77990 SoC. "renesas,usb2-phy-r8a77995" if the device is a part of an R8A77995 SoC. "renesas,rcar-gen3-usb2-phy" for a generic R-Car Gen3 compatible device. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/actions,s900-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/actions,s900-pinctrl.txt index 8fb5a53775e8..81b58dddd3ed 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/actions,s900-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/actions,s900-pinctrl.txt @@ -19,6 +19,10 @@ Required Properties: defines the interrupt number, the second encodes the trigger flags described in bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +- interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller. There is one GPIO + interrupt per GPIO bank. The number of interrupts listed depends + on the number of GPIO banks on the SoC. The interrupts must be + ordered by bank, starting with bank 0. Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the @@ -180,6 +184,12 @@ Example: #gpio-cells = <2>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 36 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 37 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 38 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 39 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 40 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 16 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; uart2-default: uart2-default { pinmux { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pio4-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pio4-pinctrl.txt index 61ac75706cc9..04d16fb69eb7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pio4-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/atmel,at91-pio4-pinctrl.txt @@ -36,6 +36,8 @@ Optional properties: - GENERIC_PINCONFIG: generic pinconfig options to use, bias-disable, bias-pull-down, bias-pull-up, drive-open-drain, input-schmitt-enable, input-debounce, output-low, output-high. +- atmel,drive-strength: 0 or 1 for low drive, 2 for medium drive and 3 for +high drive. The default value is low drive. Example: @@ -66,6 +68,7 @@ Example: pinmux = <PIN_PB0>, <PIN_PB5>; bias-pull-up; + atmel,drive-strength = <ATMEL_PIO_DRVSTR_ME>; }; pinctrl_sdmmc1_default: sdmmc1_default { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/berlin,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/berlin,pinctrl.txt index f8fa28ce163e..0a2d5516e1f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/berlin,pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/berlin,pinctrl.txt @@ -23,7 +23,8 @@ Required properties: "marvell,berlin2q-system-pinctrl", "marvell,berlin4ct-avio-pinctrl", "marvell,berlin4ct-soc-pinctrl", - "marvell,berlin4ct-system-pinctrl" + "marvell,berlin4ct-system-pinctrl", + "syna,as370-soc-pinctrl" Required subnode-properties: - groups: a list of strings describing the group names. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/cirrus,madera-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/cirrus,madera-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b0e36cf0d289 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/cirrus,madera-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +Cirrus Logic Madera class audio codecs pinctrl driver + +The Cirrus Logic Madera codecs provide a number of GPIO functions for +interfacing to external hardware and to provide logic outputs to other devices. +Certain groups of GPIO pins also have an alternate function, normally as an +audio interface. + +The set of available GPIOs, functions and alternate function groups differs +between codecs so refer to the datasheet for the codec for further information +on what is supported on that device. + +The properties for this driver exist within the parent MFD driver node. + +See also + the core bindings for the parent MFD driver: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/madera.txt + + the generic pinmix bindings: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt + +Required properties of parent mfd node: + - pinctrl-names : must be "default" + - pinctrl-0 : a phandle to the node containing the subnodes containing default + configurations + +Required subnodes: + One subnode is required to contain the default settings. It contains an + arbitrary number of configuration subnodes, one for each group or pin + configuration you want to apply as a default. + +Required properties of configuration subnodes: + - groups : name of one pin group to configure. One of: + aif1, aif2, aif3, aif4, mif1, mif2, mif3, pdmspk1, pdmspk2, + dmic4, dmic5, dmic6, + gpio1, gpio2, ..., gpio40 + The gpioN groups select the single pin of this name for configuration + +Optional properties of configuration subnodes: + Any configuration option not explicitly listed in the dts will be left at + chip default setting. + + - function : name of function to assign to this group. One of: + aif1, aif2, aif3, aif4, mif1, mif2, mif3, pdmspk1, pdmspk2, + dmic3, dmic4, dmic5, dmic6, + io, dsp-gpio, irq1, irq2, + fll1-clk, fll1-lock, fll2-clk, fll2-lock, fll3-clk, fll3-lock, + fllao-clk, fllao-lock, + opclk, opclk-async, pwm1, pwm2, spdif, + asrc1-in1-lock, asrc1-in2-lock, asrc2-in1-lock, asrc2-in2-lock, + spkl-short-circuit, spkr-short-circuit, spk-shutdown, + spk-overheat-shutdown, spk-overheat-warn, + timer1-sts, timer2-sts, timer3-sts, timer4-sts, timer5-sts, timer6-sts, + timer7-sts, timer8-sts, + log1-fifo-ne, log2-fifo-ne, log3-fifo-ne, log4-fifo-ne, log5-fifo-ne, + log6-fifo-ne, log7-fifo-ne, log8-fifo-ne, + + - bias-disable : disable pull-up and pull-down + - bias-bus-hold : enable buskeeper + - bias-pull-up : output is pulled-up + - bias-pull-down : output is pulled-down + - drive-push-pull : CMOS output + - drive-open-drain : open-drain output + - drive-strength : drive strength in mA. Valid values are 4 or 8 + - input-schmitt-enable : enable schmitt-trigger mode + - input-schmitt-disable : disable schmitt-trigger mode + - input-debounce : A value of 0 disables debounce, a value !=0 enables + debounce + - output-low : set the pin to output mode with low level + - output-high : set the pin to output mode with high level + +Example: + +cs47l85@0 { + compatible = "cirrus,cs47l85"; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&cs47l85_defaults>; + + cs47l85_defaults: cs47l85-gpio-defaults { + aif1 { + groups = "aif1"; + function = "aif1"; + bias-bus-hold; + }; + + aif2 { + groups = "aif2"; + function = "aif2"; + bias-bus-hold; + }; + + opclk { + groups = "gpio1"; + function = "opclk"; + bias-pull-up; + drive-strength = <8>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mq-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mq-pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..66de75090458 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mq-pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +* Freescale IMX8MQ IOMUX Controller + +Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt and pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory +for common binding part and usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "fsl,imx8mq-iomuxc" +- reg: should contain the base physical address and size of the iomuxc + registers. + +Required properties in sub-nodes: +- fsl,pins: each entry consists of 6 integers and represents the mux and config + setting for one pin. The first 5 integers <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg mux_val + input_val> are specified using a PIN_FUNC_ID macro, which can be found in + imx8mq-pinfunc.h under device tree source folder. The last integer CONFIG is + the pad setting value like pull-up on this pin. Please refer to i.MX8M Quad + Reference Manual for detailed CONFIG settings. + +Examples: + +&uart1 { + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_uart1>; +}; + +iomuxc: pinctrl@30330000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx8mq-iomuxc"; + reg = <0x0 0x30330000 0x0 0x10000>; + + pinctrl_uart1: uart1grp { + fsl,pins = < + MX8MQ_IOMUXC_UART1_RXD_UART1_DCE_RX 0x49 + MX8MQ_IOMUXC_UART1_TXD_UART1_DCE_TX 0x49 + >; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra124-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra124-pinmux.txt index ecb5c0d25218..f4d06bb0b55a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra124-pinmux.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra124-pinmux.txt @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Tegra124 adds the following optional properties for pin configuration subnodes. The macros for options are defined in the include/dt-binding/pinctrl/pinctrl-tegra.h. - nvidia,enable-input: Integer. Enable the pin's input path. - enable :TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE0 and + enable :TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE and disable or output only: TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE. - nvidia,open-drain: Integer. enable: TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra210-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra210-pinmux.txt index a62d82d5fbe9..85f211436b8e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra210-pinmux.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra210-pinmux.txt @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Optional subnode-properties: - nvidia,tristate: Integer. 0: drive, 1: tristate. - nvidia,enable-input: Integer. Enable the pin's input path. - enable :TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE0 and + enable :TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE and disable or output only: TEGRA_PIN_DISABLE. - nvidia,open-drain: Integer. enable: TEGRA_PIN_ENABLE. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt index ad9bbbba36e9..cef2b5855d60 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt @@ -103,6 +103,12 @@ Optional properties: #pinctrl-cells: Number of pin control cells in addition to the index within the pin controller device instance +pinctrl-use-default: Boolean. Indicates that the OS can use the boot default + pin configuration. This allows using an OS that does not have a + driver for the pin controller. This property can be set either + globally for the pin controller or in child nodes for individual + pin group control. + Pin controller devices should contain the pin configuration nodes that client devices reference. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt7622.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt7622.txt index def8fcad8941..3b695131c51b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt7622.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-mt7622.txt @@ -16,8 +16,6 @@ If the property interrupt-controller is defined, following property is required - reg-names: A string describing the "reg" entries. Must contain "eint". - interrupts : The interrupt output from the controller. - #interrupt-cells: Should be two. -- interrupt-parent: Phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external - GPIO interrupts are forwarded to. Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sx150x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sx150x.txt index bf76867168e9..4023bad2fe39 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sx150x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sx150x.txt @@ -25,8 +25,6 @@ Required properties: - gpio-controller: Marks the device as a GPIO controller. Optional properties : -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the parent interrupt controller. - - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. - interrupt-controller: Marks the device as a interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt index a752a4716486..c2dbb3e8d840 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt @@ -10,6 +10,11 @@ Required properties: - #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the gpio pin number and the second cell is used for optional parameters. +- gpio-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +Optional properties: + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -67,6 +72,7 @@ Example: pinctrl-names = "default"; pinctrl-0 = <&gsbi5_uart_default>; + gpio-ranges = <&msmgpio 0 0 90>; gsbi5_uart_default: gsbi5_uart_default { mux { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8084-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8084-pinctrl.txt index c4ea61ac56f2..68e93d5b7ede 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8084-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8084-pinctrl.txt @@ -40,6 +40,14 @@ MSM8960 platform. Definition: must be 2. Specifying the pin number and flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> +- gpio-ranges: + Usage: required + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: + Usage: optional + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -154,6 +162,7 @@ Example: gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&tlmm 0 0 147>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; interrupts = <0 208 0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq4019-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq4019-pinctrl.txt index 93374f478b9e..991be0cd0948 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq4019-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq4019-pinctrl.txt @@ -13,6 +13,11 @@ Required properties: - #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the gpio pin number and the second cell is used for optional parameters. +- gpio-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +Optional properties: + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -64,6 +69,7 @@ Example: gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&tlmm 0 0 100>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; interrupts = <0 208 0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt index 6e88e91feb11..7ed56a1b70fc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt @@ -10,6 +10,11 @@ Required properties: - #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the gpio pin number and the second cell is used for optional parameters. +- gpio-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +Optional properties: + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -67,6 +72,7 @@ Example: gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&pinmux 0 0 69>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; interrupts = <0 32 0x4>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8074-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8074-pinctrl.txt index 407b9443629d..6dd72f8599e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8074-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8074-pinctrl.txt @@ -40,6 +40,14 @@ IPQ8074 platform. Definition: must be 2. Specifying the pin number and flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> +- gpio-ranges: + Usage: required + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: + Usage: optional + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -148,6 +156,7 @@ Example: interrupts = <GIC_SPI 208 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&tlmm 0 0 70>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,mdm9615-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,mdm9615-pinctrl.txt index 1b52f01ddcb7..86ecdcfc4fb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,mdm9615-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,mdm9615-pinctrl.txt @@ -40,6 +40,14 @@ MDM9615 platform. Definition: must be 2. Specifying the pin number and flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> +- gpio-ranges: + Usage: required + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: + Usage: optional + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -127,6 +135,7 @@ Example: gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&msmgpio 0 0 88>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; interrupts = <0 16 0x4>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8660-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8660-pinctrl.txt index df9a838ec5f9..cdc4787e59d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8660-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8660-pinctrl.txt @@ -10,6 +10,11 @@ Required properties: - #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the gpio pin number and the second cell is used for optional parameters. +- gpio-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +Optional properties: + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -62,6 +67,7 @@ Example: gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&msmgpio 0 0 173>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; interrupts = <0 16 0x4>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8916-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8916-pinctrl.txt index 498caff6029e..195a7a0ef0cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8916-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8916-pinctrl.txt @@ -40,6 +40,14 @@ MSM8916 platform. Definition: must be 2. Specifying the pin number and flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> +- gpio-ranges: + Usage: required + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: + Usage: optional + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -162,6 +170,7 @@ Example: interrupts = <0 208 0>; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&tlmm 0 0 122>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8960-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8960-pinctrl.txt index eb8d8aa41f20..5034eb6653c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8960-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8960-pinctrl.txt @@ -40,6 +40,14 @@ MSM8960 platform. Definition: must be 2. Specifying the pin number and flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> +- gpio-ranges: + Usage: required + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: + Usage: optional + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -156,6 +164,7 @@ Example: gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&msmgpio 0 0 152>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; interrupts = <0 16 0x4>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt index 453bd7c76d6b..c22e6c425d0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt @@ -10,6 +10,11 @@ Required properties: - #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the gpio pin number and the second cell is used for optional parameters. +- gpio-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +Optional properties: + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: see ../gpio/gpio.txt Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -87,6 +92,7 @@ Example: gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&msmgpio 0 0 146>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; interrupts = <0 208 0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8994-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8994-pinctrl.txt index 13cd629f896e..f15443f6e78e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8994-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8994-pinctrl.txt @@ -42,6 +42,14 @@ MSM8994 platform. Definition: must be 2. Specifying the pin number and flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> +- gpio-ranges: + Usage: required + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: + Usage: optional + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -160,6 +168,7 @@ Example: interrupts = <GIC_SPI 208 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; gpio-controller; #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-ranges = <&msmgpio 0 0 146>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8996-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8996-pinctrl.txt index aaf01e929eea..fa97f609fe45 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8996-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8996-pinctrl.txt @@ -40,6 +40,14 @@ MSM8996 platform. Definition: must be 2. Specifying the pin number and flags, as defined in <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> +- gpio-ranges: + Usage: required + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + +- gpio-reserved-ranges: + Usage: optional + Definition: see ../gpio/gpio.txt + Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. @@ -180,6 +188,7 @@ Example: reg = <0x01010000 0x300000>; interrupts = <0 208 0>; gpio-controller; + gpio-ranges = <&tlmm 0 0 150>; #gpio-cells = <2>; interrupt-controller; #interrupt-cells = <2>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt index 5c25fcb29fb5..ffd4345415f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ PMIC's from Qualcomm. Usage: required Value type: <string> Definition: must be one of: + "qcom,pm8005-gpio" "qcom,pm8018-gpio" "qcom,pm8038-gpio" "qcom,pm8058-gpio" @@ -15,7 +16,7 @@ PMIC's from Qualcomm. "qcom,pm8921-gpio" "qcom,pm8941-gpio" "qcom,pm8994-gpio" - "qcom,pmi8994-gpio" + "qcom,pm8998-gpio" "qcom,pma8084-gpio" "qcom,pmi8994-gpio" @@ -78,6 +79,7 @@ to specify in a pin configuration subnode: Value type: <string-array> Definition: List of gpio pins affected by the properties specified in this subnode. Valid pins are: + gpio1-gpio4 for pm8005 gpio1-gpio6 for pm8018 gpio1-gpio12 for pm8038 gpio1-gpio40 for pm8058 @@ -86,7 +88,7 @@ to specify in a pin configuration subnode: gpio1-gpio44 for pm8921 gpio1-gpio36 for pm8941 gpio1-gpio22 for pm8994 - gpio1-gpio10 for pmi8994 + gpio1-gpio26 for pm8998 gpio1-gpio22 for pma8084 gpio1-gpio10 for pmi8994 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt index 5e00a21de2bf..70659c917bdc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt @@ -124,8 +124,6 @@ used as system wakeup events. A. External GPIO Interrupts: For supporting external gpio interrupts, the following properties should be specified in the pin-controller device node. - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external - GPIO interrupts are forwarded to. - interrupts: interrupt specifier for the controller. The format and value of the interrupt specifier depends on the interrupt parent for the controller. @@ -145,8 +143,13 @@ A. External GPIO Interrupts: For supporting external gpio interrupts, the B. External Wakeup Interrupts: For supporting external wakeup interrupts, a child node representing the external wakeup interrupt controller should be - included in the pin-controller device node. This child node should include - the following properties. + included in the pin-controller device node. + + Only one pin-controller device node can include external wakeup interrupts + child node (in other words, only one External Wakeup Interrupts + pin-controller is supported). + + This child node should include following properties: - compatible: identifies the type of the external wakeup interrupt controller The possible values are: @@ -156,12 +159,12 @@ B. External Wakeup Interrupts: For supporting external wakeup interrupts, a found on Samsung S3C2412 and S3C2413 SoCs, - samsung,s3c64xx-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller found on Samsung S3C64xx SoCs, + - samsung,s5pv210-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller + found on Samsung S5Pv210 SoCs, - samsung,exynos4210-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller found on Samsung Exynos4210 and S5PC110/S5PV210 SoCs. - samsung,exynos7-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller found on Samsung Exynos7 SoC. - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external - wakeup interrupts are forwarded to. - interrupts: interrupt used by multiplexed wakeup interrupts. In addition, following properties must be present in node of every bank @@ -181,8 +184,6 @@ B. External Wakeup Interrupts: For supporting external wakeup interrupts, a Node of every bank of pins supporting direct wake-up interrupts (without multiplexing) must contain following properties: - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external - wakeup interrupts are forwarded to. - interrupts: interrupts of the interrupt parent which are used for external wakeup interrupts from pins of the bank, must contain interrupts for all pins of the bank. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/st,stm32-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/st,stm32-pinctrl.txt index 9a06e1fdbc42..ef4f2ff4a1aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/st,stm32-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/st,stm32-pinctrl.txt @@ -37,11 +37,10 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - reset: : Reference to the reset controller - - interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external - GPIO interrupts are forwarded to. - - st,syscfg: Should be phandle/offset pair. The phandle to the syscon node - which includes IRQ mux selection register, and the offset of the IRQ mux - selection register. + - st,syscfg: Should be phandle/offset/mask. + -The phandle to the syscon node which includes IRQ mux selection register. + -The offset of the IRQ mux selection register + -The field mask of IRQ mux, needed if different of 0xf. - gpio-ranges: Define a dedicated mapping between a pin-controller and a gpio controller. Format is <&phandle a b c> with: -(phandle): phandle of pin-controller. @@ -55,6 +54,8 @@ Optional properties: NOTE: If "gpio-ranges" is used for a gpio controller, all gpio-controller have to use a "gpio-ranges" entry. More details in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt. + - st,bank-ioport: should correspond to the EXTI IOport selection (EXTI line + used to select GPIOs as interrupts). Example 1: #include <dt-bindings/pinctrl/stm32f429-pinfunc.h> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt index 9b387f861aed..8f8b25a24b8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power_domain.txt @@ -114,18 +114,26 @@ Required properties: - power-domains : A list of PM domain specifiers, as defined by bindings of the power controller that is the PM domain provider. +Optional properties: + - power-domain-names : A list of power domain name strings sorted in the same + order as the power-domains property. Consumers drivers will use + power-domain-names to match power domains with power-domains + specifiers. + Example: leaky-device@12350000 { compatible = "foo,i-leak-current"; reg = <0x12350000 0x1000>; power-domains = <&power 0>; + power-domain-names = "io"; }; leaky-device@12351000 { compatible = "foo,i-leak-current"; reg = <0x12351000 0x1000>; power-domains = <&power 0>, <&power 1> ; + power-domain-names = "io", "clk"; }; The first example above defines a typical PM domain consumer device, which is @@ -133,7 +141,7 @@ located inside a PM domain with index 0 of a power controller represented by a node with the label "power". In the second example the consumer device are partitioned across two PM domains, the first with index 0 and the second with index 1, of a power controller that -is represented by a node with the label "power. +is represented by a node with the label "power". Optional properties: - required-opps: This contains phandle to an OPP node in another device's OPP diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/qcom,pon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/qcom,pon.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..651491bb63b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/reset/qcom,pon.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +Qualcomm PON Device + +The Power On device for Qualcomm PM8xxx is MFD supporting pwrkey +and resin along with the Android reboot-mode. + +This DT node has pwrkey and resin as sub nodes. + +Required Properties: +-compatible: "qcom,pm8916-pon" +-reg: Specifies the physical address of the pon register + +Optional subnode: +-pwrkey: Specifies the subnode pwrkey and should follow the + qcom,pm8941-pwrkey.txt description. +-resin: Specifies the subnode resin and should follow the + qcom,pm8xxx-pwrkey.txt description. + +The rest of the properties should follow the generic reboot-mode description +found in reboot-mode.txt + +Example: + + pon@800 { + compatible = "qcom,pm8916-pon"; + + reg = <0x800>; + mode-bootloader = <0x2>; + mode-recovery = <0x1>; + + pwrkey { + compatible = "qcom,pm8941-pwrkey"; + interrupts = <0x0 0x8 0 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>; + debounce = <15625>; + bias-pull-up; + linux,code = <KEY_POWER>; + }; + + resin { + compatible = "qcom,pm8941-resin"; + interrupts = <0x0 0x8 1 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_BOTH>; + debounce = <15625>; + bias-pull-up; + linux,code = <KEY_VOLUMEDOWN>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/act8945a-charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/act8945a-charger.txt index b86ecada4f84..c7dfb7cecf40 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/act8945a-charger.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/act8945a-charger.txt @@ -9,8 +9,6 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a field that represents an encoding of the sense and level information for the interrupt. - - interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Optional properties: - active-semi,input-voltage-threshold-microvolt: unit: mV; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/bq24257.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/bq24257.txt index d693702c9c1e..f8f5a1685bb9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/bq24257.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/bq24257.txt @@ -6,8 +6,6 @@ Required properties: * "ti,bq24251" * "ti,bq24257" - reg: integer, i2c address of the device. -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller. Use in - conjunction with "interrupts". - interrupts: Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ (configure for both edges). Use in conjunction with "interrupt-parent". - ti,battery-regulation-voltage: integer, maximum charging voltage in uV. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/lp8727_charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/lp8727_charger.txt index 2246bc5c874b..0355a4b68f79 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/lp8727_charger.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/lp8727_charger.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: I2C slave address 27h Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: interrupt controller node (see interrupt binding[0]) - interrupts: interrupt specifier (see interrupt binding[0]) - debounce-ms: interrupt debounce time. (u32) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/maxim,ds2760.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/maxim,ds2760.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..55967a0bee11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/maxim,ds2760.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Devicetree bindings for Maxim DS2760 +==================================== + +The ds2760 is a w1 slave device and must hence have its sub-node in DT +under a w1 bus master node. + +The device exposes a power supply, so the details described in +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/power_supply.txt apply. + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "maxim,ds2760" + +Optional properties: +- power-supplies: Refers to one or more power supplies connected to + this battery. +- maxim,pmod-enabled: This boolean property enables the DS2760 to enter + sleep mode when the DQ line goes low for greater + than 2 seconds and leave sleep Mode when the DQ + line goes high. +- maxim,cache-time-ms: Time im milliseconds to cache the data for. When + this time expires, the values are read again from + the hardware. Defaults to 1000. +- rated-capacity-microamp-hours: + The rated capacity of the battery, in mAh. + If not specified, the value stored in the + non-volatile chip memory is used. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/maxim,max14656.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/maxim,max14656.txt index d6e8dfd0a581..f956247d493e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/maxim,max14656.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/maxim,max14656.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Maxim MAX14656 / AL32 USB Charger Detector Required properties : - compatible : "maxim,max14656"; - reg: i2c slave address -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt line Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/rt9455_charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/rt9455_charger.txt index 5d9ad5cf2c5a..1e6107c7578e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/rt9455_charger.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/rt9455_charger.txt @@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: it should contain one of the following: "richtek,rt9455". - reg: integer, i2c address of the device. -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - interrupts: interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ, it should be configured with IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW flag. - richtek,output-charge-current: integer, output current from the charger to the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sbs_sbs-battery.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sbs_sbs-battery.txt index c40e8926facf..4e78e51018eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sbs_sbs-battery.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sbs_sbs-battery.txt @@ -2,7 +2,11 @@ SBS sbs-battery ~~~~~~~~~~ Required properties : - - compatible : "sbs,sbs-battery" + - compatible: "<vendor>,<part-number>", "sbs,sbs-battery" as fallback. The + part number compatible string might be used in order to take care of + vendor specific registers. + Known <vendor>,<part-number>: + ti,bq20z75 Optional properties : - sbs,i2c-retry-count : The number of times to retry i2c transactions on i2c @@ -14,9 +18,9 @@ Optional properties : Example: - bq20z75@b { - compatible = "sbs,sbs-battery"; - reg = < 0xb >; + battery@b { + compatible = "ti,bq20z75", "sbs,sbs-battery"; + reg = <0xb>; sbs,i2c-retry-count = <2>; sbs,poll-retry-count = <10>; sbs,battery-detect-gpios = <&gpio-controller 122 1>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sbs_sbs-charger.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sbs_sbs-charger.txt index a3719623a94f..84e74151eef2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sbs_sbs-charger.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/supply/sbs_sbs-charger.txt @@ -7,8 +7,6 @@ Required properties: specific registers. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller. Use in - conjunction with "interrupts". - interrupts: Interrupt mapping for GPIO IRQ. Use in conjunction with "interrupt-parent". If an interrupt is not provided the driver will switch automatically to polling. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/akebono.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/akebono.txt index db939210e29d..940fd78e3363 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/akebono.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/akebono.txt @@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ The IBM Akebono board is a development board for the PPC476GTR SoC. - compatible : should be "ibm,476gtr-sdhci","generic-sdhci". - reg : should contain the SDHCI registers location and length. - - interrupt-parent : a phandle for the interrupt controller. - interrupts : should contain the SDHCI interrupt. 1.b) The Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) SATA node @@ -30,7 +29,6 @@ The IBM Akebono board is a development board for the PPC476GTR SoC. - compatible : should be "ibm,476gtr-ahci". - reg : should contain the AHCI registers location and length. - - interrupt-parent : a phandle for the interrupt controller. - interrupts : should contain the AHCI interrupt. 1.c) The FPGA node diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/hsta.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/hsta.txt index c737c8338705..66dbd9ff56f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/hsta.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/hsta.txt @@ -13,7 +13,6 @@ device tree entries: Require properties: - compatible : "ibm,476gtr-hsta-msi", "ibm,hsta-msi" - reg : register mapping for the HSTA MSI space -- interrupt-parent : parent controller for mapping interrupts - interrupts : ordered interrupt mapping for each MSI in the register space. The first interrupt should be associated with a register offset of 0x00, the second to 0x10, etc. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt index 515ebcf1b97d..de6a5f7d4aa4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/4xx/ppc440spe-adma.txt @@ -38,7 +38,6 @@ DMA devices. 2 sources: DMAx CS FIFO Needs Service IRQ (on UIC0) and DMA Error IRQ (on UIC1). The latter is common for both DMA engines>. - - interrupt-parent : needed for interrupt mapping Example: @@ -65,7 +64,6 @@ DMA devices. - compatible : "amcc,xor-accelerator"; - reg : <registers mapping> - interrupts : <interrupt mapping for XOR interrupt source> - - interrupt-parent : for interrupt mapping Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt index 18a88100af94..4b01e1afafda 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dcsr.txt @@ -84,13 +84,6 @@ PROPERTIES Interrupt numbers are listed in order (perfmon, event0, event1). - - interrupt-parent - Usage: required - Value type: <phandle> - Definition: A single <phandle> value that points - to the interrupt parent to which the child domain - is being mapped. Value must be "&mpic" - - reg Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/diu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/diu.txt index b66cb6d31d69..eb45db1ecee5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/diu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/diu.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : should contain at least address and length of the DIU register set. - interrupts : one DIU interrupt should be described here. -- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Optional properties: - edid : verbatim EDID data block describing attached display. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt index 7fc1b010fa75..c11ad5c6db21 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/dma.txt @@ -13,7 +13,6 @@ Required properties: DMA channels and the address space of the DMA controller - cell-index : controller index. 0 for controller @ 0x8100 - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA IRQ -- interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping - DMA channel nodes: - compatible : must include "fsl,elo-dma-channel" @@ -25,7 +24,6 @@ Optional properties: - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ (on 83xx this is expected to be identical to the interrupts property of the parent node) - - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping Example: dma@82a8 { @@ -88,7 +86,6 @@ Required properties: - cell-index : DMA channel index starts at 0. - reg : DMA channel specific registers - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ - - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping Example: dma@21300 { @@ -146,7 +143,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : must include "fsl,eloplus-dma-channel" - reg : DMA channel specific registers - interrupts : interrupt specifier for DMA channel IRQ - - interrupt-parent : optional, if needed for interrupt mapping Example: dma@100300 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ecm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ecm.txt index f514f29c67d6..76dc547bc492 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ecm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ecm.txt @@ -57,8 +57,4 @@ PROPERTIES Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> - - interrupt-parent - Usage: required - Value type: <phandle> - ===================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcm.txt index 4ceda9b3b413..a5dae6b1f545 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mcm.txt @@ -57,8 +57,4 @@ PROPERTIES Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> - - interrupt-parent - Usage: required - Value type: <phandle> - ===================================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt index 647817527c88..5dfd68f1a423 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpc5121-psc.txt @@ -18,8 +18,6 @@ Required properties : - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number of the PSC FIFO Controller and b is a field that represents an encoding of the sense and level information for the interrupt. - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Recommended properties : - fsl,rx-fifo-size : the size of the RX fifo slice (a multiple of 4) @@ -45,8 +43,6 @@ Required properties : - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number of the PSC FIFO Controller and b is a field that represents an encoding of the sense and level information for the interrupt. - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Recommended properties : - clocks : specifies the clock needed to operate the fifo controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt index 82dd5b65cf48..f8d2b7fe06d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt @@ -21,11 +21,6 @@ Required properties: be set as edge sensitive. If msi-available-ranges is present, only the interrupts that correspond to available ranges shall be present. -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device. for 83xx cpu, the interrupts - are routed to IPIC, and for 85xx/86xx cpu the interrupts are routed - to MPIC. - Optional properties: - msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pamu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pamu.txt index c2b2899885f2..b21ab85de6e7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pamu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/pamu.txt @@ -32,8 +32,6 @@ Optional properties: A standard property. It represents the CCSR registers of all child PAMUs combined. Include it to provide support for legacy drivers. -- interrupt-parent : <phandle> - Phandle to interrupt controller - fsl,portid-mapping : <u32> The Coherency Subdomain ID Port Mapping Registers and Snoop ID Port Mapping registers, which are part of the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt index a3dc4b9fa11a..c4d78f28d23c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/nintendo/wii.txt @@ -148,7 +148,6 @@ Nintendo Wii device tree - reg : should contain the controller registers location and length - interrupt-controller - interrupts : should contain the cascade interrupt of the "flipper" pic - - interrupt-parent: should contain the phandle of the "flipper" pic 1.l) The General Purpose I/O (GPIO) controller node diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt index 0f569d8e73a3..c5d0e7998e2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-qoriq.txt @@ -2,7 +2,8 @@ General Properties: - - compatible Should be "fsl,etsec-ptp" + - compatible Should be "fsl,etsec-ptp" for eTSEC + Should be "fsl,fman-ptp-timer" for DPAA FMan - reg Offset and length of the register set for the device - interrupts There should be at least two interrupts. Some devices have as many as four PTP related interrupts. @@ -43,14 +44,22 @@ Clock Properties: value, which will be directly written in those bits, that is why, according to reference manual, the next clock sources can be used: + For eTSEC, <0> - external high precision timer reference clock (TSEC_TMR_CLK input is used for this purpose); <1> - eTSEC system clock; <2> - eTSEC1 transmit clock; <3> - RTC clock input. - When this attribute is not used, eTSEC system clock will serve as - IEEE 1588 timer reference clock. + For DPAA FMan, + <0> - external high precision timer reference clock (TMR_1588_CLK) + <1> - MAC system clock (1/2 FMan clock) + <2> - reserved + <3> - RTC clock oscillator + + When this attribute is not used, the IEEE 1588 timer reference clock + will use the eTSEC system clock (for Gianfar) or the MAC system + clock (for DPAA). Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/cpcap-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/cpcap-regulator.txt index 675f4437ce92..36f5e2f5cc0f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/cpcap-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/cpcap-regulator.txt @@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ Requires node properties: - "compatible" value one of: "motorola,cpcap-regulator" "motorola,mapphone-cpcap-regulator" + "motorola,xoom-cpcap-regulator" Required regulator properties: - "regulator-name" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8997-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8997-regulator.txt index 5c186a7a77ba..6fe825b8ac1b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8997-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max8997-regulator.txt @@ -32,8 +32,6 @@ Required properties: 'max8997,pmic-buck[1/2/5]-dvs-voltage' should be specified. Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the interrupts from max8997 are delivered to. - interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for two interrupt sources. - First interrupt specifier is for 'irq1' interrupt. - Second interrupt specifier is for 'alert' interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt index 99872819604f..84bc76a7c39e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/palmas-pmic.txt @@ -18,7 +18,6 @@ Required properties: ti,tps659038-pmic and also the generic series names ti,palmas-pmic -- interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller which is palmas. - interrupts : The interrupt number and the type which can be looked up here: arch/arm/boot/dts/include/dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h - interrupts-name: The names of the individual interrupts. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt index f0ada3b14d70..c7610718adff 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/pfuze100.txt @@ -1,9 +1,18 @@ PFUZE100 family of regulators Required properties: -- compatible: "fsl,pfuze100", "fsl,pfuze200", "fsl,pfuze3000" +- compatible: "fsl,pfuze100", "fsl,pfuze200", "fsl,pfuze3000", "fsl,pfuze3001" - reg: I2C slave address +Optional properties: +- fsl,pfuze-support-disable-sw: Boolean, if present disable all unused switch + regulators to save power consumption. Attention, ensure that all important + regulators (e.g. DDR ref, DDR supply) has set the "regulator-always-on" + property. If not present, the switched regualtors are always on and can't be + disabled. This binding is a workaround to keep backward compatibility with + old dtb's which rely on the fact that the switched regulators are always on + and don't mark them explicit as "regulator-always-on". + Required child node: - regulators: This is the list of child nodes that specify the regulator initialization data for defined regulators. Please refer to below doc @@ -16,6 +25,8 @@ Required child node: sw1ab,sw2,sw3a,sw3b,swbst,vsnvs,vrefddr,vgen1~vgen6,coin --PFUZE3000 sw1a,sw1b,sw2,sw3,swbst,vsnvs,vrefddr,vldo1,vldo2,vccsd,v33,vldo3,vldo4 + --PFUZE3001 + sw1,sw2,sw3,vsnvs,vldo1,vldo2,vccsd,v33,vldo3,vldo4 Each regulator is defined using the standard binding for regulators. @@ -303,3 +314,76 @@ Example 3: PFUZE3000 }; }; }; + +Example 4: PFUZE 3001 + + pfuze3001: pmic@8 { + compatible = "fsl,pfuze3001"; + reg = <0x08>; + + regulators { + sw1_reg: sw1 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <700000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sw2_reg: sw2 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1500000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + sw3_reg: sw3 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <900000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1650000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + snvs_reg: vsnvs { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3000000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + vgen1_reg: vldo1 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + vgen2_reg: vldo2 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1550000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + vgen3_reg: vccsd { + regulator-min-microvolt = <2850000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + vgen4_reg: v33 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <2850000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + vgen5_reg: vldo3 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + + vgen6_reg: vldo4 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-always-on; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/qcom,rpmh-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/qcom,rpmh-regulator.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7ef2dbe48e8a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/qcom,rpmh-regulator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ +Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. RPMh Regulators + +rpmh-regulator devices support PMIC regulator management via the Voltage +Regulator Manager (VRM) and Oscillator Buffer (XOB) RPMh accelerators. The APPS +processor communicates with these hardware blocks via a Resource State +Coordinator (RSC) using command packets. The VRM allows changing three +parameters for a given regulator: enable state, output voltage, and operating +mode. The XOB allows changing only a single parameter for a given regulator: +its enable state. Despite its name, the XOB is capable of controlling the +enable state of any PMIC peripheral. It is used for clock buffers, low-voltage +switches, and LDO/SMPS regulators which have a fixed voltage and mode. + +======================= +Required Node Structure +======================= + +RPMh regulators must be described in two levels of device nodes. The first +level describes the PMIC containing the regulators and must reside within an +RPMh device node. The second level describes each regulator within the PMIC +which is to be used on the board. Each of these regulators maps to a single +RPMh resource. + +The names used for regulator nodes must match those supported by a given PMIC. +Supported regulator node names: + PM8998: smps1 - smps13, ldo1 - ldo28, lvs1 - lvs2 + PMI8998: bob + PM8005: smps1 - smps4 + +======================== +First Level Nodes - PMIC +======================== + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must be one of: "qcom,pm8998-rpmh-regulators", + "qcom,pmi8998-rpmh-regulators" or + "qcom,pm8005-rpmh-regulators". + +- qcom,pmic-id + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: RPMh resource name suffix used for the regulators found on + this PMIC. Typical values: "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f". + +- vdd-s1-supply +- vdd-s2-supply +- vdd-s3-supply +- vdd-s4-supply + Usage: optional (PM8998 and PM8005 only) + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: phandle of the parent supply regulator of one or more of the + regulators for this PMIC. + +- vdd-s5-supply +- vdd-s6-supply +- vdd-s7-supply +- vdd-s8-supply +- vdd-s9-supply +- vdd-s10-supply +- vdd-s11-supply +- vdd-s12-supply +- vdd-s13-supply +- vdd-l1-l27-supply +- vdd-l2-l8-l17-supply +- vdd-l3-l11-supply +- vdd-l4-l5-supply +- vdd-l6-supply +- vdd-l7-l12-l14-l15-supply +- vdd-l9-supply +- vdd-l10-l23-l25-supply +- vdd-l13-l19-l21-supply +- vdd-l16-l28-supply +- vdd-l18-l22-supply +- vdd-l20-l24-supply +- vdd-l26-supply +- vin-lvs-1-2-supply + Usage: optional (PM8998 only) + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: phandle of the parent supply regulator of one or more of the + regulators for this PMIC. + +- vdd-bob-supply + Usage: optional (PMI8998 only) + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: BOB regulator parent supply phandle + +=============================== +Second Level Nodes - Regulators +=============================== + +- qcom,always-wait-for-ack + Usage: optional + Value type: <empty> + Definition: Boolean flag which indicates that the application processor + must wait for an ACK or a NACK from RPMh for every request + sent for this regulator including those which are for a + strictly lower power state. + +Other properties defined in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator.txt +may also be used. regulator-initial-mode and regulator-allowed-modes may be +specified for VRM regulators using mode values from +include/dt-bindings/regulator/qcom,rpmh-regulator.h. regulator-allow-bypass +may be specified for BOB type regulators managed via VRM. +regulator-allow-set-load may be specified for LDO type regulators managed via +VRM. + +======== +Examples +======== + +#include <dt-bindings/regulator/qcom,rpmh-regulator.h> + +&apps_rsc { + pm8998-rpmh-regulators { + compatible = "qcom,pm8998-rpmh-regulators"; + qcom,pmic-id = "a"; + + vdd-l7-l12-l14-l15-supply = <&pm8998_s5>; + + smps2 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>; + }; + + pm8998_s5: smps5 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1904000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <2040000>; + }; + + ldo7 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-initial-mode = <RPMH_REGULATOR_MODE_HPM>; + regulator-allowed-modes = + <RPMH_REGULATOR_MODE_LPM + RPMH_REGULATOR_MODE_HPM>; + regulator-allow-set-load; + }; + + lvs1 { + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + }; + }; + + pmi8998-rpmh-regulators { + compatible = "qcom,pmi8998-rpmh-regulators"; + qcom,pmic-id = "b"; + + bob { + regulator-min-microvolt = <3312000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3600000>; + regulator-allowed-modes = + <RPMH_REGULATOR_MODE_AUTO + RPMH_REGULATOR_MODE_HPM>; + regulator-initial-mode = <RPMH_REGULATOR_MODE_AUTO>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt index 4edf3137d9f7..76ead07072b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71837-regulator.txt @@ -1,13 +1,5 @@ ROHM BD71837 Power Management Integrated Circuit (PMIC) regulator bindings -BD71837MWV is a programmable Power Management -IC (PMIC) for powering single-core, dual-core, and -quad-core SoC’s such as NXP-i.MX 8M. It is optimized -for low BOM cost and compact solution footprint. It -integrates 8 Buck regulators and 7 LDO’s to provide all -the power rails required by the SoC and the commonly -used peripherals. - Required properties: - regulator-name: should be "buck1", ..., "buck8" and "ldo1", ..., "ldo7" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt index ca69f5e3040c..ae326f263597 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/tps65090.txt @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - ti,enable-ext-control: This is applicable for DCDC1, DCDC2 and DCDC3. If DCDCs are externally controlled then this property should be there. -- "dcdc-ext-control-gpios: This is applicable for DCDC1, DCDC2 and DCDC3. +- dcdc-ext-control-gpios: This is applicable for DCDC1, DCDC2 and DCDC3. If DCDCs are externally controlled and if it is from GPIO then GPIO number should be provided. If it is externally controlled and no GPIO entry then driver will just configure this rails as external control diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/uniphier-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/uniphier-regulator.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c9919f4b92d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/uniphier-regulator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +Socionext UniPhier Regulator Controller + +This describes the devicetree bindings for regulator controller implemented +on Socionext UniPhier SoCs. + +USB3 Controller +--------------- + +This regulator controls VBUS and belongs to USB3 glue layer. Before using +the regulator, it is necessary to control the clocks and resets to enable +this layer. These clocks and resets should be described in each property. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be + "socionext,uniphier-pro4-usb3-regulator" - for Pro4 SoC + "socionext,uniphier-pxs2-usb3-regulator" - for PXs2 SoC + "socionext,uniphier-ld20-usb3-regulator" - for LD20 SoC + "socionext,uniphier-pxs3-usb3-regulator" - for PXs3 SoC +- reg: Specifies offset and length of the register set for the device. +- clocks: A list of phandles to the clock gate for USB3 glue layer. + According to the clock-names, appropriate clocks are required. +- clock-names: Should contain + "gio", "link" - for Pro4 SoC + "link" - for others +- resets: A list of phandles to the reset control for USB3 glue layer. + According to the reset-names, appropriate resets are required. +- reset-names: Should contain + "gio", "link" - for Pro4 SoC + "link" - for others + +See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +for more details about the regulator properties. + +Example: + + usb-glue@65b00000 { + compatible = "socionext,uniphier-ld20-dwc3-glue", + "simple-mfd"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 0x65b00000 0x400>; + + usb_vbus0: regulators@100 { + compatible = "socionext,uniphier-ld20-usb3-regulator"; + reg = <0x100 0x10>; + clock-names = "link"; + clocks = <&sys_clk 14>; + reset-names = "link"; + resets = <&sys_rst 14>; + }; + + phy { + ... + phy-supply = <&usb_vbus0>; + }; + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt index d90182425450..601dd9f389aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/qcom,q6v5.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ on the Qualcomm Hexagon core. Value type: <string> Definition: must be one of: "qcom,q6v5-pil", + "qcom,ipq8074-wcss-pil" "qcom,msm8916-mss-pil", "qcom,msm8974-mss-pil" "qcom,msm8996-mss-pil" @@ -50,11 +51,15 @@ on the Qualcomm Hexagon core. Usage: required Value type: <phandle> Definition: reference to the reset-controller for the modem sub-system + reference to the list of 3 reset-controllers for the + wcss sub-system - reset-names: Usage: required Value type: <stringlist> - Definition: must be "mss_restart" + Definition: must be "mss_restart" for the modem sub-system + Definition: must be "wcss_aon_reset", "wcss_reset", "wcss_q6_reset" + for the wcss syb-system - cx-supply: - mss-supply: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/ti,davinci-rproc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/ti,davinci-rproc.txt index e44a97e21164..25f8658e216f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/ti,davinci-rproc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/ti,davinci-rproc.txt @@ -45,12 +45,6 @@ The following are the mandatory properties: per the bindings in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reserved-memory/reserved-memory.txt -Optional properties: --------------------- -- interrupt-parent: phandle to the interrupt controller node. This property - is needed if the device node hierarchy doesn't have an - interrupt controller. - Example: -------- diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/ti,keystone-rproc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/ti,keystone-rproc.txt index 1eb72874130b..461dc1d8d570 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/ti,keystone-rproc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/remoteproc/ti,keystone-rproc.txt @@ -51,12 +51,6 @@ The following are the mandatory properties: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/ti,sci-reset.txt for 66AK2G SoCs -- interrupt-parent: Should contain a phandle to the Keystone 2 IRQ controller - IP node that is used by the ARM CorePac processor to - receive interrupts from the DSP remote processors. See - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/ti,keystone-irq.txt - for details. - - interrupts: Should contain an entry for each value in 'interrupt-names'. Each entry should have the interrupt source number used by the remote processor to the host processor. The values should diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/qcom,aoss-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/qcom,aoss-reset.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..510c748656ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/qcom,aoss-reset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +Qualcomm AOSS Reset Controller +====================================== + +This binding describes a reset-controller found on AOSS-CC (always on subsystem) +for Qualcomm SDM845 SoCs. + +Required properties: +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: must be: + "qcom,sdm845-aoss-cc" + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: must specify the base address and size of the register + space. + +- #reset-cells: + Usage: required + Value type: <uint> + Definition: must be 1; cell entry represents the reset index. + +Example: + +aoss_reset: reset-controller@c2a0000 { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-aoss-cc"; + reg = <0xc2a0000 0x31000>; + #reset-cells = <1>; +}; + +Specifying reset lines connected to IP modules +============================================== + +Device nodes that need access to reset lines should +specify them as a reset phandle in their corresponding node as +specified in reset.txt. + +For list of all valid reset indicies see +<dt-bindings/reset/qcom,sdm845-aoss.h> + +Example: + +modem-pil@4080000 { + ... + + resets = <&aoss_reset AOSS_CC_MSS_RESTART>; + reset-names = "mss_restart"; + + ... +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/st,sti-softreset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/st,sti-softreset.txt index a21658f18fe6..3661e6153a92 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/st,sti-softreset.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/st,sti-softreset.txt @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Please refer to reset.txt in this directory for common reset controller binding usage. Required properties: -- compatible: Should be st,stih407-softreset"; +- compatible: Should be "st,stih407-softreset"; - #reset-cells: 1, see below example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/uniphier-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/uniphier-reset.txt index 93efed629900..101743dda223 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/uniphier-reset.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/uniphier-reset.txt @@ -118,3 +118,59 @@ Example: other nodes ... }; + + +USB3 core reset +--------------- + +USB3 core reset belongs to USB3 glue layer. Before using the core reset, +it is necessary to control the clocks and resets to enable this layer. +These clocks and resets should be described in each property. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be + "socionext,uniphier-pro4-usb3-reset" - for Pro4 SoC + "socionext,uniphier-pxs2-usb3-reset" - for PXs2 SoC + "socionext,uniphier-ld20-usb3-reset" - for LD20 SoC + "socionext,uniphier-pxs3-usb3-reset" - for PXs3 SoC +- #reset-cells: Should be 1. +- reg: Specifies offset and length of the register set for the device. +- clocks: A list of phandles to the clock gate for USB3 glue layer. + According to the clock-names, appropriate clocks are required. +- clock-names: Should contain + "gio", "link" - for Pro4 SoC + "link" - for others +- resets: A list of phandles to the reset control for USB3 glue layer. + According to the reset-names, appropriate resets are required. +- reset-names: Should contain + "gio", "link" - for Pro4 SoC + "link" - for others + +Example: + + usb-glue@65b00000 { + compatible = "socionext,uniphier-ld20-dwc3-glue", + "simple-mfd"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 0x65b00000 0x400>; + + usb_rst: reset@0 { + compatible = "socionext,uniphier-ld20-usb3-reset"; + reg = <0x0 0x4>; + #reset-cells = <1>; + clock-names = "link"; + clocks = <&sys_clk 14>; + reset-names = "link"; + resets = <&sys_rst 14>; + }; + + regulator { + ... + }; + + phy { + ... + }; + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/brcm,brcmstb-waketimer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/brcm,brcmstb-waketimer.txt index 1d990bcc0baf..d946f28502b3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/brcm,brcmstb-waketimer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/brcm,brcmstb-waketimer.txt @@ -7,8 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should contain "brcm,brcmstb-waketimer" - reg : the register start and length for the WKTMR block - interrupts : The TIMER interrupt -- interrupt-parent: The phandle to the Always-On (AON) Power Management (PM) L2 - interrupt controller node - clocks : The phandle to the UPG fixed clock (27Mhz domain) Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl12057.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl12057.txt index fbbdd92e5af9..ff7c43555199 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl12057.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl12057.txt @@ -25,9 +25,6 @@ Optional properties: - "wakeup-source": mark the chip as a wakeup source, independently of the availability of an IRQ line connected to the SoC. - - "interrupt-parent", "interrupts": for passing the interrupt line - of the SoC connected to IRQ#2 of the RTC chip. - Example isl12057 node without IRQ#2 pin connected (no alarm support): diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c3efd48e91c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/isil,isl1219.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Intersil ISL1219 I2C RTC/Alarm chip with event in + +ISL1219 has additional pins EVIN and #EVDET for tamper detection. + +Required properties supported by the device: + + - "compatible": must be "isil,isl1219" + - "reg": I2C bus address of the device + +Optional properties: + + - "interrupt-names": list which may contains "irq" and "evdet" + - "interrupts": list of interrupts for "irq" and "evdet" + - "isil,ev-evienb": if present EV.EVIENB bit is set to the specified + value for proper operation. + + +Example isl1219 node with #IRQ pin connected to SoC gpio1 pin12 + and #EVDET pin connected to SoC gpio2 pin 24: + + isl1219: rtc@68 { + compatible = "isil,isl1219"; + reg = <0x68>; + interrupt-names = "irq", "evdet"; + interrupts-extended = <&gpio1 12 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>, + <&gpio2 24 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + isil,ev-evienb = <1>; + }; + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt index 7382989b3052..b94b35f3600b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - interrupts : should contain interrupt. - - interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle. - ctrl-reg : Contains the initial value of the control register also called "Register B". - freq-reg : Contains the initial value of the frequency register also diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-ds1307.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-ds1307.txt index d28d6e7f6ae8..eebfbe04207a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-ds1307.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-ds1307.txt @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ Required properties: "maxim,ds3231", "st,m41t0", "st,m41t00", + "st,m41t11", "microchip,mcp7940x", "microchip,mcp7941x", "pericom,pt7c4338", @@ -21,7 +22,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: I2C bus address of the device Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller. - interrupts: rtc alarm interrupt. - clock-output-names: From common clock binding to override the default output clock name diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-m41t80.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-m41t80.txt index 717d93860af1..c746cb221210 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-m41t80.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-m41t80.txt @@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: I2C bus address of the device Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller. - interrupts: rtc alarm interrupt. - clock-output-names: From common clock binding to override the default output clock name diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt index bee41f97044e..062ebb14cecf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt @@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ Required properties: - "ti,am4372-rtc" - for RTC IP used similar to that on AM437X SoC family. - reg: Address range of rtc register set - interrupts: rtc timer, alarm interrupts in order -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller Optional properties: - system-power-controller: whether the rtc is controlling the system power diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt index eb1c7fdeb413..c6cf37758a77 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-palmas.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Palmas RTC controller bindings Required properties: - compatible: - "ti,palmas-rtc" for palma series of the RTC controller -- interrupt-parent: Parent interrupt device, must be handle of palmas node. - interrupts: Interrupt number of RTC submodule on device. Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/spear-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/spear-rtc.txt index ca67ac62108e..fecf8e4ad4b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/spear-rtc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/spear-rtc.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : "st,spear600-rtc" - reg : Address range of the rtc registers -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupt: Should contain the rtc interrupt number Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/sprd,sc27xx-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/sprd,sc27xx-rtc.txt index 7c170da0d4b7..1f5754299d31 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/sprd,sc27xx-rtc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/sprd,sc27xx-rtc.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Spreadtrum SC27xx Real Time Clock Required properties: - compatible: should be "sprd,sc2731-rtc". - reg: address offset of rtc register. -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller. - interrupts: rtc alarm interrupt. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/st,stm32-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/st,stm32-rtc.txt index c920e2736991..130ca5b98253 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/st,stm32-rtc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/st,stm32-rtc.txt @@ -13,8 +13,6 @@ Required properties: It is required on stm32(h7/mp1). - clock-names: must be "rtc_ck" and "pclk". It is required on stm32(h7/mp1). -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller. - It is required on stm32(f4/f7/h7). - interrupts: rtc alarm interrupt. On stm32mp1, a second interrupt is required for rtc alarm wakeup interrupt. - st,syscfg: phandle/offset/mask triplet. The phandle to pwrcfg used to diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/stericsson,coh901331.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/stericsson,coh901331.txt index 3ebeb311335f..e615a897b20e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/stericsson,coh901331.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/stericsson,coh901331.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ ST-Ericsson COH 901 331 Real Time Clock Required properties: - compatible: must be "stericsson,coh901331" - reg: address range of rtc register set. -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller. - interrupts: rtc alarm interrupt. - clocks: phandle to the rtc clock source diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/st33zp24-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/st33zp24-i2c.txt index 6a4e0d30d8c4..0dc121b6eace 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/st33zp24-i2c.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/st33zp24-i2c.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: address on the bus Optional ST33ZP24 Properties: -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - lpcpd-gpios: Output GPIO pin used for ST33ZP24 power management D1/D2 state. If set, power must be present when the platform is going into sleep/hibernate mode. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/st33zp24-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/st33zp24-spi.txt index 604dce901b60..37198971f17b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/st33zp24-spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/st33zp24-spi.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - spi-max-frequency: Maximum SPI frequency (<= 10000000). Optional ST33ZP24 Properties: -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt gpio controller - interrupts: GPIO interrupt to which the chip is connected - lpcpd-gpios: Output GPIO pin used for ST33ZP24 power management D1/D2 state. If set, power must be present when the platform is going into sleep/hibernate mode. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/tpm_tis_mmio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/tpm_tis_mmio.txt index 41d740545189..7c6304426da1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/tpm_tis_mmio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/security/tpm/tpm_tis_mmio.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Required properties: "tcg,tpm-tis-mmio". Valid chip strings are: * "atmel,at97sc3204" - reg: The location of the MMIO registers, should be at least 0x5000 bytes -- interrupt-parent/interrupts: An optional interrupt indicating command completion. +- interrupts: An optional interrupt indicating command completion. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt index afcfbc34e243..35957cbf1571 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/fsl-imx-uart.txt @@ -9,7 +9,11 @@ Optional properties: - fsl,dte-mode : Indicate the uart works in DTE mode. The uart works in DCE mode by default. - rs485-rts-delay, rs485-rts-active-low, rs485-rx-during-tx, - linux,rs485-enabled-at-boot-time: see rs485.txt + linux,rs485-enabled-at-boot-time: see rs485.txt. Note that for RS485 + you must enable either the "uart-has-rtscts" or the "rts-gpios" + properties. In case you use "uart-has-rtscts" the signal that controls + the transceiver is actually CTS_B, not RTS_B. CTS_B is always output, + and RTS_B is input, regardless of dte-mode. Please check Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/serial.txt for the complete list of generic properties. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/maxim,max310x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/maxim,max310x.txt index 823f77dd7978..79e10a05a96a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/maxim,max310x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/maxim,max310x.txt @@ -7,8 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - "maxim,max3109" for Maxim MAX3109, - "maxim,max14830" for Maxim MAX14830. - reg: SPI chip select number. -- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this IC. - interrupts: Specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the parent interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mtk-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mtk-uart.txt index f73abff3de43..742cb470595b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mtk-uart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/mtk-uart.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Required properties: * "mediatek,mt6582-uart" for MT6582 compatible UARTS * "mediatek,mt6589-uart" for MT6589 compatible UARTS * "mediatek,mt6755-uart" for MT6755 compatible UARTS + * "mediatek,mt6765-uart" for MT6765 compatible UARTS * "mediatek,mt6795-uart" for MT6795 compatible UARTS * "mediatek,mt6797-uart" for MT6797 compatible UARTS * "mediatek,mt7622-uart" for MT7622 compatible UARTS diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt index fbfe53635a3a..e7921a8e276b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/nxp,sc16is7xx.txt @@ -10,8 +10,6 @@ Required properties: - "nxp,sc16is760" for NXP SC16IS760, - "nxp,sc16is762" for NXP SC16IS762. - reg: I2C address of the SC16IS7xx device. -- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this IC. - interrupts: Should contain the UART interrupt - clocks: Reference to the IC source clock. @@ -44,8 +42,6 @@ Required properties: - "nxp,sc16is760" for NXP SC16IS760, - "nxp,sc16is762" for NXP SC16IS762. - reg: SPI chip select number. -- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this IC. - interrupts: Specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the parent interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt index 4b0f05adb228..c35d5ece1156 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/omap_serial.txt @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ OMAP UART controller Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ti,am654-uart" for AM654 controllers - compatible : should be "ti,omap2-uart" for OMAP2 controllers - compatible : should be "ti,omap3-uart" for OMAP3 controllers - compatible : should be "ti,omap4-uart" for OMAP4 controllers diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt index c5e032c85bf9..7d65126bd1d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/qca,ar9330-uart.txt @@ -7,9 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: Specifies the physical base address of the controller and the length of the memory mapped region. -- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - - interrupts: Specifies the interrupt source of the parent interrupt controller. The format of the interrupt specifier depends on the parent interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8b9e0d4dc2e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,rzn1-uart.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +Renesas RZ/N1 UART + +This controller is based on the Synopsys DesignWare ABP UART and inherits all +properties defined in snps-dw-apb-uart.txt except for the compatible property. + +Required properties: +- compatible : The device specific string followed by the generic RZ/N1 string. + Therefore it must be one of: + "renesas,r9a06g032-uart", "renesas,rzn1-uart" + "renesas,r9a06g033-uart", "renesas,rzn1-uart" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt index 106808b55b6d..eaca9da79d83 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/renesas,sci-serial.txt @@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Must contain one or more of the following: - "renesas,scif-r7s72100" for R7S72100 (RZ/A1H) SCIF compatible UART. + - "renesas,scif-r7s9210" for R7S9210 (RZ/A2) SCIF compatible UART. - "renesas,scifa-r8a73a4" for R8A73A4 (R-Mobile APE6) SCIFA compatible UART. - "renesas,scifb-r8a73a4" for R8A73A4 (R-Mobile APE6) SCIFB compatible UART. - "renesas,scifa-r8a7740" for R8A7740 (R-Mobile A1) SCIFA compatible UART. @@ -72,7 +73,21 @@ Required properties: family-specific and/or generic versions. - reg: Base address and length of the I/O registers used by the UART. - - interrupts: Must contain an interrupt-specifier for the SCIx interrupt. + - interrupts: Must contain one or more interrupt-specifiers for the SCIx. + If a single interrupt is expressed, then all events are + multiplexed into this single interrupt. + + If multiple interrupts are provided by the hardware, the order + in which the interrupts are listed must match order below. Note + that some HW interrupt events may be muxed together resulting + in duplicate entries. + The interrupt order is as follows: + 1. Error (ERI) + 2. Receive buffer full (RXI) + 3. Transmit buffer empty (TXI) + 4. Break (BRI) + 5. Data Ready (DRI) + 6. Transmit End (TEI) - clocks: Must contain a phandle and clock-specifier pair for each entry in clock-names. @@ -89,7 +104,7 @@ Required properties: - "scif_clk" for the optional external clock source for the frequency divider (SCIF_CLK). -Note: Each enabled SCIx UART should have an alias correctly numbered in the +Note: Each enabled SCIx UART may have an optional "serialN" alias in the "aliases" node. Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/xlnx,opb-uartlite.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/xlnx,opb-uartlite.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c37deb44dead --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/xlnx,opb-uartlite.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Xilinx Axi Uartlite controller Device Tree Bindings +--------------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : Can be either of + "xlnx,xps-uartlite-1.00.a" + "xlnx,opb-uartlite-1.00.b" +- reg : Physical base address and size of the Axi Uartlite + registers map. +- interrupts : Should contain the UART controller interrupt. + +Optional properties: +- port-number : Set Uart port number +- clock-names : Should be "s_axi_aclk" +- clocks : Input clock specifier. Refer to common clock bindings. + +Example: +serial@800c0000 { + compatible = "xlnx,xps-uartlite-1.00.a"; + reg = <0x0 0x800c0000 0x10000>; + interrupts = <0x0 0x6e 0x1>; + port-number = <0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/slimbus/slim-ngd-qcom-ctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/slimbus/slim-ngd-qcom-ctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e94a2ad3a710 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/slimbus/slim-ngd-qcom-ctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +Qualcomm SLIMBus Non Generic Device (NGD) Controller binding + +SLIMBus NGD controller is a light-weight driver responsible for communicating +with SLIMBus slaves directly over the bus using messaging interface and +communicating with master component residing on ADSP for bandwidth and +data-channel management + +Please refer to slimbus/bus.txt for details of the common SLIMBus bindings. + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "qcom,slim-ngd-v<MAJOR>.<MINOR>.<STEP>" + must be one of the following. + "qcom,slim-ngd-v1.5.0" for MSM8996 + "qcom,slim-ngd-v2.1.0" for SDM845 + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: must specify the base address and size of the controller + register space. +- dmas + Usage: required + Value type: <array of phandles> + Definition: List of rx and tx dma channels + +- dma-names + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "rx" and "tx". + +- interrupts: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: must list controller IRQ. + +#address-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Should be 1, reflecting the instance id of ngd. + +#size-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Should be 0 + += NGD Devices +Each subnode represents an instance of NGD, must contain the following +properties: + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Should be instance id of ngd. + +#address-cells + Usage: required + Refer to slimbus/bus.txt for details of the common SLIMBus bindings. + +#size-cells + Usage: required + Refer to slimbus/bus.txt for details of the common SLIMBus bindings. + += EXAMPLE + +slim@91c0000 { + compatible = "qcom,slim-ngd-v1.5.0"; + reg = <0x91c0000 0x2c000>; + interrupts = <0 163 0>; + dmas = <&slimbam 3>, <&slimbam 4>; + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + ngd@1 { + reg = <1>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + codec@1 { + compatible = "slim217,1a0"; + reg = <1 0>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt index 626e1afa64a6..cce3cd71e85a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt @@ -21,7 +21,6 @@ Optional properties: one as described by the fsl,cpm1-gpio-irq-mask property. There should be as many interrupts as number of ones in the mask property. The first interrupt in the list corresponds to the most significant bit of the mask. -- interrupt-parent : Parent for the above interrupt property. Example of four SOC GPIO banks defined as gpio-controller nodes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt index e47734bee3f0..5efb7ac94c79 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/ucc.txt @@ -11,8 +11,6 @@ Required properties: information for the interrupt. This should be encoded based on the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt controller you have. -- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - pio-handle : The phandle for the Parallel I/O port configuration. - port-number : for UART drivers, the port number to use, between 0 and 3. This usually corresponds to the /dev/ttyQE device, e.g. <0> = /dev/ttyQE0. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt index 9ccd5f30405b..da13999337a4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: length, the next two two cells should contain PRAM location and length. - interrupts : should contain USB interrupt. -- interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle. - fsl,fullspeed-clock : specifies the full speed USB clock source: "none": clock source is disabled "brg1" through "brg16": clock source is BRG1-BRG16, respectively diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/pwrap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/pwrap.txt index bf80e3f96f8c..f9987c30f0d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/pwrap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/mediatek/pwrap.txt @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ IP Pairing Required properties in pwrap device node. - compatible: "mediatek,mt2701-pwrap" for MT2701/7623 SoCs + "mediatek,mt6797-pwrap" for MT6797 SoCs "mediatek,mt7622-pwrap" for MT7622 SoCs "mediatek,mt8135-pwrap" for MT8135 SoCs "mediatek,mt8173-pwrap" for MT8173 SoCs diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,geni-se.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,geni-se.txt index d330c73de9a2..ff92e5a41bed 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,geni-se.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,geni-se.txt @@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ Required properties: Optional property: - clock-frequency: Desired I2C bus clock frequency in Hz. - When missing default to 400000Hz. + When missing default to 100000Hz. Child nodes should conform to I2C bus binding as described in i2c.txt. Qualcomm Technologies Inc. GENI Serial Engine based UART Controller Required properties: -- compatible: Must be "qcom,geni-debug-uart". +- compatible: Must be "qcom,geni-debug-uart" or "qcom,geni-uart". - reg: Must contain UART register location and length. - interrupts: Must contain UART core interrupts. - clock-names: Must contain "se". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,glink.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,glink.txt index 9663cab52246..0b8cc533ca83 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,glink.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/qcom,glink.txt @@ -10,6 +10,11 @@ edge. Value type: <stringlist> Definition: must be "qcom,glink-rpm" +- label: + Usage: optional + Value type: <string> + Definition: should specify the subsystem name this edge corresponds to. + - interrupts: Usage: required Value type: <prop-encoded-array> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/rpmh-rsc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/rpmh-rsc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9b86d1eff219 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/qcom/rpmh-rsc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +RPMH RSC: +------------ + +Resource Power Manager Hardened (RPMH) is the mechanism for communicating with +the hardened resource accelerators on Qualcomm SoCs. Requests to the resources +can be written to the Trigger Command Set (TCS) registers and using a (addr, +val) pair and triggered. Messages in the TCS are then sent in sequence over an +internal bus. + +The hardware block (Direct Resource Voter or DRV) is a part of the h/w entity +(Resource State Coordinator a.k.a RSC) that can handle multiple sleep and +active/wake resource requests. Multiple such DRVs can exist in a SoC and can +be written to from Linux. The structure of each DRV follows the same template +with a few variations that are captured by the properties here. + +A TCS may be triggered from Linux or triggered by the F/W after all the CPUs +have powered off to facilitate idle power saving. TCS could be classified as - + + ACTIVE /* Triggered by Linux */ + SLEEP /* Triggered by F/W */ + WAKE /* Triggered by F/W */ + CONTROL /* Triggered by F/W */ + +The order in which they are described in the DT, should match the hardware +configuration. + +Requests can be made for the state of a resource, when the subsystem is active +or idle. When all subsystems like Modem, GPU, CPU are idle, the resource state +will be an aggregate of the sleep votes from each of those subsystems. Clients +may request a sleep value for their shared resources in addition to the active +mode requests. + +Properties: + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Should be "qcom,rpmh-rsc". + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: The first register specifies the base address of the + DRV(s). The number of DRVs in the dependent on the RSC. + The tcs-offset specifies the start address of the + TCS in the DRVs. + +- reg-names: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Maps the register specified in the reg property. Must be + "drv-0", "drv-1", "drv-2" etc and "tcs-offset". The + +- interrupts: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-interrupt> + Definition: The interrupt that trips when a message complete/response + is received for this DRV from the accelerators. + +- qcom,drv-id: + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: The id of the DRV in the RSC block that will be used by + this controller. + +- qcom,tcs-config: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: The tuple defining the configuration of TCS. + Must have 2 cells which describe each TCS type. + <type number_of_tcs>. + The order of the TCS must match the hardware + configuration. + - Cell #1 (TCS Type): TCS types to be specified - + ACTIVE_TCS + SLEEP_TCS + WAKE_TCS + CONTROL_TCS + - Cell #2 (Number of TCS): <u32> + +- label: + Usage: optional + Value type: <string> + Definition: Name for the RSC. The name would be used in trace logs. + +Drivers that want to use the RSC to communicate with RPMH must specify their +bindings as child nodes of the RSC controllers they wish to communicate with. + +Example 1: + +For a TCS whose RSC base address is is 0x179C0000 and is at a DRV id of 2, the +register offsets for DRV2 start at 0D00, the register calculations are like +this - +DRV0: 0x179C0000 +DRV2: 0x179C0000 + 0x10000 = 0x179D0000 +DRV2: 0x179C0000 + 0x10000 * 2 = 0x179E0000 +TCS-OFFSET: 0xD00 + + apps_rsc: rsc@179c0000 { + label = "apps_rsc"; + compatible = "qcom,rpmh-rsc"; + reg = <0x179c0000 0x10000>, + <0x179d0000 0x10000>, + <0x179e0000 0x10000>; + reg-names = "drv-0", "drv-1", "drv-2"; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 3 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 4 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <GIC_SPI 5 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + qcom,tcs-offset = <0xd00>; + qcom,drv-id = <2>; + qcom,tcs-config = <ACTIVE_TCS 2>, + <SLEEP_TCS 3>, + <WAKE_TCS 3>, + <CONTROL_TCS 1>; + }; + +Example 2: + +For a TCS whose RSC base address is 0xAF20000 and is at DRV id of 0, the +register offsets for DRV0 start at 01C00, the register calculations are like +this - +DRV0: 0xAF20000 +TCS-OFFSET: 0x1C00 + + disp_rsc: rsc@af20000 { + label = "disp_rsc"; + compatible = "qcom,rpmh-rsc"; + reg = <0xaf20000 0x10000>; + reg-names = "drv-0"; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 129 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + qcom,tcs-offset = <0x1c00>; + qcom,drv-id = <0>; + qcom,tcs-config = <ACTIVE_TCS 0>, + <SLEEP_TCS 1>, + <WAKE_TCS 1>, + <CONTROL_TCS 0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ac97-bus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ac97-bus.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..103c428f2595 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ac97-bus.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +Generic AC97 Device Properties + +This documents describes the devicetree bindings for an ac97 controller child +node describing ac97 codecs. + +Required properties: +-compatible : Must be "ac97,vendor_id1,vendor_id2 + The ids shall be the 4 characters hexadecimal encoding, such as + given by "%04x" formatting of printf +-reg : Must be the ac97 codec number, between 0 and 3 + +Example: +ac97: sound@40500000 { + compatible = "marvell,pxa270-ac97"; + reg = < 0x40500000 0x1000 >; + interrupts = <14>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio 95 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + #sound-dai-cells = <1>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = < &pinctrl_ac97_default >; + clocks = <&clks CLK_AC97>, <&clks CLK_AC97CONF>; + clock-names = "AC97CLK", "AC97CONFCLK"; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + audio-codec@0 { + reg = <0>; + compatible = "ac97,574d,4c13"; + clocks = <&fixed_wm9713_clock>; + clock-names = "ac97_clk"; + } +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3dfc2515e5c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +* Amlogic Audio FIFO controllers + +Required properties: +- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-toddr' or + 'amlogic,axg-frddr' +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory + mapped region. +- interrupts: interrupt specifier for the fifo. +- clocks: phandle to the fifo peripheral clock provided by the audio + clock controller. +- resets: phandle to memory ARB line provided by the arb reset controller. +- #sound-dai-cells: must be 0. + +Example of FRDDR A on the A113 SoC: + +frddr_a: audio-controller@1c0 { + compatible = "amlogic,axg-frddr"; + reg = <0x0 0x1c0 0x0 0x1c>; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 88 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + clocks = <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_FRDDR_A>; + resets = <&arb AXG_ARB_FRDDR_A>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-sound-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-sound-card.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..80b411296480 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-sound-card.txt @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +Amlogic AXG sound card: + +Required properties: + +- compatible: "amlogic,axg-sound-card" +- model : User specified audio sound card name, one string + +Optional properties: + +- audio-aux-devs : List of phandles pointing to auxiliary devices +- audio-widgets : Please refer to widgets.txt. +- audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components. + +Subnodes: + +- dai-link: Container for dai-link level properties and the CODEC + sub-nodes. There should be at least one (and probably more) + subnode of this type. + +Required dai-link properties: + +- sound-dai: phandle and port of the CPU DAI. + +Required TDM Backend dai-link properties: +- dai-format : CPU/CODEC common audio format + +Optional TDM Backend dai-link properties: +- dai-tdm-slot-rx-mask-{0,1,2,3}: Receive direction slot masks +- dai-tdm-slot-tx-mask-{0,1,2,3}: Transmit direction slot masks + When omitted, mask is assumed to have to no + slots. A valid must have at one slot, so at + least one these mask should be provided with + an enabled slot. +- dai-tdm-slot-num : Please refer to tdm-slot.txt. + If omitted, slot number is set to accommodate the largest + mask provided. +- dai-tdm-slot-width : Please refer to tdm-slot.txt. default to 32 if omitted. +- mclk-fs : Multiplication factor between stream rate and mclk + +Backend dai-link subnodes: + +- codec: dai-link representing backend links should have at least one subnode. + One subnode for each codec of the dai-link. + dai-link representing frontend links have no codec, therefore have no + subnodes + +Required codec subnodes properties: + +- sound-dai: phandle and port of the CODEC DAI. + +Optional codec subnodes properties: + +- dai-tdm-slot-tx-mask : Please refer to tdm-slot.txt. +- dai-tdm-slot-rx-mask : Please refer to tdm-slot.txt. + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "amlogic,axg-sound-card"; + model = "AXG-S420"; + audio-aux-devs = <&tdmin_a>, <&tdmout_c>; + audio-widgets = "Line", "Lineout", + "Line", "Linein", + "Speaker", "Speaker1 Left", + "Speaker", "Speaker1 Right"; + "Speaker", "Speaker2 Left", + "Speaker", "Speaker2 Right"; + audio-routing = "TDMOUT_C IN 0", "FRDDR_A OUT 2", + "SPDIFOUT IN 0", "FRDDR_A OUT 3", + "TDM_C Playback", "TDMOUT_C OUT", + "TDMIN_A IN 2", "TDM_C Capture", + "TDMIN_A IN 5", "TDM_C Loopback", + "TODDR_A IN 0", "TDMIN_A OUT", + "Lineout", "Lineout AOUTL", + "Lineout", "Lineout AOUTR", + "Speaker1 Left", "SPK1 OUT_A", + "Speaker2 Left", "SPK2 OUT_A", + "Speaker1 Right", "SPK1 OUT_B", + "Speaker2 Right", "SPK2 OUT_B", + "Linein AINL", "Linein", + "Linein AINR", "Linein"; + + dai-link@0 { + sound-dai = <&frddr_a>; + }; + + dai-link@1 { + sound-dai = <&toddr_a>; + }; + + dai-link@2 { + sound-dai = <&tdmif_c>; + dai-format = "i2s"; + dai-tdm-slot-tx-mask-2 = <1 1>; + dai-tdm-slot-tx-mask-3 = <1 1>; + dai-tdm-slot-rx-mask-1 = <1 1>; + mclk-fs = <256>; + + codec@0 { + sound-dai = <&lineout>; + }; + + codec@1 { + sound-dai = <&speaker_amp1>; + }; + + codec@2 { + sound-dai = <&speaker_amp2>; + }; + + codec@3 { + sound-dai = <&linein>; + }; + + }; + + dai-link@3 { + sound-dai = <&spdifout>; + + codec { + sound-dai = <&spdif_dit>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifout.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifout.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..521c38ad89e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-spdifout.txt @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +* Amlogic Audio SPDIF Output + +Required properties: +- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-spdifout' +- clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names. +- clock-names: should contain the following: + * "pclk" : peripheral clock. + * "mclk" : master clock +- #sound-dai-cells: must be 0. + +Example on the A113 SoC: + +spdifout: audio-controller@480 { + compatible = "amlogic,axg-spdifout"; + reg = <0x0 0x480 0x0 0x50>; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_SPDIFOUT>, + <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_SPDIFOUT_CLK>; + clock-names = "pclk", "mclk"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-formatters.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-formatters.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1c1b7490554e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-formatters.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +* Amlogic Audio TDM formatters + +Required properties: +- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-tdmin' or + 'amlogic,axg-tdmout' +- reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory + mapped region. +- clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names. +- clock-names: should contain the following: + * "pclk" : peripheral clock. + * "sclk" : bit clock. + * "sclk_sel" : bit clock input multiplexer. + * "lrclk" : sample clock + * "lrclk_sel": sample clock input multiplexer + +Example of TDMOUT_A on the A113 SoC: + +tdmout_a: audio-controller@500 { + compatible = "amlogic,axg-tdmout"; + reg = <0x0 0x500 0x0 0x40>; + clocks = <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_TDMOUT_A>, + <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_TDMOUT_A_SCLK>, + <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_TDMOUT_A_SCLK_SEL>, + <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_TDMOUT_A_LRCLK>, + <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_TDMOUT_A_LRCLK>; + clock-names = "pclk", "sclk", "sclk_sel", + "lrclk", "lrclk_sel"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-iface.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-iface.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cabfb26a5f22 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-tdm-iface.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +* Amlogic Audio TDM Interfaces + +Required properties: +- compatible: 'amlogic,axg-tdm-iface' +- clocks: list of clock phandle, one for each entry clock-names. +- clock-names: should contain the following: + * "sclk" : bit clock. + * "lrclk": sample clock + * "mclk" : master clock + -> optional if the interface is in clock slave mode. +- #sound-dai-cells: must be 0. + +Example of TDM_A on the A113 SoC: + +tdmif_a: audio-controller@0 { + compatible = "amlogic,axg-tdm-iface"; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_MST_A_MCLK>, + <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_MST_A_SCLK>, + <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_MST_A_LRCLK>; + clock-names = "mclk", "sclk", "lrclk"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-i2s.txt index 735368b8a73f..40549f496a81 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-i2s.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/atmel-i2s.txt @@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ Required properties: - clock-names: Should be one of each entry matching the clocks phandles list: - "pclk" (peripheral clock) Required. - "gclk" (generated clock) Optional (1). - - "aclk" (Audio PLL clock) Optional (1). - "muxclk" (I2S mux clock) Optional (1). Optional properties: @@ -23,9 +22,9 @@ Optional properties: - princtrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default". -(1) : Only the peripheral clock is required. The generated clock, the Audio - PLL clock adn the I2S mux clock are optional and should only be set - together, when Master Mode is required. +(1) : Only the peripheral clock is required. The generated clock and the I2S + mux clock are optional and should only be set together, when Master Mode + is required. Example: @@ -40,8 +39,8 @@ Example: (AT91_XDMAC_DT_MEM_IF(0) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PER_IF(1) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PERID(32))>; dma-names = "tx", "rx"; - clocks = <&i2s0_clk>, <&i2s0_gclk>, <&audio_pll_pmc>, <&i2s0muxck>; - clock-names = "pclk", "gclk", "aclk", "muxclk"; + clocks = <&i2s0_clk>, <&i2s0_gclk>, <&i2s0muxck>; + clock-names = "pclk", "gclk", "muxclk"; pinctrl-names = "default"; pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_i2s0_default>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-card.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-card.txt index d04ea3b1a1dd..7e63e53a901c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-card.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/audio-graph-card.txt @@ -18,6 +18,8 @@ Below are same as Simple-Card. - bitclock-inversion - frame-inversion - mclk-fs +- hp-det-gpio +- mic-det-gpio - dai-tdm-slot-num - dai-tdm-slot-width - clocks / system-clock-frequency diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l33.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l33.txt index acfb47525b49..dc5a355d1a19 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l33.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l33.txt @@ -14,8 +14,6 @@ Optional properties: - reset-gpios : gpio used to reset the amplifier - - interrupt-parent : Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to - which the IRQs from CS35L33 are delivered to. - interrupts : IRQ line info CS35L33. (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for further information relating to interrupt properties) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l34.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l34.txt index b218ead2e68e..2f7606b7d542 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l34.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l34.txt @@ -21,8 +21,6 @@ Optional properties: - reset-gpios: GPIO used to reset the amplifier. - - interrupt-parent : Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to - which the IRQs from CS35L34 are delivered to. - interrupts : IRQ line info CS35L34. (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for further information relating to interrupt properties) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l35.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l35.txt index 77ee75c39233..7915897f8a81 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l35.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs35l35.txt @@ -10,8 +10,6 @@ Required properties: as covered in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt. - - interrupt-parent : Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to - which the IRQs from CS35L35 are delivered to. - interrupts : IRQ line info CS35L35. (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for further information relating to interrupt properties) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l42.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l42.txt index 9a2c5e2423d5..7dfaa2ab906f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l42.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/cs42l42.txt @@ -15,9 +15,6 @@ Optional properties: - reset-gpios : a GPIO spec for the reset pin. If specified, it will be deasserted before communication to the codec starts. - - interrupt-parent : Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to - which the IRQs from CS42L42 are delivered to. - - interrupts : IRQ line info CS42L42. (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for further information relating to interrupt properties) @@ -107,4 +104,4 @@ cs42l42: cs42l42@48 { cirrus,btn-det-event-dbnce = <10>; cirrus,bias-lvls = <0x0F 0x08 0x04 0x01>; cirrus,hs-bias-ramp-rate = <0x02>; -};
\ No newline at end of file +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7218.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7218.txt index 3ab9dfef38d1..2cf30899bd0d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7218.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7218.txt @@ -15,8 +15,6 @@ Required properties: information relating to regulators) Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the IRQs from DA7218 are delivered to. - interrupts: IRQ line info for DA7218 chip. (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for further information relating to interrupt properties) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt index c3df92d31c4b..e9d0baeb94e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/da7219.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "dlg,da7219" - reg: Specifies the I2C slave address -- interrupt-parent : Specifies the phandle of the interrupt controller to which - the IRQs from DA7219 are delivered to. - interrupts : IRQ line info for DA7219. (See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for further information relating to interrupt properties) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/dioo,dio2125.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/dioo,dio2125.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 63dbfe0f11d0..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/dioo,dio2125.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ -DIO2125 Audio Driver - -Required properties: -- compatible : "dioo,dio2125" -- enable-gpios : the gpio connected to the enable pin of the dio2125 - -Example: - -amp: analog-amplifier { - compatible = "dioo,dio2125"; - enable-gpios = <&gpio GPIOH_3 0>; -}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/everest,es7134.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/everest,es7134.txt index 5495a3cb8b7b..091666069bde 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/everest,es7134.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/everest,es7134.txt @@ -1,10 +1,15 @@ ES7134 i2s DA converter Required properties: -- compatible : "everest,es7134" or "everest,es7144" +- compatible : "everest,es7134" or + "everest,es7144" or + "everest,es7154" +- VDD-supply : regulator phandle for the VDD supply +- PVDD-supply: regulator phandle for the PVDD supply for the es7154 Example: i2s_codec: external-codec { compatible = "everest,es7134"; + VDD-supply = <&vcc_5v>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/everest,es7241.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/everest,es7241.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..28f82cf4959f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/everest,es7241.txt @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +ES7241 i2s AD converter + +Required properties: +- compatible : "everest,es7241" +- VDDP-supply: regulator phandle for the VDDA supply +- VDDA-supply: regulator phandle for the VDDP supply +- VDDD-supply: regulator phandle for the VDDD supply + +Optional properties: +- reset-gpios: gpio connected to the reset pin +- m0-gpios : gpio connected to the m0 pin +- m1-gpios : gpio connected to the m1 pin +- everest,sdout-pull-down: + Format used by the serial interface is controlled by pulling + the sdout. If the sdout is pulled down, leftj format is used. + If this property is not provided, sdout is assumed to pulled + up and i2s format is used + +Example: + +linein: audio-codec@2 { + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + compatible = "everest,es7241"; + VDDA-supply = <&vcc_3v3>; + VDDP-supply = <&vcc_3v3>; + VDDD-supply = <&vcc_3v3>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio GPIOH_42>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt index d415888e1316..7e15a85cecd2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,ssi.txt @@ -18,8 +18,6 @@ Required properties: encoded based on the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt controller you have. -- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - fsl,fifo-depth: The number of elements in the transmit and receive FIFOs. This number is the maximum allowed value for SFCSR[TFWM0]. - clocks: "ipg" - Required clock for the SSI unit diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/marvell,pxa2xx-ac97.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/marvell,pxa2xx-ac97.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2ea85d5be6a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/marvell,pxa2xx-ac97.txt @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Marvell PXA2xx audio complex + +This descriptions matches the AC97 controller found in pxa2xx and pxa3xx series. + +Required properties: + - compatible: should be one of the following: + "marvell,pxa250-ac97" + "marvell,pxa270-ac97" + "marvell,pxa300-ac97" + - reg: device MMIO address space + - interrupts: single interrupt generated by AC97 IP + - clocks: input clock of the AC97 IP, refer to clock-bindings.txt + +Optional properties: + - pinctrl-names, pinctrl-0: refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt + - reset-gpios: gpio used for AC97 reset, refer to gpio.txt + +Example: + ac97: sound@40500000 { + compatible = "marvell,pxa250-ac97"; + reg = < 0x40500000 0x1000 >; + interrupts = <14>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio 113 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + #sound-dai-cells = <1>; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = < &pmux_ac97_default >; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt index 74c9ba6c2823..feef39b4a4fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa-ssp.txt @@ -5,24 +5,30 @@ Required properties: compatible Must be "mrvl,pxa-ssp-dai" port A phandle reference to a PXA ssp upstream device +Optional properties: + + clock-names + clocks Through "clock-names" and "clocks", external clocks + can be configured. If a clock names "extclk" exists, + it will be set to the mclk rate of the audio stream + and be used as clock provider of the DAI. + Example: /* upstream device */ - ssp0: ssp@41000000 { + ssp1: ssp@41000000 { compatible = "mrvl,pxa3xx-ssp"; reg = <0x41000000 0x40>; interrupts = <24>; clock-names = "pxa27x-ssp.0"; - dmas = <&dma 13 - &dma 14>; - dma-names = "rx", "tx"; }; /* DAI as user */ ssp_dai0: ssp_dai@0 { compatible = "mrvl,pxa-ssp-dai"; - port = <&ssp0>; + port = <&ssp1>; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa2xx-pcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa2xx-pcm.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 551fbb8348c2..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/mrvl,pxa2xx-pcm.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -DT bindings for ARM PXA2xx PCM platform driver - -This is just a dummy driver that registers the PXA ASoC platform driver. -It does not have any resources assigned. - -Required properties: - - - compatible 'mrvl,pxa-pcm-audio' - -Example: - - pxa_pcm_audio: snd_soc_pxa_audio { - compatible = "mrvl,pxa-pcm-audio"; - }; - diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/name-prefix.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/name-prefix.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..645775908657 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/name-prefix.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Name prefix: + +Card implementing the routing property define the connection between +audio components as list of string pair. Component using the same +sink/source names may use the name prefix property to prepend the +name of their sinks/sources with the provided string. + +Optional name prefix property: +- sound-name-prefix : string using as prefix for the sink/source names of + the component. + +Example: Two instances of the same component. + +amp0: analog-amplifier@0 { + compatible = "simple-audio-amplifier"; + enable-gpios = <&gpio GPIOH_3 0>; + sound-name-prefix = "FRONT"; +}; + +amp1: analog-amplifier@1 { + compatible = "simple-audio-amplifier"; + enable-gpios = <&gpio GPIOH_4 0>; + sound-name-prefix = "BACK"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-dmic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-dmic.txt index fd8105f18978..418e30e72e89 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-dmic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-dmic.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: <MPU access base address, size>, <L3 interconnect address, size>; - interrupts: Interrupt number for DMIC -- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with OMAP dmic IP Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt index 17cce4490456..ae8bf703ce7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcbsp.txt @@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ Required properties: <TX irq>, <RX irq>; - interrupt-names: Array of strings associated with the interrupt numbers -- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller - ti,buffer-size: Size of the FIFO on the port (OMAP2430 and newer SoC) - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the McBSP port diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcpdm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcpdm.txt index 0741dff048dd..5f4e68ca228c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcpdm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/omap-mcpdm.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: <MPU access base address, size>, <L3 interconnect address, size>; - interrupts: Interrupt number for McPDM -- interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated to the McPDM Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,apq8016-sbc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,apq8016-sbc.txt index 6a4aadc4ce06..84b28dbe9f15 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,apq8016-sbc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,apq8016-sbc.txt @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Required properties: Board connectors: * Headset Mic - * Secondary Mic", + * Secondary Mic * DMIC * Ext Spk diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,apq8096.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,apq8096.txt index aa54e49fc8a2..c814e867850f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,apq8096.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,apq8096.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ This binding describes the APQ8096 sound card, which uses qdsp for audio. Value type: <stringlist> Definition: must be "qcom,apq8096-sndcard" -- qcom,audio-routing: +- audio-routing: Usage: Optional Value type: <stringlist> Definition: A list of the connections between audio components. @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ This binding describes the APQ8096 sound card, which uses qdsp for audio. "Digital Mic3" Audio pins and MicBias on WCD9335 Codec: - "MIC_BIAS1 + "MIC_BIAS1" "MIC_BIAS2" "MIC_BIAS3" "MIC_BIAS4" @@ -49,6 +49,12 @@ This binding describes the APQ8096 sound card, which uses qdsp for audio. "DMIC1" "DMIC2" "DMIC3" + +- model: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: The user-visible name of this sound card. + = dailinks Each subnode of sndcard represents either a dailink, and subnodes of each dailinks would be cpu/codec/platform dais. @@ -79,11 +85,16 @@ dailinks would be cpu/codec/platform dais. Value type: <phandle with arguments> Definition: dai phandle/s and port of CPU/CODEC/PLATFORM node. +Obsolete: + qcom,model: String for soundcard name (Use model instead) + qcom,audio-routing: A list of the connections between audio components. + (Use audio-routing instead) + Example: audio { compatible = "qcom,apq8096-sndcard"; - qcom,model = "DB820c"; + model = "DB820c"; mm1-dai-link { link-name = "MultiMedia1"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt index 551ecab67efe..fdcea3d12ee5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,msm8916-wcd-analog.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Bindings for codec Analog IP which is integrated in pmic pm8916, Required properties - compatible = "qcom,pm8916-wcd-analog-codec"; - reg: represents the slave base address provided to the peripheral. - - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. - interrupts: List of interrupts in given SPMI peripheral. - interrupt-names: Names specified to above list of interrupts in same order. List of supported interrupt names are: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6adm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6adm.txt index cb709e5dbc44..bbae426cdfb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6adm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6adm.txt @@ -18,6 +18,11 @@ used by the apr service device. = ADM routing "routing" subnode of the ADM node represents adm routing specific configuration +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "qcom,q6adm-routing". + - #sound-dai-cells Usage: required Value type: <u32> @@ -28,6 +33,7 @@ q6adm@8 { compatible = "qcom,q6adm"; reg = <APR_SVC_ADM>; q6routing: routing { + compatible = "qcom,q6adm-routing"; #sound-dai-cells = <0>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6afe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6afe.txt index bdbf87df8c0b..a8179409c194 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6afe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6afe.txt @@ -17,6 +17,11 @@ used by all apr services. Must contain the following properties. subnode of "dais" representing board specific dai setup. "dais" node should have following properties followed by dai children. +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "qcom,q6afe-dais" + - #sound-dai-cells Usage: required Value type: <u32> @@ -100,6 +105,7 @@ q6afe@4 { reg = <APR_SVC_AFE>; dais { + compatible = "qcom,q6afe-dais"; #sound-dai-cells = <1>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6asm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6asm.txt index 2178eb91146f..f9c7bd8c1bc0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6asm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,q6asm.txt @@ -17,6 +17,11 @@ used by the apr service device. = ASM DAIs (Digial Audio Interface) "dais" subnode of the ASM node represents dai specific configuration +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "qcom,q6asm-dais". + - #sound-dai-cells Usage: required Value type: <u32> @@ -28,6 +33,7 @@ q6asm@7 { compatible = "qcom,q6asm"; reg = <APR_SVC_ASM>; q6asmdai: dais { + compatible = "qcom,q6asm-dais"; #sound-dai-cells = <1>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,sdm845.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,sdm845.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..408c4837e6d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,sdm845.txt @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +* Qualcomm Technologies Inc. SDM845 ASoC sound card driver + +This binding describes the SDM845 sound card, which uses qdsp for audio. + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "qcom,sdm845-sndcard" + +- audio-routing: + Usage: Optional + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: A list of the connections between audio components. + Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the + connection's sink, the second being the connection's + source. Valid names could be power supplies, MicBias + of codec and the jacks on the board. + +- model: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: The user-visible name of this sound card. + += dailinks +Each subnode of sndcard represents either a dailink, and subnodes of each +dailinks would be cpu/codec/platform dais. + +- link-name: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: User friendly name for dai link + += CPU, PLATFORM, CODEC dais subnodes +- cpu: + Usage: required + Value type: <subnode> + Definition: cpu dai sub-node + +- codec: + Usage: required + Value type: <subnode> + Definition: codec dai sub-node + +- platform: + Usage: Optional + Value type: <subnode> + Definition: platform dai sub-node + +- sound-dai: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: dai phandle/s and port of CPU/CODEC/PLATFORM node. + +Example: + +audio { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-sndcard"; + model = "sdm845-snd-card"; + pinctrl-names = "default", "sleep"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pri_mi2s_active &pri_mi2s_ws_active>; + pinctrl-1 = <&pri_mi2s_sleep &pri_mi2s_ws_sleep>; + + mm1-dai-link { + link-name = "MultiMedia1"; + cpu { + sound-dai = <&q6asmdai MSM_FRONTEND_DAI_MULTIMEDIA1>; + }; + }; + + pri-mi2s-dai-link { + link-name = "PRI MI2S Playback"; + cpu { + sound-dai = <&q6afedai PRIMARY_MI2S_RX>; + }; + + platform { + sound-dai = <&q6routing>; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1d8d49e30af7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd9335.txt @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +QCOM WCD9335 Codec + +Qualcomm WCD9335 Codec is a standalone Hi-Fi audio codec IC, supports +Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. (QTI) multimedia solutions, including +the MSM8996, MSM8976, and MSM8956 chipsets. It has in-built +Soundwire controller, interrupt mux. It supports both I2S/I2C and +SLIMbus audio interfaces. + +Required properties with SLIMbus Interface: + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: For SLIMbus interface it should be "slimMID,PID", + textual representation of Manufacturer ID, Product Code, + shall be in lower case hexadecimal with leading zeroes + suppressed. Refer to slimbus/bus.txt for details. + Should be: + "slim217,1a0" for MSM8996 and APQ8096 SoCs with SLIMbus. + +- reg + Usage: required + Value type: <u32 u32> + Definition: Should be ('Device index', 'Instance ID') + +- interrupts + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Interrupts via WCD INTR1 and INTR2 pins + +- interrupt-names: + Usage: required + Value type: <String array> + Definition: Interrupt names of WCD INTR1 and INTR2 + Should be: "intr1", "intr2" + +- reset-gpio: + Usage: required + Value type: <String Array> + Definition: Reset gpio line + +- qcom,ifd: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: SLIM interface device + +- clocks: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: See clock-bindings.txt section "consumers". List of + three clock specifiers for mclk, mclk2 and slimbus clock. + +- clock-names: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Must contain "mclk", "mclk2" and "slimbus" strings. + +- vdd-buck-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: Should contain a reference to the 1.8V buck supply + +- vdd-buck-sido-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: Should contain a reference to the 1.8V SIDO buck supply + +- vdd-rx-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: Should contain a reference to the 1.8V rx supply + +- vdd-tx-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: Should contain a reference to the 1.8V tx supply + +- vdd-vbat-supply: + Usage: Optional + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: Should contain a reference to the vbat supply + +- vdd-micbias-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: Should contain a reference to the micbias supply + +- vdd-io-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: Should contain a reference to the 1.8V io supply + +- interrupt-controller: + Usage: required + Definition: Indicating that this is a interrupt controller + +- #interrupt-cells: + Usage: required + Value type: <int> + Definition: should be 1 + +#sound-dai-cells + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Must be 1 + +codec@1{ + compatible = "slim217,1a0"; + reg = <1 0>; + interrupts = <&msmgpio 54 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-names = "intr2" + reset-gpio = <&msmgpio 64 0>; + qcom,ifd = <&wc9335_ifd>; + clock-names = "mclk", "native"; + clocks = <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_DIV_CLK1>, + <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_BB_CLK1>; + vdd-buck-supply = <&pm8994_s4>; + vdd-rx-supply = <&pm8994_s4>; + vdd-buck-sido-supply = <&pm8994_s4>; + vdd-tx-supply = <&pm8994_s4>; + vdd-io-supply = <&pm8994_s4>; + #sound-dai-cells = <1>; +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt index b86d790f630f..9e764270c36b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt @@ -352,6 +352,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7794" (R-Car E2) - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7795" (R-Car H3) - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7796" (R-Car M3-W) + - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a77965" (R-Car M3-N) - reg : Should contain the register physical address. required register is SRU/ADG/SSI if generation1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-i2s.txt index b208a752576c..54aefab71f2c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-i2s.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rockchip-i2s.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: should be one of the following: - "rockchip,rk3066-i2s": for rk3066 + - "rockchip,px30-i2s", "rockchip,rk3066-i2s": for px30 - "rockchip,rk3036-i2s", "rockchip,rk3066-i2s": for rk3036 - "rockchip,rk3188-i2s", "rockchip,rk3066-i2s": for rk3188 - "rockchip,rk3228-i2s", "rockchip,rk3066-i2s": for rk3228 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5514.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5514.txt index b25ed08c7a5a..d2cc171f22f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5514.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5514.txt @@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ Optional properties: - clocks: The phandle of the master clock to the CODEC - clock-names: Should be "mclk" -- interrupt-parent: The phandle for the interrupt controller. - interrupts: The interrupt number to the cpu. The interrupt specifier format depends on the interrupt controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5682.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5682.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..312e9a129530 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5682.txt @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +RT5682 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "realtek,rt5682" or "realtek,rt5682i" + +- reg : The I2C address of the device. + +Optional properties: + +- interrupts : The CODEC's interrupt output. + +- realtek,dmic1-data-pin + 0: dmic1 is not used + 1: using GPIO2 pin as dmic1 data pin + 2: using GPIO5 pin as dmic1 data pin + +- realtek,dmic1-clk-pin + 0: using GPIO1 pin as dmic1 clock pin + 1: using GPIO3 pin as dmic1 clock pin + +- realtek,jd-src + 0: No JD is used + 1: using JD1 as JD source + +- realtek,ldo1-en-gpios : The GPIO that controls the CODEC's LDO1_EN pin. + +Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes) for RT5682: + + * DMIC L1 + * DMIC R1 + * IN1P + * HPOL + * HPOR + +Example: + +rt5682 { + compatible = "realtek,rt5682i"; + reg = <0x1a>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + interrupts = <TEGRA_GPIO(U, 6) GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + realtek,ldo1-en-gpios = + <&gpio TEGRA_GPIO(R, 2) GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + realtek,dmic1-data-pin = <1>; + realtek,dmic1-clk-pin = <1>; + realtek,jd-src = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt index 0f214457476f..9c58f724396a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Optional properties: - VDDD-supply : the regulator provider of VDDD -- micbias-resistor-k-ohms : the bias resistor to be used in kOmhs +- micbias-resistor-k-ohms : the bias resistor to be used in kOhms The resistor can take values of 2k, 4k or 8k. If set to 0 it will be off. If this node is not mentioned or if the value is unknown, then diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-amplifier.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-amplifier.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8647edae7af0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/simple-amplifier.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +Simple Amplifier Audio Driver + +Required properties: +- compatible : "dioo,dio2125" or "simple-audio-amplifier" +- enable-gpios : the gpio connected to the enable pin of the simple amplifier + +Example: + +amp: analog-amplifier { + compatible = "simple-audio-amplifier"; + enable-gpios = <&gpio GPIOH_3 0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tas571x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tas571x.txt index b4959f10b74b..7c8fd37c2f9e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tas571x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/tas571x.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ powerdown (optional). Required properties: - compatible: should be one of the following: + - "ti,tas5707" - "ti,tas5711", - "ti,tas5717", - "ti,tas5719", diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ts3a227e.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ts3a227e.txt index a836881d9608..3ed8359144d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ts3a227e.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ts3a227e.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should contain "ti,ts3a227e". - reg: The i2c address. Should contain <0x3b>. - - interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller - interrupts: Interrupt number for /INT pin from the 227e Optional properies: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-msp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-msp.txt index 99acd9c774e1..7dd1b96160f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-msp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ux500-msp.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - interrupts : The interrupt output from the device. - - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. - <name>-supply : Phandle to the regulator <name> supply Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8994.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8994.txt index 4a9dead1b7d3..68cccc4653ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8994.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8994.txt @@ -26,7 +26,6 @@ Optional properties: - interrupt-controller : These devices contain interrupt controllers and may provide interrupt services to other devices if they have an interrupt line connected. - - interrupt-parent : The parent interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells: the number of cells to describe an IRQ, this should be 2. The first cell is the IRQ number. The second cell is the flags, encoded as the trigger masks from @@ -57,6 +56,12 @@ Optional properties: - wlf,ldoena-always-driven : If present LDOENA is always driven. + - wlf,spkmode-pu : If present enable the internal pull-up resistor on + the SPKMODE pin. + + - wlf,csnaddr-pd : If present enable the internal pull-down resistor on + the CS/ADDR pin. + Example: wm8994: codec@1a { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt index a2331372068c..8854004a1d3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/fsl-spi.txt @@ -12,8 +12,6 @@ Required properties: information for the interrupt. This should be encoded based on the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt controller you have. -- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - clock-frequency : input clock frequency to non FSL_SOC cores Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-hspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-hspi.txt index 585fed90376e..b9d1e4d11a77 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-hspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-hspi.txt @@ -6,8 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,hspi-r8a7778" (R-Car M1) - "renesas,hspi-r8a7779" (R-Car H1) - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device -- interrupt-parent : The phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device - interrupts : Interrupt specifier - #address-cells : Must be <1> - #size-cells : Must be <0> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt index 39806329c193..bfbc2035fb6b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/sh-msiof.txt @@ -29,8 +29,6 @@ Required properties: If two register sets are present, the first is to be used by the CPU, and the second is to be used by the DMA engine. -- interrupt-parent : The phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device - interrupts : Interrupt specifier - #address-cells : Must be <1> - #size-cells : Must be <0> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/snps,dw-apb-ssi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/snps,dw-apb-ssi.txt index 204b311e0400..642d3fb1ef85 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/snps,dw-apb-ssi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/snps,dw-apb-ssi.txt @@ -1,8 +1,10 @@ Synopsys DesignWare AMBA 2.0 Synchronous Serial Interface. Required properties: -- compatible : "snps,dw-apb-ssi" -- reg : The register base for the controller. +- compatible : "snps,dw-apb-ssi" or "mscc,<soc>-spi", where soc is "ocelot" or + "jaguar2" +- reg : The register base for the controller. For "mscc,<soc>-spi", a second + register set is required (named ICPU_CFG:SPI_MST) - interrupts : One interrupt, used by the controller. - #address-cells : <1>, as required by generic SPI binding. - #size-cells : <0>, also as required by generic SPI binding. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-cadence.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-cadence.txt index 94f09141a4f0..05a2ef945664 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-cadence.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-cadence.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : Physical base address and size of SPI registers map. - interrupts : Property with a value describing the interrupt number. -- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller - clock-names : List of input clock names - "ref_clk", "pclk" (See clock bindings for details). - clocks : Clock phandles (see clock bindings for details). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-lpspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-lpspi.txt index 225ace1d0c65..4af132606b37 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-lpspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-fsl-lpspi.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : - "fsl,imx7ulp-spi" for LPSPI compatible with the one integrated on i.MX7ULP soc - reg : address and length of the lpspi master registers -- interrupt-parent : core interrupt controller - interrupts : lpspi interrupt - clocks : lpspi clock specifier diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-rockchip.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-rockchip.txt index 6e3ffacbba32..a0edac12d8df 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-rockchip.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-rockchip.txt @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ Required Properties: - compatible: should be one of the following. "rockchip,rv1108-spi" for rv1108 SoCs. + "rockchip,px30-spi", "rockchip,rk3066-spi" for px30 SoCs. "rockchip,rk3036-spi" for rk3036 SoCS. "rockchip,rk3066-spi" for rk3066 SoCs. "rockchip,rk3188-spi" for rk3188 SoCs. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-rspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-rspi.txt index 3b02b3a7cfb2..96fd58548f69 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-rspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-rspi.txt @@ -28,8 +28,6 @@ Required properties: - "rx" for SPRI, - "tx" to SPTI, - "mux" for a single muxed interrupt. -- interrupt-parent : The phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. - num-cs : Number of chip selects. Some RSPI cores have more than 1. - #address-cells : Must be <1> - #size-cells : Must be <0> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-uniphier.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-uniphier.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..504a4ecfc7b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-uniphier.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Socionext UniPhier SPI controller driver + +UniPhier SoCs have SCSSI which supports SPI single channel. + +Required properties: + - compatible: should be "socionext,uniphier-scssi" + - reg: address and length of the spi master registers + - #address-cells: must be <1>, see spi-bus.txt + - #size-cells: must be <0>, see spi-bus.txt + - clocks: A phandle to the clock for the device. + - resets: A phandle to the reset control for the device. + +Example: + +spi0: spi@54006000 { + compatible = "socionext,uniphier-scssi"; + reg = <0x54006000 0x100>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&peri_clk 11>; + resets = <&peri_rst 11>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-xilinx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-xilinx.txt index 7bf61efc66c8..dc924a5f71db 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-xilinx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-xilinx.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : Physical base address and size of SPI registers map. - interrupts : Property with a value describing the interrupt number. -- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller Optional properties: - xlnx,num-ss-bits : Number of chip selects used. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-xlp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-xlp.txt index 40e82d51efec..f4925ec0ed33 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-xlp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-xlp.txt @@ -13,7 +13,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : Should contain register location and length. - clocks : Phandle of the spi clock - interrupts : Interrupt number used by this controller. -- interrupt-parent : Phandle of the parent interrupt controller. SPI slave nodes must be children of the SPI master node and can contain properties described in Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-zynqmp-qspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-zynqmp-qspi.txt index c8f50e5cf70b..0f6d37ff541c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-zynqmp-qspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-zynqmp-qspi.txt @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Required properties: - reg : Physical base address and size of GQSPI registers map. - interrupts : Property with a value describing the interrupt number. -- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller. - clock-names : List of input clock names - "ref_clk", "pclk" (See clock bindings for details). - clocks : Clock phandles (see clock bindings for details). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sram.txt index 267da4410aef..e98908bd4227 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sram.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sram.txt @@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ Optional properties in the area nodes: manipulation of the page attributes. - label : the name for the reserved partition, if omitted, the label is taken from the node name excluding the unit address. +- clocks : a list of phandle and clock specifier pair that controls the + single SRAM clock. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt index d087f04a4d7f..c51ade86578c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/sunxi-sram.txt @@ -10,8 +10,14 @@ Controller Node Required properties: - compatible : should be: - - "allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-controller" - - "allwinner,sun50i-a64-sram-controller" + - "allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-controller" (deprecated) + - "allwinner,sun4i-a10-system-control" + - "allwinner,sun5i-a13-system-control" + - "allwinner,sun7i-a20-system-control", "allwinner,sun4i-a10-system-control" + - "allwinner,sun8i-a23-system-control" + - "allwinner,sun8i-h3-system-control" + - "allwinner,sun50i-a64-sram-controller" (deprecated) + - "allwinner,sun50i-a64-system-control" - reg : sram controller register offset + length SRAM nodes @@ -26,8 +32,25 @@ once again the representation described in the mmio-sram binding. The valid sections compatible for A10 are: - allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-a3-a4 + - allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-c1 - allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-d +The valid sections compatible for A13 are: + - allwinner,sun5i-a13-sram-a3-a4, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-a3-a4 + - allwinner,sun5i-a13-sram-c1, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-c1 + - allwinner,sun5i-a13-sram-d, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-d + +The valid sections compatible for A20 are: + - allwinner,sun7i-a20-sram-a3-a4, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-a3-a4 + - allwinner,sun7i-a20-sram-c1, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-c1 + - allwinner,sun7i-a20-sram-d, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-d + +The valid sections compatible for A23/A33 are: + - allwinner,sun8i-a23-sram-c1, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-c1 + +The valid sections compatible for H3 are: + - allwinner,sun8i-h3-sram-c1, allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-c1 + The valid sections compatible for A64 are: - allwinner,sun50i-a64-sram-c @@ -47,8 +70,8 @@ This valid values for this argument are: Example ------- -sram-controller@1c00000 { - compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-sram-controller"; +system-control@1c00000 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-system-control"; reg = <0x01c00000 0x30>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/spear-adc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/spear-adc.txt index 02ea23a63f20..88bc94fe1f6d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/spear-adc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/staging/iio/adc/spear-adc.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "st,spear600-adc" - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the ADC interrupt - sampling-frequency: Default sampling frequency diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/armada-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/armada-thermal.txt index e0d013a2e66d..f3b441100890 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/armada-thermal.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/armada-thermal.txt @@ -10,6 +10,11 @@ Required properties: * marvell,armada-ap806-thermal * marvell,armada-cp110-thermal +Note: these bindings are deprecated for AP806/CP110 and should instead +follow the rules described in: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/ap806-system-controller.txt +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/cp110-system-controller.txt + - reg: Device's register space. Two entries are expected, see the examples below. The first one points to the status register (4B). The second one points to the control diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-tmon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-tmon.txt index 9d43553a8d39..43a9ed545944 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-tmon.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-tmon.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: address range for the AVS TMON registers - interrupts: temperature monitor interrupt, for high/low threshold triggers - interrupt-names: should be "tmon" -- interrupt-parent: the parent interrupt controller Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt index ad648d93d961..33004ce7e5df 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/exynos-thermal.txt @@ -13,7 +13,6 @@ Exynos5420 (Must pass triminfo base and triminfo clock) "samsung,exynos5433-tmu" "samsung,exynos7-tmu" -- interrupt-parent : The phandle for the interrupt controller - reg : Address range of the thermal registers. For soc's which has multiple instances of TMU and some registers are shared across all TMU's like interrupt related then 2 set of register has to supplied. First set diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/qcom-tsens.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/qcom-tsens.txt index 06195e8f35e2..1d9e8cf61018 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/qcom-tsens.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/qcom-tsens.txt @@ -1,18 +1,28 @@ * QCOM SoC Temperature Sensor (TSENS) Required properties: -- compatible : - - "qcom,msm8916-tsens" : For 8916 Family of SoCs - - "qcom,msm8974-tsens" : For 8974 Family of SoCs - - "qcom,msm8996-tsens" : For 8996 Family of SoCs +- compatible: + Must be one of the following: + - "qcom,msm8916-tsens" (MSM8916) + - "qcom,msm8974-tsens" (MSM8974) + - "qcom,msm8996-tsens" (MSM8996) + - "qcom,msm8998-tsens", "qcom,tsens-v2" (MSM8998) + - "qcom,sdm845-tsens", "qcom,tsens-v2" (SDM845) + The generic "qcom,tsens-v2" property must be used as a fallback for any SoC + with version 2 of the TSENS IP. MSM8996 is the only exception because the + generic property did not exist when support was added. + +- reg: Address range of the thermal registers. + New platforms containing v2.x.y of the TSENS IP must specify the SROT and TM + register spaces separately, with order being TM before SROT. + See Example 2, below. -- reg: Address range of the thermal registers - #thermal-sensor-cells : Should be 1. See ./thermal.txt for a description. - #qcom,sensors: Number of sensors in tsens block - Refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/nvmem.txt to know how to specify nvmem cells -Example: +Example 1 (legacy support before a fallback tsens-v2 property was introduced): tsens: thermal-sensor@900000 { compatible = "qcom,msm8916-tsens"; reg = <0x4a8000 0x2000>; @@ -20,3 +30,12 @@ tsens: thermal-sensor@900000 { nvmem-cell-names = "caldata", "calsel"; #thermal-sensor-cells = <1>; }; + +Example 2 (for any platform containing v2 of the TSENS IP): +tsens0: thermal-sensor@c263000 { + compatible = "qcom,sdm845-tsens", "qcom,tsens-v2"; + reg = <0xc263000 0x1ff>, /* TM */ + <0xc222000 0x1ff>; /* SROT */ + #qcom,sensors = <13>; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/altr,timer-1.0.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/altr,timer-1.0.txt index 904a5846d7ac..e698e3488735 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/altr,timer-1.0.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/altr,timer-1.0.txt @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should be "altr,timer-1.0" - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt controller - interrupts : Should contain the timer interrupt number - clock-frequency : The frequency of the clock that drives the counter, in Hz. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,gtm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,gtm.txt index 9a33efded4bc..fc1c571f7412 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,gtm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/fsl,gtm.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required properties: "fsl,<chip>-cpm2-gtm", "fsl,cpm2-gtm", "fsl,gtm" for CPM2 GTMs - reg : should contain gtm registers location and length (0x40). - interrupts : should contain four interrupts. - - interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle. - clock-frequency : specifies the frequency driving the timer. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,orion-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,orion-timer.txt index 62bb8260cf6a..cd1a0c256f94 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,orion-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,orion-timer.txt @@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ Marvell Orion SoC timer Required properties: - compatible: shall be "marvell,orion-timer" - reg: base address of the timer register starting with TIMERS CONTROL register -- interrupt-parent: phandle of the bridge interrupt controller - interrupts: should contain the interrupts for Timer0 and Timer1 - clocks: phandle of timer reference clock (tclk) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt index b1fe7e9de1b4..18d4d0166c76 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/mediatek,mtk-timer.txt @@ -1,19 +1,25 @@ -Mediatek MT6577, MT6572 and MT6589 Timers ---------------------------------------- +Mediatek Timers +--------------- + +Mediatek SoCs have two different timers on different platforms, +- GPT (General Purpose Timer) +- SYST (System Timer) + +The proper timer will be selected automatically by driver. Required properties: - compatible should contain: - * "mediatek,mt2701-timer" for MT2701 compatible timers - * "mediatek,mt6580-timer" for MT6580 compatible timers - * "mediatek,mt6589-timer" for MT6589 compatible timers - * "mediatek,mt7623-timer" for MT7623 compatible timers - * "mediatek,mt8127-timer" for MT8127 compatible timers - * "mediatek,mt8135-timer" for MT8135 compatible timers - * "mediatek,mt8173-timer" for MT8173 compatible timers - * "mediatek,mt6577-timer" for MT6577 and all above compatible timers -- reg: Should contain location and length for timers register. -- clocks: Clocks driving the timer hardware. This list should include two - clocks. The order is system clock and as second clock the RTC clock. + * "mediatek,mt2701-timer" for MT2701 compatible timers (GPT) + * "mediatek,mt6580-timer" for MT6580 compatible timers (GPT) + * "mediatek,mt6589-timer" for MT6589 compatible timers (GPT) + * "mediatek,mt7623-timer" for MT7623 compatible timers (GPT) + * "mediatek,mt8127-timer" for MT8127 compatible timers (GPT) + * "mediatek,mt8135-timer" for MT8135 compatible timers (GPT) + * "mediatek,mt8173-timer" for MT8173 compatible timers (GPT) + * "mediatek,mt6577-timer" for MT6577 and all above compatible timers (GPT) + * "mediatek,mt6765-timer" for MT6765 compatible timers (SYST) +- reg: Should contain location and length for timer register. +- clocks: Should contain system clock. Examples: @@ -21,5 +27,5 @@ Examples: compatible = "mediatek,mt6577-timer"; reg = <0x10008000 0x80>; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 113 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; - clocks = <&system_clk>, <&rtc_clk>; + clocks = <&system_clk>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/snps,arc-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/snps,arc-timer.txt index 4ef024630d61..147ef3e74452 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/snps,arc-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/snps,arc-timer.txt @@ -12,10 +12,6 @@ Required properties: (16 for ARCHS cores, 3 for ARC700 cores) - clocks : phandle to the source clock -Optional properties: - -- interrupt-parent : phandle to parent intc - Example: timer0 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/st,spear-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/st,spear-timer.txt index c0017221cf55..b5238a07da17 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/st,spear-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/st,spear-timer.txt @@ -5,8 +5,6 @@ - compatible : Should be: "st,spear-timer" - reg: Address range of the timer registers -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupt: Should contain the timer interrupt number Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/ti,c64x+timer64.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/ti,c64x+timer64.txt index 95911fe70224..d96c1e283e73 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/ti,c64x+timer64.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/ti,c64x+timer64.txt @@ -7,7 +7,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: must be "ti,c64x+timer64" - reg: base address and size of register region -- interrupt-parent: interrupt controller - interrupts: interrupt id Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/ti,davinci-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/ti,davinci-timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..29bf91ccf5b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/ti,davinci-timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +* Device tree bindings for Texas Instruments DaVinci timer + +This document provides bindings for the 64-bit timer in the DaVinci +architecture devices. The timer can be configured as a general-purpose 64-bit +timer, dual general-purpose 32-bit timers. When configured as dual 32-bit +timers, each half can operate in conjunction (chain mode) or independently +(unchained mode) of each other. + +The timer is a free running up-counter and can generate interrupts when the +counter reaches preset counter values. + +Also see ../watchdog/davinci-wdt.txt for timers that are configurable as +watchdog timers. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "ti,da830-timer". +- reg : specifies base physical address and count of the registers. +- interrupts : interrupts generated by the timer. +- interrupt-names: should be "tint12", "tint34", "cmpint0", "cmpint1", + "cmpint2", "cmpint3", "cmpint4", "cmpint5", "cmpint6", + "cmpint7" ("cmpintX" may be omitted if not present in the + hardware). +- clocks : the clock feeding the timer clock. + +Example: + + clocksource: timer@20000 { + compatible = "ti,da830-timer"; + reg = <0x20000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <21>, <22>, <74>, <75>, <76>, <77>, <78>, <79>, + <80>, <81>; + interrupt-names = "tint12", "tint34", "cmpint0", "cmpint1", + "cmpint2", "cmpint3", "cmpint4", "cmpint5", + "cmpint6", "cmpint7"; + clocks = <&pll0_auxclk>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a48c44817367 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufs-hisi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +* Hisilicon Universal Flash Storage (UFS) Host Controller + +UFS nodes are defined to describe on-chip UFS hardware macro. +Each UFS Host Controller should have its own node. + +Required properties: +- compatible : compatible list, contains one of the following - + "hisilicon,hi3660-ufs", "jedec,ufs-1.1" for hisi ufs + host controller present on Hi36xx chipset. +- reg : should contain UFS register address space & UFS SYS CTRL register address, +- interrupt-parent : interrupt device +- interrupts : interrupt number +- clocks : List of phandle and clock specifier pairs +- clock-names : List of clock input name strings sorted in the same + order as the clocks property. "ref_clk", "phy_clk" is optional +- freq-table-hz : Array of <min max> operating frequencies stored in the same + order as the clocks property. If this property is not + defined or a value in the array is "0" then it is assumed + that the frequency is set by the parent clock or a + fixed rate clock source. +- resets : describe reset node register +- reset-names : reset node register, the "rst" corresponds to reset the whole UFS IP. + +Example: + + ufs: ufs@ff3b0000 { + compatible = "hisilicon,hi3660-ufs", "jedec,ufs-1.1"; + /* 0: HCI standard */ + /* 1: UFS SYS CTRL */ + reg = <0x0 0xff3b0000 0x0 0x1000>, + <0x0 0xff3b1000 0x0 0x1000>; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 278 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&crg_ctrl HI3660_CLK_GATE_UFSIO_REF>, + <&crg_ctrl HI3660_CLK_GATE_UFSPHY_CFG>; + clock-names = "ref_clk", "phy_clk"; + freq-table-hz = <0 0>, <0 0>; + /* offset: 0x84; bit: 12 */ + resets = <&crg_rst 0x84 12>; + reset-names = "rst"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt index c39dfef76a18..2df00524bd21 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ufs/ufshcd-pltfrm.txt @@ -41,6 +41,8 @@ Optional properties: -lanes-per-direction : number of lanes available per direction - either 1 or 2. Note that it is assume same number of lanes is used both directions at once. If not specified, default is 2 lanes per direction. +- resets : reset node register +- reset-names : describe reset node register, the "rst" corresponds to reset the whole UFS IP. Note: If above properties are not defined it can be assumed that the supply regulators or clocks are always on. @@ -61,9 +63,11 @@ Example: vccq-max-microamp = 200000; vccq2-max-microamp = 200000; - clocks = <&core 0>, <&ref 0>, <&iface 0>; - clock-names = "core_clk", "ref_clk", "iface_clk"; - freq-table-hz = <100000000 200000000>, <0 0>, <0 0>; + clocks = <&core 0>, <&ref 0>, <&phy 0>, <&iface 0>; + clock-names = "core_clk", "ref_clk", "phy_clk", "iface_clk"; + freq-table-hz = <100000000 200000000>, <0 0>, <0 0>, <0 0>; + resets = <&reset 0 1>; + reset-names = "rst"; phys = <&ufsphy1>; phy-names = "ufsphy"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt index 7f13ebef06cb..3e4c38b806ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/dwc3.txt @@ -96,6 +96,11 @@ Optional properties: enable periodic ESS TX threshold. - <DEPRECATED> tx-fifo-resize: determines if the FIFO *has* to be reallocated. + - snps,incr-burst-type-adjustment: Value for INCR burst type of GSBUSCFG0 + register, undefined length INCR burst type enable and INCRx type. + When just one value, which means INCRX burst mode enabled. When + more than one value, which means undefined length INCR burst type + enabled. The values can be 1, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 and 256. - in addition all properties from usb-xhci.txt from the current directory are supported as well @@ -108,4 +113,5 @@ dwc3@4a030000 { reg = <0x4a030000 0xcfff>; interrupts = <0 92 4> usb-phy = <&usb2_phy>, <&usb3,phy>; + snps,incr-burst-type-adjustment = <1>, <4>, <8>, <16>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/fsl-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/fsl-usb.txt index 4779c029b675..0b08b006c5ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/fsl-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/fsl-usb.txt @@ -33,8 +33,6 @@ Recommended properties : information for the interrupt. This should be encoded based on the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt controller you have. - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Optional properties : - fsl,invert-drvvbus : boolean; for MPC5121 USB0 only. Indicates the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/maxim,max3421.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/maxim,max3421.txt index 8cdbe0c85188..90495b1aeec2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/maxim,max3421.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/maxim,max3421.txt @@ -11,9 +11,6 @@ Required properties: The driver configures MAX3421E for active low level triggered interrupts, configure your interrupt line accordingly. -Optional property: - - interrupt-parent: the phandle to the associated interrupt controller. - Example: usb@0 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/npcm7xx-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/npcm7xx-usb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5a0f1f14fbfa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/npcm7xx-usb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +Nuvoton NPCM7XX SoC USB controllers: +----------------------------- + +EHCI: +----- + +Required properties: +- compatible: "nuvoton,npcm750-ehci" +- interrupts: Should contain the EHCI interrupt +- reg: Physical address and length of the register set for the device + +Example: + + ehci1: usb@f0806000 { + compatible = "nuvoton,npcm750-ehci"; + reg = <0xf0806000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 61 4>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/richtek,rt1711h.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/richtek,rt1711h.txt index 09e847e92e5e..d4cf53c071d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/richtek,rt1711h.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/richtek,rt1711h.txt @@ -3,8 +3,6 @@ Richtek RT1711H TypeC PD Controller. Required properties: - compatible : Must be "richtek,rt1711h". - reg : Must be 0x4e, it's slave address of RT1711H. - - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that - provides interrupts for this device. - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b represents an encoding of the sense and level information for the interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/rockchip,dwc3.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/rockchip,dwc3.txt index 252a05c5d976..c8c4b00ecb94 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/rockchip,dwc3.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/rockchip,dwc3.txt @@ -16,7 +16,8 @@ A child node must exist to represent the core DWC3 IP block. The name of the node is not important. The content of the node is defined in dwc3.txt. Phy documentation is provided in the following places: -Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/qcom-dwc3-usb-phy.txt +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-inno-usb2.txt - USB2.0 PHY +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-rockchip-typec.txt - Type-C PHY Example device nodes: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-hsotg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-hsotg.txt index b83d428a265e..0388634598ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-hsotg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/samsung-hsotg.txt @@ -14,8 +14,6 @@ Binding details Required properties: - compatible: "samsung,s3c6400-hsotg" should be used for all currently supported SoC, -- interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller to which the - interrupt signal of the HSOTG block is routed, - interrupts: specifier of interrupt signal of interrupt controller, according to bindings of interrupt controller, - clocks: contains an array of clock specifiers: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/spear-usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/spear-usb.txt index f8a464a25653..1dc91cc459c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/spear-usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/spear-usb.txt @@ -6,8 +6,6 @@ EHCI: Required properties: - compatible: "st,spear600-ehci" -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the EHCI interrupt Example: @@ -25,8 +23,6 @@ OHCI: Required properties: - compatible: "st,spear600-ohci" -- interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller - that services interrupts for this device - interrupts: Should contain the OHCI interrupt Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/typec-tcpci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/typec-tcpci.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0dd1469e7318 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/typec-tcpci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +TCPCI(Typec port cotroller interface) binding +--------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be set one of following: + - "nxp,ptn5110" for NXP USB PD TCPC PHY IC ptn5110. + +- reg: the i2c slave address of typec port controller device. +- interrupt-parent: the phandle to the interrupt controller which provides + the interrupt. +- interrupts: interrupt specification for tcpci alert. + +Required sub-node: +- connector: The "usb-c-connector" attached to the tcpci chip, the bindings + of connector node are specified in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt + +Example: + +ptn5110@50 { + compatible = "nxp,ptn5110"; + reg = <0x50>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio3>; + interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + + usb_con: connector { + compatible = "usb-c-connector"; + label = "USB-C"; + data-role = "dual"; + power-role = "dual"; + try-power-role = "sink"; + source-pdos = <PDO_FIXED(5000, 2000, PDO_FIXED_USB_COMM)>; + sink-pdos = <PDO_FIXED(5000, 2000, PDO_FIXED_USB_COMM) + PDO_VAR(5000, 12000, 2000)>; + op-sink-microwatt = <10000000>; + + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + port@1 { + reg = <1>; + usb_con_ss: endpoint { + remote-endpoint = <&usb3_data_ss>; + }; + }; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt index bd1dd316fb23..ac4cd0d6195a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/usb-xhci.txt @@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,xhci-r8a7795" for r8a7795 SoC - "renesas,xhci-r8a7796" for r8a7796 SoC - "renesas,xhci-r8a77965" for r8a77965 SoC + - "renesas,xhci-r8a77990" for r8a77990 SoC - "renesas,rcar-gen2-xhci" for a generic R-Car Gen2 or RZ/G1 compatible device - "renesas,rcar-gen3-xhci" for a generic R-Car Gen3 compatible device diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt index 7cad066191ee..2c3fc512e746 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ abracon Abracon Corporation actions Actions Semiconductor Co., Ltd. active-semi Active-Semi International Inc ad Avionic Design GmbH +adafruit Adafruit Industries, LLC adapteva Adapteva, Inc. adaptrum Adaptrum, Inc. adh AD Holdings Plc. @@ -41,6 +42,7 @@ arrow Arrow Electronics artesyn Artesyn Embedded Technologies Inc. asahi-kasei Asahi Kasei Corp. aspeed ASPEED Technology Inc. +asus AsusTek Computer Inc. atlas Atlas Scientific LLC atmel Atmel Corporation auo AU Optronics Corporation @@ -53,6 +55,7 @@ axentia Axentia Technologies AB axis Axis Communications AB bananapi BIPAI KEJI LIMITED bhf Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG +bitmain Bitmain Technologies boe BOE Technology Group Co., Ltd. bosch Bosch Sensortec GmbH boundary Boundary Devices Inc. @@ -85,6 +88,7 @@ cubietech Cubietech, Ltd. cypress Cypress Semiconductor Corporation cznic CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. dallas Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor) +dataimage DataImage, Inc. davicom DAVICOM Semiconductor, Inc. delta Delta Electronics, Inc. denx Denx Software Engineering @@ -93,6 +97,7 @@ dh DH electronics GmbH digi Digi International Inc. digilent Diglent, Inc. dioo Dioo Microcircuit Co., Ltd +dlc DLC Display Co., Ltd. dlg Dialog Semiconductor dlink D-Link Corporation dmo Data Modul AG @@ -124,6 +129,7 @@ excito Excito ezchip EZchip Semiconductor fairphone Fairphone B.V. faraday Faraday Technology Corporation +fastrax Fastrax Oy fcs Fairchild Semiconductor firefly Firefly focaltech FocalTech Systems Co.,Ltd @@ -136,6 +142,7 @@ geekbuying GeekBuying gef GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. GEFanuc GE Fanuc Intelligent Platforms Embedded Systems, Inc. geniatech Geniatech, Inc. +giantec Giantec Semiconductor, Inc. giantplus Giantplus Technology Co., Ltd. globalscale Globalscale Technologies, Inc. gmt Global Mixed-mode Technology, Inc. @@ -188,11 +195,13 @@ keymile Keymile GmbH khadas Khadas kiebackpeter Kieback & Peter GmbH kinetic Kinetic Technologies +kingdisplay King & Display Technology Co., Ltd. kingnovel Kingnovel Technology Co., Ltd. koe Kaohsiung Opto-Electronics Inc. kosagi Sutajio Ko-Usagi PTE Ltd. kyo Kyocera Corporation lacie LaCie +laird Laird PLC lantiq Lantiq Semiconductor lattice Lattice Semiconductor lego LEGO Systems A/S @@ -203,6 +212,7 @@ licheepi Lichee Pi linaro Linaro Limited linksys Belkin International, Inc. (Linksys) linux Linux-specific binding +linx Linx Technologies lltc Linear Technology Corporation logicpd Logic PD, Inc. lsi LSI Corp. (LSI Logic) @@ -271,6 +281,7 @@ opalkelly Opal Kelly Incorporated opencores OpenCores.org openrisc OpenRISC.io option Option NV +oranth Shenzhen Oranth Technology Co., Ltd. ORCL Oracle Corporation orisetech Orise Technology ortustech Ortus Technology Co., Ltd. @@ -314,6 +325,7 @@ rohm ROHM Semiconductor Co., Ltd roofull Shenzhen Roofull Technology Co, Ltd samsung Samsung Semiconductor samtec Samtec/Softing company +sancloud Sancloud Ltd sandisk Sandisk Corporation sbs Smart Battery System schindler Schindler @@ -384,6 +396,7 @@ tronsmart Tronsmart truly Truly Semiconductors Limited tsd Theobroma Systems Design und Consulting GmbH tyan Tyan Computer Corporation +u-blox u-blox ucrobotics uCRobotics ubnt Ubiquiti Networks udoo Udoo @@ -392,9 +405,11 @@ upisemi uPI Semiconductor Corp. urt United Radiant Technology Corporation usi Universal Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. v3 V3 Semiconductor +vamrs Vamrs Ltd. variscite Variscite Ltd. via VIA Technologies, Inc. virtio Virtual I/O Device Specification, developed by the OASIS consortium +vitesse Vitesse Semiconductor Corporation vivante Vivante Corporation vocore VoCore Studio voipac Voipac Technologies s.r.o. @@ -412,6 +427,7 @@ xes Extreme Engineering Solutions (X-ES) xillybus Xillybus Ltd. xlnx Xilinx xunlong Shenzhen Xunlong Software CO.,Limited +ysoft Y Soft Corporation a.s. zarlink Zarlink Semiconductor zeitec ZEITEC Semiconductor Co., LTD. zidoo Shenzhen Zidoo Technology Co., Ltd. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1-gpio.txt index 6e09c35d9f1a..3d6554eac240 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1-gpio.txt @@ -13,10 +13,15 @@ Optional properties: - linux,open-drain: if specified, the data pin is considered in open-drain mode. +Also refer to the generic w1.txt document. + Examples: - onewire@0 { + onewire { compatible = "w1-gpio"; - gpios = <&gpio 126 0>, <&gpio 105 0>; - }; + gpios = <&gpio 0 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + battery { + // ... + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..05f26b27d898 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/w1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +Generic devicetree bindings for onewire (w1) busses +=================================================== + +Onewire busses are described through nodes of their master bus controller. +Slave devices are listed as sub-nodes of such master devices. For now, only +one slave is allowed per bus master. + + +Example: + + charger: charger { + compatible = "gpio-charger"; + charger-type = "mains"; + gpios = <&gpio 1 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + }; + + onewire { + compatible = "w1-gpio"; + gpios = <&gpio 100 0>, <&gpio 101 0>; + + battery { + compatible = "maxim,ds2760"; + power-supplies = <&charger>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/arm,sp805.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/arm,sp805.txt index ca99d64e6211..bee6f1f0e41b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/arm,sp805.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/arm,sp805.txt @@ -1,17 +1,32 @@ ARM AMBA Primecell SP805 Watchdog +SP805 WDT is a ARM Primecell Peripheral and has a standard-id register that +can be used to identify the peripheral type, vendor, and revision. +This value can be used for driver matching. + +As SP805 WDT is a primecell IP, it follows the base bindings specified in +'arm/primecell.txt' + Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "arm,sp805" & "arm,primecell" -- reg: Should contain location and length for watchdog timer register. -- interrupts: Should contain the list of watchdog timer interrupts. -- clocks: clocks driving the watchdog timer hardware. This list should be 2 - clocks. With 2 clocks, the order is wdogclk clock, apb_pclk. +- compatible: Should be "arm,sp805" & "arm,primecell" +- reg: Should contain location and length for watchdog timer register +- clocks: Clocks driving the watchdog timer hardware. This list should be + 2 clocks. With 2 clocks, the order is wdog_clk, apb_pclk + wdog_clk can be equal to or be a sub-multiple of the apb_pclk + frequency +- clock-names: Shall be "wdog_clk" for first clock and "apb_pclk" for the + second one + +Optional properties: +- interrupts: Should specify WDT interrupt number +- timeout-sec: Should specify default WDT timeout in seconds. If unset, the + default timeout is determined by the driver Example: watchdog@66090000 { compatible = "arm,sp805", "arm,primecell"; reg = <0x66090000 0x1000>; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 406 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; - clocks = <&apb_pclk>,<&apb_pclk>; - clock-names = "wdogclk", "apb_pclk"; + clocks = <&wdt_clk>, <&apb_pclk>; + clock-names = "wdog_clk", "apb_pclk"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/cadence-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/cadence-wdt.txt index c3a36ee45552..750a87657448 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/cadence-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/cadence-wdt.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible : Should be "cdns,wdt-r1p2". - clocks : This is pclk (APB clock). - interrupts : This is wd_irq - watchdog timeout interrupt. -- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller. Optional properties - reset-on-timeout : If this property exists, then a reset is done diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt index f24d802b8056..5d47a262474c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/renesas-wdt.txt @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,r8a7796-wdt" (R-Car M3-W) - "renesas,r8a77965-wdt" (R-Car M3-N) - "renesas,r8a77970-wdt" (R-Car V3M) + - "renesas,r8a77990-wdt" (R-Car E3) - "renesas,r8a77995-wdt" (R-Car D3) - "renesas,r7s72100-wdt" (RZ/A1) The generic compatible string must be: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt index d7bab3db9d1f..05b95bfa2a89 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/rt2880-wdt.txt @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ Required properties: - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of the register range Optional properties: -- interrupt-parent: phandle to the INTC device node - interrupts: Specify the INTC interrupt number Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sp805-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sp805-wdt.txt deleted file mode 100644 index edc4f0ea54a3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/sp805-wdt.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -* ARM SP805 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Controller - -SP805 WDT is a ARM Primecell Peripheral and has a standard-id register that -can be used to identify the peripheral type, vendor, and revision. -This value can be used for driver matching. - -As SP805 WDT is a primecell IP, it follows the base bindings specified in -'arm/primecell.txt' - -Required properties: -- compatible : Should be "arm,sp805-wdt", "arm,primecell" -- reg : Base address and size of the watchdog timer registers. -- clocks : From common clock binding. - First clock is PCLK and the second is WDOGCLK. - WDOGCLK can be equal to or be a sub-multiple of the PCLK frequency. -- clock-names : From common clock binding. - Shall be "apb_pclk" for first clock and "wdog_clk" for the - second one. - -Optional properties: -- interrupts : Should specify WDT interrupt number. - -Examples: - - cluster1_core0_watchdog: wdt@c000000 { - compatible = "arm,sp805-wdt", "arm,primecell"; - reg = <0x0 0xc000000 0x0 0x1000>; - clocks = <&clockgen 4 3>, <&clockgen 4 3>; - clock-names = "apb_pclk", "wdog_clk"; - }; - diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stm32-iwdg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stm32-iwdg.txt index cc13b10a3f82..d8f4430b0a13 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stm32-iwdg.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/st,stm32-iwdg.txt @@ -2,9 +2,15 @@ STM32 Independent WatchDoG (IWDG) --------------------------------- Required properties: -- compatible: "st,stm32-iwdg" -- reg: physical base address and length of the registers set for the device -- clocks: must contain a single entry describing the clock input +- compatible: Should be either: + - "st,stm32-iwdg" + - "st,stm32mp1-iwdg" +- reg: Physical base address and length of the registers set for the device +- clocks: Reference to the clock entry lsi. Additional pclk clock entry + is required only for st,stm32mp1-iwdg. +- clock-names: Name of the clocks used. + "lsi" for st,stm32-iwdg + "lsi", "pclk" for st,stm32mp1-iwdg Optional Properties: - timeout-sec: Watchdog timeout value in seconds. @@ -15,5 +21,6 @@ iwdg: watchdog@40003000 { compatible = "st,stm32-iwdg"; reg = <0x40003000 0x400>; clocks = <&clk_lsi>; + clock-names = "lsi"; timeout-sec = <32>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xilinx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xilinx.txt index 1d11b9002ef8..d058ace29345 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xilinx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xilinx.txt @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ followed by an older IP core version which implements the same interface or any other device with the same interface. - 'reg', 'interrupt-parent' and 'interrupts' are all optional properties. + 'reg' and 'interrupts' are all optional properties. For example, the following block from system.mhs: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xillybus/xillybus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xillybus/xillybus.txt index 9e316dc2e40f..e65d1f94b49c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xillybus/xillybus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/xillybus/xillybus.txt @@ -4,8 +4,6 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be "xillybus,xillybus-1.00.a" - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device - interrupts: Contains one interrupt node, typically consisting of three cells. -- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller that - services interrupts for this device. Optional properties: - dma-coherent: Present if DMA operations are coherent diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/dynamic-resolution-notes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/dynamic-resolution-notes.txt index 083d23262abe..c24ec366c5dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/dynamic-resolution-notes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/dynamic-resolution-notes.txt @@ -2,15 +2,14 @@ Device Tree Dynamic Resolver Notes ---------------------------------- This document describes the implementation of the in-kernel -Device Tree resolver, residing in drivers/of/resolver.c and is a -companion document to Documentation/devicetree/dt-object-internal.txt[1] +Device Tree resolver, residing in drivers/of/resolver.c How the resolver works ---------------------- The resolver is given as an input an arbitrary tree compiled with the proper dtc option and having a /plugin/ tag. This generates the -appropriate __fixups__ & __local_fixups__ nodes as described in [1]. +appropriate __fixups__ & __local_fixups__ nodes. In sequence the resolver works by the following steps: diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst index 80383b1a574a..8db53cdc225f 100644 --- a/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst @@ -488,14 +488,19 @@ doc: *title* .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_audio.c :doc: High Definition Audio over HDMI and Display Port -functions: *function* *[...]* +functions: *[ function ...]* Include documentation for each *function* in *source*. + If no *function* if specified, the documentaion for all functions + and types in the *source* will be included. - Example:: + Examples:: .. kernel-doc:: lib/bitmap.c :functions: bitmap_parselist bitmap_parselist_user + .. kernel-doc:: lib/idr.c + :functions: + Without options, the kernel-doc directive includes all documentation comments from the source file. diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/parse-headers.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/parse-headers.rst index 82a3e43b6864..24cfaa15dd81 100644 --- a/Documentation/doc-guide/parse-headers.rst +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/parse-headers.rst @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ SYNOPSIS \ **parse_headers.pl**\ [<options>] <C_FILE> <OUT_FILE> [<EXCEPTIONS_FILE>] -Where <options> can be: --debug, --help or --man. +Where <options> can be: --debug, --help or --usage. OPTIONS @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ For both statements, \ **type**\ can be either one of the following: \ **symbol**\ - The ignore or replace statement will apply to the name of enum statements + The ignore or replace statement will apply to the name of enum value at C_FILE. For replace statements, \ **new_value**\ will automatically use :c:type: diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst index a2417633fdd8..f0796daa95b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/sphinx.rst @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ The ReST markups currently used by the Documentation/ files are meant to be built with ``Sphinx`` version 1.3 or upper. If you're desiring to build PDF outputs, it is recommended to use version 1.4.6 or upper. -There's a script that checks for the Spinx requirements. Please see +There's a script that checks for the Sphinx requirements. Please see :ref:`sphinx-pre-install` for further details. Most distributions are shipped with Sphinx, but its toolchain is fragile, diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst index 70e328e16aad..d6763272e747 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/device_link.rst @@ -81,10 +81,14 @@ integration is desired. Two other flags are specifically targeted at use cases where the device link is added from the consumer's ``->probe`` callback: ``DL_FLAG_RPM_ACTIVE`` can be specified to runtime resume the supplier upon addition of the -device link. ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE`` causes the device link to be automatically -purged when the consumer fails to probe or later unbinds. This obviates -the need to explicitly delete the link in the ``->remove`` callback or in -the error path of the ``->probe`` callback. +device link. ``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_CONSUMER`` causes the device link to be +automatically purged when the consumer fails to probe or later unbinds. +This obviates the need to explicitly delete the link in the ``->remove`` +callback or in the error path of the ``->probe`` callback. + +Similarly, when the device link is added from supplier's ``->probe`` callback, +``DL_FLAG_AUTOREMOVE_SUPPLIER`` causes the device link to be automatically +purged when the supplier fails to probe or later unbinds. Limitations =========== diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dma-buf.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dma-buf.rst index dc384f2f7f34..b541e97c7ab1 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/dma-buf.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dma-buf.rst @@ -131,6 +131,12 @@ DMA Fences ---------- .. kernel-doc:: drivers/dma-buf/dma-fence.c + :doc: DMA fences overview + +DMA Fences Functions Reference +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/dma-buf/dma-fence.c :export: .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/dma-fence.h diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/firmware/fallback-mechanisms.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/firmware/fallback-mechanisms.rst index d35fed65eae9..8b041d0ab426 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/firmware/fallback-mechanisms.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/firmware/fallback-mechanisms.rst @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ the loading file. The firmware device used to help load firmware using sysfs is only created if direct firmware loading fails and if the fallback mechanism is enabled for your -firmware request, this is set up with fw_load_from_user_helper(). It is +firmware request, this is set up with :c:func:`firmware_fallback_sysfs`. It is important to re-iterate that no device is created if a direct filesystem lookup succeeded. @@ -108,6 +108,11 @@ firmware_data_read() and firmware_loading_show() are just provided for the test_firmware driver for testing, they are not called in normal use or expected to be used regularly by userspace. +firmware_fallback_sysfs +----------------------- +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/firmware_loader/fallback.c + :functions: firmware_fallback_sysfs + Firmware kobject uevent fallback mechanism ========================================== diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/fpga-mgr.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/fpga-mgr.rst index bcf2dd24e179..4b3825da48d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/fpga-mgr.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/fpga-mgr.rst @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ The programming sequence is:: 3. .write_complete The .write_init function will prepare the FPGA to receive the image data. The -buffer passed into .write_init will be atmost .initial_header_size bytes long, +buffer passed into .write_init will be at most .initial_header_size bytes long; if the whole bitstream is not immediately available then the core code will buffer up at least this much before starting. @@ -98,9 +98,9 @@ scatter list. This interface is suitable for drivers which use DMA. The .write_complete function is called after all the image has been written to put the FPGA into operating mode. -The ops include a .state function which will read the hardware FPGA manager and -return a code of type enum fpga_mgr_states. It doesn't result in a change in -hardware state. +The ops include a .state function which will determine the state the FPGA is in +and return a code of type enum fpga_mgr_states. It doesn't result in a change +in state. How to write an image buffer to a supported FPGA ------------------------------------------------ @@ -181,8 +181,8 @@ API for implementing a new FPGA Manager driver .. kernel-doc:: drivers/fpga/fpga-mgr.c :functions: fpga_mgr_unregister -API for programming a FPGA --------------------------- +API for programming an FPGA +--------------------------- .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/fpga/fpga-mgr.h :functions: fpga_image_info diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/fpga-region.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/fpga-region.rst index f89e4a311722..f30333ce828e 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/fpga-region.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/fpga-region.rst @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ FPGA Region Overview -------- -This document is meant to be an brief overview of the FPGA region API usage. A +This document is meant to be a brief overview of the FPGA region API usage. A more conceptual look at regions can be found in the Device Tree binding document [#f1]_. @@ -31,11 +31,11 @@ fpga_image_info including: * pointers to the image as either a scatter-gather buffer, a contiguous buffer, or the name of firmware file - * flags indicating specifics such as whether the image if for partial + * flags indicating specifics such as whether the image is for partial reconfiguration. -How to program a FPGA using a region ------------------------------------- +How to program an FPGA using a region +------------------------------------- First, allocate the info struct:: @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ An example of usage can be seen in the probe function of [#f2]_. .. [#f1] ../devicetree/bindings/fpga/fpga-region.txt .. [#f2] ../../drivers/fpga/of-fpga-region.c -API to program a FGPA ---------------------- +API to program an FPGA +---------------------- .. kernel-doc:: drivers/fpga/fpga-region.c :functions: fpga_region_program_fpga diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/intro.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/intro.rst index 51cd81dbb4dc..50d1cab84950 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/intro.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/fpga/intro.rst @@ -12,18 +12,18 @@ Linux. Some of the core intentions of the FPGA subsystems are: * Code should not be shared between upper and lower layers. This should go without saying. If that seems necessary, there's probably - framework functionality that that can be added that will benefit + framework functionality that can be added that will benefit other users. Write the linux-fpga mailing list and maintainers and seek out a solution that expands the framework for broad reuse. -* Generally, when adding code, think of the future. Plan for re-use. +* Generally, when adding code, think of the future. Plan for reuse. The framework in the kernel is divided into: FPGA Manager ------------ -If you are adding a new FPGA or a new method of programming a FPGA, +If you are adding a new FPGA or a new method of programming an FPGA, this is the subsystem for you. Low level FPGA manager drivers contain the knowledge of how to program a specific device. This subsystem includes the framework in fpga-mgr.c and the low level drivers that @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ are registered with it. FPGA Bridge ----------- -FPGA Bridges prevent spurious signals from going out of a FPGA or a -region of a FPGA during programming. They are disabled before +FPGA Bridges prevent spurious signals from going out of an FPGA or a +region of an FPGA during programming. They are disabled before programming begins and re-enabled afterwards. An FPGA bridge may be -actual hard hardware that gates a bus to a cpu or a soft ("freeze") +actual hard hardware that gates a bus to a CPU or a soft ("freeze") bridge in FPGA fabric that surrounds a partial reconfiguration region of an FPGA. This subsystem includes fpga-bridge.c and the low level drivers that are registered with it. @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ FPGA Region ----------- If you are adding a new interface to the FPGA framework, add it on top -of a FPGA region to allow the most reuse of your interface. +of an FPGA region to allow the most reuse of your interface. The FPGA Region framework (fpga-region.c) associates managers and bridges as reconfigurable regions. A region may refer to the whole diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/infrastructure.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/infrastructure.rst index bee1b9a1702f..6172f3cc3d0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/infrastructure.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/infrastructure.rst @@ -49,10 +49,10 @@ Device Drivers Base Device Drivers DMA Management ----------------------------- -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/dma-coherent.c +.. kernel-doc:: kernel/dma/coherent.c :export: -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/base/dma-mapping.c +.. kernel-doc:: kernel/dma/mapping.c :export: Device drivers PnP support diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mtdnand.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mtdnand.rst index dcd63599f700..c55a6034c397 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/mtdnand.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mtdnand.rst @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ The nand driver supports three different types of hardware ECC. - NAND_ECC_HW8_512 - Hardware ECC generator providing 6 bytes ECC per 512 byte. + Hardware ECC generator providing 8 bytes ECC per 512 byte. If your hardware generator has a different functionality add it at the appropriate place in nand_base.c @@ -889,7 +889,7 @@ Use these constants to select the ECC algorithm:: #define NAND_ECC_HW3_512 3 /* Hardware ECC 6 byte ECC per 512 Byte data */ #define NAND_ECC_HW6_512 4 - /* Hardware ECC 6 byte ECC per 512 Byte data */ + /* Hardware ECC 8 byte ECC per 512 Byte data */ #define NAND_ECC_HW8_512 6 diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/slimbus.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/slimbus.rst index a97449cf603a..410eec79b2a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/slimbus.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/slimbus.rst @@ -125,3 +125,8 @@ Messaging APIs: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ .. kernel-doc:: drivers/slimbus/messaging.c :export: + +Streaming APIs: +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/slimbus/stream.c + :export: diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/usb/typec_bus.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/usb/typec_bus.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d5eec1715b5b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/usb/typec_bus.rst @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + +API for USB Type-C Alternate Mode drivers +========================================= + +Introduction +------------ + +Alternate modes require communication with the partner using Vendor Defined +Messages (VDM) as defined in USB Type-C and USB Power Delivery Specifications. +The communication is SVID (Standard or Vendor ID) specific, i.e. specific for +every alternate mode, so every alternate mode will need a custom driver. + +USB Type-C bus allows binding a driver to the discovered partner alternate +modes by using the SVID and the mode number. + +USB Type-C Connector Class provides a device for every alternate mode a port +supports, and separate device for every alternate mode the partner supports. +The drivers for the alternate modes are bound to the partner alternate mode +devices, and the port alternate mode devices must be handled by the port +drivers. + +When a new partner alternate mode device is registered, it is linked to the +alternate mode device of the port that the partner is attached to, that has +matching SVID and mode. Communication between the port driver and alternate mode +driver will happen using the same API. + +The port alternate mode devices are used as a proxy between the partner and the +alternate mode drivers, so the port drivers are only expected to pass the SVID +specific commands from the alternate mode drivers to the partner, and from the +partners to the alternate mode drivers. No direct SVID specific communication is +needed from the port drivers, but the port drivers need to provide the operation +callbacks for the port alternate mode devices, just like the alternate mode +drivers need to provide them for the partner alternate mode devices. + +Usage: +------ + +General +~~~~~~~ + +By default, the alternate mode drivers are responsible for entering the mode. +It is also possible to leave the decision about entering the mode to the user +space (See Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-typec). Port drivers should not +enter any modes on their own. + +``->vdm`` is the most important callback in the operation callbacks vector. It +will be used to deliver all the SVID specific commands from the partner to the +alternate mode driver, and vice versa in case of port drivers. The drivers send +the SVID specific commands to each other using :c:func:`typec_altmode_vmd()`. + +If the communication with the partner using the SVID specific commands results +in need to reconfigure the pins on the connector, the alternate mode driver +needs to notify the bus using :c:func:`typec_altmode_notify()`. The driver +passes the negotiated SVID specific pin configuration value to the function as +parameter. The bus driver will then configure the mux behind the connector using +that value as the state value for the mux, and also call blocking notification +chain to notify the external drivers about the state of the connector that need +to know it. + +NOTE: The SVID specific pin configuration values must always start from +``TYPEC_STATE_MODAL``. USB Type-C specification defines two default states for +the connector: ``TYPEC_STATE_USB`` and ``TYPEC_STATE_SAFE``. These values are +reserved by the bus as the first possible values for the state. When the +alternate mode is entered, the bus will put the connector into +``TYPEC_STATE_SAFE`` before sending Enter or Exit Mode command as defined in USB +Type-C Specification, and also put the connector back to ``TYPEC_STATE_USB`` +after the mode has been exited. + +An example of working definitions for SVID specific pin configurations would +look like this: + +enum { + ALTMODEX_CONF_A = TYPEC_STATE_MODAL, + ALTMODEX_CONF_B, + ... +}; + +Helper macro ``TYPEC_MODAL_STATE()`` can also be used: + +#define ALTMODEX_CONF_A = TYPEC_MODAL_STATE(0); +#define ALTMODEX_CONF_B = TYPEC_MODAL_STATE(1); + +Notification chain +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The drivers for the components that the alternate modes are designed for need to +get details regarding the results of the negotiation with the partner, and the +pin configuration of the connector. In case of DisplayPort alternate mode for +example, the GPU drivers will need to know those details. In case of +Thunderbolt alternate mode, the thunderbolt drivers will need to know them, and +so on. + +The notification chain is designed for this purpose. The drivers can register +notifiers with :c:func:`typec_altmode_register_notifier()`. + +Cable plug alternate modes +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The alternate mode drivers are not bound to cable plug alternate mode devices, +only to the partner alternate mode devices. If the alternate mode supports, or +requires, a cable that responds to SOP Prime, and optionally SOP Double Prime +messages, the driver for that alternate mode must request handle to the cable +plug alternate modes using :c:func:`typec_altmode_get_plug()`, and take over +their control. + +Driver API +---------- + +Alternate mode driver registering/unregistering +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/usb/typec/bus.c + :functions: typec_altmode_register_driver typec_altmode_unregister_driver + +Alternate mode driver operations +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/usb/typec/bus.c + :functions: typec_altmode_enter typec_altmode_exit typec_altmode_attention typec_altmode_vdm typec_altmode_notify + +API for the port drivers +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/usb/typec/bus.c + :functions: typec_match_altmode + +Cable Plug operations +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/usb/typec/bus.c + :functions: typec_altmode_get_plug typec_altmode_put_plug + +Notifications +~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/usb/typec/class.c + :functions: typec_altmode_register_notifier typec_altmode_unregister_notifier diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt index 7c1bb3d0c222..43681ca0837f 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt @@ -240,6 +240,7 @@ CLOCK devm_of_clk_add_hw_provider() DMA + dmaenginem_async_device_register() dmam_alloc_coherent() dmam_alloc_attrs() dmam_declare_coherent_memory() diff --git a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt index 79c22d096bbc..62af30511a95 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.txt @@ -18,9 +18,10 @@ made available by the underlying graphics card are also possible. A. Configuration The framebuffer console can be enabled by using your favorite kernel -configuration tool. It is under Device Drivers->Graphics Support->Support for -framebuffer devices->Framebuffer Console Support. Select 'y' to compile -support statically, or 'm' for module support. The module will be fbcon. +configuration tool. It is under Device Drivers->Graphics Support->Frame +buffer Devices->Console display driver support->Framebuffer Console Support. +Select 'y' to compile support statically or 'm' for module support. The +module will be fbcon. In order for fbcon to activate, at least one framebuffer driver is required, so choose from any of the numerous drivers available. For x86 @@ -29,10 +30,10 @@ always be available. However, using a chipset-specific driver will give you more speed and features, such as the ability to change the video mode dynamically. - To display the penguin logo, choose any logo available in Logo -Configuration->Boot up logo. + To display the penguin logo, choose any logo available in Graphics +support->Bootup logo. - Also, you will need to select at least one compiled-in fonts, but if + Also, you will need to select at least one compiled-in font, but if you don't do anything, the kernel configuration tool will select one for you, usually an 8x16 font. @@ -135,16 +136,16 @@ C. Boot options The angle can be changed anytime afterwards by 'echoing' the same numbers to any one of the 2 attributes found in - /sys/class/graphics/fbcon + /sys/class/graphics/fbcon: rotate - rotate the display of the active console rotate_all - rotate the display of all consoles - Console rotation will only become available if Console Rotation - Support is compiled in your kernel. + Console rotation will only become available if Framebuffer Console + Rotation support is compiled in your kernel. NOTE: This is purely console rotation. Any other applications that - use the framebuffer will remain at their 'normal'orientation. + use the framebuffer will remain at their 'normal' orientation. Actually, the underlying fb driver is totally ignorant of console rotation. @@ -155,9 +156,16 @@ C. Boot options used by text. By default, this area will be black. The 'color' value is an integer number that depends on the framebuffer driver being used. +6. fbcon=nodefer + + If the kernel is compiled with deferred fbcon takeover support, normally + the framebuffer contents, left in place by the firmware/bootloader, will + be preserved until there actually is some text is output to the console. + This option causes fbcon to bind immediately to the fbdev device. + C. Attaching, Detaching and Unloading -Before going on how to attach, detach and unload the framebuffer console, an +Before going on to how to attach, detach and unload the framebuffer console, an illustration of the dependencies may help. The console layer, as with most subsystems, needs a driver that interfaces with @@ -175,7 +183,7 @@ because fbcon is an intermediate layer between the console and the drivers: console ---> fbcon ---> fbdev drivers ---> hardware -The fbdev drivers cannot be unloaded if it's bound to fbcon, and fbcon cannot +The fbdev drivers cannot be unloaded if bound to fbcon, and fbcon cannot be unloaded if it's bound to the console layer. So to unload the fbdev drivers, one must first unbind fbcon from the console, @@ -225,7 +233,7 @@ restored properly. The following is one of the several methods that you can do: echo 0 > /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/bind 6. That's it, you're back to VGA mode. And if you compiled fbcon as a module, - you can unload it by 'rmmod fbcon' + you can unload it by 'rmmod fbcon'. 7. To reattach fbcon: @@ -283,7 +291,7 @@ Samples: ======== Here are 2 sample bash scripts that you can use to bind or unbind the -framebuffer console driver if you are in an X86 box: +framebuffer console driver if you are on an X86 box: --------------------------------------------------------------------------- #!/bin/bash diff --git a/Documentation/features/sched/membarrier-sync-core/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/sched/membarrier-sync-core/arch-support.txt index dbdf62907703..c7858dd1ea8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/features/sched/membarrier-sync-core/arch-support.txt +++ b/Documentation/features/sched/membarrier-sync-core/arch-support.txt @@ -5,10 +5,10 @@ # # Architecture requirements # -# * arm64 +# * arm/arm64 # -# Rely on eret context synchronization when returning from IPI handler, and -# when returning to user-space. +# Rely on implicit context synchronization as a result of exception return +# when returning from IPI handler, and when returning to user-space. # # * x86 # @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ ----------------------- | alpha: | TODO | | arc: | TODO | - | arm: | TODO | + | arm: | ok | | arm64: | ok | | c6x: | TODO | | h8300: | TODO | diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 2c391338c675..efea228ccd8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -21,8 +21,7 @@ prototypes: char *(*d_dname)((struct dentry *dentry, char *buffer, int buflen); struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *path); int (*d_manage)(const struct path *, bool); - struct dentry *(*d_real)(struct dentry *, const struct inode *, - unsigned int, unsigned int); + struct dentry *(*d_real)(struct dentry *, const struct inode *); locking rules: rename_lock ->d_lock may block rcu-walk @@ -64,7 +63,7 @@ prototypes: void (*update_time)(struct inode *, struct timespec *, int); int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct file *, unsigned open_flag, - umode_t create_mode, int *opened); + umode_t create_mode); int (*tmpfile) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, umode_t); locking rules: @@ -441,8 +440,6 @@ prototypes: int (*iterate) (struct file *, struct dir_context *); int (*iterate_shared) (struct file *, struct dir_context *); __poll_t (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *); - struct wait_queue_head * (*get_poll_head)(struct file *, __poll_t); - __poll_t (*poll_mask) (struct file *, __poll_t); long (*unlocked_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long); long (*compat_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long); int (*mmap) (struct file *, struct vm_area_struct *); @@ -473,7 +470,7 @@ prototypes: }; locking rules: - All except for ->poll_mask may block. + All may block. ->llseek() locking has moved from llseek to the individual llseek implementations. If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you @@ -505,9 +502,6 @@ in sys_read() and friends. the lease within the individual filesystem to record the result of the operation -->poll_mask can be called with or without the waitqueue lock for the waitqueue -returned from ->get_poll_head. - --------------------------- dquot_operations ------------------------------- prototypes: int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *); @@ -537,9 +531,9 @@ More details about quota locking can be found in fs/dquot.c. prototypes: void (*open)(struct vm_area_struct*); void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct*); - int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *); - int (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct vm_fault *); - int (*pfn_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct vm_fault *); + vm_fault_t (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *); + vm_fault_t (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct vm_fault *); + vm_fault_t (*pfn_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct vm_fault *); int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int); locking rules: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS index 9f4f87e16240..75865da2ce14 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/AUTHORS @@ -42,9 +42,11 @@ Jeff Layton (many, many fixes, as well as great work on the cifs Kerberos code) Scott Lovenberg Pavel Shilovsky (for great work adding SMB2 support, and various SMB3 features) Aurelien Aptel (for DFS SMB3 work and some key bug fixes) -Ronnie Sahlberg (for SMB3 xattr work and bug fixes) +Ronnie Sahlberg (for SMB3 xattr work, bug fixes, and lots of great work on compounding) Shirish Pargaonkar (for many ACL patches over the years) Sachin Prabhu (many bug fixes, including for reconnect, copy offload and security) +Paulo Alcantara +Long Li (some great work on RDMA, SMB Direct) Test case and Bug Report contributors @@ -58,5 +60,4 @@ mention to the Stanford Checker (SWAT) which pointed out many minor bugs in error paths. Valuable suggestions also have come from Al Viro and Dave Miller. -And thanks to the IBM LTC and Power test teams and SuSE testers for -finding multiple bugs during excellent stress test runs. +And thanks to the IBM LTC and Power test teams and SuSE and Citrix and RedHat testers for finding multiple bugs during excellent stress test runs. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES index bc0025cdd1c9..1df7f4910eb2 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/CHANGES @@ -1,1065 +1,4 @@ -Version 1.62 ------------- -Add sockopt=TCP_NODELAY mount option. EA (xattr) routines hardened -to more strictly handle corrupt frames. - -Version 1.61 ------------- -Fix append problem to Samba servers (files opened with O_APPEND could -have duplicated data). Fix oops in cifs_lookup. Workaround problem -mounting to OS/400 Netserve. Fix oops in cifs_get_tcp_session. -Disable use of server inode numbers when server only -partially supports them (e.g. for one server querying inode numbers on -FindFirst fails but QPathInfo queries works). Fix oops with dfs in -cifs_put_smb_ses. Fix mmap to work on directio mounts (needed -for OpenOffice when on forcedirectio mount e.g.) - -Version 1.60 -------------- -Fix memory leak in reconnect. Fix oops in DFS mount error path. -Set s_maxbytes to smaller (the max that vfs can handle) so that -sendfile will now work over cifs mounts again. Add noforcegid -and noforceuid mount parameters. Fix small mem leak when using -ntlmv2. Fix 2nd mount to same server but with different port to -be allowed (rather than reusing the 1st port) - only when the -user explicitly overrides the port on the 2nd mount. - -Version 1.59 ------------- -Client uses server inode numbers (which are persistent) rather than -client generated ones by default (mount option "serverino" turned -on by default if server supports it). Add forceuid and forcegid -mount options (so that when negotiating unix extensions specifying -which uid mounted does not immediately force the server's reported -uids to be overridden). Add support for scope mount parm. Improve -hard link detection to use same inode for both. Do not set -read-only dos attribute on directories (for chmod) since Windows -explorer special cases this attribute bit for directories for -a different purpose. - -Version 1.58 ------------- -Guard against buffer overruns in various UCS-2 to UTF-8 string conversions -when the UTF-8 string is composed of unusually long (more than 4 byte) converted -characters. Add support for mounting root of a share which redirects immediately -to DFS target. Convert string conversion functions from Unicode to more -accurately mark string length before allocating memory (which may help the -rare cases where a UTF-8 string is much larger than the UCS2 string that -we converted from). Fix endianness of the vcnum field used during -session setup to distinguish multiple mounts to same server from different -userids. Raw NTLMSSP fixed (it requires /proc/fs/cifs/experimental -flag to be set to 2, and mount must enable krb5 to turn on extended security). -Performance of file create to Samba improved (posix create on lookup -removes 1 of 2 network requests sent on file create) - -Version 1.57 ------------- -Improve support for multiple security contexts to the same server. We -used to use the same "vcnumber" for all connections which could cause -the server to treat subsequent connections, especially those that -are authenticated as guest, as reconnections, invalidating the earlier -user's smb session. This fix allows cifs to mount multiple times to the -same server with different userids without risking invalidating earlier -established security contexts. fsync now sends SMB Flush operation -to better ensure that we wait for server to write all of the data to -server disk (not just write it over the network). Add new mount -parameter to allow user to disable sending the (slow) SMB flush on -fsync if desired (fsync still flushes all cached write data to the server). -Posix file open support added (turned off after one attempt if server -fails to support it properly, as with Samba server versions prior to 3.3.2) -Fix "redzone overwritten" bug in cifs_put_tcon (CIFSTcon may allocate too -little memory for the "nativeFileSystem" field returned by the server -during mount). Endian convert inode numbers if necessary (makes it easier -to compare inode numbers on network files from big endian systems). - -Version 1.56 ------------- -Add "forcemandatorylock" mount option to allow user to use mandatory -rather than posix (advisory) byte range locks, even though server would -support posix byte range locks. Fix query of root inode when prefixpath -specified and user does not have access to query information about the -top of the share. Fix problem in 2.6.28 resolving DFS paths to -Samba servers (worked to Windows). Fix rmdir so that pending search -(readdir) requests do not get invalid results which include the now -removed directory. Fix oops in cifs_dfs_ref.c when prefixpath is not reachable -when using DFS. Add better file create support to servers which support -the CIFS POSIX protocol extensions (this adds support for new flags -on create, and improves semantics for write of locked ranges). - -Version 1.55 ------------- -Various fixes to make delete of open files behavior more predictable -(when delete of an open file fails we mark the file as "delete-on-close" -in a way that more servers accept, but only if we can first rename the -file to a temporary name). Add experimental support for more safely -handling fcntl(F_SETLEASE). Convert cifs to using blocking tcp -sends, and also let tcp autotune the socket send and receive buffers. -This reduces the number of EAGAIN errors returned by TCP/IP in -high stress workloads (and the number of retries on socket writes -when sending large SMBWriteX requests). Fix case in which a portion of -data can in some cases not get written to the file on the server before the -file is closed. Fix DFS parsing to properly handle path consumed field, -and to handle certain codepage conversions better. Fix mount and -umount race that can cause oops in mount or umount or reconnect. - -Version 1.54 ------------- -Fix premature write failure on congested networks (we would give up -on EAGAIN from the socket too quickly on large writes). -Cifs_mkdir and cifs_create now respect the setgid bit on parent dir. -Fix endian problems in acl (mode from/to cifs acl) on bigendian -architectures. Fix problems with preserving timestamps on copying open -files (e.g. "cp -a") to Windows servers. For mkdir and create honor setgid bit -on parent directory when server supports Unix Extensions but not POSIX -create. Update cifs.upcall version to handle new Kerberos sec flags -(this requires update of cifs.upcall program from Samba). Fix memory leak -on dns_upcall (resolving DFS referralls). Fix plain text password -authentication (requires setting SecurityFlags to 0x30030 to enable -lanman and plain text though). Fix writes to be at correct offset when -file is open with O_APPEND and file is on a directio (forcediretio) mount. -Fix bug in rewinding readdir directory searches. Add nodfs mount option. - -Version 1.53 ------------- -DFS support added (Microsoft Distributed File System client support needed -for referrals which enable a hierarchical name space among servers). -Disable temporary caching of mode bits to servers which do not support -storing of mode (e.g. Windows servers, when client mounts without cifsacl -mount option) and add new "dynperm" mount option to enable temporary caching -of mode (enable old behavior). Fix hang on mount caused when server crashes -tcp session during negotiate protocol. - -Version 1.52 ------------- -Fix oops on second mount to server when null auth is used. -Enable experimental Kerberos support. Return writebehind errors on flush -and sync so that events like out of disk space get reported properly on -cached files. Fix setxattr failure to certain Samba versions. Fix mount -of second share to disconnected server session (autoreconnect on this). -Add ability to modify cifs acls for handling chmod (when mounted with -cifsacl flag). Fix prefixpath path separator so we can handle mounts -with prefixpaths longer than one directory (one path component) when -mounted to Windows servers. Fix slow file open when cifsacl -enabled. Fix memory leak in FindNext when the SMB call returns -EBADF. - - -Version 1.51 ------------- -Fix memory leak in statfs when mounted to very old servers (e.g. -Windows 9x). Add new feature "POSIX open" which allows servers -which support the current POSIX Extensions to provide better semantics -(e.g. delete for open files opened with posix open). Take into -account umask on posix mkdir not just older style mkdir. Add -ability to mount to IPC$ share (which allows CIFS named pipes to be -opened, read and written as if they were files). When 1st tree -connect fails (e.g. due to signing negotiation failure) fix -leak that causes cifsd not to stop and rmmod to fail to cleanup -cifs_request_buffers pool. Fix problem with POSIX Open/Mkdir on -bigendian architectures. Fix possible memory corruption when -EAGAIN returned on kern_recvmsg. Return better error if server -requires packet signing but client has disabled it. When mounted -with cifsacl mount option - mode bits are approximated based -on the contents of the ACL of the file or directory. When cifs -mount helper is missing convert make sure that UNC name -has backslash (not forward slash) between ip address of server -and the share name. - -Version 1.50 ------------- -Fix NTLMv2 signing. NFS server mounted over cifs works (if cifs mount is -done with "serverino" mount option). Add support for POSIX Unlink -(helps with certain sharing violation cases when server such as -Samba supports newer POSIX CIFS Protocol Extensions). Add "nounix" -mount option to allow disabling the CIFS Unix Extensions for just -that mount. Fix hang on spinlock in find_writable_file (race when -reopening file after session crash). Byte range unlock request to -windows server could unlock more bytes (on server copy of file) -than intended if start of unlock request is well before start of -a previous byte range lock that we issued. - -Version 1.49 ------------- -IPv6 support. Enable ipv6 addresses to be passed on mount (put the ipv6 -address after the "ip=" mount option, at least until mount.cifs is fixed to -handle DNS host to ipv6 name translation). Accept override of uid or gid -on mount even when Unix Extensions are negotiated (it used to be ignored -when Unix Extensions were ignored). This allows users to override the -default uid and gid for files when they are certain that the uids or -gids on the server do not match those of the client. Make "sec=none" -mount override username (so that null user connection is attempted) -to match what documentation said. Support for very large reads, over 127K, -available to some newer servers (such as Samba 3.0.26 and later but -note that it also requires setting CIFSMaxBufSize at module install -time to a larger value which may hurt performance in some cases). -Make sign option force signing (or fail if server does not support it). - -Version 1.48 ------------- -Fix mtime bouncing around from local idea of last write times to remote time. -Fix hang (in i_size_read) when simultaneous size update of same remote file -on smp system corrupts sequence number. Do not reread unnecessarily partial page -(which we are about to overwrite anyway) when writing out file opened rw. -When DOS attribute of file on non-Unix server's file changes on the server side -from read-only back to read-write, reflect this change in default file mode -(we had been leaving a file's mode read-only until the inode were reloaded). -Allow setting of attribute back to ATTR_NORMAL (removing readonly dos attribute -when archive dos attribute not set and we are changing mode back to writeable -on server which does not support the Unix Extensions). Remove read only dos -attribute on chmod when adding any write permission (ie on any of -user/group/other (not all of user/group/other ie 0222) when -mounted to windows. Add support for POSIX MkDir (slight performance -enhancement and eliminates the network race between the mkdir and set -path info of the mode). - - -Version 1.47 ------------- -Fix oops in list_del during mount caused by unaligned string. -Fix file corruption which could occur on some large file -copies caused by writepages page i/o completion bug. -Seek to SEEK_END forces check for update of file size for non-cached -files. Allow file size to be updated on remote extend of locally open, -non-cached file. Fix reconnect to newer Samba servers (or other servers -which support the CIFS Unix/POSIX extensions) so that we again tell the -server the Unix/POSIX cifs capabilities which we support (SetFSInfo). -Add experimental support for new POSIX Open/Mkdir (which returns -stat information on the open, and allows setting the mode). - -Version 1.46 ------------- -Support deep tree mounts. Better support OS/2, Win9x (DOS) time stamps. -Allow null user to be specified on mount ("username="). Do not return -EINVAL on readdir when filldir fails due to overwritten blocksize -(fixes FC problem). Return error in rename 2nd attempt retry (ie report -if rename by handle also fails, after rename by path fails, we were -not reporting whether the retry worked or not). Fix NTLMv2 to -work to Windows servers (mount with option "sec=ntlmv2"). - -Version 1.45 ------------- -Do not time out lockw calls when using posix extensions. Do not -time out requests if server still responding reasonably fast -on requests on other threads. Improve POSIX locking emulation, -(lock cancel now works, and unlock of merged range works even -to Windows servers now). Fix oops on mount to lanman servers -(win9x, os/2 etc.) when null password. Do not send listxattr -(SMB to query all EAs) if nouser_xattr specified. Fix SE Linux -problem (instantiate inodes/dentries in right order for readdir). - -Version 1.44 ------------- -Rewritten sessionsetup support, including support for legacy SMB -session setup needed for OS/2 and older servers such as Windows 95 and 98. -Fix oops on ls to OS/2 servers. Add support for level 1 FindFirst -so we can do search (ls etc.) to OS/2. Do not send NTCreateX -or recent levels of FindFirst unless server says it supports NT SMBs -(instead use legacy equivalents from LANMAN dialect). Fix to allow -NTLMv2 authentication support (now can use stronger password hashing -on mount if corresponding /proc/fs/cifs/SecurityFlags is set (0x4004). -Allow override of global cifs security flags on mount via "sec=" option(s). - -Version 1.43 ------------- -POSIX locking to servers which support CIFS POSIX Extensions -(disabled by default controlled by proc/fs/cifs/Experimental). -Handle conversion of long share names (especially Asian languages) -to Unicode during mount. Fix memory leak in sess struct on reconnect. -Fix rare oops after acpi suspend. Fix O_TRUNC opens to overwrite on -cifs open which helps rare case when setpathinfo fails or server does -not support it. - -Version 1.42 ------------- -Fix slow oplock break when mounted to different servers at the same time and -the tids match and we try to find matching fid on wrong server. Fix read -looping when signing required by server (2.6.16 kernel only). Fix readdir -vs. rename race which could cause each to hang. Return . and .. even -if server does not. Allow searches to skip first three entries and -begin at any location. Fix oops in find_writeable_file. - -Version 1.41 ------------- -Fix NTLMv2 security (can be enabled in /proc/fs/cifs) so customers can -configure stronger authentication. Fix sfu symlinks so they can -be followed (not just recognized). Fix wraparound of bcc on -read responses when buffer size over 64K and also fix wrap of -max smb buffer size when CIFSMaxBufSize over 64K. Fix oops in -cifs_user_read and cifs_readpages (when EAGAIN on send of smb -on socket is returned over and over). Add POSIX (advisory) byte range -locking support (requires server with newest CIFS UNIX Extensions -to the protocol implemented). Slow down negprot slightly in port 139 -RFC1001 case to give session_init time on buggy servers. - -Version 1.40 ------------- -Use fsuid (fsgid) more consistently instead of uid (gid). Improve performance -of readpages by eliminating one extra memcpy. Allow update of file size -from remote server even if file is open for write as long as mount is -directio. Recognize share mode security and send NTLM encrypted password -on tree connect if share mode negotiated. - -Version 1.39 ------------- -Defer close of a file handle slightly if pending writes depend on that handle -(this reduces the EBADF bad file handle errors that can be logged under heavy -stress on writes). Modify cifs Kconfig options to expose CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 -Fix SFU style symlinks and mknod needed for servers which do not support the -CIFS Unix Extensions. Fix setfacl/getfacl on bigendian. Timeout negative -dentries so files that the client sees as deleted but that later get created -on the server will be recognized. Add client side permission check on setattr. -Timeout stuck requests better (where server has never responded or sent corrupt -responses) - -Version 1.38 ------------- -Fix tcp socket retransmission timeouts (e.g. on ENOSPACE from the socket) -to be smaller at first (but increasing) so large write performance performance -over GigE is better. Do not hang thread on illegal byte range lock response -from Windows (Windows can send an RFC1001 size which does not match smb size) by -allowing an SMBs TCP length to be up to a few bytes longer than it should be. -wsize and rsize can now be larger than negotiated buffer size if server -supports large readx/writex, even when directio mount flag not specified. -Write size will in many cases now be 16K instead of 4K which greatly helps -file copy performance on lightly loaded networks. Fix oops in dnotify -when experimental config flag enabled. Make cifsFYI more granular. - -Version 1.37 ------------- -Fix readdir caching when unlink removes file in current search buffer, -and this is followed by a rewind search to just before the deleted entry. -Do not attempt to set ctime unless atime and/or mtime change requested -(most servers throw it away anyway). Fix length check of received smbs -to be more accurate. Fix big endian problem with mapchars mount option, -and with a field returned by statfs. - -Version 1.36 ------------- -Add support for mounting to older pre-CIFS servers such as Windows9x and ME. -For these older servers, add option for passing netbios name of server in -on mount (servernetbiosname). Add suspend support for power management, to -avoid cifsd thread preventing software suspend from working. -Add mount option for disabling the default behavior of sending byte range lock -requests to the server (necessary for certain applications which break with -mandatory lock behavior such as Evolution), and also mount option for -requesting case insensitive matching for path based requests (requesting -case sensitive is the default). - -Version 1.35 ------------- -Add writepage performance improvements. Fix path name conversions -for long filenames on mounts which were done with "mapchars" mount option -specified. Ensure multiplex ids do not collide. Fix case in which -rmmod can oops if done soon after last unmount. Fix truncated -search (readdir) output when resume filename was a long filename. -Fix filename conversion when mapchars mount option was specified and -filename was a long filename. - -Version 1.34 ------------- -Fix error mapping of the TOO_MANY_LINKS (hardlinks) case. -Do not oops if root user kills cifs oplock kernel thread or -kills the cifsd thread (NB: killing the cifs kernel threads is not -recommended, unmount and rmmod cifs will kill them when they are -no longer needed). Fix readdir to ASCII servers (ie older servers -which do not support Unicode) and also require asterisk. -Fix out of memory case in which data could be written one page -off in the page cache. - -Version 1.33 ------------- -Fix caching problem, in which readdir of directory containing a file -which was cached could cause the file's time stamp to be updated -without invalidating the readahead data (so we could get stale -file data on the client for that file even as the server copy changed). -Cleanup response processing so cifsd can not loop when abnormally -terminated. - - -Version 1.32 ------------- -Fix oops in ls when Transact2 FindFirst (or FindNext) returns more than one -transact response for an SMB request and search entry split across two frames. -Add support for lsattr (getting ext2/ext3/reiserfs attr flags from the server) -as new protocol extensions. Do not send Get/Set calls for POSIX ACLs -unless server explicitly claims to support them in CIFS Unix extensions -POSIX ACL capability bit. Fix packet signing when multiuser mounting with -different users from the same client to the same server. Fix oops in -cifs_close. Add mount option for remapping reserved characters in -filenames (also allow recognizing files with created by SFU which have any -of these seven reserved characters, except backslash, to be recognized). -Fix invalid transact2 message (we were sometimes trying to interpret -oplock breaks as SMB responses). Add ioctl for checking that the -current uid matches the uid of the mounter (needed by umount.cifs). -Reduce the number of large buffer allocations in cifs response processing -(significantly reduces memory pressure under heavy stress with multiple -processes accessing the same server at the same time). - -Version 1.31 ------------- -Fix updates of DOS attributes and time fields so that files on NT4 servers -do not get marked delete on close. Display sizes of cifs buffer pools in -cifs stats. Fix oops in unmount when cifsd thread being killed by -shutdown. Add generic readv/writev and aio support. Report inode numbers -consistently in readdir and lookup (when serverino mount option is -specified use the inode number that the server reports - for both lookup -and readdir, otherwise by default the locally generated inode number is used -for inodes created in either path since servers are not always able to -provide unique inode numbers when exporting multiple volumes from under one -sharename). - -Version 1.30 ------------- -Allow new nouser_xattr mount parm to disable xattr support for user namespace. -Do not flag user_xattr mount parm in dmesg. Retry failures setting file time -(mostly affects NT4 servers) by retry with handle based network operation. -Add new POSIX Query FS Info for returning statfs info more accurately. -Handle passwords with multiple commas in them. - -Version 1.29 ------------- -Fix default mode in sysfs of cifs module parms. Remove old readdir routine. -Fix capabilities flags for large readx so as to allow reads larger than 64K. - -Version 1.28 ------------- -Add module init parm for large SMB buffer size (to allow it to be changed -from its default of 16K) which is especially useful for large file copy -when mounting with the directio mount option. Fix oops after -returning from mount when experimental ExtendedSecurity enabled and -SpnegoNegotiated returning invalid error. Fix case to retry better when -peek returns from 1 to 3 bytes on socket which should have more data. -Fixed path based calls (such as cifs lookup) to handle path names -longer than 530 (now can handle PATH_MAX). Fix pass through authentication -from Samba server to DC (Samba required dummy LM password). - -Version 1.27 ------------- -Turn off DNOTIFY (directory change notification support) by default -(unless built with the experimental flag) to fix hang with KDE -file browser. Fix DNOTIFY flag mappings. Fix hang (in wait_event -waiting on an SMB response) in SendReceive when session dies but -reconnects quickly from another task. Add module init parms for -minimum number of large and small network buffers in the buffer pools, -and for the maximum number of simultaneous requests. - -Version 1.26 ------------- -Add setfacl support to allow setting of ACLs remotely to Samba 3.10 and later -and other POSIX CIFS compliant servers. Fix error mapping for getfacl -to EOPNOTSUPP when server does not support posix acls on the wire. Fix -improperly zeroed buffer in CIFS Unix extensions set times call. - -Version 1.25 ------------- -Fix internationalization problem in cifs readdir with filenames that map to -longer UTF-8 strings than the string on the wire was in Unicode. Add workaround -for readdir to netapp servers. Fix search rewind (seek into readdir to return -non-consecutive entries). Do not do readdir when server negotiates -buffer size to small to fit filename. Add support for reading POSIX ACLs from -the server (add also acl and noacl mount options). - -Version 1.24 ------------- -Optionally allow using server side inode numbers, rather than client generated -ones by specifying mount option "serverino" - this is required for some apps -to work which double check hardlinked files and have persistent inode numbers. - -Version 1.23 ------------- -Multiple bigendian fixes. On little endian systems (for reconnect after -network failure) fix tcp session reconnect code so we do not try first -to reconnect on reverse of port 445. Treat reparse points (NTFS junctions) -as directories rather than symlinks because we can do follow link on them. - -Version 1.22 ------------- -Add config option to enable XATTR (extended attribute) support, mapping -xattr names in the "user." namespace space to SMB/CIFS EAs. Lots of -minor fixes pointed out by the Stanford SWAT checker (mostly missing -or out of order NULL pointer checks in little used error paths). - -Version 1.21 ------------- -Add new mount parm to control whether mode check (generic_permission) is done -on the client. If Unix extensions are enabled and the uids on the client -and server do not match, client permission checks are meaningless on -server uids that do not exist on the client (this does not affect the -normal ACL check which occurs on the server). Fix default uid -on mknod to match create and mkdir. Add optional mount parm to allow -override of the default uid behavior (in which the server sets the uid -and gid of newly created files). Normally for network filesystem mounts -user want the server to set the uid/gid on newly created files (rather than -using uid of the client processes you would in a local filesystem). - -Version 1.20 ------------- -Make transaction counts more consistent. Merge /proc/fs/cifs/SimultaneousOps -info into /proc/fs/cifs/DebugData. Fix oops in rare oops in readdir -(in build_wildcard_path_from_dentry). Fix mknod to pass type field -(block/char/fifo) properly. Remove spurious mount warning log entry when -credentials passed as mount argument. Set major/minor device number in -inode for block and char devices when unix extensions enabled. - -Version 1.19 ------------- -Fix /proc/fs/cifs/Stats and DebugData display to handle larger -amounts of return data. Properly limit requests to MAX_REQ (50 -is the usual maximum active multiplex SMB/CIFS requests per server). -Do not kill cifsd (and thus hurt the other SMB session) when more than one -session to the same server (but with different userids) exists and one -of the two user's smb sessions is being removed while leaving the other. -Do not loop reconnecting in cifsd demultiplex thread when admin -kills the thread without going through unmount. - -Version 1.18 ------------- -Do not rename hardlinked files (since that should be a noop). Flush -cached write behind data when reopening a file after session abend, -except when already in write. Grab per socket sem during reconnect -to avoid oops in sendmsg if overlapping with reconnect. Do not -reset cached inode file size on readdir for files open for write on -client. - - -Version 1.17 ------------- -Update number of blocks in file so du command is happier (in Linux a fake -blocksize of 512 is required for calculating number of blocks in inode). -Fix prepare write of partial pages to read in data from server if possible. -Fix race on tcpStatus field between unmount and reconnection code, causing -cifsd process sometimes to hang around forever. Improve out of memory -checks in cifs_filldir - -Version 1.16 ------------- -Fix incorrect file size in file handle based setattr on big endian hardware. -Fix oops in build_path_from_dentry when out of memory. Add checks for invalid -and closing file structs in writepage/partialpagewrite. Add statistics -for each mounted share (new menuconfig option). Fix endianness problem in -volume information displayed in /proc/fs/cifs/DebugData (only affects -affects big endian architectures). Prevent renames while constructing -path names for open, mkdir and rmdir. - -Version 1.15 ------------- -Change to mempools for alloc smb request buffers and multiplex structs -to better handle low memory problems (and potential deadlocks). - -Version 1.14 ------------- -Fix incomplete listings of large directories on Samba servers when Unix -extensions enabled. Fix oops when smb_buffer can not be allocated. Fix -rename deadlock when writing out dirty pages at same time. - -Version 1.13 ------------- -Fix open of files in which O_CREATE can cause the mode to change in -some cases. Fix case in which retry of write overlaps file close. -Fix PPC64 build error. Reduce excessive stack usage in smb password -hashing. Fix overwrite of Linux user's view of file mode to Windows servers. - -Version 1.12 ------------- -Fixes for large file copy, signal handling, socket retry, buffer -allocation and low memory situations. - -Version 1.11 ------------- -Better port 139 support to Windows servers (RFC1001/RFC1002 Session_Initialize) -also now allowing support for specifying client netbiosname. NT4 support added. - -Version 1.10 ------------- -Fix reconnection (and certain failed mounts) to properly wake up the -blocked users thread so it does not seem hung (in some cases was blocked -until the cifs receive timeout expired). Fix spurious error logging -to kernel log when application with open network files killed. - -Version 1.09 ------------- -Fix /proc/fs module unload warning message (that could be logged -to the kernel log). Fix intermittent failure in connectathon -test7 (hardlink count not immediately refreshed in case in which -inode metadata can be incorrectly kept cached when time near zero) - -Version 1.08 ------------- -Allow file_mode and dir_mode (specified at mount time) to be enforced -locally (the server already enforced its own ACLs too) for servers -that do not report the correct mode (do not support the -CIFS Unix Extensions). - -Version 1.07 ------------- -Fix some small memory leaks in some unmount error paths. Fix major leak -of cache pages in readpages causing multiple read oriented stress -testcases (including fsx, and even large file copy) to fail over time. - -Version 1.06 ------------- -Send NTCreateX with ATTR_POSIX if Linux/Unix extensions negotiated with server. -This allows files that differ only in case and improves performance of file -creation and file open to such servers. Fix semaphore conflict which causes -slow delete of open file to Samba (which unfortunately can cause an oplock -break to self while vfs_unlink held i_sem) which can hang for 20 seconds. - -Version 1.05 ------------- -fixes to cifs_readpages for fsx test case - -Version 1.04 ------------- -Fix caching data integrity bug when extending file size especially when no -oplock on file. Fix spurious logging of valid already parsed mount options -that are parsed outside of the cifs vfs such as nosuid. - - -Version 1.03 ------------- -Connect to server when port number override not specified, and tcp port -unitialized. Reset search to restart at correct file when kernel routine -filldir returns error during large directory searches (readdir). - -Version 1.02 ------------- -Fix caching problem when files opened by multiple clients in which -page cache could contain stale data, and write through did -not occur often enough while file was still open when read ahead -(read oplock) not allowed. Treat "sep=" when first mount option -as an override of comma as the default separator between mount -options. - -Version 1.01 ------------- -Allow passwords longer than 16 bytes. Allow null password string. - -Version 1.00 ------------- -Gracefully clean up failed mounts when attempting to mount to servers such as -Windows 98 that terminate tcp sessions during protocol negotiation. Handle -embedded commas in mount parsing of passwords. - -Version 0.99 ------------- -Invalidate local inode cached pages on oplock break and when last file -instance is closed so that the client does not continue using stale local -copy rather than later modified server copy of file. Do not reconnect -when server drops the tcp session prematurely before negotiate -protocol response. Fix oops in reopen_file when dentry freed. Allow -the support for CIFS Unix Extensions to be disabled via proc interface. - -Version 0.98 ------------- -Fix hang in commit_write during reconnection of open files under heavy load. -Fix unload_nls oops in a mount failure path. Serialize writes to same socket -which also fixes any possible races when cifs signatures are enabled in SMBs -being sent out of signature sequence number order. - -Version 0.97 ------------- -Fix byte range locking bug (endian problem) causing bad offset and -length. - -Version 0.96 ------------- -Fix oops (in send_sig) caused by CIFS unmount code trying to -wake up the demultiplex thread after it had exited. Do not log -error on harmless oplock release of closed handle. - -Version 0.95 ------------- -Fix unsafe global variable usage and password hash failure on gcc 3.3.1 -Fix problem reconnecting secondary mounts to same server after session -failure. Fix invalid dentry - race in mkdir when directory gets created -by another client between the lookup and mkdir. - -Version 0.94 ------------- -Fix to list processing in reopen_files. Fix reconnection when server hung -but tcpip session still alive. Set proper timeout on socket read. - -Version 0.93 ------------- -Add missing mount options including iocharset. SMP fixes in write and open. -Fix errors in reconnecting after TCP session failure. Fix module unloading -of default nls codepage - -Version 0.92 ------------- -Active smb transactions should never go negative (fix double FreeXid). Fix -list processing in file routines. Check return code on kmalloc in open. -Fix spinlock usage for SMP. - -Version 0.91 ------------- -Fix oops in reopen_files when invalid dentry. drop dentry on server rename -and on revalidate errors. Fix cases where pid is now tgid. Fix return code -on create hard link when server does not support them. - -Version 0.90 ------------- -Fix scheduling while atomic error in getting inode info on newly created file. -Fix truncate of existing files opened with O_CREAT but not O_TRUNC set. - -Version 0.89 ------------- -Fix oops on write to dead tcp session. Remove error log write for case when file open -O_CREAT but not O_EXCL - -Version 0.88 ------------- -Fix non-POSIX behavior on rename of open file and delete of open file by taking -advantage of trans2 SetFileInfo rename facility if available on target server. -Retry on ENOSPC and EAGAIN socket errors. - -Version 0.87 ------------- -Fix oops on big endian readdir. Set blksize to be even power of two (2**blkbits) to fix -allocation size miscalculation. After oplock token lost do not read through -cache. - -Version 0.86 ------------- -Fix oops on empty file readahead. Fix for file size handling for locally cached files. - -Version 0.85 ------------- -Fix oops in mkdir when server fails to return inode info. Fix oops in reopen_files -during auto reconnection to server after server recovered from failure. - -Version 0.84 ------------- -Finish support for Linux 2.5 open/create changes, which removes the -redundant NTCreate/QPathInfo/close that was sent during file create. -Enable oplock by default. Enable packet signing by default (needed to -access many recent Windows servers) - -Version 0.83 ------------- -Fix oops when mounting to long server names caused by inverted parms to kmalloc. -Fix MultiuserMount (/proc/fs/cifs configuration setting) so that when enabled -we will choose a cifs user session (smb uid) that better matches the local -uid if a) the mount uid does not match the current uid and b) we have another -session to the same server (ip address) for a different mount which -matches the current local uid. - -Version 0.82 ------------- -Add support for mknod of block or character devices. Fix oplock -code (distributed caching) to properly send response to oplock -break from server. - -Version 0.81 ------------- -Finish up CIFS packet digital signing for the default -NTLM security case. This should help Windows 2003 -network interoperability since it is common for -packet signing to be required now. Fix statfs (stat -f) -which recently started returning errors due to -invalid value (-1 instead of 0) being set in the -struct kstatfs f_ffiles field. - -Version 0.80 ------------ -Fix oops on stopping oplock thread when removing cifs when -built as module. - -Version 0.79 ------------- -Fix mount options for ro (readonly), uid, gid and file and directory mode. - -Version 0.78 ------------- -Fix errors displayed on failed mounts to be more understandable. -Fixed various incorrect or misleading smb to posix error code mappings. - -Version 0.77 ------------- -Fix display of NTFS DFS junctions to display as symlinks. -They are the network equivalent. Fix oops in -cifs_partialpagewrite caused by missing spinlock protection -of openfile linked list. Allow writebehind caching errors to -be returned to the application at file close. - -Version 0.76 ------------- -Clean up options displayed in /proc/mounts by show_options to -be more consistent with other filesystems. - -Version 0.75 ------------- -Fix delete of readonly file to Windows servers. Reflect -presence or absence of read only dos attribute in mode -bits for servers that do not support CIFS Unix extensions. -Fix shortened results on readdir of large directories to -servers supporting CIFS Unix extensions (caused by -incorrect resume key). - -Version 0.74 ------------- -Fix truncate bug (set file size) that could cause hangs e.g. running fsx - -Version 0.73 ------------- -unload nls if mount fails. - -Version 0.72 ------------- -Add resume key support to search (readdir) code to workaround -Windows bug. Add /proc/fs/cifs/LookupCacheEnable which -allows disabling caching of attribute information for -lookups. - -Version 0.71 ------------- -Add more oplock handling (distributed caching code). Remove -dead code. Remove excessive stack space utilization from -symlink routines. - -Version 0.70 ------------- -Fix oops in get dfs referral (triggered when null path sent in to -mount). Add support for overriding rsize at mount time. - -Version 0.69 ------------- -Fix buffer overrun in readdir which caused intermittent kernel oopses. -Fix writepage code to release kmap on write data. Allow "-ip=" new -mount option to be passed in on parameter distinct from the first part -(server name portion of) the UNC name. Allow override of the -tcp port of the target server via new mount option "-port=" - -Version 0.68 ------------- -Fix search handle leak on rewind. Fix setuid and gid so that they are -reflected in the local inode immediately. Cleanup of whitespace -to make 2.4 and 2.5 versions more consistent. - - -Version 0.67 ------------- -Fix signal sending so that captive thread (cifsd) exits on umount -(which was causing the warning in kmem_cache_free of the request buffers -at rmmod time). This had broken as a sideeffect of the recent global -kernel change to daemonize. Fix memory leak in readdir code which -showed up in "ls -R" (and applications that did search rewinding). - -Version 0.66 ------------- -Reconnect tids and fids after session reconnection (still do not -reconnect byte range locks though). Fix problem caching -lookup information for directory inodes, improving performance, -especially in deep directory trees. Fix various build warnings. - -Version 0.65 ------------- -Finish fixes to commit write for caching/readahead consistency. fsx -now works to Samba servers. Fix oops caused when readahead -was interrupted by a signal. - -Version 0.64 ------------- -Fix data corruption (in partial page after truncate) that caused fsx to -fail to Windows servers. Cleaned up some extraneous error logging in -common error paths. Add generic sendfile support. - -Version 0.63 ------------- -Fix memory leak in AllocMidQEntry. -Finish reconnection logic, so connection with server can be dropped -(or server rebooted) and the cifs client will reconnect. - -Version 0.62 ------------- -Fix temporary socket leak when bad userid or password specified -(or other SMBSessSetup failure). Increase maximum buffer size to slightly -over 16K to allow negotiation of up to Samba and Windows server default read -sizes. Add support for readpages - -Version 0.61 ------------- -Fix oops when username not passed in on mount. Extensive fixes and improvements -to error logging (strip redundant newlines, change debug macros to ensure newline -passed in and to be more consistent). Fix writepage wrong file handle problem, -a readonly file handle could be incorrectly used to attempt to write out -file updates through the page cache to multiply open files. This could cause -the iozone benchmark to fail on the fwrite test. Fix bug mounting two different -shares to the same Windows server when using different usernames -(doing this to Samba servers worked but Windows was rejecting it) - now it is -possible to use different userids when connecting to the same server from a -Linux client. Fix oops when treeDisconnect called during unmount on -previously freed socket. - -Version 0.60 ------------- -Fix oops in readpages caused by not setting address space operations in inode in -rare code path. - -Version 0.59 ------------- -Includes support for deleting of open files and renaming over existing files (per POSIX -requirement). Add readlink support for Windows junction points (directory symlinks). - -Version 0.58 ------------- -Changed read and write to go through pagecache. Added additional address space operations. -Memory mapped operations now working. - -Version 0.57 ------------- -Added writepage code for additional memory mapping support. Fixed leak in xids causing -the simultaneous operations counter (/proc/fs/cifs/SimultaneousOps) to increase on -every stat call. Additional formatting cleanup. - -Version 0.56 ------------- -Fix bigendian bug in order of time conversion. Merge 2.5 to 2.4 version. Formatting cleanup. - -Version 0.55 ------------- -Fixes from Zwane Mwaikambo for adding missing return code checking in a few places. -Also included a modified version of his fix to protect global list manipulation of -the smb session and tree connection and mid related global variables. - -Version 0.54 ------------- -Fix problem with captive thread hanging around at unmount time. Adjust to 2.5.42-pre -changes to superblock layout. Remove wasteful allocation of smb buffers (now the send -buffer is reused for responses). Add more oplock handling. Additional minor cleanup. - -Version 0.53 ------------- -More stylistic updates to better match kernel style. Add additional statistics -for filesystem which can be viewed via /proc/fs/cifs. Add more pieces of NTLMv2 -and CIFS Packet Signing enablement. - -Version 0.52 ------------- -Replace call to sleep_on with safer wait_on_event. -Make stylistic changes to better match kernel style recommendations. -Remove most typedef usage (except for the PDUs themselves). - -Version 0.51 ------------- -Update mount so the -unc mount option is no longer required (the ip address can be specified -in a UNC style device name. Implementation of readpage/writepage started. - -Version 0.50 ------------- -Fix intermittent problem with incorrect smb header checking on badly -fragmented tcp responses - -Version 0.49 ------------- -Fixes to setting of allocation size and file size. - -Version 0.48 ------------- -Various 2.5.38 fixes. Now works on 2.5.38 - -Version 0.47 ------------- -Prepare for 2.5 kernel merge. Remove ifdefs. - -Version 0.46 ------------- -Socket buffer management fixes. Fix dual free. - -Version 0.45 ------------- -Various big endian fixes for hardlinks and symlinks and also for dfs. - -Version 0.44 ------------- -Various big endian fixes for servers with Unix extensions such as Samba - -Version 0.43 ------------- -Various FindNext fixes for incorrect filenames on large directory searches on big endian -clients. basic posix file i/o tests now work on big endian machines, not just le - -Version 0.42 ------------- -SessionSetup and NegotiateProtocol now work from Big Endian machines. -Various Big Endian fixes found during testing on the Linux on 390. Various fixes for compatibility with older -versions of 2.4 kernel (now builds and works again on kernels at least as early as 2.4.7). - -Version 0.41 ------------- -Various minor fixes for Connectathon Posix "basic" file i/o test suite. Directory caching fixed so hardlinked -files now return the correct number of links on fstat as they are repeatedly linked and unlinked. - -Version 0.40 ------------- -Implemented "Raw" (i.e. not encapsulated in SPNEGO) NTLMSSP (i.e. the Security Provider Interface used to negotiate -session advanced session authentication). Raw NTLMSSP is preferred by Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP. -Began implementing support for SPNEGO encapsulation of NTLMSSP based session authentication blobs -(which is the mechanism preferred by Windows 2000 server in the absence of Kerberos). - -Version 0.38 ------------- -Introduced optional mount helper utility mount.cifs and made coreq changes to cifs vfs to enable -it. Fixed a few bugs in the DFS code (e.g. bcc two bytes too short and incorrect uid in PDU). - -Version 0.37 ------------- -Rewrote much of connection and mount/unmount logic to handle bugs with -multiple uses to same share, multiple users to same server etc. - -Version 0.36 ------------- -Fixed major problem with dentry corruption (missing call to dput) - -Version 0.35 ------------- -Rewrite of readdir code to fix bug. Various fixes for bigendian machines. -Begin adding oplock support. Multiusermount and oplockEnabled flags added to /proc/fs/cifs -although corresponding function not fully implemented in the vfs yet - -Version 0.34 ------------- -Fixed dentry caching bug, misc. cleanup - -Version 0.33 ------------- -Fixed 2.5 support to handle build and configure changes as well as misc. 2.5 changes. Now can build -on current 2.5 beta version (2.5.24) of the Linux kernel as well as on 2.4 Linux kernels. -Support for STATUS codes (newer 32 bit NT error codes) added. DFS support begun to be added. - -Version 0.32 ------------- -Unix extensions (symlink, readlink, hardlink, chmod and some chgrp and chown) implemented -and tested against Samba 2.2.5 - - -Version 0.31 ------------- -1) Fixed lockrange to be correct (it was one byte too short) - -2) Fixed GETLK (i.e. the fcntl call to test a range of bytes in a file to see if locked) to correctly -show range as locked when there is a conflict with an existing lock. - -3) default file perms are now 2767 (indicating support for mandatory locks) instead of 777 for directories -in most cases. Eventually will offer optional ability to query server for the correct perms. - -3) Fixed eventual trap when mounting twice to different shares on the same server when the first succeeded -but the second one was invalid and failed (the second one was incorrectly disconnecting the tcp and smb -session) - -4) Fixed error logging of valid mount options - -5) Removed logging of password field. - -6) Moved negotiate, treeDisconnect and uloggoffX (only tConx and SessSetup remain in connect.c) to cifssmb.c -and cleaned them up and made them more consistent with other cifs functions. - -7) Server support for Unix extensions is now fully detected and FindFirst is implemented both ways -(with or without Unix extensions) but FindNext and QueryPathInfo with the Unix extensions are not completed, -nor is the symlink support using the Unix extensions - -8) Started adding the readlink and follow_link code - -Version 0.3 ------------ -Initial drop - +See https://wiki.samba.org/index.php/LinuxCIFSKernel for summary +information (that may be easier to read than parsing the output of +"git log fs/cifs") about fixes/improvements to CIFS/SMB2/SMB3 support (changes +to cifs.ko module) by kernel version (and cifs internal module version). diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README index 99ce3d25003d..4a804619cff2 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/README @@ -603,8 +603,7 @@ DebugData Displays information about active CIFS sessions and shares, features enabled as well as the cifs.ko version. Stats Lists summary resource usage information as well as per - share statistics, if CONFIG_CIFS_STATS in enabled - in the kernel configuration. + share statistics. Configuration pseudo-files: SecurityFlags Flags which control security negotiation and @@ -687,23 +686,22 @@ cifsFYI functions as a bit mask. Setting it to 1 enables additional kernel logging of various informational messages. 2 enables logging of non-zero SMB return codes while 4 enables logging of requests that take longer than one second to complete (except for byte range lock requests). -Setting it to 4 requires defining CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 manually in the -source code (typically by setting it in the beginning of cifsglob.h), -and setting it to seven enables all three. Finally, tracing +Setting it to 4 requires CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 to be set in kernel configuration +(.config). Setting it to seven enables all three. Finally, tracing the start of smb requests and responses can be enabled via: echo 1 > /proc/fs/cifs/traceSMB -Per share (per client mount) statistics are available in /proc/fs/cifs/Stats -if the kernel was configured with cifs statistics enabled. The statistics -represent the number of successful (ie non-zero return code from the server) -SMB responses to some of the more common commands (open, delete, mkdir etc.). +Per share (per client mount) statistics are available in /proc/fs/cifs/Stats. +Additional information is available if CONFIG_CIFS_STATS2 is enabled in the +kernel configuration (.config). The statistics returned include counters which +represent the number of attempted and failed (ie non-zero return code from the +server) SMB3 (or cifs) requests grouped by request type (read, write, close etc.). Also recorded is the total bytes read and bytes written to the server for that share. Note that due to client caching effects this can be less than the number of bytes read and written by the application running on the client. -The statistics for the number of total SMBs and oplock breaks are different in -that they represent all for that share, not just those for which the server -returned success. +Statistics can be reset to zero by "echo 0 > /proc/fs/cifs/Stats" which may be +useful if comparing performance of two different scenarios. Also note that "cat /proc/fs/cifs/DebugData" will display information about the active sessions and the shares that are mounted. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO index c5adf149b57f..852499aed64b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/cifs/TODO @@ -9,14 +9,14 @@ is a partial list of the known problems and missing features: a) SMB3 (and SMB3.02) missing optional features: - multichannel (started), integration with RDMA - - directory leases (improved metadata caching) - - T10 copy offload (copy chunk, and "Duplicate Extents" ioctl + - directory leases (improved metadata caching), started (root dir only) + - T10 copy offload ie "ODX" (copy chunk, and "Duplicate Extents" ioctl currently the only two server side copy mechanisms supported) b) improved sparse file support c) Directory entry caching relies on a 1 second timer, rather than -using Directory Leases +using Directory Leases, currently only the root file handle is cached longer d) quota support (needs minor kernel change since quota calls to make it to network filesystems or deviceless filesystems) @@ -42,6 +42,8 @@ mount or a per server basis to client UIDs or nobody if no mapping exists. Also better integration with winbind for resolving SID owners k) Add tools to take advantage of more smb3 specific ioctls and features +(passthrough ioctl/fsctl for sending various SMB3 fsctls to the server +is in progress) l) encrypted file support @@ -71,9 +73,8 @@ t) split cifs and smb3 support into separate modules so legacy (and less secure) CIFS dialect can be disabled in environments that don't need it and simplify the code. -u) Finish up SMB3.1.1 dialect support - -v) POSIX Extensions for SMB3.1.1 +v) POSIX Extensions for SMB3.1.1 (started, create and mkdir support added +so far). KNOWN BUGS ==================================== @@ -92,8 +93,8 @@ Misc testing to do 1) check out max path names and max path name components against various server types. Try nested symlinks (8 deep). Return max path name in stat -f information -2) Improve xfstest's cifs enablement and adapt xfstests where needed to test -cifs better +2) Improve xfstest's cifs/smb3 enablement and adapt xfstests where needed to test +cifs/smb3 better 3) Additional performance testing and optimization using iozone and similar - there are some easy changes that can be done to parallelize sequential writes, diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ext4.rst index 7f628b9f7c4b..9d4368d591fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ext4.rst @@ -1,6 +1,8 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 -Ext4 Filesystem -=============== +======================== +General Information +======================== Ext4 is an advanced level of the ext3 filesystem which incorporates scalability and reliability enhancements for supporting large filesystems @@ -11,37 +13,30 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org Web site: http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org -1. Quick usage instructions: -=========================== +Quick usage instructions +======================== Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be - found at the ext4 wiki site at the URL: - http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Ext4_Howto +found at the ext4 wiki site at the URL: +http://ext4.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Ext4_Howto - - Compile and install the latest version of e2fsprogs (as of this - writing version 1.41.3) from: + - The latest version of e2fsprogs can be found at: + + https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tytso/e2fsprogs/ - http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=2406 - or - https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tytso/e2fsprogs/ + http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=2406 or grab the latest git repository from: - git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/fs/ext2/e2fsprogs.git - - - Note that it is highly important to install the mke2fs.conf file - that comes with the e2fsprogs 1.41.x sources in /etc/mke2fs.conf. If - you have edited the /etc/mke2fs.conf file installed on your system, - you will need to merge your changes with the version from e2fsprogs - 1.41.x. + https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/fs/ext2/e2fsprogs.git - Create a new filesystem using the ext4 filesystem type: - # mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1 + # mke2fs -t ext4 /dev/hda1 - Or to configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents: + Or to configure an existing ext3 filesystem to support extents: # tune2fs -O extents /dev/hda1 @@ -50,10 +45,6 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be # tune2fs -I 256 /dev/hda1 - (Note: we currently do not have tools to convert an ext4 - filesystem back to ext3; so please do not do try this on production - filesystems.) - - Mounting: # mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever @@ -75,10 +66,11 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be the filesystem with a large journal can also be helpful for metadata-intensive workloads. -2. Features -=========== +Features +======== -2.1 Currently available +Currently Available +------------------- * ability to use filesystems > 16TB (e2fsprogs support not available yet) * extent format reduces metadata overhead (RAM, IO for access, transactions) @@ -103,31 +95,15 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be [1] Filesystems with a block size of 1k may see a limit imposed by the directory hash tree having a maximum depth of two. -2.2 Candidate features for future inclusion - -* online defrag (patches available but not well tested) -* reduced mke2fs time via lazy itable initialization in conjunction with - the uninit_bg feature (capability to do this is available in e2fsprogs - but a kernel thread to do lazy zeroing of unused inode table blocks - after filesystem is first mounted is required for safety) - -There are several others under discussion, whether they all make it in is -partly a function of how much time everyone has to work on them. Features like -metadata checksumming have been discussed and planned for a bit but no patches -exist yet so I'm not sure they're in the near-term roadmap. - -The big performance win will come with mballoc, delalloc and flex_bg -grouping of bitmaps and inode tables. Some test results available here: - - - http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080818-ffsb/ffsb-write-2.6.27-rc1.html - - http://www.bullopensource.org/ext4/20080818-ffsb/ffsb-readwrite-2.6.27-rc1.html - -3. Options -========== +Options +======= When mounting an ext4 filesystem, the following option are accepted: (*) == default +======================= ======================================================= +Mount Option Description +======================= ======================================================= ro Mount filesystem read only. Note that ext4 will replay the journal (and thus write to the partition) even when mounted "read only". The @@ -387,33 +363,38 @@ i_version Enable 64-bit inode version support. This option is dax Use direct access (no page cache). See Documentation/filesystems/dax.txt. Note that this option is incompatible with data=journal. +======================= ======================================================= Data Mode ========= There are 3 different data modes: * writeback mode -In data=writeback mode, ext4 does not journal data at all. This mode provides -a similar level of journaling as that of XFS, JFS, and ReiserFS in its default -mode - metadata journaling. A crash+recovery can cause incorrect data to -appear in files which were written shortly before the crash. This mode will -typically provide the best ext4 performance. + + In data=writeback mode, ext4 does not journal data at all. This mode provides + a similar level of journaling as that of XFS, JFS, and ReiserFS in its default + mode - metadata journaling. A crash+recovery can cause incorrect data to + appear in files which were written shortly before the crash. This mode will + typically provide the best ext4 performance. * ordered mode -In data=ordered mode, ext4 only officially journals metadata, but it logically -groups metadata information related to data changes with the data blocks into a -single unit called a transaction. When it's time to write the new metadata -out to disk, the associated data blocks are written first. In general, -this mode performs slightly slower than writeback but significantly faster than journal mode. + + In data=ordered mode, ext4 only officially journals metadata, but it logically + groups metadata information related to data changes with the data blocks into + a single unit called a transaction. When it's time to write the new metadata + out to disk, the associated data blocks are written first. In general, this + mode performs slightly slower than writeback but significantly faster than + journal mode. * journal mode -data=journal mode provides full data and metadata journaling. All new data is -written to the journal first, and then to its final location. -In the event of a crash, the journal can be replayed, bringing both data and -metadata into a consistent state. This mode is the slowest except when data -needs to be read from and written to disk at the same time where it -outperforms all others modes. Enabling this mode will disable delayed -allocation and O_DIRECT support. + + data=journal mode provides full data and metadata journaling. All new data is + written to the journal first, and then to its final location. In the event of + a crash, the journal can be replayed, bringing both data and metadata into a + consistent state. This mode is the slowest except when data needs to be read + from and written to disk at the same time where it outperforms all others + modes. Enabling this mode will disable delayed allocation and O_DIRECT + support. /proc entries ============= @@ -425,10 +406,12 @@ Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in in table below. Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname> -.............................................................................. + +================ ======= File Content +================ ======= mb_groups details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks -.............................................................................. +================ ======= /sys entries ============ @@ -439,28 +422,30 @@ Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in /sys/fs/ext4/dm-0). The files in each per-device directory are shown in table below. -Files in /sys/fs/ext4/<devname> +Files in /sys/fs/ext4/<devname>: + (see also Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-fs-ext4) -.............................................................................. - File Content +============================= ================================================= +File Content +============================= ================================================= delayed_allocation_blocks This file is read-only and shows the number of blocks that are dirty in the page cache, but which do not have their location in the filesystem allocated yet. - inode_goal Tuning parameter which (if non-zero) controls +inode_goal Tuning parameter which (if non-zero) controls the goal inode used by the inode allocator in preference to all other allocation heuristics. This is intended for debugging use only, and should be 0 on production systems. - inode_readahead_blks Tuning parameter which controls the maximum +inode_readahead_blks Tuning parameter which controls the maximum number of inode table blocks that ext4's inode table readahead algorithm will pre-read into the buffer cache - lifetime_write_kbytes This file is read-only and shows the number of +lifetime_write_kbytes This file is read-only and shows the number of kilobytes of data that have been written to this filesystem since it was created. @@ -508,7 +493,7 @@ Files in /sys/fs/ext4/<devname> in the file system. If there is not enough space for the reserved space when mounting the file mount will _not_ fail. -.............................................................................. +============================= ================================================= Ioctls ====== @@ -518,8 +503,10 @@ through the system call interfaces. The list of all Ext4 specific ioctls are shown in the table below. Table of Ext4 specific ioctls -.............................................................................. - Ioctl Description + +============================= ================================================= +Ioctl Description +============================= ================================================= EXT4_IOC_GETFLAGS Get additional attributes associated with inode. The ioctl argument is an integer bitfield, with bit values described in ext4.h. This ioctl is an @@ -610,8 +597,7 @@ Table of Ext4 specific ioctls normal user by accident. The data blocks of the previous boot loader will be associated with the given inode. - -.............................................................................. +============================= ================================================= References ========== diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..71121605558c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=============== +ext4 Filesystem +=============== + +General usage and on-disk artifacts writen by ext4. More documentation may +be ported from the wiki as time permits. This should be considered the +canonical source of information as the details here have been reviewed by +the ext4 community. + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 5 + :numbered: + + ext4 + ondisk/index diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/about.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/about.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0aadba052264 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/about.rst @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +About this Book +=============== + +This document attempts to describe the on-disk format for ext4 +filesystems. The same general ideas should apply to ext2/3 filesystems +as well, though they do not support all the features that ext4 supports, +and the fields will be shorter. + +**NOTE**: This is a work in progress, based on notes that the author +(djwong) made while picking apart a filesystem by hand. The data +structure definitions should be current as of Linux 4.18 and +e2fsprogs-1.44. All comments and corrections are welcome, since there is +undoubtedly plenty of lore that might not be reflected in freshly +created demonstration filesystems. + +License +------- +This book is licensed under the terms of the GNU Public License, v2. + +Terminology +----------- + +ext4 divides a storage device into an array of logical blocks both to +reduce bookkeeping overhead and to increase throughput by forcing larger +transfer sizes. Generally, the block size will be 4KiB (the same size as +pages on x86 and the block layer's default block size), though the +actual size is calculated as 2 ^ (10 + ``sb.s_log_block_size``) bytes. +Throughout this document, disk locations are given in terms of these +logical blocks, not raw LBAs, and not 1024-byte blocks. For the sake of +convenience, the logical block size will be referred to as +``$block_size`` throughout the rest of the document. + +When referenced in ``preformatted text`` blocks, ``sb`` refers to fields +in the super block, and ``inode`` refers to fields in an inode table +entry. + +Other References +---------------- + +Also see http://www.nongnu.org/ext2-doc/ for quite a collection of +information about ext2/3. Here's another old reference: +http://wiki.osdev.org/Ext2 diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/allocators.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/allocators.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7aa85152ace3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/allocators.rst @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Block and Inode Allocation Policy +--------------------------------- + +ext4 recognizes (better than ext3, anyway) that data locality is +generally a desirably quality of a filesystem. On a spinning disk, +keeping related blocks near each other reduces the amount of movement +that the head actuator and disk must perform to access a data block, +thus speeding up disk IO. On an SSD there of course are no moving parts, +but locality can increase the size of each transfer request while +reducing the total number of requests. This locality may also have the +effect of concentrating writes on a single erase block, which can speed +up file rewrites significantly. Therefore, it is useful to reduce +fragmentation whenever possible. + +The first tool that ext4 uses to combat fragmentation is the multi-block +allocator. When a file is first created, the block allocator +speculatively allocates 8KiB of disk space to the file on the assumption +that the space will get written soon. When the file is closed, the +unused speculative allocations are of course freed, but if the +speculation is correct (typically the case for full writes of small +files) then the file data gets written out in a single multi-block +extent. A second related trick that ext4 uses is delayed allocation. +Under this scheme, when a file needs more blocks to absorb file writes, +the filesystem defers deciding the exact placement on the disk until all +the dirty buffers are being written out to disk. By not committing to a +particular placement until it's absolutely necessary (the commit timeout +is hit, or sync() is called, or the kernel runs out of memory), the hope +is that the filesystem can make better location decisions. + +The third trick that ext4 (and ext3) uses is that it tries to keep a +file's data blocks in the same block group as its inode. This cuts down +on the seek penalty when the filesystem first has to read a file's inode +to learn where the file's data blocks live and then seek over to the +file's data blocks to begin I/O operations. + +The fourth trick is that all the inodes in a directory are placed in the +same block group as the directory, when feasible. The working assumption +here is that all the files in a directory might be related, therefore it +is useful to try to keep them all together. + +The fifth trick is that the disk volume is cut up into 128MB block +groups; these mini-containers are used as outlined above to try to +maintain data locality. However, there is a deliberate quirk -- when a +directory is created in the root directory, the inode allocator scans +the block groups and puts that directory into the least heavily loaded +block group that it can find. This encourages directories to spread out +over a disk; as the top-level directory/file blobs fill up one block +group, the allocators simply move on to the next block group. Allegedly +this scheme evens out the loading on the block groups, though the author +suspects that the directories which are so unlucky as to land towards +the end of a spinning drive get a raw deal performance-wise. + +Of course if all of these mechanisms fail, one can always use e4defrag +to defragment files. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/attributes.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/attributes.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0b01b67b81fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/attributes.rst @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Extended Attributes +------------------- + +Extended attributes (xattrs) are typically stored in a separate data +block on the disk and referenced from inodes via ``inode.i_file_acl*``. +The first use of extended attributes seems to have been for storing file +ACLs and other security data (selinux). With the ``user_xattr`` mount +option it is possible for users to store extended attributes so long as +all attribute names begin with “user”; this restriction seems to have +disappeared as of Linux 3.0. + +There are two places where extended attributes can be found. The first +place is between the end of each inode entry and the beginning of the +next inode entry. For example, if inode.i\_extra\_isize = 28 and +sb.inode\_size = 256, then there are 256 - (128 + 28) = 100 bytes +available for in-inode extended attribute storage. The second place +where extended attributes can be found is in the block pointed to by +``inode.i_file_acl``. As of Linux 3.11, it is not possible for this +block to contain a pointer to a second extended attribute block (or even +the remaining blocks of a cluster). In theory it is possible for each +attribute's value to be stored in a separate data block, though as of +Linux 3.11 the code does not permit this. + +Keys are generally assumed to be ASCIIZ strings, whereas values can be +strings or binary data. + +Extended attributes, when stored after the inode, have a header +``ext4_xattr_ibody_header`` that is 4 bytes long: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - h\_magic + - Magic number for identification, 0xEA020000. This value is set by the + Linux driver, though e2fsprogs doesn't seem to check it(?) + +The beginning of an extended attribute block is in +``struct ext4_xattr_header``, which is 32 bytes long: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - h\_magic + - Magic number for identification, 0xEA020000. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - h\_refcount + - Reference count. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le32 + - h\_blocks + - Number of disk blocks used. + * - 0xC + - \_\_le32 + - h\_hash + - Hash value of all attributes. + * - 0x10 + - \_\_le32 + - h\_checksum + - Checksum of the extended attribute block. + * - 0x14 + - \_\_u32 + - h\_reserved[2] + - Zero. + +The checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the 64-bit block number +of the extended attribute block, and the entire block (header + +entries). + +Following the ``struct ext4_xattr_header`` or +``struct ext4_xattr_ibody_header`` is an array of +``struct ext4_xattr_entry``; each of these entries is at least 16 bytes +long. When stored in an external block, the ``struct ext4_xattr_entry`` +entries must be stored in sorted order. The sort order is +``e_name_index``, then ``e_name_len``, and finally ``e_name``. +Attributes stored inside an inode do not need be stored in sorted order. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_u8 + - e\_name\_len + - Length of name. + * - 0x1 + - \_\_u8 + - e\_name\_index + - Attribute name index. There is a discussion of this below. + * - 0x2 + - \_\_le16 + - e\_value\_offs + - Location of this attribute's value on the disk block where it is stored. + Multiple attributes can share the same value. For an inode attribute + this value is relative to the start of the first entry; for a block this + value is relative to the start of the block (i.e. the header). + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - e\_value\_inum + - The inode where the value is stored. Zero indicates the value is in the + same block as this entry. This field is only used if the + INCOMPAT\_EA\_INODE feature is enabled. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le32 + - e\_value\_size + - Length of attribute value. + * - 0xC + - \_\_le32 + - e\_hash + - Hash value of attribute name and attribute value. The kernel doesn't + update the hash for in-inode attributes, so for that case this value + must be zero, because e2fsck validates any non-zero hash regardless of + where the xattr lives. + * - 0x10 + - char + - e\_name[e\_name\_len] + - Attribute name. Does not include trailing NULL. + +Attribute values can follow the end of the entry table. There appears to +be a requirement that they be aligned to 4-byte boundaries. The values +are stored starting at the end of the block and grow towards the +xattr\_header/xattr\_entry table. When the two collide, the overflow is +put into a separate disk block. If the disk block fills up, the +filesystem returns -ENOSPC. + +The first four fields of the ``ext4_xattr_entry`` are set to zero to +mark the end of the key list. + +Attribute Name Indices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Logically speaking, extended attributes are a series of key=value pairs. +The keys are assumed to be NULL-terminated strings. To reduce the amount +of on-disk space that the keys consume, the beginning of the key string +is matched against the attribute name index. If a match is found, the +attribute name index field is set, and matching string is removed from +the key name. Here is a map of name index values to key prefixes: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Name Index + - Key Prefix + * - 0 + - (no prefix) + * - 1 + - “user.” + * - 2 + - “system.posix\_acl\_access” + * - 3 + - “system.posix\_acl\_default” + * - 4 + - “trusted.” + * - 6 + - “security.” + * - 7 + - “system.” (inline\_data only?) + * - 8 + - “system.richacl” (SuSE kernels only?) + +For example, if the attribute key is “user.fubar”, the attribute name +index is set to 1 and the “fubar” name is recorded on disk. + +POSIX ACLs +~~~~~~~~~~ + +POSIX ACLs are stored in a reduced version of the Linux kernel (and +libacl's) internal ACL format. The key difference is that the version +number is different (1) and the ``e_id`` field is only stored for named +user and group ACLs. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/bigalloc.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/bigalloc.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c6d88557553c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/bigalloc.rst @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Bigalloc +-------- + +At the moment, the default size of a block is 4KiB, which is a commonly +supported page size on most MMU-capable hardware. This is fortunate, as +ext4 code is not prepared to handle the case where the block size +exceeds the page size. However, for a filesystem of mostly huge files, +it is desirable to be able to allocate disk blocks in units of multiple +blocks to reduce both fragmentation and metadata overhead. The +`bigalloc <Bigalloc>`__ feature provides exactly this ability. The +administrator can set a block cluster size at mkfs time (which is stored +in the s\_log\_cluster\_size field in the superblock); from then on, the +block bitmaps track clusters, not individual blocks. This means that +block groups can be several gigabytes in size (instead of just 128MiB); +however, the minimum allocation unit becomes a cluster, not a block, +even for directories. TaoBao had a patchset to extend the “use units of +clusters instead of blocks” to the extent tree, though it is not clear +where those patches went-- they eventually morphed into “extent tree v2” +but that code has not landed as of May 2015. + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/bitmaps.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/bitmaps.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c7546dbc197a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/bitmaps.rst @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Block and inode Bitmaps +----------------------- + +The data block bitmap tracks the usage of data blocks within the block +group. + +The inode bitmap records which entries in the inode table are in use. + +As with most bitmaps, one bit represents the usage status of one data +block or inode table entry. This implies a block group size of 8 \* +number\_of\_bytes\_in\_a\_logical\_block. + +NOTE: If ``BLOCK_UNINIT`` is set for a given block group, various parts +of the kernel and e2fsprogs code pretends that the block bitmap contains +zeros (i.e. all blocks in the group are free). However, it is not +necessarily the case that no blocks are in use -- if ``meta_bg`` is set, +the bitmaps and group descriptor live inside the group. Unfortunately, +ext2fs\_test\_block\_bitmap2() will return '0' for those locations, +which produces confusing debugfs output. + +Inode Table +----------- +Inode tables are statically allocated at mkfs time. Each block group +descriptor points to the start of the table, and the superblock records +the number of inodes per group. See the section on inodes for more +information. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blockgroup.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blockgroup.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..baf888e4c06a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blockgroup.rst @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Layout +------ + +The layout of a standard block group is approximately as follows (each +of these fields is discussed in a separate section below): + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Group 0 Padding + - ext4 Super Block + - Group Descriptors + - Reserved GDT Blocks + - Data Block Bitmap + - inode Bitmap + - inode Table + - Data Blocks + * - 1024 bytes + - 1 block + - many blocks + - many blocks + - 1 block + - 1 block + - many blocks + - many more blocks + +For the special case of block group 0, the first 1024 bytes are unused, +to allow for the installation of x86 boot sectors and other oddities. +The superblock will start at offset 1024 bytes, whichever block that +happens to be (usually 0). However, if for some reason the block size = +1024, then block 0 is marked in use and the superblock goes in block 1. +For all other block groups, there is no padding. + +The ext4 driver primarily works with the superblock and the group +descriptors that are found in block group 0. Redundant copies of the +superblock and group descriptors are written to some of the block groups +across the disk in case the beginning of the disk gets trashed, though +not all block groups necessarily host a redundant copy (see following +paragraph for more details). If the group does not have a redundant +copy, the block group begins with the data block bitmap. Note also that +when the filesystem is freshly formatted, mkfs will allocate “reserve +GDT block” space after the block group descriptors and before the start +of the block bitmaps to allow for future expansion of the filesystem. By +default, a filesystem is allowed to increase in size by a factor of +1024x over the original filesystem size. + +The location of the inode table is given by ``grp.bg_inode_table_*``. It +is continuous range of blocks large enough to contain +``sb.s_inodes_per_group * sb.s_inode_size`` bytes. + +As for the ordering of items in a block group, it is generally +established that the super block and the group descriptor table, if +present, will be at the beginning of the block group. The bitmaps and +the inode table can be anywhere, and it is quite possible for the +bitmaps to come after the inode table, or for both to be in different +groups (flex\_bg). Leftover space is used for file data blocks, indirect +block maps, extent tree blocks, and extended attributes. + +Flexible Block Groups +--------------------- + +Starting in ext4, there is a new feature called flexible block groups +(flex\_bg). In a flex\_bg, several block groups are tied together as one +logical block group; the bitmap spaces and the inode table space in the +first block group of the flex\_bg are expanded to include the bitmaps +and inode tables of all other block groups in the flex\_bg. For example, +if the flex\_bg size is 4, then group 0 will contain (in order) the +superblock, group descriptors, data block bitmaps for groups 0-3, inode +bitmaps for groups 0-3, inode tables for groups 0-3, and the remaining +space in group 0 is for file data. The effect of this is to group the +block metadata close together for faster loading, and to enable large +files to be continuous on disk. Backup copies of the superblock and +group descriptors are always at the beginning of block groups, even if +flex\_bg is enabled. The number of block groups that make up a flex\_bg +is given by 2 ^ ``sb.s_log_groups_per_flex``. + +Meta Block Groups +----------------- + +Without the option META\_BG, for safety concerns, all block group +descriptors copies are kept in the first block group. Given the default +128MiB(2^27 bytes) block group size and 64-byte group descriptors, ext4 +can have at most 2^27/64 = 2^21 block groups. This limits the entire +filesystem size to 2^21 ∗ 2^27 = 2^48bytes or 256TiB. + +The solution to this problem is to use the metablock group feature +(META\_BG), which is already in ext3 for all 2.6 releases. With the +META\_BG feature, ext4 filesystems are partitioned into many metablock +groups. Each metablock group is a cluster of block groups whose group +descriptor structures can be stored in a single disk block. For ext4 +filesystems with 4 KB block size, a single metablock group partition +includes 64 block groups, or 8 GiB of disk space. The metablock group +feature moves the location of the group descriptors from the congested +first block group of the whole filesystem into the first group of each +metablock group itself. The backups are in the second and last group of +each metablock group. This increases the 2^21 maximum block groups limit +to the hard limit 2^32, allowing support for a 512PiB filesystem. + +The change in the filesystem format replaces the current scheme where +the superblock is followed by a variable-length set of block group +descriptors. Instead, the superblock and a single block group descriptor +block is placed at the beginning of the first, second, and last block +groups in a meta-block group. A meta-block group is a collection of +block groups which can be described by a single block group descriptor +block. Since the size of the block group descriptor structure is 32 +bytes, a meta-block group contains 32 block groups for filesystems with +a 1KB block size, and 128 block groups for filesystems with a 4KB +blocksize. Filesystems can either be created using this new block group +descriptor layout, or existing filesystems can be resized on-line, and +the field s\_first\_meta\_bg in the superblock will indicate the first +block group using this new layout. + +Please see an important note about ``BLOCK_UNINIT`` in the section about +block and inode bitmaps. + +Lazy Block Group Initialization +------------------------------- + +A new feature for ext4 are three block group descriptor flags that +enable mkfs to skip initializing other parts of the block group +metadata. Specifically, the INODE\_UNINIT and BLOCK\_UNINIT flags mean +that the inode and block bitmaps for that group can be calculated and +therefore the on-disk bitmap blocks are not initialized. This is +generally the case for an empty block group or a block group containing +only fixed-location block group metadata. The INODE\_ZEROED flag means +that the inode table has been initialized; mkfs will unset this flag and +rely on the kernel to initialize the inode tables in the background. + +By not writing zeroes to the bitmaps and inode table, mkfs time is +reduced considerably. Note the feature flag is RO\_COMPAT\_GDT\_CSUM, +but the dumpe2fs output prints this as “uninit\_bg”. They are the same +thing. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blockmap.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blockmap.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..30e25750d88a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blockmap.rst @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + ++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| i.i\_block Offset | Where It Points | ++=====================+==============================================================================================================================================================================================================================+ +| 0 to 11 | Direct map to file blocks 0 to 11. | ++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| 12 | Indirect block: (file blocks 12 to (``$block_size`` / 4) + 11, or 12 to 1035 if 4KiB blocks) | +| | | +| | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+ | +| | | Indirect Block Offset | Where It Points | | +| | +==============================+====================================================================+ | +| | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4) | Direct map to (``$block_size`` / 4) blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks) | | +| | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+ | ++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| 13 | Double-indirect block: (file blocks ``$block_size``/4 + 12 to (``$block_size`` / 4) ^ 2 + (``$block_size`` / 4) + 11, or 1036 to 1049611 if 4KiB blocks) | +| | | +| | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | +| | | Double Indirect Block Offset | Where It Points | | +| | +================================+=========================================================================================================+ | +| | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4) | Map to (``$block_size`` / 4) indirect blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks) | | +| | | | | | +| | | | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | +| | | | | Indirect Block Offset | Where It Points | | | +| | | | +==============================+====================================================================+ | | +| | | | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4) | Direct map to (``$block_size`` / 4) blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks) | | | +| | | | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | +| | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | ++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ +| 14 | Triple-indirect block: (file blocks (``$block_size`` / 4) ^ 2 + (``$block_size`` / 4) + 12 to (``$block_size`` / 4) ^ 3 + (``$block_size`` / 4) ^ 2 + (``$block_size`` / 4) + 12, or 1049612 to 1074791436 if 4KiB blocks) | +| | | +| | +--------------------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | +| | | Triple Indirect Block Offset | Where It Points | | +| | +================================+================================================================================================================================================+ | +| | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4) | Map to (``$block_size`` / 4) double indirect blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks) | | +| | | | | | +| | | | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | +| | | | | Double Indirect Block Offset | Where It Points | | | +| | | | +================================+=========================================================================================================+ | | +| | | | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4) | Map to (``$block_size`` / 4) indirect blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks) | | | +| | | | | | | | | +| | | | | | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | | +| | | | | | | Indirect Block Offset | Where It Points | | | | +| | | | | | +==============================+====================================================================+ | | | +| | | | | | | 0 to (``$block_size`` / 4) | Direct map to (``$block_size`` / 4) blocks (1024 if 4KiB blocks) | | | | +| | | | | | +------------------------------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | | +| | | | +--------------------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | | +| | +--------------------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ | ++---------------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blocks.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blocks.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..73d4dc0f7bda --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/blocks.rst @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Blocks +------ + +ext4 allocates storage space in units of “blocks”. A block is a group of +sectors between 1KiB and 64KiB, and the number of sectors must be an +integral power of 2. Blocks are in turn grouped into larger units called +block groups. Block size is specified at mkfs time and typically is +4KiB. You may experience mounting problems if block size is greater than +page size (i.e. 64KiB blocks on a i386 which only has 4KiB memory +pages). By default a filesystem can contain 2^32 blocks; if the '64bit' +feature is enabled, then a filesystem can have 2^64 blocks. + +For 32-bit filesystems, limits are as follows: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 1 1 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Item + - 1KiB + - 2KiB + - 4KiB + - 64KiB + * - Blocks + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + * - Inodes + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + * - File System Size + - 4TiB + - 8TiB + - 16TiB + - 256PiB + * - Blocks Per Block Group + - 8,192 + - 16,384 + - 32,768 + - 524,288 + * - Inodes Per Block Group + - 8,192 + - 16,384 + - 32,768 + - 524,288 + * - Block Group Size + - 8MiB + - 32MiB + - 128MiB + - 32GiB + * - Blocks Per File, Extents + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + * - Blocks Per File, Block Maps + - 16,843,020 + - 134,480,396 + - 1,074,791,436 + - 4,398,314,962,956 (really 2^32 due to field size limitations) + * - File Size, Extents + - 4TiB + - 8TiB + - 16TiB + - 256TiB + * - File Size, Block Maps + - 16GiB + - 256GiB + - 4TiB + - 256TiB + +For 64-bit filesystems, limits are as follows: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 1 1 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Item + - 1KiB + - 2KiB + - 4KiB + - 64KiB + * - Blocks + - 2^64 + - 2^64 + - 2^64 + - 2^64 + * - Inodes + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + * - File System Size + - 16ZiB + - 32ZiB + - 64ZiB + - 1YiB + * - Blocks Per Block Group + - 8,192 + - 16,384 + - 32,768 + - 524,288 + * - Inodes Per Block Group + - 8,192 + - 16,384 + - 32,768 + - 524,288 + * - Block Group Size + - 8MiB + - 32MiB + - 128MiB + - 32GiB + * - Blocks Per File, Extents + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + - 2^32 + * - Blocks Per File, Block Maps + - 16,843,020 + - 134,480,396 + - 1,074,791,436 + - 4,398,314,962,956 (really 2^32 due to field size limitations) + * - File Size, Extents + - 4TiB + - 8TiB + - 16TiB + - 256TiB + * - File Size, Block Maps + - 16GiB + - 256GiB + - 4TiB + - 256TiB + +Note: Files not using extents (i.e. files using block maps) must be +placed within the first 2^32 blocks of a filesystem. Files with extents +must be placed within the first 2^48 blocks of a filesystem. It's not +clear what happens with larger filesystems. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/checksums.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/checksums.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9d6a793b2e03 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/checksums.rst @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Checksums +--------- + +Starting in early 2012, metadata checksums were added to all major ext4 +and jbd2 data structures. The associated feature flag is metadata\_csum. +The desired checksum algorithm is indicated in the superblock, though as +of October 2012 the only supported algorithm is crc32c. Some data +structures did not have space to fit a full 32-bit checksum, so only the +lower 16 bits are stored. Enabling the 64bit feature increases the data +structure size so that full 32-bit checksums can be stored for many data +structures. However, existing 32-bit filesystems cannot be extended to +enable 64bit mode, at least not without the experimental resize2fs +patches to do so. + +Existing filesystems can have checksumming added by running +``tune2fs -O metadata_csum`` against the underlying device. If tune2fs +encounters directory blocks that lack sufficient empty space to add a +checksum, it will request that you run ``e2fsck -D`` to have the +directories rebuilt with checksums. This has the added benefit of +removing slack space from the directory files and rebalancing the htree +indexes. If you \_ignore\_ this step, your directories will not be +protected by a checksum! + +The following table describes the data elements that go into each type +of checksum. The checksum function is whatever the superblock describes +(crc32c as of October 2013) unless noted otherwise. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 4 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Metadata + - Length + - Ingredients + * - Superblock + - \_\_le32 + - The entire superblock up to the checksum field. The UUID lives inside + the superblock. + * - MMP + - \_\_le32 + - UUID + the entire MMP block up to the checksum field. + * - Extended Attributes + - \_\_le32 + - UUID + the entire extended attribute block. The checksum field is set to + zero. + * - Directory Entries + - \_\_le32 + - UUID + inode number + inode generation + the directory block up to the + fake entry enclosing the checksum field. + * - HTREE Nodes + - \_\_le32 + - UUID + inode number + inode generation + all valid extents + HTREE tail. + The checksum field is set to zero. + * - Extents + - \_\_le32 + - UUID + inode number + inode generation + the entire extent block up to + the checksum field. + * - Bitmaps + - \_\_le32 or \_\_le16 + - UUID + the entire bitmap. Checksums are stored in the group descriptor, + and truncated if the group descriptor size is 32 bytes (i.e. ^64bit) + * - Inodes + - \_\_le32 + - UUID + inode number + inode generation + the entire inode. The checksum + field is set to zero. Each inode has its own checksum. + * - Group Descriptors + - \_\_le16 + - If metadata\_csum, then UUID + group number + the entire descriptor; + else if gdt\_csum, then crc16(UUID + group number + the entire + descriptor). In all cases, only the lower 16 bits are stored. + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/directory.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/directory.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8fcba68c2884 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/directory.rst @@ -0,0 +1,426 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Directory Entries +----------------- + +In an ext4 filesystem, a directory is more or less a flat file that maps +an arbitrary byte string (usually ASCII) to an inode number on the +filesystem. There can be many directory entries across the filesystem +that reference the same inode number--these are known as hard links, and +that is why hard links cannot reference files on other filesystems. As +such, directory entries are found by reading the data block(s) +associated with a directory file for the particular directory entry that +is desired. + +Linear (Classic) Directories +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +By default, each directory lists its entries in an “almost-linear” +array. I write “almost” because it's not a linear array in the memory +sense because directory entries are not split across filesystem blocks. +Therefore, it is more accurate to say that a directory is a series of +data blocks and that each block contains a linear array of directory +entries. The end of each per-block array is signified by reaching the +end of the block; the last entry in the block has a record length that +takes it all the way to the end of the block. The end of the entire +directory is of course signified by reaching the end of the file. Unused +directory entries are signified by inode = 0. By default the filesystem +uses ``struct ext4_dir_entry_2`` for directory entries unless the +“filetype” feature flag is not set, in which case it uses +``struct ext4_dir_entry``. + +The original directory entry format is ``struct ext4_dir_entry``, which +is at most 263 bytes long, though on disk you'll need to reference +``dirent.rec_len`` to know for sure. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - inode + - Number of the inode that this directory entry points to. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - rec\_len + - Length of this directory entry. Must be a multiple of 4. + * - 0x6 + - \_\_le16 + - name\_len + - Length of the file name. + * - 0x8 + - char + - name[EXT4\_NAME\_LEN] + - File name. + +Since file names cannot be longer than 255 bytes, the new directory +entry format shortens the rec\_len field and uses the space for a file +type flag, probably to avoid having to load every inode during directory +tree traversal. This format is ``ext4_dir_entry_2``, which is at most +263 bytes long, though on disk you'll need to reference +``dirent.rec_len`` to know for sure. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - inode + - Number of the inode that this directory entry points to. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - rec\_len + - Length of this directory entry. + * - 0x6 + - \_\_u8 + - name\_len + - Length of the file name. + * - 0x7 + - \_\_u8 + - file\_type + - File type code, see ftype_ table below. + * - 0x8 + - char + - name[EXT4\_NAME\_LEN] + - File name. + +.. _ftype: + +The directory file type is one of the following values: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x0 + - Unknown. + * - 0x1 + - Regular file. + * - 0x2 + - Directory. + * - 0x3 + - Character device file. + * - 0x4 + - Block device file. + * - 0x5 + - FIFO. + * - 0x6 + - Socket. + * - 0x7 + - Symbolic link. + +In order to add checksums to these classic directory blocks, a phony +``struct ext4_dir_entry`` is placed at the end of each leaf block to +hold the checksum. The directory entry is 12 bytes long. The inode +number and name\_len fields are set to zero to fool old software into +ignoring an apparently empty directory entry, and the checksum is stored +in the place where the name normally goes. The structure is +``struct ext4_dir_entry_tail``: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - det\_reserved\_zero1 + - Inode number, which must be zero. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - det\_rec\_len + - Length of this directory entry, which must be 12. + * - 0x6 + - \_\_u8 + - det\_reserved\_zero2 + - Length of the file name, which must be zero. + * - 0x7 + - \_\_u8 + - det\_reserved\_ft + - File type, which must be 0xDE. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le32 + - det\_checksum + - Directory leaf block checksum. + +The leaf directory block checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the +directory's inode number, the directory's inode generation number, and +the entire directory entry block up to (but not including) the fake +directory entry. + +Hash Tree Directories +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A linear array of directory entries isn't great for performance, so a +new feature was added to ext3 to provide a faster (but peculiar) +balanced tree keyed off a hash of the directory entry name. If the +EXT4\_INDEX\_FL (0x1000) flag is set in the inode, this directory uses a +hashed btree (htree) to organize and find directory entries. For +backwards read-only compatibility with ext2, this tree is actually +hidden inside the directory file, masquerading as “empty” directory data +blocks! It was stated previously that the end of the linear directory +entry table was signified with an entry pointing to inode 0; this is +(ab)used to fool the old linear-scan algorithm into thinking that the +rest of the directory block is empty so that it moves on. + +The root of the tree always lives in the first data block of the +directory. By ext2 custom, the '.' and '..' entries must appear at the +beginning of this first block, so they are put here as two +``struct ext4_dir_entry_2``\ s and not stored in the tree. The rest of +the root node contains metadata about the tree and finally a hash->block +map to find nodes that are lower in the htree. If +``dx_root.info.indirect_levels`` is non-zero then the htree has two +levels; the data block pointed to by the root node's map is an interior +node, which is indexed by a minor hash. Interior nodes in this tree +contains a zeroed out ``struct ext4_dir_entry_2`` followed by a +minor\_hash->block map to find leafe nodes. Leaf nodes contain a linear +array of all ``struct ext4_dir_entry_2``; all of these entries +(presumably) hash to the same value. If there is an overflow, the +entries simply overflow into the next leaf node, and the +least-significant bit of the hash (in the interior node map) that gets +us to this next leaf node is set. + +To traverse the directory as a htree, the code calculates the hash of +the desired file name and uses it to find the corresponding block +number. If the tree is flat, the block is a linear array of directory +entries that can be searched; otherwise, the minor hash of the file name +is computed and used against this second block to find the corresponding +third block number. That third block number will be a linear array of +directory entries. + +To traverse the directory as a linear array (such as the old code does), +the code simply reads every data block in the directory. The blocks used +for the htree will appear to have no entries (aside from '.' and '..') +and so only the leaf nodes will appear to have any interesting content. + +The root of the htree is in ``struct dx_root``, which is the full length +of a data block: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - dot.inode + - inode number of this directory. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - dot.rec\_len + - Length of this record, 12. + * - 0x6 + - u8 + - dot.name\_len + - Length of the name, 1. + * - 0x7 + - u8 + - dot.file\_type + - File type of this entry, 0x2 (directory) (if the feature flag is set). + * - 0x8 + - char + - dot.name[4] + - “.\\0\\0\\0” + * - 0xC + - \_\_le32 + - dotdot.inode + - inode number of parent directory. + * - 0x10 + - \_\_le16 + - dotdot.rec\_len + - block\_size - 12. The record length is long enough to cover all htree + data. + * - 0x12 + - u8 + - dotdot.name\_len + - Length of the name, 2. + * - 0x13 + - u8 + - dotdot.file\_type + - File type of this entry, 0x2 (directory) (if the feature flag is set). + * - 0x14 + - char + - dotdot\_name[4] + - “..\\0\\0” + * - 0x18 + - \_\_le32 + - struct dx\_root\_info.reserved\_zero + - Zero. + * - 0x1C + - u8 + - struct dx\_root\_info.hash\_version + - Hash type, see dirhash_ table below. + * - 0x1D + - u8 + - struct dx\_root\_info.info\_length + - Length of the tree information, 0x8. + * - 0x1E + - u8 + - struct dx\_root\_info.indirect\_levels + - Depth of the htree. Cannot be larger than 3 if the INCOMPAT\_LARGEDIR + feature is set; cannot be larger than 2 otherwise. + * - 0x1F + - u8 + - struct dx\_root\_info.unused\_flags + - + * - 0x20 + - \_\_le16 + - limit + - Maximum number of dx\_entries that can follow this header, plus 1 for + the header itself. + * - 0x22 + - \_\_le16 + - count + - Actual number of dx\_entries that follow this header, plus 1 for the + header itself. + * - 0x24 + - \_\_le32 + - block + - The block number (within the directory file) that goes with hash=0. + * - 0x28 + - struct dx\_entry + - entries[0] + - As many 8-byte ``struct dx_entry`` as fits in the rest of the data block. + +.. _dirhash: + +The directory hash is one of the following values: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x0 + - Legacy. + * - 0x1 + - Half MD4. + * - 0x2 + - Tea. + * - 0x3 + - Legacy, unsigned. + * - 0x4 + - Half MD4, unsigned. + * - 0x5 + - Tea, unsigned. + +Interior nodes of an htree are recorded as ``struct dx_node``, which is +also the full length of a data block: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - fake.inode + - Zero, to make it look like this entry is not in use. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - fake.rec\_len + - The size of the block, in order to hide all of the dx\_node data. + * - 0x6 + - u8 + - name\_len + - Zero. There is no name for this “unused” directory entry. + * - 0x7 + - u8 + - file\_type + - Zero. There is no file type for this “unused” directory entry. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le16 + - limit + - Maximum number of dx\_entries that can follow this header, plus 1 for + the header itself. + * - 0xA + - \_\_le16 + - count + - Actual number of dx\_entries that follow this header, plus 1 for the + header itself. + * - 0xE + - \_\_le32 + - block + - The block number (within the directory file) that goes with the lowest + hash value of this block. This value is stored in the parent block. + * - 0x12 + - struct dx\_entry + - entries[0] + - As many 8-byte ``struct dx_entry`` as fits in the rest of the data block. + +The hash maps that exist in both ``struct dx_root`` and +``struct dx_node`` are recorded as ``struct dx_entry``, which is 8 bytes +long: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - hash + - Hash code. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - block + - Block number (within the directory file, not filesystem blocks) of the + next node in the htree. + +(If you think this is all quite clever and peculiar, so does the +author.) + +If metadata checksums are enabled, the last 8 bytes of the directory +block (precisely the length of one dx\_entry) are used to store a +``struct dx_tail``, which contains the checksum. The ``limit`` and +``count`` entries in the dx\_root/dx\_node structures are adjusted as +necessary to fit the dx\_tail into the block. If there is no space for +the dx\_tail, the user is notified to run e2fsck -D to rebuild the +directory index (which will ensure that there's space for the checksum. +The dx\_tail structure is 8 bytes long and looks like this: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - u32 + - dt\_reserved + - Zero. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - dt\_checksum + - Checksum of the htree directory block. + +The checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the htree index header +(dx\_root or dx\_node), all of the htree indices (dx\_entry) that are in +use, and the tail block (dx\_tail). diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/dynamic.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/dynamic.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bb0c84333341 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/dynamic.rst @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Dynamic Structures +================== + +Dynamic metadata are created on the fly when files and blocks are +allocated to files. + +.. include:: inodes.rst +.. include:: ifork.rst +.. include:: directory.rst +.. include:: attributes.rst diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/eainode.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/eainode.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ecc0d01a0a72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/eainode.rst @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Large Extended Attribute Values +------------------------------- + +To enable ext4 to store extended attribute values that do not fit in the +inode or in the single extended attribute block attached to an inode, +the EA\_INODE feature allows us to store the value in the data blocks of +a regular file inode. This “EA inode” is linked only from the extended +attribute name index and must not appear in a directory entry. The +inode's i\_atime field is used to store a checksum of the xattr value; +and i\_ctime/i\_version store a 64-bit reference count, which enables +sharing of large xattr values between multiple owning inodes. For +backward compatibility with older versions of this feature, the +i\_mtime/i\_generation *may* store a back-reference to the inode number +and i\_generation of the **one** owning inode (in cases where the EA +inode is not referenced by multiple inodes) to verify that the EA inode +is the correct one being accessed. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/globals.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/globals.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..368bf7662b96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/globals.rst @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Global Structures +================= + +The filesystem is sharded into a number of block groups, each of which +have static metadata at fixed locations. + +.. include:: super.rst +.. include:: group_descr.rst +.. include:: bitmaps.rst +.. include:: mmp.rst +.. include:: journal.rst diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/group_descr.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/group_descr.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..759827e5d2cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/group_descr.rst @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Block Group Descriptors +----------------------- + +Each block group on the filesystem has one of these descriptors +associated with it. As noted in the Layout section above, the group +descriptors (if present) are the second item in the block group. The +standard configuration is for each block group to contain a full copy of +the block group descriptor table unless the sparse\_super feature flag +is set. + +Notice how the group descriptor records the location of both bitmaps and +the inode table (i.e. they can float). This means that within a block +group, the only data structures with fixed locations are the superblock +and the group descriptor table. The flex\_bg mechanism uses this +property to group several block groups into a flex group and lay out all +of the groups' bitmaps and inode tables into one long run in the first +group of the flex group. + +If the meta\_bg feature flag is set, then several block groups are +grouped together into a meta group. Note that in the meta\_bg case, +however, the first and last two block groups within the larger meta +group contain only group descriptors for the groups inside the meta +group. + +flex\_bg and meta\_bg do not appear to be mutually exclusive features. + +In ext2, ext3, and ext4 (when the 64bit feature is not enabled), the +block group descriptor was only 32 bytes long and therefore ends at +bg\_checksum. On an ext4 filesystem with the 64bit feature enabled, the +block group descriptor expands to at least the 64 bytes described below; +the size is stored in the superblock. + +If gdt\_csum is set and metadata\_csum is not set, the block group +checksum is the crc16 of the FS UUID, the group number, and the group +descriptor structure. If metadata\_csum is set, then the block group +checksum is the lower 16 bits of the checksum of the FS UUID, the group +number, and the group descriptor structure. Both block and inode bitmap +checksums are calculated against the FS UUID, the group number, and the +entire bitmap. + +The block group descriptor is laid out in ``struct ext4_group_desc``. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - bg\_block\_bitmap\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of location of block bitmap. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - bg\_inode\_bitmap\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of location of inode bitmap. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le32 + - bg\_inode\_table\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of location of inode table. + * - 0xC + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_free\_blocks\_count\_lo + - Lower 16-bits of free block count. + * - 0xE + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_free\_inodes\_count\_lo + - Lower 16-bits of free inode count. + * - 0x10 + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_used\_dirs\_count\_lo + - Lower 16-bits of directory count. + * - 0x12 + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_flags + - Block group flags. See the bgflags_ table below. + * - 0x14 + - \_\_le32 + - bg\_exclude\_bitmap\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of location of snapshot exclusion bitmap. + * - 0x18 + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_block\_bitmap\_csum\_lo + - Lower 16-bits of the block bitmap checksum. + * - 0x1A + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_inode\_bitmap\_csum\_lo + - Lower 16-bits of the inode bitmap checksum. + * - 0x1C + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_itable\_unused\_lo + - Lower 16-bits of unused inode count. If set, we needn't scan past the + ``(sb.s_inodes_per_group - gdt.bg_itable_unused)``\ th entry in the + inode table for this group. + * - 0x1E + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_checksum + - Group descriptor checksum; crc16(sb\_uuid+group+desc) if the + RO\_COMPAT\_GDT\_CSUM feature is set, or crc32c(sb\_uuid+group\_desc) & + 0xFFFF if the RO\_COMPAT\_METADATA\_CSUM feature is set. + * - + - + - + - These fields only exist if the 64bit feature is enabled and s_desc_size + > 32. + * - 0x20 + - \_\_le32 + - bg\_block\_bitmap\_hi + - Upper 32-bits of location of block bitmap. + * - 0x24 + - \_\_le32 + - bg\_inode\_bitmap\_hi + - Upper 32-bits of location of inodes bitmap. + * - 0x28 + - \_\_le32 + - bg\_inode\_table\_hi + - Upper 32-bits of location of inodes table. + * - 0x2C + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_free\_blocks\_count\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of free block count. + * - 0x2E + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_free\_inodes\_count\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of free inode count. + * - 0x30 + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_used\_dirs\_count\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of directory count. + * - 0x32 + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_itable\_unused\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of unused inode count. + * - 0x34 + - \_\_le32 + - bg\_exclude\_bitmap\_hi + - Upper 32-bits of location of snapshot exclusion bitmap. + * - 0x38 + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_block\_bitmap\_csum\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of the block bitmap checksum. + * - 0x3A + - \_\_le16 + - bg\_inode\_bitmap\_csum\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of the inode bitmap checksum. + * - 0x3C + - \_\_u32 + - bg\_reserved + - Padding to 64 bytes. + +.. _bgflags: + +Block group flags can be any combination of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - inode table and bitmap are not initialized (EXT4\_BG\_INODE\_UNINIT). + * - 0x2 + - block bitmap is not initialized (EXT4\_BG\_BLOCK\_UNINIT). + * - 0x4 + - inode table is zeroed (EXT4\_BG\_INODE\_ZEROED). diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/ifork.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/ifork.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5dbe3b2b121a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/ifork.rst @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +The Contents of inode.i\_block +------------------------------ + +Depending on the type of file an inode describes, the 60 bytes of +storage in ``inode.i_block`` can be used in different ways. In general, +regular files and directories will use it for file block indexing +information, and special files will use it for special purposes. + +Symbolic Links +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The target of a symbolic link will be stored in this field if the target +string is less than 60 bytes long. Otherwise, either extents or block +maps will be used to allocate data blocks to store the link target. + +Direct/Indirect Block Addressing +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +In ext2/3, file block numbers were mapped to logical block numbers by +means of an (up to) three level 1-1 block map. To find the logical block +that stores a particular file block, the code would navigate through +this increasingly complicated structure. Notice that there is neither a +magic number nor a checksum to provide any level of confidence that the +block isn't full of garbage. + +.. ifconfig:: builder != 'latex' + + .. include:: blockmap.rst + +.. ifconfig:: builder == 'latex' + + [Table omitted because LaTeX doesn't support nested tables.] + +Note that with this block mapping scheme, it is necessary to fill out a +lot of mapping data even for a large contiguous file! This inefficiency +led to the creation of the extent mapping scheme, discussed below. + +Notice also that a file using this mapping scheme cannot be placed +higher than 2^32 blocks. + +Extent Tree +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +In ext4, the file to logical block map has been replaced with an extent +tree. Under the old scheme, allocating a contiguous run of 1,000 blocks +requires an indirect block to map all 1,000 entries; with extents, the +mapping is reduced to a single ``struct ext4_extent`` with +``ee_len = 1000``. If flex\_bg is enabled, it is possible to allocate +very large files with a single extent, at a considerable reduction in +metadata block use, and some improvement in disk efficiency. The inode +must have the extents flag (0x80000) flag set for this feature to be in +use. + +Extents are arranged as a tree. Each node of the tree begins with a +``struct ext4_extent_header``. If the node is an interior node +(``eh.eh_depth`` > 0), the header is followed by ``eh.eh_entries`` +instances of ``struct ext4_extent_idx``; each of these index entries +points to a block containing more nodes in the extent tree. If the node +is a leaf node (``eh.eh_depth == 0``), then the header is followed by +``eh.eh_entries`` instances of ``struct ext4_extent``; these instances +point to the file's data blocks. The root node of the extent tree is +stored in ``inode.i_block``, which allows for the first four extents to +be recorded without the use of extra metadata blocks. + +The extent tree header is recorded in ``struct ext4_extent_header``, +which is 12 bytes long: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le16 + - eh\_magic + - Magic number, 0xF30A. + * - 0x2 + - \_\_le16 + - eh\_entries + - Number of valid entries following the header. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - eh\_max + - Maximum number of entries that could follow the header. + * - 0x6 + - \_\_le16 + - eh\_depth + - Depth of this extent node in the extent tree. 0 = this extent node + points to data blocks; otherwise, this extent node points to other + extent nodes. The extent tree can be at most 5 levels deep: a logical + block number can be at most ``2^32``, and the smallest ``n`` that + satisfies ``4*(((blocksize - 12)/12)^n) >= 2^32`` is 5. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le32 + - eh\_generation + - Generation of the tree. (Used by Lustre, but not standard ext4). + +Internal nodes of the extent tree, also known as index nodes, are +recorded as ``struct ext4_extent_idx``, and are 12 bytes long: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - ei\_block + - This index node covers file blocks from 'block' onward. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - ei\_leaf\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of the block number of the extent node that is the next + level lower in the tree. The tree node pointed to can be either another + internal node or a leaf node, described below. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le16 + - ei\_leaf\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of the previous field. + * - 0xA + - \_\_u16 + - ei\_unused + - + +Leaf nodes of the extent tree are recorded as ``struct ext4_extent``, +and are also 12 bytes long: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - ee\_block + - First file block number that this extent covers. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - ee\_len + - Number of blocks covered by extent. If the value of this field is <= + 32768, the extent is initialized. If the value of the field is > 32768, + the extent is uninitialized and the actual extent length is ``ee_len`` - + 32768. Therefore, the maximum length of a initialized extent is 32768 + blocks, and the maximum length of an uninitialized extent is 32767. + * - 0x6 + - \_\_le16 + - ee\_start\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of the block number to which this extent points. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le32 + - ee\_start\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of the block number to which this extent points. + +Prior to the introduction of metadata checksums, the extent header + +extent entries always left at least 4 bytes of unallocated space at the +end of each extent tree data block (because (2^x % 12) >= 4). Therefore, +the 32-bit checksum is inserted into this space. The 4 extents in the +inode do not need checksumming, since the inode is already checksummed. +The checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the inode number, the +inode generation, and the entire extent block leading up to (but not +including) the checksum itself. + +``struct ext4_extent_tail`` is 4 bytes long: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - eb\_checksum + - Checksum of the extent block, crc32c(uuid+inum+igeneration+extentblock) + +Inline Data +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +If the inline data feature is enabled for the filesystem and the flag is +set for the inode, it is possible that the first 60 bytes of the file +data are stored here. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f7d082c3a435 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================== +Data Structures and Algorithms +============================== +.. include:: about.rst +.. include:: overview.rst +.. include:: globals.rst +.. include:: dynamic.rst diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/inlinedata.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/inlinedata.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d1075178ce0b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/inlinedata.rst @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Inline Data +----------- + +The inline data feature was designed to handle the case that a file's +data is so tiny that it readily fits inside the inode, which +(theoretically) reduces disk block consumption and reduces seeks. If the +file is smaller than 60 bytes, then the data are stored inline in +``inode.i_block``. If the rest of the file would fit inside the extended +attribute space, then it might be found as an extended attribute +“system.data” within the inode body (“ibody EA”). This of course +constrains the amount of extended attributes one can attach to an inode. +If the data size increases beyond i\_block + ibody EA, a regular block +is allocated and the contents moved to that block. + +Pending a change to compact the extended attribute key used to store +inline data, one ought to be able to store 160 bytes of data in a +256-byte inode (as of June 2015, when i\_extra\_isize is 28). Prior to +that, the limit was 156 bytes due to inefficient use of inode space. + +The inline data feature requires the presence of an extended attribute +for “system.data”, even if the attribute value is zero length. + +Inline Directories +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The first four bytes of i\_block are the inode number of the parent +directory. Following that is a 56-byte space for an array of directory +entries; see ``struct ext4_dir_entry``. If there is a “system.data” +attribute in the inode body, the EA value is an array of +``struct ext4_dir_entry`` as well. Note that for inline directories, the +i\_block and EA space are treated as separate dirent blocks; directory +entries cannot span the two. + +Inline directory entries are not checksummed, as the inode checksum +should protect all inline data contents. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/inodes.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/inodes.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..655ce898f3f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/inodes.rst @@ -0,0 +1,575 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Index Nodes +----------- + +In a regular UNIX filesystem, the inode stores all the metadata +pertaining to the file (time stamps, block maps, extended attributes, +etc), not the directory entry. To find the information associated with a +file, one must traverse the directory files to find the directory entry +associated with a file, then load the inode to find the metadata for +that file. ext4 appears to cheat (for performance reasons) a little bit +by storing a copy of the file type (normally stored in the inode) in the +directory entry. (Compare all this to FAT, which stores all the file +information directly in the directory entry, but does not support hard +links and is in general more seek-happy than ext4 due to its simpler +block allocator and extensive use of linked lists.) + +The inode table is a linear array of ``struct ext4_inode``. The table is +sized to have enough blocks to store at least +``sb.s_inode_size * sb.s_inodes_per_group`` bytes. The number of the +block group containing an inode can be calculated as +``(inode_number - 1) / sb.s_inodes_per_group``, and the offset into the +group's table is ``(inode_number - 1) % sb.s_inodes_per_group``. There +is no inode 0. + +The inode checksum is calculated against the FS UUID, the inode number, +and the inode structure itself. + +The inode table entry is laid out in ``struct ext4_inode``. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le16 + - i\_mode + - File mode. See the table i_mode_ below. + * - 0x2 + - \_\_le16 + - i\_uid + - Lower 16-bits of Owner UID. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_size\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of size in bytes. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_atime + - Last access time, in seconds since the epoch. However, if the EA\_INODE + inode flag is set, this inode stores an extended attribute value and + this field contains the checksum of the value. + * - 0xC + - \_\_le32 + - i\_ctime + - Last inode change time, in seconds since the epoch. However, if the + EA\_INODE inode flag is set, this inode stores an extended attribute + value and this field contains the lower 32 bits of the attribute value's + reference count. + * - 0x10 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_mtime + - Last data modification time, in seconds since the epoch. However, if the + EA\_INODE inode flag is set, this inode stores an extended attribute + value and this field contains the number of the inode that owns the + extended attribute. + * - 0x14 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_dtime + - Deletion Time, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x18 + - \_\_le16 + - i\_gid + - Lower 16-bits of GID. + * - 0x1A + - \_\_le16 + - i\_links\_count + - Hard link count. Normally, ext4 does not permit an inode to have more + than 65,000 hard links. This applies to files as well as directories, + which means that there cannot be more than 64,998 subdirectories in a + directory (each subdirectory's '..' entry counts as a hard link, as does + the '.' entry in the directory itself). With the DIR\_NLINK feature + enabled, ext4 supports more than 64,998 subdirectories by setting this + field to 1 to indicate that the number of hard links is not known. + * - 0x1C + - \_\_le32 + - i\_blocks\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of “block” count. If the huge\_file feature flag is not + set on the filesystem, the file consumes ``i_blocks_lo`` 512-byte blocks + on disk. If huge\_file is set and EXT4\_HUGE\_FILE\_FL is NOT set in + ``inode.i_flags``, then the file consumes ``i_blocks_lo + (i_blocks_hi + << 32)`` 512-byte blocks on disk. If huge\_file is set and + EXT4\_HUGE\_FILE\_FL IS set in ``inode.i_flags``, then this file + consumes (``i_blocks_lo + i_blocks_hi`` << 32) filesystem blocks on + disk. + * - 0x20 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_flags + - Inode flags. See the table i_flags_ below. + * - 0x24 + - 4 bytes + - i\_osd1 + - See the table i_osd1_ for more details. + * - 0x28 + - 60 bytes + - i\_block[EXT4\_N\_BLOCKS=15] + - Block map or extent tree. See the section “The Contents of inode.i\_block”. + * - 0x64 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_generation + - File version (for NFS). + * - 0x68 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_file\_acl\_lo + - Lower 32-bits of extended attribute block. ACLs are of course one of + many possible extended attributes; I think the name of this field is a + result of the first use of extended attributes being for ACLs. + * - 0x6C + - \_\_le32 + - i\_size\_high / i\_dir\_acl + - Upper 32-bits of file/directory size. In ext2/3 this field was named + i\_dir\_acl, though it was usually set to zero and never used. + * - 0x70 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_obso\_faddr + - (Obsolete) fragment address. + * - 0x74 + - 12 bytes + - i\_osd2 + - See the table i_osd2_ for more details. + * - 0x80 + - \_\_le16 + - i\_extra\_isize + - Size of this inode - 128. Alternately, the size of the extended inode + fields beyond the original ext2 inode, including this field. + * - 0x82 + - \_\_le16 + - i\_checksum\_hi + - Upper 16-bits of the inode checksum. + * - 0x84 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_ctime\_extra + - Extra change time bits. This provides sub-second precision. See Inode + Timestamps section. + * - 0x88 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_mtime\_extra + - Extra modification time bits. This provides sub-second precision. + * - 0x8C + - \_\_le32 + - i\_atime\_extra + - Extra access time bits. This provides sub-second precision. + * - 0x90 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_crtime + - File creation time, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x94 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_crtime\_extra + - Extra file creation time bits. This provides sub-second precision. + * - 0x98 + - \_\_le32 + - i\_version\_hi + - Upper 32-bits for version number. + * - 0x9C + - \_\_le32 + - i\_projid + - Project ID. + +.. _i_mode: + +The ``i_mode`` value is a combination of the following flags: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - S\_IXOTH (Others may execute) + * - 0x2 + - S\_IWOTH (Others may write) + * - 0x4 + - S\_IROTH (Others may read) + * - 0x8 + - S\_IXGRP (Group members may execute) + * - 0x10 + - S\_IWGRP (Group members may write) + * - 0x20 + - S\_IRGRP (Group members may read) + * - 0x40 + - S\_IXUSR (Owner may execute) + * - 0x80 + - S\_IWUSR (Owner may write) + * - 0x100 + - S\_IRUSR (Owner may read) + * - 0x200 + - S\_ISVTX (Sticky bit) + * - 0x400 + - S\_ISGID (Set GID) + * - 0x800 + - S\_ISUID (Set UID) + * - + - These are mutually-exclusive file types: + * - 0x1000 + - S\_IFIFO (FIFO) + * - 0x2000 + - S\_IFCHR (Character device) + * - 0x4000 + - S\_IFDIR (Directory) + * - 0x6000 + - S\_IFBLK (Block device) + * - 0x8000 + - S\_IFREG (Regular file) + * - 0xA000 + - S\_IFLNK (Symbolic link) + * - 0xC000 + - S\_IFSOCK (Socket) + +.. _i_flags: + +The ``i_flags`` field is a combination of these values: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - This file requires secure deletion (EXT4\_SECRM\_FL). (not implemented) + * - 0x2 + - This file should be preserved, should undeletion be desired + (EXT4\_UNRM\_FL). (not implemented) + * - 0x4 + - File is compressed (EXT4\_COMPR\_FL). (not really implemented) + * - 0x8 + - All writes to the file must be synchronous (EXT4\_SYNC\_FL). + * - 0x10 + - File is immutable (EXT4\_IMMUTABLE\_FL). + * - 0x20 + - File can only be appended (EXT4\_APPEND\_FL). + * - 0x40 + - The dump(1) utility should not dump this file (EXT4\_NODUMP\_FL). + * - 0x80 + - Do not update access time (EXT4\_NOATIME\_FL). + * - 0x100 + - Dirty compressed file (EXT4\_DIRTY\_FL). (not used) + * - 0x200 + - File has one or more compressed clusters (EXT4\_COMPRBLK\_FL). (not used) + * - 0x400 + - Do not compress file (EXT4\_NOCOMPR\_FL). (not used) + * - 0x800 + - Encrypted inode (EXT4\_ENCRYPT\_FL). This bit value previously was + EXT4\_ECOMPR\_FL (compression error), which was never used. + * - 0x1000 + - Directory has hashed indexes (EXT4\_INDEX\_FL). + * - 0x2000 + - AFS magic directory (EXT4\_IMAGIC\_FL). + * - 0x4000 + - File data must always be written through the journal + (EXT4\_JOURNAL\_DATA\_FL). + * - 0x8000 + - File tail should not be merged (EXT4\_NOTAIL\_FL). (not used by ext4) + * - 0x10000 + - All directory entry data should be written synchronously (see + ``dirsync``) (EXT4\_DIRSYNC\_FL). + * - 0x20000 + - Top of directory hierarchy (EXT4\_TOPDIR\_FL). + * - 0x40000 + - This is a huge file (EXT4\_HUGE\_FILE\_FL). + * - 0x80000 + - Inode uses extents (EXT4\_EXTENTS\_FL). + * - 0x200000 + - Inode stores a large extended attribute value in its data blocks + (EXT4\_EA\_INODE\_FL). + * - 0x400000 + - This file has blocks allocated past EOF (EXT4\_EOFBLOCKS\_FL). + (deprecated) + * - 0x01000000 + - Inode is a snapshot (``EXT4_SNAPFILE_FL``). (not in mainline) + * - 0x04000000 + - Snapshot is being deleted (``EXT4_SNAPFILE_DELETED_FL``). (not in + mainline) + * - 0x08000000 + - Snapshot shrink has completed (``EXT4_SNAPFILE_SHRUNK_FL``). (not in + mainline) + * - 0x10000000 + - Inode has inline data (EXT4\_INLINE\_DATA\_FL). + * - 0x20000000 + - Create children with the same project ID (EXT4\_PROJINHERIT\_FL). + * - 0x80000000 + - Reserved for ext4 library (EXT4\_RESERVED\_FL). + * - + - Aggregate flags: + * - 0x4BDFFF + - User-visible flags. + * - 0x4B80FF + - User-modifiable flags. Note that while EXT4\_JOURNAL\_DATA\_FL and + EXT4\_EXTENTS\_FL can be set with setattr, they are not in the kernel's + EXT4\_FL\_USER\_MODIFIABLE mask, since it needs to handle the setting of + these flags in a special manner and they are masked out of the set of + flags that are saved directly to i\_flags. + +.. _i_osd1: + +The ``osd1`` field has multiple meanings depending on the creator: + +Linux: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - l\_i\_version + - Inode version. However, if the EA\_INODE inode flag is set, this inode + stores an extended attribute value and this field contains the upper 32 + bits of the attribute value's reference count. + +Hurd: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - h\_i\_translator + - ?? + +Masix: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - m\_i\_reserved + - ?? + +.. _i_osd2: + +The ``osd2`` field has multiple meanings depending on the filesystem creator: + +Linux: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le16 + - l\_i\_blocks\_high + - Upper 16-bits of the block count. Please see the note attached to + i\_blocks\_lo. + * - 0x2 + - \_\_le16 + - l\_i\_file\_acl\_high + - Upper 16-bits of the extended attribute block (historically, the file + ACL location). See the Extended Attributes section below. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - l\_i\_uid\_high + - Upper 16-bits of the Owner UID. + * - 0x6 + - \_\_le16 + - l\_i\_gid\_high + - Upper 16-bits of the GID. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le16 + - l\_i\_checksum\_lo + - Lower 16-bits of the inode checksum. + * - 0xA + - \_\_le16 + - l\_i\_reserved + - Unused. + +Hurd: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le16 + - h\_i\_reserved1 + - ?? + * - 0x2 + - \_\_u16 + - h\_i\_mode\_high + - Upper 16-bits of the file mode. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le16 + - h\_i\_uid\_high + - Upper 16-bits of the Owner UID. + * - 0x6 + - \_\_le16 + - h\_i\_gid\_high + - Upper 16-bits of the GID. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_u32 + - h\_i\_author + - Author code? + +Masix: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le16 + - h\_i\_reserved1 + - ?? + * - 0x2 + - \_\_u16 + - m\_i\_file\_acl\_high + - Upper 16-bits of the extended attribute block (historically, the file + ACL location). + * - 0x4 + - \_\_u32 + - m\_i\_reserved2[2] + - ?? + +Inode Size +~~~~~~~~~~ + +In ext2 and ext3, the inode structure size was fixed at 128 bytes +(``EXT2_GOOD_OLD_INODE_SIZE``) and each inode had a disk record size of +128 bytes. Starting with ext4, it is possible to allocate a larger +on-disk inode at format time for all inodes in the filesystem to provide +space beyond the end of the original ext2 inode. The on-disk inode +record size is recorded in the superblock as ``s_inode_size``. The +number of bytes actually used by struct ext4\_inode beyond the original +128-byte ext2 inode is recorded in the ``i_extra_isize`` field for each +inode, which allows struct ext4\_inode to grow for a new kernel without +having to upgrade all of the on-disk inodes. Access to fields beyond +EXT2\_GOOD\_OLD\_INODE\_SIZE should be verified to be within +``i_extra_isize``. By default, ext4 inode records are 256 bytes, and (as +of October 2013) the inode structure is 156 bytes +(``i_extra_isize = 28``). The extra space between the end of the inode +structure and the end of the inode record can be used to store extended +attributes. Each inode record can be as large as the filesystem block +size, though this is not terribly efficient. + +Finding an Inode +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Each block group contains ``sb->s_inodes_per_group`` inodes. Because +inode 0 is defined not to exist, this formula can be used to find the +block group that an inode lives in: +``bg = (inode_num - 1) / sb->s_inodes_per_group``. The particular inode +can be found within the block group's inode table at +``index = (inode_num - 1) % sb->s_inodes_per_group``. To get the byte +address within the inode table, use +``offset = index * sb->s_inode_size``. + +Inode Timestamps +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Four timestamps are recorded in the lower 128 bytes of the inode +structure -- inode change time (ctime), access time (atime), data +modification time (mtime), and deletion time (dtime). The four fields +are 32-bit signed integers that represent seconds since the Unix epoch +(1970-01-01 00:00:00 GMT), which means that the fields will overflow in +January 2038. For inodes that are not linked from any directory but are +still open (orphan inodes), the dtime field is overloaded for use with +the orphan list. The superblock field ``s_last_orphan`` points to the +first inode in the orphan list; dtime is then the number of the next +orphaned inode, or zero if there are no more orphans. + +If the inode structure size ``sb->s_inode_size`` is larger than 128 +bytes and the ``i_inode_extra`` field is large enough to encompass the +respective ``i_[cma]time_extra`` field, the ctime, atime, and mtime +inode fields are widened to 64 bits. Within this “extra” 32-bit field, +the lower two bits are used to extend the 32-bit seconds field to be 34 +bit wide; the upper 30 bits are used to provide nanosecond timestamp +accuracy. Therefore, timestamps should not overflow until May 2446. +dtime was not widened. There is also a fifth timestamp to record inode +creation time (crtime); this field is 64-bits wide and decoded in the +same manner as 64-bit [cma]time. Neither crtime nor dtime are accessible +through the regular stat() interface, though debugfs will report them. + +We use the 32-bit signed time value plus (2^32 \* (extra epoch bits)). +In other words: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 20 20 20 20 20 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Extra epoch bits + - MSB of 32-bit time + - Adjustment for signed 32-bit to 64-bit tv\_sec + - Decoded 64-bit tv\_sec + - valid time range + * - 0 0 + - 1 + - 0 + - ``-0x80000000 - -0x00000001`` + - 1901-12-13 to 1969-12-31 + * - 0 0 + - 0 + - 0 + - ``0x000000000 - 0x07fffffff`` + - 1970-01-01 to 2038-01-19 + * - 0 1 + - 1 + - 0x100000000 + - ``0x080000000 - 0x0ffffffff`` + - 2038-01-19 to 2106-02-07 + * - 0 1 + - 0 + - 0x100000000 + - ``0x100000000 - 0x17fffffff`` + - 2106-02-07 to 2174-02-25 + * - 1 0 + - 1 + - 0x200000000 + - ``0x180000000 - 0x1ffffffff`` + - 2174-02-25 to 2242-03-16 + * - 1 0 + - 0 + - 0x200000000 + - ``0x200000000 - 0x27fffffff`` + - 2242-03-16 to 2310-04-04 + * - 1 1 + - 1 + - 0x300000000 + - ``0x280000000 - 0x2ffffffff`` + - 2310-04-04 to 2378-04-22 + * - 1 1 + - 0 + - 0x300000000 + - ``0x300000000 - 0x37fffffff`` + - 2378-04-22 to 2446-05-10 + +This is a somewhat odd encoding since there are effectively seven times +as many positive values as negative values. There have also been +long-standing bugs decoding and encoding dates beyond 2038, which don't +seem to be fixed as of kernel 3.12 and e2fsprogs 1.42.8. 64-bit kernels +incorrectly use the extra epoch bits 1,1 for dates between 1901 and +1970. At some point the kernel will be fixed and e2fsck will fix this +situation, assuming that it is run before 2310. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/journal.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/journal.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e7031af86876 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/journal.rst @@ -0,0 +1,611 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Journal (jbd2) +-------------- + +Introduced in ext3, the ext4 filesystem employs a journal to protect the +filesystem against corruption in the case of a system crash. A small +continuous region of disk (default 128MiB) is reserved inside the +filesystem as a place to land “important” data writes on-disk as quickly +as possible. Once the important data transaction is fully written to the +disk and flushed from the disk write cache, a record of the data being +committed is also written to the journal. At some later point in time, +the journal code writes the transactions to their final locations on +disk (this could involve a lot of seeking or a lot of small +read-write-erases) before erasing the commit record. Should the system +crash during the second slow write, the journal can be replayed all the +way to the latest commit record, guaranteeing the atomicity of whatever +gets written through the journal to the disk. The effect of this is to +guarantee that the filesystem does not become stuck midway through a +metadata update. + +For performance reasons, ext4 by default only writes filesystem metadata +through the journal. This means that file data blocks are /not/ +guaranteed to be in any consistent state after a crash. If this default +guarantee level (``data=ordered``) is not satisfactory, there is a mount +option to control journal behavior. If ``data=journal``, all data and +metadata are written to disk through the journal. This is slower but +safest. If ``data=writeback``, dirty data blocks are not flushed to the +disk before the metadata are written to disk through the journal. + +The journal inode is typically inode 8. The first 68 bytes of the +journal inode are replicated in the ext4 superblock. The journal itself +is normal (but hidden) file within the filesystem. The file usually +consumes an entire block group, though mke2fs tries to put it in the +middle of the disk. + +All fields in jbd2 are written to disk in big-endian order. This is the +opposite of ext4. + +NOTE: Both ext4 and ocfs2 use jbd2. + +The maximum size of a journal embedded in an ext4 filesystem is 2^32 +blocks. jbd2 itself does not seem to care. + +Layout +~~~~~~ + +Generally speaking, the journal has this format: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 78 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Superblock + - descriptor\_block (data\_blocks or revocation\_block) [more data or + revocations] commmit\_block + - [more transactions...] + * - + - One transaction + - + +Notice that a transaction begins with either a descriptor and some data, +or a block revocation list. A finished transaction always ends with a +commit. If there is no commit record (or the checksums don't match), the +transaction will be discarded during replay. + +External Journal +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Optionally, an ext4 filesystem can be created with an external journal +device (as opposed to an internal journal, which uses a reserved inode). +In this case, on the filesystem device, ``s_journal_inum`` should be +zero and ``s_journal_uuid`` should be set. On the journal device there +will be an ext4 super block in the usual place, with a matching UUID. +The journal superblock will be in the next full block after the +superblock. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 1 76 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - 1024 bytes of padding + - ext4 Superblock + - Journal Superblock + - descriptor\_block (data\_blocks or revocation\_block) [more data or + revocations] commmit\_block + - [more transactions...] + * - + - + - + - One transaction + - + +Block Header +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Every block in the journal starts with a common 12-byte header +``struct journal_header_s``: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_be32 + - h\_magic + - jbd2 magic number, 0xC03B3998. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_be32 + - h\_blocktype + - Description of what this block contains. See the jbd2_blocktype_ table + below. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_be32 + - h\_sequence + - The transaction ID that goes with this block. + +.. _jbd2_blocktype: + +The journal block type can be any one of: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 1 + - Descriptor. This block precedes a series of data blocks that were + written through the journal during a transaction. + * - 2 + - Block commit record. This block signifies the completion of a + transaction. + * - 3 + - Journal superblock, v1. + * - 4 + - Journal superblock, v2. + * - 5 + - Block revocation records. This speeds up recovery by enabling the + journal to skip writing blocks that were subsequently rewritten. + +Super Block +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The super block for the journal is much simpler as compared to ext4's. +The key data kept within are size of the journal, and where to find the +start of the log of transactions. + +The journal superblock is recorded as ``struct journal_superblock_s``, +which is 1024 bytes long: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - + - + - + - Static information describing the journal. + * - 0x0 + - journal\_header\_t (12 bytes) + - s\_header + - Common header identifying this as a superblock. + * - 0xC + - \_\_be32 + - s\_blocksize + - Journal device block size. + * - 0x10 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_maxlen + - Total number of blocks in this journal. + * - 0x14 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_first + - First block of log information. + * - + - + - + - Dynamic information describing the current state of the log. + * - 0x18 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_sequence + - First commit ID expected in log. + * - 0x1C + - \_\_be32 + - s\_start + - Block number of the start of log. Contrary to the comments, this field + being zero does not imply that the journal is clean! + * - 0x20 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_errno + - Error value, as set by jbd2\_journal\_abort(). + * - + - + - + - The remaining fields are only valid in a v2 superblock. + * - 0x24 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_feature\_compat; + - Compatible feature set. See the table jbd2_compat_ below. + * - 0x28 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_feature\_incompat + - Incompatible feature set. See the table jbd2_incompat_ below. + * - 0x2C + - \_\_be32 + - s\_feature\_ro\_compat + - Read-only compatible feature set. There aren't any of these currently. + * - 0x30 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_uuid[16] + - 128-bit uuid for journal. This is compared against the copy in the ext4 + super block at mount time. + * - 0x40 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_nr\_users + - Number of file systems sharing this journal. + * - 0x44 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_dynsuper + - Location of dynamic super block copy. (Not used?) + * - 0x48 + - \_\_be32 + - s\_max\_transaction + - Limit of journal blocks per transaction. (Not used?) + * - 0x4C + - \_\_be32 + - s\_max\_trans\_data + - Limit of data blocks per transaction. (Not used?) + * - 0x50 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_checksum\_type + - Checksum algorithm used for the journal. See jbd2_checksum_type_ for + more info. + * - 0x51 + - \_\_u8[3] + - s\_padding2 + - + * - 0x54 + - \_\_u32 + - s\_padding[42] + - + * - 0xFC + - \_\_be32 + - s\_checksum + - Checksum of the entire superblock, with this field set to zero. + * - 0x100 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_users[16\*48] + - ids of all file systems sharing the log. e2fsprogs/Linux don't allow + shared external journals, but I imagine Lustre (or ocfs2?), which use + the jbd2 code, might. + +.. _jbd2_compat: + +The journal compat features are any combination of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - Journal maintains checksums on the data blocks. + (JBD2\_FEATURE\_COMPAT\_CHECKSUM) + +.. _jbd2_incompat: + +The journal incompat features are any combination of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - Journal has block revocation records. (JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_REVOKE) + * - 0x2 + - Journal can deal with 64-bit block numbers. + (JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_64BIT) + * - 0x4 + - Journal commits asynchronously. (JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_ASYNC\_COMMIT) + * - 0x8 + - This journal uses v2 of the checksum on-disk format. Each journal + metadata block gets its own checksum, and the block tags in the + descriptor table contain checksums for each of the data blocks in the + journal. (JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V2) + * - 0x10 + - This journal uses v3 of the checksum on-disk format. This is the same as + v2, but the journal block tag size is fixed regardless of the size of + block numbers. (JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V3) + +.. _jbd2_checksum_type: + +Journal checksum type codes are one of the following. crc32 or crc32c are the +most likely choices. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 1 + - CRC32 + * - 2 + - MD5 + * - 3 + - SHA1 + * - 4 + - CRC32C + +Descriptor Block +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The descriptor block contains an array of journal block tags that +describe the final locations of the data blocks that follow in the +journal. Descriptor blocks are open-coded instead of being completely +described by a data structure, but here is the block structure anyway. +Descriptor blocks consume at least 36 bytes, but use a full block: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Descriptor + * - 0x0 + - journal\_header\_t + - (open coded) + - Common block header. + * - 0xC + - struct journal\_block\_tag\_s + - open coded array[] + - Enough tags either to fill up the block or to describe all the data + blocks that follow this descriptor block. + +Journal block tags have any of the following formats, depending on which +journal feature and block tag flags are set. + +If JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V3 is set, the journal block tag is +defined as ``struct journal_block_tag3_s``, which looks like the +following. The size is 16 or 32 bytes. + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Descriptor + * - 0x0 + - \_\_be32 + - t\_blocknr + - Lower 32-bits of the location of where the corresponding data block + should end up on disk. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_be32 + - t\_flags + - Flags that go with the descriptor. See the table jbd2_tag_flags_ for + more info. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_be32 + - t\_blocknr\_high + - Upper 32-bits of the location of where the corresponding data block + should end up on disk. This is zero if JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_64BIT is + not enabled. + * - 0xC + - \_\_be32 + - t\_checksum + - Checksum of the journal UUID, the sequence number, and the data block. + * - + - + - + - This field appears to be open coded. It always comes at the end of the + tag, after t_checksum. This field is not present if the "same UUID" flag + is set. + * - 0x8 or 0xC + - char + - uuid[16] + - A UUID to go with this tag. This field appears to be copied from the + ``j_uuid`` field in ``struct journal_s``, but only tune2fs touches that + field. + +.. _jbd2_tag_flags: + +The journal tag flags are any combination of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - On-disk block is escaped. The first four bytes of the data block just + happened to match the jbd2 magic number. + * - 0x2 + - This block has the same UUID as previous, therefore the UUID field is + omitted. + * - 0x4 + - The data block was deleted by the transaction. (Not used?) + * - 0x8 + - This is the last tag in this descriptor block. + +If JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V3 is NOT set, the journal block tag +is defined as ``struct journal_block_tag_s``, which looks like the +following. The size is 8, 12, 24, or 28 bytes: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Descriptor + * - 0x0 + - \_\_be32 + - t\_blocknr + - Lower 32-bits of the location of where the corresponding data block + should end up on disk. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_be16 + - t\_checksum + - Checksum of the journal UUID, the sequence number, and the data block. + Note that only the lower 16 bits are stored. + * - 0x6 + - \_\_be16 + - t\_flags + - Flags that go with the descriptor. See the table jbd2_tag_flags_ for + more info. + * - + - + - + - This next field is only present if the super block indicates support for + 64-bit block numbers. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_be32 + - t\_blocknr\_high + - Upper 32-bits of the location of where the corresponding data block + should end up on disk. + * - + - + - + - This field appears to be open coded. It always comes at the end of the + tag, after t_flags or t_blocknr_high. This field is not present if the + "same UUID" flag is set. + * - 0x8 or 0xC + - char + - uuid[16] + - A UUID to go with this tag. This field appears to be copied from the + ``j_uuid`` field in ``struct journal_s``, but only tune2fs touches that + field. + +If JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V2 or +JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V3 are set, the end of the block is a +``struct jbd2_journal_block_tail``, which looks like this: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Descriptor + * - 0x0 + - \_\_be32 + - t\_checksum + - Checksum of the journal UUID + the descriptor block, with this field set + to zero. + +Data Block +~~~~~~~~~~ + +In general, the data blocks being written to disk through the journal +are written verbatim into the journal file after the descriptor block. +However, if the first four bytes of the block match the jbd2 magic +number then those four bytes are replaced with zeroes and the “escaped” +flag is set in the descriptor block tag. + +Revocation Block +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +A revocation block is used to prevent replay of a block in an earlier +transaction. This is used to mark blocks that were journalled at one +time but are no longer journalled. Typically this happens if a metadata +block is freed and re-allocated as a file data block; in this case, a +journal replay after the file block was written to disk will cause +corruption. + +**NOTE**: This mechanism is NOT used to express “this journal block is +superseded by this other journal block”, as the author (djwong) +mistakenly thought. Any block being added to a transaction will cause +the removal of all existing revocation records for that block. + +Revocation blocks are described in +``struct jbd2_journal_revoke_header_s``, are at least 16 bytes in +length, but use a full block: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - journal\_header\_t + - r\_header + - Common block header. + * - 0xC + - \_\_be32 + - r\_count + - Number of bytes used in this block. + * - 0x10 + - \_\_be32 or \_\_be64 + - blocks[0] + - Blocks to revoke. + +After r\_count is a linear array of block numbers that are effectively +revoked by this transaction. The size of each block number is 8 bytes if +the superblock advertises 64-bit block number support, or 4 bytes +otherwise. + +If JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V2 or +JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V3 are set, the end of the revocation +block is a ``struct jbd2_journal_revoke_tail``, which has this format: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_be32 + - r\_checksum + - Checksum of the journal UUID + revocation block + +Commit Block +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The commit block is a sentry that indicates that a transaction has been +completely written to the journal. Once this commit block reaches the +journal, the data stored with this transaction can be written to their +final locations on disk. + +The commit block is described by ``struct commit_header``, which is 32 +bytes long (but uses a full block): + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Descriptor + * - 0x0 + - journal\_header\_s + - (open coded) + - Common block header. + * - 0xC + - unsigned char + - h\_chksum\_type + - The type of checksum to use to verify the integrity of the data blocks + in the transaction. See jbd2_checksum_type_ for more info. + * - 0xD + - unsigned char + - h\_chksum\_size + - The number of bytes used by the checksum. Most likely 4. + * - 0xE + - unsigned char + - h\_padding[2] + - + * - 0x10 + - \_\_be32 + - h\_chksum[JBD2\_CHECKSUM\_BYTES] + - 32 bytes of space to store checksums. If + JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V2 or JBD2\_FEATURE\_INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_V3 + are set, the first ``__be32`` is the checksum of the journal UUID and + the entire commit block, with this field zeroed. If + JBD2\_FEATURE\_COMPAT\_CHECKSUM is set, the first ``__be32`` is the + crc32 of all the blocks already written to the transaction. + * - 0x30 + - \_\_be64 + - h\_commit\_sec + - The time that the transaction was committed, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x38 + - \_\_be32 + - h\_commit\_nsec + - Nanoseconds component of the above timestamp. + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/mmp.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/mmp.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b7d7a3137f80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/mmp.rst @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Multiple Mount Protection +------------------------- + +Multiple mount protection (MMP) is a feature that protects the +filesystem against multiple hosts trying to use the filesystem +simultaneously. When a filesystem is opened (for mounting, or fsck, +etc.), the MMP code running on the node (call it node A) checks a +sequence number. If the sequence number is EXT4\_MMP\_SEQ\_CLEAN, the +open continues. If the sequence number is EXT4\_MMP\_SEQ\_FSCK, then +fsck is (hopefully) running, and open fails immediately. Otherwise, the +open code will wait for twice the specified MMP check interval and check +the sequence number again. If the sequence number has changed, then the +filesystem is active on another machine and the open fails. If the MMP +code passes all of those checks, a new MMP sequence number is generated +and written to the MMP block, and the mount proceeds. + +While the filesystem is live, the kernel sets up a timer to re-check the +MMP block at the specified MMP check interval. To perform the re-check, +the MMP sequence number is re-read; if it does not match the in-memory +MMP sequence number, then another node (node B) has mounted the +filesystem, and node A remounts the filesystem read-only. If the +sequence numbers match, the sequence number is incremented both in +memory and on disk, and the re-check is complete. + +The hostname and device filename are written into the MMP block whenever +an open operation succeeds. The MMP code does not use these values; they +are provided purely for informational purposes. + +The checksum is calculated against the FS UUID and the MMP structure. +The MMP structure (``struct mmp_struct``) is as follows: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Type + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - mmp\_magic + - Magic number for MMP, 0x004D4D50 (“MMP”). + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - mmp\_seq + - Sequence number, updated periodically. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le64 + - mmp\_time + - Time that the MMP block was last updated. + * - 0x10 + - char[64] + - mmp\_nodename + - Hostname of the node that opened the filesystem. + * - 0x50 + - char[32] + - mmp\_bdevname + - Block device name of the filesystem. + * - 0x70 + - \_\_le16 + - mmp\_check\_interval + - The MMP re-check interval, in seconds. + * - 0x72 + - \_\_le16 + - mmp\_pad1 + - Zero. + * - 0x74 + - \_\_le32[226] + - mmp\_pad2 + - Zero. + * - 0x3FC + - \_\_le32 + - mmp\_checksum + - Checksum of the MMP block. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/overview.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/overview.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cbab18baba12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/overview.rst @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +High Level Design +================= + +An ext4 file system is split into a series of block groups. To reduce +performance difficulties due to fragmentation, the block allocator tries +very hard to keep each file's blocks within the same group, thereby +reducing seek times. The size of a block group is specified in +``sb.s_blocks_per_group`` blocks, though it can also calculated as 8 \* +``block_size_in_bytes``. With the default block size of 4KiB, each group +will contain 32,768 blocks, for a length of 128MiB. The number of block +groups is the size of the device divided by the size of a block group. + +All fields in ext4 are written to disk in little-endian order. HOWEVER, +all fields in jbd2 (the journal) are written to disk in big-endian +order. + +.. include:: blocks.rst +.. include:: blockgroup.rst +.. include:: special_inodes.rst +.. include:: allocators.rst +.. include:: checksums.rst +.. include:: bigalloc.rst +.. include:: inlinedata.rst +.. include:: eainode.rst diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/special_inodes.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/special_inodes.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a82f70c9baeb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/special_inodes.rst @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Special inodes +-------------- + +ext4 reserves some inode for special features, as follows: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - inode Number + - Purpose + * - 0 + - Doesn't exist; there is no inode 0. + * - 1 + - List of defective blocks. + * - 2 + - Root directory. + * - 3 + - User quota. + * - 4 + - Group quota. + * - 5 + - Boot loader. + * - 6 + - Undelete directory. + * - 7 + - Reserved group descriptors inode. (“resize inode”) + * - 8 + - Journal inode. + * - 9 + - The “exclude” inode, for snapshots(?) + * - 10 + - Replica inode, used for some non-upstream feature? + * - 11 + - Traditional first non-reserved inode. Usually this is the lost+found directory. See s\_first\_ino in the superblock. + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/super.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/super.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5f81dd87e0b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4/ondisk/super.rst @@ -0,0 +1,801 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Super Block +----------- + +The superblock records various information about the enclosing +filesystem, such as block counts, inode counts, supported features, +maintenance information, and more. + +If the sparse\_super feature flag is set, redundant copies of the +superblock and group descriptors are kept only in the groups whose group +number is either 0 or a power of 3, 5, or 7. If the flag is not set, +redundant copies are kept in all groups. + +The superblock checksum is calculated against the superblock structure, +which includes the FS UUID. + +The ext4 superblock is laid out as follows in +``struct ext4_super_block``: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 1 1 77 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Offset + - Size + - Name + - Description + * - 0x0 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_inodes\_count + - Total inode count. + * - 0x4 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_blocks\_count\_lo + - Total block count. + * - 0x8 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_r\_blocks\_count\_lo + - This number of blocks can only be allocated by the super-user. + * - 0xC + - \_\_le32 + - s\_free\_blocks\_count\_lo + - Free block count. + * - 0x10 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_free\_inodes\_count + - Free inode count. + * - 0x14 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_first\_data\_block + - First data block. This must be at least 1 for 1k-block filesystems and + is typically 0 for all other block sizes. + * - 0x18 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_log\_block\_size + - Block size is 2 ^ (10 + s\_log\_block\_size). + * - 0x1C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_log\_cluster\_size + - Cluster size is (2 ^ s\_log\_cluster\_size) blocks if bigalloc is + enabled. Otherwise s\_log\_cluster\_size must equal s\_log\_block\_size. + * - 0x20 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_blocks\_per\_group + - Blocks per group. + * - 0x24 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_clusters\_per\_group + - Clusters per group, if bigalloc is enabled. Otherwise + s\_clusters\_per\_group must equal s\_blocks\_per\_group. + * - 0x28 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_inodes\_per\_group + - Inodes per group. + * - 0x2C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_mtime + - Mount time, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x30 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_wtime + - Write time, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x34 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_mnt\_count + - Number of mounts since the last fsck. + * - 0x36 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_max\_mnt\_count + - Number of mounts beyond which a fsck is needed. + * - 0x38 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_magic + - Magic signature, 0xEF53 + * - 0x3A + - \_\_le16 + - s\_state + - File system state. See super_state_ for more info. + * - 0x3C + - \_\_le16 + - s\_errors + - Behaviour when detecting errors. See super_errors_ for more info. + * - 0x3E + - \_\_le16 + - s\_minor\_rev\_level + - Minor revision level. + * - 0x40 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_lastcheck + - Time of last check, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x44 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_checkinterval + - Maximum time between checks, in seconds. + * - 0x48 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_creator\_os + - Creator OS. See the table super_creator_ for more info. + * - 0x4C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_rev\_level + - Revision level. See the table super_revision_ for more info. + * - 0x50 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_def\_resuid + - Default uid for reserved blocks. + * - 0x52 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_def\_resgid + - Default gid for reserved blocks. + * - + - + - + - These fields are for EXT4_DYNAMIC_REV superblocks only. + + Note: the difference between the compatible feature set and the + incompatible feature set is that if there is a bit set in the + incompatible feature set that the kernel doesn't know about, it should + refuse to mount the filesystem. + + e2fsck's requirements are more strict; if it doesn't know + about a feature in either the compatible or incompatible feature set, it + must abort and not try to meddle with things it doesn't understand... + * - 0x54 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_first\_ino + - First non-reserved inode. + * - 0x58 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_inode\_size + - Size of inode structure, in bytes. + * - 0x5A + - \_\_le16 + - s\_block\_group\_nr + - Block group # of this superblock. + * - 0x5C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_feature\_compat + - Compatible feature set flags. Kernel can still read/write this fs even + if it doesn't understand a flag; fsck should not do that. See the + super_compat_ table for more info. + * - 0x60 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_feature\_incompat + - Incompatible feature set. If the kernel or fsck doesn't understand one + of these bits, it should stop. See the super_incompat_ table for more + info. + * - 0x64 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_feature\_ro\_compat + - Readonly-compatible feature set. If the kernel doesn't understand one of + these bits, it can still mount read-only. See the super_rocompat_ table + for more info. + * - 0x68 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_uuid[16] + - 128-bit UUID for volume. + * - 0x78 + - char + - s\_volume\_name[16] + - Volume label. + * - 0x88 + - char + - s\_last\_mounted[64] + - Directory where filesystem was last mounted. + * - 0xC8 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_algorithm\_usage\_bitmap + - For compression (Not used in e2fsprogs/Linux) + * - + - + - + - Performance hints. Directory preallocation should only happen if the + EXT4_FEATURE_COMPAT_DIR_PREALLOC flag is on. + * - 0xCC + - \_\_u8 + - s\_prealloc\_blocks + - #. of blocks to try to preallocate for ... files? (Not used in + e2fsprogs/Linux) + * - 0xCD + - \_\_u8 + - s\_prealloc\_dir\_blocks + - #. of blocks to preallocate for directories. (Not used in + e2fsprogs/Linux) + * - 0xCE + - \_\_le16 + - s\_reserved\_gdt\_blocks + - Number of reserved GDT entries for future filesystem expansion. + * - + - + - + - Journalling support is valid only if EXT4_FEATURE_COMPAT_HAS_JOURNAL is + set. + * - 0xD0 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_journal\_uuid[16] + - UUID of journal superblock + * - 0xE0 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_journal\_inum + - inode number of journal file. + * - 0xE4 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_journal\_dev + - Device number of journal file, if the external journal feature flag is + set. + * - 0xE8 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_last\_orphan + - Start of list of orphaned inodes to delete. + * - 0xEC + - \_\_le32 + - s\_hash\_seed[4] + - HTREE hash seed. + * - 0xFC + - \_\_u8 + - s\_def\_hash\_version + - Default hash algorithm to use for directory hashes. See super_def_hash_ + for more info. + * - 0xFD + - \_\_u8 + - s\_jnl\_backup\_type + - If this value is 0 or EXT3\_JNL\_BACKUP\_BLOCKS (1), then the + ``s_jnl_blocks`` field contains a duplicate copy of the inode's + ``i_block[]`` array and ``i_size``. + * - 0xFE + - \_\_le16 + - s\_desc\_size + - Size of group descriptors, in bytes, if the 64bit incompat feature flag + is set. + * - 0x100 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_default\_mount\_opts + - Default mount options. See the super_mountopts_ table for more info. + * - 0x104 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_first\_meta\_bg + - First metablock block group, if the meta\_bg feature is enabled. + * - 0x108 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_mkfs\_time + - When the filesystem was created, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x10C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_jnl\_blocks[17] + - Backup copy of the journal inode's ``i_block[]`` array in the first 15 + elements and i\_size\_high and i\_size in the 16th and 17th elements, + respectively. + * - + - + - + - 64bit support is valid only if EXT4_FEATURE_COMPAT_64BIT is set. + * - 0x150 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_blocks\_count\_hi + - High 32-bits of the block count. + * - 0x154 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_r\_blocks\_count\_hi + - High 32-bits of the reserved block count. + * - 0x158 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_free\_blocks\_count\_hi + - High 32-bits of the free block count. + * - 0x15C + - \_\_le16 + - s\_min\_extra\_isize + - All inodes have at least # bytes. + * - 0x15E + - \_\_le16 + - s\_want\_extra\_isize + - New inodes should reserve # bytes. + * - 0x160 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_flags + - Miscellaneous flags. See the super_flags_ table for more info. + * - 0x164 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_raid\_stride + - RAID stride. This is the number of logical blocks read from or written + to the disk before moving to the next disk. This affects the placement + of filesystem metadata, which will hopefully make RAID storage faster. + * - 0x166 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_mmp\_interval + - #. seconds to wait in multi-mount prevention (MMP) checking. In theory, + MMP is a mechanism to record in the superblock which host and device + have mounted the filesystem, in order to prevent multiple mounts. This + feature does not seem to be implemented... + * - 0x168 + - \_\_le64 + - s\_mmp\_block + - Block # for multi-mount protection data. + * - 0x170 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_raid\_stripe\_width + - RAID stripe width. This is the number of logical blocks read from or + written to the disk before coming back to the current disk. This is used + by the block allocator to try to reduce the number of read-modify-write + operations in a RAID5/6. + * - 0x174 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_log\_groups\_per\_flex + - Size of a flexible block group is 2 ^ ``s_log_groups_per_flex``. + * - 0x175 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_checksum\_type + - Metadata checksum algorithm type. The only valid value is 1 (crc32c). + * - 0x176 + - \_\_le16 + - s\_reserved\_pad + - + * - 0x178 + - \_\_le64 + - s\_kbytes\_written + - Number of KiB written to this filesystem over its lifetime. + * - 0x180 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_snapshot\_inum + - inode number of active snapshot. (Not used in e2fsprogs/Linux.) + * - 0x184 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_snapshot\_id + - Sequential ID of active snapshot. (Not used in e2fsprogs/Linux.) + * - 0x188 + - \_\_le64 + - s\_snapshot\_r\_blocks\_count + - Number of blocks reserved for active snapshot's future use. (Not used in + e2fsprogs/Linux.) + * - 0x190 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_snapshot\_list + - inode number of the head of the on-disk snapshot list. (Not used in + e2fsprogs/Linux.) + * - 0x194 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_error\_count + - Number of errors seen. + * - 0x198 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_first\_error\_time + - First time an error happened, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x19C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_first\_error\_ino + - inode involved in first error. + * - 0x1A0 + - \_\_le64 + - s\_first\_error\_block + - Number of block involved of first error. + * - 0x1A8 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_first\_error\_func[32] + - Name of function where the error happened. + * - 0x1C8 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_first\_error\_line + - Line number where error happened. + * - 0x1CC + - \_\_le32 + - s\_last\_error\_time + - Time of most recent error, in seconds since the epoch. + * - 0x1D0 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_last\_error\_ino + - inode involved in most recent error. + * - 0x1D4 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_last\_error\_line + - Line number where most recent error happened. + * - 0x1D8 + - \_\_le64 + - s\_last\_error\_block + - Number of block involved in most recent error. + * - 0x1E0 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_last\_error\_func[32] + - Name of function where the most recent error happened. + * - 0x200 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_mount\_opts[64] + - ASCIIZ string of mount options. + * - 0x240 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_usr\_quota\_inum + - Inode number of user `quota <quota>`__ file. + * - 0x244 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_grp\_quota\_inum + - Inode number of group `quota <quota>`__ file. + * - 0x248 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_overhead\_blocks + - Overhead blocks/clusters in fs. (Huh? This field is always zero, which + means that the kernel calculates it dynamically.) + * - 0x24C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_backup\_bgs[2] + - Block groups containing superblock backups (if sparse\_super2) + * - 0x254 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_encrypt\_algos[4] + - Encryption algorithms in use. There can be up to four algorithms in use + at any time; valid algorithm codes are given in the super_encrypt_ table + below. + * - 0x258 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_encrypt\_pw\_salt[16] + - Salt for the string2key algorithm for encryption. + * - 0x268 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_lpf\_ino + - Inode number of lost+found + * - 0x26C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_prj\_quota\_inum + - Inode that tracks project quotas. + * - 0x270 + - \_\_le32 + - s\_checksum\_seed + - Checksum seed used for metadata\_csum calculations. This value is + crc32c(~0, $orig\_fs\_uuid). + * - 0x274 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_wtime_hi + - Upper 8 bits of the s_wtime field. + * - 0x275 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_wtime_hi + - Upper 8 bits of the s_mtime field. + * - 0x276 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_mkfs_time_hi + - Upper 8 bits of the s_mkfs_time field. + * - 0x277 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_lastcheck_hi + - Upper 8 bits of the s_lastcheck_hi field. + * - 0x278 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_first_error_time_hi + - Upper 8 bits of the s_first_error_time_hi field. + * - 0x279 + - \_\_u8 + - s\_last_error_time_hi + - Upper 8 bits of the s_last_error_time_hi field. + * - 0x27A + - \_\_u8[2] + - s\_pad + - Zero padding. + * - 0x27C + - \_\_le32 + - s\_reserved[96] + - Padding to the end of the block. + * - 0x3FC + - \_\_le32 + - s\_checksum + - Superblock checksum. + +.. _super_state: + +The superblock state is some combination of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x0001 + - Cleanly umounted + * - 0x0002 + - Errors detected + * - 0x0004 + - Orphans being recovered + +.. _super_errors: + +The superblock error policy is one of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 1 + - Continue + * - 2 + - Remount read-only + * - 3 + - Panic + +.. _super_creator: + +The filesystem creator is one of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0 + - Linux + * - 1 + - Hurd + * - 2 + - Masix + * - 3 + - FreeBSD + * - 4 + - Lites + +.. _super_revision: + +The superblock revision is one of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0 + - Original format + * - 1 + - v2 format w/ dynamic inode sizes + +Note that ``EXT4_DYNAMIC_REV`` refers to a revision 1 or newer filesystem. + +.. _super_compat: + +The superblock compatible features field is a combination of any of the +following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - Directory preallocation (COMPAT\_DIR\_PREALLOC). + * - 0x2 + - “imagic inodes”. Not clear from the code what this does + (COMPAT\_IMAGIC\_INODES). + * - 0x4 + - Has a journal (COMPAT\_HAS\_JOURNAL). + * - 0x8 + - Supports extended attributes (COMPAT\_EXT\_ATTR). + * - 0x10 + - Has reserved GDT blocks for filesystem expansion + (COMPAT\_RESIZE\_INODE). Requires RO\_COMPAT\_SPARSE\_SUPER. + * - 0x20 + - Has directory indices (COMPAT\_DIR\_INDEX). + * - 0x40 + - “Lazy BG”. Not in Linux kernel, seems to have been for uninitialized + block groups? (COMPAT\_LAZY\_BG) + * - 0x80 + - “Exclude inode”. Not used. (COMPAT\_EXCLUDE\_INODE). + * - 0x100 + - “Exclude bitmap”. Seems to be used to indicate the presence of + snapshot-related exclude bitmaps? Not defined in kernel or used in + e2fsprogs (COMPAT\_EXCLUDE\_BITMAP). + * - 0x200 + - Sparse Super Block, v2. If this flag is set, the SB field s\_backup\_bgs + points to the two block groups that contain backup superblocks + (COMPAT\_SPARSE\_SUPER2). + +.. _super_incompat: + +The superblock incompatible features field is a combination of any of the +following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - Compression (INCOMPAT\_COMPRESSION). + * - 0x2 + - Directory entries record the file type. See ext4\_dir\_entry\_2 below + (INCOMPAT\_FILETYPE). + * - 0x4 + - Filesystem needs recovery (INCOMPAT\_RECOVER). + * - 0x8 + - Filesystem has a separate journal device (INCOMPAT\_JOURNAL\_DEV). + * - 0x10 + - Meta block groups. See the earlier discussion of this feature + (INCOMPAT\_META\_BG). + * - 0x40 + - Files in this filesystem use extents (INCOMPAT\_EXTENTS). + * - 0x80 + - Enable a filesystem size of 2^64 blocks (INCOMPAT\_64BIT). + * - 0x100 + - Multiple mount protection. Not implemented (INCOMPAT\_MMP). + * - 0x200 + - Flexible block groups. See the earlier discussion of this feature + (INCOMPAT\_FLEX\_BG). + * - 0x400 + - Inodes can be used to store large extended attribute values + (INCOMPAT\_EA\_INODE). + * - 0x1000 + - Data in directory entry (INCOMPAT\_DIRDATA). (Not implemented?) + * - 0x2000 + - Metadata checksum seed is stored in the superblock. This feature enables + the administrator to change the UUID of a metadata\_csum filesystem + while the filesystem is mounted; without it, the checksum definition + requires all metadata blocks to be rewritten (INCOMPAT\_CSUM\_SEED). + * - 0x4000 + - Large directory >2GB or 3-level htree (INCOMPAT\_LARGEDIR). Prior to + this feature, directories could not be larger than 4GiB and could not + have an htree more than 2 levels deep. If this feature is enabled, + directories can be larger than 4GiB and have a maximum htree depth of 3. + * - 0x8000 + - Data in inode (INCOMPAT\_INLINE\_DATA). + * - 0x10000 + - Encrypted inodes are present on the filesystem. (INCOMPAT\_ENCRYPT). + +.. _super_rocompat: + +The superblock read-only compatible features field is a combination of any of +the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x1 + - Sparse superblocks. See the earlier discussion of this feature + (RO\_COMPAT\_SPARSE\_SUPER). + * - 0x2 + - This filesystem has been used to store a file greater than 2GiB + (RO\_COMPAT\_LARGE\_FILE). + * - 0x4 + - Not used in kernel or e2fsprogs (RO\_COMPAT\_BTREE\_DIR). + * - 0x8 + - This filesystem has files whose sizes are represented in units of + logical blocks, not 512-byte sectors. This implies a very large file + indeed! (RO\_COMPAT\_HUGE\_FILE) + * - 0x10 + - Group descriptors have checksums. In addition to detecting corruption, + this is useful for lazy formatting with uninitialized groups + (RO\_COMPAT\_GDT\_CSUM). + * - 0x20 + - Indicates that the old ext3 32,000 subdirectory limit no longer applies + (RO\_COMPAT\_DIR\_NLINK). A directory's i\_links\_count will be set to 1 + if it is incremented past 64,999. + * - 0x40 + - Indicates that large inodes exist on this filesystem + (RO\_COMPAT\_EXTRA\_ISIZE). + * - 0x80 + - This filesystem has a snapshot (RO\_COMPAT\_HAS\_SNAPSHOT). + * - 0x100 + - `Quota <Quota>`__ (RO\_COMPAT\_QUOTA). + * - 0x200 + - This filesystem supports “bigalloc”, which means that file extents are + tracked in units of clusters (of blocks) instead of blocks + (RO\_COMPAT\_BIGALLOC). + * - 0x400 + - This filesystem supports metadata checksumming. + (RO\_COMPAT\_METADATA\_CSUM; implies RO\_COMPAT\_GDT\_CSUM, though + GDT\_CSUM must not be set) + * - 0x800 + - Filesystem supports replicas. This feature is neither in the kernel nor + e2fsprogs. (RO\_COMPAT\_REPLICA) + * - 0x1000 + - Read-only filesystem image; the kernel will not mount this image + read-write and most tools will refuse to write to the image. + (RO\_COMPAT\_READONLY) + * - 0x2000 + - Filesystem tracks project quotas. (RO\_COMPAT\_PROJECT) + +.. _super_def_hash: + +The ``s_def_hash_version`` field is one of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x0 + - Legacy. + * - 0x1 + - Half MD4. + * - 0x2 + - Tea. + * - 0x3 + - Legacy, unsigned. + * - 0x4 + - Half MD4, unsigned. + * - 0x5 + - Tea, unsigned. + +.. _super_mountopts: + +The ``s_default_mount_opts`` field is any combination of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x0001 + - Print debugging info upon (re)mount. (EXT4\_DEFM\_DEBUG) + * - 0x0002 + - New files take the gid of the containing directory (instead of the fsgid + of the current process). (EXT4\_DEFM\_BSDGROUPS) + * - 0x0004 + - Support userspace-provided extended attributes. (EXT4\_DEFM\_XATTR\_USER) + * - 0x0008 + - Support POSIX access control lists (ACLs). (EXT4\_DEFM\_ACL) + * - 0x0010 + - Do not support 32-bit UIDs. (EXT4\_DEFM\_UID16) + * - 0x0020 + - All data and metadata are commited to the journal. + (EXT4\_DEFM\_JMODE\_DATA) + * - 0x0040 + - All data are flushed to the disk before metadata are committed to the + journal. (EXT4\_DEFM\_JMODE\_ORDERED) + * - 0x0060 + - Data ordering is not preserved; data may be written after the metadata + has been written. (EXT4\_DEFM\_JMODE\_WBACK) + * - 0x0100 + - Disable write flushes. (EXT4\_DEFM\_NOBARRIER) + * - 0x0200 + - Track which blocks in a filesystem are metadata and therefore should not + be used as data blocks. This option will be enabled by default on 3.18, + hopefully. (EXT4\_DEFM\_BLOCK\_VALIDITY) + * - 0x0400 + - Enable DISCARD support, where the storage device is told about blocks + becoming unused. (EXT4\_DEFM\_DISCARD) + * - 0x0800 + - Disable delayed allocation. (EXT4\_DEFM\_NODELALLOC) + +.. _super_flags: + +The ``s_flags`` field is any combination of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0x0001 + - Signed directory hash in use. + * - 0x0002 + - Unsigned directory hash in use. + * - 0x0004 + - To test development code. + +.. _super_encrypt: + +The ``s_encrypt_algos`` list can contain any of the following: + +.. list-table:: + :widths: 1 79 + :header-rows: 1 + + * - Value + - Description + * - 0 + - Invalid algorithm (ENCRYPTION\_MODE\_INVALID). + * - 1 + - 256-bit AES in XTS mode (ENCRYPTION\_MODE\_AES\_256\_XTS). + * - 2 + - 256-bit AES in GCM mode (ENCRYPTION\_MODE\_AES\_256\_GCM). + * - 3 + - 256-bit AES in CBC mode (ENCRYPTION\_MODE\_AES\_256\_CBC). + +Total size of the superblock is 1024 bytes. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt index 69f8de995739..e5edd29687b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt @@ -157,6 +157,24 @@ data_flush Enable data flushing before checkpoint in order to persist data of regular and symlink. fault_injection=%d Enable fault injection in all supported types with specified injection rate. +fault_type=%d Support configuring fault injection type, should be + enabled with fault_injection option, fault type value + is shown below, it supports single or combined type. + Type_Name Type_Value + FAULT_KMALLOC 0x000000001 + FAULT_KVMALLOC 0x000000002 + FAULT_PAGE_ALLOC 0x000000004 + FAULT_PAGE_GET 0x000000008 + FAULT_ALLOC_BIO 0x000000010 + FAULT_ALLOC_NID 0x000000020 + FAULT_ORPHAN 0x000000040 + FAULT_BLOCK 0x000000080 + FAULT_DIR_DEPTH 0x000000100 + FAULT_EVICT_INODE 0x000000200 + FAULT_TRUNCATE 0x000000400 + FAULT_IO 0x000000800 + FAULT_CHECKPOINT 0x000001000 + FAULT_DISCARD 0x000002000 mode=%s Control block allocation mode which supports "adaptive" and "lfs". In "lfs" mode, there should be no random writes towards main area. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst index 53b89d0edc15..46d1b1be3a51 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst @@ -71,6 +71,39 @@ Other Functions .. kernel-doc:: fs/block_dev.c :export: +.. kernel-doc:: fs/anon_inodes.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/attr.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/d_path.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/dax.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/direct-io.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/file_table.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/libfs.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/posix_acl.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/stat.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/sync.c + :export: + +.. kernel-doc:: fs/xattr.c + :export: + The proc filesystem =================== diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt index 72615a2c0752..51c136c821bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt @@ -10,10 +10,6 @@ union-filesystems). An overlay-filesystem tries to present a filesystem which is the result over overlaying one filesystem on top of the other. -The result will inevitably fail to look exactly like a normal -filesystem for various technical reasons. The expectation is that -many use cases will be able to ignore these differences. - Overlay objects --------------- @@ -266,6 +262,30 @@ rightmost one and going left. In the above example lower1 will be the top, lower2 the middle and lower3 the bottom layer. +Metadata only copy up +-------------------- + +When metadata only copy up feature is enabled, overlayfs will only copy +up metadata (as opposed to whole file), when a metadata specific operation +like chown/chmod is performed. Full file will be copied up later when +file is opened for WRITE operation. + +In other words, this is delayed data copy up operation and data is copied +up when there is a need to actually modify data. + +There are multiple ways to enable/disable this feature. A config option +CONFIG_OVERLAY_FS_METACOPY can be set/unset to enable/disable this feature +by default. Or one can enable/disable it at module load time with module +parameter metacopy=on/off. Lastly, there is also a per mount option +metacopy=on/off to enable/disable this feature per mount. + +Do not use metacopy=on with untrusted upper/lower directories. Otherwise +it is possible that an attacker can create a handcrafted file with +appropriate REDIRECT and METACOPY xattrs, and gain access to file on lower +pointed by REDIRECT. This should not be possible on local system as setting +"trusted." xattrs will require CAP_SYS_ADMIN. But it should be possible +for untrusted layers like from a pen drive. + Sharing and copying layers -------------------------- @@ -284,7 +304,7 @@ though it will not result in a crash or deadlock. Mounting an overlay using an upper layer path, where the upper layer path was previously used by another mounted overlay in combination with a different lower layer path, is allowed, unless the "inodes index" feature -is enabled. +or "metadata only copy up" feature is enabled. With the "inodes index" feature, on the first time mount, an NFS file handle of the lower layer root directory, along with the UUID of the lower @@ -297,6 +317,10 @@ lower root origin, mount will fail with ESTALE. An overlayfs mount with does not support NFS export, lower filesystem does not have a valid UUID or if the upper filesystem does not support extended attributes. +For "metadata only copy up" feature there is no verification mechanism at +mount time. So if same upper is mounted with different set of lower, mount +probably will succeed but expect the unexpected later on. So don't do it. + It is quite a common practice to copy overlay layers to a different directory tree on the same or different underlying filesystem, and even to a different machine. With the "inodes index" feature, trying to mount @@ -306,27 +330,40 @@ the copied layers will fail the verification of the lower root file handle. Non-standard behavior --------------------- -The copy_up operation essentially creates a new, identical file and -moves it over to the old name. Any open files referring to this inode -will access the old data. +Overlayfs can now act as a POSIX compliant filesystem with the following +features turned on: + +1) "redirect_dir" + +Enabled with the mount option or module option: "redirect_dir=on" or with +the kernel config option CONFIG_OVERLAY_FS_REDIRECT_DIR=y. + +If this feature is disabled, then rename(2) on a lower or merged directory +will fail with EXDEV ("Invalid cross-device link"). + +2) "inode index" + +Enabled with the mount option or module option "index=on" or with the +kernel config option CONFIG_OVERLAY_FS_INDEX=y. -The new file may be on a different filesystem, so both st_dev and st_ino -of the real file may change. The values of st_dev and st_ino returned by -stat(2) on an overlay object are often not the same as the real file -stat(2) values to prevent the values from changing on copy_up. +If this feature is disabled and a file with multiple hard links is copied +up, then this will "break" the link. Changes will not be propagated to +other names referring to the same inode. -Unless "xino" feature is enabled, when overlay layers are not all on the -same underlying filesystem, the value of st_dev may be different for two -non-directory objects in the same overlay filesystem and the value of -st_ino for directory objects may be non persistent and could change even -while the overlay filesystem is still mounted. +3) "xino" -Unless "inode index" feature is enabled, if a file with multiple hard -links is copied up, then this will "break" the link. Changes will not be -propagated to other names referring to the same inode. +Enabled with the mount option "xino=auto" or "xino=on", with the module +option "xino_auto=on" or with the kernel config option +CONFIG_OVERLAY_FS_XINO_AUTO=y. Also implicitly enabled by using the same +underlying filesystem for all layers making up the overlay. -Unless "redirect_dir" feature is enabled, rename(2) on a lower or merged -directory will fail with EXDEV. +If this feature is disabled or the underlying filesystem doesn't have +enough free bits in the inode number, then overlayfs will not be able to +guarantee that the values of st_ino and st_dev returned by stat(2) and the +value of d_ino returned by readdir(3) will act like on a normal filesystem. +E.g. the value of st_dev may be different for two objects in the same +overlay filesystem and the value of st_ino for directory objects may not be +persistent and could change even while the overlay filesystem is mounted. Changes to underlying filesystems diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting index 17bb4dc28fae..7b7b845c490a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting @@ -602,3 +602,23 @@ in your dentry operations instead. dentry separately, and it now has request_mask and query_flags arguments to specify the fields and sync type requested by statx. Filesystems not supporting any statx-specific features may ignore the new arguments. +-- +[mandatory] + ->atomic_open() calling conventions have changed. Gone is int *opened, + along with FILE_OPENED/FILE_CREATED. In place of those we have + FMODE_OPENED/FMODE_CREATED, set in file->f_mode. Additionally, return + value for 'called finish_no_open(), open it yourself' case has become + 0, not 1. Since finish_no_open() itself is returning 0 now, that part + does not need any changes in ->atomic_open() instances. +-- +[mandatory] + alloc_file() has become static now; two wrappers are to be used instead. + alloc_file_pseudo(inode, vfsmount, name, flags, ops) is for the cases + when dentry needs to be created; that's the majority of old alloc_file() + users. Calling conventions: on success a reference to new struct file + is returned and callers reference to inode is subsumed by that. On + failure, ERR_PTR() is returned and no caller's references are affected, + so the caller needs to drop the inode reference it held. + alloc_file_clone(file, flags, ops) does not affect any caller's references. + On success you get a new struct file sharing the mount/dentry with the + original, on failure - ERR_PTR(). diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 520f6a84cf50..22b4b00dee31 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -870,6 +870,8 @@ Committed_AS: 100056 kB VmallocTotal: 112216 kB VmallocUsed: 428 kB VmallocChunk: 111088 kB +Percpu: 62080 kB +HardwareCorrupted: 0 kB AnonHugePages: 49152 kB ShmemHugePages: 0 kB ShmemPmdMapped: 0 kB @@ -915,6 +917,8 @@ MemAvailable: An estimate of how much memory is available for starting new Dirty: Memory which is waiting to get written back to the disk Writeback: Memory which is actively being written back to the disk AnonPages: Non-file backed pages mapped into userspace page tables +HardwareCorrupted: The amount of RAM/memory in KB, the kernel identifies as + corrupted. AnonHugePages: Non-file backed huge pages mapped into userspace page tables Mapped: files which have been mmaped, such as libraries Shmem: Total memory used by shared memory (shmem) and tmpfs @@ -959,6 +963,8 @@ Committed_AS: The amount of memory presently allocated on the system. VmallocTotal: total size of vmalloc memory area VmallocUsed: amount of vmalloc area which is used VmallocChunk: largest contiguous block of vmalloc area which is free + Percpu: Memory allocated to the percpu allocator used to back percpu + allocations. This stat excludes the cost of metadata. .............................................................................. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt index 33e2f3694733..cd709a94d054 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ using debugfs: */ static struct dentry *create_buf_file_handler(const char *filename, struct dentry *parent, - int mode, + umode_t mode, struct rchan_buf *buf, int *is_global) { @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ would be very similar: static int subbuf_start(struct rchan_buf *buf, void *subbuf, void *prev_subbuf, - unsigned int prev_padding) + size_t prev_padding) { if (prev_subbuf) *((unsigned *)prev_subbuf) = prev_padding; diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt index 9de4303201e1..d412b236a9d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt @@ -66,23 +66,39 @@ kernel 3.10. Current versions require the following update The iterator interface -Modules implementing a virtual file with seq_file must implement a simple -iterator object that allows stepping through the data of interest. -Iterators must be able to move to a specific position - like the file they -implement - but the interpretation of that position is up to the iterator -itself. A seq_file implementation that is formatting firewall rules, for -example, could interpret position N as the Nth rule in the chain. -Positioning can thus be done in whatever way makes the most sense for the -generator of the data, which need not be aware of how a position translates -to an offset in the virtual file. The one obvious exception is that a -position of zero should indicate the beginning of the file. +Modules implementing a virtual file with seq_file must implement an +iterator object that allows stepping through the data of interest +during a "session" (roughly one read() system call). If the iterator +is able to move to a specific position - like the file they implement, +though with freedom to map the position number to a sequence location +in whatever way is convenient - the iterator need only exist +transiently during a session. If the iterator cannot easily find a +numerical position but works well with a first/next interface, the +iterator can be stored in the private data area and continue from one +session to the next. + +A seq_file implementation that is formatting firewall rules from a +table, for example, could provide a simple iterator that interprets +position N as the Nth rule in the chain. A seq_file implementation +that presents the content of a, potentially volatile, linked list +might record a pointer into that list, providing that can be done +without risk of the current location being removed. + +Positioning can thus be done in whatever way makes the most sense for +the generator of the data, which need not be aware of how a position +translates to an offset in the virtual file. The one obvious exception +is that a position of zero should indicate the beginning of the file. The /proc/sequence iterator just uses the count of the next number it will output as its position. -Four functions must be implemented to make the iterator work. The first, -called start() takes a position as an argument and returns an iterator -which will start reading at that position. For our simple sequence example, +Four functions must be implemented to make the iterator work. The +first, called start(), starts a session and takes a position as an +argument, returning an iterator which will start reading at that +position. The pos passed to start() will always be either zero, or +the most recent pos used in the previous session. + +For our simple sequence example, the start() function looks like: static void *ct_seq_start(struct seq_file *s, loff_t *pos) @@ -101,11 +117,12 @@ implementations; in most cases the start() function should check for a "past end of file" condition and return NULL if need be. For more complicated applications, the private field of the seq_file -structure can be used. There is also a special value which can be returned -by the start() function called SEQ_START_TOKEN; it can be used if you wish -to instruct your show() function (described below) to print a header at the -top of the output. SEQ_START_TOKEN should only be used if the offset is -zero, however. +structure can be used to hold state from session to session. There is +also a special value which can be returned by the start() function +called SEQ_START_TOKEN; it can be used if you wish to instruct your +show() function (described below) to print a header at the top of the +output. SEQ_START_TOKEN should only be used if the offset is zero, +however. The next function to implement is called, amazingly, next(); its job is to move the iterator forward to the next position in the sequence. The @@ -121,9 +138,13 @@ complete. Here's the example version: return spos; } -The stop() function is called when iteration is complete; its job, of -course, is to clean up. If dynamic memory is allocated for the iterator, -stop() is the place to free it. +The stop() function closes a session; its job, of course, is to clean +up. If dynamic memory is allocated for the iterator, stop() is the +place to free it; if a lock was taken by start(), stop() must release +that lock. The value that *pos was set to by the last next() call +before stop() is remembered, and used for the first start() call of +the next session unless lseek() has been called on the file; in that +case next start() will be asked to start at position zero. static void ct_seq_stop(struct seq_file *s, void *v) { diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 829a7b7857a4..4b2084d0f1fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ struct inode_operations { ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t); void (*update_time)(struct inode *, struct timespec *, int); int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct file *, - unsigned open_flag, umode_t create_mode, int *opened); + unsigned open_flag, umode_t create_mode); int (*tmpfile) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, umode_t); }; @@ -496,13 +496,15 @@ otherwise noted. atomic_open: called on the last component of an open. Using this optional method the filesystem can look up, possibly create and open the file in - one atomic operation. If it cannot perform this (e.g. the file type - turned out to be wrong) it may signal this by returning 1 instead of - usual 0 or -ve . This method is only called if the last component is - negative or needs lookup. Cached positive dentries are still handled by - f_op->open(). If the file was created, the FILE_CREATED flag should be - set in "opened". In case of O_EXCL the method must only succeed if the - file didn't exist and hence FILE_CREATED shall always be set on success. + one atomic operation. If it wants to leave actual opening to the + caller (e.g. if the file turned out to be a symlink, device, or just + something filesystem won't do atomic open for), it may signal this by + returning finish_no_open(file, dentry). This method is only called if + the last component is negative or needs lookup. Cached positive dentries + are still handled by f_op->open(). If the file was created, + FMODE_CREATED flag should be set in file->f_mode. In case of O_EXCL + the method must only succeed if the file didn't exist and hence FMODE_CREATED + shall always be set on success. tmpfile: called in the end of O_TMPFILE open(). Optional, equivalent to atomically creating, opening and unlinking a file in given directory. @@ -857,8 +859,6 @@ struct file_operations { ssize_t (*write_iter) (struct kiocb *, struct iov_iter *); int (*iterate) (struct file *, struct dir_context *); __poll_t (*poll) (struct file *, struct poll_table_struct *); - struct wait_queue_head * (*get_poll_head)(struct file *, __poll_t); - __poll_t (*poll_mask) (struct file *, __poll_t); long (*unlocked_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long); long (*compat_ioctl) (struct file *, unsigned int, unsigned long); int (*mmap) (struct file *, struct vm_area_struct *); @@ -903,17 +903,6 @@ otherwise noted. activity on this file and (optionally) go to sleep until there is activity. Called by the select(2) and poll(2) system calls - get_poll_head: Returns the struct wait_queue_head that callers can - wait on. Callers need to check the returned events using ->poll_mask - once woken. Can return NULL to indicate polling is not supported, - or any error code using the ERR_PTR convention to indicate that a - grave error occured and ->poll_mask shall not be called. - - poll_mask: return the mask of EPOLL* values describing the file descriptor - state. Called either before going to sleep on the waitqueue returned by - get_poll_head, or after it has been woken. If ->get_poll_head and - ->poll_mask are implemented ->poll does not need to be implement. - unlocked_ioctl: called by the ioctl(2) system call. compat_ioctl: called by the ioctl(2) system call when 32 bit system calls @@ -1000,8 +989,7 @@ struct dentry_operations { char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int); struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *); int (*d_manage)(const struct path *, bool); - struct dentry *(*d_real)(struct dentry *, const struct inode *, - unsigned int, unsigned int); + struct dentry *(*d_real)(struct dentry *, const struct inode *); }; d_revalidate: called when the VFS needs to revalidate a dentry. This @@ -1135,22 +1123,15 @@ struct dentry_operations { dentry being transited from. d_real: overlay/union type filesystems implement this method to return one of - the underlying dentries hidden by the overlay. It is used in three + the underlying dentries hidden by the overlay. It is used in two different modes: - Called from open it may need to copy-up the file depending on the - supplied open flags. This mode is selected with a non-zero flags - argument. In this mode the d_real method can return an error. - Called from file_dentry() it returns the real dentry matching the inode argument. The real dentry may be from a lower layer already copied up, but still referenced from the file. This mode is selected with a - non-NULL inode argument. This will always succeed. - - With NULL inode and zero flags the topmost real underlying dentry is - returned. This will always succeed. + non-NULL inode argument. - This method is never called with both non-NULL inode and non-zero flags. + With NULL inode the topmost real underlying dentry is returned. Each dentry has a pointer to its parent dentry, as well as a hash list of child dentries. Child dentries are basically like files in a diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt index 4d9ff0a7f8e1..a9ae82fb9d13 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt @@ -223,8 +223,6 @@ Deprecated Mount Options Name Removal Schedule ---- ---------------- - barrier no earlier than v4.15 - nobarrier no earlier than v4.15 Removed Mount Options @@ -236,6 +234,8 @@ Removed Mount Options ihashsize v4.0 irixsgid v4.0 osyncisdsync/osyncisosync v4.0 + barrier v4.19 + nobarrier v4.19 sysctls diff --git a/Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt b/Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6df4621c3f2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fpga/dfl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ +=============================================================================== + FPGA Device Feature List (DFL) Framework Overview +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + Enno Luebbers <enno.luebbers@intel.com> + Xiao Guangrong <guangrong.xiao@linux.intel.com> + Wu Hao <hao.wu@intel.com> + +The Device Feature List (DFL) FPGA framework (and drivers according to this +this framework) hides the very details of low layer hardwares and provides +unified interfaces to userspace. Applications could use these interfaces to +configure, enumerate, open and access FPGA accelerators on platforms which +implement the DFL in the device memory. Besides this, the DFL framework +enables system level management functions such as FPGA reconfiguration. + + +Device Feature List (DFL) Overview +================================== +Device Feature List (DFL) defines a linked list of feature headers within the +device MMIO space to provide an extensible way of adding features. Software can +walk through these predefined data structures to enumerate FPGA features: +FPGA Interface Unit (FIU), Accelerated Function Unit (AFU) and Private Features, +as illustrated below: + + Header Header Header Header + +----------+ +-->+----------+ +-->+----------+ +-->+----------+ + | Type | | | Type | | | Type | | | Type | + | FIU | | | Private | | | Private | | | Private | + +----------+ | | Feature | | | Feature | | | Feature | + | Next_DFH |--+ +----------+ | +----------+ | +----------+ + +----------+ | Next_DFH |--+ | Next_DFH |--+ | Next_DFH |--> NULL + | ID | +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ + +----------+ | ID | | ID | | ID | + | Next_AFU |--+ +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ + +----------+ | | Feature | | Feature | | Feature | + | Header | | | Register | | Register | | Register | + | Register | | | Set | | Set | | Set | + | Set | | +----------+ +----------+ +----------+ + +----------+ | Header + +-->+----------+ + | Type | + | AFU | + +----------+ + | Next_DFH |--> NULL + +----------+ + | GUID | + +----------+ + | Header | + | Register | + | Set | + +----------+ + +FPGA Interface Unit (FIU) represents a standalone functional unit for the +interface to FPGA, e.g. the FPGA Management Engine (FME) and Port (more +descriptions on FME and Port in later sections). + +Accelerated Function Unit (AFU) represents a FPGA programmable region and +always connects to a FIU (e.g. a Port) as its child as illustrated above. + +Private Features represent sub features of the FIU and AFU. They could be +various function blocks with different IDs, but all private features which +belong to the same FIU or AFU, must be linked to one list via the Next Device +Feature Header (Next_DFH) pointer. + +Each FIU, AFU and Private Feature could implement its own functional registers. +The functional register set for FIU and AFU, is named as Header Register Set, +e.g. FME Header Register Set, and the one for Private Feature, is named as +Feature Register Set, e.g. FME Partial Reconfiguration Feature Register Set. + +This Device Feature List provides a way of linking features together, it's +convenient for software to locate each feature by walking through this list, +and can be implemented in register regions of any FPGA device. + + +FIU - FME (FPGA Management Engine) +================================== +The FPGA Management Engine performs reconfiguration and other infrastructure +functions. Each FPGA device only has one FME. + +User-space applications can acquire exclusive access to the FME using open(), +and release it using close(). + +The following functions are exposed through ioctls: + + Get driver API version (DFL_FPGA_GET_API_VERSION) + Check for extensions (DFL_FPGA_CHECK_EXTENSION) + Program bitstream (DFL_FPGA_FME_PORT_PR) + +More functions are exposed through sysfs +(/sys/class/fpga_region/regionX/dfl-fme.n/): + + Read bitstream ID (bitstream_id) + bitstream_id indicates version of the static FPGA region. + + Read bitstream metadata (bitstream_metadata) + bitstream_metadata includes detailed information of static FPGA region, + e.g. synthesis date and seed. + + Read number of ports (ports_num) + one FPGA device may have more than one port, this sysfs interface indicates + how many ports the FPGA device has. + + +FIU - PORT +========== +A port represents the interface between the static FPGA fabric and a partially +reconfigurable region containing an AFU. It controls the communication from SW +to the accelerator and exposes features such as reset and debug. Each FPGA +device may have more than one port, but always one AFU per port. + + +AFU +=== +An AFU is attached to a port FIU and exposes a fixed length MMIO region to be +used for accelerator-specific control registers. + +User-space applications can acquire exclusive access to an AFU attached to a +port by using open() on the port device node and release it using close(). + +The following functions are exposed through ioctls: + + Get driver API version (DFL_FPGA_GET_API_VERSION) + Check for extensions (DFL_FPGA_CHECK_EXTENSION) + Get port info (DFL_FPGA_PORT_GET_INFO) + Get MMIO region info (DFL_FPGA_PORT_GET_REGION_INFO) + Map DMA buffer (DFL_FPGA_PORT_DMA_MAP) + Unmap DMA buffer (DFL_FPGA_PORT_DMA_UNMAP) + Reset AFU (*DFL_FPGA_PORT_RESET) + +*DFL_FPGA_PORT_RESET: reset the FPGA Port and its AFU. Userspace can do Port +reset at any time, e.g. during DMA or Partial Reconfiguration. But it should +never cause any system level issue, only functional failure (e.g. DMA or PR +operation failure) and be recoverable from the failure. + +User-space applications can also mmap() accelerator MMIO regions. + +More functions are exposed through sysfs: +(/sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-port.m>/): + + Read Accelerator GUID (afu_id) + afu_id indicates which PR bitstream is programmed to this AFU. + + +DFL Framework Overview +====================== + + +----------+ +--------+ +--------+ +--------+ + | FME | | AFU | | AFU | | AFU | + | Module | | Module | | Module | | Module | + +----------+ +--------+ +--------+ +--------+ + +-----------------------+ + | FPGA Container Device | Device Feature List + | (FPGA Base Region) | Framework + +-----------------------+ +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +----------------------------+ + | FPGA DFL Device Module | + | (e.g. PCIE/Platform Device)| + +----------------------------+ + +------------------------+ + | FPGA Hardware Device | + +------------------------+ + +DFL framework in kernel provides common interfaces to create container device +(FPGA base region), discover feature devices and their private features from the +given Device Feature Lists and create platform devices for feature devices +(e.g. FME, Port and AFU) with related resources under the container device. It +also abstracts operations for the private features and exposes common ops to +feature device drivers. + +The FPGA DFL Device could be different hardwares, e.g. PCIe device, platform +device and etc. Its driver module is always loaded first once the device is +created by the system. This driver plays an infrastructural role in the +driver architecture. It locates the DFLs in the device memory, handles them +and related resources to common interfaces from DFL framework for enumeration. +(Please refer to drivers/fpga/dfl.c for detailed enumeration APIs). + +The FPGA Management Engine (FME) driver is a platform driver which is loaded +automatically after FME platform device creation from the DFL device module. It +provides the key features for FPGA management, including: + + a) Expose static FPGA region information, e.g. version and metadata. + Users can read related information via sysfs interfaces exposed + by FME driver. + + b) Partial Reconfiguration. The FME driver creates FPGA manager, FPGA + bridges and FPGA regions during PR sub feature initialization. Once + it receives a DFL_FPGA_FME_PORT_PR ioctl from user, it invokes the + common interface function from FPGA Region to complete the partial + reconfiguration of the PR bitstream to the given port. + +Similar to the FME driver, the FPGA Accelerated Function Unit (AFU) driver is +probed once the AFU platform device is created. The main function of this module +is to provide an interface for userspace applications to access the individual +accelerators, including basic reset control on port, AFU MMIO region export, dma +buffer mapping service functions. + +After feature platform devices creation, matched platform drivers will be loaded +automatically to handle different functionalities. Please refer to next sections +for detailed information on functional units which have been already implemented +under this DFL framework. + + +Partial Reconfiguration +======================= +As mentioned above, accelerators can be reconfigured through partial +reconfiguration of a PR bitstream file. The PR bitstream file must have been +generated for the exact static FPGA region and targeted reconfigurable region +(port) of the FPGA, otherwise, the reconfiguration operation will fail and +possibly cause system instability. This compatibility can be checked by +comparing the compatibility ID noted in the header of PR bitstream file against +the compat_id exposed by the target FPGA region. This check is usually done by +userspace before calling the reconfiguration IOCTL. + + +Device enumeration +================== +This section introduces how applications enumerate the fpga device from +the sysfs hierarchy under /sys/class/fpga_region. + +In the example below, two DFL based FPGA devices are installed in the host. Each +fpga device has one FME and two ports (AFUs). + +FPGA regions are created under /sys/class/fpga_region/ + + /sys/class/fpga_region/region0 + /sys/class/fpga_region/region1 + /sys/class/fpga_region/region2 + ... + +Application needs to search each regionX folder, if feature device is found, +(e.g. "dfl-port.n" or "dfl-fme.m" is found), then it's the base +fpga region which represents the FPGA device. + +Each base region has one FME and two ports (AFUs) as child devices: + + /sys/class/fpga_region/region0/dfl-fme.0 + /sys/class/fpga_region/region0/dfl-port.0 + /sys/class/fpga_region/region0/dfl-port.1 + ... + + /sys/class/fpga_region/region3/dfl-fme.1 + /sys/class/fpga_region/region3/dfl-port.2 + /sys/class/fpga_region/region3/dfl-port.3 + ... + +In general, the FME/AFU sysfs interfaces are named as follows: + + /sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-fme.n>/ + /sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-port.m>/ + +with 'n' consecutively numbering all FMEs and 'm' consecutively numbering all +ports. + +The device nodes used for ioctl() or mmap() can be referenced through: + + /sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-fme.n>/dev + /sys/class/fpga_region/<regionX>/<dfl-port.n>/dev + + +Add new FIUs support +==================== +It's possible that developers made some new function blocks (FIUs) under this +DFL framework, then new platform device driver needs to be developed for the +new feature dev (FIU) following the same way as existing feature dev drivers +(e.g. FME and Port/AFU platform device driver). Besides that, it requires +modification on DFL framework enumeration code too, for new FIU type detection +and related platform devices creation. + + +Add new private features support +================================ +In some cases, we may need to add some new private features to existing FIUs +(e.g. FME or Port). Developers don't need to touch enumeration code in DFL +framework, as each private feature will be parsed automatically and related +mmio resources can be found under FIU platform device created by DFL framework. +Developer only needs to provide a sub feature driver with matched feature id. +FME Partial Reconfiguration Sub Feature driver (see drivers/fpga/dfl-fme-pr.c) +could be a reference. + + +Open discussion +=============== +FME driver exports one ioctl (DFL_FPGA_FME_PORT_PR) for partial reconfiguration +to user now. In the future, if unified user interfaces for reconfiguration are +added, FME driver should switch to them from ioctl interface. diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/amdgpu.rst b/Documentation/gpu/amdgpu.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a740e491dfcc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/amdgpu.rst @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +========================= + drm/amdgpu AMDgpu driver +========================= + +The drm/amdgpu driver supports all AMD Radeon GPUs based on the Graphics Core +Next (GCN) architecture. + +Module Parameters +================= + +The amdgpu driver supports the following module parameters: + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_drv.c + +Core Driver Infrastructure +========================== + +This section covers core driver infrastructure. + +.. _amdgpu_memory_domains: + +Memory Domains +-------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: include/uapi/drm/amdgpu_drm.h + :doc: memory domains + +Buffer Objects +-------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_object.c + :doc: amdgpu_object + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_object.c + :internal: + +PRIME Buffer Sharing +-------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_prime.c + :doc: PRIME Buffer Sharing + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_prime.c + :internal: + +MMU Notifier +------------ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_mn.c + :doc: MMU Notifier + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_mn.c + :internal: + +AMDGPU Virtual Memory +--------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_vm.c + :doc: GPUVM + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_vm.c + :internal: + +Interrupt Handling +------------------ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_irq.c + :doc: Interrupt Handling + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_irq.c + :internal: + +GPU Power/Thermal Controls and Monitoring +========================================= + +This section covers hwmon and power/thermal controls. + +HWMON Interfaces +---------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_pm.c + :doc: hwmon + +GPU sysfs Power State Interfaces +-------------------------------- + +GPU power controls are exposed via sysfs files. + +power_dpm_state +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_pm.c + :doc: power_dpm_state + +power_dpm_force_performance_level +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_pm.c + :doc: power_dpm_force_performance_level + +pp_table +~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_pm.c + :doc: pp_table + +pp_od_clk_voltage +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_pm.c + :doc: pp_od_clk_voltage + +pp_dpm_sclk pp_dpm_mclk pp_dpm_pcie +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_pm.c + :doc: pp_dpm_sclk pp_dpm_mclk pp_dpm_pcie + +pp_power_profile_mode +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_pm.c + :doc: pp_power_profile_mode + +busy_percent +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/amd/amdgpu/amdgpu_pm.c + :doc: busy_percent diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst index f982558fc25d..65be325bf282 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drivers.rst @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ GPU Driver Documentation .. toctree:: + amdgpu i915 meson pl111 diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-client.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-client.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7e672063e7eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-client.rst @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +================= +Kernel clients +================= + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_client.c + :doc: overview + +.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/drm_client.h + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_client.c + :export: diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst index e37557b30f62..f9cfcdcdf024 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms-helpers.rst @@ -109,6 +109,15 @@ Framebuffer CMA Helper Functions Reference .. _drm_bridges: +Framebuffer GEM Helper Reference +================================ + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_gem_framebuffer_helper.c + :doc: overview + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_gem_framebuffer_helper.c + :export: + Bridges ======= @@ -169,6 +178,15 @@ Display Port Helper Functions Reference .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_helper.c :export: +Display Port CEC Helper Functions Reference +=========================================== + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_cec.c + :doc: dp cec helpers + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_dp_cec.c + :export: + Display Port Dual Mode Adaptor Helper Functions Reference ========================================================= @@ -282,13 +300,13 @@ Auxiliary Modeset Helpers .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_modeset_helper.c :export: -Framebuffer GEM Helper Reference -================================ +OF/DT Helpers +============= -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_gem_framebuffer_helper.c +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_of.c :doc: overview -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_gem_framebuffer_helper.c +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_of.c :export: Legacy Plane Helper Reference diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst index 1dffd1ac4cd4..5dee6b8a4c12 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-kms.rst @@ -56,11 +56,12 @@ Overview The basic object structure KMS presents to userspace is fairly simple. Framebuffers (represented by :c:type:`struct drm_framebuffer <drm_framebuffer>`, -see `Frame Buffer Abstraction`_) feed into planes. One or more (or even no) -planes feed their pixel data into a CRTC (represented by :c:type:`struct -drm_crtc <drm_crtc>`, see `CRTC Abstraction`_) for blending. The precise -blending step is explained in more detail in `Plane Composition Properties`_ and -related chapters. +see `Frame Buffer Abstraction`_) feed into planes. Planes are represented by +:c:type:`struct drm_plane <drm_plane>`, see `Plane Abstraction`_ for more +details. One or more (or even no) planes feed their pixel data into a CRTC +(represented by :c:type:`struct drm_crtc <drm_crtc>`, see `CRTC Abstraction`_) +for blending. The precise blending step is explained in more detail in `Plane +Composition Properties`_ and related chapters. For the output routing the first step is encoders (represented by :c:type:`struct drm_encoder <drm_encoder>`, see `Encoder Abstraction`_). Those @@ -373,6 +374,15 @@ Connector Functions Reference .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_connector.c :export: +Writeback Connectors +-------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_writeback.c + :doc: overview + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_writeback.c + :export: + Encoder Abstraction =================== @@ -457,7 +467,7 @@ Output discovery and initialization example drm_encoder_init(dev, &intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_enc_funcs, DRM_MODE_ENCODER_DAC); - drm_mode_connector_attach_encoder(&intel_output->base, + drm_connector_attach_encoder(&intel_output->base, &intel_output->enc); /* Set up the DDC bus. */ @@ -517,6 +527,12 @@ Standard Connector Properties .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_connector.c :doc: standard connector properties +HDMI Specific Connector Properties +---------------------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_connector.c + :doc: HDMI connector properties + Plane Composition Properties ---------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/drm-mm.rst b/Documentation/gpu/drm-mm.rst index b08e9dcd9177..21b6b72a9ba8 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/drm-mm.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/drm-mm.rst @@ -395,6 +395,8 @@ VMA Offset Manager .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_vma_manager.c :export: +.. _prime_buffer_sharing: + PRIME Buffer Sharing ==================== @@ -496,3 +498,21 @@ DRM Sync Objects .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/drm_syncobj.c :export: + +GPU Scheduler +============= + +Overview +-------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/scheduler/gpu_scheduler.c + :doc: Overview + +Scheduler Function References +----------------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: include/drm/gpu_scheduler.h + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/scheduler/gpu_scheduler.c + :export: diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/index.rst b/Documentation/gpu/index.rst index 00288f34c5a6..1fcf8e851e15 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/gpu/index.rst @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Linux GPU Driver Developer's Guide drm-kms drm-kms-helpers drm-uapi + drm-client drivers vga-switcheroo vgaarbiter diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/kms-properties.csv b/Documentation/gpu/kms-properties.csv index 07ed22ea3bd6..bfde04eddd14 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpu/kms-properties.csv +++ b/Documentation/gpu/kms-properties.csv @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Owner Module/Drivers,Group,Property Name,Type,Property Values,Object attached,De ,Virtual GPU,“suggested X”,RANGE,"Min=0, Max=0xffffffff",Connector,property to suggest an X offset for a connector ,,“suggested Y”,RANGE,"Min=0, Max=0xffffffff",Connector,property to suggest an Y offset for a connector ,Optional,"""aspect ratio""",ENUM,"{ ""None"", ""4:3"", ""16:9"" }",Connector,TDB +,Optional,"""content type""",ENUM,"{ ""No Data"", ""Graphics"", ""Photo"", ""Cinema"", ""Game"" }",Connector,TBD i915,Generic,"""Broadcast RGB""",ENUM,"{ ""Automatic"", ""Full"", ""Limited 16:235"" }",Connector,"When this property is set to Limited 16:235 and CTM is set, the hardware will be programmed with the result of the multiplication of CTM by the limited range matrix to ensure the pixels normaly in the range 0..1.0 are remapped to the range 16/255..235/255." ,,“audio”,ENUM,"{ ""force-dvi"", ""off"", ""auto"", ""on"" }",Connector,TBD ,SDVO-TV,“mode”,ENUM,"{ ""NTSC_M"", ""NTSC_J"", ""NTSC_443"", ""PAL_B"" } etc.",Connector,TBD diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst b/Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..757cd257e0d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/msm-crash-dump.rst @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +===================== +MSM Crash Dump Format +===================== + +Following a GPU hang the MSM driver outputs debugging information via +/sys/kernel/dri/X/show or via devcoredump (/sys/class/devcoredump/dcdX/data). +This document describes how the output is formatted. + +Each entry is in the form key: value. Sections headers will not have a value +and all the contents of a section will be indented two spaces from the header. +Each section might have multiple array entries the start of which is designated +by a (-). + +Mappings +-------- + +kernel + The kernel version that generated the dump (UTS_RELEASE). + +module + The module that generated the crashdump. + +time + The kernel time at crash formated as seconds.microseconds. + +comm + Comm string for the binary that generated the fault. + +cmdline + Command line for the binary that generated the fault. + +revision + ID of the GPU that generated the crash formatted as + core.major.minor.patchlevel separated by dots. + +rbbm-status + The current value of RBBM_STATUS which shows what top level GPU + components are in use at the time of crash. + +ringbuffer + Section containing the contents of each ringbuffer. Each ringbuffer is + identified with an id number. + + id + Ringbuffer ID (0 based index). Each ringbuffer in the section + will have its own unique id. + iova + GPU address of the ringbuffer. + + last-fence + The last fence that was issued on the ringbuffer + + retired-fence + The last fence retired on the ringbuffer. + + rptr + The current read pointer (rptr) for the ringbuffer. + + wptr + The current write pointer (wptr) for the ringbuffer. + + size + Maximum size of the ringbuffer programmed in the hardware. + + data + The contents of the ring encoded as ascii85. Only the used + portions of the ring will be printed. + +bo + List of buffers from the hanging submission if available. + Each buffer object will have a uinque iova. + + iova + GPU address of the buffer object. + + size + Allocated size of the buffer object. + + data + The contents of the buffer object encoded with ascii85. Only + Trailing zeros at the end of the buffer will be skipped. + +registers + Set of registers values. Each entry is on its own line enclosed + by brackets { }. + + offset + Byte offset of the register from the start of the + GPU memory region. + + value + Hexadecimal value of the register. + +registers-hlsq + (5xx only) Register values from the HLSQ aperture. + Same format as the register section. diff --git a/Documentation/gpu/v3d.rst b/Documentation/gpu/v3d.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..543f7fbf526e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/gpu/v3d.rst @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +===================================== + drm/v3d Broadcom V3D Graphics Driver +===================================== + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/v3d/v3d_drv.c + :doc: Broadcom V3D Graphics Driver + +GPU buffer object (BO) management +--------------------------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/v3d/v3d_bo.c + :doc: V3D GEM BO management support + +Address space management +=========================================== +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/v3d/v3d_mmu.c + :doc: Broadcom V3D MMU + +GPU Scheduling +=========================================== +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/v3d/v3d_sched.c + :doc: Broadcom V3D scheduling + +Interrupts +-------------- + +.. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/v3d/v3d_irq.c + :doc: Interrupt management for the V3D engine diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmpowernv b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmpowernv index 8826ba29db36..56468258711f 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmpowernv +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmpowernv @@ -33,9 +33,48 @@ fanX_input Measured RPM value. fanX_min Threshold RPM for alert generation. fanX_fault 0: No fail condition 1: Failing fan + tempX_input Measured ambient temperature. tempX_max Threshold ambient temperature for alert generation. -inX_input Measured power supply voltage +tempX_highest Historical maximum temperature +tempX_lowest Historical minimum temperature +tempX_enable Enable/disable all temperature sensors belonging to the + sub-group. In POWER9, this attribute corresponds to + each OCC. Using this attribute each OCC can be asked to + disable/enable all of its temperature sensors. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + +inX_input Measured power supply voltage (millivolt) inX_fault 0: No fail condition. 1: Failing power supply. -power1_input System power consumption (microWatt) +inX_highest Historical maximum voltage +inX_lowest Historical minimum voltage +inX_enable Enable/disable all voltage sensors belonging to the + sub-group. In POWER9, this attribute corresponds to + each OCC. Using this attribute each OCC can be asked to + disable/enable all of its voltage sensors. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + +powerX_input Power consumption (microWatt) +powerX_input_highest Historical maximum power +powerX_input_lowest Historical minimum power +powerX_enable Enable/disable all power sensors belonging to the + sub-group. In POWER9, this attribute corresponds to + each OCC. Using this attribute each OCC can be asked to + disable/enable all of its power sensors. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + +currX_input Measured current (milliampere) +currX_highest Historical maximum current +currX_lowest Historical minimum current +currX_enable Enable/disable all current sensors belonging to the + sub-group. In POWER9, this attribute corresponds to + each OCC. Using this attribute each OCC can be asked to + disable/enable all of its current sensors. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + +energyX_input Cumulative energy (microJoule) diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 index 9ba6587b7657..b2de8fa49273 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 @@ -16,6 +16,11 @@ Supported chips: Prefixes: 'max34446' Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34446.pdf + * Maxim MAX34451 + PMBus 16-Channel V/I Monitor and 12-Channel Sequencer/Marginer + Prefixes: 'max34451' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX34451.pdf * Maxim MAX34460 PMBus 12-Channel Voltage Monitor & Sequencer Prefix: 'max34460' @@ -36,9 +41,10 @@ Description This driver supports hardware monitoring for Maxim MAX34440 PMBus 6-Channel Power-Supply Manager, MAX34441 PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller, and MAX34446 PMBus Power-Supply Data Logger. -It also supports the MAX34460 and MAX34461 PMBus Voltage Monitor & Sequencers. -The MAX34460 supports 12 voltage channels, and the MAX34461 supports 16 voltage -channels. +It also supports the MAX34451, MAX34460, and MAX34461 PMBus Voltage Monitor & +Sequencers. The MAX34451 supports monitoring voltage or current of 12 channels +based on GIN pins. The MAX34460 supports 12 voltage channels, and the MAX34461 +supports 16 voltage channels. The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. @@ -93,7 +99,7 @@ curr[1-6]_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. curr[1-6]_crit Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. curr[1-6]_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status. curr[1-6]_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status. -curr[1-4]_average Historical average current (MAX34446 only). +curr[1-4]_average Historical average current (MAX34446/34451 only). curr[1-6]_highest Historical maximum current. curr[1-6]_reset_history Write any value to reset history. @@ -123,5 +129,7 @@ temp[1-8]_reset_history Write any value to reset history. temp7 and temp8 attributes only exist for MAX34440. MAX34446 only supports temp[1-3]. +MAX34451 supports attribute groups in[1-16] (or curr[1-16] based on input pins) +and temp[1-5]. MAX34460 supports attribute groups in[1-12] and temp[1-5]. MAX34461 supports attribute groups in[1-16] and temp[1-5]. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/mlxreg-fan b/Documentation/hwmon/mlxreg-fan new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fc531c6978d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/mlxreg-fan @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +Kernel driver mlxreg-fan +======================== + +Provides FAN control for the next Mellanox systems: +QMB700, equipped with 40x200GbE InfiniBand ports; +MSN3700, equipped with 32x200GbE or 16x400GbE Ethernet ports; +MSN3410, equipped with 6x400GbE plus 48x50GbE Ethernet ports; +MSN3800, equipped with 64x1000GbE Ethernet ports; +These are the Top of the Rack systems, equipped with Mellanox switch +board with Mellanox Quantum or Spectrume-2 devices. +FAN controller is implemented by the programmable device logic. + +The default registers offsets set within the programmable device is as +following: +- pwm1 0xe3 +- fan1 (tacho1) 0xe4 +- fan2 (tacho2) 0xe5 +- fan3 (tacho3) 0xe6 +- fan4 (tacho4) 0xe7 +- fan5 (tacho5) 0xe8 +- fan6 (tacho6) 0xe9 +- fan7 (tacho7) 0xea +- fan8 (tacho8) 0xeb +- fan9 (tacho9) 0xec +- fan10 (tacho10) 0xed +- fan11 (tacho11) 0xee +- fan12 (tacho12) 0xef +This setup can be re-programmed with other registers. + +Author: Vadim Pasternak <vadimp@mellanox.com> + +Description +----------- + +The driver implements a simple interface for driving a fan connected to +a PWM output and tachometer inputs. +This driver obtains PWM and tachometers registers location according to +the system configuration and creates FAN/PWM hwmon objects and a cooling +device. PWM and tachometers are sensed through the on-board programmable +device, which exports its register map. This device could be attached to +any bus type, for which register mapping is supported. +Single instance is created with one PWM control, up to 12 tachometers and +one cooling device. It could be as many instances as programmable device +supports. +The driver exposes the fan to the user space through the hwmon's and +thermal's sysfs interfaces. + +/sys files in hwmon subsystem +----------------------------- + +fan[1-12]_fault - RO files for tachometers TACH1-TACH12 fault indication +fan[1-12]_input - RO files for tachometers TACH1-TACH12 input (in RPM) +pwm1 - RW file for fan[1-12] target duty cycle (0..255) + +/sys files in thermal subsystem +------------------------------- + +cur_state - RW file for current cooling state of the cooling device + (0..max_state) +max_state - RO file for maximum cooling state of the cooling device diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan b/Documentation/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6156ef7398e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/npcm750-pwm-fan @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Kernel driver npcm750-pwm-fan +============================= + +Supported chips: + NUVOTON NPCM750/730/715/705 + +Authors: + <tomer.maimon@nuvoton.com> + +Description: +------------ +This driver implements support for NUVOTON NPCM7XX PWM and Fan Tacho +controller. The PWM controller supports up to 8 PWM outputs. The Fan tacho +controller supports up to 16 tachometer inputs. + +The driver provides the following sensor accesses in sysfs: + +fanX_input ro provide current fan rotation value in RPM as reported + by the fan to the device. + +pwmX rw get or set PWM fan control value. This is an integer + value between 0(off) and 255(full speed). diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/raspberrypi-hwmon b/Documentation/hwmon/raspberrypi-hwmon new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3c92e2cb52d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/raspberrypi-hwmon @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Kernel driver raspberrypi-hwmon +=============================== + +Supported boards: + * Raspberry Pi A+ (via GPIO on SoC) + * Raspberry Pi B+ (via GPIO on SoC) + * Raspberry Pi 2 B (via GPIO on SoC) + * Raspberry Pi 3 B (via GPIO on port expander) + * Raspberry Pi 3 B+ (via PMIC) + +Author: Stefan Wahren <stefan.wahren@i2se.com> + +Description +----------- + +This driver periodically polls a mailbox property of the VC4 firmware to detect +undervoltage conditions. + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +in0_lcrit_alarm Undervoltage alarm diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index fc337c317c67..2b9e1005d88b 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -171,6 +171,13 @@ in[0-*]_label Suggested voltage channel label. user-space. RO +in[0-*]_enable + Enable or disable the sensors. + When disabled the sensor read will return -ENODATA. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + RW + cpu[0-*]_vid CPU core reference voltage. Unit: millivolt RO @@ -236,6 +243,13 @@ fan[1-*]_label Suggested fan channel label. In all other cases, the label is provided by user-space. RO +fan[1-*]_enable + Enable or disable the sensors. + When disabled the sensor read will return -ENODATA. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + RW + Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with fans. @@ -409,6 +423,13 @@ temp_reset_history Reset temp_lowest and temp_highest for all sensors WO +temp[1-*]_enable + Enable or disable the sensors. + When disabled the sensor read will return -ENODATA. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + RW + Some chips measure temperature using external thermistors and an ADC, and report the temperature measurement as a voltage. Converting this voltage back to a temperature (or the other way around for limits) requires @@ -468,6 +489,13 @@ curr_reset_history Reset currX_lowest and currX_highest for all sensors WO +curr[1-*]_enable + Enable or disable the sensors. + When disabled the sensor read will return -ENODATA. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + RW + Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with currents. ********* @@ -566,6 +594,13 @@ power[1-*]_crit Critical maximum power. Unit: microWatt RW +power[1-*]_enable Enable or disable the sensors. + When disabled the sensor read will return + -ENODATA. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + RW + Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with power readings. ********** @@ -576,6 +611,12 @@ energy[1-*]_input Cumulative energy use Unit: microJoule RO +energy[1-*]_enable Enable or disable the sensors. + When disabled the sensor read will return + -ENODATA. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + RW ************ * Humidity * @@ -586,6 +627,13 @@ humidity[1-*]_input Humidity RO +humidity[1-*]_enable Enable or disable the sensors + When disabled the sensor read will return + -ENODATA. + 1: Enable + 0: Disable + RW + ********** * Alarms * ********** diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index 65514c251318..d1ee484a787d 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 @@ -21,24 +21,21 @@ Supported adapters: * Intel DH89xxCC (PCH) * Intel Panther Point (PCH) * Intel Lynx Point (PCH) - * Intel Lynx Point-LP (PCH) * Intel Avoton (SOC) * Intel Wellsburg (PCH) * Intel Coleto Creek (PCH) * Intel Wildcat Point (PCH) - * Intel Wildcat Point-LP (PCH) * Intel BayTrail (SOC) * Intel Braswell (SOC) - * Intel Sunrise Point-H (PCH) - * Intel Sunrise Point-LP (PCH) - * Intel Kaby Lake-H (PCH) + * Intel Sunrise Point (PCH) + * Intel Kaby Lake (PCH) * Intel DNV (SOC) * Intel Broxton (SOC) * Intel Lewisburg (PCH) * Intel Gemini Lake (SOC) - * Intel Cannon Lake-H (PCH) - * Intel Cannon Lake-LP (PCH) + * Intel Cannon Lake (PCH) * Intel Cedar Fork (PCH) + * Intel Ice Lake (PCH) Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection b/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection index e0c4f775e239..a4ce62090fd5 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection +++ b/Documentation/i2c/gpio-fault-injection @@ -34,21 +34,48 @@ I2C specification version 4, section 3.1.16) using the helpers of the Linux I2C core (see 'struct bus_recovery_info'). However, the bus recovery will not succeed because SDA is still pinned low until you manually release it again with "echo 1 > sda". A test with an automatic release can be done with the -'incomplete_transfer' file. +following class of fault injectors. -"incomplete_transfer" ---------------------- +Introduction to incomplete transfers +------------------------------------ + +The following fault injectors create situations where SDA will be held low by a +device. Bus recovery should be able to fix these situations. But please note: +there are I2C client devices which detect a stuck SDA on their side and release +it on their own after a few milliseconds. Also, there might be an external +device deglitching and monitoring the I2C bus. It could also detect a stuck SDA +and will init a bus recovery on its own. If you want to implement bus recovery +in a bus master driver, make sure you checked your hardware setup for such +devices before. And always verify with a scope or logic analyzer! + +"incomplete_address_phase" +-------------------------- This file is write only and you need to write the address of an existing I2C -client device to it. Then, a transfer to this device will be started, but it -will stop at the ACK phase after the address of the client has been +client device to it. Then, a read transfer to this device will be started, but +it will stop at the ACK phase after the address of the client has been transmitted. Because the device will ACK its presence, this results in SDA being pulled low by the device while SCL is high. So, similar to the "sda" file above, the bus master under test should detect this condition and try a bus recovery. This time, however, it should succeed and the device should release -SDA after toggling SCL. Please note: there are I2C client devices which detect -a stuck SDA on their side and release it on their own after a few milliseconds. -Also, there are external devices deglitching and monitoring the I2C bus. They -can also detect a stuck SDA and will init a bus recovery on their own. If you -want to implement bus recovery in a bus master driver, make sure you checked -your hardware setup carefully before. +SDA after toggling SCL. + +"incomplete_write_byte" +----------------------- + +Similar to above, this file is write only and you need to write the address of +an existing I2C client device to it. + +The injector will again stop at one ACK phase, so the device will keep SDA low +because it acknowledges data. However, there are two differences compared to +'incomplete_address_phase': + +a) the message sent out will be a write message +b) after the address byte, a 0x00 byte will be transferred. Then, stop at ACK. + +This is a highly delicate state, the device is set up to write any data to +register 0x00 (if it has registers) when further clock pulses happen on SCL. +This is why bus recovery (up to 9 clock pulses) must either check SDA or send +additional STOP conditions to ensure the bus has been released. Otherwise +random data will be written to a device! + diff --git a/Documentation/index.rst b/Documentation/index.rst index fdc585703498..5db7e87c7cb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/index.rst @@ -3,6 +3,8 @@ You can adapt this file completely to your liking, but it should at least contain the root `toctree` directive. +.. _linux_doc: + The Linux Kernel documentation ============================== @@ -90,6 +92,7 @@ needed). crypto/index filesystems/index vm/index + bpf/index Architecture-specific documentation ----------------------------------- @@ -102,29 +105,24 @@ implementation. sh/index -Korean translations -------------------- - -.. toctree:: - :maxdepth: 1 - - translations/ko_KR/index +Filesystem Documentation +------------------------ -Chinese translations --------------------- +The documentation in this section are provided by specific filesystem +subprojects. .. toctree:: - :maxdepth: 1 + :maxdepth: 2 - translations/zh_CN/index + filesystems/ext4/index -Japanese translations ---------------------- +Translations +------------ .. toctree:: - :maxdepth: 1 + :maxdepth: 2 - translations/ja_JP/index + translations/index Indices and tables ================== diff --git a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.rst b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.rst index b51751a0cd5d..6be70342e709 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.rst +++ b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.rst @@ -310,12 +310,12 @@ ABS_MT_TOOL_Y ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE The type of approaching tool. A lot of kernel drivers cannot distinguish between different tool types, such as a finger or a pen. In such cases, the - event should be omitted. The protocol currently supports MT_TOOL_FINGER, - MT_TOOL_PEN, and MT_TOOL_PALM [#f2]_. For type B devices, this event is - handled by input core; drivers should instead use - input_mt_report_slot_state(). A contact's ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE may change over - time while still touching the device, because the firmware may not be able - to determine which tool is being used when it first appears. + event should be omitted. The protocol currently mainly supports + MT_TOOL_FINGER, MT_TOOL_PEN, and MT_TOOL_PALM [#f2]_. + For type B devices, this event is handled by input core; drivers should + instead use input_mt_report_slot_state(). A contact's ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE may + change over time while still touching the device, because the firmware may + not be able to determine which tool is being used when it first appears. ABS_MT_BLOB_ID The BLOB_ID groups several packets together into one arbitrarily shaped diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 480c8609dc58..13a7c999c04a 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -166,6 +166,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'P' all linux/soundcard.h conflict! 'P' 60-6F sound/sscape_ioctl.h conflict! 'P' 00-0F drivers/usb/class/usblp.c conflict! +'P' 01-09 drivers/misc/pci_endpoint_test.c conflict! 'Q' all linux/soundcard.h 'R' 00-1F linux/random.h conflict! 'R' 01 linux/rfkill.h conflict! @@ -274,6 +275,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'v' 00-1F linux/ext2_fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-1F linux/fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-0F linux/sonypi.h conflict! +'v' 00-0F media/v4l2-subdev.h conflict! 'v' C0-FF linux/meye.h conflict! 'w' all CERN SCI driver 'y' 00-1F packet based user level communications @@ -322,6 +324,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 0xB3 00 linux/mmc/ioctl.h 0xB4 00-0F linux/gpio.h <mailto:linux-gpio@vger.kernel.org> 0xB5 00-0F uapi/linux/rpmsg.h <mailto:linux-remoteproc@vger.kernel.org> +0xB6 all linux/fpga-dfl.h 0xC0 00-0F linux/usb/iowarrior.h 0xCA 00-0F uapi/misc/cxl.h 0xCA 10-2F uapi/misc/ocxl.h diff --git a/Documentation/iostats.txt b/Documentation/iostats.txt index 04d394a2e06c..49df45f90e8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/iostats.txt +++ b/Documentation/iostats.txt @@ -31,6 +31,9 @@ Here are examples of these different formats:: 3 0 hda 446216 784926 9550688 4382310 424847 312726 5922052 19310380 0 3376340 23705160 3 1 hda1 35486 38030 38030 38030 + 4.18+ diskstats: + 3 0 hda 446216 784926 9550688 4382310 424847 312726 5922052 19310380 0 3376340 23705160 0 0 0 0 + On 2.4 you might execute ``grep 'hda ' /proc/partitions``. On 2.6+, you have a choice of ``cat /sys/block/hda/stat`` or ``grep 'hda ' /proc/diskstats``. @@ -101,6 +104,18 @@ Field 11 -- weighted # of milliseconds spent doing I/Os last update of this field. This can provide an easy measure of both I/O completion time and the backlog that may be accumulating. +Field 12 -- # of discards completed + This is the total number of discards completed successfully. + +Field 13 -- # of discards merged + See the description of field 2 + +Field 14 -- # of sectors discarded + This is the total number of sectors discarded successfully. + +Field 15 -- # of milliseconds spent discarding + This is the total number of milliseconds spent by all discards (as + measured from __make_request() to end_that_request_last()). To avoid introducing performance bottlenecks, no locks are held while modifying these counters. This implies that minor inaccuracies may be diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt index 6c9c69ec3986..8390c360d4b3 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -50,6 +50,27 @@ LDFLAGS_MODULE -------------------------------------------------- Additional options used for $(LD) when linking modules. +HOSTCFLAGS +-------------------------------------------------- +Additional flags to be passed to $(HOSTCC) when building host programs. + +HOSTCXXFLAGS +-------------------------------------------------- +Additional flags to be passed to $(HOSTCXX) when building host programs. + +HOSTLDFLAGS +-------------------------------------------------- +Additional flags to be passed when linking host programs. + +HOSTLDLIBS +-------------------------------------------------- +Additional libraries to link against when building host programs. + +KBUILD_KCONFIG +-------------------------------------------------- +Set the top-level Kconfig file to the value of this environment +variable. The default name is "Kconfig". + KBUILD_VERBOSE -------------------------------------------------- Set the kbuild verbosity. Can be assigned same values as "V=...". @@ -88,7 +109,8 @@ In most cases the name of the architecture is the same as the directory name found in the arch/ directory. But some architectures such as x86 and sparc have aliases. x86: i386 for 32 bit, x86_64 for 64 bit -sparc: sparc for 32 bit, sparc64 for 64 bit +sh: sh for 32 bit, sh64 for 64 bit +sparc: sparc32 for 32 bit, sparc64 for 64 bit CROSS_COMPILE -------------------------------------------------- @@ -148,15 +170,6 @@ stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, INSTALL_MOD_STRIP value will be used as the options to the strip command. -INSTALL_FW_PATH --------------------------------------------------- -INSTALL_FW_PATH specifies where to install the firmware blobs. -The default value is: - - $(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/firmware - -The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored. - INSTALL_HDR_PATH -------------------------------------------------- INSTALL_HDR_PATH specifies where to install user space headers when diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt index 3534a84d206c..c54cb7cb9ff4 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ choices: This defines a choice group and accepts any of the above attributes as options. A choice can only be of type bool or tristate. If no type is -specified for a choice, it's type will be determined by the type of +specified for a choice, its type will be determined by the type of the first choice element in the group or remain unknown if none of the choice elements have a type specified, as well. @@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ A choice accepts another option "optional", which allows to set the choice to 'n' and no entry needs to be selected. If no [symbol] is associated with a choice, then you can not have multiple definitions of that choice. If a [symbol] is associated to the choice, -then you may define the same choice (ie. with the same entries) in another +then you may define the same choice (i.e. with the same entries) in another place. comment: @@ -430,6 +430,12 @@ This sets the config program's title bar if the config program chooses to use it. It should be placed at the top of the configuration, before any other statement. +'#' Kconfig source file comment: + +An unquoted '#' character anywhere in a source file line indicates +the beginning of a source file comment. The remainder of that line +is a comment. + Kconfig hints ------------- diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt index 7233118f3a05..68c82914c0f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt @@ -2,9 +2,9 @@ This file contains some assistance for using "make *config". Use "make help" to list all of the possible configuration targets. -The xconfig ('qconf') and menuconfig ('mconf') programs also -have embedded help text. Be sure to check it for navigation, -search, and other general help text. +The xconfig ('qconf'), menuconfig ('mconf'), and nconfig ('nconf') +programs also have embedded help text. Be sure to check that for +navigation, search, and other general help text. ====================================================================== General @@ -17,13 +17,16 @@ this happens, using a previously working .config file and running for you, so you may find that you need to see what NEW kernel symbols have been introduced. -To see a list of new config symbols when using "make oldconfig", use +To see a list of new config symbols, use cp user/some/old.config .config make listnewconfig and the config program will list any new symbols, one per line. +Alternatively, you can use the brute force method: + + make oldconfig scripts/diffconfig .config.old .config | less ______________________________________________________________________ @@ -160,7 +163,7 @@ Searching in menuconfig: This lists all config symbols that contain "hotplug", e.g., HOTPLUG_CPU, MEMORY_HOTPLUG. - For search help, enter / followed TAB-TAB-TAB (to highlight + For search help, enter / followed by TAB-TAB (to highlight <Help>) and Enter. This will tell you that you can also use regular expressions (regexes) in the search string, so if you are not interested in MEMORY_HOTPLUG, you could try @@ -203,6 +206,39 @@ Example: ====================================================================== +nconfig +-------------------------------------------------- + +nconfig is an alternate text-based configurator. It lists function +keys across the bottom of the terminal (window) that execute commands. +You can also just use the corresponding numeric key to execute the +commands unless you are in a data entry window. E.g., instead of F6 +for Save, you can just press 6. + +Use F1 for Global help or F3 for the Short help menu. + +Searching in nconfig: + + You can search either in the menu entry "prompt" strings + or in the configuration symbols. + + Use / to begin a search through the menu entries. This does + not support regular expressions. Use <Down> or <Up> for + Next hit and Previous hit, respectively. Use <Esc> to + terminate the search mode. + + F8 (SymSearch) searches the configuration symbols for the + given string or regular expression (regex). + +NCONFIG_MODE +-------------------------------------------------- +This mode shows all sub-menus in one large tree. + +Example: + make NCONFIG_MODE=single_menu nconfig + + +====================================================================== xconfig -------------------------------------------------- @@ -230,8 +266,7 @@ gconfig Searching in gconfig: - None (gconfig isn't maintained as well as xconfig or menuconfig); - however, gconfig does have a few more viewing choices than - xconfig does. + There is no search command in gconfig. However, gconfig does + have several different viewing choices, modes, and options. ### diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index 048fc39a6b91..766355b1d221 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ Both possibilities are described in the following. When compiling host programs, it is possible to set specific flags. The programs will always be compiled utilising $(HOSTCC) passed - the options specified in $(HOSTCFLAGS). + the options specified in $(KBUILD_HOSTCFLAGS). To set flags that will take effect for all host programs created in that Makefile, use the variable HOST_EXTRACFLAGS. @@ -1105,6 +1105,12 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly): target: source(s) FORCE #WRONG!# $(call if_changed, ld/objcopy/gzip/...) + Note: if_changed should not be used more than once per target. + It stores the executed command in a corresponding .cmd + file and multiple calls would result in overwrites and + unwanted results when the target is up to date and only the + tests on changed commands trigger execution of commands. + ld Link target. Often, LDFLAGS_$@ is used to set specific options to ld. diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst index 9999c8468293..d824e4feaff3 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst +++ b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +.. _kernel_hacking_hack: + ============================================ Unreliable Guide To Hacking The Linux Kernel ============================================ diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/index.rst b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/index.rst index fcb0eda3cca3..f53027652290 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/index.rst @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +.. _kernel_hacking: + ===================== Kernel Hacking Guides ===================== diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst index f937c0fd11aa..519673df0e82 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst +++ b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +.. _kernel_hacking_lock: + =========================== Unreliable Guide To Locking =========================== @@ -177,7 +179,7 @@ perfect world). Note that you can also use :c:func:`spin_lock_irq()` or :c:func:`spin_lock_irqsave()` here, which stop hardware interrupts -as well: see `Hard IRQ Context <#hardirq-context>`__. +as well: see `Hard IRQ Context <#hard-irq-context>`__. This works perfectly for UP as well: the spin lock vanishes, and this macro simply becomes :c:func:`local_bh_disable()` @@ -228,7 +230,7 @@ The Same Softirq ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ The same softirq can run on the other CPUs: you can use a per-CPU array -(see `Per-CPU Data <#per-cpu>`__) for better performance. If you're +(see `Per-CPU Data <#per-cpu-data>`__) for better performance. If you're going so far as to use a softirq, you probably care about scalable performance enough to justify the extra complexity. diff --git a/Documentation/kprobes.txt b/Documentation/kprobes.txt index cb3b0de83fc6..10f4499e677c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kprobes.txt +++ b/Documentation/kprobes.txt @@ -80,6 +80,26 @@ After the instruction is single-stepped, Kprobes executes the "post_handler," if any, that is associated with the kprobe. Execution then continues with the instruction following the probepoint. +Changing Execution Path +----------------------- + +Since kprobes can probe into a running kernel code, it can change the +register set, including instruction pointer. This operation requires +maximum care, such as keeping the stack frame, recovering the execution +path etc. Since it operates on a running kernel and needs deep knowledge +of computer architecture and concurrent computing, you can easily shoot +your foot. + +If you change the instruction pointer (and set up other related +registers) in pre_handler, you must return !0 so that kprobes stops +single stepping and just returns to the given address. +This also means post_handler should not be called anymore. + +Note that this operation may be harder on some architectures which use +TOC (Table of Contents) for function call, since you have to setup a new +TOC for your function in your module, and recover the old one after +returning from it. + Return Probes ------------- @@ -262,7 +282,7 @@ is optimized, that modification is ignored. Thus, if you want to tweak the kernel's execution path, you need to suppress optimization, using one of the following techniques: -- Specify an empty function for the kprobe's post_handler or break_handler. +- Specify an empty function for the kprobe's post_handler. or @@ -474,7 +494,7 @@ error occurs during registration, all probes in the array, up to the bad probe, are safely unregistered before the register_*probes function returns. -- kps/rps/jps: an array of pointers to ``*probe`` data structures +- kps/rps: an array of pointers to ``*probe`` data structures - num: the number of the array entries. .. note:: @@ -566,12 +586,11 @@ the same handler) may run concurrently on different CPUs. Kprobes does not use mutexes or allocate memory except during registration and unregistration. -Probe handlers are run with preemption disabled. Depending on the -architecture and optimization state, handlers may also run with -interrupts disabled (e.g., kretprobe handlers and optimized kprobe -handlers run without interrupt disabled on x86/x86-64). In any case, -your handler should not yield the CPU (e.g., by attempting to acquire -a semaphore). +Probe handlers are run with preemption disabled or interrupt disabled, +which depends on the architecture and optimization state. (e.g., +kretprobe handlers and optimized kprobe handlers run without interrupt +disabled on x86/x86-64). In any case, your handler should not yield +the CPU (e.g., by attempting to acquire a semaphore, or waiting I/O). Since a return probe is implemented by replacing the return address with the trampoline's address, stack backtraces and calls diff --git a/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt index 34c3a1b50b9a..f0ed7c30e695 100644 --- a/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/locking/ww-mutex-design.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Wait/Wound Deadlock-Proof Mutex Design +Wound/Wait Deadlock-Proof Mutex Design ====================================== Please read mutex-design.txt first, as it applies to wait/wound mutexes too. @@ -32,10 +32,26 @@ the oldest task) wins, and the one with the higher reservation id (i.e. the younger task) unlocks all of the buffers that it has already locked, and then tries again. -In the RDBMS literature this deadlock handling approach is called wait/wound: -The older tasks waits until it can acquire the contended lock. The younger tasks -needs to back off and drop all the locks it is currently holding, i.e. the -younger task is wounded. +In the RDBMS literature, a reservation ticket is associated with a transaction. +and the deadlock handling approach is called Wait-Die. The name is based on +the actions of a locking thread when it encounters an already locked mutex. +If the transaction holding the lock is younger, the locking transaction waits. +If the transaction holding the lock is older, the locking transaction backs off +and dies. Hence Wait-Die. +There is also another algorithm called Wound-Wait: +If the transaction holding the lock is younger, the locking transaction +wounds the transaction holding the lock, requesting it to die. +If the transaction holding the lock is older, it waits for the other +transaction. Hence Wound-Wait. +The two algorithms are both fair in that a transaction will eventually succeed. +However, the Wound-Wait algorithm is typically stated to generate fewer backoffs +compared to Wait-Die, but is, on the other hand, associated with more work than +Wait-Die when recovering from a backoff. Wound-Wait is also a preemptive +algorithm in that transactions are wounded by other transactions, and that +requires a reliable way to pick up up the wounded condition and preempt the +running transaction. Note that this is not the same as process preemption. A +Wound-Wait transaction is considered preempted when it dies (returning +-EDEADLK) following a wound. Concepts -------- @@ -47,18 +63,20 @@ Acquire context: To ensure eventual forward progress it is important the a task trying to acquire locks doesn't grab a new reservation id, but keeps the one it acquired when starting the lock acquisition. This ticket is stored in the acquire context. Furthermore the acquire context keeps track of debugging state -to catch w/w mutex interface abuse. +to catch w/w mutex interface abuse. An acquire context is representing a +transaction. W/w class: In contrast to normal mutexes the lock class needs to be explicit for -w/w mutexes, since it is required to initialize the acquire context. +w/w mutexes, since it is required to initialize the acquire context. The lock +class also specifies what algorithm to use, Wound-Wait or Wait-Die. Furthermore there are three different class of w/w lock acquire functions: * Normal lock acquisition with a context, using ww_mutex_lock. -* Slowpath lock acquisition on the contending lock, used by the wounded task - after having dropped all already acquired locks. These functions have the - _slow postfix. +* Slowpath lock acquisition on the contending lock, used by the task that just + killed its transaction after having dropped all already acquired locks. + These functions have the _slow postfix. From a simple semantics point-of-view the _slow functions are not strictly required, since simply calling the normal ww_mutex_lock functions on the @@ -90,6 +108,12 @@ provided. Usage ----- +The algorithm (Wait-Die vs Wound-Wait) is chosen by using either +DEFINE_WW_CLASS() (Wound-Wait) or DEFINE_WD_CLASS() (Wait-Die) +As a rough rule of thumb, use Wound-Wait iff you +expect the number of simultaneous competing transactions to be typically small, +and you want to reduce the number of rollbacks. + Three different ways to acquire locks within the same w/w class. Common definitions for methods #1 and #2: @@ -220,7 +244,7 @@ mutexes are a natural fit for such a case for two reasons: Note that this approach differs in two important ways from the above methods: - Since the list of objects is dynamically constructed (and might very well be - different when retrying due to hitting the -EDEADLK wound condition) there's + different when retrying due to hitting the -EDEADLK die condition) there's no need to keep any object on a persistent list when it's not locked. We can therefore move the list_head into the object itself. - On the other hand the dynamic object list construction also means that the -EALREADY return @@ -312,12 +336,23 @@ Design: We maintain the following invariants for the wait list: (1) Waiters with an acquire context are sorted by stamp order; waiters without an acquire context are interspersed in FIFO order. - (2) Among waiters with contexts, only the first one can have other locks - acquired already (ctx->acquired > 0). Note that this waiter may come - after other waiters without contexts in the list. + (2) For Wait-Die, among waiters with contexts, only the first one can have + other locks acquired already (ctx->acquired > 0). Note that this waiter + may come after other waiters without contexts in the list. + + The Wound-Wait preemption is implemented with a lazy-preemption scheme: + The wounded status of the transaction is checked only when there is + contention for a new lock and hence a true chance of deadlock. In that + situation, if the transaction is wounded, it backs off, clears the + wounded status and retries. A great benefit of implementing preemption in + this way is that the wounded transaction can identify a contending lock to + wait for before restarting the transaction. Just blindly restarting the + transaction would likely make the transaction end up in a situation where + it would have to back off again. In general, not much contention is expected. The locks are typically used to - serialize access to resources for devices. + serialize access to resources for devices, and optimization focus should + therefore be directed towards the uncontended cases. Lockdep: Special care has been taken to warn for as many cases of api abuse diff --git a/Documentation/media/audio.h.rst.exceptions b/Documentation/media/audio.h.rst.exceptions index f40f3cbfe4c9..940458774cf6 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/audio.h.rst.exceptions +++ b/Documentation/media/audio.h.rst.exceptions @@ -1,9 +1,6 @@ # Ignore header name ignore define _DVBAUDIO_H_ -# Typedef pointing to structs -replace typedef audio_karaoke_t :c:type:`audio_karaoke` - # Undocumented audio caps, as this is a deprecated API anyway ignore define AUDIO_CAP_DTS ignore define AUDIO_CAP_LPCM diff --git a/Documentation/media/media.h.rst.exceptions b/Documentation/media/media.h.rst.exceptions index 83d7f7c722fb..684fe9c86dee 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/media.h.rst.exceptions +++ b/Documentation/media/media.h.rst.exceptions @@ -6,10 +6,10 @@ ignore define MEDIA_API_VERSION ignore define MEDIA_ENT_F_BASE ignore define MEDIA_ENT_F_OLD_BASE ignore define MEDIA_ENT_F_OLD_SUBDEV_BASE +ignore define MEDIA_ENT_F_DTV_DECODER ignore define MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_BASE ignore define MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_BASE ignore define MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_BASE - #ignore legacy entity type macros ignore define MEDIA_ENT_TYPE_SHIFT ignore define MEDIA_ENT_TYPE_MASK diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/cec/cec-ioc-dqevent.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/cec/cec-ioc-dqevent.rst index b6fd86424fbb..8d5633e6ae04 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/cec/cec-ioc-dqevent.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/cec/cec-ioc-dqevent.rst @@ -179,6 +179,24 @@ it is guaranteed that the state did change in between the two events. capability set. When open() is called, the HPD pin can be read and if the HPD is high, then an initial event will be generated for that filehandle. + * .. _`CEC-EVENT-PIN-5V-LOW`: + + - ``CEC_EVENT_PIN_5V_LOW`` + - 6 + - Generated if the 5V pin goes from a high voltage to a low voltage. + Only applies to adapters that have the ``CEC_CAP_MONITOR_PIN`` + capability set. When open() is called, the 5V pin can be read and + if the 5V is low, then an initial event will be generated for that + filehandle. + * .. _`CEC-EVENT-PIN-5V-HIGH`: + + - ``CEC_EVENT_PIN_5V_HIGH`` + - 7 + - Generated if the 5V pin goes from a low voltage to a high voltage. + Only applies to adapters that have the ``CEC_CAP_MONITOR_PIN`` + capability set. When open() is called, the 5V pin can be read and + if the 5V is high, then an initial event will be generated for that + filehandle. .. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.0cm}|p{0.6cm}|p{10.9cm}| diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-get-pts.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-get-pts.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 2d1396b003de..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-get-pts.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _AUDIO_GET_PTS: - -============= -AUDIO_GET_PTS -============= - -Name ----- - -AUDIO_GET_PTS - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(int fd, AUDIO_GET_PTS, __u64 *pts) - :name: AUDIO_GET_PTS - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - - - - __u64 \*pts - - - Returns the 33-bit timestamp as defined in ITU T-REC-H.222.0 / - ISO/IEC 13818-1. - - The PTS should belong to the currently played frame if possible, - but may also be a value close to it like the PTS of the last - decoded frame or the last PTS extracted by the PES parser. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl is obsolete. Do not use in new drivers. If you need this -functionality, then please contact the linux-media mailing list -(`https://linuxtv.org/lists.php <https://linuxtv.org/lists.php>`__). - -This ioctl call asks the Audio Device to return the current PTS -timestamp. - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-attributes.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-attributes.rst deleted file mode 100644 index f0c6153ca80f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-attributes.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _AUDIO_SET_ATTRIBUTES: - -==================== -AUDIO_SET_ATTRIBUTES -==================== - -Name ----- - -AUDIO_SET_ATTRIBUTES - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated - - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, AUDIO_SET_ATTRIBUTES, struct audio_attributes *attr ) - :name: AUDIO_SET_ATTRIBUTES - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - - - - audio_attributes_t attr - - - audio attributes according to section ?? - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl is intended for DVD playback and allows you to set certain -information about the audio stream. - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EINVAL`` - - - attr is not a valid or supported attribute setting. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-ext-id.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-ext-id.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 8503c47f26bd..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-ext-id.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _AUDIO_SET_EXT_ID: - -================ -AUDIO_SET_EXT_ID -================ - -Name ----- - -AUDIO_SET_EXT_ID - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, AUDIO_SET_EXT_ID, int id) - :name: AUDIO_SET_EXT_ID - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - - - - int id - - - audio sub_stream_id - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl can be used to set the extension id for MPEG streams in DVD -playback. Only the first 3 bits are recognized. - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EINVAL`` - - - id is not a valid id. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-karaoke.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-karaoke.rst deleted file mode 100644 index c759952d88aa..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio-set-karaoke.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _AUDIO_SET_KARAOKE: - -================= -AUDIO_SET_KARAOKE -================= - -Name ----- - -AUDIO_SET_KARAOKE - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, AUDIO_SET_KARAOKE, struct audio_karaoke *karaoke) - :name: AUDIO_SET_KARAOKE - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - - - - audio_karaoke_t \*karaoke - - - karaoke settings according to section ??. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl allows one to set the mixer settings for a karaoke DVD. - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EINVAL`` - - - karaoke is not a valid or supported karaoke setting. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio_data_types.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio_data_types.rst index 6b93359d64f7..5bffa2c98a24 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio_data_types.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio_data_types.rst @@ -114,40 +114,3 @@ following bits set according to the hardwares capabilities. #define AUDIO_CAP_OGG 64 #define AUDIO_CAP_SDDS 128 #define AUDIO_CAP_AC3 256 - -.. c:type:: audio_karaoke - -The ioctl AUDIO_SET_KARAOKE uses the following format: - - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef - struct audio_karaoke { - int vocal1; - int vocal2; - int melody; - } audio_karaoke_t; - -If Vocal1 or Vocal2 are non-zero, they get mixed into left and right t -at 70% each. If both, Vocal1 and Vocal2 are non-zero, Vocal1 gets mixed -into the left channel and Vocal2 into the right channel at 100% each. Ff -Melody is non-zero, the melody channel gets mixed into left and right. - - -.. c:type:: audio_attributes - -The following attributes can be set by a call to AUDIO_SET_ATTRIBUTES: - - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef uint16_t audio_attributes_t; - /* bits: descr. */ - /* 15-13 audio coding mode (0=ac3, 2=mpeg1, 3=mpeg2ext, 4=LPCM, 6=DTS, */ - /* 12 multichannel extension */ - /* 11-10 audio type (0=not spec, 1=language included) */ - /* 9- 8 audio application mode (0=not spec, 1=karaoke, 2=surround) */ - /* 7- 6 Quantization / DRC (mpeg audio: 1=DRC exists)(lpcm: 0=16bit, */ - /* 5- 4 Sample frequency fs (0=48kHz, 1=96kHz) */ - /* 2- 0 number of audio channels (n+1 channels) */ diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio_function_calls.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio_function_calls.rst index 0bb56f0cfed4..7dba16285dab 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio_function_calls.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/audio_function_calls.rst @@ -22,13 +22,9 @@ Audio Function Calls audio-set-bypass-mode audio-channel-select audio-bilingual-channel-select - audio-get-pts audio-get-status audio-get-capabilities audio-clear-buffer audio-set-id audio-set-mixer audio-set-streamtype - audio-set-ext-id - audio-set-attributes - audio-set-karaoke diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-get-frame-rate.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-get-frame-rate.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 400042a854cf..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-get-frame-rate.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE: - -==================== -VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE -==================== - -Name ----- - -VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated. - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(int fd, VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE, unsigned int *rate) - :name: VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - .. row 2 - - - int request - - - Equals VIDEO_GET_FRAME_RATE for this command. - - - .. row 3 - - - unsigned int \*rate - - - Returns the framerate in number of frames per 1000 seconds. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl call asks the Video Device to return the current framerate. - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-get-navi.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-get-navi.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 114a9ac48b9e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-get-navi.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _VIDEO_GET_NAVI: - -============== -VIDEO_GET_NAVI -============== - -Name ----- - -VIDEO_GET_NAVI - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated. - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, VIDEO_GET_NAVI , struct video_navi_pack *navipack) - :name: VIDEO_GET_NAVI - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - .. row 2 - - - int request - - - Equals VIDEO_GET_NAVI for this command. - - - .. row 3 - - - video_navi_pack_t \*navipack - - - PCI or DSI pack (private stream 2) according to section ??. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl returns navigational information from the DVD stream. This is -especially needed if an encoded stream has to be decoded by the -hardware. - -.. c:type:: video_navi_pack - -.. code-block::c - - typedef struct video_navi_pack { - int length; /* 0 ... 1024 */ - __u8 data[1024]; - } video_navi_pack_t; - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EFAULT`` - - - driver is not able to return navigational information diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-attributes.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-attributes.rst deleted file mode 100644 index b2f11a6746e9..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-attributes.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTES: - -==================== -VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTES -==================== - -Name ----- - -VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTES - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated. - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTE ,video_attributes_t vattr) - :name: VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTE - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - .. row 2 - - - int request - - - Equals VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTE for this command. - - - .. row 3 - - - video_attributes_t vattr - - - video attributes according to section ??. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl is intended for DVD playback and allows you to set certain -information about the stream. Some hardware may not need this -information, but the call also tells the hardware to prepare for DVD -playback. - -.. c:type:: video_attributes_t - -.. code-block::c - - typedef __u16 video_attributes_t; - /* bits: descr. */ - /* 15-14 Video compression mode (0=MPEG-1, 1=MPEG-2) */ - /* 13-12 TV system (0=525/60, 1=625/50) */ - /* 11-10 Aspect ratio (0=4:3, 3=16:9) */ - /* 9- 8 permitted display mode on 4:3 monitor (0=both, 1=only pan-sca */ - /* 7 line 21-1 data present in GOP (1=yes, 0=no) */ - /* 6 line 21-2 data present in GOP (1=yes, 0=no) */ - /* 5- 3 source resolution (0=720x480/576, 1=704x480/576, 2=352x480/57 */ - /* 2 source letterboxed (1=yes, 0=no) */ - /* 0 film/camera mode (0=camera, 1=film (625/50 only)) */ - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EINVAL`` - - - input is not a valid attribute setting. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-highlight.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-highlight.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 90aeafd923b7..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-highlight.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _VIDEO_SET_HIGHLIGHT: - -=================== -VIDEO_SET_HIGHLIGHT -=================== - -Name ----- - -VIDEO_SET_HIGHLIGHT - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated. - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, VIDEO_SET_HIGHLIGHT, struct video_highlight *vhilite) - :name: VIDEO_SET_HIGHLIGHT - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - .. row 2 - - - int request - - - Equals VIDEO_SET_HIGHLIGHT for this command. - - - .. row 3 - - - video_highlight_t \*vhilite - - - SPU Highlight information according to section ??. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl sets the SPU highlight information for the menu access of a -DVD. - -.. c:type:: video_highlight - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef - struct video_highlight { - int active; /* 1=show highlight, 0=hide highlight */ - __u8 contrast1; /* 7- 4 Pattern pixel contrast */ - /* 3- 0 Background pixel contrast */ - __u8 contrast2; /* 7- 4 Emphasis pixel-2 contrast */ - /* 3- 0 Emphasis pixel-1 contrast */ - __u8 color1; /* 7- 4 Pattern pixel color */ - /* 3- 0 Background pixel color */ - __u8 color2; /* 7- 4 Emphasis pixel-2 color */ - /* 3- 0 Emphasis pixel-1 color */ - __u32 ypos; /* 23-22 auto action mode */ - /* 21-12 start y */ - /* 9- 0 end y */ - __u32 xpos; /* 23-22 button color number */ - /* 21-12 start x */ - /* 9- 0 end x */ - } video_highlight_t; - - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-id.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-id.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 18f66875ae3f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-id.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _VIDEO_SET_ID: - -============ -VIDEO_SET_ID -============ - -Name ----- - -VIDEO_SET_ID - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated. - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(int fd, VIDEO_SET_ID, int id) - :name: VIDEO_SET_ID - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - .. row 2 - - - int request - - - Equals VIDEO_SET_ID for this command. - - - .. row 3 - - - int id - - - video sub-stream id - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl selects which sub-stream is to be decoded if a program or -system stream is sent to the video device. - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EINVAL`` - - - Invalid sub-stream id. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-spu-palette.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-spu-palette.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 51a1913d21d2..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-spu-palette.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _VIDEO_SET_SPU_PALETTE: - -===================== -VIDEO_SET_SPU_PALETTE -===================== - -Name ----- - -VIDEO_SET_SPU_PALETTE - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated. - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, VIDEO_SET_SPU_PALETTE, struct video_spu_palette *palette ) - :name: VIDEO_SET_SPU_PALETTE - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - .. row 2 - - - int request - - - Equals VIDEO_SET_SPU_PALETTE for this command. - - - .. row 3 - - - video_spu_palette_t \*palette - - - SPU palette according to section ??. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl sets the SPU color palette. - -.. c:type:: video_spu_palette - -.. code-block::c - - typedef struct video_spu_palette { /* SPU Palette information */ - int length; - __u8 __user *palette; - } video_spu_palette_t; - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EINVAL`` - - - input is not a valid palette or driver doesn’t handle SPU. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-spu.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-spu.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 739e5e7bd133..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-spu.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _VIDEO_SET_SPU: - -============= -VIDEO_SET_SPU -============= - -Name ----- - -VIDEO_SET_SPU - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated. - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, VIDEO_SET_SPU , struct video_spu *spu) - :name: VIDEO_SET_SPU - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - .. row 2 - - - int request - - - Equals VIDEO_SET_SPU for this command. - - - .. row 3 - - - video_spu_t \*spu - - - SPU decoding (de)activation and subid setting according to section - ??. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl activates or deactivates SPU decoding in a DVD input stream. -It can only be used, if the driver is able to handle a DVD stream. - -.. c:type:: struct video_spu - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef struct video_spu { - int active; - int stream_id; - } video_spu_t; - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EINVAL`` - - - input is not a valid spu setting or driver cannot handle SPU. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-system.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-system.rst deleted file mode 100644 index e39cbe080ef7..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video-set-system.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ -.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- - -.. _VIDEO_SET_SYSTEM: - -================ -VIDEO_SET_SYSTEM -================ - -Name ----- - -VIDEO_SET_SYSTEM - -.. attention:: This ioctl is deprecated. - -Synopsis --------- - -.. c:function:: int ioctl(fd, VIDEO_SET_SYSTEM , video_system_t system) - :name: VIDEO_SET_SYSTEM - - -Arguments ---------- - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - int fd - - - File descriptor returned by a previous call to open(). - - - .. row 2 - - - int request - - - Equals VIDEO_SET_FORMAT for this command. - - - .. row 3 - - - video_system_t system - - - video system of TV output. - - -Description ------------ - -This ioctl sets the television output format. The format (see section -??) may vary from the color format of the displayed MPEG stream. If the -hardware is not able to display the requested format the call will -return an error. - - -Return Value ------------- - -On success 0 is returned, on error -1 and the ``errno`` variable is set -appropriately. The generic error codes are described at the -:ref:`Generic Error Codes <gen-errors>` chapter. - - - -.. flat-table:: - :header-rows: 0 - :stub-columns: 0 - - - - .. row 1 - - - ``EINVAL`` - - - system is not a valid or supported video system. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_function_calls.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_function_calls.rst index 68588ac7fecb..3f4f6c9ffad7 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_function_calls.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_function_calls.rst @@ -21,7 +21,6 @@ Video Function Calls video-get-status video-get-frame-count video-get-pts - video-get-frame-rate video-get-event video-command video-try-command @@ -31,13 +30,7 @@ Video Function Calls video-fast-forward video-slowmotion video-get-capabilities - video-set-id video-clear-buffer video-set-streamtype video-set-format - video-set-system - video-set-highlight - video-set-spu - video-set-spu-palette - video-get-navi video-set-attributes diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst index 640a21de6b8a..a0942171596c 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/dvb/video_types.rst @@ -246,134 +246,3 @@ following bits set according to the hardwares capabilities. #define VIDEO_CAP_SPU 16 #define VIDEO_CAP_NAVI 32 #define VIDEO_CAP_CSS 64 - - -.. _video-system: - -video_system_t -============== - -A call to VIDEO_SET_SYSTEM sets the desired video system for TV -output. The following system types can be set: - - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef enum { - VIDEO_SYSTEM_PAL, - VIDEO_SYSTEM_NTSC, - VIDEO_SYSTEM_PALN, - VIDEO_SYSTEM_PALNc, - VIDEO_SYSTEM_PALM, - VIDEO_SYSTEM_NTSC60, - VIDEO_SYSTEM_PAL60, - VIDEO_SYSTEM_PALM60 - } video_system_t; - - -.. c:type:: video_highlight - -struct video_highlight -====================== - -Calling the ioctl VIDEO_SET_HIGHLIGHTS posts the SPU highlight -information. The call expects the following format for that information: - - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef - struct video_highlight { - boolean active; /* 1=show highlight, 0=hide highlight */ - uint8_t contrast1; /* 7- 4 Pattern pixel contrast */ - /* 3- 0 Background pixel contrast */ - uint8_t contrast2; /* 7- 4 Emphasis pixel-2 contrast */ - /* 3- 0 Emphasis pixel-1 contrast */ - uint8_t color1; /* 7- 4 Pattern pixel color */ - /* 3- 0 Background pixel color */ - uint8_t color2; /* 7- 4 Emphasis pixel-2 color */ - /* 3- 0 Emphasis pixel-1 color */ - uint32_t ypos; /* 23-22 auto action mode */ - /* 21-12 start y */ - /* 9- 0 end y */ - uint32_t xpos; /* 23-22 button color number */ - /* 21-12 start x */ - /* 9- 0 end x */ - } video_highlight_t; - - -.. c:type:: video_spu - -struct video_spu -================ - -Calling VIDEO_SET_SPU deactivates or activates SPU decoding, according -to the following format: - - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef - struct video_spu { - boolean active; - int stream_id; - } video_spu_t; - - -.. c:type:: video_spu_palette - -struct video_spu_palette -======================== - -The following structure is used to set the SPU palette by calling -VIDEO_SPU_PALETTE: - - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef - struct video_spu_palette { - int length; - uint8_t *palette; - } video_spu_palette_t; - - -.. c:type:: video_navi_pack - -struct video_navi_pack -====================== - -In order to get the navigational data the following structure has to be -passed to the ioctl VIDEO_GET_NAVI: - - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef - struct video_navi_pack { - int length; /* 0 ... 1024 */ - uint8_t data[1024]; - } video_navi_pack_t; - - -.. _video-attributes-t: - -video_attributes_t -================== - -The following attributes can be set by a call to VIDEO_SET_ATTRIBUTES: - - -.. code-block:: c - - typedef uint16_t video_attributes_t; - /* bits: descr. */ - /* 15-14 Video compression mode (0=MPEG-1, 1=MPEG-2) */ - /* 13-12 TV system (0=525/60, 1=625/50) */ - /* 11-10 Aspect ratio (0=4:3, 3=16:9) */ - /* 9- 8 permitted display mode on 4:3 monitor (0=both, 1=only pan-sca */ - /* 7 line 21-1 data present in GOP (1=yes, 0=no) */ - /* 6 line 21-2 data present in GOP (1=yes, 0=no) */ - /* 5- 3 source resolution (0=720x480/576, 1=704x480/576, 2=352x480/57 */ - /* 2 source letterboxed (1=yes, 0=no) */ - /* 0 film/camera mode (0=camera, 1=film (625/50 only)) */ diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-device-info.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-device-info.rst index f690f9afc470..649cb3d9e058 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-device-info.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-device-info.rst @@ -48,12 +48,8 @@ ioctl never fails. :widths: 1 1 2 - - .. row 1 - - - char - + * - char - ``driver``\ [16] - - Name of the driver implementing the media API as a NUL-terminated ASCII string. The driver version is stored in the ``driver_version`` field. @@ -62,66 +58,38 @@ ioctl never fails. the driver identity. It is also useful to work around known bugs, or to identify drivers in error reports. - - .. row 2 - - - char - + * - char - ``model``\ [32] - - Device model name as a NUL-terminated UTF-8 string. The device version is stored in the ``device_version`` field and is not be appended to the model name. - - .. row 3 - - - char - + * - char - ``serial``\ [40] - - Serial number as a NUL-terminated ASCII string. - - .. row 4 - - - char - + * - char - ``bus_info``\ [32] - - Location of the device in the system as a NUL-terminated ASCII string. This includes the bus type name (PCI, USB, ...) and a bus-specific identifier. - - .. row 5 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``media_version`` - - Media API version, formatted with the ``KERNEL_VERSION()`` macro. - - .. row 6 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``hw_revision`` - - Hardware device revision in a driver-specific format. - - .. row 7 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``driver_version`` - - Media device driver version, formatted with the ``KERNEL_VERSION()`` macro. Together with the ``driver`` field this identifies a particular driver. - - .. row 8 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved``\ [31] - - Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set this array to zero. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-enum-entities.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-enum-entities.rst index 582fda488810..fc2e39c070c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-enum-entities.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-enum-entities.rst @@ -58,142 +58,90 @@ id's until they get an error. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 1 1 1 8 - - - .. row 1 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``id`` - - - - - Entity id, set by the application. When the id is or'ed with + - Entity ID, set by the application. When the ID is or'ed with ``MEDIA_ENT_ID_FLAG_NEXT``, the driver clears the flag and returns - the first entity with a larger id. - - - .. row 2 - - - char + the first entity with a larger ID. Do not expect that the ID will + always be the same for each instance of the device. In other words, + do not hardcode entity IDs in an application. + * - char - ``name``\ [32] - - - - - Entity name as an UTF-8 NULL-terminated string. - - - .. row 3 - - - __u32 + - Entity name as an UTF-8 NULL-terminated string. This name must be unique + within the media topology. + * - __u32 - ``type`` - - - - Entity type, see :ref:`media-entity-functions` for details. - - .. row 4 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``revision`` - - - - Entity revision. Always zero (obsolete) - - .. row 5 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``flags`` - - - - Entity flags, see :ref:`media-entity-flag` for details. - - .. row 6 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``group_id`` - - - - Entity group ID. Always zero (obsolete) - - .. row 7 - - - __u16 - + * - __u16 - ``pads`` - - - - Number of pads - - .. row 8 - - - __u16 - + * - __u16 - ``links`` - - - - Total number of outbound links. Inbound links are not counted in this field. - - .. row 9 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved[4]`` - - - - Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set the array to zero. - - .. row 10 - - - union - - - .. row 11 + * - union - - + * - - struct - - ``dev`` - - - Valid for (sub-)devices that create a single device node. - - .. row 12 - - - + * - - - __u32 - - ``major`` - - Device node major number. - - .. row 13 - - - + * - - - __u32 - - ``minor`` - - Device node minor number. - - .. row 14 - - - + * - - __u8 - - ``raw``\ [184] - - - diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-enum-links.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-enum-links.rst index 256168b3c3be..f158c134e9b0 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-enum-links.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-enum-links.rst @@ -62,35 +62,21 @@ returned during the enumeration process. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 1 2 - - - .. row 1 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``entity`` - - Entity id, set by the application. - - .. row 2 - - - struct :c:type:`media_pad_desc` - + * - struct :c:type:`media_pad_desc` - \*\ ``pads`` - - Pointer to a pads array allocated by the application. Ignored if NULL. - - .. row 3 - - - struct :c:type:`media_link_desc` - + * - struct :c:type:`media_link_desc` - \*\ ``links`` - - Pointer to a links array allocated by the application. Ignored if NULL. - .. c:type:: media_pad_desc .. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.4cm}|p{4.4cm}|p{8.7cm}| @@ -100,37 +86,20 @@ returned during the enumeration process. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 1 2 - - - .. row 1 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``entity`` - - ID of the entity this pad belongs to. - - .. row 2 - - - __u16 - + * - __u16 - ``index`` + - Pad index, starts at 0. - - 0-based pad index. - - - .. row 3 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``flags`` - - Pad flags, see :ref:`media-pad-flag` for more details. - - .. row 4 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved[2]`` - - Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set the array to zero. @@ -145,37 +114,20 @@ returned during the enumeration process. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 1 2 - - - .. row 1 - - - struct :c:type:`media_pad_desc` - + * - struct :c:type:`media_pad_desc` - ``source`` - - Pad at the origin of this link. - - .. row 2 - - - struct :c:type:`media_pad_desc` - + * - struct :c:type:`media_pad_desc` - ``sink`` - - Pad at the target of this link. - - .. row 3 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``flags`` - - Link flags, see :ref:`media-link-flag` for more details. - - .. row 4 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved[4]`` - - Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set the array to zero. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-g-topology.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-g-topology.rst index c4055ddf070a..bac128c7eda9 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-g-topology.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-ioc-g-topology.rst @@ -55,119 +55,66 @@ desired arrays with the media graph elements. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 2 8 - - - .. row 1 - - - __u64 - + * - __u64 - ``topology_version`` - - Version of the media graph topology. When the graph is created, this field starts with zero. Every time a graph element is added or removed, this field is incremented. - - .. row 2 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``num_entities`` - - Number of entities in the graph - - .. row 3 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved1`` - - Applications and drivers shall set this to 0. - - .. row 4 - - - __u64 - + * - __u64 - ``ptr_entities`` - - A pointer to a memory area where the entities array will be stored, converted to a 64-bits integer. It can be zero. if zero, the ioctl won't store the entities. It will just update ``num_entities`` - - .. row 5 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``num_interfaces`` - - Number of interfaces in the graph - - .. row 6 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved2`` - - Applications and drivers shall set this to 0. - - .. row 7 - - - __u64 - + * - __u64 - ``ptr_interfaces`` - - A pointer to a memory area where the interfaces array will be stored, converted to a 64-bits integer. It can be zero. if zero, the ioctl won't store the interfaces. It will just update ``num_interfaces`` - - .. row 8 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``num_pads`` - - Total number of pads in the graph - - .. row 9 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved3`` - - Applications and drivers shall set this to 0. - - .. row 10 - - - __u64 - + * - __u64 - ``ptr_pads`` - - A pointer to a memory area where the pads array will be stored, converted to a 64-bits integer. It can be zero. if zero, the ioctl won't store the pads. It will just update ``num_pads`` - - .. row 11 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``num_links`` - - Total number of data and interface links in the graph - - .. row 12 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved4`` - - Applications and drivers shall set this to 0. - - .. row 13 - - - __u64 - + * - __u64 - ``ptr_links`` - - A pointer to a memory area where the links array will be stored, converted to a 64-bits integer. It can be zero. if zero, the ioctl won't store the links. It will just update ``num_links`` @@ -182,37 +129,31 @@ desired arrays with the media graph elements. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 2 8 - - - .. row 1 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``id`` + - Unique ID for the entity. Do not expect that the ID will + always be the same for each instance of the device. In other words, + do not hardcode entity IDs in an application. - - Unique ID for the entity. - - - .. row 2 - - - char - + * - char - ``name``\ [64] + - Entity name as an UTF-8 NULL-terminated string. This name must be unique + within the media topology. - - Entity name as an UTF-8 NULL-terminated string. - - - .. row 3 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``function`` - - Entity main function, see :ref:`media-entity-functions` for details. - - .. row 4 - - - __u32 - - - ``reserved``\ [6] + * - __u32 + - ``flags`` + - Entity flags, see :ref:`media-entity-flag` for details. + Only valid if ``MEDIA_V2_ENTITY_HAS_FLAGS(media_version)`` + returns true. The ``media_version`` is defined in struct + :c:type:`media_device_info` and can be retrieved using + :ref:`MEDIA_IOC_DEVICE_INFO`. + * - __u32 + - ``reserved``\ [5] - Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set this array to zero. @@ -226,47 +167,29 @@ desired arrays with the media graph elements. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 2 8 - - .. row 1 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``id`` + - Unique ID for the interface. Do not expect that the ID will + always be the same for each instance of the device. In other words, + do not hardcode interface IDs in an application. - - Unique ID for the interface. - - - .. row 2 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``intf_type`` - - Interface type, see :ref:`media-intf-type` for details. - - .. row 3 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``flags`` - - Interface flags. Currently unused. - - .. row 4 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved``\ [9] - - Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set this array to zero. - - .. row 5 - - - struct media_v2_intf_devnode - + * - struct media_v2_intf_devnode - ``devnode`` - - Used only for device node interfaces. See - :c:type:`media_v2_intf_devnode` for details.. + :c:type:`media_v2_intf_devnode` for details. .. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.6cm}|p{3.2cm}|p{12.7cm}| @@ -278,24 +201,14 @@ desired arrays with the media graph elements. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 2 8 - - - .. row 1 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``major`` - - Device node major number. - - .. row 2 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``minor`` - - Device node minor number. - .. tabularcolumns:: |p{1.6cm}|p{3.2cm}|p{12.7cm}| .. c:type:: media_v2_pad @@ -305,37 +218,29 @@ desired arrays with the media graph elements. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 2 8 - - - .. row 1 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``id`` + - Unique ID for the pad. Do not expect that the ID will + always be the same for each instance of the device. In other words, + do not hardcode pad IDs in an application. - - Unique ID for the pad. - - - .. row 2 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``entity_id`` - - Unique ID for the entity where this pad belongs. - - .. row 3 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``flags`` - - Pad flags, see :ref:`media-pad-flag` for more details. - - .. row 4 - - - __u32 - - - ``reserved``\ [5] + * - __u32 + - ``index`` + - Pad index, starts at 0. Only valid if ``MEDIA_V2_PAD_HAS_INDEX(media_version)`` + returns true. The ``media_version`` is defined in struct + :c:type:`media_device_info` and can be retrieved using + :ref:`MEDIA_IOC_DEVICE_INFO`. + * - __u32 + - ``reserved``\ [4] - Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set this array to zero. @@ -349,49 +254,30 @@ desired arrays with the media graph elements. :stub-columns: 0 :widths: 1 2 8 - - - .. row 1 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``id`` + - Unique ID for the link. Do not expect that the ID will + always be the same for each instance of the device. In other words, + do not hardcode link IDs in an application. - - Unique ID for the link. - - - .. row 2 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``source_id`` - - On pad to pad links: unique ID for the source pad. On interface to entity links: unique ID for the interface. - - .. row 3 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``sink_id`` - - On pad to pad links: unique ID for the sink pad. On interface to entity links: unique ID for the entity. - - .. row 4 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``flags`` - - Link flags, see :ref:`media-link-flag` for more details. - - .. row 5 - - - __u32 - + * - __u32 - ``reserved``\ [6] - - Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set this array to zero. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst index 2dda14bd89b7..e4c57c8f4553 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/mediactl/media-types.rst @@ -8,6 +8,41 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements .. tabularcolumns:: |p{8.2cm}|p{10.3cm}| .. _media-entity-functions: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-UNKNOWN: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-V4L2-SUBDEV-UNKNOWN: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IO-V4L: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IO-VBI: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IO-SWRADIO: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IO-DTV: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DTV-DEMOD: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-TS-DEMUX: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DTV-CA: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DTV-NET-DECAP: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-CONN-RF: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-CONN-SVIDEO: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-CONN-COMPOSITE: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-CAM-SENSOR: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-FLASH: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-LENS: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-ATV-DECODER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-TUNER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IF-VID-DECODER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IF-AUD-DECODER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-AUDIO-CAPTURE: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-AUDIO-PLAYBACK: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-AUDIO-MIXER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-COMPOSER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-PIXEL-FORMATTER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-PIXEL-ENC-CONV: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-LUT: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-SCALER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-STATISTICS: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-ENCODER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-DECODER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-VID-MUX: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-VID-IF-BRIDGE: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DV-DECODER: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DV-ENCODER: .. cssclass:: longtable @@ -15,139 +50,56 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements :header-rows: 0 :stub-columns: 0 - - - .. row 1 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-UNKNOWN: - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-V4L2-SUBDEV-UNKNOWN: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_UNKNOWN`` and - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_UNKNOWN`` and ``MEDIA_ENT_F_V4L2_SUBDEV_UNKNOWN`` - - Unknown entity. That generally indicates that a driver didn't initialize properly the entity, which is a Kernel bug - - .. row 2 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IO-V4L: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IO_V4L`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IO_V4L`` - Data streaming input and/or output entity. - - .. row 3 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IO-VBI: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IO_VBI`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IO_VBI`` - V4L VBI streaming input or output entity - - .. row 4 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IO-SWRADIO: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IO_SWRADIO`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IO_SWRADIO`` - V4L Software Digital Radio (SDR) streaming input or output entity - - .. row 5 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IO-DTV: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IO_DTV`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IO_DTV`` - DVB Digital TV streaming input or output entity - - .. row 6 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DTV-DEMOD: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DTV_DEMOD`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DTV_DEMOD`` - Digital TV demodulator entity. - - .. row 7 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-TS-DEMUX: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_TS_DEMUX`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_TS_DEMUX`` - MPEG Transport stream demux entity. Could be implemented on hardware or in Kernelspace by the Linux DVB subsystem. - - .. row 8 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DTV-CA: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DTV_CA`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DTV_CA`` - Digital TV Conditional Access module (CAM) entity - - .. row 9 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DTV-NET-DECAP: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DTV_NET_DECAP`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DTV_NET_DECAP`` - Digital TV network ULE/MLE desencapsulation entity. Could be implemented on hardware or in Kernelspace - - .. row 10 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-CONN-RF: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_CONN_RF`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_CONN_RF`` - Connector for a Radio Frequency (RF) signal. - - .. row 11 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-CONN-SVIDEO: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_CONN_SVIDEO`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_CONN_SVIDEO`` - Connector for a S-Video signal. - - .. row 12 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-CONN-COMPOSITE: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_CONN_COMPOSITE`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_CONN_COMPOSITE`` - Connector for a RGB composite signal. - - .. row 13 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-CAM-SENSOR: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_CAM_SENSOR`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_CAM_SENSOR`` - Camera video sensor entity. - - .. row 14 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-FLASH: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_FLASH`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_FLASH`` - Flash controller entity. - - .. row 15 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-LENS: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_LENS`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_LENS`` - Lens controller entity. - - .. row 16 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-ATV-DECODER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_ATV_DECODER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_ATV_DECODER`` - Analog video decoder, the basic function of the video decoder is to accept analogue video from a wide variety of sources such as broadcast, DVD players, cameras and video cassette recorders, in @@ -155,36 +107,21 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements its component parts, luminance and chrominance, and output it in some digital video standard, with appropriate timing signals. - - .. row 17 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-TUNER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_TUNER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_TUNER`` - Digital TV, analog TV, radio and/or software radio tuner, with consists on a PLL tuning stage that converts radio frequency (RF) signal into an Intermediate Frequency (IF). Modern tuners have internally IF-PLL decoders for audio and video, but older models have those stages implemented on separate entities. - - .. row 18 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IF-VID-DECODER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IF_VID_DECODER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IF_VID_DECODER`` - IF-PLL video decoder. It receives the IF from a PLL and decodes the analog TV video signal. This is commonly found on some very old analog tuners, like Philips MK3 designs. They all contain a tda9887 (or some software compatible similar chip, like tda9885). Those devices use a different I2C address than the tuner PLL. - - .. row 19 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-IF-AUD-DECODER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IF_AUD_DECODER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_IF_AUD_DECODER`` - IF-PLL sound decoder. It receives the IF from a PLL and decodes the analog TV audio signal. This is commonly found on some very old analog hardware, like Micronas msp3400, Philips tda9840, @@ -192,36 +129,16 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements tuner PLL and should be controlled together with the IF-PLL video decoder. - - .. row 20 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-AUDIO-CAPTURE: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_AUDIO_CAPTURE`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_AUDIO_CAPTURE`` - Audio Capture Function Entity. - - .. row 21 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-AUDIO-PLAYBACK: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_AUDIO_PLAYBACK`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_AUDIO_PLAYBACK`` - Audio Playback Function Entity. - - .. row 22 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-AUDIO-MIXER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_AUDIO_MIXER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_AUDIO_MIXER`` - Audio Mixer Function Entity. - - .. row 23 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-COMPOSER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_COMPOSER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_COMPOSER`` - Video composer (blender). An entity capable of video composing must have at least two sink pads and one source pad, and composes input video frames onto output video @@ -229,12 +146,7 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements color keying, raster operations (ROP), stitching or any other means. - - .. row 24 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-PIXEL-FORMATTER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_PIXEL_FORMATTER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_PIXEL_FORMATTER`` - Video pixel formatter. An entity capable of pixel formatting must have at least one sink pad and one source pad. Read pixel formatters read pixels from memory and perform a subset @@ -243,12 +155,7 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements a subset of dithering, pixel encoding conversion and packing and write pixels to memory. - - .. row 25 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-PIXEL-ENC-CONV: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_PIXEL_ENC_CONV`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_PIXEL_ENC_CONV`` - Video pixel encoding converter. An entity capable of pixel enconding conversion must have at least one sink pad and one source pad, and convert the encoding of pixels received on @@ -257,12 +164,7 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements to RGB to/from HSV, RGB to/from YUV and CFA (Bayer) to RGB conversions. - - .. row 26 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-LUT: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_LUT`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_LUT`` - Video look-up table. An entity capable of video lookup table processing must have one sink pad and one source pad. It uses the values of the pixels received on its sink pad to look up @@ -271,12 +173,7 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements separately or combine them for multi-dimensional table lookups. - - .. row 27 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-SCALER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_SCALER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_SCALER`` - Video scaler. An entity capable of video scaling must have at least one sink pad and one source pad, and scale the video frame(s) received on its sink pad(s) to a different @@ -287,311 +184,190 @@ Types and flags used to represent the media graph elements sub-sampling (occasionally also referred to as skipping) are considered as scaling. - - .. row 28 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-PROC-VIDEO-STATISTICS: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_STATISTICS`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_STATISTICS`` - Video statistics computation (histogram, 3A, etc.). An entity capable of statistics computation must have one sink pad and one source pad. It computes statistics over the frames received on its sink pad and outputs the statistics data on its source pad. - - .. row 29 + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_ENCODER`` + - Video (MPEG, HEVC, VPx, etc.) encoder. An entity capable of + compressing video frames. Must have one sink pad and at least + one source pad. - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-VID-MUX: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_VID_MUX`` + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_PROC_VIDEO_DECODER`` + - Video (MPEG, HEVC, VPx, etc.) decoder. An entity capable of + decompressing a compressed video stream into uncompressed video + frames. Must have one sink pad and at least one source pad. + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_VID_MUX`` - Video multiplexer. An entity capable of multiplexing must have at least two sink pads and one source pad, and must pass the video frame(s) received from the active sink pad to the source pad. - - .. row 30 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-VID-IF-BRIDGE: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_VID_IF_BRIDGE`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_VID_IF_BRIDGE`` - Video interface bridge. A video interface bridge entity must have at least one sink pad and at least one source pad. It receives video frames on its sink pad from an input video bus of one type (HDMI, eDP, MIPI CSI-2, etc.), and outputs them on its source pad to an output video bus of another type (eDP, MIPI CSI-2, parallel, etc.). - - .. row 31 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-F-DTV-DECODER: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DTV_DECODER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DV_DECODER`` - Digital video decoder. The basic function of the video decoder is to accept digital video from a wide variety of sources and output it in some digital video standard, with appropriate timing signals. + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_F_DV_ENCODER`` + - Digital video encoder. The basic function of the video encoder is + to accept digital video from some digital video standard with + appropriate timing signals (usually a parallel video bus with sync + signals) and output this to a digital video output connector such + as HDMI or DisplayPort. + .. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.5cm}|p{12.0cm}| .. _media-entity-flag: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-FL-DEFAULT: +.. _MEDIA-ENT-FL-CONNECTOR: .. flat-table:: Media entity flags :header-rows: 0 :stub-columns: 0 - - - .. row 1 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-FL-DEFAULT: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_FL_DEFAULT`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_FL_DEFAULT`` - Default entity for its type. Used to discover the default audio, VBI and video devices, the default camera sensor, etc. - - .. row 2 - - .. _MEDIA-ENT-FL-CONNECTOR: - - - ``MEDIA_ENT_FL_CONNECTOR`` - + * - ``MEDIA_ENT_FL_CONNECTOR`` - The entity represents a connector. .. tabularcolumns:: |p{6.5cm}|p{6.0cm}|p{5.0cm}| .. _media-intf-type: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-FE: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-DEMUX: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-DVR: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-CA: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-NET: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-VIDEO: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-VBI: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-RADIO: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-SUBDEV: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-SWRADIO: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-TOUCH: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-PCM-CAPTURE: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-PCM-PLAYBACK: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-CONTROL: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-COMPRESS: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-RAWMIDI: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-HWDEP: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-SEQUENCER: +.. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-TIMER: .. flat-table:: Media interface types :header-rows: 0 :stub-columns: 0 - - - .. row 1 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-FE: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_FE`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_FE`` - Device node interface for the Digital TV frontend - - typically, /dev/dvb/adapter?/frontend? - - .. row 2 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-DEMUX: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_DEMUX`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_DEMUX`` - Device node interface for the Digital TV demux - - typically, /dev/dvb/adapter?/demux? - - .. row 3 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-DVR: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_DVR`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_DVR`` - Device node interface for the Digital TV DVR - - typically, /dev/dvb/adapter?/dvr? - - .. row 4 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-CA: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_CA`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_CA`` - Device node interface for the Digital TV Conditional Access - - typically, /dev/dvb/adapter?/ca? - - .. row 5 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-DVB-NET: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_NET`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_DVB_NET`` - Device node interface for the Digital TV network control - - typically, /dev/dvb/adapter?/net? - - .. row 6 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-VIDEO: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_VIDEO`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_VIDEO`` - Device node interface for video (V4L) - - typically, /dev/video? - - .. row 7 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-VBI: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_VBI`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_VBI`` - Device node interface for VBI (V4L) - - typically, /dev/vbi? - - .. row 8 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-RADIO: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_RADIO`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_RADIO`` - Device node interface for radio (V4L) - - typically, /dev/radio? - - .. row 9 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-SUBDEV: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_SUBDEV`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_SUBDEV`` - Device node interface for a V4L subdevice - - typically, /dev/v4l-subdev? - - .. row 10 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-SWRADIO: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_SWRADIO`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_SWRADIO`` - Device node interface for Software Defined Radio (V4L) - - typically, /dev/swradio? - - .. row 11 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-V4L-TOUCH: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_TOUCH`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_V4L_TOUCH`` - Device node interface for Touch device (V4L) - - typically, /dev/v4l-touch? - - .. row 12 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-PCM-CAPTURE: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_PCM_CAPTURE`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_PCM_CAPTURE`` - Device node interface for ALSA PCM Capture - - typically, /dev/snd/pcmC?D?c - - .. row 13 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-PCM-PLAYBACK: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_PCM_PLAYBACK`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_PCM_PLAYBACK`` - Device node interface for ALSA PCM Playback - - typically, /dev/snd/pcmC?D?p - - .. row 14 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-CONTROL: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_CONTROL`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_CONTROL`` - Device node interface for ALSA Control - - typically, /dev/snd/controlC? - - .. row 15 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-COMPRESS: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_COMPRESS`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_COMPRESS`` - Device node interface for ALSA Compress - - typically, /dev/snd/compr? - - .. row 16 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-RAWMIDI: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_RAWMIDI`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_RAWMIDI`` - Device node interface for ALSA Raw MIDI - - typically, /dev/snd/midi? - - .. row 17 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-HWDEP: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_HWDEP`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_HWDEP`` - Device node interface for ALSA Hardware Dependent - - typically, /dev/snd/hwC?D? - - .. row 18 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-SEQUENCER: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_SEQUENCER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_SEQUENCER`` - Device node interface for ALSA Sequencer - - typically, /dev/snd/seq - - .. row 19 - - .. _MEDIA-INTF-T-ALSA-TIMER: - - - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_TIMER`` - + * - ``MEDIA_INTF_T_ALSA_TIMER`` - Device node interface for ALSA Timer - - typically, /dev/snd/timer .. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.5cm}|p{12.0cm}| .. _media-pad-flag: +.. _MEDIA-PAD-FL-SINK: +.. _MEDIA-PAD-FL-SOURCE: +.. _MEDIA-PAD-FL-MUST-CONNECT: .. flat-table:: Media pad flags :header-rows: 0 :stub-columns: 0 - - - .. row 1 - - .. _MEDIA-PAD-FL-SINK: - - - ``MEDIA_PAD_FL_SINK`` - + * - ``MEDIA_PAD_FL_SINK`` - Input pad, relative to the entity. Input pads sink data and are targets of links. - - .. row 2 - - .. _MEDIA-PAD-FL-SOURCE: - - - ``MEDIA_PAD_FL_SOURCE`` - + * - ``MEDIA_PAD_FL_SOURCE`` - Output pad, relative to the entity. Output pads source data and are origins of links. - - .. row 3 - - .. _MEDIA-PAD-FL-MUST-CONNECT: - - - ``MEDIA_PAD_FL_MUST_CONNECT`` - + * - ``MEDIA_PAD_FL_MUST_CONNECT`` - If this flag is set and the pad is linked to any other pad, then at least one of those links must be enabled for the entity to be able to stream. There could be temporary reasons (e.g. device @@ -606,46 +382,29 @@ must be set for every pad. .. tabularcolumns:: |p{5.5cm}|p{12.0cm}| .. _media-link-flag: +.. _MEDIA-LNK-FL-ENABLED: +.. _MEDIA-LNK-FL-IMMUTABLE: +.. _MEDIA-LNK-FL-DYNAMIC: +.. _MEDIA-LNK-FL-LINK-TYPE: .. flat-table:: Media link flags :header-rows: 0 :stub-columns: 0 - - - .. row 1 - - .. _MEDIA-LNK-FL-ENABLED: - - - ``MEDIA_LNK_FL_ENABLED`` - + * - ``MEDIA_LNK_FL_ENABLED`` - The link is enabled and can be used to transfer media data. When two or more links target a sink pad, only one of them can be enabled at a time. - - .. row 2 - - .. _MEDIA-LNK-FL-IMMUTABLE: - - - ``MEDIA_LNK_FL_IMMUTABLE`` - + * - ``MEDIA_LNK_FL_IMMUTABLE`` - The link enabled state can't be modified at runtime. An immutable link is always enabled. - - .. row 3 - - .. _MEDIA-LNK-FL-DYNAMIC: - - - ``MEDIA_LNK_FL_DYNAMIC`` - + * - ``MEDIA_LNK_FL_DYNAMIC`` - The link enabled state can be modified during streaming. This flag is set by drivers and is read-only for applications. - - .. row 4 - - .. _MEDIA-LNK-FL-LINK-TYPE: - - - ``MEDIA_LNK_FL_LINK_TYPE`` - + * - ``MEDIA_LNK_FL_LINK_TYPE`` - This is a bitmask that defines the type of the link. Currently, two types of links are supported: diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst index 03931f9b1285..9f7312bf3365 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/extended-controls.rst @@ -1955,9 +1955,51 @@ enum v4l2_vp8_golden_frame_sel - ``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_P_FRAME_QP (integer)`` Quantization parameter for a P frame for VP8. -``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VPX_PROFILE (integer)`` - Select the desired profile for VPx encoder. Acceptable values are 0, - 1, 2 and 3 corresponding to encoder profiles 0, 1, 2 and 3. +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp8-profile: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp8_profile - + This control allows selecting the profile for VP8 encoder. + This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP8 encoder or decoder. + Possible values are: + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_0`` + - Profile 0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_1`` + - Profile 1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_2`` + - Profile 2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP8_PROFILE_3`` + - Profile 3 + +.. _v4l2-mpeg-video-vp9-profile: + +``V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE`` + (enum) + +enum v4l2_mpeg_video_vp9_profile - + This control allows selecting the profile for VP9 encoder. + This is also used to enumerate supported profiles by VP9 encoder or decoder. + Possible values are: + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_0`` + - Profile 0 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_1`` + - Profile 1 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_2`` + - Profile 2 + * - ``V4L2_MPEG_VIDEO_VP9_PROFILE_3`` + - Profile 3 High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC/H.265) Control Reference diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst index abec03937bb3..d382e7a5c38e 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-compressed.rst @@ -95,3 +95,10 @@ Compressed Formats - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_HEVC`` - 'HEVC' - HEVC/H.265 video elementary stream. + * .. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-FWHT: + + - ``V4L2_PIX_FMT_FWHT`` + - 'FWHT' + - Video elementary stream using a codec based on the Fast Walsh Hadamard + Transform. This codec is implemented by the vicodec ('Virtual Codec') + driver. See the vicodec-codec.h header for more details. diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-rgb.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-rgb.rst index cf2ef7df9616..1f9a7e3a07c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-rgb.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-rgb.rst @@ -19,4 +19,5 @@ RGB Formats pixfmt-srggb10-ipu3 pixfmt-srggb12 pixfmt-srggb12p + pixfmt-srggb14p pixfmt-srggb16 diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb14p.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb14p.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..88d20c0e4282 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-srggb14p.rst @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- + +.. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB14P: +.. _v4l2-pix-fmt-sbggr14p: +.. _v4l2-pix-fmt-sgbrg14p: +.. _v4l2-pix-fmt-sgrbg14p: + +******************************************************************************************************************************* +V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB14P ('pRCC'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG14P ('pgCC'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG14P ('pGCC'), V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR14P ('pBCC'), +******************************************************************************************************************************* + +*man V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB14P(2)* + +V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG14P +V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG14P +V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR14P +14-bit packed Bayer formats + + +Description +=========== + +These four pixel formats are packed raw sRGB / Bayer formats with 14 +bits per colour. Every four consecutive samples are packed into seven +bytes. Each of the first four bytes contain the eight high order bits +of the pixels, and the three following bytes contains the six least +significants bits of each pixel, in the same order. + +Each n-pixel row contains n/2 green samples and n/2 blue or red samples, +with alternating green-red and green-blue rows. They are conventionally +described as GRGR... BGBG..., RGRG... GBGB..., etc. Below is an example +of one of these formats: + +**Byte Order.** +Each cell is one byte. + + + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + :widths: 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 + + + - .. row 1 + + - start + 0: + + - B\ :sub:`00high` + + - G\ :sub:`01high` + + - B\ :sub:`02high` + + - G\ :sub:`03high` + + - G\ :sub:`01low bits 1--0`\ (bits 7--6) + B\ :sub:`00low bits 5--0`\ (bits 5--0) + + - R\ :sub:`02low bits 3--0`\ (bits 7--4) + G\ :sub:`01low bits 5--2`\ (bits 3--0) + + - G\ :sub:`03low bits 5--0`\ (bits 7--2) + R\ :sub:`02low bits 5--4`\ (bits 1--0) + + - .. row 2 + + - start + 7: + + - G\ :sub:`00high` + + - R\ :sub:`01high` + + - G\ :sub:`02high` + + - R\ :sub:`03high` + + - R\ :sub:`01low bits 1--0`\ (bits 7--6) + G\ :sub:`00low bits 5--0`\ (bits 5--0) + + - G\ :sub:`02low bits 3--0`\ (bits 7--4) + R\ :sub:`01low bits 5--2`\ (bits 3--0) + + - R\ :sub:`03low bits 5--0`\ (bits 7--2) + G\ :sub:`02low bits 5--4`\ (bits 1--0) + + - .. row 3 + + - start + 14 + + - B\ :sub:`20high` + + - G\ :sub:`21high` + + - B\ :sub:`22high` + + - G\ :sub:`23high` + + - G\ :sub:`21low bits 1--0`\ (bits 7--6) + B\ :sub:`20low bits 5--0`\ (bits 5--0) + + - R\ :sub:`22low bits 3--0`\ (bits 7--4) + G\ :sub:`21low bits 5--2`\ (bits 3--0) + + - G\ :sub:`23low bits 5--0`\ (bits 7--2) + R\ :sub:`22low bits 5--4`\ (bits 1--0) + + - .. row 4 + + - start + 21 + + - G\ :sub:`30high` + + - R\ :sub:`31high` + + - G\ :sub:`32high` + + - R\ :sub:`33high` + + - R\ :sub:`31low bits 1--0`\ (bits 7--6) + G\ :sub:`30low bits 5--0`\ (bits 5--0) + + - G\ :sub:`32low bits 3--0`\ (bits 7--4) + R\ :sub:`31low bits 5--2`\ (bits 3--0) + + - R\ :sub:`33low bits 5--0`\ (bits 7--2) + G\ :sub:`32low bits 5--4`\ (bits 1--0) diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-y10p.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-y10p.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..13b571306915 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/pixfmt-y10p.rst @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +.. -*- coding: utf-8; mode: rst -*- + +.. _V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y10P: + +****************************** +V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10P ('Y10P') +****************************** + +Grey-scale image as a MIPI RAW10 packed array + + +Description +=========== + +This is a packed grey-scale image format with a depth of 10 bits per +pixel. Every four consecutive pixels are packed into 5 bytes. Each of +the first 4 bytes contain the 8 high order bits of the pixels, and +the 5th byte contains the 2 least significants bits of each pixel, +in the same order. + +**Bit-packed representation.** + +.. flat-table:: + :header-rows: 0 + :stub-columns: 0 + :widths: 8 8 8 8 64 + + * - Y'\ :sub:`00[9:2]` + - Y'\ :sub:`01[9:2]` + - Y'\ :sub:`02[9:2]` + - Y'\ :sub:`03[9:2]` + - Y'\ :sub:`03[1:0]`\ (bits 7--6) Y'\ :sub:`02[1:0]`\ (bits 5--4) + Y'\ :sub:`01[1:0]`\ (bits 3--2) Y'\ :sub:`00[1:0]`\ (bits 1--0) diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst index 9fcabe7f9367..8e73fcfc6900 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/subdev-formats.rst @@ -37,19 +37,22 @@ Media Bus Formats - Image colorspace, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_colorspace`. See :ref:`colorspaces` for details. - * - enum :c:type:`v4l2_ycbcr_encoding` + * - __u16 - ``ycbcr_enc`` - - This information supplements the ``colorspace`` and must be set by + - Y'CbCr encoding, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_ycbcr_encoding`. + This information supplements the ``colorspace`` and must be set by the driver for capture streams and by the application for output streams, see :ref:`colorspaces`. - * - enum :c:type:`v4l2_quantization` + * - __u16 - ``quantization`` - - This information supplements the ``colorspace`` and must be set by + - Quantization range, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_quantization`. + This information supplements the ``colorspace`` and must be set by the driver for capture streams and by the application for output streams, see :ref:`colorspaces`. - * - enum :c:type:`v4l2_xfer_func` + * - __u16 - ``xfer_func`` - - This information supplements the ``colorspace`` and must be set by + - Transfer function, from enum :c:type:`v4l2_xfer_func`. + This information supplements the ``colorspace`` and must be set by the driver for capture streams and by the application for output streams, see :ref:`colorspaces`. * - __u16 @@ -4315,6 +4318,78 @@ the following codes. - y\ :sub:`2` - y\ :sub:`1` - y\ :sub:`0` + * .. _MEDIA-BUS-FMT-Y10-2X8-PADHI_LE: + + - MEDIA_BUS_FMT_Y10_2X8_PADHI_LE + - 0x202c + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - y\ :sub:`7` + - y\ :sub:`6` + - y\ :sub:`5` + - y\ :sub:`4` + - y\ :sub:`3` + - y\ :sub:`2` + - y\ :sub:`1` + - y\ :sub:`0` + * - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - 0 + - 0 + - 0 + - 0 + - 0 + - 0 + - y\ :sub:`9` + - y\ :sub:`8` * .. _MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UYVY10-2X10: - MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY10_2X10 diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.rst index b7fda29f46a1..2644a62acd4b 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-enumstd.rst @@ -2,14 +2,14 @@ .. _VIDIOC_ENUMSTD: -******************** -ioctl VIDIOC_ENUMSTD -******************** +******************************************* +ioctl VIDIOC_ENUMSTD, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUMSTD +******************************************* Name ==== -VIDIOC_ENUMSTD - Enumerate supported video standards +VIDIOC_ENUMSTD - VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUMSTD - Enumerate supported video standards Synopsis @@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ Synopsis .. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, VIDIOC_ENUMSTD, struct v4l2_standard *argp ) :name: VIDIOC_ENUMSTD +.. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUMSTD, struct v4l2_standard *argp ) + :name: VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUMSTD + Arguments ========= diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-std.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-std.rst index 90791ab51a53..8d94f0404df2 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-std.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-g-std.rst @@ -2,14 +2,14 @@ .. _VIDIOC_G_STD: -******************************** -ioctl VIDIOC_G_STD, VIDIOC_S_STD -******************************** +************************************************************************** +ioctl VIDIOC_G_STD, VIDIOC_S_STD, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_STD, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_STD +************************************************************************** Name ==== -VIDIOC_G_STD - VIDIOC_S_STD - Query or select the video standard of the current input +VIDIOC_G_STD - VIDIOC_S_STD - VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_STD - VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_STD - Query or select the video standard of the current input Synopsis @@ -21,6 +21,12 @@ Synopsis .. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, VIDIOC_S_STD, const v4l2_std_id *argp ) :name: VIDIOC_S_STD +.. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_STD, v4l2_std_id *argp ) + :name: VIDIOC_SUBDEV_G_STD + +.. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_STD, const v4l2_std_id *argp ) + :name: VIDIOC_SUBDEV_S_STD + Arguments ========= diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-querystd.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-querystd.rst index cf40bca19b9f..a8385cc74818 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-querystd.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/vidioc-querystd.rst @@ -2,14 +2,14 @@ .. _VIDIOC_QUERYSTD: -********************* -ioctl VIDIOC_QUERYSTD -********************* +********************************************* +ioctl VIDIOC_QUERYSTD, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_QUERYSTD +********************************************* Name ==== -VIDIOC_QUERYSTD - Sense the video standard received by the current input +VIDIOC_QUERYSTD - VIDIOC_SUBDEV_QUERYSTD - Sense the video standard received by the current input Synopsis @@ -18,6 +18,9 @@ Synopsis .. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, VIDIOC_QUERYSTD, v4l2_std_id *argp ) :name: VIDIOC_QUERYSTD +.. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, VIDIOC_SUBDEV_QUERYSTD, v4l2_std_id *argp ) + :name: VIDIOC_SUBDEV_QUERYSTD + Arguments ========= diff --git a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/yuv-formats.rst b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/yuv-formats.rst index 3334ea445657..9ab0592d08da 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/yuv-formats.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/uapi/v4l/yuv-formats.rst @@ -29,6 +29,7 @@ to brightness information. pixfmt-y10 pixfmt-y12 pixfmt-y10b + pixfmt-y10p pixfmt-y16 pixfmt-y16-be pixfmt-y8i diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst index 9e66b7b5770f..f27c8df20b2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss.rst @@ -7,34 +7,34 @@ Introduction ------------ This file documents the Qualcomm Camera Subsystem driver located under -drivers/media/platform/qcom/camss-8x16. +drivers/media/platform/qcom/camss. The current version of the driver supports the Camera Subsystem found on -Qualcomm MSM8916 and APQ8016 processors. +Qualcomm MSM8916/APQ8016 and MSM8996/APQ8096 processors. The driver implements V4L2, Media controller and V4L2 subdev interfaces. Camera sensor using V4L2 subdev interface in the kernel is supported. The driver is implemented using as a reference the Qualcomm Camera Subsystem -driver for Android as found in Code Aurora [#f1]_. +driver for Android as found in Code Aurora [#f1]_ [#f2]_. Qualcomm Camera Subsystem hardware ---------------------------------- -The Camera Subsystem hardware found on 8x16 processors and supported by the -driver consists of: +The Camera Subsystem hardware found on 8x16 / 8x96 processors and supported by +the driver consists of: -- 2 CSIPHY modules. They handle the Physical layer of the CSI2 receivers. +- 2 / 3 CSIPHY modules. They handle the Physical layer of the CSI2 receivers. A separate camera sensor can be connected to each of the CSIPHY module; -- 2 CSID (CSI Decoder) modules. They handle the Protocol and Application layer - of the CSI2 receivers. A CSID can decode data stream from any of the CSIPHY. - Each CSID also contains a TG (Test Generator) block which can generate +- 2 / 4 CSID (CSI Decoder) modules. They handle the Protocol and Application + layer of the CSI2 receivers. A CSID can decode data stream from any of the + CSIPHY. Each CSID also contains a TG (Test Generator) block which can generate artificial input data for test purposes; - ISPIF (ISP Interface) module. Handles the routing of the data streams from the CSIDs to the inputs of the VFE; -- VFE (Video Front End) module. Contains a pipeline of image processing hardware - blocks. The VFE has different input interfaces. The PIX (Pixel) input +- 1 / 2 VFE (Video Front End) module(s). Contain a pipeline of image processing + hardware blocks. The VFE has different input interfaces. The PIX (Pixel) input interface feeds the input data to the image processing pipeline. The image processing pipeline contains also a scale and crop module at the end. Three RDI (Raw Dump Interface) input interfaces bypass the image processing @@ -49,18 +49,33 @@ The current version of the driver supports: - Input from camera sensor via CSIPHY; - Generation of test input data by the TG in CSID; -- RDI interface of VFE - raw dump of the input data to memory. +- RDI interface of VFE - Supported formats: + - Raw dump of the input data to memory. - - YUYV/UYVY/YVYU/VYUY (packed YUV 4:2:2 - V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUYV / - V4L2_PIX_FMT_UYVY / V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVYU / V4L2_PIX_FMT_VYUY); - - MIPI RAW8 (8bit Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8 / - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG8 / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG8 / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR8); - - MIPI RAW10 (10bit packed Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10P / - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10P); - - MIPI RAW12 (12bit packed Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB12P / - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG12P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG12P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB12P). + Supported formats: + + - YUYV/UYVY/YVYU/VYUY (packed YUV 4:2:2 - V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUYV / + V4L2_PIX_FMT_UYVY / V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVYU / V4L2_PIX_FMT_VYUY); + - MIPI RAW8 (8bit Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8 / + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG8 / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG8 / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR8); + - MIPI RAW10 (10bit packed Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10P / + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10P / + V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10P); + - MIPI RAW12 (12bit packed Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB12P / + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG12P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG12P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB12P). + - (8x96 only) MIPI RAW14 (14bit packed Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB14P / + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG14P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG14P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB14P). + + - (8x96 only) Format conversion of the input data. + + Supported input formats: + + - MIPI RAW10 (10bit packed Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10P / V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10P). + + Supported output formats: + + - Plain16 RAW10 (10bit unpacked Bayer RAW - V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10 / V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10). - PIX interface of VFE @@ -75,14 +90,16 @@ The current version of the driver supports: - NV12/NV21 (two plane YUV 4:2:0 - V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12 / V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV21); - NV16/NV61 (two plane YUV 4:2:2 - V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV16 / V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV61). + - (8x96 only) YUYV/UYVY/YVYU/VYUY (packed YUV 4:2:2 - V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUYV / + V4L2_PIX_FMT_UYVY / V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVYU / V4L2_PIX_FMT_VYUY). - Scaling support. Configuration of the VFE Encoder Scale module for downscalling with ratio up to 16x. - Cropping support. Configuration of the VFE Encoder Crop module. -- Concurrent and independent usage of two data inputs - could be camera sensors - and/or TG. +- Concurrent and independent usage of two (8x96: three) data inputs - + could be camera sensors and/or TG. Driver Architecture and Design @@ -90,14 +107,14 @@ Driver Architecture and Design The driver implements the V4L2 subdev interface. With the goal to model the hardware links between the modules and to expose a clean, logical and usable -interface, the driver is split into V4L2 sub-devices as follows: +interface, the driver is split into V4L2 sub-devices as follows (8x16 / 8x96): -- 2 CSIPHY sub-devices - each CSIPHY is represented by a single sub-device; -- 2 CSID sub-devices - each CSID is represented by a single sub-device; -- 2 ISPIF sub-devices - ISPIF is represented by a number of sub-devices equal - to the number of CSID sub-devices; -- 4 VFE sub-devices - VFE is represented by a number of sub-devices equal to - the number of the input interfaces (3 RDI and 1 PIX). +- 2 / 3 CSIPHY sub-devices - each CSIPHY is represented by a single sub-device; +- 2 / 4 CSID sub-devices - each CSID is represented by a single sub-device; +- 2 / 4 ISPIF sub-devices - ISPIF is represented by a number of sub-devices + equal to the number of CSID sub-devices; +- 4 / 8 VFE sub-devices - VFE is represented by a number of sub-devices equal to + the number of the input interfaces (3 RDI and 1 PIX for each VFE). The considerations to split the driver in this particular way are as follows: @@ -115,8 +132,8 @@ The considerations to split the driver in this particular way are as follows: Each VFE sub-device is linked to a separate video device node. -The media controller pipeline graph is as follows (with connected two OV5645 -camera sensors): +The media controller pipeline graph is as follows (with connected two / three +OV5645 camera sensors): .. _qcom_camss_graph: @@ -124,7 +141,13 @@ camera sensors): :alt: qcom_camss_graph.dot :align: center - Media pipeline graph + Media pipeline graph 8x16 + +.. kernel-figure:: qcom_camss_8x96_graph.dot + :alt: qcom_camss_8x96_graph.dot + :align: center + + Media pipeline graph 8x96 Implementation @@ -149,8 +172,12 @@ APQ8016 Specification: https://developer.qualcomm.com/download/sd410/snapdragon-410-processor-device-specification.pdf Referenced 2016-11-24. +APQ8096 Specification: +https://developer.qualcomm.com/download/sd820e/qualcomm-snapdragon-820e-processor-apq8096sge-device-specification.pdf +Referenced 2018-06-22. References ---------- .. [#f1] https://source.codeaurora.org/quic/la/kernel/msm-3.10/ +.. [#f2] https://source.codeaurora.org/quic/la/kernel/msm-3.18/ diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss_8x96_graph.dot b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss_8x96_graph.dot new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..de34f0a7afdc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/qcom_camss_8x96_graph.dot @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +digraph board { + rankdir=TB + n00000001 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_csiphy0\n/dev/v4l-subdev0 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000001:port1 -> n0000000a:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000001:port1 -> n0000000d:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000001:port1 -> n00000010:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000001:port1 -> n00000013:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000004 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_csiphy1\n/dev/v4l-subdev1 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000004:port1 -> n0000000a:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000004:port1 -> n0000000d:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000004:port1 -> n00000010:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000004:port1 -> n00000013:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000007 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_csiphy2\n/dev/v4l-subdev2 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000007:port1 -> n0000000a:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000007:port1 -> n0000000d:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000007:port1 -> n00000010:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000007:port1 -> n00000013:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000000a [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_csid0\n/dev/v4l-subdev3 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n0000000a:port1 -> n00000016:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000000a:port1 -> n00000019:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000000a:port1 -> n0000001c:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000000a:port1 -> n0000001f:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000000d [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_csid1\n/dev/v4l-subdev4 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n0000000d:port1 -> n00000016:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000000d:port1 -> n00000019:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000000d:port1 -> n0000001c:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000000d:port1 -> n0000001f:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000010 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_csid2\n/dev/v4l-subdev5 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000010:port1 -> n00000016:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000010:port1 -> n00000019:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000010:port1 -> n0000001c:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000010:port1 -> n0000001f:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000013 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_csid3\n/dev/v4l-subdev6 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000013:port1 -> n00000016:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000013:port1 -> n00000019:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000013:port1 -> n0000001c:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000013:port1 -> n0000001f:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000016 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_ispif0\n/dev/v4l-subdev7 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000016:port1 -> n00000022:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000016:port1 -> n0000002b:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000016:port1 -> n00000034:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000016:port1 -> n0000003d:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000016:port1 -> n00000046:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000016:port1 -> n0000004f:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000016:port1 -> n00000058:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000016:port1 -> n00000061:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000019 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_ispif1\n/dev/v4l-subdev8 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000019:port1 -> n00000022:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000019:port1 -> n0000002b:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000019:port1 -> n00000034:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000019:port1 -> n0000003d:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000019:port1 -> n00000046:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000019:port1 -> n0000004f:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000019:port1 -> n00000058:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000019:port1 -> n00000061:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001c [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_ispif2\n/dev/v4l-subdev9 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n0000001c:port1 -> n00000022:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001c:port1 -> n0000002b:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001c:port1 -> n00000034:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001c:port1 -> n0000003d:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001c:port1 -> n00000046:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001c:port1 -> n0000004f:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001c:port1 -> n00000058:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001c:port1 -> n00000061:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001f [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_ispif3\n/dev/v4l-subdev10 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n0000001f:port1 -> n00000022:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001f:port1 -> n0000002b:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001f:port1 -> n00000034:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001f:port1 -> n0000003d:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001f:port1 -> n00000046:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001f:port1 -> n0000004f:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001f:port1 -> n00000058:port0 [style=dashed] + n0000001f:port1 -> n00000061:port0 [style=dashed] + n00000022 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_vfe0_rdi0\n/dev/v4l-subdev11 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000022:port1 -> n00000025 [style=bold] + n00000025 [label="msm_vfe0_video0\n/dev/video0", shape=box, style=filled, fillcolor=yellow] + n0000002b [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_vfe0_rdi1\n/dev/v4l-subdev12 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n0000002b:port1 -> n0000002e [style=bold] + n0000002e [label="msm_vfe0_video1\n/dev/video1", shape=box, style=filled, fillcolor=yellow] + n00000034 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_vfe0_rdi2\n/dev/v4l-subdev13 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000034:port1 -> n00000037 [style=bold] + n00000037 [label="msm_vfe0_video2\n/dev/video2", shape=box, style=filled, fillcolor=yellow] + n0000003d [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_vfe0_pix\n/dev/v4l-subdev14 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n0000003d:port1 -> n00000040 [style=bold] + n00000040 [label="msm_vfe0_video3\n/dev/video3", shape=box, style=filled, fillcolor=yellow] + n00000046 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_vfe1_rdi0\n/dev/v4l-subdev15 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000046:port1 -> n00000049 [style=bold] + n00000049 [label="msm_vfe1_video0\n/dev/video4", shape=box, style=filled, fillcolor=yellow] + n0000004f [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_vfe1_rdi1\n/dev/v4l-subdev16 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n0000004f:port1 -> n00000052 [style=bold] + n00000052 [label="msm_vfe1_video1\n/dev/video5", shape=box, style=filled, fillcolor=yellow] + n00000058 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_vfe1_rdi2\n/dev/v4l-subdev17 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000058:port1 -> n0000005b [style=bold] + n0000005b [label="msm_vfe1_video2\n/dev/video6", shape=box, style=filled, fillcolor=yellow] + n00000061 [label="{{<port0> 0} | msm_vfe1_pix\n/dev/v4l-subdev18 | {<port1> 1}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n00000061:port1 -> n00000064 [style=bold] + n00000064 [label="msm_vfe1_video3\n/dev/video7", shape=box, style=filled, fillcolor=yellow] + n000000e2 [label="{{} | ov5645 3-0039\n/dev/v4l-subdev19 | {<port0> 0}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n000000e2:port0 -> n00000004:port0 [style=bold] + n000000e4 [label="{{} | ov5645 3-003a\n/dev/v4l-subdev20 | {<port0> 0}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n000000e4:port0 -> n00000007:port0 [style=bold] + n000000e6 [label="{{} | ov5645 3-003b\n/dev/v4l-subdev21 | {<port0> 0}}", shape=Mrecord, style=filled, fillcolor=green] + n000000e6:port0 -> n00000001:port0 [style=bold] +} diff --git a/Documentation/media/video.h.rst.exceptions b/Documentation/media/video.h.rst.exceptions index a91aa884ce0e..371cdbd7d062 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/video.h.rst.exceptions +++ b/Documentation/media/video.h.rst.exceptions @@ -34,7 +34,4 @@ replace typedef video_displayformat_t :c:type:`video_displayformat` replace typedef video_size_t :c:type:`video_size` replace typedef video_stream_source_t :c:type:`video_stream_source` replace typedef video_play_state_t :c:type:`video_play_state` -replace typedef video_highlight_t :c:type:`video_highlight` -replace typedef video_spu_t :c:type:`video_spu` -replace typedef video_spu_palette_t :c:type:`video_spu_palette` replace typedef video_navi_pack_t :c:type:`video_navi_pack` diff --git a/Documentation/media/videodev2.h.rst.exceptions b/Documentation/media/videodev2.h.rst.exceptions index a5cb0a8686ac..ca9f0edc579e 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/videodev2.h.rst.exceptions +++ b/Documentation/media/videodev2.h.rst.exceptions @@ -517,7 +517,6 @@ ignore define V4L2_CTRL_WHICH_DEF_VAL ignore define V4L2_OUT_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS ignore define V4L2_CID_MAX_CTRLS -ignore ioctl VIDIOC_RESERVED ignore define BASE_VIDIOC_PRIVATE # Associate ioctls with their counterparts diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index a02d6bbfc9d0..0d8d7ef131e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -2179,32 +2179,41 @@ or: event_indicated = 1; wake_up_process(event_daemon); -A write memory barrier is implied by wake_up() and co. if and only if they -wake something up. The barrier occurs before the task state is cleared, and so -sits between the STORE to indicate the event and the STORE to set TASK_RUNNING: +A general memory barrier is executed by wake_up() if it wakes something up. +If it doesn't wake anything up then a memory barrier may or may not be +executed; you must not rely on it. The barrier occurs before the task state +is accessed, in particular, it sits between the STORE to indicate the event +and the STORE to set TASK_RUNNING: - CPU 1 CPU 2 + CPU 1 (Sleeper) CPU 2 (Waker) =============================== =============================== set_current_state(); STORE event_indicated smp_store_mb(); wake_up(); - STORE current->state <write barrier> - <general barrier> STORE current->state - LOAD event_indicated + STORE current->state ... + <general barrier> <general barrier> + LOAD event_indicated if ((LOAD task->state) & TASK_NORMAL) + STORE task->state -To repeat, this write memory barrier is present if and only if something -is actually awakened. To see this, consider the following sequence of -events, where X and Y are both initially zero: +where "task" is the thread being woken up and it equals CPU 1's "current". + +To repeat, a general memory barrier is guaranteed to be executed by wake_up() +if something is actually awakened, but otherwise there is no such guarantee. +To see this, consider the following sequence of events, where X and Y are both +initially zero: CPU 1 CPU 2 =============================== =============================== - X = 1; STORE event_indicated + X = 1; Y = 1; smp_mb(); wake_up(); - Y = 1; wait_event(wq, Y == 1); - wake_up(); load from Y sees 1, no memory barrier - load from X might see 0 + LOAD Y LOAD X + +If a wakeup does occur, one (at least) of the two loads must see 1. If, on +the other hand, a wakeup does not occur, both loads might see 0. -In contrast, if a wakeup does occur, CPU 2's load from X would be guaranteed -to see 1. +wake_up_process() always executes a general memory barrier. The barrier again +occurs before the task state is accessed. In particular, if the wake_up() in +the previous snippet were replaced by a call to wake_up_process() then one of +the two loads would be guaranteed to see 1. The available waker functions include: @@ -2224,6 +2233,8 @@ The available waker functions include: wake_up_poll(); wake_up_process(); +In terms of memory ordering, these functions all provide the same guarantees of +a wake_up() (or stronger). [!] Note that the memory barriers implied by the sleeper and the waker do _not_ order multiple stores before the wake-up with respect to loads of those stored diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/pci-endpoint-test.txt b/Documentation/misc-devices/pci-endpoint-test.txt index 4ebc3594b32c..58ccca4416b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/pci-endpoint-test.txt +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/pci-endpoint-test.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ The PCI driver for the test device performs the following tests *) verifying addresses programmed in BAR *) raise legacy IRQ *) raise MSI IRQ + *) raise MSI-X IRQ *) read data *) write data *) copy data @@ -25,6 +26,11 @@ ioctl PCITEST_LEGACY_IRQ: Tests legacy IRQ PCITEST_MSI: Tests message signalled interrupts. The MSI number to be tested should be passed as argument. + PCITEST_MSIX: Tests message signalled interrupts. The MSI-X number + to be tested should be passed as argument. + PCITEST_SET_IRQTYPE: Changes driver IRQ type configuration. The IRQ type + should be passed as argument (0: Legacy, 1:MSI, 2:MSI-X). + PCITEST_GET_IRQTYPE: Gets driver IRQ type configuration. PCITEST_WRITE: Perform write tests. The size of the buffer should be passed as argument. PCITEST_READ: Perform read tests. The size of the buffer should be passed diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX index 2b89d91b376f..02a323c43261 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX @@ -18,8 +18,6 @@ README.ipw2200 - README for the Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG and 2200BG driver. README.sb1000 - info on General Instrument/NextLevel SURFboard1000 cable modem. -alias.txt - - info on using alias network devices. altera_tse.txt - Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet controller. arcnet-hardware.txt @@ -140,8 +138,6 @@ multiqueue.txt - HOWTO for multiqueue network device support. netconsole.txt - The network console module netconsole.ko: configuration and notes. -netdev-FAQ.txt - - FAQ describing how to submit net changes to netdev mailing list. netdev-features.txt - Network interface features API description. netdevices.txt diff --git a/Documentation/networking/alias.rst b/Documentation/networking/alias.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..af7c5ee92014 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/alias.rst @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=========== +IP-Aliasing +=========== + +IP-aliases are an obsolete way to manage multiple IP-addresses/masks +per interface. Newer tools such as iproute2 support multiple +address/prefixes per interface, but aliases are still supported +for backwards compatibility. + +An alias is formed by adding a colon and a string when running ifconfig. +This string is usually numeric, but this is not a must. + + +Alias creation +============== + +Alias creation is done by 'magic' interface naming: eg. to create a +200.1.1.1 alias for eth0 ... +:: + + # ifconfig eth0:0 200.1.1.1 etc,etc.... + ~~ -> request alias #0 creation (if not yet exists) for eth0 + +The corresponding route is also set up by this command. Please note: +The route always points to the base interface. + + +Alias deletion +============== + +The alias is removed by shutting the alias down:: + + # ifconfig eth0:0 down + ~~~~~~~~~~ -> will delete alias + + +Alias (re-)configuring +====================== + +Aliases are not real devices, but programs should be able to configure +and refer to them as usual (ifconfig, route, etc). + + +Relationship with main device +============================= + +If the base device is shut down the added aliases will be deleted too. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/alias.txt b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 85046f53fcfc..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/alias.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ - -IP-Aliasing: -============ - -IP-aliases are an obsolete way to manage multiple IP-addresses/masks -per interface. Newer tools such as iproute2 support multiple -address/prefixes per interface, but aliases are still supported -for backwards compatibility. - -An alias is formed by adding a colon and a string when running ifconfig. -This string is usually numeric, but this is not a must. - -o Alias creation. - Alias creation is done by 'magic' interface naming: eg. to create a - 200.1.1.1 alias for eth0 ... - - # ifconfig eth0:0 200.1.1.1 etc,etc.... - ~~ -> request alias #0 creation (if not yet exists) for eth0 - - The corresponding route is also set up by this command. - Please note: The route always points to the base interface. - - -o Alias deletion. - The alias is removed by shutting the alias down: - - # ifconfig eth0:0 down - ~~~~~~~~~~ -> will delete alias - - -o Alias (re-)configuring - - Aliases are not real devices, but programs should be able to configure and - refer to them as usual (ifconfig, route, etc). - - -o Relationship with main device - - If the base device is shut down the added aliases will be deleted - too. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index c13214d073a4..d3e5dd26db12 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -1490,7 +1490,7 @@ To remove an ARP target: To configure the interval between learning packet transmits: # echo 12 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/lp_interval - NOTE: the lp_inteval is the number of seconds between instances where + NOTE: the lp_interval is the number of seconds between instances where the bonding driver sends learning packets to each slaves peer switch. The default interval is 1 second. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt b/Documentation/networking/bridge.rst index a27cb6214ed7..4aef9cddde2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bridge.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bridge.rst @@ -1,3 +1,9 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================= +Ethernet Bridging +================= + In order to use the Ethernet bridging functionality, you'll need the userspace tools. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can_ucan_protocol.rst b/Documentation/networking/can_ucan_protocol.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4cef88d24fc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/can_ucan_protocol.rst @@ -0,0 +1,332 @@ +================= +The UCAN Protocol +================= + +UCAN is the protocol used by the microcontroller-based USB-CAN +adapter that is integrated on System-on-Modules from Theobroma Systems +and that is also available as a standalone USB stick. + +The UCAN protocol has been designed to be hardware-independent. +It is modeled closely after how Linux represents CAN devices +internally. All multi-byte integers are encoded as Little Endian. + +All structures mentioned in this document are defined in +``drivers/net/can/usb/ucan.c``. + +USB Endpoints +============= + +UCAN devices use three USB endpoints: + +CONTROL endpoint + The driver sends device management commands on this endpoint + +IN endpoint + The device sends CAN data frames and CAN error frames + +OUT endpoint + The driver sends CAN data frames on the out endpoint + + +CONTROL Messages +================ + +UCAN devices are configured using vendor requests on the control pipe. + +To support multiple CAN interfaces in a single USB device all +configuration commands target the corresponding interface in the USB +descriptor. + +The driver uses ``ucan_ctrl_command_in/out`` and +``ucan_device_request_in`` to deliver commands to the device. + +Setup Packet +------------ + +================= ===================================================== +``bmRequestType`` Direction | Vendor | (Interface or Device) +``bRequest`` Command Number +``wValue`` Subcommand Number (16 Bit) or 0 if not used +``wIndex`` USB Interface Index (0 for device commands) +``wLength`` * Host to Device - Number of bytes to transmit + * Device to Host - Maximum Number of bytes to + receive. If the device send less. Commom ZLP + semantics are used. +================= ===================================================== + +Error Handling +-------------- + +The device indicates failed control commands by stalling the +pipe. + +Device Commands +--------------- + +UCAN_DEVICE_GET_FW_STRING +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +*Dev2Host; optional* + +Request the device firmware string. + + +Interface Commands +------------------ + +UCAN_COMMAND_START +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +*Host2Dev; mandatory* + +Bring the CAN interface up. + +Payload Format + ``ucan_ctl_payload_t.cmd_start`` + +==== ============================ +mode or mask of ``UCAN_MODE_*`` +==== ============================ + +UCAN_COMMAND_STOP +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +*Host2Dev; mandatory* + +Stop the CAN interface + +Payload Format + *empty* + +UCAN_COMMAND_RESET +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +*Host2Dev; mandatory* + +Reset the CAN controller (including error counters) + +Payload Format + *empty* + +UCAN_COMMAND_GET +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +*Host2Dev; mandatory* + +Get Information from the Device + +Subcommands +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +UCAN_COMMAND_GET_INFO + Request the device information structure ``ucan_ctl_payload_t.device_info``. + + See the ``device_info`` field for details, and + ``uapi/linux/can/netlink.h`` for an explanation of the + ``can_bittiming fields``. + + Payload Format + ``ucan_ctl_payload_t.device_info`` + +UCAN_COMMAND_GET_PROTOCOL_VERSION + + Request the device protocol version + ``ucan_ctl_payload_t.protocol_version``. The current protocol version is 3. + + Payload Format + ``ucan_ctl_payload_t.protocol_version`` + +.. note:: Devices that do not implement this command use the old + protocol version 1 + +UCAN_COMMAND_SET_BITTIMING +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +*Host2Dev; mandatory* + +Setup bittiming by sending the the structure +``ucan_ctl_payload_t.cmd_set_bittiming`` (see ``struct bittiming`` for +details) + +Payload Format + ``ucan_ctl_payload_t.cmd_set_bittiming``. + +UCAN_SLEEP/WAKE +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +*Host2Dev; optional* + +Configure sleep and wake modes. Not yet supported by the driver. + +UCAN_FILTER +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +*Host2Dev; optional* + +Setup hardware CAN filters. Not yet supported by the driver. + +Allowed interface commands +-------------------------- + +================== =================== ================== +Legal Device State Command New Device State +================== =================== ================== +stopped SET_BITTIMING stopped +stopped START started +started STOP or RESET stopped +stopped STOP or RESET stopped +started RESTART started +any GET *no change* +================== =================== ================== + +IN Message Format +================= + +A data packet on the USB IN endpoint contains one or more +``ucan_message_in`` values. If multiple messages are batched in a USB +data packet, the ``len`` field can be used to jump to the next +``ucan_message_in`` value (take care to sanity-check the ``len`` value +against the actual data size). + +.. _can_ucan_in_message_len: + +``len`` field +------------- + +Each ``ucan_message_in`` must be aligned to a 4-byte boundary (relative +to the start of the start of the data buffer). That means that there +may be padding bytes between multiple ``ucan_message_in`` values: + +.. code:: + + +----------------------------+ < 0 + | | + | struct ucan_message_in | + | | + +----------------------------+ < len + [padding] + +----------------------------+ < round_up(len, 4) + | | + | struct ucan_message_in | + | | + +----------------------------+ + [...] + +``type`` field +-------------- + +The ``type`` field specifies the type of the message. + +UCAN_IN_RX +~~~~~~~~~~ + +``subtype`` + zero + +Data received from the CAN bus (ID + payload). + +UCAN_IN_TX_COMPLETE +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +``subtype`` + zero + +The CAN device has sent a message to the CAN bus. It answers with a +list of of tuples <echo-ids, flags>. + +The echo-id identifies the frame from (echos the id from a previous +UCAN_OUT_TX message). The flag indicates the result of the +transmission. Whereas a set Bit 0 indicates success. All other bits +are reserved and set to zero. + +Flow Control +------------ + +When receiving CAN messages there is no flow control on the USB +buffer. The driver has to handle inbound message quickly enough to +avoid drops. I case the device buffer overflow the condition is +reported by sending corresponding error frames (see +:ref:`can_ucan_error_handling`) + + +OUT Message Format +================== + +A data packet on the USB OUT endpoint contains one or more ``struct +ucan_message_out`` values. If multiple messages are batched into one +data packet, the device uses the ``len`` field to jump to the next +ucan_message_out value. Each ucan_message_out must be aligned to 4 +bytes (relative to the start of the data buffer). The mechanism is +same as described in :ref:`can_ucan_in_message_len`. + +.. code:: + + +----------------------------+ < 0 + | | + | struct ucan_message_out | + | | + +----------------------------+ < len + [padding] + +----------------------------+ < round_up(len, 4) + | | + | struct ucan_message_out | + | | + +----------------------------+ + [...] + +``type`` field +-------------- + +In protocol version 3 only ``UCAN_OUT_TX`` is defined, others are used +only by legacy devices (protocol version 1). + +UCAN_OUT_TX +~~~~~~~~~~~ +``subtype`` + echo id to be replied within a CAN_IN_TX_COMPLETE message + +Transmit a CAN frame. (parameters: ``id``, ``data``) + +Flow Control +------------ + +When the device outbound buffers are full it starts sending *NAKs* on +the *OUT* pipe until more buffers are available. The driver stops the +queue when a certain threshold of out packets are incomplete. + +.. _can_ucan_error_handling: + +CAN Error Handling +================== + +If error reporting is turned on the device encodes errors into CAN +error frames (see ``uapi/linux/can/error.h``) and sends it using the +IN endpoint. The driver updates its error statistics and forwards +it. + +Although UCAN devices can suppress error frames completely, in Linux +the driver is always interested. Hence, the device is always started with +the ``UCAN_MODE_BERR_REPORT`` set. Filtering those messages for the +user space is done by the driver. + +Bus OFF +------- + +- The device does not recover from bus of automatically. +- Bus OFF is indicated by an error frame (see ``uapi/linux/can/error.h``) +- Bus OFF recovery is started by ``UCAN_COMMAND_RESTART`` +- Once Bus OFF recover is completed the device sends an error frame + indicating that it is on ERROR-ACTIVE state. +- During Bus OFF no frames are sent by the device. +- During Bus OFF transmission requests from the host are completed + immediately with the success bit left unset. + +Example Conversation +==================== + +#) Device is connected to USB +#) Host sends command ``UCAN_COMMAND_RESET``, subcmd 0 +#) Host sends command ``UCAN_COMMAND_GET``, subcmd ``UCAN_COMMAND_GET_INFO`` +#) Device sends ``UCAN_IN_DEVICE_INFO`` +#) Host sends command ``UCAN_OUT_SET_BITTIMING`` +#) Host sends command ``UCAN_COMMAND_START``, subcmd 0, mode ``UCAN_MODE_BERR_REPORT`` diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..13588104161b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) Overview +=================================== + +:Copyright: |copy| 2016-2018 NXP + +This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 DPIO +drivers + +Introduction +============ + +A DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) is a hardware object that provides +interfaces to enqueue and dequeue frames to/from network interfaces +and other accelerators. A DPIO also provides hardware buffer +pool management for network interfaces. + +This document provides an overview the Linux DPIO driver, its +subcomponents, and its APIs. + +See Documentation/networking/dpaa2/overview.rst for a general overview of DPAA2 +and the general DPAA2 driver architecture in Linux. + +Driver Overview +--------------- + +The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects discovered on the fsl-mc bus and +provides services that: + A) allow other drivers, such as the Ethernet driver, to enqueue and dequeue + frames for their respective objects + B) allow drivers to register callbacks for data availability notifications + when data becomes available on a queue or channel + C) allow drivers to manage hardware buffer pools + +The Linux DPIO driver consists of 3 primary components-- + DPIO object driver-- fsl-mc driver that manages the DPIO object + + DPIO service-- provides APIs to other Linux drivers for services + + QBman portal interface-- sends portal commands, gets responses +:: + + fsl-mc other + bus drivers + | | + +---+----+ +------+-----+ + |DPIO obj| |DPIO service| + | driver |---| (DPIO) | + +--------+ +------+-----+ + | + +------+-----+ + | QBman | + | portal i/f | + +------------+ + | + hardware + + +The diagram below shows how the DPIO driver components fit with the other +DPAA2 Linux driver components:: + +------------+ + | OS Network | + | Stack | + +------------+ +------------+ + | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet | + |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) | + +-.----------+ +---+---+----+ + . . ^ | + . . <data avail, | |<enqueue, + . . tx confirm> | | dequeue> + +-------------+ . | | + | DPRC driver | . +--------+ +------------+ + | (DPRC) | . . |DPIO obj| |DPIO service| + +----------+--+ | driver |-| (DPIO) | + | +--------+ +------+-----+ + |<dev add/remove> +------|-----+ + | | QBman | + +----+--------------+ | portal i/f | + | MC-bus driver | +------------+ + | | | + | /soc/fsl-mc | | + +-------------------+ | + | + =========================================|=========|======================== + +-+--DPIO---|-----------+ + | | | + | QBman Portal | + +-----------------------+ + + ============================================================================ + + +DPIO Object Driver (dpio-driver.c) +---------------------------------- + + The dpio-driver component registers with the fsl-mc bus to handle objects of + type "dpio". The implementation of probe() handles basic initialization + of the DPIO including mapping of the DPIO regions (the QBman SW portal) + and initializing interrupts and registering irq handlers. The dpio-driver + registers the probed DPIO with dpio-service. + +DPIO service (dpio-service.c, dpaa2-io.h) +------------------------------------------ + + The dpio service component provides queuing, notification, and buffers + management services to DPAA2 drivers, such as the Ethernet driver. A system + will typically allocate 1 DPIO object per CPU to allow queuing operations + to happen simultaneously across all CPUs. + + Notification handling + dpaa2_io_service_register() + + dpaa2_io_service_deregister() + + dpaa2_io_service_rearm() + + Queuing + dpaa2_io_service_pull_fq() + + dpaa2_io_service_pull_channel() + + dpaa2_io_service_enqueue_fq() + + dpaa2_io_service_enqueue_qd() + + dpaa2_io_store_create() + + dpaa2_io_store_destroy() + + dpaa2_io_store_next() + + Buffer pool management + dpaa2_io_service_release() + + dpaa2_io_service_acquire() + +QBman portal interface (qbman-portal.c) +--------------------------------------- + + The qbman-portal component provides APIs to do the low level hardware + bit twiddling for operations such as: + -initializing Qman software portals + + -building and sending portal commands + + -portal interrupt configuration and processing + + The qbman-portal APIs are not public to other drivers, and are + only used by dpio-service. + +Other (dpaa2-fd.h, dpaa2-global.h) +---------------------------------- + + Frame descriptor and scatter-gather definitions and the APIs used to + manipulate them are defined in dpaa2-fd.h. + + Dequeue result struct and parsing APIs are defined in dpaa2-global.h. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/index.rst index 4c6586c87969..10bea113a7bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/index.rst @@ -6,3 +6,4 @@ DPAA2 Documentation :maxdepth: 1 overview + dpio-driver diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/overview.rst b/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/overview.rst index 79fede4447d6..d638b5a8aadd 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/overview.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/dpaa2/overview.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ .. include:: <isonum.txt> +========================================================= DPAA2 (Data Path Acceleration Architecture Gen2) Overview ========================================================= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.rst b/Documentation/networking/e100.rst index d4d837027925..f81111eba9c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e100.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.rst @@ -1,3 +1,4 @@ +============================================================== Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters ============================================================== @@ -46,123 +47,131 @@ Driver Configuration Parameters The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, unless otherwise noted. -Rx Descriptors: Number of receive descriptors. A receive descriptor is a data +Rx Descriptors: + Number of receive descriptors. A receive descriptor is a data structure that describes a receive buffer and its attributes to the network controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to write data from the controller to host memory. In the 3.x.x driver the valid range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 256. This parameter can be changed using the command:: - ethtool -G eth? rx n + ethtool -G eth? rx n Where n is the number of desired Rx descriptors. -Tx Descriptors: Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data +Tx Descriptors: + Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data structure that describes a transmit buffer and its attributes to the network controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to read data from the host memory to the controller. In the 3.x.x driver the valid range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 128. This parameter can be changed using the command:: - ethtool -G eth? tx n + ethtool -G eth? tx n Where n is the number of desired Tx descriptors. -Speed/Duplex: The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by +Speed/Duplex: + The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex.:: - ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half} + ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half} NOTE: setting the speed/duplex to incorrect values will cause the link to fail. -Event Log Message Level: The driver uses the message level flag to log events +Event Log Message Level: + The driver uses the message level flag to log events to syslog. The message level can be set at driver load time. It can also be set using the command:: - ethtool -s eth? msglvl n + ethtool -s eth? msglvl n Additional Configurations ========================= - Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions - ------------------------------------------------- +Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions +------------------------------------------------- - Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is - distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding - an alias line to /etc/modprobe.d/*.conf as well as editing other system - startup scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux - distributions ship with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the - proper way to configure a network device for your system, refer to your - distribution documentation. If during this process you are asked for the - driver or module name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel - PRO/100 Family of Adapters is e100. +Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started +is distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves +adding an alias line to `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf` as well as editing other +system startup scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux +distributions ship with tools to make these changes for you. To learn +the proper way to configure a network device for your system, refer to +your distribution documentation. If during this process you are asked +for the driver or module name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for +the Intel PRO/100 Family of Adapters is e100. - As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters - (eth0 and eth1), add the following to a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/ +As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters +(eth0 and eth1), add the following to a configuration file in +/etc/modprobe.d/:: alias eth0 e100 alias eth1 e100 - Viewing Link Messages - --------------------- - In order to see link messages and other Intel driver information on your - console, you must set the dmesg level up to six. This can be done by - entering the following on the command line before loading the e100 driver:: +Viewing Link Messages +--------------------- + +In order to see link messages and other Intel driver information on your +console, you must set the dmesg level up to six. This can be done by +entering the following on the command line before loading the e100 +driver:: dmesg -n 6 - If you wish to see all messages issued by the driver, including debug - messages, set the dmesg level to eight. +If you wish to see all messages issued by the driver, including debug +messages, set the dmesg level to eight. - NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. +NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. +ethtool +------- - ethtool - ------- +The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and +diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool +version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. - The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool - version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. +The latest release of ethtool can be found from +https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ - The latest release of ethtool can be found from - https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ +Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) +--------------------------- +WoL is provided through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on +enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be +enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this +driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be loaded +when shutting down or rebooting the system. - Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) - --------------------------- - WoL is provided through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on enabling - WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. +NAPI +---- - WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For - this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be - loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. +NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e100 driver. - NAPI - ---- +See https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi for more +information on NAPI. - NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e100 driver. +Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network +------------------------------------------------------ - See https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi for more information - on NAPI. +Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have one +system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain +(non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces +will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system. +This results in unbalanced receive traffic. - Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network - ------------------------------------------------------ +If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP +filtering by - Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have - one system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain - (non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces - will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system. - This results in unbalanced receive traffic. +(1) entering:: - If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP - filtering by + echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter - (1) entering:: echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter - (this only works if your kernel's version is higher than 2.4.5), or + (this only works if your kernel's version is higher than 2.4.5), or - (2) installing the interfaces in separate broadcast domains (either - in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs). +(2) installing the interfaces in separate broadcast domains (either + in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs). Support diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/e1000.rst index 616848940e63..f10dd4086921 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e1000.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.rst @@ -1,3 +1,4 @@ +=========================================================== Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection =========================================================== @@ -33,7 +34,8 @@ Command Line Parameters The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, unless otherwise noted. -NOTES: For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed +NOTES: + For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed parameters, see the "Speed and Duplex Configuration" section in this document. @@ -44,22 +46,27 @@ NOTES: For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed AutoNeg ------- + (Supported only on adapters with copper connections) -Valid Range: 0x01-0x0F, 0x20-0x2F -Default Value: 0x2F + +:Valid Range: 0x01-0x0F, 0x20-0x2F +:Default Value: 0x2F This parameter is a bit-mask that specifies the speed and duplex settings advertised by the adapter. When this parameter is used, the Speed and Duplex parameters must not be specified. -NOTE: Refer to the Speed and Duplex section of this readme for more +NOTE: + Refer to the Speed and Duplex section of this readme for more information on the AutoNeg parameter. Duplex ------ + (Supported only on adapters with copper connections) -Valid Range: 0-2 (0=auto-negotiate, 1=half, 2=full) -Default Value: 0 + +:Valid Range: 0-2 (0=auto-negotiate, 1=half, 2=full) +:Default Value: 0 This defines the direction in which data is allowed to flow. Can be either one or two-directional. If both Duplex and the link partner are @@ -69,18 +76,22 @@ duplex. FlowControl ----------- -Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx) -Default Value: Reads flow control settings from the EEPROM + +:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx) +:Default Value: Reads flow control settings from the EEPROM This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to Ethernet PAUSE frames. InterruptThrottleRate --------------------- + (not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters) -Valid Range: 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative, - 4=simplified balancing) -Default Value: 3 + +:Valid Range: + 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative, + 4=simplified balancing) +:Default Value: 3 The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the @@ -134,13 +145,15 @@ Setting InterruptThrottleRate to 0 turns off any interrupt moderation and may improve small packet latency, but is generally not suitable for bulk throughput traffic. -NOTE: InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and +NOTE: + InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive and/or transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to generate more interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate allows. -CAUTION: If you are using the Intel(R) PRO/1000 CT Network Connection +CAUTION: + If you are using the Intel(R) PRO/1000 CT Network Connection (controller 82547), setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater than 75,000, may hang (stop transmitting) adapters under certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV @@ -150,7 +163,8 @@ CAUTION: If you are using the Intel(R) PRO/1000 CT Network Connection hang, ensure that InterruptThrottleRate is set no greater than 75,000 and is not set to 0. -NOTE: When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters +NOTE: + When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters are in use simultaneously, the CPU utilization may increase non- linearly. In order to limit the CPU utilization without impacting the overall throughput, we recommend that you load the driver as @@ -167,9 +181,11 @@ NOTE: When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters RxDescriptors ------------- -Valid Range: 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters -Default Value: 256 + +:Valid Range: + - 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters + - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters +:Default Value: 256 This value specifies the number of receive buffer descriptors allocated by the driver. Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more @@ -179,15 +195,17 @@ Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for each descriptor and can be either 2048, 4096, 8192, or 16384 bytes, depending on the MTU setting. The maximum MTU size is 16110. -NOTE: MTU designates the frame size. It only needs to be set for Jumbo +NOTE: + MTU designates the frame size. It only needs to be set for Jumbo Frames. Depending on the available system resources, the request for a higher number of receive descriptors may be denied. In this case, use a lower number. RxIntDelay ---------- -Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) -Default Value: 0 + +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 0 This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024 microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if @@ -197,7 +215,8 @@ of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value may be set too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive descriptors. -CAUTION: When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may +CAUTION: + When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may hang (stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG message is logged in the system event log. In addition, the controller is automatically reset, @@ -206,9 +225,11 @@ CAUTION: When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may RxAbsIntDelay ------------- + (This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.) -Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) -Default Value: 128 + +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 128 This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a receive interrupt is generated. Useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero, @@ -219,9 +240,11 @@ conditions. Speed ----- + (This parameter is supported only on adapters with copper connections.) -Valid Settings: 0, 10, 100, 1000 -Default Value: 0 (auto-negotiate at all supported speeds) + +:Valid Settings: 0, 10, 100, 1000 +:Default Value: 0 (auto-negotiate at all supported speeds) Speed forces the line speed to the specified value in megabits per second (Mbps). If this parameter is not specified or is set to 0 and the link @@ -230,22 +253,26 @@ speed. Duplex should also be set when Speed is set to either 10 or 100. TxDescriptors ------------- -Valid Range: 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters -Default Value: 256 + +:Valid Range: + - 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters + - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters +:Default Value: 256 This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver. Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each descriptor is 16 bytes. -NOTE: Depending on the available system resources, the request for a +NOTE: + Depending on the available system resources, the request for a higher number of transmit descriptors may be denied. In this case, use a lower number. TxIntDelay ---------- -Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) -Default Value: 8 + +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 8 This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of 1.024 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU @@ -255,9 +282,11 @@ causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors. TxAbsIntDelay ------------- + (This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.) -Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) -Default Value: 32 + +:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +:Default Value: 32 This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a transmit interrupt is generated. Useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero, @@ -268,18 +297,21 @@ network conditions. XsumRX ------ + (This parameter is NOT supported on the 82542-based adapter.) -Valid Range: 0-1 -Default Value: 1 + +:Valid Range: 0-1 +:Default Value: 1 A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware. Copybreak --------- -Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) -Default Value: 256 -Usage: modprobe e1000.ko copybreak=128 + +:Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) +:Default Value: 256 +:Usage: modprobe e1000.ko copybreak=128 Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX buffer before handing it up the stack. @@ -291,8 +323,9 @@ it is also available during runtime at SmartPowerDownEnable -------------------- -Valid Range: 0-1 -Default Value: 0 (disabled) + +:Valid Range: 0-1 +:Default Value: 0 (disabled) Allows PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off this parameter in supported chipsets. @@ -308,14 +341,14 @@ fiber interface board only links at 1000 Mbps full-duplex. For copper-based boards, the keywords interact as follows: - The default operation is auto-negotiate. The board advertises all +- The default operation is auto-negotiate. The board advertises all supported speed and duplex combinations, and it links at the highest common speed and duplex mode IF the link partner is set to auto-negotiate. - If Speed = 1000, limited auto-negotiation is enabled and only 1000 Mbps +- If Speed = 1000, limited auto-negotiation is enabled and only 1000 Mbps is advertised (The 1000BaseT spec requires auto-negotiation.) - If Speed = 10 or 100, then both Speed and Duplex should be set. Auto- +- If Speed = 10 or 100, then both Speed and Duplex should be set. Auto- negotiation is disabled, and the AutoNeg parameter is ignored. Partner SHOULD also be forced. @@ -327,13 +360,15 @@ process. The parameter may be specified as either a decimal or hexadecimal value as determined by the bitmap below. +============== ====== ====== ======= ======= ====== ====== ======= ====== Bit position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Decimal Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Hex value 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1 Speed (Mbps) N/A N/A 1000 N/A 100 100 10 10 Duplex Full Full Half Full Half +============== ====== ====== ======= ======= ====== ====== ======= ====== -Some examples of using AutoNeg: +Some examples of using AutoNeg:: modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x01 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half) modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=1 (Same as above) @@ -354,8 +389,9 @@ previously mentioned to force the adapter to the same speed and duplex. Additional Configurations ========================= - Jumbo Frames - ------------ +Jumbo Frames +------------ + Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500. Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example:: @@ -367,11 +403,11 @@ Additional Configurations MTU=9000 - to the file /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>. This example - applies to the Red Hat distributions; other distributions may store this - setting in a different location. + to the file /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>. This example + applies to the Red Hat distributions; other distributions may store this + setting in a different location. - Notes: +Notes: Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help. @@ -385,12 +421,14 @@ Additional Configurations poor performance or loss of link. - Adapters based on the Intel(R) 82542 and 82573V/E controller do not - support Jumbo Frames. These correspond to the following product names: + support Jumbo Frames. These correspond to the following product names:: + Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection - ethtool - ------- +ethtool +------- + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. @@ -398,8 +436,9 @@ Additional Configurations The latest release of ethtool can be found from https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ - Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) - --------------------------- +Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) +--------------------------- + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/index.rst index fec8588a588e..fcd710f2cc7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/index.rst @@ -6,15 +6,21 @@ Contents: .. toctree:: :maxdepth: 2 + netdev-FAQ af_xdp batman-adv can + can_ucan_protocol dpaa2/index e100 e1000 kapi z8530book msg_zerocopy + failover + net_failover + alias + bridge .. only:: subproject diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index ce8fbf5aa63c..8313a636dd53 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -81,6 +81,15 @@ fib_multipath_hash_policy - INTEGER 0 - Layer 3 1 - Layer 4 +ip_forward_update_priority - INTEGER + Whether to update SKB priority from "TOS" field in IPv4 header after it + is forwarded. The new SKB priority is mapped from TOS field value + according to an rt_tos2priority table (see e.g. man tc-prio). + Default: 1 (Update priority.) + Possible values: + 0 - Do not update priority. + 1 - Update priority. + route/max_size - INTEGER Maximum number of routes allowed in the kernel. Increase this when using large numbers of interfaces and/or routes. @@ -733,11 +742,11 @@ tcp_limit_output_bytes - INTEGER Controls TCP Small Queue limit per tcp socket. TCP bulk sender tends to increase packets in flight until it gets losses notifications. With SNDBUF autotuning, this can - result in a large amount of packets queued in qdisc/device - on the local machine, hurting latency of other flows, for - typical pfifo_fast qdiscs. - tcp_limit_output_bytes limits the number of bytes on qdisc - or device to reduce artificial RTT/cwnd and reduce bufferbloat. + result in a large amount of packets queued on the local machine + (e.g.: qdiscs, CPU backlog, or device) hurting latency of other + flows, for typical pfifo_fast qdiscs. tcp_limit_output_bytes + limits the number of bytes on qdisc or device to reduce artificial + RTT/cwnd and reduce bufferbloat. Default: 262144 tcp_challenge_ack_limit - INTEGER @@ -1834,6 +1843,16 @@ stable_secret - IPv6 address By default the stable secret is unset. +addr_gen_mode - INTEGER + Defines how link-local and autoconf addresses are generated. + + 0: generate address based on EUI64 (default) + 1: do no generate a link-local address, use EUI64 for addresses generated + from autoconf + 2: generate stable privacy addresses, using the secret from + stable_secret (RFC7217) + 3: generate stable privacy addresses, using a random secret if unset + drop_unicast_in_l2_multicast - BOOLEAN Drop any unicast IPv6 packets that are received in link-layer multicast (or broadcast) frames. @@ -1863,6 +1882,11 @@ ratelimit - INTEGER otherwise the minimal space between responses in milliseconds. Default: 1000 +echo_ignore_all - BOOLEAN + If set non-zero, then the kernel will ignore all ICMP ECHO + requests sent to it over the IPv6 protocol. + Default: 0 + xfrm6_gc_thresh - INTEGER The threshold at which we will start garbage collecting for IPv6 destination cache entries. At twice this value the system will diff --git a/Documentation/networking/net_failover.rst b/Documentation/networking/net_failover.rst index 70ca2f5800c4..06c97dcb57ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/net_failover.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/net_failover.rst @@ -36,37 +36,39 @@ feature on the virtio-net interface and assign the same MAC address to both virtio-net and VF interfaces. Here is an example XML snippet that shows such configuration. - - <interface type='network'> - <mac address='52:54:00:00:12:53'/> - <source network='enp66s0f0_br'/> - <target dev='tap01'/> - <model type='virtio'/> - <driver name='vhost' queues='4'/> - <link state='down'/> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0a' function='0x0'/> - </interface> - <interface type='hostdev' managed='yes'> - <mac address='52:54:00:00:12:53'/> - <source> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x42' slot='0x02' function='0x5'/> - </source> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0b' function='0x0'/> - </interface> +:: + + <interface type='network'> + <mac address='52:54:00:00:12:53'/> + <source network='enp66s0f0_br'/> + <target dev='tap01'/> + <model type='virtio'/> + <driver name='vhost' queues='4'/> + <link state='down'/> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0a' function='0x0'/> + </interface> + <interface type='hostdev' managed='yes'> + <mac address='52:54:00:00:12:53'/> + <source> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x42' slot='0x02' function='0x5'/> + </source> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0b' function='0x0'/> + </interface> Booting a VM with the above configuration will result in the following 3 netdevs created in the VM. - -4: ens10: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue state UP group default qlen 1000 - link/ether 52:54:00:00:12:53 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff - inet 192.168.12.53/24 brd 192.168.12.255 scope global dynamic ens10 - valid_lft 42482sec preferred_lft 42482sec - inet6 fe80::97d8:db2:8c10:b6d6/64 scope link - valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever -5: ens10nsby: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master ens10 state UP group default qlen 1000 - link/ether 52:54:00:00:12:53 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff -7: ens11: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc mq master ens10 state UP group default qlen 1000 - link/ether 52:54:00:00:12:53 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff +:: + + 4: ens10: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue state UP group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 52:54:00:00:12:53 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + inet 192.168.12.53/24 brd 192.168.12.255 scope global dynamic ens10 + valid_lft 42482sec preferred_lft 42482sec + inet6 fe80::97d8:db2:8c10:b6d6/64 scope link + valid_lft forever preferred_lft forever + 5: ens10nsby: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc fq_codel master ens10 state UP group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 52:54:00:00:12:53 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff + 7: ens11: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc mq master ens10 state UP group default qlen 1000 + link/ether 52:54:00:00:12:53 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff ens10 is the 'failover' master netdev, ens10nsby and ens11 are the slave 'standby' and 'primary' netdevs respectively. @@ -80,37 +82,38 @@ the paravirtual datapath when the VF is unplugged. Here is a sample script that shows the steps to initiate live migration on the source hypervisor. +:: -# cat vf_xml -<interface type='hostdev' managed='yes'> - <mac address='52:54:00:00:12:53'/> - <source> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x42' slot='0x02' function='0x5'/> - </source> - <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0b' function='0x0'/> -</interface> + # cat vf_xml + <interface type='hostdev' managed='yes'> + <mac address='52:54:00:00:12:53'/> + <source> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x42' slot='0x02' function='0x5'/> + </source> + <address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0b' function='0x0'/> + </interface> -# Source Hypervisor -#!/bin/bash + # Source Hypervisor + #!/bin/bash -DOMAIN=fedora27-tap01 -PF=enp66s0f0 -VF_NUM=5 -TAP_IF=tap01 -VF_XML= + DOMAIN=fedora27-tap01 + PF=enp66s0f0 + VF_NUM=5 + TAP_IF=tap01 + VF_XML= -MAC=52:54:00:00:12:53 -ZERO_MAC=00:00:00:00:00:00 + MAC=52:54:00:00:12:53 + ZERO_MAC=00:00:00:00:00:00 -virsh domif-setlink $DOMAIN $TAP_IF up -bridge fdb del $MAC dev $PF master -virsh detach-device $DOMAIN $VF_XML -ip link set $PF vf $VF_NUM mac $ZERO_MAC + virsh domif-setlink $DOMAIN $TAP_IF up + bridge fdb del $MAC dev $PF master + virsh detach-device $DOMAIN $VF_XML + ip link set $PF vf $VF_NUM mac $ZERO_MAC -virsh migrate --live $DOMAIN qemu+ssh://$REMOTE_HOST/system + virsh migrate --live $DOMAIN qemu+ssh://$REMOTE_HOST/system -# Destination Hypervisor -#!/bin/bash + # Destination Hypervisor + #!/bin/bash -virsh attach-device $DOMAIN $VF_XML -virsh domif-setlink $DOMAIN $TAP_IF down + virsh attach-device $DOMAIN $VF_XML + virsh domif-setlink $DOMAIN $TAP_IF down diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0ac5fa77f501 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst @@ -0,0 +1,259 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +.. _netdev-FAQ: + +========== +netdev FAQ +========== + +Q: What is netdev? +------------------ +A: It is a mailing list for all network-related Linux stuff. This +includes anything found under net/ (i.e. core code like IPv6) and +drivers/net (i.e. hardware specific drivers) in the Linux source tree. + +Note that some subsystems (e.g. wireless drivers) which have a high +volume of traffic have their own specific mailing lists. + +The netdev list is managed (like many other Linux mailing lists) through +VGER (http://vger.kernel.org/) and archives can be found below: + +- http://marc.info/?l=linux-netdev +- http://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/ + +Aside from subsystems like that mentioned above, all network-related +Linux development (i.e. RFC, review, comments, etc.) takes place on +netdev. + +Q: How do the changes posted to netdev make their way into Linux? +----------------------------------------------------------------- +A: There are always two trees (git repositories) in play. Both are +driven by David Miller, the main network maintainer. There is the +``net`` tree, and the ``net-next`` tree. As you can probably guess from +the names, the ``net`` tree is for fixes to existing code already in the +mainline tree from Linus, and ``net-next`` is where the new code goes +for the future release. You can find the trees here: + +- https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/davem/net.git +- https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/davem/net-next.git + +Q: How often do changes from these trees make it to the mainline Linus tree? +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- +A: To understand this, you need to know a bit of background information on +the cadence of Linux development. Each new release starts off with a +two week "merge window" where the main maintainers feed their new stuff +to Linus for merging into the mainline tree. After the two weeks, the +merge window is closed, and it is called/tagged ``-rc1``. No new +features get mainlined after this -- only fixes to the rc1 content are +expected. After roughly a week of collecting fixes to the rc1 content, +rc2 is released. This repeats on a roughly weekly basis until rc7 +(typically; sometimes rc6 if things are quiet, or rc8 if things are in a +state of churn), and a week after the last vX.Y-rcN was done, the +official vX.Y is released. + +Relating that to netdev: At the beginning of the 2-week merge window, +the ``net-next`` tree will be closed - no new changes/features. The +accumulated new content of the past ~10 weeks will be passed onto +mainline/Linus via a pull request for vX.Y -- at the same time, the +``net`` tree will start accumulating fixes for this pulled content +relating to vX.Y + +An announcement indicating when ``net-next`` has been closed is usually +sent to netdev, but knowing the above, you can predict that in advance. + +IMPORTANT: Do not send new ``net-next`` content to netdev during the +period during which ``net-next`` tree is closed. + +Shortly after the two weeks have passed (and vX.Y-rc1 is released), the +tree for ``net-next`` reopens to collect content for the next (vX.Y+1) +release. + +If you aren't subscribed to netdev and/or are simply unsure if +``net-next`` has re-opened yet, simply check the ``net-next`` git +repository link above for any new networking-related commits. You may +also check the following website for the current status: + + http://vger.kernel.org/~davem/net-next.html + +The ``net`` tree continues to collect fixes for the vX.Y content, and is +fed back to Linus at regular (~weekly) intervals. Meaning that the +focus for ``net`` is on stabilization and bug fixes. + +Finally, the vX.Y gets released, and the whole cycle starts over. + +Q: So where are we now in this cycle? + +Load the mainline (Linus) page here: + + https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git + +and note the top of the "tags" section. If it is rc1, it is early in +the dev cycle. If it was tagged rc7 a week ago, then a release is +probably imminent. + +Q: How do I indicate which tree (net vs. net-next) my patch should be in? +------------------------------------------------------------------------- +A: Firstly, think whether you have a bug fix or new "next-like" content. +Then once decided, assuming that you use git, use the prefix flag, i.e. +:: + + git format-patch --subject-prefix='PATCH net-next' start..finish + +Use ``net`` instead of ``net-next`` (always lower case) in the above for +bug-fix ``net`` content. If you don't use git, then note the only magic +in the above is just the subject text of the outgoing e-mail, and you +can manually change it yourself with whatever MUA you are comfortable +with. + +Q: I sent a patch and I'm wondering what happened to it? +-------------------------------------------------------- +Q: How can I tell whether it got merged? +A: Start by looking at the main patchworks queue for netdev: + + http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/project/netdev/list/ + +The "State" field will tell you exactly where things are at with your +patch. + +Q: The above only says "Under Review". How can I find out more? +---------------------------------------------------------------- +A: Generally speaking, the patches get triaged quickly (in less than +48h). So be patient. Asking the maintainer for status updates on your +patch is a good way to ensure your patch is ignored or pushed to the +bottom of the priority list. + +Q: I submitted multiple versions of the patch series +---------------------------------------------------- +Q: should I directly update patchwork for the previous versions of these +patch series? +A: No, please don't interfere with the patch status on patchwork, leave +it to the maintainer to figure out what is the most recent and current +version that should be applied. If there is any doubt, the maintainer +will reply and ask what should be done. + +Q: How can I tell what patches are queued up for backporting to the various stable releases? +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +A: Normally Greg Kroah-Hartman collects stable commits himself, but for +networking, Dave collects up patches he deems critical for the +networking subsystem, and then hands them off to Greg. + +There is a patchworks queue that you can see here: + + http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/bundle/davem/stable/?state=* + +It contains the patches which Dave has selected, but not yet handed off +to Greg. If Greg already has the patch, then it will be here: + + https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/stable/stable-queue.git + +A quick way to find whether the patch is in this stable-queue is to +simply clone the repo, and then git grep the mainline commit ID, e.g. +:: + + stable-queue$ git grep -l 284041ef21fdf2e + releases/3.0.84/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch + releases/3.4.51/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch + releases/3.9.8/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch + stable/stable-queue$ + +Q: I see a network patch and I think it should be backported to stable. +----------------------------------------------------------------------- +Q: Should I request it via stable@vger.kernel.org like the references in +the kernel's Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst file say? +A: No, not for networking. Check the stable queues as per above first +to see if it is already queued. If not, then send a mail to netdev, +listing the upstream commit ID and why you think it should be a stable +candidate. + +Before you jump to go do the above, do note that the normal stable rules +in :ref:`Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst <stable_kernel_rules>` +still apply. So you need to explicitly indicate why it is a critical +fix and exactly what users are impacted. In addition, you need to +convince yourself that you *really* think it has been overlooked, +vs. having been considered and rejected. + +Generally speaking, the longer it has had a chance to "soak" in +mainline, the better the odds that it is an OK candidate for stable. So +scrambling to request a commit be added the day after it appears should +be avoided. + +Q: I have created a network patch and I think it should be backported to stable. +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Q: Should I add a Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org like the references in the +kernel's Documentation/ directory say? +A: No. See above answer. In short, if you think it really belongs in +stable, then ensure you write a decent commit log that describes who +gets impacted by the bug fix and how it manifests itself, and when the +bug was introduced. If you do that properly, then the commit will get +handled appropriately and most likely get put in the patchworks stable +queue if it really warrants it. + +If you think there is some valid information relating to it being in +stable that does *not* belong in the commit log, then use the three dash +marker line as described in +:ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <the_canonical_patch_format>` +to temporarily embed that information into the patch that you send. + +Q: Are all networking bug fixes backported to all stable releases? +------------------------------------------------------------------ +A: Due to capacity, Dave could only take care of the backports for the +last two stable releases. For earlier stable releases, each stable +branch maintainer is supposed to take care of them. If you find any +patch is missing from an earlier stable branch, please notify +stable@vger.kernel.org with either a commit ID or a formal patch +backported, and CC Dave and other relevant networking developers. + +Q: Is the comment style convention different for the networking content? +------------------------------------------------------------------------ +A: Yes, in a largely trivial way. Instead of this:: + + /* + * foobar blah blah blah + * another line of text + */ + +it is requested that you make it look like this:: + + /* foobar blah blah blah + * another line of text + */ + +Q: I am working in existing code that has the former comment style and not the latter. +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Q: Should I submit new code in the former style or the latter? +A: Make it the latter style, so that eventually all code in the domain +of netdev is of this format. + +Q: I found a bug that might have possible security implications or similar. +--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +Q: Should I mail the main netdev maintainer off-list?** +A: No. The current netdev maintainer has consistently requested that +people use the mailing lists and not reach out directly. If you aren't +OK with that, then perhaps consider mailing security@kernel.org or +reading about http://oss-security.openwall.org/wiki/mailing-lists/distros +as possible alternative mechanisms. + +Q: What level of testing is expected before I submit my change? +--------------------------------------------------------------- +A: If your changes are against ``net-next``, the expectation is that you +have tested by layering your changes on top of ``net-next``. Ideally +you will have done run-time testing specific to your change, but at a +minimum, your changes should survive an ``allyesconfig`` and an +``allmodconfig`` build without new warnings or failures. + +Q: Any other tips to help ensure my net/net-next patch gets OK'd? +----------------------------------------------------------------- +A: Attention to detail. Re-read your own work as if you were the +reviewer. You can start with using ``checkpatch.pl``, perhaps even with +the ``--strict`` flag. But do not be mindlessly robotic in doing so. +If your change is a bug fix, make sure your commit log indicates the +end-user visible symptom, the underlying reason as to why it happens, +and then if necessary, explain why the fix proposed is the best way to +get things done. Don't mangle whitespace, and as is common, don't +mis-indent function arguments that span multiple lines. If it is your +first patch, mail it to yourself so you can test apply it to an +unpatched tree to confirm infrastructure didn't mangle it. + +Finally, go back and read +:ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>` +to be sure you are not repeating some common mistake documented there. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt deleted file mode 100644 index fa951b820b25..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,244 +0,0 @@ - -Information you need to know about netdev ------------------------------------------ - -Q: What is netdev? - -A: It is a mailing list for all network-related Linux stuff. This includes - anything found under net/ (i.e. core code like IPv6) and drivers/net - (i.e. hardware specific drivers) in the Linux source tree. - - Note that some subsystems (e.g. wireless drivers) which have a high volume - of traffic have their own specific mailing lists. - - The netdev list is managed (like many other Linux mailing lists) through - VGER ( http://vger.kernel.org/ ) and archives can be found below: - - http://marc.info/?l=linux-netdev - http://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/ - - Aside from subsystems like that mentioned above, all network-related Linux - development (i.e. RFC, review, comments, etc.) takes place on netdev. - -Q: How do the changes posted to netdev make their way into Linux? - -A: There are always two trees (git repositories) in play. Both are driven - by David Miller, the main network maintainer. There is the "net" tree, - and the "net-next" tree. As you can probably guess from the names, the - net tree is for fixes to existing code already in the mainline tree from - Linus, and net-next is where the new code goes for the future release. - You can find the trees here: - - https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/davem/net.git - https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/davem/net-next.git - -Q: How often do changes from these trees make it to the mainline Linus tree? - -A: To understand this, you need to know a bit of background information - on the cadence of Linux development. Each new release starts off with - a two week "merge window" where the main maintainers feed their new - stuff to Linus for merging into the mainline tree. After the two weeks, - the merge window is closed, and it is called/tagged "-rc1". No new - features get mainlined after this -- only fixes to the rc1 content - are expected. After roughly a week of collecting fixes to the rc1 - content, rc2 is released. This repeats on a roughly weekly basis - until rc7 (typically; sometimes rc6 if things are quiet, or rc8 if - things are in a state of churn), and a week after the last vX.Y-rcN - was done, the official "vX.Y" is released. - - Relating that to netdev: At the beginning of the 2-week merge window, - the net-next tree will be closed - no new changes/features. The - accumulated new content of the past ~10 weeks will be passed onto - mainline/Linus via a pull request for vX.Y -- at the same time, - the "net" tree will start accumulating fixes for this pulled content - relating to vX.Y - - An announcement indicating when net-next has been closed is usually - sent to netdev, but knowing the above, you can predict that in advance. - - IMPORTANT: Do not send new net-next content to netdev during the - period during which net-next tree is closed. - - Shortly after the two weeks have passed (and vX.Y-rc1 is released), the - tree for net-next reopens to collect content for the next (vX.Y+1) release. - - If you aren't subscribed to netdev and/or are simply unsure if net-next - has re-opened yet, simply check the net-next git repository link above for - any new networking-related commits. You may also check the following - website for the current status: - - http://vger.kernel.org/~davem/net-next.html - - The "net" tree continues to collect fixes for the vX.Y content, and - is fed back to Linus at regular (~weekly) intervals. Meaning that the - focus for "net" is on stabilization and bugfixes. - - Finally, the vX.Y gets released, and the whole cycle starts over. - -Q: So where are we now in this cycle? - -A: Load the mainline (Linus) page here: - - https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git - - and note the top of the "tags" section. If it is rc1, it is early - in the dev cycle. If it was tagged rc7 a week ago, then a release - is probably imminent. - -Q: How do I indicate which tree (net vs. net-next) my patch should be in? - -A: Firstly, think whether you have a bug fix or new "next-like" content. - Then once decided, assuming that you use git, use the prefix flag, i.e. - - git format-patch --subject-prefix='PATCH net-next' start..finish - - Use "net" instead of "net-next" (always lower case) in the above for - bug-fix net content. If you don't use git, then note the only magic in - the above is just the subject text of the outgoing e-mail, and you can - manually change it yourself with whatever MUA you are comfortable with. - -Q: I sent a patch and I'm wondering what happened to it. How can I tell - whether it got merged? - -A: Start by looking at the main patchworks queue for netdev: - - http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/project/netdev/list/ - - The "State" field will tell you exactly where things are at with - your patch. - -Q: The above only says "Under Review". How can I find out more? - -A: Generally speaking, the patches get triaged quickly (in less than 48h). - So be patient. Asking the maintainer for status updates on your - patch is a good way to ensure your patch is ignored or pushed to - the bottom of the priority list. - -Q: I submitted multiple versions of the patch series, should I directly update - patchwork for the previous versions of these patch series? - -A: No, please don't interfere with the patch status on patchwork, leave it to - the maintainer to figure out what is the most recent and current version that - should be applied. If there is any doubt, the maintainer will reply and ask - what should be done. - -Q: How can I tell what patches are queued up for backporting to the - various stable releases? - -A: Normally Greg Kroah-Hartman collects stable commits himself, but - for networking, Dave collects up patches he deems critical for the - networking subsystem, and then hands them off to Greg. - - There is a patchworks queue that you can see here: - http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/bundle/davem/stable/?state=* - - It contains the patches which Dave has selected, but not yet handed - off to Greg. If Greg already has the patch, then it will be here: - https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/stable/stable-queue.git - - A quick way to find whether the patch is in this stable-queue is - to simply clone the repo, and then git grep the mainline commit ID, e.g. - - stable-queue$ git grep -l 284041ef21fdf2e - releases/3.0.84/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch - releases/3.4.51/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch - releases/3.9.8/ipv6-fix-possible-crashes-in-ip6_cork_release.patch - stable/stable-queue$ - -Q: I see a network patch and I think it should be backported to stable. - Should I request it via "stable@vger.kernel.org" like the references in - the kernel's Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst file say? - -A: No, not for networking. Check the stable queues as per above 1st to see - if it is already queued. If not, then send a mail to netdev, listing - the upstream commit ID and why you think it should be a stable candidate. - - Before you jump to go do the above, do note that the normal stable rules - in Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst still apply. So you need to - explicitly indicate why it is a critical fix and exactly what users are - impacted. In addition, you need to convince yourself that you _really_ - think it has been overlooked, vs. having been considered and rejected. - - Generally speaking, the longer it has had a chance to "soak" in mainline, - the better the odds that it is an OK candidate for stable. So scrambling - to request a commit be added the day after it appears should be avoided. - -Q: I have created a network patch and I think it should be backported to - stable. Should I add a "Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org" like the references - in the kernel's Documentation/ directory say? - -A: No. See above answer. In short, if you think it really belongs in - stable, then ensure you write a decent commit log that describes who - gets impacted by the bugfix and how it manifests itself, and when the - bug was introduced. If you do that properly, then the commit will - get handled appropriately and most likely get put in the patchworks - stable queue if it really warrants it. - - If you think there is some valid information relating to it being in - stable that does _not_ belong in the commit log, then use the three - dash marker line as described in Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst to - temporarily embed that information into the patch that you send. - -Q: Are all networking bug fixes backported to all stable releases? - -A: Due to capacity, Dave could only take care of the backports for the last - 2 stable releases. For earlier stable releases, each stable branch maintainer - is supposed to take care of them. If you find any patch is missing from an - earlier stable branch, please notify stable@vger.kernel.org with either a - commit ID or a formal patch backported, and CC Dave and other relevant - networking developers. - -Q: Someone said that the comment style and coding convention is different - for the networking content. Is this true? - -A: Yes, in a largely trivial way. Instead of this: - - /* - * foobar blah blah blah - * another line of text - */ - - it is requested that you make it look like this: - - /* foobar blah blah blah - * another line of text - */ - -Q: I am working in existing code that has the former comment style and not the - latter. Should I submit new code in the former style or the latter? - -A: Make it the latter style, so that eventually all code in the domain of - netdev is of this format. - -Q: I found a bug that might have possible security implications or similar. - Should I mail the main netdev maintainer off-list? - -A: No. The current netdev maintainer has consistently requested that people - use the mailing lists and not reach out directly. If you aren't OK with - that, then perhaps consider mailing "security@kernel.org" or reading about - http://oss-security.openwall.org/wiki/mailing-lists/distros - as possible alternative mechanisms. - -Q: What level of testing is expected before I submit my change? - -A: If your changes are against net-next, the expectation is that you - have tested by layering your changes on top of net-next. Ideally you - will have done run-time testing specific to your change, but at a - minimum, your changes should survive an "allyesconfig" and an - "allmodconfig" build without new warnings or failures. - -Q: Any other tips to help ensure my net/net-next patch gets OK'd? - -A: Attention to detail. Re-read your own work as if you were the - reviewer. You can start with using checkpatch.pl, perhaps even - with the "--strict" flag. But do not be mindlessly robotic in - doing so. If your change is a bug-fix, make sure your commit log - indicates the end-user visible symptom, the underlying reason as - to why it happens, and then if necessary, explain why the fix proposed - is the best way to get things done. Don't mangle whitespace, and as - is common, don't mis-indent function arguments that span multiple lines. - If it is your first patch, mail it to yourself so you can test apply - it to an unpatched tree to confirm infrastructure didn't mangle it. - - Finally, go back and read Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst to be - sure you are not repeating some common mistake documented there. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt index f55639d71d35..b7056a8a0540 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/scaling.txt @@ -366,8 +366,13 @@ XPS: Transmit Packet Steering Transmit Packet Steering is a mechanism for intelligently selecting which transmit queue to use when transmitting a packet on a multi-queue -device. To accomplish this, a mapping from CPU to hardware queue(s) is -recorded. The goal of this mapping is usually to assign queues +device. This can be accomplished by recording two kinds of maps, either +a mapping of CPU to hardware queue(s) or a mapping of receive queue(s) +to hardware transmit queue(s). + +1. XPS using CPUs map + +The goal of this mapping is usually to assign queues exclusively to a subset of CPUs, where the transmit completions for these queues are processed on a CPU within this set. This choice provides two benefits. First, contention on the device queue lock is @@ -377,15 +382,40 @@ transmit queue). Secondly, cache miss rate on transmit completion is reduced, in particular for data cache lines that hold the sk_buff structures. -XPS is configured per transmit queue by setting a bitmap of CPUs that -may use that queue to transmit. The reverse mapping, from CPUs to -transmit queues, is computed and maintained for each network device. -When transmitting the first packet in a flow, the function -get_xps_queue() is called to select a queue. This function uses the ID -of the running CPU as a key into the CPU-to-queue lookup table. If the +2. XPS using receive queues map + +This mapping is used to pick transmit queue based on the receive +queue(s) map configuration set by the administrator. A set of receive +queues can be mapped to a set of transmit queues (many:many), although +the common use case is a 1:1 mapping. This will enable sending packets +on the same queue associations for transmit and receive. This is useful for +busy polling multi-threaded workloads where there are challenges in +associating a given CPU to a given application thread. The application +threads are not pinned to CPUs and each thread handles packets +received on a single queue. The receive queue number is cached in the +socket for the connection. In this model, sending the packets on the same +transmit queue corresponding to the associated receive queue has benefits +in keeping the CPU overhead low. Transmit completion work is locked into +the same queue-association that a given application is polling on. This +avoids the overhead of triggering an interrupt on another CPU. When the +application cleans up the packets during the busy poll, transmit completion +may be processed along with it in the same thread context and so result in +reduced latency. + +XPS is configured per transmit queue by setting a bitmap of +CPUs/receive-queues that may use that queue to transmit. The reverse +mapping, from CPUs to transmit queues or from receive-queues to transmit +queues, is computed and maintained for each network device. When +transmitting the first packet in a flow, the function get_xps_queue() is +called to select a queue. This function uses the ID of the receive queue +for the socket connection for a match in the receive queue-to-transmit queue +lookup table. Alternatively, this function can also use the ID of the +running CPU as a key into the CPU-to-queue lookup table. If the ID matches a single queue, that is used for transmission. If multiple queues match, one is selected by using the flow hash to compute an index -into the set. +into the set. When selecting the transmit queue based on receive queue(s) +map, the transmit device is not validated against the receive device as it +requires expensive lookup operation in the datapath. The queue chosen for transmitting a particular flow is saved in the corresponding socket structure for the flow (e.g. a TCP connection). @@ -404,11 +434,15 @@ acknowledged. XPS is only available if the kconfig symbol CONFIG_XPS is enabled (on by default for SMP). The functionality remains disabled until explicitly -configured. To enable XPS, the bitmap of CPUs that may use a transmit -queue is configured using the sysfs file entry: +configured. To enable XPS, the bitmap of CPUs/receive-queues that may +use a transmit queue is configured using the sysfs file entry: +For selection based on CPUs map: /sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_cpus +For selection based on receive-queues map: +/sys/class/net/<dev>/queues/tx-<n>/xps_rxqs + == Suggested Configuration For a network device with a single transmission queue, XPS configuration @@ -421,6 +455,11 @@ best CPUs to share a given queue are probably those that share the cache with the CPU that processes transmit completions for that queue (transmit interrupts). +For transmit queue selection based on receive queue(s), XPS has to be +explicitly configured mapping receive-queue(s) to transmit queue(s). If the +user configuration for receive-queue map does not apply, then the transmit +queue is selected based on the CPUs map. + Per TX Queue rate limitation: ============================= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/strparser.txt b/Documentation/networking/strparser.txt index 13081b3decef..a7d354ddda7b 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/strparser.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/strparser.txt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ void strp_pause(struct strparser *strp) Temporarily pause a stream parser. Message parsing is suspended and no new messages are delivered to the upper layer. -void strp_pause(struct strparser *strp) +void strp_unpause(struct strparser *strp) Unpause a paused stream parser. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ti-cpsw.txt b/Documentation/networking/ti-cpsw.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d4d4c0751a09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ti-cpsw.txt @@ -0,0 +1,541 @@ +* Texas Instruments CPSW ethernet driver + +Multiqueue & CBS & MQPRIO +===================================================================== +===================================================================== + +The cpsw has 3 CBS shapers for each external ports. This document +describes MQPRIO and CBS Qdisc offload configuration for cpsw driver +based on examples. It potentially can be used in audio video bridging +(AVB) and time sensitive networking (TSN). + +The following examples were tested on AM572x EVM and BBB boards. + +Test setup +========== + +Under consideration two examples with AM572x EVM running cpsw driver +in dual_emac mode. + +Several prerequisites: +- TX queues must be rated starting from txq0 that has highest priority +- Traffic classes are used starting from 0, that has highest priority +- CBS shapers should be used with rated queues +- The bandwidth for CBS shapers has to be set a little bit more then + potential incoming rate, thus, rate of all incoming tx queues has + to be a little less +- Real rates can differ, due to discreetness +- Map skb-priority to txq is not enough, also skb-priority to l2 prio + map has to be created with ip or vconfig tool +- Any l2/socket prio (0 - 7) for classes can be used, but for + simplicity default values are used: 3 and 2 +- only 2 classes tested: A and B, but checked and can work with more, + maximum allowed 4, but only for 3 rate can be set. + +Test setup for examples +======================= + +-------------------------------+ + |--+ | + | | Workstation0 | + |E | MAC 18:03:73:66:87:42 | ++-----------------------------+ +--|t | | +| | 1 | E | | |h |./tsn_listener -d \ | +| Target board: | 0 | t |--+ |0 | 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0 \| +| AM572x EVM | 0 | h | | | -s 1500 | +| | 0 | 0 | |--+ | +| Only 2 classes: |Mb +---| +-------------------------------+ +| class A, class B | | +| | +---| +-------------------------------+ +| | 1 | E | |--+ | +| | 0 | t | | | Workstation1 | +| | 0 | h |--+ |E | MAC 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd | +| |Mb | 1 | +--|t | | ++-----------------------------+ |h |./tsn_listener -d \ | + |0 | 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth0 \| + | | -s 1500 | + |--+ | + +-------------------------------+ + +********************************************************************* +********************************************************************* +********************************************************************* +Example 1: One port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, applicable for single port boards) + +tc - traffic class +txq - transmit queue +p - priority +f - fifo (cpsw fifo) +S - shaper configured + ++------------------------------------------------------------------+ u +| +---------------+ +---------------+ +------+ +------+ | s +| | | | | | | | | | e +| | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | Apps | | r +| | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Rest | | +| | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth1 | | s +| | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | | | | p +| | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | | | | a +| | SO_PRIORITY=3 | | SO_PRIORITY=2 | | | | | | | | c +| | | | | | | | | | | | | | e +| +---|-----------+ +---|-----------+ +---|--+ +---|--+ | ++-----|------------------|------------------|--------|-------------+ + +-+ +------------+ | | + | | +-----------------+ +--+ + | | | | ++---|-------|-------------|-----------------------|----------------+ +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | k +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n +| | | | | | e +| | | +-----+ | | l +| | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s +| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc0 | | p +| \ / \ / \ / \ / | a +| \ / \ / \ / \ / | c +| \/ \/ \/ \/ | e +| | | +-----+ | | +| | | | | | | +| | | | | | | +| | | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| |txq0| |txq1| |txq2| |txq3| |txq4| | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | +| +-|------|------|------|--+ +--|--------------+ | +| | | | | | | Eth0.100 | | Eth1 | | ++---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+ + | | | | | + p p p p | + 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <- L2 priority | + | | | | | + | | | | | ++---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+ +| | | | | |----------+ | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| |dma7| |dma6| |dma5| |dma4| |dma3| | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c +| \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / | p +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s +| | | | +----- | | w +| | | | | | | +| | | | | | | d +| +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ | r +| | | | | | |o o| | | i +| | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r r| f0 | | v +| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | | e +| \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / | r +| \S / \S / \ / \ / | +| \/ \/ \/ \/ | ++------------------------------------------------------------------+ +========================================Eth==========================> + +1) +// Add 4 tx queues, for interface Eth0, and 1 tx queue for Eth1 +$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 5 +rx unmodified, ignoring + +2) +// Check if num of queues is set correctly: +$ ethtool -l eth0 +Channel parameters for eth0: +Pre-set maximums: +RX: 8 +TX: 8 +Other: 0 +Combined: 0 +Current hardware settings: +RX: 1 +TX: 5 +Other: 0 +Combined: 0 + +3) +// TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 +// Set rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately. +// Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness. +// Leave last 2 tx queues not rated. +$ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate +$ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate + +4) +// Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues: +$ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate +40 +20 +0 +0 +0 + +5) +// Map skb->priority to traffic class: +// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 +// Map traffic class to transmit queue: +// tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq2, txq3) +$ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ +map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@2 hw 1 + +5a) +// As two interface sharing same set of tx queues, assign all traffic +// coming to interface Eth1 to separate queue in order to not mix it +// with traffic from interface Eth0, so use separate txq to send +// packets to Eth1, so all prio -> tc0 and tc0 -> txq4 +// Here hw 0, so here still default configuration for eth1 in hw +$ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 1 \ +map 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 queues 1@4 hw 0 + +6) +// Check classes settings +$ tc -g class show dev eth0 ++---(100:ffe2) mqprio +| +---(100:3) mqprio +| +---(100:4) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe1) mqprio +| +---(100:2) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:1) mqprio + +$ tc -g class show dev eth1 ++---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:5) mqprio + +7) +// Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc +// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) +// here only idle slope is important, others arg are ignored +// Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness +$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1438 \ +hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1 +net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50 + +8) +// Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc: +// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) +$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1468 \ +hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1 +net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30 + +9) +// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos +$ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100 +8021q: 802.1Q VLAN Support v1.8 +8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth0 +8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth1 +net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +10) +// Map skb->priority to L2 prio, 1 to 1 +$ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \ +egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +11) +// Check egress map for vlan 100 +$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100 +[...] +INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 +EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +12) +// Run your appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" +// to 3 for class A and/or to 2 for class B +// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) +./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500& +./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500& + +13) +// run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan) +// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) +./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500 +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps + +14) +// Restore default configuration if needed +$ ip link del eth0.100 +$ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root +$ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root +net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped +net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0 +net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0 +$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1 + +********************************************************************* +********************************************************************* +********************************************************************* +Example 2: Two port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, for dual emac boards only) + ++------------------------------------------------------------------+ u +| +----------+ +----------+ +------+ +----------+ +----------+ | s +| | | | | | | | | | | | e +| | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | App 3 | | App 4 | | r +| | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Class B | | Class A | | +| | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | | | | Eth1 | | Eth1 | | s +| | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | p +| | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | 10 Mb/s | | 30 Mb/s | | a +| | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | | | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | c +| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e +| +---|------+ +---|------+ +---|--+ +---|------+ +---|------+ | ++-----|-------------|-------------|---------|-------------|--------+ + +-+ +-------+ | +----------+ +----+ + | | +-------+------+ | | + | | | | | | ++---|-------|-------------|--------------|-------------|-------|---+ +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | p1 | | p2 | | p3 | | k +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n +| | | | | | | | e +| | | +----+ +----+ | | | l +| | | | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s +| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc2 | |tc1 | |tc0 | | p +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | a +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | e +| | | +-----+ +-----+ | | | +| | | | | | | | | | +| | | | | | | | | | +| | | | | E E | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ t t +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| |txq0| |txq1| |txq4| |txq5| h h |txq6| |txq7| |txq3| |txq2| | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / 0 1 \ / \ / \ / \ / | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / . . \ / \ / \ / \ / | +| \/ \/ \/ \/ 1 1 \/ \/ \/ \/ | +| +-|------|------|------|--+ 0 0 +-|------|------|------|--+ | +| | | | | | | 0 0 | | | | | | | ++---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+ + | | | | | | | | + p p p p p p p p + 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <-L2 pri-> 0-1, 4-7 2 3 + | | | | | | | | + | | | | | | | | ++---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+ +| | | | | | | | | | +| +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | +| |dma7| |dma6| |dma3| |dma2| |dma1| |dma0| |dma4| |dma5| | +| \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c +| \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / \ / \S / \S / | p +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s +| | | | +----- | | | | | w +| | | | | +----+ | | | | +| | | | | | | | | | d +| +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ +----+ +----+ | r +| | | | | | |o o| | | | | | | i +| | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r CPSW r| f3 | | f2 | | f0 | | v +| |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | | e +| \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / \CBS / \CBS / | r +| \S / \S / \ / \S / \S / \ / | +| \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | ++------------------------------------------------------------------+ +========================================Eth==========================> + +1) +// Add 8 tx queues, for interface Eth0, but they are common, so are accessed +// by two interfaces Eth0 and Eth1. +$ ethtool -L eth1 rx 1 tx 8 +rx unmodified, ignoring + +2) +// Check if num of queues is set correctly: +$ ethtool -l eth0 +Channel parameters for eth0: +Pre-set maximums: +RX: 8 +TX: 8 +Other: 0 +Combined: 0 +Current hardware settings: +RX: 1 +TX: 8 +Other: 0 +Combined: 0 + +3) +// TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 for Eth0 +// and for tx2 and tx3 for Eth1. That is, rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately +// for Eth0 and 30 and 10 Mb/s for Eth1. +// Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness +// Leave last 4 tx queues as not rated +$ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate +$ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate +$ echo 30 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-2/tx_maxrate +$ echo 10 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-3/tx_maxrate + +4) +// Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues: +$ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate +40 +20 +30 +10 +0 +0 +0 +0 + +5) +// Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth0: +// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 +// Map traffic class to transmit queue: +// tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq4, txq5) +$ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ +map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@4 hw 1 + +6) +// Check classes settings +$ tc -g class show dev eth0 ++---(100:ffe2) mqprio +| +---(100:5) mqprio +| +---(100:6) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe1) mqprio +| +---(100:2) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:1) mqprio + +7) +// Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0 +// here only idle slope is important, others ignored +// Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness +$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1470 \ +hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1 +net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50 + +8) +// Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0 +$ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1470 \ +hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1 +net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30 + +9) +// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth0 +$ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100 +net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +10) +// Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth0.100, one to one +$ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \ +egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +11) +// Check egress map for vlan 100 +$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100 +[...] +INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 +EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +12) +// Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth1: +// 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2 +// Map traffic class to transmit queue: +// tc0 -> txq2, tc1 -> txq3, tc2 -> (txq6, txq7) +$ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \ +map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@2 1@3 2@6 hw 1 + +13) +// Check classes settings +$ tc -g class show dev eth1 ++---(100:ffe2) mqprio +| +---(100:7) mqprio +| +---(100:8) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe1) mqprio +| +---(100:4) mqprio +| ++---(100:ffe0) mqprio + +---(100:3) mqprio + +14) +// Set rate for class A - 31 Mbit (tc0, txq2) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1 +// here only idle slope is important, others ignored, but calculated +// for interface speed - 100Mb for eth1 port. +// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) +$ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:3 cbs locredit -1035 \ +hicredit 465 sendslope -69000 idleslope 31000 offload 1 +net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 31 + +15) +// Set rate for class B - 11 Mbit (tc1, txq3) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1 +// Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!) +$ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:4 cbs locredit -1335 \ +hicredit 405 sendslope -89000 idleslope 11000 offload 1 +net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 11 + +16) +// Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth1 +$ ip link add link eth1 name eth1.100 type vlan id 100 +net eth1: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter + +17) +// Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth1.100, one to one +$ ip link set eth1.100 type vlan \ +egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +18) +// Check egress map for vlan 100 +$ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth1.100 +[...] +INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0 +EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7 + +19) +// Run appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" to 3 +// for class A and to 2 for class B. For both interfaces +./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500& +./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500& +./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p2 -s 1500& +./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p3 -s 1500& + +20) +// run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan) +// (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html) +./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500 +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps +Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps + +21) +// Restore default configuration if needed +$ ip link del eth1.100 +$ ip link del eth0.100 +$ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root +net eth1: Prev FIFO2 is shaped +net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 0 +net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 0 +$ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root +net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped +net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0 +net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0 +$ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt index ec11429e1d42..b9a188823d9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/tproxy.txt @@ -5,19 +5,28 @@ This feature adds Linux 2.2-like transparent proxy support to current kernels. To use it, enable the socket match and the TPROXY target in your kernel config. You will need policy routing too, so be sure to enable that as well. +From Linux 4.18 transparent proxy support is also available in nf_tables. 1. Making non-local sockets work ================================ The idea is that you identify packets with destination address matching a local -socket on your box, set the packet mark to a certain value, and then match on that -value using policy routing to have those packets delivered locally: +socket on your box, set the packet mark to a certain value: # iptables -t mangle -N DIVERT # iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp -m socket -j DIVERT # iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j MARK --set-mark 1 # iptables -t mangle -A DIVERT -j ACCEPT +Alternatively you can do this in nft with the following commands: + +# nft add table filter +# nft add chain filter divert "{ type filter hook prerouting priority -150; }" +# nft add rule filter divert meta l4proto tcp socket transparent 1 meta mark set 1 accept + +And then match on that value using policy routing to have those packets +delivered locally: + # ip rule add fwmark 1 lookup 100 # ip route add local 0.0.0.0/0 dev lo table 100 @@ -57,17 +66,28 @@ add rules like this to the iptables ruleset above: # iptables -t mangle -A PREROUTING -p tcp --dport 80 -j TPROXY \ --tproxy-mark 0x1/0x1 --on-port 50080 +Or the following rule to nft: + +# nft add rule filter divert tcp dport 80 tproxy to :50080 meta mark set 1 accept + Note that for this to work you'll have to modify the proxy to enable (SOL_IP, IP_TRANSPARENT) for the listening socket. +As an example implementation, tcprdr is available here: +https://git.breakpoint.cc/cgit/fw/tcprdr.git/ +This tool is written by Florian Westphal and it was used for testing during the +nf_tables implementation. -3. Iptables extensions -====================== +3. Iptables and nf_tables extensions +==================================== -To use tproxy you'll need to have the 'socket' and 'TPROXY' modules -compiled for iptables. A patched version of iptables is available -here: http://git.balabit.hu/?p=bazsi/iptables-tproxy.git +To use tproxy you'll need to have the following modules compiled for iptables: + - NETFILTER_XT_MATCH_SOCKET + - NETFILTER_XT_TARGET_TPROXY +Or the floowing modules for nf_tables: + - NFT_SOCKET + - NFT_TPROXY 4. Application support ====================== diff --git a/Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt b/Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt index 69556f0d494b..530fed08de2c 100644 --- a/Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case: appropriate mapping protection capabilities. Ramfs, romfs, cramfs and mtd might all permit this. - - If the backing device device can't or won't permit direct sharing, + - If the backing device can't or won't permit direct sharing, but does have the NOMMU_MAP_COPY capability, then a copy of the appropriate bit of the file will be read into a contiguous bit of memory and any extraneous space beyond the EOF will be cleared diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt index dd04361dd361..78355c4c268a 100644 --- a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt @@ -46,9 +46,6 @@ This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors: - use pcmcia_request_irq(p_dev, handler_t); the PCMCIA core will clean up automatically on calls to pcmcia_disable_device() or device ejection. - - drivers still not capable of IRQF_SHARED (or not telling us so) may - use the deprecated pcmcia_request_exclusive_irq() for the time - being; they might receive a shared IRQ nonetheless. * no cs_error / CS_CHECK / CONFIG_PCMCIA_DEBUG (as of 2.6.33) Instead of the cs_error() callback or the CS_CHECK() macro, please use diff --git a/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt b/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt index af005770e767..cd283190855a 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/freezing-of-tasks.txt @@ -204,26 +204,26 @@ VI. Are there any precautions to be taken to prevent freezing failures? Yes, there are. -First of all, grabbing the 'pm_mutex' lock to mutually exclude a piece of code +First of all, grabbing the 'system_transition_mutex' lock to mutually exclude a piece of code from system-wide sleep such as suspend/hibernation is not encouraged. If possible, that piece of code must instead hook onto the suspend/hibernation notifiers to achieve mutual exclusion. Look at the CPU-Hotplug code (kernel/cpu.c) for an example. -However, if that is not feasible, and grabbing 'pm_mutex' is deemed necessary, -it is strongly discouraged to directly call mutex_[un]lock(&pm_mutex) since +However, if that is not feasible, and grabbing 'system_transition_mutex' is deemed necessary, +it is strongly discouraged to directly call mutex_[un]lock(&system_transition_mutex) since that could lead to freezing failures, because if the suspend/hibernate code -successfully acquired the 'pm_mutex' lock, and hence that other entity failed +successfully acquired the 'system_transition_mutex' lock, and hence that other entity failed to acquire the lock, then that task would get blocked in TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE state. As a consequence, the freezer would not be able to freeze that task, leading to freezing failure. However, the [un]lock_system_sleep() APIs are safe to use in this scenario, since they ask the freezer to skip freezing this task, since it is anyway -"frozen enough" as it is blocked on 'pm_mutex', which will be released +"frozen enough" as it is blocked on 'system_transition_mutex', which will be released only after the entire suspend/hibernation sequence is complete. So, to summarize, use [un]lock_system_sleep() instead of directly using -mutex_[un]lock(&pm_mutex). That would prevent freezing failures. +mutex_[un]lock(&system_transition_mutex). That would prevent freezing failures. V. Miscellaneous /sys/power/pm_freeze_timeout controls how long it will cost at most to freeze diff --git a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt index 6f55eb960a6d..a8751b8df10e 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-cpuhotplug.txt @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ More details follow: sysfs file | v - Acquire pm_mutex lock + Acquire system_transition_mutex lock | v Send PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE @@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ execution during resume): * thaw tasks * send PM_POST_SUSPEND notifications -* Release pm_mutex lock. +* Release system_transition_mutex lock. -It is to be noted here that the pm_mutex lock is acquired at the very +It is to be noted here that the system_transition_mutex lock is acquired at the very beginning, when we are just starting out to suspend, and then released only after the entire cycle is complete (i.e., suspend + resume). diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2feaa6619658 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/DAWR-POWER9.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +DAWR issues on POWER9 +============================ + +On POWER9 the DAWR can cause a checkstop if it points to cache +inhibited (CI) memory. Currently Linux has no way to disinguish CI +memory when configuring the DAWR, so (for now) the DAWR is disabled by +this commit: + + commit 9654153158d3e0684a1bdb76dbababdb7111d5a0 + Author: Michael Neuling <mikey@neuling.org> + Date: Tue Mar 27 15:37:24 2018 +1100 + powerpc: Disable DAWR in the base POWER9 CPU features + +Technical Details: +============================ + +DAWR has 6 different ways of being set. +1) ptrace +2) h_set_mode(DAWR) +3) h_set_dabr() +4) kvmppc_set_one_reg() +5) xmon + +For ptrace, we now advertise zero breakpoints on POWER9 via the +PPC_PTRACE_GETHWDBGINFO call. This results in GDB falling back to +software emulation of the watchpoint (which is slow). + +h_set_mode(DAWR) and h_set_dabr() will now return an error to the +guest on a POWER9 host. Current Linux guests ignore this error, so +they will silently not get the DAWR. + +kvmppc_set_one_reg() will store the value in the vcpu but won't +actually set it on POWER9 hardware. This is done so we don't break +migration from POWER8 to POWER9, at the cost of silently losing the +DAWR on the migration. + +For xmon, the 'bd' command will return an error on P9. + +Consequences for users +============================ + +For GDB watchpoints (ie 'watch' command) on POWER9 bare metal , GDB +will accept the command. Unfortunately since there is no hardware +support for the watchpoint, GDB will software emulate the watchpoint +making it run very slowly. + +The same will also be true for any guests started on a POWER9 +host. The watchpoint will fail and GDB will fall back to software +emulation. + +If a guest is started on a POWER8 host, GDB will accept the watchpoint +and configure the hardware to use the DAWR. This will run at full +speed since it can use the hardware emulation. Unfortunately if this +guest is migrated to a POWER9 host, the watchpoint will be lost on the +POWER9. Loads and stores to the watchpoint locations will not be +trapped in GDB. The watchpoint is remembered, so if the guest is +migrated back to the POWER8 host, it will start working again. + diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt index e32fdbb4c9a7..52c023e14f26 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/transactional_memory.txt @@ -198,3 +198,47 @@ presented). The transaction cannot then be continued and will take the failure handler route. Furthermore, the transactional 2nd register state will be inaccessible. GDB can currently be used on programs using TM, but not sensibly in parts within transactions. + +POWER9 +====== + +TM on POWER9 has issues with storing the complete register state. This +is described in this commit: + + commit 4bb3c7a0208fc13ca70598efd109901a7cd45ae7 + Author: Paul Mackerras <paulus@ozlabs.org> + Date: Wed Mar 21 21:32:01 2018 +1100 + KVM: PPC: Book3S HV: Work around transactional memory bugs in POWER9 + +To account for this different POWER9 chips have TM enabled in +different ways. + +On POWER9N DD2.01 and below, TM is disabled. ie +HWCAP2[PPC_FEATURE2_HTM] is not set. + +On POWER9N DD2.1 TM is configured by firmware to always abort a +transaction when tm suspend occurs. So tsuspend will cause a +transaction to be aborted and rolled back. Kernel exceptions will also +cause the transaction to be aborted and rolled back and the exception +will not occur. If userspace constructs a sigcontext that enables TM +suspend, the sigcontext will be rejected by the kernel. This mode is +advertised to users with HWCAP2[PPC_FEATURE2_HTM_NO_SUSPEND] set. +HWCAP2[PPC_FEATURE2_HTM] is not set in this mode. + +On POWER9N DD2.2 and above, KVM and POWERVM emulate TM for guests (as +described in commit 4bb3c7a0208f), hence TM is enabled for guests +ie. HWCAP2[PPC_FEATURE2_HTM] is set for guest userspace. Guests that +makes heavy use of TM suspend (tsuspend or kernel suspend) will result +in traps into the hypervisor and hence will suffer a performance +degradation. Host userspace has TM disabled +ie. HWCAP2[PPC_FEATURE2_HTM] is not set. (although we make enable it +at some point in the future if we bring the emulation into host +userspace context switching). + +POWER9C DD1.2 and above are only available with POWERVM and hence +Linux only runs as a guest. On these systems TM is emulated like on +POWER9N DD2.2. + +Guest migration from POWER8 to POWER9 will work with POWER9N DD2.2 and +POWER9C DD1.2. Since earlier POWER9 processors don't support TM +emulation, migration from POWER8 to POWER9 is not supported there. diff --git a/Documentation/process/2.Process.rst b/Documentation/process/2.Process.rst index a9c46dd0706b..51d0349c7809 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/2.Process.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/2.Process.rst @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ and their maintainers are: 4.4 Greg Kroah-Hartman (very long-term stable kernel) 4.9 Greg Kroah-Hartman 4.14 Greg Kroah-Hartman - ====== ====================== =========================== + ====== ====================== ============================== The selection of a kernel for long-term support is purely a matter of a maintainer having the need and the time to maintain that release. There diff --git a/Documentation/process/changes.rst b/Documentation/process/changes.rst index ddc029734b25..61f918b10a0c 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/changes.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/changes.rst @@ -29,13 +29,13 @@ you probably needn't concern yourself with isdn4k-utils. ====================== =============== ======================================== Program Minimal version Command to check the version ====================== =============== ======================================== -GNU C 3.2 gcc --version +GNU C 4.6 gcc --version GNU make 3.81 make --version binutils 2.20 ld -v flex 2.5.35 flex --version bison 2.0 bison --version util-linux 2.10o fdformat --version -module-init-tools 0.9.10 depmod -V +kmod 13 depmod -V e2fsprogs 1.41.4 e2fsck -V jfsutils 1.1.3 fsck.jfs -V reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 reiserfsck -V @@ -81,6 +81,14 @@ The build system has, as of 4.13, switched to using thin archives (`ar T`) rather than incremental linking (`ld -r`) for built-in.a intermediate steps. This requires binutils 2.20 or newer. +pkg-config +---------- + +The build system, as of 4.18, requires pkg-config to check for installed +kconfig tools and to determine flags settings for use in +'make {menu,n,g,x}config'. Previously pkg-config was being used but not +verified or documented. + Flex ---- @@ -156,12 +164,6 @@ is not build with ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS`` and you have no way to rebuild and reproduce the Oops with that option, then you can still decode that Oops with ksymoops. -Module-Init-Tools ------------------ - -A new module loader is now in the kernel that requires ``module-init-tools`` -to use. It is backward compatible with the 2.4.x series kernels. - Mkinitrd -------- @@ -371,16 +373,17 @@ Util-linux - <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/> +Kmod +---- + +- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/kmod/> +- <https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/utils/kernel/kmod/kmod.git> + Ksymoops -------- - <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/ksymoops/v2.4/> -Module-Init-Tools ------------------ - -- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/module-init-tools/> - Mkinitrd -------- diff --git a/Documentation/process/howto.rst b/Documentation/process/howto.rst index 3df55811b916..130bf0f48875 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/howto.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/howto.rst @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ linux-api@vger.kernel.org. Here is a list of files that are in the kernel source tree that are required reading: - README + :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst <readme>` This file gives a short background on the Linux kernel and describes what is necessary to do to configure and build the kernel. People who are new to the kernel should start here. diff --git a/Documentation/process/management-style.rst b/Documentation/process/management-style.rst index 45595fd8a66b..85ef8ca8f639 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/management-style.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/management-style.rst @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ to admit that you are stupid when you haven't **yet** done the really stupid thing. Then, when it really does turn out to be stupid, people just roll their -eyes and say "Oops, he did it again". +eyes and say "Oops, not again". This preemptive admission of incompetence might also make the people who actually do the work also think twice about whether it's worth doing or @@ -172,10 +172,10 @@ To solve this problem, you really only have two options: might even be amused. The option of being unfailingly polite really doesn't exist. Nobody will -trust somebody who is so clearly hiding his true character. +trust somebody who is so clearly hiding their true character. .. [#f2] Paul Simon sang "Fifty Ways to Leave Your Lover", because quite - frankly, "A Million Ways to Tell a Developer He Is a D*ckhead" doesn't + frankly, "A Million Ways to Tell a Developer They're a D*ckhead" doesn't scan nearly as well. But I'm sure he thought about it. @@ -219,15 +219,16 @@ Things will go wrong, and people want somebody to blame. Tag, you're it. It's not actually that hard to accept the blame, especially if people kind of realize that it wasn't **all** your fault. Which brings us to the -best way of taking the blame: do it for another guy. You'll feel good -for taking the fall, he'll feel good about not getting blamed, and the -guy who lost his whole 36GB porn-collection because of your incompetence -will grudgingly admit that you at least didn't try to weasel out of it. - -Then make the developer who really screwed up (if you can find him) know -**in_private** that he screwed up. Not just so he can avoid it in the -future, but so that he knows he owes you one. And, perhaps even more -importantly, he's also likely the person who can fix it. Because, let's +best way of taking the blame: do it for someone else. You'll feel good +for taking the fall, they'll feel good about not getting blamed, and the +person who lost their whole 36GB porn-collection because of your +incompetence will grudgingly admit that you at least didn't try to weasel +out of it. + +Then make the developer who really screwed up (if you can find them) know +**in_private** that they screwed up. Not just so they can avoid it in the +future, but so that they know they owe you one. And, perhaps even more +importantly, they're also likely the person who can fix it. Because, let's face it, it sure ain't you. Taking the blame is also why you get to be manager in the first place. diff --git a/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst b/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst index 36a2dded525b..0de6f6145cc6 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/stable-kernel-rules.rst @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Procedure for submitting patches to the -stable tree - If the patch covers files in net/ or drivers/net please follow netdev stable submission guidelines as described in - Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.txt + :ref:`Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst <netdev-FAQ>` - Security patches should not be handled (solely) by the -stable review process but should follow the procedures in :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/security-bugs.rst <securitybugs>`. diff --git a/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst b/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst index 908bb55be407..c0917107b90a 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst @@ -611,6 +611,7 @@ which stable kernel versions should receive your fix. This is the preferred method for indicating a bug fixed by the patch. See :ref:`describe_changes` for more details. +.. _the_canonical_patch_format: 14) The canonical patch format ------------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index a289285d2412..7d3684e81df6 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ rfkill - RF kill switch support Introduction ============ -The rfkill subsystem provides a generic interface to disabling any radio +The rfkill subsystem provides a generic interface for disabling any radio transmitter in the system. When a transmitter is blocked, it shall not radiate any power. @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ The rfkill subsystem is composed of three main components: * the rfkill drivers. The rfkill core provides API for kernel drivers to register their radio -transmitter with the kernel, methods for turning it on and off and, letting +transmitter with the kernel, methods for turning it on and off, and letting the system know about hardware-disabled states that may be implemented on the device. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ ways for userspace to query the current states. See the "Userspace support" section below. When the device is hard-blocked (either by a call to rfkill_set_hw_state() -or from query_hw_block) set_block() will be invoked for additional software +or from query_hw_block), set_block() will be invoked for additional software block, but drivers can ignore the method call since they can use the return value of the function rfkill_set_hw_state() to sync the software state instead of keeping track of calls to set_block(). In fact, drivers should @@ -65,7 +65,6 @@ keeps track of soft and hard block separately. Kernel API ========== - Drivers for radio transmitters normally implement an rfkill driver. Platform drivers might implement input devices if the rfkill button is just @@ -75,14 +74,14 @@ a way to turn on/off the transmitter(s). For some platforms, it is possible that the hardware state changes during suspend/hibernation, in which case it will be necessary to update the rfkill -core with the current state is at resume time. +core with the current state at resume time. To create an rfkill driver, driver's Kconfig needs to have:: depends on RFKILL || !RFKILL to ensure the driver cannot be built-in when rfkill is modular. The !RFKILL -case allows the driver to be built when rfkill is not configured, which +case allows the driver to be built when rfkill is not configured, in which case all rfkill API can still be used but will be provided by static inlines which compile to almost nothing. @@ -91,7 +90,7 @@ rfkill drivers that control devices that can be hard-blocked unless they also assign the poll_hw_block() callback (then the rfkill core will poll the device). Don't do this unless you cannot get the event in any other way. -RFKill provides per-switch LED triggers, which can be used to drive LEDs +rfkill provides per-switch LED triggers, which can be used to drive LEDs according to the switch state (LED_FULL when blocked, LED_OFF otherwise). @@ -114,7 +113,7 @@ a specified type) into a state which also updates the default state for hotplugged devices. After an application opens /dev/rfkill, it can read the current state of all -devices. Changes can be either obtained by either polling the descriptor for +devices. Changes can be obtained by either polling the descriptor for hotplug or state change events or by listening for uevents emitted by the rfkill core framework. @@ -127,8 +126,7 @@ environment variables set:: RFKILL_STATE RFKILL_TYPE -The contents of these variables corresponds to the "name", "state" and +The content of these variables corresponds to the "name", "state" and "type" sysfs files explained above. - For further details consult Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa-configuration.rst b/Documentation/sound/alsa-configuration.rst index 4d83c1c0ca04..4a3cecc8ad38 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa-configuration.rst +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa-configuration.rst @@ -1568,7 +1568,7 @@ joystick_io The driver requires firmware files ``turtlebeach/msndinit.bin`` and ``turtlebeach/msndperm.bin`` in the proper firmware directory. -See Documentation/sound/oss/MultiSound for important information +See Documentation/sound/cards/multisound.sh for important information about this driver. Note that it has been discontinued, but the Voyetra Turtle Beach knowledge base entry for it is still available at diff --git a/Documentation/sound/cards/multisound.sh b/Documentation/sound/cards/multisound.sh new file mode 100755 index 000000000000..a915a1affcde --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/sound/cards/multisound.sh @@ -0,0 +1,1139 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# +# Turtle Beach MultiSound Driver Notes +# -- Andrew Veliath <andrewtv@usa.net> +# +# Last update: September 10, 1998 +# Corresponding msnd driver: 0.8.3 +# +# ** This file is a README (top part) and shell archive (bottom part). +# The corresponding archived utility sources can be unpacked by +# running `sh MultiSound' (the utilities are only needed for the +# Pinnacle and Fiji cards). ** +# +# +# -=-=- Getting Firmware -=-=- +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# See the section `Obtaining and Creating Firmware Files' in this +# document for instructions on obtaining the necessary firmware +# files. +# +# +# Supported Features +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# Currently, full-duplex digital audio (/dev/dsp only, /dev/audio is +# not currently available) and mixer functionality (/dev/mixer) are +# supported (memory mapped digital audio is not yet supported). +# Digital transfers and monitoring can be done as well if you have +# the digital daughterboard (see the section on using the S/PDIF port +# for more information). +# +# Support for the Turtle Beach MultiSound Hurricane architecture is +# composed of the following modules (these can also operate compiled +# into the kernel): +# +# snd-msnd-lib - MultiSound base (requires snd) +# +# snd-msnd-classic - Base audio/mixer support for Classic, Monetery and +# Tahiti cards +# +# snd-msnd-pinnacle - Base audio/mixer support for Pinnacle and Fiji cards +# +# +# Important Notes - Read Before Using +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# The firmware files are not included (may change in future). You +# must obtain these images from Turtle Beach (they are included in +# the MultiSound Development Kits), and place them in /etc/sound for +# example, and give the full paths in the Linux configuration. If +# you are compiling in support for the MultiSound driver rather than +# using it as a module, these firmware files must be accessible +# during kernel compilation. +# +# Please note these files must be binary files, not assembler. See +# the section later in this document for instructions to obtain these +# files. +# +# +# Configuring Card Resources +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# ** This section is very important, as your card may not work at all +# or your machine may crash if you do not do this correctly. ** +# +# * Classic/Monterey/Tahiti +# +# These cards are configured through the driver snd-msnd-classic. You must +# know the io port, then the driver will select the irq and memory resources +# on the card. It is up to you to know if these are free locations or now, +# a conflict can lock the machine up. +# +# * Pinnacle/Fiji +# +# The Pinnacle and Fiji cards have an extra config port, either +# 0x250, 0x260 or 0x270. This port can be disabled to have the card +# configured strictly through PnP, however you lose the ability to +# access the IDE controller and joystick devices on this card when +# using PnP. The included pinnaclecfg program in this shell archive +# can be used to configure the card in non-PnP mode, and in PnP mode +# you can use isapnptools. These are described briefly here. +# +# pinnaclecfg is not required; you can use the snd-msnd-pinnacle module +# to fully configure the card as well. However, pinnaclecfg can be +# used to change the resource values of a particular device after the +# snd-msnd-pinnacle module has been loaded. If you are compiling the +# driver into the kernel, you must set these values during compile +# time, however other peripheral resource values can be changed with +# the pinnaclecfg program after the kernel is loaded. +# +# +# *** PnP mode +# +# Use pnpdump to obtain a sample configuration if you can; I was able +# to obtain one with the command `pnpdump 1 0x203' -- this may vary +# for you (running pnpdump by itself did not work for me). Then, +# edit this file and use isapnp to uncomment and set the card values. +# Use these values when inserting the snd-msnd-pinnacle module. Using +# this method, you can set the resources for the DSP and the Kurzweil +# synth (Pinnacle). Since Linux does not directly support PnP +# devices, you may have difficulty when using the card in PnP mode +# when it the driver is compiled into the kernel. Using non-PnP mode +# is preferable in this case. +# +# Here is an example mypinnacle.conf for isapnp that sets the card to +# io base 0x210, irq 5 and mem 0xd8000, and also sets the Kurzweil +# synth to 0x330 and irq 9 (may need editing for your system): +# +# (READPORT 0x0203) +# (CSN 2) +# (IDENTIFY *) +# +# # DSP +# (CONFIGURE BVJ0440/-1 (LD 0 +# (INT 0 (IRQ 5 (MODE +E))) (IO 0 (BASE 0x0210)) (MEM 0 (BASE 0x0d8000)) +# (ACT Y))) +# +# # Kurzweil Synth (Pinnacle Only) +# (CONFIGURE BVJ0440/-1 (LD 1 +# (IO 0 (BASE 0x0330)) (INT 0 (IRQ 9 (MODE +E))) +# (ACT Y))) +# +# (WAITFORKEY) +# +# +# *** Non-PnP mode +# +# The second way is by running the card in non-PnP mode. This +# actually has some advantages in that you can access some other +# devices on the card, such as the joystick and IDE controller. To +# configure the card, unpack this shell archive and build the +# pinnaclecfg program. Using this program, you can assign the +# resource values to the card's devices, or disable the devices. As +# an alternative to using pinnaclecfg, you can specify many of the +# configuration values when loading the snd-msnd-pinnacle module (or +# during kernel configuration when compiling the driver into the +# kernel). +# +# If you specify cfg=0x250 for the snd-msnd-pinnacle module, it +# automatically configure the card to the given io, irq and memory +# values using that config port (the config port is jumper selectable +# on the card to 0x250, 0x260 or 0x270). +# +# See the `snd-msnd-pinnacle Additional Options' section below for more +# information on these parameters (also, if you compile the driver +# directly into the kernel, these extra parameters can be useful +# here). +# +# +# ** It is very easy to cause problems in your machine if you choose a +# resource value which is incorrect. ** +# +# +# Examples +# ~~~~~~~~ +# +# * MultiSound Classic/Monterey/Tahiti: +# +# modprobe snd +# insmod snd-msnd-lib +# insmod snd-msnd-classic io=0x290 irq=7 mem=0xd0000 +# +# * MultiSound Pinnacle in PnP mode: +# +# modprobe snd +# insmod snd-msnd-lib +# isapnp mypinnacle.conf +# insmod snd-msnd-pinnacle io=0x210 irq=5 mem=0xd8000 <-- match mypinnacle.conf values +# +# * MultiSound Pinnacle in non-PnP mode (replace 0x250 with your configuration port, +# one of 0x250, 0x260 or 0x270): +# +# modprobe snd +# insmod snd-msnd-lib +# insmod snd-msnd-pinnacle cfg=0x250 io=0x290 irq=5 mem=0xd0000 +# +# * To use the MPU-compatible Kurzweil synth on the Pinnacle in PnP +# mode, add the following (assumes you did `isapnp mypinnacle.conf'): +# +# insmod snd +# insmod mpu401 io=0x330 irq=9 <-- match mypinnacle.conf values +# +# * To use the MPU-compatible Kurzweil synth on the Pinnacle in non-PnP +# mode, add the following. Note how we first configure the peripheral's +# resources, _then_ install a Linux driver for it: +# +# insmod snd +# pinnaclecfg 0x250 mpu 0x330 9 +# insmod mpu401 io=0x330 irq=9 +# +# -- OR you can use the following sequence without pinnaclecfg in non-PnP mode: +# +# modprobe snd +# insmod snd-msnd-lib +# insmod snd-msnd-pinnacle cfg=0x250 io=0x290 irq=5 mem=0xd0000 mpu_io=0x330 mpu_irq=9 +# insmod snd +# insmod mpu401 io=0x330 irq=9 +# +# * To setup the joystick port on the Pinnacle in non-PnP mode (though +# you have to find the actual Linux joystick driver elsewhere), you +# can use pinnaclecfg: +# +# pinnaclecfg 0x250 joystick 0x200 +# +# -- OR you can configure this using snd-msnd-pinnacle with the following: +# +# modprobe snd +# insmod snd-msnd-lib +# insmod snd-msnd-pinnacle cfg=0x250 io=0x290 irq=5 mem=0xd0000 joystick_io=0x200 +# +# +# snd-msnd-classic, snd-msnd-pinnacle Required Options +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# If the following options are not given, the module will not load. +# Examine the kernel message log for informative error messages. +# WARNING--probing isn't supported so try to make sure you have the +# correct shared memory area, otherwise you may experience problems. +# +# io I/O base of DSP, e.g. io=0x210 +# irq IRQ number, e.g. irq=5 +# mem Shared memory area, e.g. mem=0xd8000 +# +# +# snd-msnd-classic, snd-msnd-pinnacle Additional Options +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# fifosize The digital audio FIFOs, in kilobytes. If not +# specified, the default will be used. Increasing +# this value will reduce the chance of a FIFO +# underflow at the expense of increasing overall +# latency. For example, fifosize=512 will +# allocate 512kB read and write FIFOs (1MB total). +# While this may reduce dropouts, a heavy machine +# load will undoubtedly starve the FIFO of data +# and you will eventually get dropouts. One +# option is to alter the scheduling priority of +# the playback process, using `nice' or some form +# of POSIX soft real-time scheduling. +# +# calibrate_signal Setting this to one calibrates the ADCs to the +# signal, zero calibrates to the card (defaults +# to zero). +# +# +# snd-msnd-pinnacle Additional Options +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# digital Specify digital=1 to enable the S/PDIF input +# if you have the digital daughterboard +# adapter. This will enable access to the +# DIGITAL1 input for the soundcard in the mixer. +# Some mixer programs might have trouble setting +# the DIGITAL1 source as an input. If you have +# trouble, you can try the setdigital.c program +# at the bottom of this document. +# +# cfg Non-PnP configuration port for the Pinnacle +# and Fiji (typically 0x250, 0x260 or 0x270, +# depending on the jumper configuration). If +# this option is omitted, then it is assumed +# that the card is in PnP mode, and that the +# specified DSP resource values are already +# configured with PnP (i.e. it won't attempt to +# do any sort of configuration). +# +# When the Pinnacle is in non-PnP mode, you can use the following +# options to configure particular devices. If a full specification +# for a device is not given, then the device is not configured. Note +# that you still must use a Linux driver for any of these devices +# once their resources are setup (such as the Linux joystick driver, +# or the MPU401 driver from OSS for the Kurzweil synth). +# +# mpu_io I/O port of MPU (on-board Kurzweil synth) +# mpu_irq IRQ of MPU (on-board Kurzweil synth) +# ide_io0 First I/O port of IDE controller +# ide_io1 Second I/O port of IDE controller +# ide_irq IRQ IDE controller +# joystick_io I/O port of joystick +# +# +# Obtaining and Creating Firmware Files +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# For the Classic/Tahiti/Monterey +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# Download to /tmp and unzip the following file from Turtle Beach: +# +# ftp://ftp.voyetra.com/pub/tbs/msndcl/msndvkit.zip +# +# When unzipped, unzip the file named MsndFiles.zip. Then copy the +# following firmware files to /etc/sound (note the file renaming): +# +# cp DSPCODE/MSNDINIT.BIN /etc/sound/msndinit.bin +# cp DSPCODE/MSNDPERM.REB /etc/sound/msndperm.bin +# +# When configuring the Linux kernel, specify /etc/sound/msndinit.bin and +# /etc/sound/msndperm.bin for the two firmware files (Linux kernel +# versions older than 2.2 do not ask for firmware paths, and are +# hardcoded to /etc/sound). +# +# If you are compiling the driver into the kernel, these files must +# be accessible during compilation, but will not be needed later. +# The files must remain, however, if the driver is used as a module. +# +# +# For the Pinnacle/Fiji +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# Download to /tmp and unzip the following file from Turtle Beach (be +# sure to use the entire URL; some have had trouble navigating to the +# URL): +# +# ftp://ftp.voyetra.com/pub/tbs/pinn/pnddk100.zip +# +# Unpack this shell archive, and run make in the created directory +# (you need a C compiler and flex to build the utilities). This +# should give you the executables conv, pinnaclecfg and setdigital. +# conv is only used temporarily here to create the firmware files, +# while pinnaclecfg is used to configure the Pinnacle or Fiji card in +# non-PnP mode, and setdigital can be used to set the S/PDIF input on +# the mixer (pinnaclecfg and setdigital should be copied to a +# convenient place, possibly run during system initialization). +# +# To generating the firmware files with the `conv' program, we create +# the binary firmware files by doing the following conversion +# (assuming the archive unpacked into a directory named PINNDDK): +# +# ./conv < PINNDDK/dspcode/pndspini.asm > /etc/sound/pndspini.bin +# ./conv < PINNDDK/dspcode/pndsperm.asm > /etc/sound/pndsperm.bin +# +# The conv (and conv.l) program is not needed after conversion and can +# be safely deleted. Then, when configuring the Linux kernel, specify +# /etc/sound/pndspini.bin and /etc/sound/pndsperm.bin for the two +# firmware files (Linux kernel versions older than 2.2 do not ask for +# firmware paths, and are hardcoded to /etc/sound). +# +# If you are compiling the driver into the kernel, these files must +# be accessible during compilation, but will not be needed later. +# The files must remain, however, if the driver is used as a module. +# +# +# Using Digital I/O with the S/PDIF Port +# ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +# +# If you have a Pinnacle or Fiji with the digital daughterboard and +# want to set it as the input source, you can use this program if you +# have trouble trying to do it with a mixer program (be sure to +# insert the module with the digital=1 option, or say Y to the option +# during compiled-in kernel operation). Upon selection of the S/PDIF +# port, you should be able monitor and record from it. +# +# There is something to note about using the S/PDIF port. Digital +# timing is taken from the digital signal, so if a signal is not +# connected to the port and it is selected as recording input, you +# will find PCM playback to be distorted in playback rate. Also, +# attempting to record at a sampling rate other than the DAT rate may +# be problematic (i.e. trying to record at 8000Hz when the DAT signal +# is 44100Hz). If you have a problem with this, set the recording +# input to analog if you need to record at a rate other than that of +# the DAT rate. +# +# +# -- Shell archive attached below, just run `sh MultiSound' to extract. +# Contains Pinnacle/Fiji utilities to convert firmware, configure +# in non-PnP mode, and select the DIGITAL1 input for the mixer. +# +# +#!/bin/sh +# This is a shell archive (produced by GNU sharutils 4.2). +# To extract the files from this archive, save it to some FILE, remove +# everything before the `!/bin/sh' line above, then type `sh FILE'. +# +# Made on 1998-12-04 10:07 EST by <andrewtv@ztransform.velsoft.com>. +# Source directory was `/home/andrewtv/programming/pinnacle/pinnacle'. +# +# Existing files will *not* be overwritten unless `-c' is specified. +# +# This shar contains: +# length mode name +# ------ ---------- ------------------------------------------ +# 2064 -rw-rw-r-- MultiSound.d/setdigital.c +# 10224 -rw-rw-r-- MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c +# 106 -rw-rw-r-- MultiSound.d/Makefile +# 146 -rw-rw-r-- MultiSound.d/conv.l +# 1491 -rw-rw-r-- MultiSound.d/msndreset.c +# +save_IFS="${IFS}" +IFS="${IFS}:" +gettext_dir=FAILED +locale_dir=FAILED +first_param="$1" +for dir in $PATH +do + if test "$gettext_dir" = FAILED && test -f $dir/gettext \ + && ($dir/gettext --version >/dev/null 2>&1) + then + set `$dir/gettext --version 2>&1` + if test "$3" = GNU + then + gettext_dir=$dir + fi + fi + if test "$locale_dir" = FAILED && test -f $dir/shar \ + && ($dir/shar --print-text-domain-dir >/dev/null 2>&1) + then + locale_dir=`$dir/shar --print-text-domain-dir` + fi +done +IFS="$save_IFS" +if test "$locale_dir" = FAILED || test "$gettext_dir" = FAILED +then + echo=echo +else + TEXTDOMAINDIR=$locale_dir + export TEXTDOMAINDIR + TEXTDOMAIN=sharutils + export TEXTDOMAIN + echo="$gettext_dir/gettext -s" +fi +touch -am 1231235999 $$.touch >/dev/null 2>&1 +if test ! -f 1231235999 && test -f $$.touch; then + shar_touch=touch +else + shar_touch=: + echo + $echo 'WARNING: not restoring timestamps. Consider getting and' + $echo "installing GNU \`touch', distributed in GNU File Utilities..." + echo +fi +rm -f 1231235999 $$.touch +# +if mkdir _sh01426; then + $echo 'x -' 'creating lock directory' +else + $echo 'failed to create lock directory' + exit 1 +fi +# ============= MultiSound.d/setdigital.c ============== +if test ! -d 'MultiSound.d'; then + $echo 'x -' 'creating directory' 'MultiSound.d' + mkdir 'MultiSound.d' +fi +if test -f 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c' && test "$first_param" != -c; then + $echo 'x -' SKIPPING 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c' '(file already exists)' +else + $echo 'x -' extracting 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c' '(text)' + sed 's/^X//' << 'SHAR_EOF' > 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c' && +/********************************************************************* +X * +X * setdigital.c - sets the DIGITAL1 input for a mixer +X * +X * Copyright (C) 1998 Andrew Veliath +X * +X * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +X * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +X * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +X * (at your option) any later version. +X * +X * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +X * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +X * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +X * GNU General Public License for more details. +X * +X * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +X * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +X * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. +X * +X ********************************************************************/ +X +#include <stdio.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <sys/types.h> +#include <sys/stat.h> +#include <sys/ioctl.h> +#include <sys/soundcard.h> +X +int main(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ +X int fd; +X unsigned long recmask, recsrc; +X +X if (argc != 2) { +X fprintf(stderr, "usage: setdigital <mixer device>\n"); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X if ((fd = open(argv[1], O_RDWR)) < 0) { +X perror(argv[1]); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X if (ioctl(fd, SOUND_MIXER_READ_RECMASK, &recmask) < 0) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: ioctl read recording mask failed\n"); +X perror("ioctl"); +X close(fd); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X if (!(recmask & SOUND_MASK_DIGITAL1)) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: cannot find DIGITAL1 device in mixer\n"); +X close(fd); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X if (ioctl(fd, SOUND_MIXER_READ_RECSRC, &recsrc) < 0) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: ioctl read recording source failed\n"); +X perror("ioctl"); +X close(fd); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X recsrc |= SOUND_MASK_DIGITAL1; +X +X if (ioctl(fd, SOUND_MIXER_WRITE_RECSRC, &recsrc) < 0) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: ioctl write recording source failed\n"); +X perror("ioctl"); +X close(fd); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X close(fd); +X +X return 0; +} +SHAR_EOF + $shar_touch -am 1204092598 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c' && + chmod 0664 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c' || + $echo 'restore of' 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c' 'failed' + if ( md5sum --help 2>&1 | grep 'sage: md5sum \[' ) >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + && ( md5sum --version 2>&1 | grep -v 'textutils 1.12' ) >/dev/null; then + md5sum -c << SHAR_EOF >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + || $echo 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c:' 'MD5 check failed' +e87217fc3e71288102ba41fd81f71ec4 MultiSound.d/setdigital.c +SHAR_EOF + else + shar_count="`LC_ALL= LC_CTYPE= LANG= wc -c < 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c'`" + test 2064 -eq "$shar_count" || + $echo 'MultiSound.d/setdigital.c:' 'original size' '2064,' 'current size' "$shar_count!" + fi +fi +# ============= MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c ============== +if test -f 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c' && test "$first_param" != -c; then + $echo 'x -' SKIPPING 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c' '(file already exists)' +else + $echo 'x -' extracting 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c' '(text)' + sed 's/^X//' << 'SHAR_EOF' > 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c' && +/********************************************************************* +X * +X * pinnaclecfg.c - Pinnacle/Fiji Device Configuration Program +X * +X * This is for NON-PnP mode only. For PnP mode, use isapnptools. +X * +X * This is Linux-specific, and must be run with root permissions. +X * +X * Part of the Turtle Beach MultiSound Sound Card Driver for Linux +X * +X * Copyright (C) 1998 Andrew Veliath +X * +X * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +X * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +X * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +X * (at your option) any later version. +X * +X * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +X * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +X * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +X * GNU General Public License for more details. +X * +X * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +X * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +X * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. +X * +X ********************************************************************/ +X +#include <stdio.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <string.h> +#include <errno.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <asm/types.h> +#include <sys/io.h> +X +#define IREG_LOGDEVICE 0x07 +#define IREG_ACTIVATE 0x30 +#define LD_ACTIVATE 0x01 +#define LD_DISACTIVATE 0x00 +#define IREG_EECONTROL 0x3F +#define IREG_MEMBASEHI 0x40 +#define IREG_MEMBASELO 0x41 +#define IREG_MEMCONTROL 0x42 +#define IREG_MEMRANGEHI 0x43 +#define IREG_MEMRANGELO 0x44 +#define MEMTYPE_8BIT 0x00 +#define MEMTYPE_16BIT 0x02 +#define MEMTYPE_RANGE 0x00 +#define MEMTYPE_HIADDR 0x01 +#define IREG_IO0_BASEHI 0x60 +#define IREG_IO0_BASELO 0x61 +#define IREG_IO1_BASEHI 0x62 +#define IREG_IO1_BASELO 0x63 +#define IREG_IRQ_NUMBER 0x70 +#define IREG_IRQ_TYPE 0x71 +#define IRQTYPE_HIGH 0x02 +#define IRQTYPE_LOW 0x00 +#define IRQTYPE_LEVEL 0x01 +#define IRQTYPE_EDGE 0x00 +X +#define HIBYTE(w) ((BYTE)(((WORD)(w) >> 8) & 0xFF)) +#define LOBYTE(w) ((BYTE)(w)) +#define MAKEWORD(low,hi) ((WORD)(((BYTE)(low))|(((WORD)((BYTE)(hi)))<<8))) +X +typedef __u8 BYTE; +typedef __u16 USHORT; +typedef __u16 WORD; +X +static int config_port = -1; +X +static int msnd_write_cfg(int cfg, int reg, int value) +{ +X outb(reg, cfg); +X outb(value, cfg + 1); +X if (value != inb(cfg + 1)) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: msnd_write_cfg: I/O error\n"); +X return -EIO; +X } +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_read_cfg(int cfg, int reg) +{ +X outb(reg, cfg); +X return inb(cfg + 1); +} +X +static int msnd_write_cfg_io0(int cfg, int num, WORD io) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_IO0_BASEHI, HIBYTE(io))) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_IO0_BASELO, LOBYTE(io))) +X return -EIO; +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_read_cfg_io0(int cfg, int num, WORD *io) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X +X *io = MAKEWORD(msnd_read_cfg(cfg, IREG_IO0_BASELO), +X msnd_read_cfg(cfg, IREG_IO0_BASEHI)); +X +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_write_cfg_io1(int cfg, int num, WORD io) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_IO1_BASEHI, HIBYTE(io))) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_IO1_BASELO, LOBYTE(io))) +X return -EIO; +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_read_cfg_io1(int cfg, int num, WORD *io) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X +X *io = MAKEWORD(msnd_read_cfg(cfg, IREG_IO1_BASELO), +X msnd_read_cfg(cfg, IREG_IO1_BASEHI)); +X +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_write_cfg_irq(int cfg, int num, WORD irq) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_IRQ_NUMBER, LOBYTE(irq))) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_IRQ_TYPE, IRQTYPE_EDGE)) +X return -EIO; +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_read_cfg_irq(int cfg, int num, WORD *irq) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X +X *irq = msnd_read_cfg(cfg, IREG_IRQ_NUMBER); +X +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_write_cfg_mem(int cfg, int num, int mem) +{ +X WORD wmem; +X +X mem >>= 8; +X mem &= 0xfff; +X wmem = (WORD)mem; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_MEMBASEHI, HIBYTE(wmem))) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_MEMBASELO, LOBYTE(wmem))) +X return -EIO; +X if (wmem && msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_MEMCONTROL, (MEMTYPE_HIADDR | MEMTYPE_16BIT))) +X return -EIO; +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_read_cfg_mem(int cfg, int num, int *mem) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X +X *mem = MAKEWORD(msnd_read_cfg(cfg, IREG_MEMBASELO), +X msnd_read_cfg(cfg, IREG_MEMBASEHI)); +X *mem <<= 8; +X +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_activate_logical(int cfg, int num) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_ACTIVATE, LD_ACTIVATE)) +X return -EIO; +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_write_cfg_logical(int cfg, int num, WORD io0, WORD io1, WORD irq, int mem) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg_io0(cfg, num, io0)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg_io1(cfg, num, io1)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg_irq(cfg, num, irq)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_write_cfg_mem(cfg, num, mem)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_activate_logical(cfg, num)) +X return -EIO; +X return 0; +} +X +static int msnd_read_cfg_logical(int cfg, int num, WORD *io0, WORD *io1, WORD *irq, int *mem) +{ +X if (msnd_write_cfg(cfg, IREG_LOGDEVICE, num)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_read_cfg_io0(cfg, num, io0)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_read_cfg_io1(cfg, num, io1)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_read_cfg_irq(cfg, num, irq)) +X return -EIO; +X if (msnd_read_cfg_mem(cfg, num, mem)) +X return -EIO; +X return 0; +} +X +static void usage(void) +{ +X fprintf(stderr, +X "\n" +X "pinnaclecfg 1.0\n" +X "\n" +X "usage: pinnaclecfg <config port> [device config]\n" +X "\n" +X "This is for use with the card in NON-PnP mode only.\n" +X "\n" +X "Available devices (not all available for Fiji):\n" +X "\n" +X " Device Description\n" +X " -------------------------------------------------------------------\n" +X " reset Reset all devices (i.e. disable)\n" +X " show Display current device configurations\n" +X "\n" +X " dsp <io> <irq> <mem> Audio device\n" +X " mpu <io> <irq> Internal Kurzweil synth\n" +X " ide <io0> <io1> <irq> On-board IDE controller\n" +X " joystick <io> Joystick port\n" +X "\n"); +X exit(1); +} +X +static int cfg_reset(void) +{ +X int i; +X +X for (i = 0; i < 4; ++i) +X msnd_write_cfg_logical(config_port, i, 0, 0, 0, 0); +X +X return 0; +} +X +static int cfg_show(void) +{ +X int i; +X int count = 0; +X +X for (i = 0; i < 4; ++i) { +X WORD io0, io1, irq; +X int mem; +X msnd_read_cfg_logical(config_port, i, &io0, &io1, &irq, &mem); +X switch (i) { +X case 0: +X if (io0 || irq || mem) { +X printf("dsp 0x%x %d 0x%x\n", io0, irq, mem); +X ++count; +X } +X break; +X case 1: +X if (io0 || irq) { +X printf("mpu 0x%x %d\n", io0, irq); +X ++count; +X } +X break; +X case 2: +X if (io0 || io1 || irq) { +X printf("ide 0x%x 0x%x %d\n", io0, io1, irq); +X ++count; +X } +X break; +X case 3: +X if (io0) { +X printf("joystick 0x%x\n", io0); +X ++count; +X } +X break; +X } +X } +X +X if (count == 0) +X fprintf(stderr, "no devices configured\n"); +X +X return 0; +} +X +static int cfg_dsp(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ +X int io, irq, mem; +X +X if (argc < 3 || +X sscanf(argv[0], "0x%x", &io) != 1 || +X sscanf(argv[1], "%d", &irq) != 1 || +X sscanf(argv[2], "0x%x", &mem) != 1) +X usage(); +X +X if (!(io == 0x290 || +X io == 0x260 || +X io == 0x250 || +X io == 0x240 || +X io == 0x230 || +X io == 0x220 || +X io == 0x210 || +X io == 0x3e0)) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: io must be one of " +X "210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, 290, or 3E0\n"); +X usage(); +X } +X +X if (!(irq == 5 || +X irq == 7 || +X irq == 9 || +X irq == 10 || +X irq == 11 || +X irq == 12)) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: irq must be one of " +X "5, 7, 9, 10, 11 or 12\n"); +X usage(); +X } +X +X if (!(mem == 0xb0000 || +X mem == 0xc8000 || +X mem == 0xd0000 || +X mem == 0xd8000 || +X mem == 0xe0000 || +X mem == 0xe8000)) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: mem must be one of " +X "0xb0000, 0xc8000, 0xd0000, 0xd8000, 0xe0000 or 0xe8000\n"); +X usage(); +X } +X +X return msnd_write_cfg_logical(config_port, 0, io, 0, irq, mem); +} +X +static int cfg_mpu(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ +X int io, irq; +X +X if (argc < 2 || +X sscanf(argv[0], "0x%x", &io) != 1 || +X sscanf(argv[1], "%d", &irq) != 1) +X usage(); +X +X return msnd_write_cfg_logical(config_port, 1, io, 0, irq, 0); +} +X +static int cfg_ide(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ +X int io0, io1, irq; +X +X if (argc < 3 || +X sscanf(argv[0], "0x%x", &io0) != 1 || +X sscanf(argv[0], "0x%x", &io1) != 1 || +X sscanf(argv[1], "%d", &irq) != 1) +X usage(); +X +X return msnd_write_cfg_logical(config_port, 2, io0, io1, irq, 0); +} +X +static int cfg_joystick(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ +X int io; +X +X if (argc < 1 || +X sscanf(argv[0], "0x%x", &io) != 1) +X usage(); +X +X return msnd_write_cfg_logical(config_port, 3, io, 0, 0, 0); +} +X +int main(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ +X char *device; +X int rv = 0; +X +X --argc; ++argv; +X +X if (argc < 2) +X usage(); +X +X sscanf(argv[0], "0x%x", &config_port); +X if (config_port != 0x250 && config_port != 0x260 && config_port != 0x270) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: <config port> must be 0x250, 0x260 or 0x270\n"); +X exit(1); +X } +X if (ioperm(config_port, 2, 1)) { +X perror("ioperm"); +X fprintf(stderr, "note: pinnaclecfg must be run as root\n"); +X exit(1); +X } +X device = argv[1]; +X +X argc -= 2; argv += 2; +X +X if (strcmp(device, "reset") == 0) +X rv = cfg_reset(); +X else if (strcmp(device, "show") == 0) +X rv = cfg_show(); +X else if (strcmp(device, "dsp") == 0) +X rv = cfg_dsp(argc, argv); +X else if (strcmp(device, "mpu") == 0) +X rv = cfg_mpu(argc, argv); +X else if (strcmp(device, "ide") == 0) +X rv = cfg_ide(argc, argv); +X else if (strcmp(device, "joystick") == 0) +X rv = cfg_joystick(argc, argv); +X else { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: unknown device %s\n", device); +X usage(); +X } +X +X if (rv) +X fprintf(stderr, "error: device configuration failed\n"); +X +X return 0; +} +SHAR_EOF + $shar_touch -am 1204092598 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c' && + chmod 0664 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c' || + $echo 'restore of' 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c' 'failed' + if ( md5sum --help 2>&1 | grep 'sage: md5sum \[' ) >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + && ( md5sum --version 2>&1 | grep -v 'textutils 1.12' ) >/dev/null; then + md5sum -c << SHAR_EOF >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + || $echo 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c:' 'MD5 check failed' +366bdf27f0db767a3c7921d0a6db20fe MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c +SHAR_EOF + else + shar_count="`LC_ALL= LC_CTYPE= LANG= wc -c < 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c'`" + test 10224 -eq "$shar_count" || + $echo 'MultiSound.d/pinnaclecfg.c:' 'original size' '10224,' 'current size' "$shar_count!" + fi +fi +# ============= MultiSound.d/Makefile ============== +if test -f 'MultiSound.d/Makefile' && test "$first_param" != -c; then + $echo 'x -' SKIPPING 'MultiSound.d/Makefile' '(file already exists)' +else + $echo 'x -' extracting 'MultiSound.d/Makefile' '(text)' + sed 's/^X//' << 'SHAR_EOF' > 'MultiSound.d/Makefile' && +CC = gcc +CFLAGS = -O +PROGS = setdigital msndreset pinnaclecfg conv +X +all: $(PROGS) +X +clean: +X rm -f $(PROGS) +SHAR_EOF + $shar_touch -am 1204092398 'MultiSound.d/Makefile' && + chmod 0664 'MultiSound.d/Makefile' || + $echo 'restore of' 'MultiSound.d/Makefile' 'failed' + if ( md5sum --help 2>&1 | grep 'sage: md5sum \[' ) >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + && ( md5sum --version 2>&1 | grep -v 'textutils 1.12' ) >/dev/null; then + md5sum -c << SHAR_EOF >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + || $echo 'MultiSound.d/Makefile:' 'MD5 check failed' +76ca8bb44e3882edcf79c97df6c81845 MultiSound.d/Makefile +SHAR_EOF + else + shar_count="`LC_ALL= LC_CTYPE= LANG= wc -c < 'MultiSound.d/Makefile'`" + test 106 -eq "$shar_count" || + $echo 'MultiSound.d/Makefile:' 'original size' '106,' 'current size' "$shar_count!" + fi +fi +# ============= MultiSound.d/conv.l ============== +if test -f 'MultiSound.d/conv.l' && test "$first_param" != -c; then + $echo 'x -' SKIPPING 'MultiSound.d/conv.l' '(file already exists)' +else + $echo 'x -' extracting 'MultiSound.d/conv.l' '(text)' + sed 's/^X//' << 'SHAR_EOF' > 'MultiSound.d/conv.l' && +%% +[ \n\t,\r] +\;.* +DB +[0-9A-Fa-f]+H { int n; sscanf(yytext, "%xH", &n); printf("%c", n); } +%% +int yywrap() { return 1; } +void main() { yylex(); } +SHAR_EOF + $shar_touch -am 0828231798 'MultiSound.d/conv.l' && + chmod 0664 'MultiSound.d/conv.l' || + $echo 'restore of' 'MultiSound.d/conv.l' 'failed' + if ( md5sum --help 2>&1 | grep 'sage: md5sum \[' ) >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + && ( md5sum --version 2>&1 | grep -v 'textutils 1.12' ) >/dev/null; then + md5sum -c << SHAR_EOF >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + || $echo 'MultiSound.d/conv.l:' 'MD5 check failed' +d2411fc32cd71a00dcdc1f009e858dd2 MultiSound.d/conv.l +SHAR_EOF + else + shar_count="`LC_ALL= LC_CTYPE= LANG= wc -c < 'MultiSound.d/conv.l'`" + test 146 -eq "$shar_count" || + $echo 'MultiSound.d/conv.l:' 'original size' '146,' 'current size' "$shar_count!" + fi +fi +# ============= MultiSound.d/msndreset.c ============== +if test -f 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c' && test "$first_param" != -c; then + $echo 'x -' SKIPPING 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c' '(file already exists)' +else + $echo 'x -' extracting 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c' '(text)' + sed 's/^X//' << 'SHAR_EOF' > 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c' && +/********************************************************************* +X * +X * msndreset.c - resets the MultiSound card +X * +X * Copyright (C) 1998 Andrew Veliath +X * +X * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +X * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +X * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +X * (at your option) any later version. +X * +X * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +X * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +X * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +X * GNU General Public License for more details. +X * +X * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +X * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +X * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. +X * +X ********************************************************************/ +X +#include <stdio.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <sys/types.h> +#include <sys/stat.h> +#include <sys/ioctl.h> +#include <sys/soundcard.h> +X +int main(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ +X int fd; +X +X if (argc != 2) { +X fprintf(stderr, "usage: msndreset <mixer device>\n"); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X if ((fd = open(argv[1], O_RDWR)) < 0) { +X perror(argv[1]); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X if (ioctl(fd, SOUND_MIXER_PRIVATE1, 0) < 0) { +X fprintf(stderr, "error: msnd ioctl reset failed\n"); +X perror("ioctl"); +X close(fd); +X exit(1); +X } +X +X close(fd); +X +X return 0; +} +SHAR_EOF + $shar_touch -am 1204100698 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c' && + chmod 0664 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c' || + $echo 'restore of' 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c' 'failed' + if ( md5sum --help 2>&1 | grep 'sage: md5sum \[' ) >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + && ( md5sum --version 2>&1 | grep -v 'textutils 1.12' ) >/dev/null; then + md5sum -c << SHAR_EOF >/dev/null 2>&1 \ + || $echo 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c:' 'MD5 check failed' +c52f876521084e8eb25e12e01dcccb8a MultiSound.d/msndreset.c +SHAR_EOF + else + shar_count="`LC_ALL= LC_CTYPE= LANG= wc -c < 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c'`" + test 1491 -eq "$shar_count" || + $echo 'MultiSound.d/msndreset.c:' 'original size' '1491,' 'current size' "$shar_count!" + fi +fi +rm -fr _sh01426 +exit 0 diff --git a/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst b/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst index 7c2d37571af0..e06238131f77 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst +++ b/Documentation/sound/hd-audio/models.rst @@ -34,6 +34,22 @@ ALC262 ====== inv-dmic Inverted internal mic workaround +fsc-h270 + Fixups for Fujitsu-Siemens Celsius H270 +fsc-s7110 + Fixups for Fujitsu-Siemens Lifebook S7110 +hp-z200 + Fixups for HP Z200 +tyan + Fixups for Tyan Thunder n6650W +lenovo-3000 + Fixups for Lenovo 3000 +benq + Fixups for Benq ED8 +benq-t31 + Fixups for Benq T31 +bayleybay + Fixups for Intel BayleyBay ALC267/268 ========== @@ -41,6 +57,8 @@ inv-dmic Inverted internal mic workaround hp-eapd Disable HP EAPD on NID 0x15 +spdif + Enable SPDIF output on NID 0x1e ALC22x/23x/25x/269/27x/28x/29x (and vendor-specific ALC3xxx models) =================================================================== @@ -70,6 +88,10 @@ dell-headset-multi Headset jack, which can also be used as mic-in dell-headset-dock Headset jack (without mic-in), and also dock I/O +dell-headset3 + Headset jack (without mic-in), and also dock I/O, variant 3 +dell-headset4 + Headset jack (without mic-in), and also dock I/O, variant 4 alc283-dac-wcaps Fixups for Chromebook with ALC283 alc283-sense-combo @@ -80,15 +102,173 @@ tpt440 Lenovo Thinkpad T440s setup tpt460 Lenovo Thinkpad T460/560 setup +tpt470-dock + Lenovo Thinkpad T470 dock setup dual-codecs Lenovo laptops with dual codecs alc700-ref Intel reference board with ALC700 codec +vaio + Pin fixups for Sony VAIO laptops +dell-m101z + COEF setup for Dell M101z +asus-g73jw + Subwoofer pin fixup for ASUS G73JW +lenovo-eapd + Inversed EAPD setup for Lenovo laptops +sony-hweq + H/W EQ COEF setup for Sony laptops +pcm44k + Fixed PCM 44kHz constraints (for buggy devices) +lifebook + Dock pin fixups for Fujitsu Lifebook +lifebook-extmic + Headset mic fixup for Fujitsu Lifebook +lifebook-hp-pin + Headphone pin fixup for Fujitsu Lifebook +lifebook-u7x7 + Lifebook U7x7 fixups +alc269vb-amic + ALC269VB analog mic pin fixups +alc269vb-dmic + ALC269VB digital mic pin fixups +hp-mute-led-mic1 + Mute LED via Mic1 pin on HP +hp-mute-led-mic2 + Mute LED via Mic2 pin on HP +hp-mute-led-mic3 + Mute LED via Mic3 pin on HP +hp-gpio-mic1 + GPIO + Mic1 pin LED on HP +hp-line1-mic1 + Mute LED via Line1 + Mic1 pins on HP +noshutup + Skip shutup callback +sony-nomic + Headset mic fixup for Sony laptops +aspire-headset-mic + Headset pin fixup for Acer Aspire +asus-x101 + ASUS X101 fixups +acer-ao7xx + Acer AO7xx fixups +acer-aspire-e1 + Acer Aspire E1 fixups +acer-ac700 + Acer AC700 fixups +limit-mic-boost + Limit internal mic boost on Lenovo machines +asus-zenbook + ASUS Zenbook fixups +asus-zenbook-ux31a + ASUS Zenbook UX31A fixups +ordissimo + Ordissimo EVE2 (or Malata PC-B1303) fixups +asus-tx300 + ASUS TX300 fixups +alc283-int-mic + ALC283 COEF setup for Lenovo machines +mono-speakers + Subwoofer and headset fixupes for Dell Inspiron +alc290-subwoofer + Subwoofer fixups for Dell Vostro +thinkpad + Binding with thinkpad_acpi driver for Lenovo machines +dmic-thinkpad + thinkpad_acpi binding + digital mic support +alc255-acer + ALC255 fixups on Acer machines +alc255-asus + ALC255 fixups on ASUS machines +alc255-dell1 + ALC255 fixups on Dell machines +alc255-dell2 + ALC255 fixups on Dell machines, variant 2 +alc293-dell1 + ALC293 fixups on Dell machines +alc283-headset + Headset pin fixups on ALC283 +aspire-v5 + Acer Aspire V5 fixups +hp-gpio4 + GPIO and Mic1 pin mute LED fixups for HP +hp-gpio-led + GPIO mute LEDs on HP +hp-gpio2-hotkey + GPIO mute LED with hot key handling on HP +hp-dock-pins + GPIO mute LEDs and dock support on HP +hp-dock-gpio-mic + GPIO, Mic mute LED and dock support on HP +hp-9480m + HP 9480m fixups +alc288-dell1 + ALC288 fixups on Dell machines +alc288-dell-xps13 + ALC288 fixups on Dell XPS13 +dell-e7x + Dell E7x fixups +alc293-dell + ALC293 fixups on Dell machines +alc298-dell1 + ALC298 fixups on Dell machines +alc298-dell-aio + ALC298 fixups on Dell AIO machines +alc275-dell-xps + ALC275 fixups on Dell XPS models +alc256-dell-xps13 + ALC256 fixups on Dell XPS13 +lenovo-spk-noise + Workaround for speaker noise on Lenovo machines +lenovo-hotkey + Hot-key support via Mic2 pin on Lenovo machines +dell-spk-noise + Workaround for speaker noise on Dell machines +alc255-dell1 + ALC255 fixups on Dell machines +alc295-disable-dac3 + Disable DAC3 routing on ALC295 +alc280-hp-headset + HP Elitebook fixups +alc221-hp-mic + Front mic pin fixup on HP machines +alc298-spk-volume + Speaker pin routing workaround on ALC298 +dell-inspiron-7559 + Dell Inspiron 7559 fixups +ativ-book + Samsung Ativ book 8 fixups +alc221-hp-mic + ALC221 headset fixups on HP machines +alc256-asus-mic + ALC256 fixups on ASUS machines +alc256-asus-aio + ALC256 fixups on ASUS AIO machines +alc233-eapd + ALC233 fixups on ASUS machines +alc294-lenovo-mic + ALC294 Mic pin fixup for Lenovo AIO machines +alc225-wyse + Dell Wyse fixups +alc274-dell-aio + ALC274 fixups on Dell AIO machines +alc255-dummy-lineout + Dell Precision 3930 fixups +alc255-dell-headset"}, + Dell Precision 3630 fixups +alc295-hp-x360 + HP Spectre X360 fixups ALC66x/67x/892 ============== +aspire + Subwoofer pin fixup for Aspire laptops +ideapad + Subwoofer pin fixup for Ideapad laptops mario Chromebook mario model fixup +hp-rp5800 + Headphone pin fixup for HP RP5800 asus-mode1 ASUS asus-mode2 @@ -105,10 +285,40 @@ asus-mode7 ASUS asus-mode8 ASUS +zotac-z68 + Front HP fixup for Zotac Z68 inv-dmic Inverted internal mic workaround +alc662-headset-multi + Dell headset jack, which can also be used as mic-in (ALC662) dell-headset-multi Headset jack, which can also be used as mic-in +alc662-headset + Headset mode support on ALC662 +alc668-headset + Headset mode support on ALC668 +bass16 + Bass speaker fixup on pin 0x16 +bass1a + Bass speaker fixup on pin 0x1a +automute + Auto-mute fixups for ALC668 +dell-xps13 + Dell XPS13 fixups +asus-nx50 + ASUS Nx50 fixups +asus-nx51 + ASUS Nx51 fixups +alc891-headset + Headset mode support on ALC891 +alc891-headset-multi + Dell headset jack, which can also be used as mic-in (ALC891) +acer-veriton + Acer Veriton speaker pin fixup +asrock-mobo + Fix invalid 0x15 / 0x16 pins +usi-headset + Headset support on USI machines dual-codecs Lenovo laptops with dual codecs @@ -116,20 +326,70 @@ ALC680 ====== N/A -ALC88x/898/1150 -====================== +ALC88x/898/1150/1220 +==================== +abit-aw9d + Pin fixups for Abit AW9D-MAX +lenovo-y530 + Pin fixups for Lenovo Y530 +acer-aspire-7736 + Fixup for Acer Aspire 7736 +asus-w90v + Pin fixup for ASUS W90V +cd + Enable audio CD pin NID 0x1c +no-front-hp + Disable front HP pin NID 0x1b +vaio-tt + Pin fixup for VAIO TT +eee1601 + COEF setups for ASUS Eee 1601 +alc882-eapd + Change EAPD COEF mode on ALC882 +alc883-eapd + Change EAPD COEF mode on ALC883 +gpio1 + Enable GPIO1 +gpio2 + Enable GPIO2 +gpio3 + Enable GPIO3 +alc889-coef + Setup ALC889 COEF +asus-w2jc + Fixups for ASUS W2JC acer-aspire-4930g Acer Aspire 4930G/5930G/6530G/6930G/7730G acer-aspire-8930g Acer Aspire 8330G/6935G acer-aspire Acer Aspire others +macpro-gpio + GPIO setup for Mac Pro +dac-route + Workaround for DAC routing on Acer Aspire +mbp-vref + Vref setup for Macbook Pro +imac91-vref + Vref setup for iMac 9,1 +mba11-vref + Vref setup for MacBook Air 1,1 +mba21-vref + Vref setup for MacBook Air 2,1 +mp11-vref + Vref setup for Mac Pro 1,1 +mp41-vref + Vref setup for Mac Pro 4,1 inv-dmic Inverted internal mic workaround no-primary-hp VAIO Z/VGC-LN51JGB workaround (for fixed speaker DAC) +asus-bass + Bass speaker setup for ASUS ET2700 dual-codecs ALC1220 dual codecs for Gaming mobos +clevo-p950 + Fixups for Clevo P950 ALC861/660 ========== diff --git a/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst b/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst index 395e5a516282..fe61e02277f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst +++ b/Documentation/sound/soc/dpcm.rst @@ -254,9 +254,7 @@ configuration. channels->min = channels->max = 2; /* set DAI0 to 16 bit */ - snd_mask_set(¶ms->masks[SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FORMAT - - SNDRV_PCM_HW_PARAM_FIRST_MASK], - SNDRV_PCM_FORMAT_S16_LE); + params_set_format(params, SNDRV_PCM_FORMAT_S16_LE); return 0; } diff --git a/Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py b/Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py index fbedcc39460b..9d0a7f08f93b 100644 --- a/Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py +++ b/Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ class KernelDocDirective(Directive): optional_arguments = 4 option_spec = { 'doc': directives.unchanged_required, - 'functions': directives.unchanged_required, + 'functions': directives.unchanged, 'export': directives.unchanged, 'internal': directives.unchanged, } @@ -75,8 +75,12 @@ class KernelDocDirective(Directive): elif 'doc' in self.options: cmd += ['-function', str(self.options.get('doc'))] elif 'functions' in self.options: - for f in str(self.options.get('functions')).split(): - cmd += ['-function', f] + functions = self.options.get('functions').split() + if functions: + for f in functions: + cmd += ['-function', f] + else: + cmd += ['-no-doc-sections'] for pattern in export_file_patterns: for f in glob.glob(env.config.kerneldoc_srctree + '/' + pattern): diff --git a/Documentation/sphinx/parse-headers.pl b/Documentation/sphinx/parse-headers.pl index d410f47567e9..c518050ffc3f 100755 --- a/Documentation/sphinx/parse-headers.pl +++ b/Documentation/sphinx/parse-headers.pl @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ enums and defines and create cross-references to a Sphinx book. B<parse_headers.pl> [<options>] <C_FILE> <OUT_FILE> [<EXCEPTIONS_FILE>] -Where <options> can be: --debug, --help or --man. +Where <options> can be: --debug, --help or --usage. =head1 OPTIONS diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index eded671d55eb..37a679501ddc 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -38,7 +38,9 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - hung_task_panic - hung_task_check_count - hung_task_timeout_secs +- hung_task_check_interval_secs - hung_task_warnings +- hyperv_record_panic_msg - kexec_load_disabled - kptr_restrict - l2cr [ PPC only ] @@ -354,7 +356,7 @@ This file shows up if CONFIG_DETECT_HUNG_TASK is enabled. hung_task_timeout_secs: -Check interval. When a task in D state did not get scheduled +When a task in D state did not get scheduled for more than this value report a warning. This file shows up if CONFIG_DETECT_HUNG_TASK is enabled. @@ -363,6 +365,18 @@ Possible values to set are in range {0..LONG_MAX/HZ}. ============================================================== +hung_task_check_interval_secs: + +Hung task check interval. If hung task checking is enabled +(see hung_task_timeout_secs), the check is done every +hung_task_check_interval_secs seconds. +This file shows up if CONFIG_DETECT_HUNG_TASK is enabled. + +0 (default): means use hung_task_timeout_secs as checking interval. +Possible values to set are in range {0..LONG_MAX/HZ}. + +============================================================== + hung_task_warnings: The maximum number of warnings to report. During a check interval @@ -374,6 +388,16 @@ This file shows up if CONFIG_DETECT_HUNG_TASK is enabled. ============================================================== +hyperv_record_panic_msg: + +Controls whether the panic kmsg data should be reported to Hyper-V. + +0: do not report panic kmsg data. + +1: report the panic kmsg data. This is the default behavior. + +============================================================== + kexec_load_disabled: A toggle indicating if the kexec_load syscall has been disabled. This @@ -440,7 +464,8 @@ Notes: 1) kernel doesn't guarantee, that new object will have desired id. So, it's up to userspace, how to handle an object with "wrong" id. 2) Toggle with non-default value will be set back to -1 by kernel after -successful IPC object allocation. +successful IPC object allocation. If an IPC object allocation syscall +fails, it is undefined if the value remains unmodified or is reset to -1. ============================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index 697ef8c225df..7d73882e2c27 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -27,6 +27,7 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm: - dirty_bytes - dirty_expire_centisecs - dirty_ratio +- dirtytime_expire_seconds - dirty_writeback_centisecs - drop_caches - extfrag_threshold @@ -44,6 +45,7 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm: - mmap_rnd_bits - mmap_rnd_compat_bits - nr_hugepages +- nr_hugepages_mempolicy - nr_overcommit_hugepages - nr_trim_pages (only if CONFIG_MMU=n) - numa_zonelist_order @@ -178,6 +180,18 @@ The total available memory is not equal to total system memory. ============================================================== +dirtytime_expire_seconds + +When a lazytime inode is constantly having its pages dirtied, the inode with +an updated timestamp will never get chance to be written out. And, if the +only thing that has happened on the file system is a dirtytime inode caused +by an atime update, a worker will be scheduled to make sure that inode +eventually gets pushed out to disk. This tunable is used to define when dirty +inode is old enough to be eligible for writeback by the kernel flusher threads. +And, it is also used as the interval to wakeup dirtytime_writeback thread. + +============================================================== + dirty_writeback_centisecs The kernel flusher threads will periodically wake up and write `old' data @@ -519,6 +533,15 @@ See Documentation/admin-guide/mm/hugetlbpage.rst ============================================================== +nr_hugepages_mempolicy + +Change the size of the hugepage pool at run-time on a specific +set of NUMA nodes. + +See Documentation/admin-guide/mm/hugetlbpage.rst + +============================================================== + nr_overcommit_hugepages Change the maximum size of the hugepage pool. The maximum is @@ -668,7 +691,7 @@ and don't use much of it. The default value is 0. See Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting.rst and -mm/mmap.c::__vm_enough_memory() for more information. +mm/util.c::__vm_enough_memory() for more information. ============================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt b/Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt index f3a8cf28f802..2d1732b0a868 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/timekeeping.txt @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ a Linux system will eventually read the clock source to determine exactly what time it is. Typically the clock source is a monotonic, atomic counter which will provide -n bits which count from 0 to 2^(n-1) and then wraps around to 0 and start over. +n bits which count from 0 to (2^n)-1 and then wraps around to 0 and start over. It will ideally NEVER stop ticking as long as the system is running. It may stop during system suspend. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events-power.rst b/Documentation/trace/events-power.rst index a77daca75e30..2ef318962e29 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/events-power.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/events-power.rst @@ -27,6 +27,7 @@ cpufreq. cpu_idle "state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" cpu_frequency "state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + cpu_frequency_limits "min=%lu max=%lu cpu_id=%lu" A suspend event is used to indicate the system going in and out of the suspend mode: diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events.rst b/Documentation/trace/events.rst index 696dc69b8158..f7e1fcc0953c 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/events.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/events.rst @@ -524,4 +524,4 @@ The following commands are supported: totals derived from one or more trace event format fields and/or event counts (hitcount). - See Documentation/trace/histogram.txt for details and examples. + See Documentation/trace/histogram.rst for details and examples. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst index a20d34955333..7ea16a0ceffc 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst @@ -329,9 +329,9 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: track of the time spent in those functions. The histogram content can be displayed in the files: - trace_stats/function<cpu> ( function0, function1, etc). + trace_stat/function<cpu> ( function0, function1, etc). - trace_stats: + trace_stat: A directory that holds different tracing stats. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/histogram.txt b/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst index e73bcf9cb5f3..5ac724baea7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/histogram.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/histogram.rst @@ -1,6 +1,8 @@ - Event Histograms +================ +Event Histograms +================ - Documentation written by Tom Zanussi +Documentation written by Tom Zanussi 1. Introduction =============== @@ -19,7 +21,7 @@ derived from one or more trace event format fields and/or event counts (hitcount). - The format of a hist trigger is as follows: + The format of a hist trigger is as follows:: hist:keys=<field1[,field2,...]>[:values=<field1[,field2,...]>] [:sort=<field1[,field2,...]>][:size=#entries][:pause][:continue] @@ -68,6 +70,7 @@ modified by appending any of the following modifiers to the field name: + =========== ========================================== .hex display a number as a hex value .sym display an address as a symbol .sym-offset display an address as a symbol and offset @@ -75,6 +78,7 @@ .execname display a common_pid as a program name .log2 display log2 value rather than raw number .usecs display a common_timestamp in microseconds + =========== ========================================== Note that in general the semantics of a given field aren't interpreted when applying a modifier to it, but there are some @@ -92,15 +96,15 @@ pid-specific comm fields in the event itself. A typical usage scenario would be the following to enable a hist - trigger, read its current contents, and then turn it off: + trigger, read its current contents, and then turn it off:: - # echo 'hist:keys=skbaddr.hex:vals=len' > \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=skbaddr.hex:vals=len' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/trigger - # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/hist + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/hist - # echo '!hist:keys=skbaddr.hex:vals=len' > \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/trigger + # echo '!hist:keys=skbaddr.hex:vals=len' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/trigger The trigger file itself can be read to show the details of the currently attached hist trigger. This information is also displayed @@ -140,7 +144,7 @@ can be attached to a given event, allowing that event to kick off and stop aggregations on a host of other events. - The format is very similar to the enable/disable_event triggers: + The format is very similar to the enable/disable_event triggers:: enable_hist:<system>:<event>[:count] disable_hist:<system>:<event>[:count] @@ -153,16 +157,16 @@ A typical usage scenario for the enable_hist/disable_hist triggers would be to first set up a paused hist trigger on some event, followed by an enable_hist/disable_hist pair that turns the hist - aggregation on and off when conditions of interest are hit: + aggregation on and off when conditions of interest are hit:: - # echo 'hist:keys=skbaddr.hex:vals=len:pause' > \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=skbaddr.hex:vals=len:pause' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/trigger - # echo 'enable_hist:net:netif_receive_skb if filename==/usr/bin/wget' > \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_exec/trigger + # echo 'enable_hist:net:netif_receive_skb if filename==/usr/bin/wget' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_exec/trigger - # echo 'disable_hist:net:netif_receive_skb if comm==wget' > \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_exit/trigger + # echo 'disable_hist:net:netif_receive_skb if comm==wget' > \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_exit/trigger The above sets up an initially paused hist trigger which is unpaused and starts aggregating events when a given program is executed, and @@ -172,8 +176,8 @@ The examples below provide a more concrete illustration of the concepts and typical usage patterns discussed above. - 'special' event fields - ------------------------ +'special' event fields +------------------------ There are a number of 'special event fields' available for use as keys or values in a hist trigger. These look like and behave as if @@ -182,14 +186,16 @@ event, and can be used anywhere an actual event field could be. They are: - common_timestamp u64 - timestamp (from ring buffer) associated - with the event, in nanoseconds. May be - modified by .usecs to have timestamps - interpreted as microseconds. - cpu int - the cpu on which the event occurred. + ====================== ==== ======================================= + common_timestamp u64 timestamp (from ring buffer) associated + with the event, in nanoseconds. May be + modified by .usecs to have timestamps + interpreted as microseconds. + cpu int the cpu on which the event occurred. + ====================== ==== ======================================= - Extended error information - -------------------------- +Extended error information +-------------------------- For some error conditions encountered when invoking a hist trigger command, extended error information is available via the @@ -199,7 +205,7 @@ be available until the next hist trigger command for that event. If available for a given error condition, the extended error - information and usage takes the following form: + information and usage takes the following form:: # echo xxx > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup/trigger echo: write error: Invalid argument @@ -213,7 +219,7 @@ The first set of examples creates aggregations using the kmalloc event. The fields that can be used for the hist trigger are listed - in the kmalloc event's format file: + in the kmalloc event's format file:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/format name: kmalloc @@ -232,7 +238,7 @@ We'll start by creating a hist trigger that generates a simple table that lists the total number of bytes requested for each function in - the kernel that made one or more calls to kmalloc: + the kernel that made one or more calls to kmalloc:: # echo 'hist:key=call_site:val=bytes_req' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger @@ -247,7 +253,7 @@ We'll let it run for awhile and then dump the contents of the 'hist' file in the kmalloc event's subdirectory (for readability, a number - of entries have been omitted): + of entries have been omitted):: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/hist # trigger info: hist:keys=call_site:vals=bytes_req:sort=hitcount:size=2048 [active] @@ -287,7 +293,7 @@ specified in the trigger, followed by the value(s) also specified in the trigger. At the beginning of the output is a line that displays the trigger info, which can also be displayed by reading the - 'trigger' file: + 'trigger' file:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger hist:keys=call_site:vals=bytes_req:sort=hitcount:size=2048 [active] @@ -317,7 +323,7 @@ frequencies. To turn the hist trigger off, simply call up the trigger in the - command history and re-execute it with a '!' prepended: + command history and re-execute it with a '!' prepended:: # echo '!hist:key=call_site:val=bytes_req' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger @@ -325,7 +331,7 @@ Finally, notice that the call_site as displayed in the output above isn't really very useful. It's an address, but normally addresses are displayed in hex. To have a numeric field displayed as a hex - value, simply append '.hex' to the field name in the trigger: + value, simply append '.hex' to the field name in the trigger:: # echo 'hist:key=call_site.hex:val=bytes_req' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger @@ -370,7 +376,7 @@ when looking at text addresses are the corresponding symbols instead. To have an address displayed as symbolic value instead, simply append '.sym' or '.sym-offset' to the field name in the - trigger: + trigger:: # echo 'hist:key=call_site.sym:val=bytes_req' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger @@ -420,7 +426,7 @@ run. If instead we we wanted to see the top kmalloc callers in terms of the number of bytes requested rather than the number of calls, and we wanted the top caller to appear at the top, we can use - the 'sort' parameter, along with the 'descending' modifier: + the 'sort' parameter, along with the 'descending' modifier:: # echo 'hist:key=call_site.sym:val=bytes_req:sort=bytes_req.descending' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger @@ -461,7 +467,7 @@ Dropped: 0 To display the offset and size information in addition to the symbol - name, just use 'sym-offset' instead: + name, just use 'sym-offset' instead:: # echo 'hist:key=call_site.sym-offset:val=bytes_req:sort=bytes_req.descending' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger @@ -500,7 +506,7 @@ We can also add multiple fields to the 'values' parameter. For example, we might want to see the total number of bytes allocated alongside bytes requested, and display the result sorted by bytes - allocated in a descending order: + allocated in a descending order:: # echo 'hist:keys=call_site.sym:values=bytes_req,bytes_alloc:sort=bytes_alloc.descending' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger @@ -543,7 +549,7 @@ the hist trigger display symbolic call_sites, we can have the hist trigger additionally display the complete set of kernel stack traces that led to each call_site. To do that, we simply use the special - value 'stacktrace' for the key parameter: + value 'stacktrace' for the key parameter:: # echo 'hist:keys=stacktrace:values=bytes_req,bytes_alloc:sort=bytes_alloc' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/trigger @@ -554,7 +560,7 @@ event, along with a running total of any of the event fields for that event. Here we tally bytes requested and bytes allocated for every callpath in the system that led up to a kmalloc (in this case - every callpath to a kmalloc for a kernel compile): + every callpath to a kmalloc for a kernel compile):: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc/hist # trigger info: hist:keys=stacktrace:vals=bytes_req,bytes_alloc:sort=bytes_alloc:size=2048 [active] @@ -652,7 +658,7 @@ gather and display sorted totals for each process, you can use the special .execname modifier to display the executable names for the processes in the table rather than raw pids. The example below - keeps a per-process sum of total bytes read: + keeps a per-process sum of total bytes read:: # echo 'hist:key=common_pid.execname:val=count:sort=count.descending' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/syscalls/sys_enter_read/trigger @@ -693,7 +699,7 @@ gather and display a list of systemwide syscall hits, you can use the special .syscall modifier to display the syscall names rather than raw ids. The example below keeps a running total of syscall - counts for the system during the run: + counts for the system during the run:: # echo 'hist:key=id.syscall:val=hitcount' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/raw_syscalls/sys_enter/trigger @@ -735,19 +741,19 @@ Entries: 72 Dropped: 0 - The syscall counts above provide a rough overall picture of system - call activity on the system; we can see for example that the most - popular system call on this system was the 'sys_ioctl' system call. + The syscall counts above provide a rough overall picture of system + call activity on the system; we can see for example that the most + popular system call on this system was the 'sys_ioctl' system call. - We can use 'compound' keys to refine that number and provide some - further insight as to which processes exactly contribute to the - overall ioctl count. + We can use 'compound' keys to refine that number and provide some + further insight as to which processes exactly contribute to the + overall ioctl count. - The command below keeps a hitcount for every unique combination of - system call id and pid - the end result is essentially a table - that keeps a per-pid sum of system call hits. The results are - sorted using the system call id as the primary key, and the - hitcount sum as the secondary key: + The command below keeps a hitcount for every unique combination of + system call id and pid - the end result is essentially a table + that keeps a per-pid sum of system call hits. The results are + sorted using the system call id as the primary key, and the + hitcount sum as the secondary key:: # echo 'hist:key=id.syscall,common_pid.execname:val=hitcount:sort=id,hitcount' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/raw_syscalls/sys_enter/trigger @@ -793,11 +799,11 @@ Entries: 323 Dropped: 0 - The above list does give us a breakdown of the ioctl syscall by - pid, but it also gives us quite a bit more than that, which we - don't really care about at the moment. Since we know the syscall - id for sys_ioctl (16, displayed next to the sys_ioctl name), we - can use that to filter out all the other syscalls: + The above list does give us a breakdown of the ioctl syscall by + pid, but it also gives us quite a bit more than that, which we + don't really care about at the moment. Since we know the syscall + id for sys_ioctl (16, displayed next to the sys_ioctl name), we + can use that to filter out all the other syscalls:: # echo 'hist:key=id.syscall,common_pid.execname:val=hitcount:sort=id,hitcount if id == 16' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/raw_syscalls/sys_enter/trigger @@ -829,18 +835,18 @@ Entries: 103 Dropped: 0 - The above output shows that 'compiz' and 'Xorg' are far and away - the heaviest ioctl callers (which might lead to questions about - whether they really need to be making all those calls and to - possible avenues for further investigation.) + The above output shows that 'compiz' and 'Xorg' are far and away + the heaviest ioctl callers (which might lead to questions about + whether they really need to be making all those calls and to + possible avenues for further investigation.) - The compound key examples used a key and a sum value (hitcount) to - sort the output, but we can just as easily use two keys instead. - Here's an example where we use a compound key composed of the the - common_pid and size event fields. Sorting with pid as the primary - key and 'size' as the secondary key allows us to display an - ordered summary of the recvfrom sizes, with counts, received by - each process: + The compound key examples used a key and a sum value (hitcount) to + sort the output, but we can just as easily use two keys instead. + Here's an example where we use a compound key composed of the the + common_pid and size event fields. Sorting with pid as the primary + key and 'size' as the secondary key allows us to display an + ordered summary of the recvfrom sizes, with counts, received by + each process:: # echo 'hist:key=common_pid.execname,size:val=hitcount:sort=common_pid,size' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/syscalls/sys_enter_recvfrom/trigger @@ -893,7 +899,7 @@ demonstrates how you can manually pause and continue a hist trigger. In this example, we'll aggregate fork counts and don't expect a large number of entries in the hash table, so we'll drop it to a - much smaller number, say 256: + much smaller number, say 256:: # echo 'hist:key=child_comm:val=hitcount:size=256' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_fork/trigger @@ -929,7 +935,7 @@ If we want to pause the hist trigger, we can simply append :pause to the command that started the trigger. Notice that the trigger info - displays as [paused]: + displays as [paused]:: # echo 'hist:key=child_comm:val=hitcount:size=256:pause' >> \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_fork/trigger @@ -966,7 +972,7 @@ To manually continue having the trigger aggregate events, append :cont instead. Notice that the trigger info displays as [active] - again, and the data has changed: + again, and the data has changed:: # echo 'hist:key=child_comm:val=hitcount:size=256:cont' >> \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_fork/trigger @@ -1020,7 +1026,7 @@ wget. First we set up an initially paused stacktrace trigger on the - netif_receive_skb event: + netif_receive_skb event:: # echo 'hist:key=stacktrace:vals=len:pause' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/trigger @@ -1031,7 +1037,7 @@ set up on netif_receive_skb if and only if it sees a sched_process_exec event with a filename of '/usr/bin/wget'. When that happens, all netif_receive_skb events are aggregated into a - hash table keyed on stacktrace: + hash table keyed on stacktrace:: # echo 'enable_hist:net:netif_receive_skb if filename==/usr/bin/wget' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_exec/trigger @@ -1039,7 +1045,7 @@ The aggregation continues until the netif_receive_skb is paused again, which is what the following disable_hist event does by creating a similar setup on the sched_process_exit event, using the - filter 'comm==wget': + filter 'comm==wget':: # echo 'disable_hist:net:netif_receive_skb if comm==wget' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_exit/trigger @@ -1051,7 +1057,7 @@ The overall effect is that netif_receive_skb events are aggregated into the hash table for only the duration of the wget. Executing a wget command and then listing the 'hist' file will display the - output generated by the wget command: + output generated by the wget command:: $ wget https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v3.x/patch-3.19.xz @@ -1136,13 +1142,13 @@ Suppose we wanted to try another run of the previous example but this time also wanted to see the complete list of events that went into the histogram. In order to avoid having to set everything up - again, we can just clear the histogram first: + again, we can just clear the histogram first:: # echo 'hist:key=stacktrace:vals=len:clear' >> \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/trigger Just to verify that it is in fact cleared, here's what we now see in - the hist file: + the hist file:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/hist # trigger info: hist:keys=stacktrace:vals=len:sort=hitcount:size=2048 [paused] @@ -1156,7 +1162,7 @@ event occurring during the new run, which are in fact the same events being aggregated into the hash table, we add some additional 'enable_event' events to the triggering sched_process_exec and - sched_process_exit events as such: + sched_process_exit events as such:: # echo 'enable_event:net:netif_receive_skb if filename==/usr/bin/wget' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_exec/trigger @@ -1167,7 +1173,7 @@ If you read the trigger files for the sched_process_exec and sched_process_exit triggers, you should see two triggers for each: one enabling/disabling the hist aggregation and the other - enabling/disabling the logging of events: + enabling/disabling the logging of events:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_exec/trigger enable_event:net:netif_receive_skb:unlimited if filename==/usr/bin/wget @@ -1181,13 +1187,13 @@ sched_process_exit events is hit and matches 'wget', it enables or disables both the histogram and the event log, and what you end up with is a hash table and set of events just covering the specified - duration. Run the wget command again: + duration. Run the wget command again:: $ wget https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v3.x/patch-3.19.xz Displaying the 'hist' file should show something similar to what you saw in the last run, but this time you should also see the - individual events in the trace file: + individual events in the trace file:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace @@ -1220,7 +1226,7 @@ attached to a given event. This capability can be useful for creating a set of different summaries derived from the same set of events, or for comparing the effects of different filters, among - other things. + other things:: # echo 'hist:keys=skbaddr.hex:vals=len if len < 0' >> \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/trigger @@ -1241,7 +1247,7 @@ any existing hist triggers beforehand). Displaying the contents of the 'hist' file for the event shows the - contents of all five histograms: + contents of all five histograms:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/hist @@ -1361,7 +1367,7 @@ output of events generated by tracepoints contained inside inline functions, but names can be used in a hist trigger on any event. For example, these two triggers when hit will update the same 'len' - field in the shared 'foo' histogram data: + field in the shared 'foo' histogram data:: # echo 'hist:name=foo:keys=skbaddr.hex:vals=len' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/trigger @@ -1369,7 +1375,7 @@ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/trigger You can see that they're updating common histogram data by reading - each event's hist files at the same time: + each event's hist files at the same time:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_receive_skb/hist; cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/hist @@ -1482,7 +1488,7 @@ And here's an example that shows how to combine histogram data from any two events even if they don't share any 'compatible' fields other than 'hitcount' and 'stacktrace'. These commands create a - couple of triggers named 'bar' using those fields: + couple of triggers named 'bar' using those fields:: # echo 'hist:name=bar:key=stacktrace:val=hitcount' > \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_fork/trigger @@ -1490,7 +1496,7 @@ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/trigger And displaying the output of either shows some interesting if - somewhat confusing output: + somewhat confusing output:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_process_fork/hist # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/net/netif_rx/hist @@ -1705,7 +1711,7 @@ to any event field. Either keys or values can be saved and retrieved in this way. This creates a variable named 'ts0' for a histogram entry with the key -'next_pid': +'next_pid':: # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:vals=$ts0:ts0=common_timestamp ... >> \ event/trigger @@ -1721,52 +1727,52 @@ Because 'vals=' is used, the common_timestamp variable value above will also be summed as a normal histogram value would (though for a timestamp it makes little sense). -The below shows that a key value can also be saved in the same way: +The below shows that a key value can also be saved in the same way:: # echo 'hist:timer_pid=common_pid:key=timer_pid ...' >> event/trigger If a variable isn't a key variable or prefixed with 'vals=', the associated event field will be saved in a variable but won't be summed -as a value: +as a value:: - # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:ts1=common_timestamp ... >> event/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:ts1=common_timestamp ...' >> event/trigger Multiple variables can be assigned at the same time. The below would result in both ts0 and b being created as variables, with both -common_timestamp and field1 additionally being summed as values: +common_timestamp and field1 additionally being summed as values:: - # echo 'hist:keys=pid:vals=$ts0,$b:ts0=common_timestamp,b=field1 ... >> \ + # echo 'hist:keys=pid:vals=$ts0,$b:ts0=common_timestamp,b=field1 ...' >> \ event/trigger Note that variable assignments can appear either preceding or following their use. The command below behaves identically to the -command above: +command above:: - # echo 'hist:keys=pid:ts0=common_timestamp,b=field1:vals=$ts0,$b ... >> \ + # echo 'hist:keys=pid:ts0=common_timestamp,b=field1:vals=$ts0,$b ...' >> \ event/trigger Any number of variables not bound to a 'vals=' prefix can also be assigned by simply separating them with colons. Below is the same -thing but without the values being summed in the histogram: +thing but without the values being summed in the histogram:: - # echo 'hist:keys=pid:ts0=common_timestamp:b=field1 ... >> event/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=pid:ts0=common_timestamp:b=field1 ...' >> event/trigger Variables set as above can be referenced and used in expressions on another event. -For example, here's how a latency can be calculated: +For example, here's how a latency can be calculated:: - # echo 'hist:keys=pid,prio:ts0=common_timestamp ... >> event1/trigger - # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:wakeup_lat=common_timestamp-$ts0 ... >> event2/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=pid,prio:ts0=common_timestamp ...' >> event1/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:wakeup_lat=common_timestamp-$ts0 ...' >> event2/trigger In the first line above, the event's timetamp is saved into the variable ts0. In the next line, ts0 is subtracted from the second event's timestamp to produce the latency, which is then assigned into yet another variable, 'wakeup_lat'. The hist trigger below in turn makes use of the wakeup_lat variable to compute a combined latency -using the same key and variable from yet another event: +using the same key and variable from yet another event:: - # echo 'hist:key=pid:wakeupswitch_lat=$wakeup_lat+$switchtime_lat ... >> event3/trigger + # echo 'hist:key=pid:wakeupswitch_lat=$wakeup_lat+$switchtime_lat ...' >> event3/trigger 2.2.2 Synthetic Events ---------------------- @@ -1784,7 +1790,7 @@ separated by semicolons, to the tracing/synthetic_events file. For instance, the following creates a new event named 'wakeup_latency' with 3 fields: lat, pid, and prio. Each of those fields is simply a -variable reference to a variable on another event: +variable reference to a variable on another event:: # echo 'wakeup_latency \ u64 lat; \ @@ -1793,13 +1799,13 @@ variable reference to a variable on another event: /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events Reading the tracing/synthetic_events file lists all the currently -defined synthetic events, in this case the event defined above: +defined synthetic events, in this case the event defined above:: # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events wakeup_latency u64 lat; pid_t pid; int prio An existing synthetic event definition can be removed by prepending -the command that defined it with a '!': +the command that defined it with a '!':: # echo '!wakeup_latency u64 lat pid_t pid int prio' >> \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events @@ -1807,16 +1813,17 @@ the command that defined it with a '!': At this point, there isn't yet an actual 'wakeup_latency' event instantiated in the event subsytem - for this to happen, a 'hist trigger action' needs to be instantiated and bound to actual fields -and variables defined on other events (see Section 6.3.3 below). +and variables defined on other events (see Section 2.2.3 below on +how that is done using hist trigger 'onmatch' action). Once that is +done, the 'wakeup_latency' synthetic event instance is created. -Once that is done, an event instance is created, and a histogram can -be defined using it: +A histogram can now be defined for the new synthetic event:: # echo 'hist:keys=pid,prio,lat.log2:sort=pid,lat' >> \ /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_latency/trigger The new event is created under the tracing/events/synthetic/ directory -and looks and behaves just like any other event: +and looks and behaves just like any other event:: # ls /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_latency enable filter format hist id trigger @@ -1871,74 +1878,74 @@ hist trigger specification. As an example the below defines a simple synthetic event and uses a variable defined on the sched_wakeup_new event as a parameter when invoking the synthetic event. Here we define the synthetic - event: + event:: - # echo 'wakeup_new_test pid_t pid' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events + # echo 'wakeup_new_test pid_t pid' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events - # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events - wakeup_new_test pid_t pid + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events + wakeup_new_test pid_t pid The following hist trigger both defines the missing testpid variable and specifies an onmatch() action that generates a wakeup_new_test synthetic event whenever a sched_wakeup_new event occurs, which because of the 'if comm == "cyclictest"' filter only - happens when the executable is cyclictest: + happens when the executable is cyclictest:: - # echo 'hist:keys=$testpid:testpid=pid:onmatch(sched.sched_wakeup_new).\ - wakeup_new_test($testpid) if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup_new/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=$testpid:testpid=pid:onmatch(sched.sched_wakeup_new).\ + wakeup_new_test($testpid) if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_wakeup_new/trigger Creating and displaying a histogram based on those events is now just a matter of using the fields and new synthetic event in the - tracing/events/synthetic directory, as usual: + tracing/events/synthetic directory, as usual:: - # echo 'hist:keys=pid:sort=pid' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_new_test/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=pid:sort=pid' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_new_test/trigger Running 'cyclictest' should cause wakeup_new events to generate wakeup_new_test synthetic events which should result in histogram - output in the wakeup_new_test event's hist file: + output in the wakeup_new_test event's hist file:: - # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_new_test/hist + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_new_test/hist A more typical usage would be to use two events to calculate a latency. The following example uses a set of hist triggers to - produce a 'wakeup_latency' histogram: + produce a 'wakeup_latency' histogram. - First, we define a 'wakeup_latency' synthetic event: + First, we define a 'wakeup_latency' synthetic event:: - # echo 'wakeup_latency u64 lat; pid_t pid; int prio' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events + # echo 'wakeup_latency u64 lat; pid_t pid; int prio' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/synthetic_events Next, we specify that whenever we see a sched_waking event for a - cyclictest thread, save the timestamp in a 'ts0' variable: + cyclictest thread, save the timestamp in a 'ts0' variable:: - # echo 'hist:keys=$saved_pid:saved_pid=pid:ts0=common_timestamp.usecs \ - if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_waking/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=$saved_pid:saved_pid=pid:ts0=common_timestamp.usecs \ + if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_waking/trigger Then, when the corresponding thread is actually scheduled onto the CPU by a sched_switch event, calculate the latency and use that along with another variable and an event field to generate a - wakeup_latency synthetic event: + wakeup_latency synthetic event:: - # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:wakeup_lat=common_timestamp.usecs-$ts0:\ - onmatch(sched.sched_waking).wakeup_latency($wakeup_lat,\ - $saved_pid,next_prio) if next_comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:wakeup_lat=common_timestamp.usecs-$ts0:\ + onmatch(sched.sched_waking).wakeup_latency($wakeup_lat,\ + $saved_pid,next_prio) if next_comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/trigger We also need to create a histogram on the wakeup_latency synthetic - event in order to aggregate the generated synthetic event data: + event in order to aggregate the generated synthetic event data:: - # echo 'hist:keys=pid,prio,lat:sort=pid,lat' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_latency/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=pid,prio,lat:sort=pid,lat' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_latency/trigger Finally, once we've run cyclictest to actually generate some events, we can see the output by looking at the wakeup_latency - synthetic event's hist file: + synthetic event's hist file:: - # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_latency/hist + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/synthetic/wakeup_latency/hist - onmax(var).save(field,.. .) @@ -1960,38 +1967,38 @@ hist trigger specification. back to that pid, the timestamp difference is calculated. If the resulting latency, stored in wakeup_lat, exceeds the current maximum latency, the values specified in the save() fields are - recoreded: + recorded:: - # echo 'hist:keys=pid:ts0=common_timestamp.usecs \ - if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_waking/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=pid:ts0=common_timestamp.usecs \ + if comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_waking/trigger - # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:\ - wakeup_lat=common_timestamp.usecs-$ts0:\ - onmax($wakeup_lat).save(next_comm,prev_pid,prev_prio,prev_comm) \ - if next_comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ - /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/trigger + # echo 'hist:keys=next_pid:\ + wakeup_lat=common_timestamp.usecs-$ts0:\ + onmax($wakeup_lat).save(next_comm,prev_pid,prev_prio,prev_comm) \ + if next_comm=="cyclictest"' >> \ + /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/trigger When the histogram is displayed, the max value and the saved values corresponding to the max are displayed following the rest - of the fields: + of the fields:: - # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/hist - { next_pid: 2255 } hitcount: 239 - common_timestamp-ts0: 0 - max: 27 - next_comm: cyclictest - prev_pid: 0 prev_prio: 120 prev_comm: swapper/1 + # cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/sched/sched_switch/hist + { next_pid: 2255 } hitcount: 239 + common_timestamp-ts0: 0 + max: 27 + next_comm: cyclictest + prev_pid: 0 prev_prio: 120 prev_comm: swapper/1 - { next_pid: 2256 } hitcount: 2355 - common_timestamp-ts0: 0 - max: 49 next_comm: cyclictest - prev_pid: 0 prev_prio: 120 prev_comm: swapper/0 + { next_pid: 2256 } hitcount: 2355 + common_timestamp-ts0: 0 + max: 49 next_comm: cyclictest + prev_pid: 0 prev_prio: 120 prev_comm: swapper/0 - Totals: - Hits: 12970 - Entries: 2 - Dropped: 0 + Totals: + Hits: 12970 + Entries: 2 + Dropped: 0 3. User space creating a trigger -------------------------------- @@ -2001,24 +2008,24 @@ ring buffer. This can also act like an event, by writing into the trigger file located in /sys/kernel/tracing/events/ftrace/print/ Modifying cyclictest to write into the trace_marker file before it sleeps -and after it wakes up, something like this: +and after it wakes up, something like this:: -static void traceputs(char *str) -{ + static void traceputs(char *str) + { /* tracemark_fd is the trace_marker file descriptor */ if (tracemark_fd < 0) return; /* write the tracemark message */ write(tracemark_fd, str, strlen(str)); -} + } -And later add something like: +And later add something like:: traceputs("start"); clock_nanosleep(...); traceputs("end"); -We can make a histogram from this: +We can make a histogram from this:: # cd /sys/kernel/tracing # echo 'latency u64 lat' > synthetic_events @@ -2033,7 +2040,7 @@ it will call the "latency" synthetic event with the calculated latency as its parameter. Finally, a histogram is added to the latency synthetic event to record the calculated latency along with the pid. -Now running cyclictest with: +Now running cyclictest with:: # ./cyclictest -p80 -d0 -i250 -n -a -t --tracemark -b 1000 @@ -2048,297 +2055,297 @@ Now running cyclictest with: Note, the -b 1000 is used just to make --tracemark available. -Then we can see the histogram created by this with: +Then we can see the histogram created by this with:: # cat events/synthetic/latency/hist -# event histogram -# -# trigger info: hist:keys=lat,common_pid:vals=hitcount:sort=lat:size=2048 [active] -# - -{ lat: 107, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 122, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 166, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 174, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 194, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 196, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 197, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 198, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 199, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 200, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 201, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 202, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 202, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 203, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 203, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 203, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 206, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 207, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 207, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 208, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 209, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 210, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 211, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 212, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 212, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 213, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 214, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 214, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 214, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 215, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 217, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 217, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 217, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 218, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 219, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 220, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 221, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 221, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 222, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 223, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 223, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 224, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 224, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 224, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 225, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 225, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 226, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 226, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 227, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 227, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 12 -{ lat: 227, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 228, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 228, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 14 -{ lat: 229, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 229, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 229, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 230, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 230, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 230, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 230, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 231, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 231, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 231, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 231, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 232, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 232, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 232, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 232, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 232, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 233, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 233, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 234, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 234, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 234, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 234, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 234, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 235, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 235, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 235, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 235, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 235, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 235, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 235, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 236, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 236, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 236, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 236, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 236, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 236, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 237, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 237, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 237, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 237, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 237, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 237, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 237, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 238, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 10 -{ lat: 238, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 238, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 238, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 238, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 238, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 238, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 239, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 239, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 239, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 239, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 239, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 239, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 239, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 240, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 29 -{ lat: 240, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 15 -{ lat: 240, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 44 -{ lat: 240, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 240, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 240, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 240, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 10 -{ lat: 240, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 13 -{ lat: 241, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 21 -{ lat: 241, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 36 -{ lat: 241, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 34 -{ lat: 241, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 14 -{ lat: 241, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 94 -{ lat: 241, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 12 -{ lat: 241, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 241, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 28 -{ lat: 242, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 109 -{ lat: 242, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 506 -{ lat: 242, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 155 -{ lat: 242, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 21 -{ lat: 242, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 52 -{ lat: 242, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 21 -{ lat: 242, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 16 -{ lat: 242, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 156 -{ lat: 243, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 46 -{ lat: 243, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 40 -{ lat: 243, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 119 -{ lat: 243, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 611 -{ lat: 243, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 69 -{ lat: 243, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 784 -{ lat: 243, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 323 -{ lat: 243, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 14 -{ lat: 244, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 35 -{ lat: 244, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 305 -{ lat: 244, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 244, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 4515 -{ lat: 244, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 371 -{ lat: 244, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 31 -{ lat: 244, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 114 -{ lat: 244, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 3396 -{ lat: 245, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 700 -{ lat: 245, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 2772 -{ lat: 245, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 268 -{ lat: 245, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 472 -{ lat: 245, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 2758 -{ lat: 245, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 3833 -{ lat: 245, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 3105 -{ lat: 245, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 645 -{ lat: 246, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 3451 -{ lat: 246, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 142 -{ lat: 246, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 5101 -{ lat: 246, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 68 -{ lat: 246, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 5099 -{ lat: 246, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5608 -{ lat: 246, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 3723 -{ lat: 246, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 4738 -{ lat: 247, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 312 -{ lat: 247, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 2385 -{ lat: 247, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 452 -{ lat: 247, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 792 -{ lat: 247, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 78 -{ lat: 247, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2375 -{ lat: 247, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1834 -{ lat: 247, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 2655 -{ lat: 248, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 36 -{ lat: 248, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 248, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 122 -{ lat: 248, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 135 -{ lat: 248, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 26 -{ lat: 248, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 503 -{ lat: 248, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 66 -{ lat: 248, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 46 -{ lat: 249, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 29 -{ lat: 249, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 249, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 29 -{ lat: 249, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 249, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 56 -{ lat: 249, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 27 -{ lat: 249, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 249, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 27 -{ lat: 250, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 250, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 30 -{ lat: 250, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 19 -{ lat: 250, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 22 -{ lat: 250, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 20 -{ lat: 250, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 250, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 250, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 48 -{ lat: 251, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 43 -{ lat: 251, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 251, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 12 -{ lat: 251, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 251, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 251, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 15 -{ lat: 251, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 252, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 252, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 12 -{ lat: 252, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 21 -{ lat: 252, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 14 -{ lat: 253, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 21 -{ lat: 253, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 253, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 253, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 253, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 254, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 254, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 254, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 254, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 254, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 254, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 12 -{ lat: 255, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 255, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 255, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 255, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 256, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 256, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 256, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 257, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 257, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 258, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 258, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 259, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 259, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 260, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 260, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 261, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 261, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 262, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 262, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 263, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 263, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 264, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 264, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 265, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 265, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 266, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 266, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 267, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 267, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 268, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 268, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 269, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 269, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 269, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 270, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 270, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 271, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 271, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 272, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 10 -{ lat: 273, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 274, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 275, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 276, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 276, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 276, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 277, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 277, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 278, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 279, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 279, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 280, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 283, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 284, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 284, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 288, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 289, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 300, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 384, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 - -Totals: - Hits: 67625 - Entries: 278 - Dropped: 0 + # event histogram + # + # trigger info: hist:keys=lat,common_pid:vals=hitcount:sort=lat:size=2048 [active] + # + + { lat: 107, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 122, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 166, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 174, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 194, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 196, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 197, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 198, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 199, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 200, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 201, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 202, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 202, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 203, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 203, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 203, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 206, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 207, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 207, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 208, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 209, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 210, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 211, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 212, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 212, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 213, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 214, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 214, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 214, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 215, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 217, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 217, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 217, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 218, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 219, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 220, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 221, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 221, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 222, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 223, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 223, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 224, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 224, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 224, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 225, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 225, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 226, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 226, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 227, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 227, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 12 + { lat: 227, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 228, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 228, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 14 + { lat: 229, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 229, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 229, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 230, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 230, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 230, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 230, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 231, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 231, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 231, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 231, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 232, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 232, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 232, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 232, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 232, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 233, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 233, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 234, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 234, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 234, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 234, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 234, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 235, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 235, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 235, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 235, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 235, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 235, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 235, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 236, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 236, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 236, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 236, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 236, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 236, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 237, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 237, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 237, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 237, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 237, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 237, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 237, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 238, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 10 + { lat: 238, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 238, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 238, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 238, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 238, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 238, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 239, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 239, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 239, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 239, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 239, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 239, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 239, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 240, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 29 + { lat: 240, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 15 + { lat: 240, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 44 + { lat: 240, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 240, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 240, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 240, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 10 + { lat: 240, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 13 + { lat: 241, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 21 + { lat: 241, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 36 + { lat: 241, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 34 + { lat: 241, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 14 + { lat: 241, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 94 + { lat: 241, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 12 + { lat: 241, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 241, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 28 + { lat: 242, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 109 + { lat: 242, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 506 + { lat: 242, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 155 + { lat: 242, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 21 + { lat: 242, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 52 + { lat: 242, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 21 + { lat: 242, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 16 + { lat: 242, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 156 + { lat: 243, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 46 + { lat: 243, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 40 + { lat: 243, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 119 + { lat: 243, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 611 + { lat: 243, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 69 + { lat: 243, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 784 + { lat: 243, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 323 + { lat: 243, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 14 + { lat: 244, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 35 + { lat: 244, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 305 + { lat: 244, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 244, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 4515 + { lat: 244, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 371 + { lat: 244, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 31 + { lat: 244, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 114 + { lat: 244, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 3396 + { lat: 245, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 700 + { lat: 245, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 2772 + { lat: 245, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 268 + { lat: 245, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 472 + { lat: 245, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 2758 + { lat: 245, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 3833 + { lat: 245, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 3105 + { lat: 245, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 645 + { lat: 246, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 3451 + { lat: 246, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 142 + { lat: 246, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 5101 + { lat: 246, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 68 + { lat: 246, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 5099 + { lat: 246, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5608 + { lat: 246, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 3723 + { lat: 246, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 4738 + { lat: 247, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 312 + { lat: 247, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 2385 + { lat: 247, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 452 + { lat: 247, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 792 + { lat: 247, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 78 + { lat: 247, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2375 + { lat: 247, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1834 + { lat: 247, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 2655 + { lat: 248, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 36 + { lat: 248, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 248, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 122 + { lat: 248, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 135 + { lat: 248, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 26 + { lat: 248, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 503 + { lat: 248, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 66 + { lat: 248, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 46 + { lat: 249, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 29 + { lat: 249, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 249, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 29 + { lat: 249, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 249, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 56 + { lat: 249, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 27 + { lat: 249, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 249, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 27 + { lat: 250, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 250, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 30 + { lat: 250, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 19 + { lat: 250, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 22 + { lat: 250, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 20 + { lat: 250, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 250, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 250, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 48 + { lat: 251, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 43 + { lat: 251, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 251, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 12 + { lat: 251, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 251, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 251, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 15 + { lat: 251, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 252, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 252, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 12 + { lat: 252, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 21 + { lat: 252, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 14 + { lat: 253, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 21 + { lat: 253, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 253, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 253, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 253, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 254, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 254, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 254, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 254, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 254, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 254, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 12 + { lat: 255, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 255, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 255, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 255, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 256, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 256, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 256, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 257, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 257, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 258, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 258, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 259, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 259, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 260, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 260, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 261, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 261, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 262, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 262, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 263, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 263, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 264, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 264, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 265, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 265, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 266, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 266, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 267, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 267, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 268, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 268, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 269, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 269, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 269, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 270, common_pid: 2040 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 270, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 271, common_pid: 2041 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 271, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 272, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 10 + { lat: 273, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 274, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 275, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 276, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 276, common_pid: 2037 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 276, common_pid: 2038 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 277, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 277, common_pid: 2042 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 278, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 279, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 279, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 280, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 283, common_pid: 2036 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 284, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 284, common_pid: 2043 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 288, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 289, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 300, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 384, common_pid: 2039 } hitcount: 1 + + Totals: + Hits: 67625 + Entries: 278 + Dropped: 0 Note, the writes are around the sleep, so ideally they will all be of 250 microseconds. If you are wondering how there are several that are under @@ -2349,7 +2356,7 @@ will be at 200 microseconds. But this could easily be done in userspace. To make this even more interesting, we can mix the histogram between events that happened in the -kernel with trace_marker. +kernel with trace_marker:: # cd /sys/kernel/tracing # echo 'latency u64 lat' > synthetic_events @@ -2361,177 +2368,177 @@ The difference this time is that instead of using the trace_marker to start the latency, the sched_waking event is used, matching the common_pid for the trace_marker write with the pid that is being woken by sched_waking. -After running cyclictest again with the same parameters, we now have: +After running cyclictest again with the same parameters, we now have:: # cat events/synthetic/latency/hist -# event histogram -# -# trigger info: hist:keys=lat,common_pid:vals=hitcount:sort=lat:size=2048 [active] -# - -{ lat: 7, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 640 -{ lat: 7, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 42 -{ lat: 7, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 18 -{ lat: 7, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 166 -{ lat: 7, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 7, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 91 -{ lat: 7, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 17 -{ lat: 8, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 8296 -{ lat: 8, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 6864 -{ lat: 8, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 9464 -{ lat: 8, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 9213 -{ lat: 8, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 6246 -{ lat: 8, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 8797 -{ lat: 8, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 8771 -{ lat: 8, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 8119 -{ lat: 9, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1519 -{ lat: 9, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 2346 -{ lat: 9, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 2841 -{ lat: 9, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1846 -{ lat: 9, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 3861 -{ lat: 9, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1210 -{ lat: 9, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 2762 -{ lat: 9, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 4247 -{ lat: 10, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 16 -{ lat: 10, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 333 -{ lat: 10, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 16 -{ lat: 10, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 168 -{ lat: 10, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 240 -{ lat: 10, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 28 -{ lat: 10, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 95 -{ lat: 10, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 18 -{ lat: 11, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 11, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 11, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 221 -{ lat: 11, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 76 -{ lat: 11, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 26 -{ lat: 11, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 125 -{ lat: 11, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 12, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 12, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 12, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 90 -{ lat: 12, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 12, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 12, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 122 -{ lat: 13, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 12 -{ lat: 13, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 13, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 32 -{ lat: 13, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 13, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 13, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 13, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 61 -{ lat: 14, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 14, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 14, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 14, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 62 -{ lat: 14, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 19 -{ lat: 14, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 33 -{ lat: 14, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 14, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 15, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 15, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 25 -{ lat: 15, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 11 -{ lat: 15, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 15, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 15, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 15, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 15, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 16, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 31 -{ lat: 16, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 16, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 17, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 17, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 18, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 18, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 18, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 18, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 19, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 19, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 19, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 19, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 19, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 19, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 19, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 20, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 20, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 20, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 20, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 20, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 20, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 21, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 21, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 21, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 21, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 21, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 21, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 21, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 22, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 22, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 22, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 22, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 22, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 22, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 22, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 22, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 23, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 23, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 23, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 24, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 24, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 24, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 24, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 24, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 25, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 25, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 26, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 27, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 27, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 27, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 28, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 28, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 29, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 29, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 29, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 29, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 30, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 31, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 32, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 33, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 33, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 34, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 35, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 35, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 36, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 37, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 38, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 39, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 39, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 40, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 40, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 41, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 41, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 8 -{ lat: 42, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 42, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 43, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 43, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 4 -{ lat: 44, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 -{ lat: 45, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 46, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 -{ lat: 47, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 7 -{ lat: 48, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 48, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 9 -{ lat: 49, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 -{ lat: 50, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 50, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 51, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 -{ lat: 51, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 61, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 -{ lat: 110, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 - -Totals: - Hits: 89565 - Entries: 158 - Dropped: 0 + # event histogram + # + # trigger info: hist:keys=lat,common_pid:vals=hitcount:sort=lat:size=2048 [active] + # + + { lat: 7, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 640 + { lat: 7, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 42 + { lat: 7, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 18 + { lat: 7, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 166 + { lat: 7, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 7, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 91 + { lat: 7, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 17 + { lat: 8, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 8296 + { lat: 8, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 6864 + { lat: 8, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 9464 + { lat: 8, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 9213 + { lat: 8, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 6246 + { lat: 8, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 8797 + { lat: 8, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 8771 + { lat: 8, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 8119 + { lat: 9, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1519 + { lat: 9, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 2346 + { lat: 9, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 2841 + { lat: 9, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1846 + { lat: 9, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 3861 + { lat: 9, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1210 + { lat: 9, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 2762 + { lat: 9, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 4247 + { lat: 10, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 16 + { lat: 10, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 333 + { lat: 10, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 16 + { lat: 10, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 168 + { lat: 10, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 240 + { lat: 10, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 28 + { lat: 10, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 95 + { lat: 10, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 18 + { lat: 11, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 11, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 11, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 221 + { lat: 11, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 76 + { lat: 11, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 26 + { lat: 11, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 125 + { lat: 11, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 12, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 12, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 12, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 90 + { lat: 12, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 12, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 12, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 122 + { lat: 13, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 12 + { lat: 13, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 13, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 32 + { lat: 13, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 13, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 13, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 13, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 61 + { lat: 14, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 14, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 14, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 14, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 62 + { lat: 14, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 19 + { lat: 14, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 33 + { lat: 14, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 14, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 15, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 15, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 25 + { lat: 15, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 11 + { lat: 15, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 15, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 15, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 15, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 15, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 16, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 31 + { lat: 16, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 16, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 17, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 17, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 18, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 18, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 18, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 18, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 19, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 19, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 19, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 19, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 19, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 19, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 19, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 20, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 20, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 20, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 20, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 20, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 20, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 21, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 21, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 21, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 21, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 21, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 21, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 21, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 22, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 22, common_pid: 2303 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 22, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 22, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 22, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 22, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 22, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 22, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 23, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 23, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 23, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 24, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 24, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 24, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 24, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 24, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 25, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 25, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 26, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 27, common_pid: 2305 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 27, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 27, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 28, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 28, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 29, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 29, common_pid: 2300 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 29, common_pid: 2306 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 29, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 30, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 31, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 32, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 33, common_pid: 2299 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 33, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 34, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 35, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 35, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 36, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 37, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 38, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 39, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 39, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 40, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 40, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 41, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 41, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 8 + { lat: 42, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 42, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 43, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 43, common_pid: 2304 } hitcount: 4 + { lat: 44, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 6 + { lat: 45, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 46, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 5 + { lat: 47, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 7 + { lat: 48, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 48, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 9 + { lat: 49, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 3 + { lat: 50, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 50, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 51, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 2 + { lat: 51, common_pid: 2301 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 61, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 + { lat: 110, common_pid: 2302 } hitcount: 1 + + Totals: + Hits: 89565 + Entries: 158 + Dropped: 0 This doesn't tell us any information about how late cyclictest may have woken up, but it does show us a nice histogram of how long it took from diff --git a/Documentation/trace/index.rst b/Documentation/trace/index.rst index b58c10b04e27..306997941ba1 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/index.rst @@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ Linux Tracing Technologies events-nmi events-msr mmiotrace + histogram hwlat_detector intel_th stm diff --git a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst index 3e0f971b12de..8bfc75c90806 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.rst @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ To enable this feature, build your kernel with CONFIG_KPROBE_EVENTS=y. Similar to the events tracer, this doesn't need to be activated via current_tracer. Instead of that, add probe points via /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/kprobe_events, and enable it via -/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kprobes/<EVENT>/enabled. +/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kprobes/<EVENT>/enable. Synopsis of kprobe_events @@ -81,9 +81,9 @@ Per-probe event filtering feature allows you to set different filter on each probe and gives you what arguments will be shown in trace buffer. If an event name is specified right after 'p:' or 'r:' in kprobe_events, it adds an event under tracing/events/kprobes/<EVENT>, at the directory you can see 'id', -'enabled', 'format' and 'filter'. +'enable', 'format', 'filter' and 'trigger'. -enabled: +enable: You can enable/disable the probe by writing 1 or 0 on it. format: @@ -95,6 +95,9 @@ filter: id: This shows the id of this probe event. +trigger: + This allows to install trigger commands which are executed when the event is + hit (for details, see Documentation/trace/events.rst, section 6). Event Profiling --------------- diff --git a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst index 98d3f692957a..d0822811527a 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/uprobetracer.rst @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ To enable this feature, build your kernel with CONFIG_UPROBE_EVENTS=y. Similar to the kprobe-event tracer, this doesn't need to be activated via current_tracer. Instead of that, add probe points via /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/uprobe_events, and enable it via -/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/uprobes/<EVENT>/enabled. +/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/uprobes/<EVENT>/enable. However unlike kprobe-event tracer, the uprobe event interface expects the user to calculate the offset of the probepoint in the object. diff --git a/Documentation/translations/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7f77c52d33aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +.. _translations: + +============ +Translations +============ + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + zh_CN/index + it_IT/index + ko_KR/index + ja_JP/index diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/disclaimer-ita.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/disclaimer-ita.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d68e52de6a5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/disclaimer-ita.rst @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +:orphan: + +.. note:: + This document is maintained by Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it>. + If you find any difference between this document and the original file or a + problem with the translation, please contact the maintainer of this file. + Following people helped to translate or review: + Alessia Mantegazza <amantegazza@vaga.pv.it> + +.. warning:: + The purpose of this file is to be easier to read and understand for Italian + speakers and is not intended as a fork. So, if you have any comments or + updates for this file please try to update the original English file first. diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7a6562b547ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst + +.. note:: Per leggere la documentazione originale in inglese: + :ref:`Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst <doc_guide>` + +.. _it_doc_guide: + +========================================== +Come scrivere la documentazione del kernel +========================================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + sphinx.rst + kernel-doc.rst + parse-headers.rst + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2bf1c1e2f394 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/kernel-doc.rst @@ -0,0 +1,554 @@ +.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst + +.. note:: Per leggere la documentazione originale in inglese: + :ref:`Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst <doc_guide>` + +.. _it_kernel_doc: + +Scrivere i commenti in kernel-doc +================================= + +Nei file sorgenti del kernel Linux potrete trovare commenti di documentazione +strutturanti secondo il formato kernel-doc. Essi possono descrivere funzioni, +tipi di dati, e l'architettura del codice. + +.. note:: Il formato kernel-doc può sembrare simile a gtk-doc o Doxygen ma + in realtà è molto differente per ragioni storiche. I sorgenti del kernel + contengono decine di migliaia di commenti kernel-doc. Siete pregati + d'attenervi allo stile qui descritto. + +La struttura kernel-doc è estratta a partire dai commenti; da questi viene +generato il `dominio Sphinx per il C`_ con un'adeguata descrizione per le +funzioni ed i tipi di dato con i loro relativi collegamenti. Le descrizioni +vengono filtrare per cercare i riferimenti ed i marcatori. + +Vedere di seguito per maggiori dettagli. + +.. _`dominio Sphinx per il C`: http://www.sphinx-doc.org/en/stable/domains.html + +Tutte le funzioni esportate verso i moduli esterni utilizzando +``EXPORT_SYMBOL`` o ``EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL`` dovrebbero avere un commento +kernel-doc. Quando l'intenzione è di utilizzarle nei moduli, anche le funzioni +e le strutture dati nei file d'intestazione dovrebbero avere dei commenti +kernel-doc. + +È considerata una buona pratica quella di fornire una documentazione formattata +secondo kernel-doc per le funzioni che sono visibili da altri file del kernel +(ovvero, che non siano dichiarate utilizzando ``static``). Raccomandiamo, +inoltre, di fornire una documentazione kernel-doc anche per procedure private +(ovvero, dichiarate "static") al fine di fornire una struttura più coerente +dei sorgenti. Quest'ultima raccomandazione ha una priorità più bassa ed è a +discrezione dal manutentore (MAINTAINER) del file sorgente. + + + +Sicuramente la documentazione formattata con kernel-doc è necessaria per +le funzioni che sono esportate verso i moduli esterni utilizzando +``EXPORT_SYMBOL`` o ``EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL``. + +Cerchiamo anche di fornire una documentazione formattata secondo kernel-doc +per le funzioni che sono visibili da altri file del kernel (ovvero, che non +siano dichiarate utilizzando "static") + +Raccomandiamo, inoltre, di fornire una documentazione formattata con kernel-doc +anche per procedure private (ovvero, dichiarate "static") al fine di fornire +una struttura più coerente dei sorgenti. Questa raccomandazione ha una priorità +più bassa ed è a discrezione dal manutentore (MAINTAINER) del file sorgente. + +Le strutture dati visibili nei file di intestazione dovrebbero essere anch'esse +documentate utilizzando commenti formattati con kernel-doc. + +Come formattare i commenti kernel-doc +------------------------------------- + +I commenti kernel-doc iniziano con il marcatore ``/**``. Il programma +``kernel-doc`` estrarrà i commenti marchiati in questo modo. Il resto +del commento è formattato come un normale commento multilinea, ovvero +con un asterisco all'inizio d'ogni riga e che si conclude con ``*/`` +su una riga separata. + +I commenti kernel-doc di funzioni e tipi dovrebbero essere posizionati +appena sopra la funzione od il tipo che descrivono. Questo allo scopo di +aumentare la probabilità che chi cambia il codice si ricordi di aggiornare +anche la documentazione. I commenti kernel-doc di tipo più generale possono +essere posizionati ovunque nel file. + +Al fine di verificare che i commenti siano formattati correttamente, potete +eseguire il programma ``kernel-doc`` con un livello di verbosità alto e senza +che questo produca alcuna documentazione. Per esempio:: + + scripts/kernel-doc -v -none drivers/foo/bar.c + +Il formato della documentazione è verificato della procedura di generazione +del kernel quando viene richiesto di effettuare dei controlli extra con GCC:: + + make W=n + +Documentare le funzioni +------------------------ + +Generalmente il formato di un commento kernel-doc per funzioni e +macro simil-funzioni è il seguente:: + + /** + * function_name() - Brief description of function. + * @arg1: Describe the first argument. + * @arg2: Describe the second argument. + * One can provide multiple line descriptions + * for arguments. + * + * A longer description, with more discussion of the function function_name() + * that might be useful to those using or modifying it. Begins with an + * empty comment line, and may include additional embedded empty + * comment lines. + * + * The longer description may have multiple paragraphs. + * + * Context: Describes whether the function can sleep, what locks it takes, + * releases, or expects to be held. It can extend over multiple + * lines. + * Return: Describe the return value of foobar. + * + * The return value description can also have multiple paragraphs, and should + * be placed at the end of the comment block. + */ + +La descrizione introduttiva (*brief description*) che segue il nome della +funzione può continuare su righe successive e termina con la descrizione di +un argomento, una linea di commento vuota, oppure la fine del commento. + +Parametri delle funzioni +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Ogni argomento di una funzione dovrebbe essere descritto in ordine, subito +dopo la descrizione introduttiva. Non lasciare righe vuote né fra la +descrizione introduttiva e quella degli argomenti, né fra gli argomenti. + +Ogni ``@argument:`` può estendersi su più righe. + +.. note:: + + Se la descrizione di ``@argument:`` si estende su più righe, + la continuazione dovrebbe iniziare alla stessa colonna della riga + precedente:: + + * @argument: some long description + * that continues on next lines + + or:: + + * @argument: + * some long description + * that continues on next lines + +Se una funzione ha un numero variabile di argomento, la sua descrizione +dovrebbe essere scritta con la notazione kernel-doc:: + + * @...: description + +Contesto delle funzioni +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Il contesto in cui le funzioni vengono chiamate viene descritto in una +sezione chiamata ``Context``. Questo dovrebbe informare sulla possibilità +che una funzione dorma (*sleep*) o che possa essere chiamata in un contesto +d'interruzione, così come i *lock* che prende, rilascia e che si aspetta che +vengano presi dal chiamante. + +Esempi:: + + * Context: Any context. + * Context: Any context. Takes and releases the RCU lock. + * Context: Any context. Expects <lock> to be held by caller. + * Context: Process context. May sleep if @gfp flags permit. + * Context: Process context. Takes and releases <mutex>. + * Context: Softirq or process context. Takes and releases <lock>, BH-safe. + * Context: Interrupt context. + +Valore di ritorno +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Il valore di ritorno, se c'è, viene descritto in una sezione dedicata di nome +``Return``. + +.. note:: + + #) La descrizione multiriga non riconosce il termine d'una riga, per cui + se provate a formattare bene il vostro testo come nel seguente esempio:: + + * Return: + * 0 - OK + * -EINVAL - invalid argument + * -ENOMEM - out of memory + + le righe verranno unite e il risultato sarà:: + + Return: 0 - OK -EINVAL - invalid argument -ENOMEM - out of memory + + Quindi, se volete che le righe vengano effettivamente generate, dovete + utilizzare una lista ReST, ad esempio:: + + * Return: + * * 0 - OK to runtime suspend the device + * * -EBUSY - Device should not be runtime suspended + + #) Se il vostro testo ha delle righe che iniziano con una frase seguita dai + due punti, allora ognuna di queste frasi verrà considerata come il nome + di una nuova sezione, e probabilmente non produrrà gli effetti desiderati. + +Documentare strutture, unioni ed enumerazioni +--------------------------------------------- + +Generalmente il formato di un commento kernel-doc per struct, union ed enum è:: + + /** + * struct struct_name - Brief description. + * @member1: Description of member1. + * @member2: Description of member2. + * One can provide multiple line descriptions + * for members. + * + * Description of the structure. + */ + +Nell'esempio qui sopra, potete sostituire ``struct`` con ``union`` o ``enum`` +per descrivere unioni ed enumerati. ``member`` viene usato per indicare i +membri di strutture ed unioni, ma anche i valori di un tipo enumerato. + +La descrizione introduttiva (*brief description*) che segue il nome della +funzione può continuare su righe successive e termina con la descrizione di +un argomento, una linea di commento vuota, oppure la fine del commento. + +Membri +~~~~~~ + +I membri di strutture, unioni ed enumerati devo essere documentati come i +parametri delle funzioni; seguono la descrizione introduttiva e possono +estendersi su più righe. + +All'interno d'una struttura o d'un unione, potete utilizzare le etichette +``private:`` e ``public:``. I campi che sono nell'area ``private:`` non +verranno inclusi nella documentazione finale. + +Le etichette ``private:`` e ``public:`` devono essere messe subito dopo +il marcatore di un commento ``/*``. Opzionalmente, possono includere commenti +fra ``:`` e il marcatore di fine commento ``*/``. + +Esempio:: + + /** + * struct my_struct - short description + * @a: first member + * @b: second member + * @d: fourth member + * + * Longer description + */ + struct my_struct { + int a; + int b; + /* private: internal use only */ + int c; + /* public: the next one is public */ + int d; + }; + +Strutture ed unioni annidate +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +È possibile documentare strutture ed unioni annidate, ad esempio:: + + /** + * struct nested_foobar - a struct with nested unions and structs + * @memb1: first member of anonymous union/anonymous struct + * @memb2: second member of anonymous union/anonymous struct + * @memb3: third member of anonymous union/anonymous struct + * @memb4: fourth member of anonymous union/anonymous struct + * @bar: non-anonymous union + * @bar.st1: struct st1 inside @bar + * @bar.st2: struct st2 inside @bar + * @bar.st1.memb1: first member of struct st1 on union bar + * @bar.st1.memb2: second member of struct st1 on union bar + * @bar.st2.memb1: first member of struct st2 on union bar + * @bar.st2.memb2: second member of struct st2 on union bar + */ + struct nested_foobar { + /* Anonymous union/struct*/ + union { + struct { + int memb1; + int memb2; + } + struct { + void *memb3; + int memb4; + } + } + union { + struct { + int memb1; + int memb2; + } st1; + struct { + void *memb1; + int memb2; + } st2; + } bar; + }; + +.. note:: + + #) Quando documentate una struttura od unione annidata, ad esempio + di nome ``foo``, il suo campo ``bar`` dev'essere documentato + usando ``@foo.bar:`` + #) Quando la struttura od unione annidata è anonima, il suo campo + ``bar`` dev'essere documentato usando ``@bar:`` + +Commenti in linea per la documentazione dei membri +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +I membri d'una struttura possono essere documentati in linea all'interno +della definizione stessa. Ci sono due stili: una singola riga di commento +che inizia con ``/**`` e finisce con ``*/``; commenti multi riga come +qualsiasi altro commento kernel-doc:: + + /** + * struct foo - Brief description. + * @foo: The Foo member. + */ + struct foo { + int foo; + /** + * @bar: The Bar member. + */ + int bar; + /** + * @baz: The Baz member. + * + * Here, the member description may contain several paragraphs. + */ + int baz; + union { + /** @foobar: Single line description. */ + int foobar; + }; + /** @bar2: Description for struct @bar2 inside @foo */ + struct { + /** + * @bar2.barbar: Description for @barbar inside @foo.bar2 + */ + int barbar; + } bar2; + }; + + +Documentazione dei tipi di dato +------------------------------- +Generalmente il formato di un commento kernel-doc per typedef è +il seguente:: + + /** + * typedef type_name - Brief description. + * + * Description of the type. + */ + +Anche i tipi di dato per prototipi di funzione possono essere documentati:: + + /** + * typedef type_name - Brief description. + * @arg1: description of arg1 + * @arg2: description of arg2 + * + * Description of the type. + * + * Context: Locking context. + * Return: Meaning of the return value. + */ + typedef void (*type_name)(struct v4l2_ctrl *arg1, void *arg2); + +Marcatori e riferimenti +----------------------- + +All'interno dei commenti di tipo kernel-doc vengono riconosciuti i seguenti +*pattern* che vengono convertiti in marcatori reStructuredText ed in riferimenti +del `dominio Sphinx per il C`_. + +.. attention:: Questi sono riconosciuti **solo** all'interno di commenti + kernel-doc, e **non** all'interno di documenti reStructuredText. + +``funcname()`` + Riferimento ad una funzione. + +``@parameter`` + Nome di un parametro di una funzione (nessun riferimento, solo formattazione). + +``%CONST`` + Il nome di una costante (nessun riferimento, solo formattazione) + +````literal```` + Un blocco di testo che deve essere riportato così com'è. La rappresentazione + finale utilizzerà caratteri a ``spaziatura fissa``. + + Questo è utile se dovete utilizzare caratteri speciali che altrimenti + potrebbero assumere un significato diverso in kernel-doc o in reStructuredText + + Questo è particolarmente utile se dovete scrivere qualcosa come ``%ph`` + all'interno della descrizione di una funzione. + +``$ENVVAR`` + Il nome di una variabile d'ambiente (nessun riferimento, solo formattazione). + +``&struct name`` + Riferimento ad una struttura. + +``&enum name`` + Riferimento ad un'enumerazione. + +``&typedef name`` + Riferimento ad un tipo di dato. + +``&struct_name->member`` or ``&struct_name.member`` + Riferimento ad un membro di una struttura o di un'unione. Il riferimento sarà + la struttura o l'unione, non il memembro. + +``&name`` + Un generico riferimento ad un tipo. Usate, preferibilmente, il riferimento + completo come descritto sopra. Questo è dedicato ai commenti obsoleti. + +Riferimenti usando reStructuredText +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Per fare riferimento a funzioni e tipi di dato definiti nei commenti kernel-doc +all'interno dei documenti reStructuredText, utilizzate i riferimenti dal +`dominio Sphinx per il C`_. Per esempio:: + + See function :c:func:`foo` and struct/union/enum/typedef :c:type:`bar`. + +Nonostante il riferimento ai tipi di dato funzioni col solo nome, +ovvero senza specificare struct/union/enum/typedef, potreste preferire il +seguente:: + + See :c:type:`struct foo <foo>`. + See :c:type:`union bar <bar>`. + See :c:type:`enum baz <baz>`. + See :c:type:`typedef meh <meh>`. + +Questo produce dei collegamenti migliori, ed è in linea con il modo in cui +kernel-doc gestisce i riferimenti. + +Per maggiori informazioni, siete pregati di consultare la documentazione +del `dominio Sphinx per il C`_. + +Commenti per una documentazione generale +---------------------------------------- + +Al fine d'avere il codice ed i commenti nello stesso file, potete includere +dei blocchi di documentazione kernel-doc con un formato libero invece +che nel formato specifico per funzioni, strutture, unioni, enumerati o tipi +di dato. Per esempio, questo tipo di commento potrebbe essere usato per la +spiegazione delle operazioni di un driver o di una libreria + +Questo s'ottiene utilizzando la parola chiave ``DOC:`` a cui viene associato +un titolo. + +Generalmente il formato di un commento generico o di visione d'insieme è +il seguente:: + + /** + * DOC: Theory of Operation + * + * The whizbang foobar is a dilly of a gizmo. It can do whatever you + * want it to do, at any time. It reads your mind. Here's how it works. + * + * foo bar splat + * + * The only drawback to this gizmo is that is can sometimes damage + * hardware, software, or its subject(s). + */ + +Il titolo che segue ``DOC:`` funziona da intestazione all'interno del file +sorgente, ma anche come identificatore per l'estrazione di questi commenti di +documentazione. Quindi, il titolo dev'essere unico all'interno del file. + +Includere i commenti di tipo kernel-doc +======================================= + +I commenti di documentazione possono essere inclusi in un qualsiasi documento +di tipo reStructuredText mediante l'apposita direttiva nell'estensione +kernel-doc per Sphinx. + +Le direttive kernel-doc sono nel formato:: + + .. kernel-doc:: source + :option: + +Il campo *source* è il percorso ad un file sorgente, relativo alla cartella +principale dei sorgenti del kernel. La direttiva supporta le seguenti opzioni: + +export: *[source-pattern ...]* + Include la documentazione per tutte le funzioni presenti nel file sorgente + (*source*) che sono state esportate utilizzando ``EXPORT_SYMBOL`` o + ``EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL`` in *source* o in qualsiasi altro *source-pattern* + specificato. + + Il campo *source-patter* è utile quando i commenti kernel-doc sono stati + scritti nei file d'intestazione, mentre ``EXPORT_SYMBOL`` e + ``EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL`` si trovano vicino alla definizione delle funzioni. + + Esempi:: + + .. kernel-doc:: lib/bitmap.c + :export: + + .. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h + :export: net/mac80211/*.c + +internal: *[source-pattern ...]* + Include la documentazione per tutte le funzioni ed i tipi presenti nel file + sorgente (*source*) che **non** sono stati esportati utilizzando + ``EXPORT_SYMBOL`` o ``EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL`` né in *source* né in qualsiasi + altro *source-pattern* specificato. + + Esempio:: + + .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_audio.c + :internal: + +doc: *title* + Include la documentazione del paragrafo ``DOC:`` identificato dal titolo + (*title*) all'interno del file sorgente (*source*). Gli spazi in *title* sono + permessi; non virgolettate *title*. Il campo *title* è utilizzato per + identificare un paragrafo e per questo non viene incluso nella documentazione + finale. Verificate d'avere l'intestazione appropriata nei documenti + reStructuredText. + + Esempio:: + + .. kernel-doc:: drivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_audio.c + :doc: High Definition Audio over HDMI and Display Port + +functions: *function* *[...]* + Dal file sorgente (*source*) include la documentazione per le funzioni + elencate (*function*). + + Esempio:: + + .. kernel-doc:: lib/bitmap.c + :functions: bitmap_parselist bitmap_parselist_user + +Senza alcuna opzione, la direttiva kernel-doc include tutti i commenti di +documentazione presenti nel file sorgente (*source*). + +L'estensione kernel-doc fa parte dei sorgenti del kernel, la si può trovare +in ``Documentation/sphinx/kerneldoc.py``. Internamente, viene utilizzato +lo script ``scripts/kernel-doc`` per estrarre i commenti di documentazione +dai file sorgenti. + +Come utilizzare kernel-doc per generare pagine man +-------------------------------------------------- + +Se volete utilizzare kernel-doc solo per generare delle pagine man, potete +farlo direttamente dai sorgenti del kernel:: + + $ scripts/kernel-doc -man $(git grep -l '/\*\*' -- :^Documentation :^tools) | scripts/split-man.pl /tmp/man diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/parse-headers.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/parse-headers.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b38918ca637e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/parse-headers.rst @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst + +.. note:: Per leggere la documentazione originale in inglese: + :ref:`Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst <doc_guide>` + +========================================= +Includere gli i file di intestazione uAPI +========================================= + +Qualche volta è utile includere dei file di intestazione e degli esempi di codice C +al fine di descrivere l'API per lo spazio utente e per generare dei riferimenti +fra il codice e la documentazione. Aggiungere i riferimenti ai file dell'API +dello spazio utente ha ulteriori vantaggi: Sphinx genererà dei messaggi +d'avviso se un simbolo non viene trovato nella documentazione. Questo permette +di mantenere allineate la documentazione della uAPI (API spazio utente) +con le modifiche del kernel. +Il programma :ref:`parse_headers.pl <it_parse_headers>` genera questi riferimenti. +Esso dev'essere invocato attraverso un Makefile, mentre si genera la +documentazione. Per avere un esempio su come utilizzarlo all'interno del kernel +consultate ``Documentation/media/Makefile``. + +.. _it_parse_headers: + +parse_headers.pl +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +NOME +**** + + +parse_headers.pl - analizza i file C al fine di identificare funzioni, +strutture, enumerati e definizioni, e creare riferimenti per Sphinx + +SINTASSI +******** + + +\ **parse_headers.pl**\ [<options>] <C_FILE> <OUT_FILE> [<EXCEPTIONS_FILE>] + +Dove <options> può essere: --debug, --usage o --help. + + +OPZIONI +******* + + + +\ **--debug**\ + + Lo script viene messo in modalità verbosa, utile per il debugging. + + +\ **--usage**\ + + Mostra un messaggio d'aiuto breve e termina. + + +\ **--help**\ + + Mostra un messaggio d'aiuto dettagliato e termina. + + +DESCRIZIONE +*********** + +Converte un file d'intestazione o un file sorgente C (C_FILE) in un testo +ReStructuredText incluso mediante il blocco ..parsed-literal +con riferimenti alla documentazione che descrive l'API. Opzionalmente, +il programma accetta anche un altro file (EXCEPTIONS_FILE) che +descrive quali elementi debbano essere ignorati o il cui riferimento +deve puntare ad elemento diverso dal predefinito. + +Il file generato sarà disponibile in (OUT_FILE). + +Il programma è capace di identificare *define*, funzioni, strutture, +tipi di dato, enumerati e valori di enumerati, e di creare i riferimenti +per ognuno di loro. Inoltre, esso è capace di distinguere le #define +utilizzate per specificare i comandi ioctl di Linux. + +Il file EXCEPTIONS_FILE contiene due tipi di dichiarazioni: +\ **ignore**\ o \ **replace**\ . + +La sintassi per ignore è: + +ignore \ **tipo**\ \ **nome**\ + +La dichiarazione \ **ignore**\ significa che non verrà generato alcun +riferimento per il simbolo \ **name**\ di tipo \ **tipo**\ . + + +La sintassi per replace è: + +replace \ **tipo**\ \ **nome**\ \ **nuovo_valore**\ + +La dichiarazione \ **replace**\ significa che verrà generato un +riferimento per il simbolo \ **name**\ di tipo \ **tipo**\ , ma, invece +di utilizzare il valore predefinito, verrà utilizzato il valore +\ **nuovo_valore**\ . + +Per entrambe le dichiarazioni, il \ **tipo**\ può essere uno dei seguenti: + + +\ **ioctl**\ + + La dichiarazione ignore o replace verrà applicata su definizioni di ioctl + come la seguente: + + #define VIDIOC_DBG_S_REGISTER _IOW('V', 79, struct v4l2_dbg_register) + + + +\ **define**\ + + La dichiarazione ignore o replace verrà applicata su una qualsiasi #define + trovata in C_FILE. + + + +\ **typedef**\ + + La dichiarazione ignore o replace verrà applicata ad una dichiarazione typedef + in C_FILE. + + + +\ **struct**\ + + La dichiarazione ignore o replace verrà applicata ai nomi di strutture + in C_FILE. + + + +\ **enum**\ + + La dichiarazione ignore o replace verrà applicata ai nomi di enumerati + in C_FILE. + + + +\ **symbol**\ + + La dichiarazione ignore o replace verrà applicata ai nomi di valori di + enumerati in C_FILE. + + Per le dichiarazioni di tipo replace, il campo \ **new_value**\ utilizzerà + automaticamente i riferimenti :c:type: per \ **typedef**\ , \ **enum**\ e + \ **struct**\. Invece, utilizzerà :ref: per \ **ioctl**\ , \ **define**\ e + \ **symbol**\. Il tipo di riferimento può essere definito esplicitamente + nella dichiarazione stessa. + + +ESEMPI +****** + + +ignore define _VIDEODEV2_H + + +Ignora una definizione #define _VIDEODEV2_H nel file C_FILE. + +ignore symbol PRIVATE + + +In un enumerato come il seguente: + +enum foo { BAR1, BAR2, PRIVATE }; + +Non genererà alcun riferimento per \ **PRIVATE**\ . + +replace symbol BAR1 :c:type:\`foo\` +replace symbol BAR2 :c:type:\`foo\` + + +In un enumerato come il seguente: + +enum foo { BAR1, BAR2, PRIVATE }; + +Genererà un riferimento ai valori BAR1 e BAR2 dal simbolo foo nel dominio C. + + +BUGS +**** + +Riferire ogni malfunzionamento a Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@s-opensource.com> + + +COPYRIGHT +********* + + +Copyright (c) 2016 by Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@s-opensource.com>. + +Licenza GPLv2: GNU GPL version 2 <http://gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html>. + +Questo è software libero: siete liberi di cambiarlo e ridistribuirlo. +Non c'è alcuna garanzia, nei limiti permessi dalla legge. diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..474b7e127893 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/doc-guide/sphinx.rst @@ -0,0 +1,457 @@ +.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst + +.. note:: Per leggere la documentazione originale in inglese: + :ref:`Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst <doc_guide>` + +Introduzione +============ + +Il kernel Linux usa `Sphinx`_ per la generazione della documentazione a partire +dai file `reStructuredText`_ che si trovano nella cartella ``Documentation``. +Per generare la documentazione in HTML o PDF, usate comandi ``make htmldocs`` o +``make pdfdocs``. La documentazione così generata sarà disponibile nella +cartella ``Documentation/output``. + +.. _Sphinx: http://www.sphinx-doc.org/ +.. _reStructuredText: http://docutils.sourceforge.net/rst.html + +I file reStructuredText possono contenere delle direttive che permettono di +includere i commenti di documentazione, o di tipo kernel-doc, dai file +sorgenti. +Solitamente questi commenti sono utilizzati per descrivere le funzioni, i tipi +e l'architettura del codice. I commenti di tipo kernel-doc hanno una struttura +e formato speciale, ma a parte questo vengono processati come reStructuredText. + +Inoltre, ci sono migliaia di altri documenti in formato testo sparsi nella +cartella ``Documentation``. Alcuni di questi verranno probabilmente convertiti, +nel tempo, in formato reStructuredText, ma la maggior parte di questi rimarranno +in formato testo. + +.. _it_sphinx_install: + +Installazione Sphinx +==================== + +I marcatori ReST utilizzati nei file in Documentation/ sono pensati per essere +processati da ``Sphinx`` nella versione 1.3 o superiore. Se desiderate produrre +un documento PDF è raccomandato l'utilizzo di una versione superiore alle 1.4.6. + +Esiste uno script che verifica i requisiti Sphinx. Per ulteriori dettagli +consultate :ref:`it_sphinx-pre-install`. + +La maggior parte delle distribuzioni Linux forniscono Sphinx, ma l'insieme dei +programmi e librerie è fragile e non è raro che dopo un aggiornamento di +Sphinx, o qualche altro pacchetto Python, la documentazione non venga più +generata correttamente. + +Un modo per evitare questo genere di problemi è quello di utilizzare una +versione diversa da quella fornita dalla vostra distribuzione. Per fare questo, +vi raccomandiamo di installare Sphinx dentro ad un ambiente virtuale usando +``virtualenv-3`` o ``virtualenv`` a seconda di come Python 3 è stato +pacchettizzato dalla vostra distribuzione. + +.. note:: + + #) Le versioni di Sphinx inferiori alla 1.5 non funzionano bene + con il pacchetto Python docutils versione 0.13.1 o superiore. + Se volete usare queste versioni, allora dovere eseguire + ``pip install 'docutils==0.12'``. + + #) Viene raccomandato l'uso del tema RTD per la documentazione in HTML. + A seconda della versione di Sphinx, potrebbe essere necessaria + l'installazione tramite il comando ``pip install sphinx_rtd_theme``. + + #) Alcune pagine ReST contengono delle formule matematiche. A causa del + modo in cui Sphinx funziona, queste espressioni sono scritte + utilizzando LaTeX. Per una corretta interpretazione, è necessario aver + installato texlive con i pacchetti amdfonts e amsmath. + +Riassumendo, se volete installare la versione 1.4.9 di Sphinx dovete eseguire:: + + $ virtualenv sphinx_1.4 + $ . sphinx_1.4/bin/activate + (sphinx_1.4) $ pip install -r Documentation/sphinx/requirements.txt + +Dopo aver eseguito ``. sphinx_1.4/bin/activate``, il prompt cambierà per +indicare che state usando il nuovo ambiente. Se aprite un nuova sessione, +prima di generare la documentazione, dovrete rieseguire questo comando per +rientrare nell'ambiente virtuale. + +Generazione d'immagini +---------------------- + +Il meccanismo che genera la documentazione del kernel contiene un'estensione +capace di gestire immagini in formato Graphviz e SVG (per maggior informazioni +vedere :ref:`it_sphinx_kfigure`). + +Per far si che questo funzioni, dovete installare entrambe i pacchetti +Graphviz e ImageMagick. Il sistema di generazione della documentazione è in +grado di procedere anche se questi pacchetti non sono installati, ma il +risultato, ovviamente, non includerà le immagini. + +Generazione in PDF e LaTeX +-------------------------- + +Al momento, la generazione di questi documenti è supportata solo dalle +versioni di Sphinx superiori alla 1.4. + +Per la generazione di PDF e LaTeX, avrete bisogno anche del pacchetto +``XeLaTeX`` nella versione 3.14159265 + +Per alcune distribuzioni Linux potrebbe essere necessario installare +anche una serie di pacchetti ``texlive`` in modo da fornire il supporto +minimo per il funzionamento di ``XeLaTeX``. + +.. _it_sphinx-pre-install: + +Verificare le dipendenze Sphinx +------------------------------- + +Esiste uno script che permette di verificare automaticamente le dipendenze di +Sphinx. Se lo script riesce a riconoscere la vostra distribuzione, allora +sarà in grado di darvi dei suggerimenti su come procedere per completare +l'installazione:: + + $ ./scripts/sphinx-pre-install + Checking if the needed tools for Fedora release 26 (Twenty Six) are available + Warning: better to also install "texlive-luatex85". + You should run: + + sudo dnf install -y texlive-luatex85 + /usr/bin/virtualenv sphinx_1.4 + . sphinx_1.4/bin/activate + pip install -r Documentation/sphinx/requirements.txt + + Can't build as 1 mandatory dependency is missing at ./scripts/sphinx-pre-install line 468. + +L'impostazione predefinita prevede il controllo dei requisiti per la generazione +di documenti html e PDF, includendo anche il supporto per le immagini, le +espressioni matematiche e LaTeX; inoltre, presume che venga utilizzato un +ambiente virtuale per Python. I requisiti per generare i documenti html +sono considerati obbligatori, gli altri sono opzionali. + +Questo script ha i seguenti parametri: + +``--no-pdf`` + Disabilita i controlli per la generazione di PDF; + +``--no-virtualenv`` + Utilizza l'ambiente predefinito dal sistema operativo invece che + l'ambiente virtuale per Python; + + +Generazione della documentazione Sphinx +======================================= + +Per generare la documentazione in formato HTML o PDF si eseguono i rispettivi +comandi ``make htmldocs`` o ``make pdfdocs``. Esistono anche altri formati +in cui è possibile generare la documentazione; per maggiori informazioni +potere eseguire il comando ``make help``. +La documentazione così generata sarà disponibile nella sottocartella +``Documentation/output``. + +Ovviamente, per generare la documentazione, Sphinx (``sphinx-build``) +dev'essere installato. Se disponibile, il tema *Read the Docs* per Sphinx +verrà utilizzato per ottenere una documentazione HTML più gradevole. +Per la documentazione in formato PDF, invece, avrete bisogno di ``XeLaTeX` +e di ``convert(1)`` disponibile in ImageMagick (https://www.imagemagick.org). +Tipicamente, tutti questi pacchetti sono disponibili e pacchettizzati nelle +distribuzioni Linux. + +Per poter passare ulteriori opzioni a Sphinx potete utilizzare la variabile +make ``SPHINXOPTS``. Per esempio, se volete che Sphinx sia più verboso durante +la generazione potete usare il seguente comando ``make SPHINXOPTS=-v htmldocs``. + +Potete eliminare la documentazione generata tramite il comando +``make cleandocs``. + +Scrivere la documentazione +========================== + +Aggiungere nuova documentazione è semplice: + +1. aggiungete un file ``.rst`` nella sottocartella ``Documentation`` +2. aggiungete un riferimento ad esso nell'indice (`TOC tree`_) in + ``Documentation/index.rst``. + +.. _TOC tree: http://www.sphinx-doc.org/en/stable/markup/toctree.html + +Questo, di solito, è sufficiente per la documentazione più semplice (come +quella che state leggendo ora), ma per una documentazione più elaborata è +consigliato creare una sottocartella dedicata (o, quando possibile, utilizzarne +una già esistente). Per esempio, il sottosistema grafico è documentato nella +sottocartella ``Documentation/gpu``; questa documentazione è divisa in +diversi file ``.rst`` ed un indice ``index.rst`` (con un ``toctree`` +dedicato) a cui si fa riferimento nell'indice principale. + +Consultate la documentazione di `Sphinx`_ e `reStructuredText`_ per maggiori +informazione circa le loro potenzialità. In particolare, il +`manuale introduttivo a reStructuredText`_ di Sphinx è un buon punto da +cui cominciare. Esistono, inoltre, anche alcuni +`costruttori specifici per Sphinx`_. + +.. _`manuale introduttivo a reStructuredText`: http://www.sphinx-doc.org/en/stable/rest.html +.. _`costruttori specifici per Sphinx`: http://www.sphinx-doc.org/en/stable/markup/index.html + +Guide linea per la documentazione del kernel +-------------------------------------------- + +In questa sezione troverete alcune linee guida specifiche per la documentazione +del kernel: + +* Non esagerate con i costrutti di reStructuredText. Mantenete la + documentazione semplice. La maggior parte della documentazione dovrebbe + essere testo semplice con una strutturazione minima che permetta la + conversione in diversi formati. + +* Mantenete la strutturazione il più fedele possibile all'originale quando + convertite un documento in formato reStructuredText. + +* Aggiornate i contenuti quando convertite della documentazione, non limitatevi + solo alla formattazione. + +* Mantenete la decorazione dei livelli di intestazione come segue: + + 1. ``=`` con una linea superiore per il titolo del documento:: + + ====== + Titolo + ====== + + 2. ``=`` per i capitoli:: + + Capitoli + ======== + + 3. ``-`` per le sezioni:: + + Sezioni + ------- + + 4. ``~`` per le sottosezioni:: + + Sottosezioni + ~~~~~~~~~~~~ + + Sebbene RST non forzi alcun ordine specifico (*Piuttosto che imporre + un numero ed un ordine fisso di decorazioni, l'ordine utilizzato sarà + quello incontrato*), avere uniformità dei livelli principali rende più + semplice la lettura dei documenti. + +* Per inserire blocchi di testo con caratteri a dimensione fissa (codici di + esempio, casi d'uso, eccetera): utilizzate ``::`` quando non è necessario + evidenziare la sintassi, specialmente per piccoli frammenti; invece, + utilizzate ``.. code-block:: <language>`` per blocchi di più lunghi che + potranno beneficiare dell'avere la sintassi evidenziata. + + +Il dominio C +------------ + +Il **Dominio Sphinx C** (denominato c) è adatto alla documentazione delle API C. +Per esempio, un prototipo di una funzione: + +.. code-block:: rst + + .. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, int request ) + +Il dominio C per kernel-doc ha delle funzionalità aggiuntive. Per esempio, +potete assegnare un nuovo nome di riferimento ad una funzione con un nome +molto comune come ``open`` o ``ioctl``: + +.. code-block:: rst + + .. c:function:: int ioctl( int fd, int request ) + :name: VIDIOC_LOG_STATUS + +Il nome della funzione (per esempio ioctl) rimane nel testo ma il nome del suo +riferimento cambia da ``ioctl`` a ``VIDIOC_LOG_STATUS``. Anche la voce +nell'indice cambia in ``VIDIOC_LOG_STATUS`` e si potrà quindi fare riferimento +a questa funzione scrivendo: + +.. code-block:: rst + + :c:func:`VIDIOC_LOG_STATUS` + + +Tabelle a liste +--------------- + +Raccomandiamo l'uso delle tabelle in formato lista (*list table*). Le tabelle +in formato lista sono liste di liste. In confronto all'ASCII-art potrebbero +non apparire di facile lettura nei file in formato testo. Il loro vantaggio è +che sono facili da creare o modificare e che la differenza di una modifica è +molto più significativa perché limitata alle modifiche del contenuto. + +La ``flat-table`` è anch'essa una lista di liste simile alle ``list-table`` +ma con delle funzionalità aggiuntive: + +* column-span: col ruolo ``cspan`` una cella può essere estesa attraverso + colonne successive + +* raw-span: col ruolo ``rspan`` una cella può essere estesa attraverso + righe successive + +* auto-span: la cella più a destra viene estesa verso destra per compensare + la mancanza di celle. Con l'opzione ``:fill-cells:`` questo comportamento + può essere cambiato da *auto-span* ad *auto-fill*, il quale inserisce + automaticamente celle (vuote) invece che estendere l'ultima. + +opzioni: + +* ``:header-rows:`` [int] conta le righe di intestazione +* ``:stub-columns:`` [int] conta le colonne di stub +* ``:widths:`` [[int] [int] ... ] larghezza delle colonne +* ``:fill-cells:`` invece di estendere automaticamente una cella su quelle + mancanti, ne crea di vuote. + +ruoli: + +* ``:cspan:`` [int] colonne successive (*morecols*) +* ``:rspan:`` [int] righe successive (*morerows*) + +L'esempio successivo mostra come usare questo marcatore. Il primo livello della +nostra lista di liste è la *riga*. In una *riga* è possibile inserire solamente +la lista di celle che compongono la *riga* stessa. Fanno eccezione i *commenti* +( ``..`` ) ed i *collegamenti* (per esempio, un riferimento a +``:ref:`last row <last row>``` / :ref:`last row <it last row>`) + +.. code-block:: rst + + .. flat-table:: table title + :widths: 2 1 1 3 + + * - head col 1 + - head col 2 + - head col 3 + - head col 4 + + * - column 1 + - field 1.1 + - field 1.2 with autospan + + * - column 2 + - field 2.1 + - :rspan:`1` :cspan:`1` field 2.2 - 3.3 + + * .. _`it last row`: + + - column 3 + +Che verrà rappresentata nel seguente modo: + + .. flat-table:: table title + :widths: 2 1 1 3 + + * - head col 1 + - head col 2 + - head col 3 + - head col 4 + + * - column 1 + - field 1.1 + - field 1.2 with autospan + + * - column 2 + - field 2.1 + - :rspan:`1` :cspan:`1` field 2.2 - 3.3 + + * .. _`it last row`: + + - column 3 + +.. _it_sphinx_kfigure: + +Figure ed immagini +================== + +Se volete aggiungere un'immagine, utilizzate le direttive ``kernel-figure`` +e ``kernel-image``. Per esempio, per inserire una figura di un'immagine in +formato SVG:: + + .. kernel-figure:: ../../../doc-guide/svg_image.svg + :alt: una semplice immagine SVG + + Una semplice immagine SVG + +.. _it_svg_image_example: + +.. kernel-figure:: ../../../doc-guide/svg_image.svg + :alt: una semplice immagine SVG + + Una semplice immagine SVG + +Le direttive del kernel per figure ed immagini supportano il formato **DOT**, +per maggiori informazioni + +* DOT: http://graphviz.org/pdf/dotguide.pdf +* Graphviz: http://www.graphviz.org/content/dot-language + +Un piccolo esempio (:ref:`it_hello_dot_file`):: + + .. kernel-figure:: ../../../doc-guide/hello.dot + :alt: ciao mondo + + Esempio DOT + +.. _it_hello_dot_file: + +.. kernel-figure:: ../../../doc-guide/hello.dot + :alt: ciao mondo + + Esempio DOT + +Tramite la direttiva ``kernel-render`` è possibile aggiungere codice specifico; +ad esempio nel formato **DOT** di Graphviz.:: + + .. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: foobar digraph + :caption: Codice **DOT** (Graphviz) integrato + + digraph foo { + "bar" -> "baz"; + } + +La rappresentazione dipenderà dei programmi installati. Se avete Graphviz +installato, vedrete un'immagine vettoriale. In caso contrario, il codice grezzo +verrà rappresentato come *blocco testuale* (:ref:`it_hello_dot_render`). + +.. _it_hello_dot_render: + +.. kernel-render:: DOT + :alt: foobar digraph + :caption: Codice **DOT** (Graphviz) integrato + + digraph foo { + "bar" -> "baz"; + } + +La direttiva *render* ha tutte le opzioni della direttiva *figure*, con +l'aggiunta dell'opzione ``caption``. Se ``caption`` ha un valore allora +un nodo *figure* viene aggiunto. Altrimenti verrà aggiunto un nodo *image*. +L'opzione ``caption`` è necessaria in caso si vogliano aggiungere dei +riferimenti (:ref:`it_hello_svg_render`). + +Per la scrittura di codice **SVG**:: + + .. kernel-render:: SVG + :caption: Integrare codice **SVG** + :alt: so-nw-arrow + + <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> + <svg xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" version="1.1" ...> + ... + </svg> + +.. _it_hello_svg_render: + +.. kernel-render:: SVG + :caption: Integrare codice **SVG** + :alt: so-nw-arrow + + <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> + <svg xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + version="1.1" baseProfile="full" width="70px" height="40px" viewBox="0 0 700 400"> + <line x1="180" y1="370" x2="500" y2="50" stroke="black" stroke-width="15px"/> + <polygon points="585 0 525 25 585 50" transform="rotate(135 525 25)"/> + </svg> diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..898a7823a6f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +.. _it_linux_doc: + +=================== +Traduzione italiana +=================== + +L'obiettivo di questa traduzione è di rendere più facile la lettura e +la comprensione per chi preferisce leggere in lingua italiana. +Tenete presente che la documentazione di riferimento rimane comunque +quella in lingua inglese: :ref:`linux_doc` + +Questa traduzione cerca di essere il più fedele possibile all'originale ma +è ovvio che alcune frasi vadano trasformate: non aspettatevi una traduzione +letterale. Quando possibile, si eviteranno gli inglesismi ed al loro posto +verranno utilizzate le corrispettive parole italiane. + +Se notate che la traduzione non è più aggiornata potete contattare +direttamente il manutentore della traduzione italiana. + +Se notate che la documentazione contiene errori o dimenticanze, allora +verificate la documentazione di riferimento in lingua inglese. Se il problema +è presente anche nella documentazione di riferimento, contattate il suo +manutentore. Se avete problemi a scrivere in inglese, potete comunque +riportare il problema al manutentore della traduzione italiana. + +Manutentore della traduzione italiana: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> + +La documentazione del kernel Linux +================================== + +Questo è il livello principale della documentazione del kernel in +lingua italiana. La traduzione è incompleta, noterete degli avvisi +che vi segnaleranno la mancanza di una traduzione o di un gruppo di +traduzioni. + +Più in generale, la documentazione, come il kernel stesso, sono in +costante sviluppo; particolarmente vero in quanto stiamo lavorando +alla riorganizzazione della documentazione in modo più coerente. +I miglioramenti alla documentazione sono sempre i benvenuti; per cui, +se vuoi aiutare, iscriviti alla lista di discussione linux-doc presso +vger.kernel.org. + +Documentazione sulla licenza dei sorgenti +----------------------------------------- + +I seguenti documenti descrivono la licenza usata nei sorgenti del kernel Linux +(GPLv2), come licenziare i singoli file; inoltre troverete i riferimenti al +testo integrale della licenza. + +.. warning:: + + TODO ancora da tradurre + +Documentazione per gli utenti +----------------------------- + +I seguenti manuali sono scritti per gli *utenti* del kernel - ovvero, +coloro che cercano di farlo funzionare in modo ottimale su un dato sistema + +.. warning:: + + TODO ancora da tradurre + +Documentazione per gli sviluppatori di applicazioni +--------------------------------------------------- + +Il manuale delle API verso lo spazio utente è una collezione di documenti +che descrivono le interfacce del kernel viste dagli sviluppatori +di applicazioni. + +.. warning:: + + TODO ancora da tradurre + + +Introduzione allo sviluppo del kernel +------------------------------------- + +Questi manuali contengono informazioni su come contribuire allo sviluppo +del kernel. +Attorno al kernel Linux gira una comunità molto grande con migliaia di +sviluppatori che contribuiscono ogni anno. Come in ogni grande comunità, +sapere come le cose vengono fatte renderà il processo di integrazione delle +vostre modifiche molto più semplice + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + doc-guide/index + kernel-hacking/index + +.. warning:: + + TODO ancora da tradurre + +Documentazione della API del kernel +----------------------------------- + +Questi manuali forniscono dettagli su come funzionano i sottosistemi del +kernel dal punto di vista degli sviluppatori del kernel. Molte delle +informazioni contenute in questi manuali sono prese direttamente dai +file sorgenti, informazioni aggiuntive vengono aggiunte solo se necessarie +(o almeno ci proviamo — probabilmente *non* tutto quello che è davvero +necessario). + +.. warning:: + + TODO ancora da tradurre + +Documentazione specifica per architettura +----------------------------------------- + +Questi manuali forniscono dettagli di programmazione per le diverse +implementazioni d'architettura. + +.. warning:: + + TODO ancora da tradurre diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7178e517af0a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst @@ -0,0 +1,855 @@ +.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst + +.. note:: Per leggere la documentazione originale in inglese: + :ref:`Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst <kernel_hacking_hack>` + +:Original: :ref:`Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst <kernel_hacking_hack>` +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> + +.. _it_kernel_hacking_hack: + +================================================= +L'inaffidabile guida all'hacking del kernel Linux +================================================= + +:Author: Rusty Russell + +Introduzione +============ + +Benvenuto, gentile lettore, alla notevole ed inaffidabile guida all'hacking +del kernel Linux ad opera di Rusty. Questo documento descrive le procedure +più usate ed i concetti necessari per scrivere codice per il kernel: lo scopo +è di fornire ai programmatori C più esperti un manuale di base per sviluppo. +Eviterò dettagli implementativi: per questo abbiamo il codice, +ed ignorerò intere parti di alcune procedure. + +Prima di leggere questa guida, sappiate che non ho mai voluto scriverla, +essendo esageratamente sotto qualificato, ma ho sempre voluto leggere +qualcosa di simile, e quindi questa era l'unica via. Spero che possa +crescere e diventare un compendio di buone pratiche, punti di partenza +e generiche informazioni. + +Gli attori +========== + +In qualsiasi momento ognuna delle CPU di un sistema può essere: + +- non associata ad alcun processo, servendo un'interruzione hardware; + +- non associata ad alcun processo, servendo un softirq o tasklet; + +- in esecuzione nello spazio kernel, associata ad un processo + (contesto utente); + +- in esecuzione di un processo nello spazio utente; + +Esiste un ordine fra questi casi. Gli ultimi due possono avvicendarsi (preempt) +l'un l'altro, ma a parte questo esiste una gerarchia rigida: ognuno di questi +può avvicendarsi solo ad uno di quelli sottostanti. Per esempio, mentre un +softirq è in esecuzione su d'una CPU, nessun altro softirq può avvicendarsi +nell'esecuzione, ma un'interruzione hardware può. Ciò nonostante, le altre CPU +del sistema operano indipendentemente. + +Più avanti vedremo alcuni modi in cui dal contesto utente è possibile bloccare +le interruzioni, così da impedirne davvero il diritto di prelazione. + +Contesto utente +--------------- + +Ci si trova nel contesto utente quando si arriva da una chiamata di sistema +od altre eccezioni: come nello spazio utente, altre procedure più importanti, +o le interruzioni, possono far valere il proprio diritto di prelazione sul +vostro processo. Potete sospendere l'esecuzione chiamando :c:func:`schedule()`. + +.. note:: + + Si è sempre in contesto utente quando un modulo viene caricato o rimosso, + e durante le operazioni nello strato dei dispositivi a blocchi + (*block layer*). + +Nel contesto utente, il puntatore ``current`` (il quale indica il processo al +momento in esecuzione) è valido, e :c:func:`in_interrupt()` +(``include/linux/preempt.h``) è falsa. + +.. warning:: + + Attenzione che se avete la prelazione o i softirq disabilitati (vedere + di seguito), :c:func:`in_interrupt()` ritornerà un falso positivo. + +Interruzioni hardware (Hard IRQs) +--------------------------------- + +Temporizzatori, schede di rete e tastiere sono esempi di vero hardware +che possono produrre interruzioni in un qualsiasi momento. Il kernel esegue +i gestori d'interruzione che prestano un servizio all'hardware. Il kernel +garantisce che questi gestori non vengano mai interrotti: se una stessa +interruzione arriva, questa verrà accodata (o scartata). +Dato che durante la loro esecuzione le interruzioni vengono disabilitate, +i gestori d'interruzioni devono essere veloci: spesso si limitano +esclusivamente a notificare la presa in carico dell'interruzione, +programmare una 'interruzione software' per l'esecuzione e quindi terminare. + +Potete dire d'essere in una interruzione hardware perché :c:func:`in_irq()` +ritorna vero. + +.. warning:: + + Attenzione, questa ritornerà un falso positivo se le interruzioni + sono disabilitate (vedere di seguito). + +Contesto d'interruzione software: softirq e tasklet +--------------------------------------------------- + +Quando una chiamata di sistema sta per tornare allo spazio utente, +oppure un gestore d'interruzioni termina, qualsiasi 'interruzione software' +marcata come pendente (solitamente da un'interruzione hardware) viene +eseguita (``kernel/softirq.c``). + +La maggior parte del lavoro utile alla gestione di un'interruzione avviene qui. +All'inizio della transizione ai sistemi multiprocessore, c'erano solo i +cosiddetti 'bottom half' (BH), i quali non traevano alcun vantaggio da questi +sistemi. Non appena abbandonammo i computer raffazzonati con fiammiferi e +cicche, abbandonammo anche questa limitazione e migrammo alle interruzioni +software 'softirqs'. + +Il file ``include/linux/interrupt.h`` elenca i differenti tipi di 'softirq'. +Un tipo di softirq molto importante è il timer (``include/linux/timer.h``): +potete programmarlo per far si che esegua funzioni dopo un determinato +periodo di tempo. + +Dato che i softirq possono essere eseguiti simultaneamente su più di un +processore, spesso diventa estenuante l'averci a che fare. Per questa ragione, +i tasklet (``include/linux/interrupt.h``) vengo usati più di frequente: +possono essere registrati dinamicamente (il che significa che potete averne +quanti ne volete), e garantiscono che un qualsiasi tasklet verrà eseguito +solo su un processore alla volta, sebbene diversi tasklet possono essere +eseguiti simultaneamente. + +.. warning:: + + Il nome 'tasklet' è ingannevole: non hanno niente a che fare + con i 'processi' ('tasks'), e probabilmente hanno più a che vedere + con qualche pessima vodka che Alexey Kuznetsov si fece a quel tempo. + +Potete determinate se siete in un softirq (o tasklet) utilizzando la +macro :c:func:`in_softirq()` (``include/linux/preempt.h``). + +.. warning:: + + State attenti che questa macro ritornerà un falso positivo + se :ref:`botton half lock <it_local_bh_disable>` è bloccato. + +Alcune regole basilari +====================== + +Nessuna protezione della memoria + Se corrompete la memoria, che sia in contesto utente o d'interruzione, + la macchina si pianterà. Siete sicuri che quello che volete fare + non possa essere fatto nello spazio utente? + +Nessun numero in virgola mobile o MMX + Il contesto della FPU non è salvato; anche se siete in contesto utente + lo stato dell'FPU probabilmente non corrisponde a quello del processo + corrente: vi incasinerete con lo stato di qualche altro processo. Se + volete davvero usare la virgola mobile, allora dovrete salvare e recuperare + lo stato dell'FPU (ed evitare cambi di contesto). Generalmente è una + cattiva idea; usate l'aritmetica a virgola fissa. + +Un limite rigido dello stack + A seconda della configurazione del kernel lo stack è fra 3K e 6K per la + maggior parte delle architetture a 32-bit; è di 14K per la maggior + parte di quelle a 64-bit; e spesso è condiviso con le interruzioni, + per cui non si può usare. + Evitare profonde ricorsioni ad enormi array locali nello stack + (allocateli dinamicamente). + +Il kernel Linux è portabile + Quindi mantenetelo tale. Il vostro codice dovrebbe essere a 64-bit ed + indipendente dall'ordine dei byte (endianess) di un processore. Inoltre, + dovreste minimizzare il codice specifico per un processore; per esempio + il codice assembly dovrebbe essere incapsulato in modo pulito e minimizzato + per facilitarne la migrazione. Generalmente questo codice dovrebbe essere + limitato alla parte di kernel specifica per un'architettura. + +ioctl: non scrivere nuove chiamate di sistema +============================================= + +Una chiamata di sistema, generalmente, è scritta così:: + + asmlinkage long sys_mycall(int arg) + { + return 0; + } + +Primo, nella maggior parte dei casi non volete creare nuove chiamate di +sistema. +Create un dispositivo a caratteri ed implementate l'appropriata chiamata ioctl. +Questo meccanismo è molto più flessibile delle chiamate di sistema: esso non +dev'essere dichiarato in tutte le architetture nei file +``include/asm/unistd.h`` e ``arch/kernel/entry.S``; inoltre, è improbabile +che questo venga accettato da Linus. + +Se tutto quello che il vostro codice fa è leggere o scrivere alcuni parametri, +considerate l'implementazione di un'interfaccia :c:func:`sysfs()`. + +All'interno di una ioctl vi trovate nel contesto utente di un processo. Quando +avviene un errore dovete ritornare un valore negativo di errno (consultate +``include/uapi/asm-generic/errno-base.h``, +``include/uapi/asm-generic/errno.h`` e ``include/linux/errno.h``), altrimenti +ritornate 0. + +Dopo aver dormito dovreste verificare se ci sono stati dei segnali: il modo +Unix/Linux di gestire un segnale è di uscire temporaneamente dalla chiamata +di sistema con l'errore ``-ERESTARTSYS``. La chiamata di sistema ritornerà +al contesto utente, eseguirà il gestore del segnale e poi la vostra chiamata +di sistema riprenderà (a meno che l'utente non l'abbia disabilitata). Quindi, +dovreste essere pronti per continuare l'esecuzione, per esempio nel mezzo +della manipolazione di una struttura dati. + +:: + + if (signal_pending(current)) + return -ERESTARTSYS; + +Se dovete eseguire dei calcoli molto lunghi: pensate allo spazio utente. +Se **davvero** volete farlo nel kernel ricordatevi di verificare periodicamente +se dovete *lasciare* il processore (ricordatevi che, per ogni processore, c'è +un sistema multi-processo senza diritto di prelazione). +Esempio:: + + cond_resched(); /* Will sleep */ + +Una breve nota sulla progettazione delle interfacce: il motto dei sistemi +UNIX è "fornite meccanismi e non politiche" + +La ricetta per uno stallo +========================= + +Non è permesso invocare una procedura che potrebbe dormire, fanno eccezione +i seguenti casi: + +- Siete in un contesto utente. + +- Non trattenete alcun spinlock. + +- Avete abilitato le interruzioni (in realtà, Andy Kleen dice che + lo schedulatore le abiliterà per voi, ma probabilmente questo non è quello + che volete). + +Da tener presente che alcune funzioni potrebbero dormire implicitamente: +le più comuni sono quelle per l'accesso allo spazio utente (\*_user) e +quelle per l'allocazione della memoria senza l'opzione ``GFP_ATOMIC`` + +Dovreste sempre compilare il kernel con l'opzione ``CONFIG_DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEP`` +attiva, questa vi avviserà se infrangete una di queste regole. +Se **infrangete** le regole, allora potreste bloccare il vostro scatolotto. + +Veramente. + +Alcune delle procedure più comuni +================================= + +:c:func:`printk()` +------------------ + +Definita in ``include/linux/printk.h`` + +:c:func:`printk()` fornisce messaggi alla console, dmesg, e al demone syslog. +Essa è utile per il debugging o per la notifica di errori; può essere +utilizzata anche all'interno del contesto d'interruzione, ma usatela con +cautela: una macchina che ha la propria console inondata da messaggi diventa +inutilizzabile. La funzione utilizza un formato stringa quasi compatibile con +la printf ANSI C, e la concatenazione di una stringa C come primo argomento +per indicare la "priorità":: + + printk(KERN_INFO "i = %u\n", i); + +Consultate ``include/linux/kern_levels.h`` per gli altri valori ``KERN_``; +questi sono interpretati da syslog come livelli. Un caso speciale: +per stampare un indirizzo IP usate:: + + __be32 ipaddress; + printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %pI4\n", &ipaddress); + + +:c:func:`printk()` utilizza un buffer interno di 1K e non s'accorge di +eventuali sforamenti. Accertatevi che vi basti. + +.. note:: + + Saprete di essere un vero hacker del kernel quando inizierete a digitare + nei vostri programmi utenti le printf come se fossero printk :) + +.. note:: + + Un'altra nota a parte: la versione originale di Unix 6 aveva un commento + sopra alla funzione printf: "Printf non dovrebbe essere usata per il + chiacchiericcio". Dovreste seguire questo consiglio. + +:c:func:`copy_to_user()` / :c:func:`copy_from_user()` / :c:func:`get_user()` / :c:func:`put_user()` +--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Definite in ``include/linux/uaccess.h`` / ``asm/uaccess.h`` + +**[DORMONO]** + +:c:func:`put_user()` e :c:func:`get_user()` sono usate per ricevere ed +impostare singoli valori (come int, char, o long) da e verso lo spazio utente. +Un puntatore nello spazio utente non dovrebbe mai essere dereferenziato: i dati +dovrebbero essere copiati usando suddette procedure. Entrambe ritornano +``-EFAULT`` oppure 0. + +:c:func:`copy_to_user()` e :c:func:`copy_from_user()` sono più generiche: +esse copiano una quantità arbitraria di dati da e verso lo spazio utente. + +.. warning:: + + Al contrario di:c:func:`put_user()` e :c:func:`get_user()`, queste + funzioni ritornano la quantità di dati copiati (0 è comunque un successo). + +[Sì, questa stupida interfaccia mi imbarazza. La battaglia torna in auge anno +dopo anno. --RR] + +Le funzioni potrebbero dormire implicitamente. Queste non dovrebbero mai essere +invocate fuori dal contesto utente (non ha senso), con le interruzioni +disabilitate, o con uno spinlock trattenuto. + +:c:func:`kmalloc()`/:c:func:`kfree()` +------------------------------------- + +Definite in ``include/linux/slab.h`` + +**[POTREBBERO DORMIRE: LEGGI SOTTO]** + +Queste procedure sono utilizzate per la richiesta dinamica di un puntatore ad +un pezzo di memoria allineato, esattamente come malloc e free nello spazio +utente, ma :c:func:`kmalloc()` ha un argomento aggiuntivo per indicare alcune +opzioni. Le opzioni più importanti sono: + +``GFP_KERNEL`` + Potrebbe dormire per librarare della memoria. L'opzione fornisce il modo + più affidabile per allocare memoria, ma il suo uso è strettamente limitato + allo spazio utente. + +``GFP_ATOMIC`` + Non dorme. Meno affidabile di ``GFP_KERNEL``, ma può essere usata in un + contesto d'interruzione. Dovreste avere **davvero** una buona strategia + per la gestione degli errori in caso di mancanza di memoria. + +``GFP_DMA`` + Alloca memoria per il DMA sul bus ISA nello spazio d'indirizzamento + inferiore ai 16MB. Se non sapete cos'è allora non vi serve. + Molto inaffidabile. + +Se vedete un messaggio d'avviso per una funzione dormiente che viene chiamata +da un contesto errato, allora probabilmente avete usato una funzione +d'allocazione dormiente da un contesto d'interruzione senza ``GFP_ATOMIC``. +Dovreste correggerlo. Sbrigatevi, non cincischiate. + +Se allocate almeno ``PAGE_SIZE``(``asm/page.h`` o ``asm/page_types.h``) byte, +considerate l'uso di :c:func:`__get_free_pages()` (``include/linux/gfp.h``). +Accetta un argomento che definisce l'ordine (0 per per la dimensione di una +pagine, 1 per una doppia pagina, 2 per quattro pagine, eccetra) e le stesse +opzioni d'allocazione viste precedentemente. + +Se state allocando un numero di byte notevolemnte superiore ad una pagina +potete usare :c:func:`vmalloc()`. Essa allocherà memoria virtuale all'interno +dello spazio kernel. Questo è un blocco di memoria fisica non contiguo, ma +la MMU vi darà l'impressione che lo sia (quindi, sarà contiguo solo dal punto +di vista dei processori, non dal punto di vista dei driver dei dispositivi +esterni). +Se per qualche strana ragione avete davvero bisogno di una grossa quantità di +memoria fisica contigua, avete un problema: Linux non ha un buon supporto per +questo caso d'uso perché, dopo un po' di tempo, la frammentazione della memoria +rende l'operazione difficile. Il modo migliore per allocare un simile blocco +all'inizio dell'avvio del sistema è attraverso la procedura +:c:func:`alloc_bootmem()`. + +Prima di inventare la vostra cache per gli oggetti più usati, considerate +l'uso di una cache slab disponibile in ``include/linux/slab.h``. + +:c:func:`current()` +------------------- + +Definita in ``include/asm/current.h`` + +Questa variabile globale (in realtà una macro) contiene un puntatore alla +struttura del processo corrente, quindi è valido solo dal contesto utente. +Per esempio, quando un processo esegue una chiamata di sistema, questo +punterà alla struttura dati del processo chiamate. +Nel contesto d'interruzione in suo valore **non è NULL**. + +:c:func:`mdelay()`/:c:func:`udelay()` +------------------------------------- + +Definite in ``include/asm/delay.h`` / ``include/linux/delay.h`` + +Le funzioni :c:func:`udelay()` e :c:func:`ndelay()` possono essere utilizzate +per brevi pause. Non usate grandi valori perché rischiate d'avere un +overflow - in questo contesto la funzione :c:func:`mdelay()` è utile, +oppure considerate :c:func:`msleep()`. + +:c:func:`cpu_to_be32()`/:c:func:`be32_to_cpu()`/:c:func:`cpu_to_le32()`/:c:func:`le32_to_cpu()` +----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Definite in ``include/asm/byteorder.h`` + +La famiglia di funzioni :c:func:`cpu_to_be32()` (dove "32" può essere +sostituito da 64 o 16, e "be" con "le") forniscono un modo generico +per fare conversioni sull'ordine dei byte (endianess): esse ritornano +il valore convertito. Tutte le varianti supportano anche il processo inverso: +:c:func:`be32_to_cpu()`, eccetera. + +Queste funzioni hanno principalmente due varianti: la variante per +puntatori, come :c:func:`cpu_to_be32p(), che prende un puntatore +ad un tipo, e ritorna il valore convertito. L'altra variante per +la famiglia di conversioni "in-situ", come :c:func:`cpu_to_be32s()`, +che convertono il valore puntato da un puntatore, e ritornano void. + +:c:func:`local_irq_save()`/:c:func:`local_irq_restore()` +-------------------------------------------------------- + +Definite in ``include/linux/irqflags.h`` + +Queste funzioni abilitano e disabilitano le interruzioni hardware +sul processore locale. Entrambe sono rientranti; esse salvano lo stato +precedente nel proprio argomento ``unsigned long flags``. Se sapete +che le interruzioni sono abilite, potete semplicemente utilizzare +:c:func:`local_irq_disable()` e :c:func:`local_irq_enable()`. + +.. _it_local_bh_disable: + +:c:func:`local_bh_disable()`/:c:func:`local_bh_enable()` +-------------------------------------------------------- + +Definite in ``include/linux/bottom_half.h`` + + +Queste funzioni abilitano e disabilitano le interruzioni software +sul processore locale. Entrambe sono rientranti; se le interruzioni +software erano già state disabilitate in precedenza, rimarranno +disabilitate anche dopo aver invocato questa coppia di funzioni. +Lo scopo è di prevenire l'esecuzione di softirq e tasklet sul processore +attuale. + +:c:func:`smp_processor_id()` +---------------------------- + +Definita in ``include/linux/smp.h`` + +:c:func:`get_cpu()` nega il diritto di prelazione (quindi non potete essere +spostati su un altro processore all'improvviso) e ritorna il numero +del processore attuale, fra 0 e ``NR_CPUS``. Da notare che non è detto +che la numerazione dei processori sia continua. Quando avete terminato, +ritornate allo stato precedente con :c:func:`put_cpu()`. + +Se sapete che non dovete essere interrotti da altri processi (per esempio, +se siete in un contesto d'interruzione, o il diritto di prelazione +è disabilitato) potete utilizzare smp_processor_id(). + + +``__init``/``__exit``/``__initdata`` +------------------------------------ + +Definite in ``include/linux/init.h`` + +Dopo l'avvio, il kernel libera una sezione speciale; le funzioni marcate +con ``__init`` e le strutture dati marcate con ``__initdata`` vengono +eliminate dopo il completamento dell'avvio: in modo simile i moduli eliminano +questa memoria dopo l'inizializzazione. ``__exit`` viene utilizzato per +dichiarare che una funzione verrà utilizzata solo in fase di rimozione: +la detta funzione verrà eliminata quando il file che la contiene non è +compilato come modulo. Guardate l'header file per informazioni. Da notare che +non ha senso avere una funzione marcata come ``__init`` e al tempo stesso +esportata ai moduli utilizzando :c:func:`EXPORT_SYMBOL()` o +:c:func:`EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL()` - non funzionerà. + + +:c:func:`__initcall()`/:c:func:`module_init()` +---------------------------------------------- + +Definite in ``include/linux/init.h`` / ``include/linux/module.h`` + +Molte parti del kernel funzionano bene come moduli (componenti del kernel +caricabili dinamicamente). L'utilizzo delle macro :c:func:`module_init()` +e :c:func:`module_exit()` semplifica la scrittura di codice che può funzionare +sia come modulo, sia come parte del kernel, senza l'ausilio di #ifdef. + +La macro :c:func:`module_init()` definisce quale funzione dev'essere +chiamata quando il modulo viene inserito (se il file è stato compilato come +tale), o in fase di avvio : se il file non è stato compilato come modulo la +macro :c:func:`module_init()` diventa equivalente a :c:func:`__initcall()`, +la quale, tramite qualche magia del linker, s'assicura che la funzione venga +chiamata durante l'avvio. + +La funzione può ritornare un numero d'errore negativo per scatenare un +fallimento del caricamento (sfortunatamente, questo non ha effetto se il +modulo è compilato come parte integrante del kernel). Questa funzione è chiamata +in contesto utente con le interruzioni abilitate, quindi potrebbe dormire. + + +:c:func:`module_exit()` +----------------------- + + +Definita in ``include/linux/module.h`` + +Questa macro definisce la funzione che dev'essere chiamata al momento della +rimozione (o mai, nel caso in cui il file sia parte integrante del kernel). +Essa verrà chiamata solo quando il contatore d'uso del modulo raggiunge lo +zero. Questa funzione può anche dormire, ma non può fallire: tutto dev'essere +ripulito prima che la funzione ritorni. + +Da notare che questa macro è opzionale: se non presente, il modulo non sarà +removibile (a meno che non usiate 'rmmod -f' ). + + +:c:func:`try_module_get()`/:c:func:`module_put()` +------------------------------------------------- + +Definite in ``include/linux/module.h`` + +Queste funzioni maneggiano il contatore d'uso del modulo per proteggerlo dalla +rimozione (in aggiunta, un modulo non può essere rimosso se un altro modulo +utilizzo uno dei sui simboli esportati: vedere di seguito). Prima di eseguire +codice del modulo, dovreste chiamare :c:func:`try_module_get()` su quel modulo: +se fallisce significa che il modulo è stato rimosso e dovete agire come se +non fosse presente. Altrimenti, potete accedere al modulo in sicurezza, e +chiamare :c:func:`module_put()` quando avete finito. + +La maggior parte delle strutture registrabili hanno un campo owner +(proprietario), come nella struttura +:c:type:`struct file_operations <file_operations>`. +Impostate questo campo al valore della macro ``THIS_MODULE``. + + +Code d'attesa ``include/linux/wait.h`` +====================================== + +**[DORMONO]** + +Una coda d'attesa è usata per aspettare che qualcuno vi attivi quando una +certa condizione s'avvera. Per evitare corse critiche, devono essere usate +con cautela. Dichiarate una :c:type:`wait_queue_head_t`, e poi i processi +che vogliono attendere il verificarsi di quella condizione dichiareranno +una :c:type:`wait_queue_entry_t` facendo riferimento a loro stessi, poi +metteranno questa in coda. + +Dichiarazione +------------- + +Potere dichiarare una ``wait_queue_head_t`` utilizzando la macro +:c:func:`DECLARE_WAIT_QUEUE_HEAD()` oppure utilizzando la procedura +:c:func:`init_waitqueue_head()` nel vostro codice d'inizializzazione. + +Accodamento +----------- + +Mettersi in una coda d'attesa è piuttosto complesso, perché dovete +mettervi in coda prima di verificare la condizione. Esiste una macro +a questo scopo: :c:func:`wait_event_interruptible()` (``include/linux/wait.h``). +Il primo argomento è la testa della coda d'attesa, e il secondo è +un'espressione che dev'essere valutata; la macro ritorna 0 quando questa +espressione è vera, altrimenti ``-ERESTARTSYS`` se è stato ricevuto un segnale. +La versione :c:func:`wait_event()` ignora i segnali. + +Svegliare una procedura in coda +------------------------------- + +Chiamate :c:func:`wake_up()` (``include/linux/wait.h``); questa attiverà tutti +i processi in coda. Ad eccezione se uno di questi è impostato come +``TASK_EXCLUSIVE``, in questo caso i rimanenti non verranno svegliati. +Nello stesso header file esistono altre varianti di questa funzione. + +Operazioni atomiche +=================== + +Certe operazioni sono garantite come atomiche su tutte le piattaforme. +Il primo gruppo di operazioni utilizza :c:type:`atomic_t` +(``include/asm/atomic.h``); questo contiene un intero con segno (minimo 32bit), +e dovete utilizzare queste funzione per modificare o leggere variabili di tipo +:c:type:`atomic_t`. :c:func:`atomic_read()` e :c:func:`atomic_set()` leggono ed +impostano il contatore, :c:func:`atomic_add()`, :c:func:`atomic_sub()`, +:c:func:`atomic_inc()`, :c:func:`atomic_dec()`, e +:c:func:`atomic_dec_and_test()` (ritorna vero se raggiunge zero dopo essere +stata decrementata). + +Sì. Ritorna vero (ovvero != 0) se la variabile atomica è zero. + +Da notare che queste funzioni sono più lente rispetto alla normale aritmetica, +e quindi non dovrebbero essere usate a sproposito. + +Il secondo gruppo di operazioni atomiche sono definite in +``include/linux/bitops.h`` ed agiscono sui bit d'una variabile di tipo +``unsigned long``. Queste operazioni prendono come argomento un puntatore +alla variabile, e un numero di bit dove 0 è quello meno significativo. +:c:func:`set_bit()`, :c:func:`clear_bit()` e :c:func:`change_bit()` +impostano, cancellano, ed invertono il bit indicato. +:c:func:`test_and_set_bit()`, :c:func:`test_and_clear_bit()` e +:c:func:`test_and_change_bit()` fanno la stessa cosa, ad eccezione che +ritornano vero se il bit era impostato; queste sono particolarmente +utili quando si vuole impostare atomicamente dei flag. + +Con queste operazioni è possibile utilizzare indici di bit che eccedono +il valore ``BITS_PER_LONG``. Il comportamento è strano sulle piattaforme +big-endian quindi è meglio evitarlo. + +Simboli +======= + +All'interno del kernel, si seguono le normali regole del linker (ovvero, +a meno che un simbolo non venga dichiarato con visibilita limitata ad un +file con la parola chiave ``static``, esso può essere utilizzato in qualsiasi +parte del kernel). Nonostante ciò, per i moduli, esiste una tabella dei +simboli esportati che limita i punti di accesso al kernel. Anche i moduli +possono esportare simboli. + +:c:func:`EXPORT_SYMBOL()` +------------------------- + +Definita in ``include/linux/export.h`` + +Questo è il classico metodo per esportare un simbolo: i moduli caricati +dinamicamente potranno utilizzare normalmente il simbolo. + +:c:func:`EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL()` +----------------------------- + +Definita in ``include/linux/export.h`` + +Essa è simile a :c:func:`EXPORT_SYMBOL()` ad eccezione del fatto che i +simboli esportati con :c:func:`EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL()` possono essere +utilizzati solo dai moduli che hanno dichiarato una licenza compatibile +con la GPL attraverso :c:func:`MODULE_LICENSE()`. Questo implica che la +funzione esportata è considerata interna, e non una vera e propria interfaccia. +Alcuni manutentori e sviluppatori potrebbero comunque richiedere +:c:func:`EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL()` quando si aggiungono nuove funzionalità o +interfacce. + +Procedure e convenzioni +======================= + +Liste doppiamente concatenate ``include/linux/list.h`` +------------------------------------------------------ + +Un tempo negli header del kernel c'erano tre gruppi di funzioni per +le liste concatenate, ma questa è stata la vincente. Se non avete particolari +necessità per una semplice lista concatenata, allora questa è una buona scelta. + +In particolare, :c:func:`list_for_each_entry()` è utile. + +Convenzione dei valori di ritorno +--------------------------------- + +Per codice chiamato in contesto utente, è molto comune sfidare le convenzioni +C e ritornare 0 in caso di successo, ed un codice di errore negativo +(eg. ``-EFAULT``) nei casi fallimentari. Questo potrebbe essere controintuitivo +a prima vista, ma è abbastanza diffuso nel kernel. + +Utilizzate :c:func:`ERR_PTR()` (``include/linux/err.h``) per codificare +un numero d'errore negativo in un puntatore, e :c:func:`IS_ERR()` e +:c:func:`PTR_ERR()` per recuperarlo di nuovo: così si evita d'avere un +puntatore dedicato per il numero d'errore. Da brividi, ma in senso positivo. + +Rompere la compilazione +----------------------- + +Linus e gli altri sviluppatori a volte cambiano i nomi delle funzioni e +delle strutture nei kernel in sviluppo; questo non è solo per tenere +tutti sulle spine: questo riflette cambiamenti fondamentati (eg. la funzione +non può più essere chiamata con le funzioni attive, o fa controlli aggiuntivi, +o non fa più controlli che venivano fatti in precedenza). Solitamente a questo +s'accompagna un'adeguata e completa nota sulla lista di discussone +linux-kernel; cercate negli archivi. +Solitamente eseguire una semplice sostituzione su tutto un file rendere +le cose **peggiori**. + +Inizializzazione dei campi d'una struttura +------------------------------------------ + +Il metodo preferito per l'inizializzazione delle strutture è quello +di utilizzare gli inizializzatori designati, come definiti nello +standard ISO C99, eg:: + + static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = { + .open = opt_open, + .release = opt_release, + .ioctl = opt_ioctl, + .check_media_change = opt_media_change, + }; + +Questo rende più facile la ricerca con grep, e rende più chiaro quale campo +viene impostato. Dovreste fare così perché si mostra meglio. + +Estensioni GNU +-------------- + +Le estensioni GNU sono esplicitamente permesse nel kernel Linux. Da notare +che alcune delle più complesse non sono ben supportate, per via dello scarso +sviluppo, ma le seguenti sono da considerarsi la norma (per maggiori dettagli, +leggete la sezione "C Extensions" nella pagina info di GCC - Sì, davvero +la pagina info, la pagina man è solo un breve riassunto delle cose nella +pagina info). + +- Funzioni inline + +- Istruzioni in espressioni (ie. il costrutto ({ and }) ). + +- Dichiarate attributi di una funzione / variabile / tipo + (__attribute__) + +- typeof + +- Array con lunghezza zero + +- Macro varargs + +- Aritmentica sui puntatori void + +- Inizializzatori non costanti + +- Istruzioni assembler (non al di fuori di 'arch/' e 'include/asm/') + +- Nomi delle funzioni come stringhe (__func__). + +- __builtin_constant_p() + +Siate sospettosi quando utilizzate long long nel kernel, il codice generato +da gcc è orribile ed anche peggio: le divisioni e le moltiplicazioni non +funzionano sulle piattaforme i386 perché le rispettive funzioni di runtime +di GCC non sono incluse nell'ambiente del kernel. + +C++ +--- + +Solitamente utilizzare il C++ nel kernel è una cattiva idea perché +il kernel non fornisce il necessario ambiente di runtime e gli header file +non sono stati verificati. Rimane comunque possibile, ma non consigliato. +Se davvero volete usarlo, almeno evitate le eccezioni. + +NUMif +----- + +Viene generalmente considerato più pulito l'uso delle macro negli header file +(o all'inizio dei file .c) per astrarre funzioni piuttosto che utlizzare +l'istruzione di pre-processore \`#if' all'interno del codice sorgente. + +Mettere le vostre cose nel kernel +================================= + +Al fine d'avere le vostre cose in ordine per l'inclusione ufficiale, o +anche per avere patch pulite, c'è del lavoro amministrativo da fare: + +- Trovare di chi è lo stagno in cui state pisciando. Guardare in cima + ai file sorgenti, all'interno del file ``MAINTAINERS``, ed alla fine + di tutti nel file ``CREDITS``. Dovreste coordinarvi con queste persone + per evitare di duplicare gli sforzi, o provare qualcosa che è già stato + rigettato. + + Assicuratevi di mettere il vostro nome ed indirizzo email in cima a + tutti i file che create o che mangeggiate significativamente. Questo è + il primo posto dove le persone guarderanno quando troveranno un baco, + o quando **loro** vorranno fare una modifica. + +- Solitamente vorrete un'opzione di configurazione per la vostra modifica + al kernel. Modificate ``Kconfig`` nella cartella giusta. Il linguaggio + Config è facile con copia ed incolla, e c'è una completa documentazione + nel file ``Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt``. + + Nella descrizione della vostra opzione, assicuratevi di parlare sia agli + utenti esperti sia agli utente che non sanno nulla del vostro lavoro. + Menzionate qui le incompatibilità ed i problemi. Chiaramente la + descrizione deve terminare con “if in doubt, say N” (se siete in dubbio, + dite N) (oppure, occasionalmente, \`Y'); questo è per le persone che non + hanno idea di che cosa voi stiate parlando. + +- Modificate il file ``Makefile``: le variabili CONFIG sono esportate qui, + quindi potete solitamente aggiungere una riga come la seguete + "obj-$(CONFIG_xxx) += xxx.o". La sintassi è documentata nel file + ``Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt``. + +- Aggiungete voi stessi in ``CREDITS`` se avete fatto qualcosa di notevole, + solitamente qualcosa che supera il singolo file (comunque il vostro nome + dovrebbe essere all'inizio dei file sorgenti). ``MAINTAINERS`` significa + che volete essere consultati quando vengono fatte delle modifiche ad un + sottosistema, e quando ci sono dei bachi; questo implica molto di più + di un semplice impegno su una parte del codice. + +- Infine, non dimenticatevi di leggere + ``Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst`` e possibilmente anche + ``Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst``. + +Trucchetti del kernel +===================== + +Dopo una rapida occhiata al codice, questi sono i preferiti. Sentitevi liberi +di aggiungerne altri. + +``arch/x86/include/asm/delay.h``:: + + #define ndelay(n) (__builtin_constant_p(n) ? \ + ((n) > 20000 ? __bad_ndelay() : __const_udelay((n) * 5ul)) : \ + __ndelay(n)) + + +``include/linux/fs.h``:: + + /* + * Kernel pointers have redundant information, so we can use a + * scheme where we can return either an error code or a dentry + * pointer with the same return value. + * + * This should be a per-architecture thing, to allow different + * error and pointer decisions. + */ + #define ERR_PTR(err) ((void *)((long)(err))) + #define PTR_ERR(ptr) ((long)(ptr)) + #define IS_ERR(ptr) ((unsigned long)(ptr) > (unsigned long)(-1000)) + +``arch/x86/include/asm/uaccess_32.h:``:: + + #define copy_to_user(to,from,n) \ + (__builtin_constant_p(n) ? \ + __constant_copy_to_user((to),(from),(n)) : \ + __generic_copy_to_user((to),(from),(n))) + + +``arch/sparc/kernel/head.S:``:: + + /* + * Sun people can't spell worth damn. "compatability" indeed. + * At least we *know* we can't spell, and use a spell-checker. + */ + + /* Uh, actually Linus it is I who cannot spell. Too much murky + * Sparc assembly will do this to ya. + */ + C_LABEL(cputypvar): + .asciz "compatibility" + + /* Tested on SS-5, SS-10. Probably someone at Sun applied a spell-checker. */ + .align 4 + C_LABEL(cputypvar_sun4m): + .asciz "compatible" + + +``arch/sparc/lib/checksum.S:``:: + + /* Sun, you just can't beat me, you just can't. Stop trying, + * give up. I'm serious, I am going to kick the living shit + * out of you, game over, lights out. + */ + + +Ringraziamenti +============== + +Ringrazio Andi Kleen per le sue idee, le risposte alle mie domande, +le correzioni dei miei errori, l'aggiunta di contenuti, eccetera. +Philipp Rumpf per l'ortografia e per aver reso più chiaro il testo, e +per alcuni eccellenti punti tutt'altro che ovvi. Werner Almesberger +per avermi fornito un ottimo riassunto di :c:func:`disable_irq()`, +e Jes Sorensen e Andrea Arcangeli per le precisazioni. Michael Elizabeth +Chastain per aver verificato ed aggiunto la sezione configurazione. +Telsa Gwynne per avermi insegnato DocBook. diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..50228380bd50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst + +:Original: :ref:`Documentation/kernel-hacking/index.rst <kernel_hacking>` +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> + +.. _it_kernel_hacking: + +============================ +Guida all'hacking del kernel +============================ + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + hacking + locking diff --git a/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/locking.rst b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/locking.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..753643622c23 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/it_IT/kernel-hacking/locking.rst @@ -0,0 +1,1493 @@ +.. include:: ../disclaimer-ita.rst + +:Original: :ref:`Documentation/kernel-hacking/locking.rst <kernel_hacking_lock>` +:Translator: Federico Vaga <federico.vaga@vaga.pv.it> + +.. _it_kernel_hacking_lock: + +========================================== +L'inaffidabile guida alla sincronizzazione +========================================== + +:Author: Rusty Russell + +Introduzione +============ + +Benvenuto, alla notevole ed inaffidabile guida ai problemi di sincronizzazione +(locking) nel kernel. Questo documento descrive il sistema di sincronizzazione +nel kernel Linux 2.6. + +Dato il largo utilizzo del multi-threading e della prelazione nel kernel +Linux, chiunque voglia dilettarsi col kernel deve conoscere i concetti +fondamentali della concorrenza e della sincronizzazione nei sistemi +multi-processore. + +Il problema con la concorrenza +============================== + +(Saltatelo se sapete già cos'è una corsa critica). + +In un normale programma, potete incrementare un contatore nel seguente modo: + +:: + + contatore++; + +Questo è quello che vi aspettereste che accada sempre: + + +.. table:: Risultati attesi + + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | Istanza 1 | Istanza 2 | + +====================================+====================================+ + | leggi contatore (5) | | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | aggiungi 1 (6) | | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | scrivi contatore (6) | | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | | leggi contatore (6) | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | | aggiungi 1 (7) | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | | scrivi contatore (7) | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + +Questo è quello che potrebbe succedere in realtà: + +.. table:: Possibile risultato + + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | Istanza 1 | Istanza 2 | + +====================================+====================================+ + | leggi contatore (5) | | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | | leggi contatore (5) | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | aggiungi 1 (6) | | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | | aggiungi 1 (6) | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | scrivi contatore (6) | | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + | | scrivi contatore (6) | + +------------------------------------+------------------------------------+ + + +Corse critiche e sezioni critiche +--------------------------------- + +Questa sovrapposizione, ovvero quando un risultato dipende dal tempo che +intercorre fra processi diversi, è chiamata corsa critica. La porzione +di codice che contiene questo problema è chiamata sezione critica. +In particolar modo da quando Linux ha incominciato a girare su +macchine multi-processore, le sezioni critiche sono diventate uno dei +maggiori problemi di progettazione ed implementazione del kernel. + +La prelazione può sortire gli stessi effetti, anche se c'è una sola CPU: +interrompendo un processo nella sua sezione critica otterremo comunque +la stessa corsa critica. In questo caso, il thread che si avvicenda +nell'esecuzione potrebbe eseguire anch'esso la sezione critica. + +La soluzione è quella di riconoscere quando avvengono questi accessi +simultanei, ed utilizzare i *lock* per accertarsi che solo un'istanza +per volta possa entrare nella sezione critica. Il kernel offre delle buone +funzioni a questo scopo. E poi ci sono quelle meno buone, ma farò finta +che non esistano. + +Sincronizzazione nel kernel Linux +================================= + +Se posso darvi un suggerimento: non dormite mai con qualcuno più pazzo di +voi. Ma se dovessi darvi un suggerimento sulla sincronizzazione: +**mantenetela semplice**. + +Siate riluttanti nell'introduzione di nuovi *lock*. + +Abbastanza strano, quest'ultimo è l'esatto opposto del mio suggerimento +su quando **avete** dormito con qualcuno più pazzo di voi. E dovreste +pensare a prendervi un cane bello grande. + +I due principali tipi di *lock* nel kernel: spinlock e mutex +------------------------------------------------------------ + +Ci sono due tipi principali di *lock* nel kernel. Il tipo fondamentale è lo +spinlock (``include/asm/spinlock.h``), un semplice *lock* che può essere +trattenuto solo da un processo: se non si può trattenere lo spinlock, allora +rimane in attesa attiva (in inglese *spinning*) finché non ci riesce. +Gli spinlock sono molto piccoli e rapidi, possono essere utilizzati ovunque. + +Il secondo tipo è il mutex (``include/linux/mutex.h``): è come uno spinlock, +ma potreste bloccarvi trattenendolo. Se non potete trattenere un mutex +il vostro processo si auto-sospenderà; verrà riattivato quando il mutex +verrà rilasciato. Questo significa che il processore potrà occuparsi d'altro +mentre il vostro processo è in attesa. Esistono molti casi in cui non potete +permettervi di sospendere un processo (vedere +:ref:`Quali funzioni possono essere chiamate in modo sicuro dalle interruzioni? <it_sleeping-things>`) +e quindi dovrete utilizzare gli spinlock. + +Nessuno di questi *lock* è ricorsivo: vedere +:ref:`Stallo: semplice ed avanzato <it_deadlock>` + +I *lock* e i kernel per sistemi monoprocessore +---------------------------------------------- + +Per i kernel compilati senza ``CONFIG_SMP`` e senza ``CONFIG_PREEMPT`` +gli spinlock non esistono. Questa è un'ottima scelta di progettazione: +quando nessun altro processo può essere eseguito in simultanea, allora +non c'è la necessità di avere un *lock*. + +Se il kernel è compilato senza ``CONFIG_SMP`` ma con ``CONFIG_PREEMPT``, +allora gli spinlock disabilitano la prelazione; questo è sufficiente a +prevenire le corse critiche. Nella maggior parte dei casi, possiamo considerare +la prelazione equivalente ad un sistema multi-processore senza preoccuparci +di trattarla indipendentemente. + +Dovreste verificare sempre la sincronizzazione con le opzioni ``CONFIG_SMP`` e +``CONFIG_PREEMPT`` abilitate, anche quando non avete un sistema +multi-processore, questo vi permetterà di identificare alcuni problemi +di sincronizzazione. + +Come vedremo di seguito, i mutex continuano ad esistere perché sono necessari +per la sincronizzazione fra processi in contesto utente. + +Sincronizzazione in contesto utente +----------------------------------- + +Se avete una struttura dati che verrà utilizzata solo dal contesto utente, +allora, per proteggerla, potete utilizzare un semplice mutex +(``include/linux/mutex.h``). Questo è il caso più semplice: inizializzate il +mutex; invocate :c:func:`mutex_lock_interruptible()` per trattenerlo e +:c:func:`mutex_unlock()` per rilasciarlo. C'è anche :c:func:`mutex_lock()` +ma questa dovrebbe essere evitata perché non ritorna in caso di segnali. + +Per esempio: ``net/netfilter/nf_sockopt.c`` permette la registrazione +di nuove chiamate per :c:func:`setsockopt()` e :c:func:`getsockopt()` +usando la funzione :c:func:`nf_register_sockopt()`. La registrazione e +la rimozione vengono eseguite solamente quando il modulo viene caricato +o scaricato (e durante l'avvio del sistema, qui non abbiamo concorrenza), +e la lista delle funzioni registrate viene consultata solamente quando +:c:func:`setsockopt()` o :c:func:`getsockopt()` sono sconosciute al sistema. +In questo caso ``nf_sockopt_mutex`` è perfetto allo scopo, in particolar modo +visto che setsockopt e getsockopt potrebbero dormire. + +Sincronizzazione fra il contesto utente e i softirq +--------------------------------------------------- + +Se un softirq condivide dati col contesto utente, avete due problemi. +Primo, il contesto utente corrente potrebbe essere interroto da un softirq, +e secondo, la sezione critica potrebbe essere eseguita da un altro +processore. Questo è quando :c:func:`spin_lock_bh()` +(``include/linux/spinlock.h``) viene utilizzato. Questo disabilita i softirq +sul processore e trattiene il *lock*. Invece, :c:func:`spin_unlock_bh()` fa +l'opposto. (Il suffisso '_bh' è un residuo storico che fa riferimento al +"Bottom Halves", il vecchio nome delle interruzioni software. In un mondo +perfetto questa funzione si chiamerebbe 'spin_lock_softirq()'). + +Da notare che in questo caso potete utilizzare anche :c:func:`spin_lock_irq()` +o :c:func:`spin_lock_irqsave()`, queste fermano anche le interruzioni hardware: +vedere :ref:`Contesto di interruzione hardware <it_hardirq-context>`. + +Questo funziona alla perfezione anche sui sistemi monoprocessore: gli spinlock +svaniscono e questa macro diventa semplicemente :c:func:`local_bh_disable()` +(``include/linux/interrupt.h``), la quale impedisce ai softirq d'essere +eseguiti. + +Sincronizzazione fra contesto utente e i tasklet +------------------------------------------------ + +Questo caso è uguale al precedente, un tasklet viene eseguito da un softirq. + +Sincronizzazione fra contesto utente e i timer +---------------------------------------------- + +Anche questo caso è uguale al precedente, un timer viene eseguito da un +softirq. +Dal punto di vista della sincronizzazione, tasklet e timer sono identici. + +Sincronizzazione fra tasklet e timer +------------------------------------ + +Qualche volta un tasklet od un timer potrebbero condividere i dati con +un altro tasklet o timer + +Lo stesso tasklet/timer +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Dato che un tasklet non viene mai eseguito contemporaneamente su due +processori, non dovete preoccuparvi che sia rientrante (ovvero eseguito +più volte in contemporanea), perfino su sistemi multi-processore. + +Differenti tasklet/timer +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Se un altro tasklet/timer vuole condividere dati col vostro tasklet o timer, +allora avrete bisogno entrambe di :c:func:`spin_lock()` e +:c:func:`spin_unlock()`. Qui :c:func:`spin_lock_bh()` è inutile, siete già +in un tasklet ed avete la garanzia che nessun altro verrà eseguito sullo +stesso processore. + +Sincronizzazione fra softirq +---------------------------- + +Spesso un softirq potrebbe condividere dati con se stesso o un tasklet/timer. + +Lo stesso softirq +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Lo stesso softirq può essere eseguito su un diverso processore: allo scopo +di migliorare le prestazioni potete utilizzare dati riservati ad ogni +processore (vedere :ref:`Dati per processore <it_per-cpu>`). Se siete arrivati +fino a questo punto nell'uso dei softirq, probabilmente tenete alla scalabilità +delle prestazioni abbastanza da giustificarne la complessità aggiuntiva. + +Dovete utilizzare :c:func:`spin_lock()` e :c:func:`spin_unlock()` per +proteggere i dati condivisi. + +Diversi Softirqs +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Dovete utilizzare :c:func:`spin_lock()` e :c:func:`spin_unlock()` per +proteggere i dati condivisi, che siano timer, tasklet, diversi softirq o +lo stesso o altri softirq: uno qualsiasi di essi potrebbe essere in esecuzione +su un diverso processore. + +.. _`it_hardirq-context`: + +Contesto di interruzione hardware +================================= + +Solitamente le interruzioni hardware comunicano con un tasklet o un softirq. +Spesso questo si traduce nel mettere in coda qualcosa da fare che verrà +preso in carico da un softirq. + +Sincronizzazione fra interruzioni hardware e softirq/tasklet +------------------------------------------------------------ + +Se un gestore di interruzioni hardware condivide dati con un softirq, allora +avrete due preoccupazioni. Primo, il softirq può essere interrotto da +un'interruzione hardware, e secondo, la sezione critica potrebbe essere +eseguita da un'interruzione hardware su un processore diverso. Questo è il caso +dove :c:func:`spin_lock_irq()` viene utilizzato. Disabilita le interruzioni +sul processore che l'esegue, poi trattiene il lock. :c:func:`spin_unlock_irq()` +fa l'opposto. + +Il gestore d'interruzione hardware non usa :c:func:`spin_lock_irq()` perché +i softirq non possono essere eseguiti quando il gestore d'interruzione hardware +è in esecuzione: per questo si può usare :c:func:`spin_lock()`, che è un po' +più veloce. L'unica eccezione è quando un altro gestore d'interruzioni +hardware utilizza lo stesso *lock*: :c:func:`spin_lock_irq()` impedirà a questo +secondo gestore di interrompere quello in esecuzione. + +Questo funziona alla perfezione anche sui sistemi monoprocessore: gli spinlock +svaniscono e questa macro diventa semplicemente :c:func:`local_irq_disable()` +(``include/asm/smp.h``), la quale impedisce a softirq/tasklet/BH d'essere +eseguiti. + +:c:func:`spin_lock_irqsave()` (``include/linux/spinlock.h``) è una variante che +salva lo stato delle interruzioni in una variabile, questa verrà poi passata +a :c:func:`spin_unlock_irqrestore()`. Questo significa che lo stesso codice +potrà essere utilizzato in un'interruzione hardware (dove le interruzioni sono +già disabilitate) e in un softirq (dove la disabilitazione delle interruzioni +è richiesta). + +Da notare che i softirq (e quindi tasklet e timer) sono eseguiti al ritorno +da un'interruzione hardware, quindi :c:func:`spin_lock_irq()` interrompe +anche questi. Tenuto conto di questo si può dire che +:c:func:`spin_lock_irqsave()` è la funzione di sincronizzazione più generica +e potente. + +Sincronizzazione fra due gestori d'interruzioni hardware +-------------------------------------------------------- + +Condividere dati fra due gestori di interruzione hardware è molto raro, ma se +succede, dovreste usare :c:func:`spin_lock_irqsave()`: è una specificità +dell'architettura il fatto che tutte le interruzioni vengano interrotte +quando si eseguono di gestori di interruzioni. + +Bigino della sincronizzazione +============================= + +Pete Zaitcev ci offre il seguente riassunto: + +- Se siete in un contesto utente (una qualsiasi chiamata di sistema) + e volete sincronizzarvi con altri processi, usate i mutex. Potete trattenere + il mutex e dormire (``copy_from_user*(`` o ``kmalloc(x,GFP_KERNEL)``). + +- Altrimenti (== i dati possono essere manipolati da un'interruzione) usate + :c:func:`spin_lock_irqsave()` e :c:func:`spin_unlock_irqrestore()`. + +- Evitate di trattenere uno spinlock per più di 5 righe di codice incluse + le chiamate a funzione (ad eccezione di quell per l'accesso come + :c:func:`readb()`). + +Tabella dei requisiti minimi +---------------------------- + +La tabella seguente illustra i requisiti **minimi** per la sincronizzazione fra +diversi contesti. In alcuni casi, lo stesso contesto può essere eseguito solo +da un processore per volta, quindi non ci sono requisiti per la +sincronizzazione (per esempio, un thread può essere eseguito solo su un +processore alla volta, ma se deve condividere dati con un altro thread, allora +la sincronizzazione è necessaria). + +Ricordatevi il suggerimento qui sopra: potete sempre usare +:c:func:`spin_lock_irqsave()`, che è un sovrainsieme di tutte le altre funzioni +per spinlock. + +============== ============= ============= ========= ========= ========= ========= ======= ======= ============== ============== +. IRQ Handler A IRQ Handler B Softirq A Softirq B Tasklet A Tasklet B Timer A Timer B User Context A User Context B +============== ============= ============= ========= ========= ========= ========= ======= ======= ============== ============== +IRQ Handler A None +IRQ Handler B SLIS None +Softirq A SLI SLI SL +Softirq B SLI SLI SL SL +Tasklet A SLI SLI SL SL None +Tasklet B SLI SLI SL SL SL None +Timer A SLI SLI SL SL SL SL None +Timer B SLI SLI SL SL SL SL SL None +User Context A SLI SLI SLBH SLBH SLBH SLBH SLBH SLBH None +User Context B SLI SLI SLBH SLBH SLBH SLBH SLBH SLBH MLI None +============== ============= ============= ========= ========= ========= ========= ======= ======= ============== ============== + +Table: Tabella dei requisiti per la sincronizzazione + ++--------+----------------------------+ +| SLIS | spin_lock_irqsave | ++--------+----------------------------+ +| SLI | spin_lock_irq | ++--------+----------------------------+ +| SL | spin_lock | ++--------+----------------------------+ +| SLBH | spin_lock_bh | ++--------+----------------------------+ +| MLI | mutex_lock_interruptible | ++--------+----------------------------+ + +Table: Legenda per la tabella dei requisiti per la sincronizzazione + +Le funzioni *trylock* +===================== + +Ci sono funzioni che provano a trattenere un *lock* solo una volta e +ritornano immediatamente comunicato il successo od il fallimento +dell'operazione. Posso essere usate quando non serve accedere ai dati +protetti dal *lock* quando qualche altro thread lo sta già facendo +trattenendo il *lock*. Potrete acquisire il *lock* più tardi se vi +serve accedere ai dati protetti da questo *lock*. + +La funzione :c:func:`spin_trylock()` non ritenta di acquisire il *lock*, +se ci riesce al primo colpo ritorna un valore diverso da zero, altrimenti +se fallisce ritorna 0. Questa funzione può essere utilizzata in un qualunque +contesto, ma come :c:func:`spin_lock()`: dovete disabilitare i contesti che +potrebbero interrompervi e quindi trattenere lo spinlock. + +La funzione :c:func:`mutex_trylock()` invece di sospendere il vostro processo +ritorna un valore diverso da zero se è possibile trattenere il lock al primo +colpo, altrimenti se fallisce ritorna 0. Nonostante non dorma, questa funzione +non può essere usata in modo sicuro in contesti di interruzione hardware o +software. + +Esempi più comuni +================= + +Guardiamo un semplice esempio: una memoria che associa nomi a numeri. +La memoria tiene traccia di quanto spesso viene utilizzato ogni oggetto; +quando è piena, l'oggetto meno usato viene eliminato. + +Tutto in contesto utente +------------------------ + +Nel primo esempio, supponiamo che tutte le operazioni avvengano in contesto +utente (in soldoni, da una chiamata di sistema), quindi possiamo dormire. +Questo significa che possiamo usare i mutex per proteggere la nostra memoria +e tutti gli oggetti che contiene. Ecco il codice:: + + #include <linux/list.h> + #include <linux/slab.h> + #include <linux/string.h> + #include <linux/mutex.h> + #include <asm/errno.h> + + struct object + { + struct list_head list; + int id; + char name[32]; + int popularity; + }; + + /* Protects the cache, cache_num, and the objects within it */ + static DEFINE_MUTEX(cache_lock); + static LIST_HEAD(cache); + static unsigned int cache_num = 0; + #define MAX_CACHE_SIZE 10 + + /* Must be holding cache_lock */ + static struct object *__cache_find(int id) + { + struct object *i; + + list_for_each_entry(i, &cache, list) + if (i->id == id) { + i->popularity++; + return i; + } + return NULL; + } + + /* Must be holding cache_lock */ + static void __cache_delete(struct object *obj) + { + BUG_ON(!obj); + list_del(&obj->list); + kfree(obj); + cache_num--; + } + + /* Must be holding cache_lock */ + static void __cache_add(struct object *obj) + { + list_add(&obj->list, &cache); + if (++cache_num > MAX_CACHE_SIZE) { + struct object *i, *outcast = NULL; + list_for_each_entry(i, &cache, list) { + if (!outcast || i->popularity < outcast->popularity) + outcast = i; + } + __cache_delete(outcast); + } + } + + int cache_add(int id, const char *name) + { + struct object *obj; + + if ((obj = kmalloc(sizeof(*obj), GFP_KERNEL)) == NULL) + return -ENOMEM; + + strlcpy(obj->name, name, sizeof(obj->name)); + obj->id = id; + obj->popularity = 0; + + mutex_lock(&cache_lock); + __cache_add(obj); + mutex_unlock(&cache_lock); + return 0; + } + + void cache_delete(int id) + { + mutex_lock(&cache_lock); + __cache_delete(__cache_find(id)); + mutex_unlock(&cache_lock); + } + + int cache_find(int id, char *name) + { + struct object *obj; + int ret = -ENOENT; + + mutex_lock(&cache_lock); + obj = __cache_find(id); + if (obj) { + ret = 0; + strcpy(name, obj->name); + } + mutex_unlock(&cache_lock); + return ret; + } + +Da notare che ci assicuriamo sempre di trattenere cache_lock quando +aggiungiamo, rimuoviamo od ispezioniamo la memoria: sia la struttura +della memoria che il suo contenuto sono protetti dal *lock*. Questo +caso è semplice dato che copiamo i dati dall'utente e non permettiamo +mai loro di accedere direttamente agli oggetti. + +C'è una piccola ottimizzazione qui: nella funzione :c:func:`cache_add()` +impostiamo i campi dell'oggetto prima di acquisire il *lock*. Questo è +sicuro perché nessun altro potrà accedervi finché non lo inseriremo +nella memoria. + +Accesso dal contesto utente +--------------------------- + +Ora consideriamo il caso in cui :c:func:`cache_find()` può essere invocata +dal contesto d'interruzione: sia hardware che software. Un esempio potrebbe +essere un timer che elimina oggetti dalla memoria. + +Qui di seguito troverete la modifica nel formato *patch*: le righe ``-`` +sono quelle rimosse, mentre quelle ``+`` sono quelle aggiunte. + +:: + + --- cache.c.usercontext 2003-12-09 13:58:54.000000000 +1100 + +++ cache.c.interrupt 2003-12-09 14:07:49.000000000 +1100 + @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ + int popularity; + }; + + -static DEFINE_MUTEX(cache_lock); + +static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(cache_lock); + static LIST_HEAD(cache); + static unsigned int cache_num = 0; + #define MAX_CACHE_SIZE 10 + @@ -55,6 +55,7 @@ + int cache_add(int id, const char *name) + { + struct object *obj; + + unsigned long flags; + + if ((obj = kmalloc(sizeof(*obj), GFP_KERNEL)) == NULL) + return -ENOMEM; + @@ -63,30 +64,33 @@ + obj->id = id; + obj->popularity = 0; + + - mutex_lock(&cache_lock); + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + __cache_add(obj); + - mutex_unlock(&cache_lock); + + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + return 0; + } + + void cache_delete(int id) + { + - mutex_lock(&cache_lock); + + unsigned long flags; + + + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + __cache_delete(__cache_find(id)); + - mutex_unlock(&cache_lock); + + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + } + + int cache_find(int id, char *name) + { + struct object *obj; + int ret = -ENOENT; + + unsigned long flags; + + - mutex_lock(&cache_lock); + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + obj = __cache_find(id); + if (obj) { + ret = 0; + strcpy(name, obj->name); + } + - mutex_unlock(&cache_lock); + + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + return ret; + } + +Da notare che :c:func:`spin_lock_irqsave()` disabiliterà le interruzioni +se erano attive, altrimenti non farà niente (quando siamo già in un contesto +d'interruzione); dunque queste funzioni possono essere chiamante in +sicurezza da qualsiasi contesto. + +Sfortunatamente, :c:func:`cache_add()` invoca :c:func:`kmalloc()` con +l'opzione ``GFP_KERNEL`` che è permessa solo in contesto utente. Ho supposto +che :c:func:`cache_add()` venga chiamata dal contesto utente, altrimenti +questa opzione deve diventare un parametro di :c:func:`cache_add()`. + +Exposing Objects Outside This File +---------------------------------- + +Se i vostri oggetti contengono più informazioni, potrebbe non essere +sufficiente copiare i dati avanti e indietro: per esempio, altre parti del +codice potrebbero avere un puntatore a questi oggetti piuttosto che cercarli +ogni volta. Questo introduce due problemi. + +Il primo problema è che utilizziamo ``cache_lock`` per proteggere gli oggetti: +dobbiamo renderlo dinamico così che il resto del codice possa usarlo. Questo +rende la sincronizzazione più complicata dato che non avviene più in un unico +posto. + +Il secondo problema è il problema del ciclo di vita: se un'altra struttura +mantiene un puntatore ad un oggetto, presumibilmente si aspetta che questo +puntatore rimanga valido. Sfortunatamente, questo è garantito solo mentre +si trattiene il *lock*, altrimenti qualcuno potrebbe chiamare +:c:func:`cache_delete()` o peggio, aggiungere un oggetto che riutilizza lo +stesso indirizzo. + +Dato che c'è un solo *lock*, non potete trattenerlo a vita: altrimenti +nessun altro potrà eseguire il proprio lavoro. + +La soluzione a questo problema è l'uso di un contatore di riferimenti: +chiunque punti ad un oggetto deve incrementare il contatore, e decrementarlo +quando il puntatore non viene più usato. Quando il contatore raggiunge lo zero +significa che non è più usato e l'oggetto può essere rimosso. + +Ecco il codice:: + + --- cache.c.interrupt 2003-12-09 14:25:43.000000000 +1100 + +++ cache.c.refcnt 2003-12-09 14:33:05.000000000 +1100 + @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ + struct object + { + struct list_head list; + + unsigned int refcnt; + int id; + char name[32]; + int popularity; + @@ -17,6 +18,35 @@ + static unsigned int cache_num = 0; + #define MAX_CACHE_SIZE 10 + + +static void __object_put(struct object *obj) + +{ + + if (--obj->refcnt == 0) + + kfree(obj); + +} + + + +static void __object_get(struct object *obj) + +{ + + obj->refcnt++; + +} + + + +void object_put(struct object *obj) + +{ + + unsigned long flags; + + + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + + __object_put(obj); + + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + +} + + + +void object_get(struct object *obj) + +{ + + unsigned long flags; + + + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + + __object_get(obj); + + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + +} + + + /* Must be holding cache_lock */ + static struct object *__cache_find(int id) + { + @@ -35,6 +65,7 @@ + { + BUG_ON(!obj); + list_del(&obj->list); + + __object_put(obj); + cache_num--; + } + + @@ -63,6 +94,7 @@ + strlcpy(obj->name, name, sizeof(obj->name)); + obj->id = id; + obj->popularity = 0; + + obj->refcnt = 1; /* The cache holds a reference */ + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + __cache_add(obj); + @@ -79,18 +111,15 @@ + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + } + + -int cache_find(int id, char *name) + +struct object *cache_find(int id) + { + struct object *obj; + - int ret = -ENOENT; + unsigned long flags; + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + obj = __cache_find(id); + - if (obj) { + - ret = 0; + - strcpy(name, obj->name); + - } + + if (obj) + + __object_get(obj); + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + - return ret; + + return obj; + } + +Abbiamo incapsulato il contatore di riferimenti nelle tipiche funzioni +di 'get' e 'put'. Ora possiamo ritornare l'oggetto da :c:func:`cache_find()` +col vantaggio che l'utente può dormire trattenendo l'oggetto (per esempio, +:c:func:`copy_to_user()` per copiare il nome verso lo spazio utente). + +Un altro punto da notare è che ho detto che il contatore dovrebbe incrementarsi +per ogni puntatore ad un oggetto: quindi il contatore di riferimenti è 1 +quando l'oggetto viene inserito nella memoria. In altre versione il framework +non trattiene un riferimento per se, ma diventa più complicato. + +Usare operazioni atomiche per il contatore di riferimenti +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +In sostanza, :c:type:`atomic_t` viene usato come contatore di riferimenti. +Ci sono un certo numbero di operazioni atomiche definite +in ``include/asm/atomic.h``: queste sono garantite come atomiche su qualsiasi +processore del sistema, quindi non sono necessari i *lock*. In questo caso è +più semplice rispetto all'uso degli spinlock, benché l'uso degli spinlock +sia più elegante per casi non banali. Le funzioni :c:func:`atomic_inc()` e +:c:func:`atomic_dec_and_test()` vengono usate al posto dei tipici operatori di +incremento e decremento, e i *lock* non sono più necessari per proteggere il +contatore stesso. + +:: + + --- cache.c.refcnt 2003-12-09 15:00:35.000000000 +1100 + +++ cache.c.refcnt-atomic 2003-12-11 15:49:42.000000000 +1100 + @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ + struct object + { + struct list_head list; + - unsigned int refcnt; + + atomic_t refcnt; + int id; + char name[32]; + int popularity; + @@ -18,33 +18,15 @@ + static unsigned int cache_num = 0; + #define MAX_CACHE_SIZE 10 + + -static void __object_put(struct object *obj) + -{ + - if (--obj->refcnt == 0) + - kfree(obj); + -} + - + -static void __object_get(struct object *obj) + -{ + - obj->refcnt++; + -} + - + void object_put(struct object *obj) + { + - unsigned long flags; + - + - spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + - __object_put(obj); + - spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + + if (atomic_dec_and_test(&obj->refcnt)) + + kfree(obj); + } + + void object_get(struct object *obj) + { + - unsigned long flags; + - + - spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + - __object_get(obj); + - spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + + atomic_inc(&obj->refcnt); + } + + /* Must be holding cache_lock */ + @@ -65,7 +47,7 @@ + { + BUG_ON(!obj); + list_del(&obj->list); + - __object_put(obj); + + object_put(obj); + cache_num--; + } + + @@ -94,7 +76,7 @@ + strlcpy(obj->name, name, sizeof(obj->name)); + obj->id = id; + obj->popularity = 0; + - obj->refcnt = 1; /* The cache holds a reference */ + + atomic_set(&obj->refcnt, 1); /* The cache holds a reference */ + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + __cache_add(obj); + @@ -119,7 +101,7 @@ + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + obj = __cache_find(id); + if (obj) + - __object_get(obj); + + object_get(obj); + spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + return obj; + } + +Proteggere l'oggetto stesso +--------------------------- + +In questo esempio, assumiamo che gli oggetti (ad eccezione del contatore +di riferimenti) non cambino mai dopo la loro creazione. Se vogliamo permettere +al nome di cambiare abbiamo tre possibilità: + +- Si può togliere static da ``cache_lock`` e dire agli utenti che devono + trattenere il *lock* prima di modificare il nome di un oggetto. + +- Si può fornire una funzione :c:func:`cache_obj_rename()` che prende il + *lock* e cambia il nome per conto del chiamante; si dirà poi agli utenti + di usare questa funzione. + +- Si può decidere che ``cache_lock`` protegge solo la memoria stessa, ed + un altro *lock* è necessario per la protezione del nome. + +Teoricamente, possiamo avere un *lock* per ogni campo e per ogni oggetto. +In pratica, le varianti più comuni sono: + +- un *lock* che protegge l'infrastruttura (la lista ``cache`` di questo + esempio) e gli oggetti. Questo è quello che abbiamo fatto finora. + +- un *lock* che protegge l'infrastruttura (inclusi i puntatori alla lista + negli oggetti), e un *lock* nell'oggetto per proteggere il resto + dell'oggetto stesso. + +- *lock* multipli per proteggere l'infrastruttura (per esempio un *lock* + per ogni lista), possibilmente con un *lock* per oggetto. + +Qui di seguito un'implementazione con "un lock per oggetto": + +:: + + --- cache.c.refcnt-atomic 2003-12-11 15:50:54.000000000 +1100 + +++ cache.c.perobjectlock 2003-12-11 17:15:03.000000000 +1100 + @@ -6,11 +6,17 @@ + + struct object + { + + /* These two protected by cache_lock. */ + struct list_head list; + + int popularity; + + + atomic_t refcnt; + + + + /* Doesn't change once created. */ + int id; + + + + spinlock_t lock; /* Protects the name */ + char name[32]; + - int popularity; + }; + + static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(cache_lock); + @@ -77,6 +84,7 @@ + obj->id = id; + obj->popularity = 0; + atomic_set(&obj->refcnt, 1); /* The cache holds a reference */ + + spin_lock_init(&obj->lock); + + spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + __cache_add(obj); + +Da notare che ho deciso che il contatore di popolarità dovesse essere +protetto da ``cache_lock`` piuttosto che dal *lock* dell'oggetto; questo +perché è logicamente parte dell'infrastruttura (come +:c:type:`struct list_head <list_head>` nell'oggetto). In questo modo, +in :c:func:`__cache_add()`, non ho bisogno di trattenere il *lock* di ogni +oggetto mentre si cerca il meno popolare. + +Ho anche deciso che il campo id è immutabile, quindi non ho bisogno di +trattenere il lock dell'oggetto quando si usa :c:func:`__cache_find()` +per leggere questo campo; il *lock* dell'oggetto è usato solo dal chiamante +che vuole leggere o scrivere il campo name. + +Inoltre, da notare che ho aggiunto un commento che descrive i dati che sono +protetti dal *lock*. Questo è estremamente importante in quanto descrive il +comportamento del codice, che altrimenti sarebbe di difficile comprensione +leggendo solamente il codice. E come dice Alan Cox: “Lock data, not code”. + +Problemi comuni +=============== + +.. _`it_deadlock`: + +Stallo: semplice ed avanzato +---------------------------- + +Esiste un tipo di baco dove un pezzo di codice tenta di trattenere uno +spinlock due volte: questo rimarrà in attesa attiva per sempre aspettando che +il *lock* venga rilasciato (in Linux spinlocks, rwlocks e mutex non sono +ricorsivi). +Questo è facile da diagnosticare: non è uno di quei problemi che ti tengono +sveglio 5 notti a parlare da solo. + +Un caso un pochino più complesso; immaginate d'avere una spazio condiviso +fra un softirq ed il contesto utente. Se usate :c:func:`spin_lock()` per +proteggerlo, il contesto utente potrebbe essere interrotto da un softirq +mentre trattiene il lock, da qui il softirq rimarrà in attesa attiva provando +ad acquisire il *lock* già trattenuto nel contesto utente. + +Questi casi sono chiamati stalli (*deadlock*), e come mostrato qui sopra, +può succedere anche con un solo processore (Ma non sui sistemi +monoprocessore perché gli spinlock spariscano quando il kernel è compilato +con ``CONFIG_SMP``\ =n. Nonostante ciò, nel secondo caso avrete comunque +una corruzione dei dati). + +Questi casi sono facili da diagnosticare; sui sistemi multi-processore +il supervisione (*watchdog*) o l'opzione di compilazione ``DEBUG_SPINLOCK`` +(``include/linux/spinlock.h``) permettono di scovare immediatamente quando +succedono. + +Esiste un caso più complesso che è conosciuto come l'abbraccio della morte; +questo coinvolge due o più *lock*. Diciamo che avete un vettore di hash in cui +ogni elemento è uno spinlock a cui è associata una lista di elementi con lo +stesso hash. In un gestore di interruzioni software, dovete modificare un +oggetto e spostarlo su un altro hash; quindi dovrete trattenete lo spinlock +del vecchio hash e di quello nuovo, quindi rimuovere l'oggetto dal vecchio ed +inserirlo nel nuovo. + +Qui abbiamo due problemi. Primo, se il vostro codice prova a spostare un +oggetto all'interno della stessa lista, otterrete uno stallo visto che +tenterà di trattenere lo stesso *lock* due volte. Secondo, se la stessa +interruzione software su un altro processore sta tentando di spostare +un altro oggetto nella direzione opposta, potrebbe accadere quanto segue: + ++---------------------------------+---------------------------------+ +| CPU 1 | CPU 2 | ++=================================+=================================+ +| Trattiene *lock* A -> OK | Trattiene *lock* B -> OK | ++---------------------------------+---------------------------------+ +| Trattiene *lock* B -> attesa | Trattiene *lock* A -> attesa | ++---------------------------------+---------------------------------+ + +Table: Conseguenze + +Entrambe i processori rimarranno in attesa attiva sul *lock* per sempre, +aspettando che l'altro lo rilasci. Sembra e puzza come un blocco totale. + +Prevenire gli stalli +-------------------- + +I libri di testo vi diranno che se trattenete i *lock* sempre nello stesso +ordine non avrete mai un simile stallo. La pratica vi dirà che questo +approccio non funziona all'ingrandirsi del sistema: quando creo un nuovo +*lock* non ne capisco abbastanza del kernel per dire in quale dei 5000 *lock* +si incastrerà. + +I *lock* migliori sono quelli incapsulati: non vengono esposti nei file di +intestazione, e non vengono mai trattenuti fuori dallo stesso file. Potete +rileggere questo codice e vedere che non ci sarà mai uno stallo perché +non tenterà mai di trattenere un altro *lock* quando lo ha già. +Le persone che usano il vostro codice non devono nemmeno sapere che voi +state usando dei *lock*. + +Un classico problema deriva dall'uso di *callback* e di *hook*: se li +chiamate mentre trattenete un *lock*, rischiate uno stallo o un abbraccio +della morte (chi lo sa cosa farà una *callback*?). + +Ossessiva prevenzione degli stalli +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Gli stalli sono un problema, ma non così terribile come la corruzione dei dati. +Un pezzo di codice trattiene un *lock* di lettura, cerca in una lista, +fallisce nel trovare quello che vuole, quindi rilascia il *lock* di lettura, +trattiene un *lock* di scrittura ed inserisce un oggetto; questo genere di +codice presenta una corsa critica. + +Se non riuscite a capire il perché, per favore state alla larga dal mio +codice. + +corsa fra temporizzatori: un passatempo del kernel +-------------------------------------------------- + +I temporizzatori potrebbero avere dei problemi con le corse critiche. +Considerate una collezione di oggetti (liste, hash, eccetera) dove ogni oggetto +ha un temporizzatore che sta per distruggerlo. + +Se volete eliminare l'intera collezione (diciamo quando rimuovete un modulo), +potreste fare come segue:: + + /* THIS CODE BAD BAD BAD BAD: IF IT WAS ANY WORSE IT WOULD USE + HUNGARIAN NOTATION */ + spin_lock_bh(&list_lock); + + while (list) { + struct foo *next = list->next; + del_timer(&list->timer); + kfree(list); + list = next; + } + + spin_unlock_bh(&list_lock); + +Primo o poi, questo esploderà su un sistema multiprocessore perché un +temporizzatore potrebbe essere già partiro prima di :c:func:`spin_lock_bh()`, +e prenderà il *lock* solo dopo :c:func:`spin_unlock_bh()`, e cercherà +di eliminare il suo oggetto (che però è già stato eliminato). + +Questo può essere evitato controllando il valore di ritorno di +:c:func:`del_timer()`: se ritorna 1, il temporizzatore è stato già +rimosso. Se 0, significa (in questo caso) che il temporizzatore è in +esecuzione, quindi possiamo fare come segue:: + + retry: + spin_lock_bh(&list_lock); + + while (list) { + struct foo *next = list->next; + if (!del_timer(&list->timer)) { + /* Give timer a chance to delete this */ + spin_unlock_bh(&list_lock); + goto retry; + } + kfree(list); + list = next; + } + + spin_unlock_bh(&list_lock); + +Un altro problema è l'eliminazione dei temporizzatori che si riavviano +da soli (chiamando :c:func:`add_timer()` alla fine della loro esecuzione). +Dato che questo è un problema abbastanza comune con una propensione +alle corse critiche, dovreste usare :c:func:`del_timer_sync()` +(``include/linux/timer.h``) per gestire questo caso. Questa ritorna il +numero di volte che il temporizzatore è stato interrotto prima che +fosse in grado di fermarlo senza che si riavviasse. + +Velocità della sincronizzazione +=============================== + +Ci sono tre cose importanti da tenere in considerazione quando si valuta +la velocità d'esecuzione di un pezzo di codice che necessita di +sincronizzazione. La prima è la concorrenza: quante cose rimangono in attesa +mentre qualcuno trattiene un *lock*. La seconda è il tempo necessario per +acquisire (senza contese) e rilasciare un *lock*. La terza è di usare meno +*lock* o di più furbi. Immagino che i *lock* vengano usati regolarmente, +altrimenti, non sareste interessati all'efficienza. + +La concorrenza dipende da quanto a lungo un *lock* è trattenuto: dovreste +trattenere un *lock* solo il tempo minimo necessario ma non un istante in più. +Nella memoria dell'esempio precedente, creiamo gli oggetti senza trattenere +il *lock*, poi acquisiamo il *lock* quando siamo pronti per inserirlo nella +lista. + +Il tempo di acquisizione di un *lock* dipende da quanto danno fa +l'operazione sulla *pipeline* (ovvero stalli della *pipeline*) e quant'è +probabile che il processore corrente sia stato anche l'ultimo ad acquisire +il *lock* (in pratica, il *lock* è nella memoria cache del processore +corrente?): su sistemi multi-processore questa probabilità precipita +rapidamente. Consideriamo un processore Intel Pentium III a 700Mhz: questo +esegue un'istruzione in 0.7ns, un incremento atomico richiede 58ns, acquisire +un *lock* che è nella memoria cache del processore richiede 160ns, e un +trasferimento dalla memoria cache di un altro processore richiede altri +170/360ns (Leggetevi l'articolo di Paul McKenney's `Linux Journal RCU +article <http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=6993>`__). + +Questi due obiettivi sono in conflitto: trattenere un *lock* per il minor +tempo possibile potrebbe richiedere la divisione in più *lock* per diverse +parti (come nel nostro ultimo esempio con un *lock* per ogni oggetto), +ma questo aumenta il numero di acquisizioni di *lock*, ed il risultato +spesso è che tutto è più lento che con un singolo *lock*. Questo è un altro +argomento in favore della semplicità quando si parla di sincronizzazione. + +Il terzo punto è discusso di seguito: ci sono alcune tecniche per ridurre +il numero di sincronizzazioni che devono essere fatte. + +Read/Write Lock Variants +------------------------ + +Sia gli spinlock che i mutex hanno una variante per la lettura/scrittura +(read/write): ``rwlock_t`` e :c:type:`struct rw_semaphore <rw_semaphore>`. +Queste dividono gli utenti in due categorie: i lettori e gli scrittori. +Se state solo leggendo i dati, potete acquisire il *lock* di lettura, ma +per scrivere avrete bisogno del *lock* di scrittura. Molti possono trattenere +il *lock* di lettura, ma solo uno scrittore alla volta può trattenere +quello di scrittura. + +Se il vostro codice si divide chiaramente in codice per lettori e codice +per scrittori (come nel nostro esempio), e il *lock* dei lettori viene +trattenuto per molto tempo, allora l'uso di questo tipo di *lock* può aiutare. +Questi sono leggermente più lenti rispetto alla loro versione normale, quindi +nella pratica l'uso di ``rwlock_t`` non ne vale la pena. + +Evitare i *lock*: Read Copy Update +-------------------------------------------- + +Esiste un metodo di sincronizzazione per letture e scritture detto +Read Copy Update. Con l'uso della tecnica RCU, i lettori possono scordarsi +completamente di trattenere i *lock*; dato che nel nostro esempio ci +aspettiamo d'avere più lettore che scrittori (altrimenti questa memoria +sarebbe uno spreco) possiamo dire che questo meccanismo permette +un'ottimizzazione. + +Come facciamo a sbarazzarci dei *lock* di lettura? Sbarazzarsi dei *lock* di +lettura significa che uno scrittore potrebbe cambiare la lista sotto al naso +dei lettori. Questo è abbastanza semplice: possiamo leggere una lista +concatenata se lo scrittore aggiunge elementi alla fine e con certe +precauzioni. Per esempio, aggiungendo ``new`` ad una lista concatenata +chiamata ``list``:: + + new->next = list->next; + wmb(); + list->next = new; + +La funzione :c:func:`wmb()` è una barriera di sincronizzazione delle +scritture. Questa garantisce che la prima operazione (impostare l'elemento +``next`` del nuovo elemento) venga completata e vista da tutti i processori +prima che venga eseguita la seconda operazione (che sarebbe quella di mettere +il nuovo elemento nella lista). Questo è importante perché i moderni +compilatori ed i moderni processori possono, entrambe, riordinare le istruzioni +se non vengono istruiti altrimenti: vogliamo che i lettori non vedano +completamente il nuovo elemento; oppure che lo vedano correttamente e quindi +il puntatore ``next`` deve puntare al resto della lista. + +Fortunatamente, c'è una funzione che fa questa operazione sulle liste +:c:type:`struct list_head <list_head>`: :c:func:`list_add_rcu()` +(``include/linux/list.h``). + +Rimuovere un elemento dalla lista è anche più facile: sostituiamo il puntatore +al vecchio elemento con quello del suo successore, e i lettori vedranno +l'elemento o lo salteranno. + +:: + + list->next = old->next; + +La funzione :c:func:`list_del_rcu()` (``include/linux/list.h``) fa esattamente +questo (la versione normale corrompe il vecchio oggetto, e non vogliamo che +accada). + +Anche i lettori devono stare attenti: alcuni processori potrebbero leggere +attraverso il puntatore ``next`` il contenuto dell'elemento successivo +troppo presto, ma non accorgersi che il contenuto caricato è sbagliato quando +il puntatore ``next`` viene modificato alla loro spalle. Ancora una volta +c'è una funzione che viene in vostro aiuto :c:func:`list_for_each_entry_rcu()` +(``include/linux/list.h``). Ovviamente, gli scrittori possono usare +:c:func:`list_for_each_entry()` dato che non ci possono essere due scrittori +in contemporanea. + +Il nostro ultimo dilemma è il seguente: quando possiamo realmente distruggere +l'elemento rimosso? Ricordate, un lettore potrebbe aver avuto accesso a questo +elemento proprio ora: se eliminiamo questo elemento ed il puntatore ``next`` +cambia, il lettore salterà direttamente nella spazzatura e scoppierà. Dobbiamo +aspettare finché tutti i lettori che stanno attraversando la lista abbiano +finito. Utilizziamo :c:func:`call_rcu()` per registrare una funzione di +richiamo che distrugga l'oggetto quando tutti i lettori correnti hanno +terminato. In alternative, potrebbe essere usata la funzione +:c:func:`synchronize_rcu()` che blocca l'esecuzione finché tutti i lettori +non terminano di ispezionare la lista. + +Ma come fa l'RCU a sapere quando i lettori sono finiti? Il meccanismo è +il seguente: innanzi tutto i lettori accedono alla lista solo fra la coppia +:c:func:`rcu_read_lock()`/:c:func:`rcu_read_unlock()` che disabilita la +prelazione così che i lettori non vengano sospesi mentre stanno leggendo +la lista. + +Poi, l'RCU aspetta finché tutti i processori non abbiano dormito almeno +una volta; a questo punto, dato che i lettori non possono dormire, possiamo +dedurre che un qualsiasi lettore che abbia consultato la lista durante la +rimozione abbia già terminato, quindi la *callback* viene eseguita. Il vero +codice RCU è un po' più ottimizzato di così, ma questa è l'idea di fondo. + +:: + + --- cache.c.perobjectlock 2003-12-11 17:15:03.000000000 +1100 + +++ cache.c.rcupdate 2003-12-11 17:55:14.000000000 +1100 + @@ -1,15 +1,18 @@ + #include <linux/list.h> + #include <linux/slab.h> + #include <linux/string.h> + +#include <linux/rcupdate.h> + #include <linux/mutex.h> + #include <asm/errno.h> + + struct object + { + - /* These two protected by cache_lock. */ + + /* This is protected by RCU */ + struct list_head list; + int popularity; + + + struct rcu_head rcu; + + + atomic_t refcnt; + + /* Doesn't change once created. */ + @@ -40,7 +43,7 @@ + { + struct object *i; + + - list_for_each_entry(i, &cache, list) { + + list_for_each_entry_rcu(i, &cache, list) { + if (i->id == id) { + i->popularity++; + return i; + @@ -49,19 +52,25 @@ + return NULL; + } + + +/* Final discard done once we know no readers are looking. */ + +static void cache_delete_rcu(void *arg) + +{ + + object_put(arg); + +} + + + /* Must be holding cache_lock */ + static void __cache_delete(struct object *obj) + { + BUG_ON(!obj); + - list_del(&obj->list); + - object_put(obj); + + list_del_rcu(&obj->list); + cache_num--; + + call_rcu(&obj->rcu, cache_delete_rcu); + } + + /* Must be holding cache_lock */ + static void __cache_add(struct object *obj) + { + - list_add(&obj->list, &cache); + + list_add_rcu(&obj->list, &cache); + if (++cache_num > MAX_CACHE_SIZE) { + struct object *i, *outcast = NULL; + list_for_each_entry(i, &cache, list) { + @@ -104,12 +114,11 @@ + struct object *cache_find(int id) + { + struct object *obj; + - unsigned long flags; + + - spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); + + rcu_read_lock(); + obj = __cache_find(id); + if (obj) + object_get(obj); + - spin_unlock_irqrestore(&cache_lock, flags); + + rcu_read_unlock(); + return obj; + } + +Da notare che i lettori modificano il campo popularity nella funzione +:c:func:`__cache_find()`, e ora non trattiene alcun *lock*. Una soluzione +potrebbe essere quella di rendere la variabile ``atomic_t``, ma per l'uso +che ne abbiamo fatto qui, non ci interessano queste corse critiche perché un +risultato approssimativo è comunque accettabile, quindi non l'ho cambiato. + +Il risultato è che la funzione :c:func:`cache_find()` non ha bisogno di alcuna +sincronizzazione con le altre funzioni, quindi è veloce su un sistema +multi-processore tanto quanto lo sarebbe su un sistema mono-processore. + +Esiste un'ulteriore ottimizzazione possibile: vi ricordate il codice originale +della nostra memoria dove non c'erano contatori di riferimenti e il chiamante +semplicemente tratteneva il *lock* prima di accedere ad un oggetto? Questo è +ancora possibile: se trattenete un *lock* nessuno potrà cancellare l'oggetto, +quindi non avete bisogno di incrementare e decrementare il contatore di +riferimenti. + +Ora, dato che il '*lock* di lettura' di un RCU non fa altro che disabilitare +la prelazione, un chiamante che ha sempre la prelazione disabilitata fra le +chiamate :c:func:`cache_find()` e :c:func:`object_put()` non necessita +di incrementare e decrementare il contatore di riferimenti. Potremmo +esporre la funzione :c:func:`__cache_find()` dichiarandola non-static, +e quel chiamante potrebbe usare direttamente questa funzione. + +Il beneficio qui sta nel fatto che il contatore di riferimenti no +viene scritto: l'oggetto non viene alterato in alcun modo e quindi diventa +molto più veloce su sistemi molti-processore grazie alla loro memoria cache. + +.. _`it_per-cpu`: + +Dati per processore +------------------- + +Un'altra tecnica comunemente usata per evitare la sincronizzazione è quella +di duplicare le informazioni per ogni processore. Per esempio, se volete +avere un contatore di qualcosa, potreste utilizzare uno spinlock ed un +singolo contatore. Facile e pulito. + +Se questo dovesse essere troppo lento (solitamente non lo è, ma se avete +dimostrato che lo è devvero), potreste usare un contatore per ogni processore +e quindi non sarebbe più necessaria la mutua esclusione. Vedere +:c:func:`DEFINE_PER_CPU()`, :c:func:`get_cpu_var()` e :c:func:`put_cpu_var()` +(``include/linux/percpu.h``). + +Il tipo di dato ``local_t``, la funzione :c:func:`cpu_local_inc()` e tutte +le altre funzioni associate, sono di particolare utilità per semplici contatori +per-processore; su alcune architetture sono anche più efficienti +(``include/asm/local.h``). + +Da notare che non esiste un modo facile ed affidabile per ottenere il valore +di un simile contatore senza introdurre altri *lock*. In alcuni casi questo +non è un problema. + +Dati che sono usati prevalentemente dai gestori d'interruzioni +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +Se i dati vengono utilizzati sempre dallo stesso gestore d'interruzioni, +allora i *lock* non vi servono per niente: il kernel già vi garantisce che +il gestore d'interruzione non verrà eseguito in contemporanea su diversi +processori. + +Manfred Spraul fa notare che potreste comunque comportarvi così anche +se i dati vengono occasionalmente utilizzati da un contesto utente o +da un'interruzione software. Il gestore d'interruzione non utilizza alcun +*lock*, e tutti gli altri accessi verranno fatti così:: + + spin_lock(&lock); + disable_irq(irq); + ... + enable_irq(irq); + spin_unlock(&lock); + +La funzione :c:func:`disable_irq()` impedisce al gestore d'interruzioni +d'essere eseguito (e aspetta che finisca nel caso fosse in esecuzione su +un altro processore). Lo spinlock, invece, previene accessi simultanei. +Naturalmente, questo è più lento della semplice chiamata +:c:func:`spin_lock_irq()`, quindi ha senso solo se questo genere di accesso +è estremamente raro. + +.. _`it_sleeping-things`: + +Quali funzioni possono essere chiamate in modo sicuro dalle interruzioni? +========================================================================= + +Molte funzioni del kernel dormono (in sostanza, chiamano ``schedule()``) +direttamente od indirettamente: non potete chiamarle se trattenere uno +spinlock o avete la prelazione disabilitata, mai. Questo significa che +dovete necessariamente essere nel contesto utente: chiamarle da un +contesto d'interruzione è illegale. + +Alcune funzioni che dormono +--------------------------- + +Le più comuni sono elencate qui di seguito, ma solitamente dovete leggere +il codice per scoprire se altre chiamate sono sicure. Se chiunque altro +le chiami dorme, allora dovreste poter dormire anche voi. In particolar +modo, le funzioni di registrazione e deregistrazione solitamente si +aspettano d'essere chiamante da un contesto utente e quindi che possono +dormire. + +- Accessi allo spazio utente: + + - :c:func:`copy_from_user()` + + - :c:func:`copy_to_user()` + + - :c:func:`get_user()` + + - :c:func:`put_user()` + +- :c:func:`kmalloc(GFP_KERNEL) <kmalloc>` + +- :c:func:`mutex_lock_interruptible()` and + :c:func:`mutex_lock()` + + C'è anche :c:func:`mutex_trylock()` che però non dorme. + Comunque, non deve essere usata in un contesto d'interruzione dato + che la sua implementazione non è sicura in quel contesto. + Anche :c:func:`mutex_unlock()` non dorme mai. Non può comunque essere + usata in un contesto d'interruzione perché un mutex deve essere rilasciato + dallo stesso processo che l'ha acquisito. + +Alcune funzioni che non dormono +------------------------------- + +Alcune funzioni possono essere chiamate tranquillamente da qualsiasi +contesto, o trattenendo un qualsiasi *lock*. + +- :c:func:`printk()` + +- :c:func:`kfree()` + +- :c:func:`add_timer()` e :c:func:`del_timer()` + +Riferimento per l'API dei Mutex +=============================== + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/mutex.h + :internal: + +.. kernel-doc:: kernel/locking/mutex.c + :export: + +Riferimento per l'API dei Futex +=============================== + +.. kernel-doc:: kernel/futex.c + :internal: + +Approfondimenti +=============== + +- ``Documentation/locking/spinlocks.txt``: la guida di Linus Torvalds agli + spinlock del kernel. + +- Unix Systems for Modern Architectures: Symmetric Multiprocessing and + Caching for Kernel Programmers. + + L'introduzione alla sincronizzazione a livello di kernel di Curt Schimmel + è davvero ottima (non è scritta per Linux, ma approssimativamente si adatta + a tutte le situazioni). Il libro è costoso, ma vale ogni singolo spicciolo + per capire la sincronizzazione nei sistemi multi-processore. + [ISBN: 0201633388] + +Ringraziamenti +============== + +Grazie a Telsa Gwynne per aver formattato questa guida in DocBook, averla +pulita e aggiunto un po' di stile. + +Grazie a Martin Pool, Philipp Rumpf, Stephen Rothwell, Paul Mackerras, +Ruedi Aschwanden, Alan Cox, Manfred Spraul, Tim Waugh, Pete Zaitcev, +James Morris, Robert Love, Paul McKenney, John Ashby per aver revisionato, +corretto, maledetto e commentato. + +Grazie alla congrega per non aver avuto alcuna influenza su questo documento. + +Glossario +========= + +prelazione + Prima del kernel 2.5, o quando ``CONFIG_PREEMPT`` non è impostato, i processi + in contesto utente non si avvicendano nell'esecuzione (in pratica, il + processo userà il processore fino al proprio termine, a meno che non ci siano + delle interruzioni). Con l'aggiunta di ``CONFIG_PREEMPT`` nella versione + 2.5.4 questo è cambiato: quando si è in contesto utente, processi con una + priorità maggiore possono subentrare nell'esecuzione: gli spinlock furono + cambiati per disabilitare la prelazioni, anche su sistemi monoprocessore. + +bh + Bottom Half: per ragioni storiche, le funzioni che contengono '_bh' nel + loro nome ora si riferiscono a qualsiasi interruzione software; per esempio, + :c:func:`spin_lock_bh()` blocca qualsiasi interuzione software sul processore + corrente. I *Bottom Halves* sono deprecati, e probabilmente verranno + sostituiti dai tasklet. In un dato momento potrà esserci solo un + *bottom half* in esecuzione. + +contesto d'interruzione + Non è il contesto utente: qui si processano le interruzioni hardware e + software. La macro :c:func:`in_interrupt()` ritorna vero. + +contesto utente + Il kernel che esegue qualcosa per conto di un particolare processo (per + esempio una chiamata di sistema) o di un thread del kernel. Potete + identificare il processo con la macro ``current``. Da non confondere + con lo spazio utente. Può essere interrotto sia da interruzioni software + che hardware. + +interruzione hardware + Richiesta di interruzione hardware. :c:func:`in_irq()` ritorna vero in un + gestore d'interruzioni hardware. + +interruzione software / softirq + Gestore di interruzioni software: :c:func:`in_irq()` ritorna falso; + :c:func:`in_softirq()` ritorna vero. I tasklet e le softirq sono entrambi + considerati 'interruzioni software'. + + In soldoni, un softirq è uno delle 32 interruzioni software che possono + essere eseguite su più processori in contemporanea. A volte si usa per + riferirsi anche ai tasklet (in pratica tutte le interruzioni software). + +monoprocessore / UP + (Uni-Processor) un solo processore, ovvero non è SMP. (``CONFIG_SMP=n``). + +multi-processore / SMP + (Symmetric Multi-Processor) kernel compilati per sistemi multi-processore + (``CONFIG_SMP=y``). + +spazio utente + Un processo che esegue il proprio codice fuori dal kernel. + +tasklet + Un'interruzione software registrabile dinamicamente che ha la garanzia + d'essere eseguita solo su un processore alla volta. + +timer + Un'interruzione software registrabile dinamicamente che viene eseguita + (circa) in un determinato momento. Quando è in esecuzione è come un tasklet + (infatti, sono chiamati da ``TIMER_SOFTIRQ``). diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt index 921739d00f69..7f01fb1c1084 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt @@ -1891,22 +1891,22 @@ Mandatory 배리어들은 SMP 시스템에서도 UP 시스템에서도 SMP 효 /* 소유권을 수정 */ desc->status = DEVICE_OWN; - /* MMIO 를 통해 디바이스에 공지를 하기 전에 메모리를 동기화 */ - wmb(); - /* 업데이트된 디스크립터의 디바이스에 공지 */ writel(DESC_NOTIFY, doorbell); } dma_rmb() 는 디스크립터로부터 데이터를 읽어오기 전에 디바이스가 소유권을 - 내놓았음을 보장하게 하고, dma_wmb() 는 디바이스가 자신이 소유권을 다시 - 가졌음을 보기 전에 디스크립터에 데이터가 쓰였음을 보장합니다. wmb() 는 - 캐시 일관성이 없는 (cache incoherent) MMIO 영역에 쓰기를 시도하기 전에 - 캐시 일관성이 있는 메모리 (cache coherent memory) 쓰기가 완료되었음을 - 보장해주기 위해 필요합니다. - - consistent memory 에 대한 자세한 내용을 위해선 Documentation/DMA-API.txt - 문서를 참고하세요. + 내려놓았을 것을 보장하고, dma_wmb() 는 디바이스가 자신이 소유권을 다시 + 가졌음을 보기 전에 디스크립터에 데이터가 쓰였을 것을 보장합니다. 참고로, + writel() 을 사용하면 캐시 일관성이 있는 메모리 (cache coherent memory) + 쓰기가 MMIO 영역에의 쓰기 전에 완료되었을 것을 보장하므로 writel() 앞에 + wmb() 를 실행할 필요가 없음을 알아두시기 바랍니다. writel() 보다 비용이 + 저렴한 writel_relaxed() 는 이런 보장을 제공하지 않으므로 여기선 사용되지 + 않아야 합니다. + + writel_relaxed() 와 같은 완화된 I/O 접근자들에 대한 자세한 내용을 위해서는 + "커널 I/O 배리어의 효과" 섹션을, consistent memory 에 대한 자세한 내용을 + 위해선 Documentation/DMA-API.txt 문서를 참고하세요. MMIO 쓰기 배리어 diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/oops-tracing.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/oops-tracing.txt index 41ab53cc0e83..a893f04dfd5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/oops-tracing.txt +++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/oops-tracing.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -Chinese translated version of Documentation/admin-guide/oops-tracing.rst +Chinese translated version of Documentation/admin-guide/bug-hunting.rst If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ or if there is a problem with the translation. Chinese maintainer: Dave Young <hidave.darkstar@gmail.com> --------------------------------------------------------------------- -Documentation/admin-guide/oops-tracing.rst 的中文翻译 +Documentation/admin-guide/bug-hunting.rst 的中文翻译 如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文 交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻 diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt index 635e57493709..b8cb38a98c19 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ $ rm configs/<config name>.<number>/<function> where <config name>.<number> specify the configuration and <function> is a symlink to a function being removed from the configuration, e.g.: -$ rm configfs/c.1/ncm.usb0 +$ rm configs/c.1/ncm.usb0 ... ... diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt b/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt index 349f3104fa4f..ab100d6ee436 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/usb-serial.txt @@ -418,15 +418,6 @@ Current status: why it is wise to cut down on the rate used is wise for large transfers until this is settled. -Options supported: - If this driver is compiled as a module you can pass the following - options to it: - debug - extra verbose debugging info - (default: 0; nonzero enables) - use_lowlatency - use low_latency flag to speed up tty layer - when reading from the device. - (default: 0; nonzero enables) - See http://www.uuhaus.de/linux/palmconnect.html for up-to-date information on this driver. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index 495b7742ab58..c664064f76fb 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt @@ -835,11 +835,13 @@ struct kvm_clock_data { Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW -Architectures: x86 -Type: vm ioctl +Architectures: x86, arm, arm64 +Type: vcpu ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_event (out) Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error +X86: + Gets currently pending exceptions, interrupts, and NMIs as well as related states of the vcpu. @@ -881,15 +883,64 @@ Only two fields are defined in the flags field: - KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SMM may be set in the flags field to signal that smi contains a valid state. +ARM/ARM64: + +If the guest accesses a device that is being emulated by the host kernel in +such a way that a real device would generate a physical SError, KVM may make +a virtual SError pending for that VCPU. This system error interrupt remains +pending until the guest takes the exception by unmasking PSTATE.A. + +Running the VCPU may cause it to take a pending SError, or make an access that +causes an SError to become pending. The event's description is only valid while +the VPCU is not running. + +This API provides a way to read and write the pending 'event' state that is not +visible to the guest. To save, restore or migrate a VCPU the struct representing +the state can be read then written using this GET/SET API, along with the other +guest-visible registers. It is not possible to 'cancel' an SError that has been +made pending. + +A device being emulated in user-space may also wish to generate an SError. To do +this the events structure can be populated by user-space. The current state +should be read first, to ensure no existing SError is pending. If an existing +SError is pending, the architecture's 'Multiple SError interrupts' rules should +be followed. (2.5.3 of DDI0587.a "ARM Reliability, Availability, and +Serviceability (RAS) Specification"). + +SError exceptions always have an ESR value. Some CPUs have the ability to +specify what the virtual SError's ESR value should be. These systems will +advertise KVM_CAP_ARM_INJECT_SERROR_ESR. In this case exception.has_esr will +always have a non-zero value when read, and the agent making an SError pending +should specify the ISS field in the lower 24 bits of exception.serror_esr. If +the system supports KVM_CAP_ARM_INJECT_SERROR_ESR, but user-space sets the events +with exception.has_esr as zero, KVM will choose an ESR. + +Specifying exception.has_esr on a system that does not support it will return +-EINVAL. Setting anything other than the lower 24bits of exception.serror_esr +will return -EINVAL. + +struct kvm_vcpu_events { + struct { + __u8 serror_pending; + __u8 serror_has_esr; + /* Align it to 8 bytes */ + __u8 pad[6]; + __u64 serror_esr; + } exception; + __u32 reserved[12]; +}; + 4.32 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW -Architectures: x86 -Type: vm ioctl +Architectures: x86, arm, arm64 +Type: vcpu ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_event (in) Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error +X86: + Set pending exceptions, interrupts, and NMIs as well as related states of the vcpu. @@ -910,6 +961,13 @@ shall be written into the VCPU. KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SMM can only be set if KVM_CAP_X86_SMM is available. +ARM/ARM64: + +Set the pending SError exception state for this VCPU. It is not possible to +'cancel' an Serror that has been made pending. + +See KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS for the data structure. + 4.33 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS @@ -3561,6 +3619,62 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -ENOENT on deassign if the conn_id isn't registered -EEXIST on assign if the conn_id is already registered +4.114 KVM_GET_NESTED_STATE + +Capability: KVM_CAP_NESTED_STATE +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_nested_state (in/out) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error +Errors: + E2BIG: the total state size (including the fixed-size part of struct + kvm_nested_state) exceeds the value of 'size' specified by + the user; the size required will be written into size. + +struct kvm_nested_state { + __u16 flags; + __u16 format; + __u32 size; + union { + struct kvm_vmx_nested_state vmx; + struct kvm_svm_nested_state svm; + __u8 pad[120]; + }; + __u8 data[0]; +}; + +#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_GUEST_MODE 0x00000001 +#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_RUN_PENDING 0x00000002 + +#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_SMM_GUEST_MODE 0x00000001 +#define KVM_STATE_NESTED_SMM_VMXON 0x00000002 + +struct kvm_vmx_nested_state { + __u64 vmxon_pa; + __u64 vmcs_pa; + + struct { + __u16 flags; + } smm; +}; + +This ioctl copies the vcpu's nested virtualization state from the kernel to +userspace. + +The maximum size of the state, including the fixed-size part of struct +kvm_nested_state, can be retrieved by passing KVM_CAP_NESTED_STATE to +the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl(). + +4.115 KVM_SET_NESTED_STATE + +Capability: KVM_CAP_NESTED_STATE +Architectures: x86 +Type: vcpu ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_nested_state (in) +Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error + +This copies the vcpu's kvm_nested_state struct from userspace to the kernel. For +the definition of struct kvm_nested_state, see KVM_GET_NESTED_STATE. 5. The kvm_run structure ------------------------ @@ -4391,6 +4505,22 @@ all such vmexits. Do not enable KVM_FEATURE_PV_UNHALT if you disable HLT exits. +7.14 KVM_CAP_S390_HPAGE_1M + +Architectures: s390 +Parameters: none +Returns: 0 on success, -EINVAL if hpage module parameter was not set + or cmma is enabled + +With this capability the KVM support for memory backing with 1m pages +through hugetlbfs can be enabled for a VM. After the capability is +enabled, cmma can't be enabled anymore and pfmfi and the storage key +interpretation are disabled. If cmma has already been enabled or the +hpage module parameter is not set to 1, -EINVAL is returned. + +While it is generally possible to create a huge page backed VM without +this capability, the VM will not be able to run. + 8. Other capabilities. ---------------------- @@ -4610,7 +4740,7 @@ This capability indicates that kvm will implement the interfaces to handle reset, migration and nested KVM for branch prediction blocking. The stfle facility 82 should not be provided to the guest without this capability. -8.14 KVM_CAP_HYPERV_TLBFLUSH +8.18 KVM_CAP_HYPERV_TLBFLUSH Architectures: x86 @@ -4618,3 +4748,17 @@ This capability indicates that KVM supports paravirtualized Hyper-V TLB Flush hypercalls: HvFlushVirtualAddressSpace, HvFlushVirtualAddressSpaceEx, HvFlushVirtualAddressList, HvFlushVirtualAddressListEx. + +8.19 KVM_CAP_ARM_INJECT_SERROR_ESR + +Architectures: arm, arm64 + +This capability indicates that userspace can specify (via the +KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS ioctl) the syndrome value reported to the guest when it +takes a virtual SError interrupt exception. +If KVM advertises this capability, userspace can only specify the ISS field for +the ESR syndrome. Other parts of the ESR, such as the EC are generated by the +CPU when the exception is taken. If this virtual SError is taken to EL1 using +AArch64, this value will be reported in the ISS field of ESR_ELx. + +See KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS for more details. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt index ab022dcd0911..97ca1940a0dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt @@ -62,6 +62,10 @@ KVM_FEATURE_ASYNC_PF_VMEXIT || 10 || paravirtualized async PF VM exit || || can be enabled by setting bit 2 || || when writing to msr 0x4b564d02 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +KVM_FEATURE_PV_SEND_IPI || 11 || guest checks this feature bit + || || before using paravirtualized + || || send IPIs. +------------------------------------------------------------------------------ KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE_STABLE_BIT || 24 || host will warn if no guest-side || || per-cpu warps are expected in || || kvmclock. diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic-v3.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic-v3.txt index 2408ab720ef7..ff290b43c8e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic-v3.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic-v3.txt @@ -100,6 +100,14 @@ Groups: Note that distributor fields are not banked, but return the same value regardless of the mpidr used to access the register. + GICD_IIDR.Revision is updated when the KVM implementation is changed in a + way directly observable by the guest or userspace. Userspace should read + GICD_IIDR from KVM and write back the read value to confirm its expected + behavior is aligned with the KVM implementation. Userspace should set + GICD_IIDR before setting any other registers to ensure the expected + behavior. + + The GICD_STATUSR and GICR_STATUSR registers are architecturally defined such that a write of a clear bit has no effect, whereas a write with a set bit clears that value. To allow userspace to freely set the values of these two diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt index b3ce12643553..97b6518148f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/devices/arm-vgic.txt @@ -49,9 +49,15 @@ Groups: index is specified with the vcpu_index field. Note that most distributor fields are not banked, but return the same value regardless of the vcpu_index used to access the register. - Limitations: - - Priorities are not implemented, and registers are RAZ/WI - - Currently only implemented for KVM_DEV_TYPE_ARM_VGIC_V2. + + GICD_IIDR.Revision is updated when the KVM implementation of an emulated + GICv2 is changed in a way directly observable by the guest or userspace. + Userspace should read GICD_IIDR from KVM and write back the read value to + confirm its expected behavior is aligned with the KVM implementation. + Userspace should set GICD_IIDR before setting any other registers (both + KVM_DEV_ARM_VGIC_GRP_DIST_REGS and KVM_DEV_ARM_VGIC_GRP_CPU_REGS) to ensure + the expected behavior. Unless GICD_IIDR has been set from userspace, writes + to the interrupt group registers (GICD_IGROUPR) are ignored. Errors: -ENXIO: Getting or setting this register is not yet supported -EBUSY: One or more VCPUs are running @@ -94,9 +100,6 @@ Groups: use the lower 5 bits to communicate with the KVM device and must shift the value left by 3 places to obtain the actual priority mask level. - Limitations: - - Priorities are not implemented, and registers are RAZ/WI - - Currently only implemented for KVM_DEV_TYPE_ARM_VGIC_V2. Errors: -ENXIO: Getting or setting this register is not yet supported -EBUSY: One or more VCPUs are running diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt index a890529c63ed..da24c138c8d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/hypercalls.txt @@ -121,3 +121,23 @@ compute the CLOCK_REALTIME for its clock, at the same instant. Returns KVM_EOPNOTSUPP if the host does not use TSC clocksource, or if clock type is different than KVM_CLOCK_PAIRING_WALLCLOCK. + +6. KVM_HC_SEND_IPI +------------------------ +Architecture: x86 +Status: active +Purpose: Send IPIs to multiple vCPUs. + +a0: lower part of the bitmap of destination APIC IDs +a1: higher part of the bitmap of destination APIC IDs +a2: the lowest APIC ID in bitmap +a3: APIC ICR + +The hypercall lets a guest send multicast IPIs, with at most 128 +128 destinations per hypercall in 64-bit mode and 64 vCPUs per +hypercall in 32-bit mode. The destinations are represented by a +bitmap contained in the first two arguments (a0 and a1). Bit 0 of +a0 corresponds to the APIC ID in the third argument (a2), bit 1 +corresponds to the APIC ID a2+1, and so on. + +Returns the number of CPUs to which the IPIs were delivered successfully. diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2438 b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2438 index b99f3674c5b4..e64f65a09387 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2438 +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2438 @@ -60,4 +60,4 @@ vad: general purpose A/D input (VAD) vdd: battery input (VDD) After the voltage conversion the value is returned as decimal ASCII. -Note: The value is in mV, so to get a volts the value has to be divided by 10. +Note: To get a volts the value has to be divided by 100. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/intel_rdt_ui.txt b/Documentation/x86/intel_rdt_ui.txt index a16aa2113840..f662d3c530e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/intel_rdt_ui.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/intel_rdt_ui.txt @@ -29,7 +29,11 @@ mount options are: L2 and L3 CDP are controlled seperately. RDT features are orthogonal. A particular system may support only -monitoring, only control, or both monitoring and control. +monitoring, only control, or both monitoring and control. Cache +pseudo-locking is a unique way of using cache control to "pin" or +"lock" data in the cache. Details can be found in +"Cache Pseudo-Locking". + The mount succeeds if either of allocation or monitoring is present, but only those files and directories supported by the system will be created. @@ -65,6 +69,29 @@ related to allocation: some platforms support devices that have their own settings for cache use which can over-ride these bits. +"bit_usage": Annotated capacity bitmasks showing how all + instances of the resource are used. The legend is: + "0" - Corresponding region is unused. When the system's + resources have been allocated and a "0" is found + in "bit_usage" it is a sign that resources are + wasted. + "H" - Corresponding region is used by hardware only + but available for software use. If a resource + has bits set in "shareable_bits" but not all + of these bits appear in the resource groups' + schematas then the bits appearing in + "shareable_bits" but no resource group will + be marked as "H". + "X" - Corresponding region is available for sharing and + used by hardware and software. These are the + bits that appear in "shareable_bits" as + well as a resource group's allocation. + "S" - Corresponding region is used by software + and available for sharing. + "E" - Corresponding region is used exclusively by + one resource group. No sharing allowed. + "P" - Corresponding region is pseudo-locked. No + sharing allowed. Memory bandwitdh(MB) subdirectory contains the following files with respect to allocation: @@ -151,6 +178,9 @@ All groups contain the following files: CPUs to/from this group. As with the tasks file a hierarchy is maintained where MON groups may only include CPUs owned by the parent CTRL_MON group. + When the resouce group is in pseudo-locked mode this file will + only be readable, reflecting the CPUs associated with the + pseudo-locked region. "cpus_list": @@ -163,6 +193,21 @@ When control is enabled all CTRL_MON groups will also contain: A list of all the resources available to this group. Each resource has its own line and format - see below for details. +"size": + Mirrors the display of the "schemata" file to display the size in + bytes of each allocation instead of the bits representing the + allocation. + +"mode": + The "mode" of the resource group dictates the sharing of its + allocations. A "shareable" resource group allows sharing of its + allocations while an "exclusive" resource group does not. A + cache pseudo-locked region is created by first writing + "pseudo-locksetup" to the "mode" file before writing the cache + pseudo-locked region's schemata to the resource group's "schemata" + file. On successful pseudo-locked region creation the mode will + automatically change to "pseudo-locked". + When monitoring is enabled all MON groups will also contain: "mon_data": @@ -379,6 +424,170 @@ L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff L3DATA:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=3c0;3=fffff L3CODE:0=fffff;1=fffff;2=fffff;3=fffff +Cache Pseudo-Locking +-------------------- +CAT enables a user to specify the amount of cache space that an +application can fill. Cache pseudo-locking builds on the fact that a +CPU can still read and write data pre-allocated outside its current +allocated area on a cache hit. With cache pseudo-locking, data can be +preloaded into a reserved portion of cache that no application can +fill, and from that point on will only serve cache hits. The cache +pseudo-locked memory is made accessible to user space where an +application can map it into its virtual address space and thus have +a region of memory with reduced average read latency. + +The creation of a cache pseudo-locked region is triggered by a request +from the user to do so that is accompanied by a schemata of the region +to be pseudo-locked. The cache pseudo-locked region is created as follows: +- Create a CAT allocation CLOSNEW with a CBM matching the schemata + from the user of the cache region that will contain the pseudo-locked + memory. This region must not overlap with any current CAT allocation/CLOS + on the system and no future overlap with this cache region is allowed + while the pseudo-locked region exists. +- Create a contiguous region of memory of the same size as the cache + region. +- Flush the cache, disable hardware prefetchers, disable preemption. +- Make CLOSNEW the active CLOS and touch the allocated memory to load + it into the cache. +- Set the previous CLOS as active. +- At this point the closid CLOSNEW can be released - the cache + pseudo-locked region is protected as long as its CBM does not appear in + any CAT allocation. Even though the cache pseudo-locked region will from + this point on not appear in any CBM of any CLOS an application running with + any CLOS will be able to access the memory in the pseudo-locked region since + the region continues to serve cache hits. +- The contiguous region of memory loaded into the cache is exposed to + user-space as a character device. + +Cache pseudo-locking increases the probability that data will remain +in the cache via carefully configuring the CAT feature and controlling +application behavior. There is no guarantee that data is placed in +cache. Instructions like INVD, WBINVD, CLFLUSH, etc. can still evict +“locked” data from cache. Power management C-states may shrink or +power off cache. Deeper C-states will automatically be restricted on +pseudo-locked region creation. + +It is required that an application using a pseudo-locked region runs +with affinity to the cores (or a subset of the cores) associated +with the cache on which the pseudo-locked region resides. A sanity check +within the code will not allow an application to map pseudo-locked memory +unless it runs with affinity to cores associated with the cache on which the +pseudo-locked region resides. The sanity check is only done during the +initial mmap() handling, there is no enforcement afterwards and the +application self needs to ensure it remains affine to the correct cores. + +Pseudo-locking is accomplished in two stages: +1) During the first stage the system administrator allocates a portion + of cache that should be dedicated to pseudo-locking. At this time an + equivalent portion of memory is allocated, loaded into allocated + cache portion, and exposed as a character device. +2) During the second stage a user-space application maps (mmap()) the + pseudo-locked memory into its address space. + +Cache Pseudo-Locking Interface +------------------------------ +A pseudo-locked region is created using the resctrl interface as follows: + +1) Create a new resource group by creating a new directory in /sys/fs/resctrl. +2) Change the new resource group's mode to "pseudo-locksetup" by writing + "pseudo-locksetup" to the "mode" file. +3) Write the schemata of the pseudo-locked region to the "schemata" file. All + bits within the schemata should be "unused" according to the "bit_usage" + file. + +On successful pseudo-locked region creation the "mode" file will contain +"pseudo-locked" and a new character device with the same name as the resource +group will exist in /dev/pseudo_lock. This character device can be mmap()'ed +by user space in order to obtain access to the pseudo-locked memory region. + +An example of cache pseudo-locked region creation and usage can be found below. + +Cache Pseudo-Locking Debugging Interface +--------------------------------------- +The pseudo-locking debugging interface is enabled by default (if +CONFIG_DEBUG_FS is enabled) and can be found in /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl. + +There is no explicit way for the kernel to test if a provided memory +location is present in the cache. The pseudo-locking debugging interface uses +the tracing infrastructure to provide two ways to measure cache residency of +the pseudo-locked region: +1) Memory access latency using the pseudo_lock_mem_latency tracepoint. Data + from these measurements are best visualized using a hist trigger (see + example below). In this test the pseudo-locked region is traversed at + a stride of 32 bytes while hardware prefetchers and preemption + are disabled. This also provides a substitute visualization of cache + hits and misses. +2) Cache hit and miss measurements using model specific precision counters if + available. Depending on the levels of cache on the system the pseudo_lock_l2 + and pseudo_lock_l3 tracepoints are available. + WARNING: triggering this measurement uses from two (for just L2 + measurements) to four (for L2 and L3 measurements) precision counters on + the system, if any other measurements are in progress the counters and + their corresponding event registers will be clobbered. + +When a pseudo-locked region is created a new debugfs directory is created for +it in debugfs as /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/<newdir>. A single +write-only file, pseudo_lock_measure, is present in this directory. The +measurement on the pseudo-locked region depends on the number, 1 or 2, +written to this debugfs file. Since the measurements are recorded with the +tracing infrastructure the relevant tracepoints need to be enabled before the +measurement is triggered. + +Example of latency debugging interface: +In this example a pseudo-locked region named "newlock" was created. Here is +how we can measure the latency in cycles of reading from this region and +visualize this data with a histogram that is available if CONFIG_HIST_TRIGGERS +is set: +# :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace +# echo 'hist:keys=latency' > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/trigger +# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable +# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure +# echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/enable +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_mem_latency/hist + +# event histogram +# +# trigger info: hist:keys=latency:vals=hitcount:sort=hitcount:size=2048 [active] +# + +{ latency: 456 } hitcount: 1 +{ latency: 50 } hitcount: 83 +{ latency: 36 } hitcount: 96 +{ latency: 44 } hitcount: 174 +{ latency: 48 } hitcount: 195 +{ latency: 46 } hitcount: 262 +{ latency: 42 } hitcount: 693 +{ latency: 40 } hitcount: 3204 +{ latency: 38 } hitcount: 3484 + +Totals: + Hits: 8192 + Entries: 9 + Dropped: 0 + +Example of cache hits/misses debugging: +In this example a pseudo-locked region named "newlock" was created on the L2 +cache of a platform. Here is how we can obtain details of the cache hits +and misses using the platform's precision counters. + +# :> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace +# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable +# echo 2 > /sys/kernel/debug/resctrl/newlock/pseudo_lock_measure +# echo 0 > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/resctrl/pseudo_lock_l2/enable +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace + +# tracer: nop +# +# _-----=> irqs-off +# / _----=> need-resched +# | / _---=> hardirq/softirq +# || / _--=> preempt-depth +# ||| / delay +# TASK-PID CPU# |||| TIMESTAMP FUNCTION +# | | | |||| | | + pseudo_lock_mea-1672 [002] .... 3132.860500: pseudo_lock_l2: hits=4097 miss=0 + + Examples for RDT allocation usage: Example 1 @@ -502,7 +711,172 @@ siblings and only the real time threads are scheduled on the cores 4-7. # echo F0 > p0/cpus -4) Locking between applications +Example 4 +--------- + +The resource groups in previous examples were all in the default "shareable" +mode allowing sharing of their cache allocations. If one resource group +configures a cache allocation then nothing prevents another resource group +to overlap with that allocation. + +In this example a new exclusive resource group will be created on a L2 CAT +system with two L2 cache instances that can be configured with an 8-bit +capacity bitmask. The new exclusive resource group will be configured to use +25% of each cache instance. + +# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/ +# cd /sys/fs/resctrl + +First, we observe that the default group is configured to allocate to all L2 +cache: + +# cat schemata +L2:0=ff;1=ff + +We could attempt to create the new resource group at this point, but it will +fail because of the overlap with the schemata of the default group: +# mkdir p0 +# echo 'L2:0=0x3;1=0x3' > p0/schemata +# cat p0/mode +shareable +# echo exclusive > p0/mode +-sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument +# cat info/last_cmd_status +schemata overlaps + +To ensure that there is no overlap with another resource group the default +resource group's schemata has to change, making it possible for the new +resource group to become exclusive. +# echo 'L2:0=0xfc;1=0xfc' > schemata +# echo exclusive > p0/mode +# grep . p0/* +p0/cpus:0 +p0/mode:exclusive +p0/schemata:L2:0=03;1=03 +p0/size:L2:0=262144;1=262144 + +A new resource group will on creation not overlap with an exclusive resource +group: +# mkdir p1 +# grep . p1/* +p1/cpus:0 +p1/mode:shareable +p1/schemata:L2:0=fc;1=fc +p1/size:L2:0=786432;1=786432 + +The bit_usage will reflect how the cache is used: +# cat info/L2/bit_usage +0=SSSSSSEE;1=SSSSSSEE + +A resource group cannot be forced to overlap with an exclusive resource group: +# echo 'L2:0=0x1;1=0x1' > p1/schemata +-sh: echo: write error: Invalid argument +# cat info/last_cmd_status +overlaps with exclusive group + +Example of Cache Pseudo-Locking +------------------------------- +Lock portion of L2 cache from cache id 1 using CBM 0x3. Pseudo-locked +region is exposed at /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock that can be provided to +application for argument to mmap(). + +# mount -t resctrl resctrl /sys/fs/resctrl/ +# cd /sys/fs/resctrl + +Ensure that there are bits available that can be pseudo-locked, since only +unused bits can be pseudo-locked the bits to be pseudo-locked needs to be +removed from the default resource group's schemata: +# cat info/L2/bit_usage +0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSSS +# echo 'L2:1=0xfc' > schemata +# cat info/L2/bit_usage +0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSS00 + +Create a new resource group that will be associated with the pseudo-locked +region, indicate that it will be used for a pseudo-locked region, and +configure the requested pseudo-locked region capacity bitmask: + +# mkdir newlock +# echo pseudo-locksetup > newlock/mode +# echo 'L2:1=0x3' > newlock/schemata + +On success the resource group's mode will change to pseudo-locked, the +bit_usage will reflect the pseudo-locked region, and the character device +exposing the pseudo-locked region will exist: + +# cat newlock/mode +pseudo-locked +# cat info/L2/bit_usage +0=SSSSSSSS;1=SSSSSSPP +# ls -l /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock +crw------- 1 root root 243, 0 Apr 3 05:01 /dev/pseudo_lock/newlock + +/* + * Example code to access one page of pseudo-locked cache region + * from user space. + */ +#define _GNU_SOURCE +#include <fcntl.h> +#include <sched.h> +#include <stdio.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <unistd.h> +#include <sys/mman.h> + +/* + * It is required that the application runs with affinity to only + * cores associated with the pseudo-locked region. Here the cpu + * is hardcoded for convenience of example. + */ +static int cpuid = 2; + +int main(int argc, char *argv[]) +{ + cpu_set_t cpuset; + long page_size; + void *mapping; + int dev_fd; + int ret; + + page_size = sysconf(_SC_PAGESIZE); + + CPU_ZERO(&cpuset); + CPU_SET(cpuid, &cpuset); + ret = sched_setaffinity(0, sizeof(cpuset), &cpuset); + if (ret < 0) { + perror("sched_setaffinity"); + exit(EXIT_FAILURE); + } + + dev_fd = open("/dev/pseudo_lock/newlock", O_RDWR); + if (dev_fd < 0) { + perror("open"); + exit(EXIT_FAILURE); + } + + mapping = mmap(0, page_size, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, + dev_fd, 0); + if (mapping == MAP_FAILED) { + perror("mmap"); + close(dev_fd); + exit(EXIT_FAILURE); + } + + /* Application interacts with pseudo-locked memory @mapping */ + + ret = munmap(mapping, page_size); + if (ret < 0) { + perror("munmap"); + close(dev_fd); + exit(EXIT_FAILURE); + } + + close(dev_fd); + exit(EXIT_SUCCESS); +} + +Locking between applications +---------------------------- Certain operations on the resctrl filesystem, composed of read/writes to/from multiple files, must be atomic. @@ -510,7 +884,7 @@ to/from multiple files, must be atomic. As an example, the allocation of an exclusive reservation of L3 cache involves: - 1. Read the cbmmasks from each directory + 1. Read the cbmmasks from each directory or the per-resource "bit_usage" 2. Find a contiguous set of bits in the global CBM bitmask that is clear in any of the directory cbmmasks 3. Create a new directory diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index 8d109ef67ab6..ad6d2a80cf05 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -92,9 +92,7 @@ APICs Timing notsc - Don't use the CPU time stamp counter to read the wall time. - This can be used to work around timing problems on multiprocessor systems - with not properly synchronized CPUs. + Deprecated, use tsc=unstable instead. nohpet Don't use the HPET timer. @@ -156,6 +154,10 @@ NUMA If given as an integer, fills all system RAM with N fake nodes interleaved over physical nodes. + numa=fake=<N>U + If given as an integer followed by 'U', it will divide each + physical node into N emulated nodes. + ACPI acpi=off Don't enable ACPI |
